électroménagers Cuisinières NE599N1PBSR - Cuisinière électrique FlexDuo de 5,9 pi³, acier inoxydable NE599N1PBSR/AC - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels- Samsung SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM  - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung

- Revenir à l'accueil

ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->

 

 

 

NE599N1PBSR/AC

Description

DATE DE SORTIE Décroissant

Langue

Dossier Décroissant

Manuel de l'utilisateur 2013.06.10 ENGLISH, FRENCH 27.49 MB
Manuel de l'utilisateur Téléchargement
Installation Guide(Installation manual) 2013.03.18 ENGLISH, FRENCH 4.09 MB
Installation Guide(Installation manual) Téléchargement

 

Recherche par catégories :

Imprimantes       Téléphones

      GSM            Informatique

Ordinateurs            Galaxy

    Photo                  TV  

Electroménager 

Autres Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 13-Jun-2013 07:25  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 13-Jun-2013 07:25  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD..> 13-Jun-2013 07:24  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camescopes-P..> 13-Jun-2013 07:24  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephones-C..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-IT-producten..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu..> 13-Jun-2013 07:22  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Sma..> 13-Jun-2013 07:22  3.0M

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Jun-2013 08:19  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-Office-LC..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Printer-Mult..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 12-Jun-2013 08:16  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 12-Jun-2013 08:16  2.8M 

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Imprim..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Teleph..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-GSM-Ma..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Inform..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Ordina..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Galaxy..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Electr..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-Photo-..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Liste-TV-Man..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Liste-Produits-Manue..> 11-Jun-2013 09:51  511K  

[TXT]

 Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 11-Jun-2013 09:51  379K 

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3170FN-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3170FN-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3175FW-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FW-Manuels-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/19-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-S19A300N-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/27-Serie7-Moniteur-station-d-accueil-C27A750-C27A750X-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/40-UE40D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/46-LE46D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE46D550K1W-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/CLX-3185FW.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyAceGT-S5830.htm

/SAMSUNG/Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxySIIGT-I9100.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyTab10.1GT-P7500M16.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyTab8.9GT-P7310M16.htm

/SAMSUNG/GalaxyYGT-S5360.htm

/SAMSUNG/Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/index.html

/SAMSUNG/LE32C350LE32C350D1W.htm

/SAMSUNG/LE40C630LE40C630K1W.htm

/SAMSUNG/LE55C650-LE55C650L1W-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Liste-Manuels-Utilisateur-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Liste-Produits-Manuels-Utilisateur-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4010WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4010NW-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-Galaxy-Mini-2-GT-S6500-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-Galaxy-Y-GT-S5360-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-GT-B5510-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-GT-B7300-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-UE46ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES7000S-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-noir-Open-market-GT-I9100.htm

/SAMSUNG/Micro-chaine-MM-D330DWXZF-serie-3-MM-D330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/MM-C330D.htm

/SAMSUNG/MM-D330D.htm

/SAMSUNG/N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/N150-NP-N150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/RSH5UEPN.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-Compact-Performant-WB700-SAMSUNG-WB700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-18-XTDVBEUE-SWE-0327.pdf-Suede-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-20120405165711377-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-20-XTDVBEUE-NOR-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-2243QW-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-22-LE22D450WXZF-serie-4-Full-HD-LCD-TV-LE22D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%82%D0%BE%D1%80-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%B8-3-T24B30-T24B301EW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-\xd0\x9c\xd0\xbe\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd1\x82\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80-\xd1\x81\xd0\xb5\xd1\x80\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb8-3-T24B30-T24B301EW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-305U1A-A02-NP305U1A-A02HK-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-320MXN-3-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-32-UE32D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE32D4000NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400EXN-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400TS-3-400TS-3-SIM-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400TS-3D-400TS-3D-SIM-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400UXN-3-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400UXN-3-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-LE40D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE40D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE40ES6565U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-460UT-B-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6535-UE46ES6535U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-01-XTDVBEUE-ENG-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-19-XTDVBEUE-DAN-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Danemark-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_FIN-0424.pdf-Finlande-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_NOR-0424.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_SWE-0424.pdf-Suede-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-21-XTDVBEUE-FIN-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Finlande-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-Danemark-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES7005-UE46ES7005U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-UE46D7000WXZF-serie-7

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E555-PS51E555D1K-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E8005-PS51E8005GU-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-55-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6805-UE55ES6805U-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-708SC-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-740SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-821SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-910MP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-940SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-941SC-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Affichage-Dynamique-Murs-d-images-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareil-photo-numerique-Samsung-ES90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-menagers-La-Plaque-Chauffante-Pensez-intelligemment-vivez-simplement-GN641FFXD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-mobiles-Smartphone-Galaxy-S4-I9505-Android-Impression-GT-I9505-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-mobiles-Smartphone-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQ09UGBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-BN68-04109G-00L05-0228.pdf-LED-TV-Serie-6-user-manual-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ES90-14.2MP-Digital-Camera-FIND-A-PRODUCT-SAMSUNG-ES90-English-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-et-Camcorder-NX-NX11-Appareil-photo-compact-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-et-Camcorder-NX-NX5-Appareil-photo-compact-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camescopes-Photo-Compacts-numeriques-Samsung-SMART-Kompaktkamera-WB800F-SAMSUNG-WB800F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-AT-T-SGH-I547-Samsung-Galaxy-Rugby-Pro-AT-T-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-AT-T-SGH-I577-Samsung-Galaxy-Exhilarate-Android-Smartphone-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-Sprint-SPH-L300-Samsung-Galaxy-Victory-4G-LTE-Sprint-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-Verizon-Wireless-SCH-I405-Samsung-Stratosphere-a-Galaxy-S-phone-Black-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-VIEW-ALL-SPH-M930-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CLP-367W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cuisson-Four-Four-compact-Twin-30-L-FQV113T002-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-SEC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA-E550-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electrom%C3%A9nager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-1-voie-MH026FSEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-4-voies-MH035FMEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH020FNEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FEEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FJEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FJEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FWEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH060FXEA3A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH068FXEA4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH18AP2X-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ09UGFN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12TSBN.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12UGBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18UGAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09KBBN.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09PSBX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09UGAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12KBAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12NSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PWAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18KBAX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18PSBX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18UGAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-User-Manuals-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-SH24TA6D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-Refrigerateur-Combine-RB29FEJNDWW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-RL34HGMG-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT63VBPN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Four-Four-compact-Twin-30-L-FQV113T002-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lavage-Lave-Linge-WF70F5E3U4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF1702NHWG-YLE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF70F5E3U4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0R-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-Table-induction-2-zones-7-2-KW-CTN364N006-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-Table-induction-4-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN464FB01-CTN464FB01-XEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXC4H140EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXTJH036EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXWNH022EE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH160PHXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH200WHXES-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS0351DXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS071SDXEA-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-RVXMHF050EA-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-SR8750-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC86H0-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Cuisinieres-NE595R0ABBB-Cuisiniere-electrique-de-5-9-pi-noir-NE595R0ABBB-AC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Cuisinieres-NE595R0ABSR-AC-Cuisiniere-a-convection-de-5-9-pi-acier-inoxydable-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sechoir-seche-linge-condensation-8kg-SDC3C801-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox%20RSH5TERS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electrom-nager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Entro-SPH-m350-SPH-M350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-NEXUS-SC-04D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SamsungGalaxyNoteGT-N7000.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SamsungGalaxySGT-I9000.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-GT-I9100-SINGAPOUR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-III-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-III-Pub-TV.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-noir-Open-market-Manuels-Samsung.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-Plus-blanc-Orange-GT-I9001-manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open%20market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10.1v-P7100-Android-GT-P7100-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-10-1-LTE-SC-01D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10-1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-7.0-Plus-SC-02D-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7-0-Wi-Fi-GT-P3110-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-SC-01C-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-orange-Open-market-GT-S5690-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Y-DUOS-GT-S6102-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro-Duos-GT-B5512-RUSSE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-Champ-Duos-E2652-GT-E2652W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E1050-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E1180-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E2202GT-E2202-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E2202GT-E2202-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Gio-S5660-Android-GT-S5660-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Note-N7000-AndroidGT-N7000-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Pocket-S5300-Android-GT-S5300-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S4-I9505-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-Advance-i9070-Android-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-SIII-4G-i9305-AndroidGT-I9305-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-II-Plus-I9105-Android-GT-I9105P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-Plus-i9001-Android-GT-I9001-M8-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Wave-Y-S5380-Bada-GT-S5380D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-N8000-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5830_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110825_Screen-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Laser-couleur-CLP-365W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Laser-monochrome-ML-2955ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Multifonctions-couleurCLX-9251NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-43-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-multifonction-noir-et-blanc-SCX-6545N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-52-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-noir-et-blanc-ML-5510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-couleur-multifonctions-A3-35-ppm-A3-imprimante-laser-multifonction-couleur-CLX-9352NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-couleur-multifonctions-A3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-43-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-multifonction-noir-et-blanc-SCX-6545NX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Copieurs-A3-Multifonctions-CLX-9201NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Copieurs-A4-A3-Copieur-monochrome-SCX-6555N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-680ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-775ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Monochrome-ML-6510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Multifonctions-Laser-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-4705ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique%20Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-620ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-775ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-16ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1630-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-16ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1660-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-18ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1865-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-18ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1865W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2545-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3750ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-4510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-Monochrome-SL-M2825ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2540R-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-6510ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimantes-Photos-SPP-2040-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Inkjet-Imprimante-jet-d-encre-CJX-1050W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD%20770TFT-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-151P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-152B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-170T-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-191T-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-226BW-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-226BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-S23A350H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-460DR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-B1930N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2231-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2240W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C27B750X-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19B350N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C200NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C450MR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-InformatiqueMoniteur-LCD-S19C450MW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22A300H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22C300H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650S-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B970D-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27C650D-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T22B300-T22B300EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T23A750-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T24B300-T24B300EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T27B750EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteurs-moniteur-LCD-32-et-plus-ME40B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3170FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3175FN-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3175FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-A3-A4-couleur-CLX-9352NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-Couleur-A4-CLX-8650ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-4195FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-6260ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-20ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4521F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-33ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-5835FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Copieur-monochrome-SCX-6555N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Fax-monochrome-SF-760P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-4833FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-Monochrome-SL-M2875FD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SL-M2875FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Mutifonction-Monochrome-SL-M2875ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4824FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4828FN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-5637FR-SCX-5637FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-5737FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8240NA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP500A2D-S02FR-2-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie%209-900X1A-NP900X1A-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1AXE-700T1A-A02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-1-Serie-5-Chromebook-XE500C21-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S04FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5ANP-300E5A-S06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300V5A-NP300V5A-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S06FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S07FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-ATIV-Smart-PC-Pro-XE700T1C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0CFR.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0GFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-S08FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T06FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S0DFR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AI-NP300E7A-A04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300V3AH-NP300V3A-S02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-T01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S07FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP370R5E-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP400B5BI-NP400B5B-AG3FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP400B5B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-A05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S03FR.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3C-NP900X3C-A03FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3D-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4B-NP900X4B-A01FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-P500NP-P500-FA01DE-Open-market-GT-C3300K-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q320E-NP-Q320-AS02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R510%20NP-R510-XA02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610NP-R610-AS03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-FS01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RV510I-NP-RV510-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-France-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NQ20-NQ20RP3GH8-SEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FRManuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Samsung-Chromebook-XE303C12-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S0AFR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5C-NP300E5C-T02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-NP370R5E-A02FR-NP370R5E-A02FR-Logiciels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-4-NP400B2B-A03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T03FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X3C-A05FR-NP900X3C-A05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A04FR.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A05FR-NP900X3D-A05FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X4D-A03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-SF310-NP-SF310-S01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500C21-XE500C21-AZ2FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-H02FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-A04FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE700T1A-XE700T1A-HF1FR-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Solutions-d-impression-Multifonctions-laser-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-3300-Version-imprimable-CLX-3300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-N150Plus-NP-N150P-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-N150Plus-NP-N150P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NC110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-N140-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-IT-producten-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-35-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-noir-et-blanc-ML-3710D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-IT-producten-Ordinateurs-portables-Samsung-Series-9-NP900X3C-A01-NP900X3C-A01BE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1200-Noir-HM1200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LA46C550J1F-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-lcd_business_q2.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE19C350-LE19C350D1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE22C452C4H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE26B450-LE26B450C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32A466-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32A568-LE32A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32B450C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40A577P2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE46C630-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE52A676-LE52A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-Player-50-Blanc-8Go-YP-G50CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Livres-blancs.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Livres-blancs-Technologie-ReCP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-M_YUKON_2K_WD175ARYKSU_DC68-02631L-05-120810.pdf-SEC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME65B-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Others-HM3700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Smart-Phone-GT-I9505-Suisse-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Tablet-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Smartphone-Samsung-Galaxy-S4-Impression-GT-I9505-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Telephone-a-fonction-Rugby-II-de-Samsung-SGH-a847M-SGH-A847M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Telephone-Intelligent-Galaxy-Q-de-Samsung-SGH-T589R-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Moniteur-grande-taille-Ecrans-grand-format-UD55A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-T01FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300E5ZI-NP300E5Z-A09MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300V5AH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP530U3C-A01ES-NP530U3C-A01ES-Espagnol-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-pascal_owners_manual.pdf-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-OFFICE-Coree-NT-RF711NT-RF711-PS02G-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-couleur-CLX-3305FW-Canada-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405FW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-4727FD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope%20-Appareils-photo-Gamme-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-Tactile-8.9-cm-3-5-Compact-Performant-WB210-SAMSUNG-WB210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Appareils-photo-Gamme-Compact-Samsung-ST66-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-12-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-essentiel-Samsung-ES80-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-Ecran-avant-LCD-1-5-compact-double-ecran-Samsung-PL120-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-compact-style-Samsung-PL210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-Style-Samsung-ST77s.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-Style-Samsung-ST90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-Compact-Performant-WB700-SAMSUNG-WB700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-pivotant-LCD-Tactile-3-compact-Samsung-MultiView-MV800-SAMSUNG-MV800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-SMART-DV300F-SAMSUNG-DV300F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ES60-SAMSUNG-ES60.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-NV24HD-SAMSUNG-NV24-HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL170-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL70-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-DV150F-SAMSUNG-DV150F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-EX2F-SAMSUNG-EX2F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-CAMERA-ST200F-SAMSUNG-ST200F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-WB250F-SAMSUNG-WB250F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST560-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST65-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST95-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-WB210-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-WB560-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST45-SAMSUNG-ST45-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-1-8-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F50SMX-F50BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-Tactile-rotatif-3-7-2-cm-Camescope-HD-Samsung-Q10HMX-Q10PP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-Camera-HD-HMX-Q200BP-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F800BP-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F80BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F90WP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-Samsung-SMART-Camcorder-QF30-HMX-QF30WP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Appareil-photo-numerique-NX-NX-210-Afrique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX10-3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX10-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX5-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX11-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-periph%C3%A9riques-Mini-ordinateur-portable-N102-NP-N102-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Couleur-Laser-CLP-680ND-Colour-Laser-Printer-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Couleur-Laser-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-620ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-LCD-Moniteur-LED-3D-serie-9-S27A950D-de-27-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-ML-1865W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-multifunction-laser-ML-3750ND-ML-3750ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300E5V-NP300E5V-A01MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300E5V-NP300E5V-A08MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5AH-NP300V5A-S03MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5AI-NP300V5A-A03MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5A-S0CZA-Superbe-encadrement-ultrafin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U3BI-NP530U3B-A01ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U4C-de-la-serie-5-NP530U4C-A03ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U4C-S04ZA-serie-5-de-Samsung-NP530U4C-S04ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Ordinateur-portable-serie-9-NP900X3C-A02ZA-de-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-5-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-H01ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-9-NP900X3C-Notebook-NP900X3C-A03ZA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-XE700T1A-A01ZA-The-Freedom-of-true-mob.-comp.-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Presentation-du-Samsung-GALAXY-S-4-Video.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Printers-Multifunction-Mono-Laser-Printer-ML-5010ND-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS42C450-PS42C450B1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50A566-PS50A566S2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50C450-PS50C450B1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50C535-PS50C535C1W-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS51D490A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS51E530-ZF-PLASMA-51-FULL-HD%20-PS51E530A3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RE-C21VMS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S23A550H-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCH-W999-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-4x28-Series-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHV-E210S-S-III-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHV-E300L-Coree-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHW-M220L-Coree-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S-II-HDSHV-E120S-Coree-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SNE-60K_UM_Embedded_KOR_100526-SEC-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-MZ-7TD120-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-128Go-MZ-7PD128-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-256Go-MZ-7PD256-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-512GoMZ-7PD512-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T%C3%A9l%C3%A9phone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T22B300EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T240-JP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T260-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Galaxy-Camera-Samsung-GALAXY-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-C3750.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1130-B.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2220.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2550D.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5620.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B5722-noir-Open-marketGT-B5722-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Blue-Earth-bleu-Open-market-GT-S7550-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3050-noir-Virgin-Mobile-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1050-noir-Open-market-GT-E1050-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1310-NRJ-Mobile-GT-E1310B.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2330-noir-Open-market-GT-E2330B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Jetnoir-Open-market-GT-S8000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-5-noir-Open-market-GT-S5560-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Light-noir-Open-market-GT-C3510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-mini-noir-Open-market-GT-C3300K-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Pixon-noir-Open-market-GT-M8800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-2-noir-Open-market-GT-S5620-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-noir-Open-market-GT-S5600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Ultra-rouge-open-market-GT-S8300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3500-noir-Open-market-GT-S3500-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5233W-GT-S5233W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-C180-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E570-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E840-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-F480G.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-N620-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-R200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-U100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Mobiles-Style-Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Mains-Libres-Bluetooth-HF1000-BHF1000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1700-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Ace-Plus-GT-S7500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-SIII-mini-GT-I8190-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GALAXY-Y-ProGT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I8190-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9003-RM4-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-Afrique-du-nord-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5369-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5380-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5570-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5750E-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-GALAXY-Camera%20EK-GC100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Express-GT-I8730-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Nexus-noir-Open-market-GT-I9250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-GT-N7000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S4GT-I9505-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-IIIGT-I9300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-I9500-GT-I9500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-S6312-GT-S6312-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-marketGT-S5330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-723-gris-Open-marketGT-S7230E-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Galaxy-Tab-GT-P1000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-3-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7500-M32-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7510-M16-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablettes-Tablettes-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablettes-Tablettes-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-Wi-Fi-Version-imprimable-GT-P3110-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Telephone-coulissant-Samsung-S5200-bleu-SFRGT-S5200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephones-Cellulaires-telephones-intelligents-Samsung-Galaxy-Discover-Version-imprimable-SGH-S730M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A465C1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A676-PS50A676T1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD-Series-5-550-32inch-LE32D550-LE32D550K1W-Belgique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid%C3%A9o-Video-projecteur-SP-P310ME-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-32-UE32D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED%20TV-UE40D6200TS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6300WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6300SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D8000FS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-User-Manuals-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-64-PS64D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS64D8000FS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LED-Smart-TV-LED-3D-UA65ES8000R-serie-8-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LED-UA60D8000YR-Series-8-Smart-3D-LED-TV-UA60D8000YR-Afrique-Fr.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS43D490A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C490-PS50C490B3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C6970-PS50C6970YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C7000YW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS64E8000-ZF-PLASMA-64-SMART-INTERACTION-3DPS64E8000GS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3D-UE32ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D8000YQ-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40EH6030W-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6560S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6710S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES7000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F6500-TV-LED-40-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F6500SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F7000-TV-LED-40-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F7000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F8000-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F8000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6200TS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6500VH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6570WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6540S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6560S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6570S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46F6510-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE46F6510SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46F8000-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE46F8000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6100W-AQV09PSBN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6530S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55F8000-TV-LED-55-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE55F8000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65F6400-TV-LED-65-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE65F6400AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH877-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-SH897-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D5550WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-3DHT-D5550-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E4550-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E5200-ZF-Home-Cinema-2.1-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-ES4200-ZFHT-ES4200-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-F6550W-ZF-Home-Cinema-5.1-Blu-Ray-3D-Smart-Hub-HT-F6550W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D5000WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-3DHT-D5000-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-C5300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E5300-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Youtube-AllShare-BD-E5300-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-ES6000-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-Ray-3D-SMART%20HUB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-F8500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-F8900-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-ray-3D-avec-disque-dur-Double-Tuner-Wi-Fi-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P4600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-DVD-DVD-D530WXZF-serie-5-DVD-D530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Baladeur-MP3-Clip-F3-Noir-2GoYP-F3QB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-5.0-Blanc-8G-YP-G70CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1CW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1EW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GS1CW-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-Z5FQW-ELS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-C330D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E330D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-ARC-AUX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E430D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-Double-Dock-USB-Bluetooth-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-ZB7-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-ZB7-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-46-Moniteur-LED-UE46A-mur-d-images-bord-fin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-UD55A-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TS190W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Televiseurs-TV-2013-SMART-LED-TV-46-UE46F7000-Version-imprimable-UE46F7000SL-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-CW29Z504N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-WS32V54N-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD%20-LE22B450-LE22B450C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-32-LE32D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE32D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE19B450C4H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22A455C1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22B650-LE22B650T6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C430C4W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A456C2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A466-LE26A466C2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26B350F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450-LE26C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C452C4H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C457C6H-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A456-LE32A456C2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A465-LE32A465C1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A577P2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B651-LE32B651T3P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C350D1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450-LE32C450E1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D450G1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32R86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32S86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32T51B-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A457C1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A626-LE37A626A3M-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B530-LE37B530P7W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B653T5P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530-LE37C530F1W.manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A457C1D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A536T1F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A856-LE40A856S1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651-LE40B651T3W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C630-LE40C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C650-LE46C650L1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE22D5000NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22ES5400WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-27-UE27D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE27D5000NW-2-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE32D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-40-UE40D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE40D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-46-UE46D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG32EA590LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-LE40A796-LE40A796R2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE19C4000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22C4010PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5000NH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5000-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TV-UE22ES5000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5410-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TVUE22ES5410W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22F5000-TV-LED-22-Full-HD-UE22F5000AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-2-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C5100-UE32C5100QF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6000-UE32C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6700-UE32C6700US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C8700XS-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D4003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuals-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32F4000-TV-LED-32-HDTV-UE32F4000AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32F5300-TV-LED-32-Full-HD-Smart-TV-UE32F5300AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37C6000-UE37C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE39EH5003W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B7000-UE40B7000WW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6000RH-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6900VS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5720RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7020WW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C5100QW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6000-UE46C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TVUE46ES5500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46F5500-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-UE46F5500AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE55C6000-UE55C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE55C6700-UE55C6700US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE60EH6000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-43-PS43D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-PDP-TVPS43D450A2W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A426-PS42A426C1M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A456-PS42A456P2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C430-PS42C430A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C96HD-PS-42C96HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43E450-ZF-PLASMA-43-HD-TV-PS43E450A1W-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43F4500-TV-Plasma-43-HD-TV-PS43F4500AW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A466-PS50A466P2M-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B550-PS50B550T4W-manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Francais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50Q96HD-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS51E450-ZF-PLASMA-51-HD-TVPS51E450A1W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS58B680-PS58B680T6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS59D530A5W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS63B680-PS63B680T6W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E750-ZF-Double-Dock-Pre-ampli-a-lampes-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUX-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-HW-F450-ZF-Barre-de-son-2.1-Bluetooth-SoundShare-HW-F450-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E750-Afrique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE40B7000WW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE32D5000-UE32D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE40D5000-UE40D5000PW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE40D5700-UE40D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TVs-LED-TV-UN55ES8000F-55-Class-54.6-Diag-LED-8000-Series-Smart-TV-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Video-3D-Televiseur-DEL-de-75-po-et-de-serie-7100-2013-UN75F7100AF-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UA32ES5500-UA32ES5500R-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UD22B-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE19D4003BW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE26EH4500-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32D6530WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE37C5100QW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40B6050-UE40B6050VW-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40C6700-UE40C6700US-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-UE40ES5500W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE40ES7000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE40ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C6805-UE46C6805US-Norvege-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C8700XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46D5720RS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46D6530WS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46S870XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC331LLDC6S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC331LLMA6S-Japon-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC-UBL916-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Video-tutorielle-4G-Video.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-723-gris-Open-market-GT-S7230E-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-WEP480-CN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ZS31FASAB1S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S03FR-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/SGH-F490.htm

/SAMSUNG/T23A550T23A550.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE40D6500ZFUE40D6500VS.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/UE60ES6100WXZF-UE60ES6100W-Samsung-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Wave575GT-S5750E.htm

/SAMSUNG/WaveIIGT-S8530.htm

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-IT-producten..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:37  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:37  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-Wirele..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53  1.5M 

Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels

Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%20Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-Samsung-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Afrique-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung%2DGT%2DP6200%2DManuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0%20%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-46-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE46EH5307-UE46EH5307K-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0%20-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-6-Full-HD-UE40C6000R-UE40C6000RW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-LE40C530F1-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LE32B450C4W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%96%d0%9a-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80%d1%8b-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-51-c%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-PS51E530-PS51E530A3W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-43-c%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-PS43E450PS43E450A1W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-42-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-PS42C431A2-PS42C431A2W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-PS42A410C3-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-51-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-PS51D8000F-PS51D8000FS-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-6-SMART-TV-3D-Full-HD-LED-UE40ES6100-UE40ES6100W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-%d0%a2%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-40-%d1%81%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-6-SMART-TV-3D-Full-HD-LED-UE40ES6100-UE40ES6100W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-55-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE55ES8007-UE55ES8007U-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-%d0%a2%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-55-%d1%81%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE55ES8007-UE55ES8007U-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-65-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-8-SMART-TV-3D-Full-HD-LED-UE65ES8007-UE65ES8007U-Russe--Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F%206-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-UE40D6100S-UE40D6100SW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-7-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-UE40D7000L-UE40D7000LS-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-LED-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-46-%d0%a1%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-UE46D8000Y-UE46D8000YS-Russe--Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-UA40C7000WR-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UA40C7000WR-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UA55D6600WR-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UE40ES7500S-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UE46D7000LS-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-46-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE46EH5300-UE46EH5300W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE40ES5537-UE40ES5537K-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-LED-UE40EH5047-UE40EH5047K-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE40EH5307-UE40EH5307K-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-26-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-LED-UE26EH4000-UE26EH4000W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-32-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-LED-UE32EH5040-UE32EH5040W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-LED-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80%d1%8b-%d0%a2%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-40-%d1%81%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE40EH5307-UE40EH5307K-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-37-FULL-HD-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%B8-5-UE37EH5007K-UE37EH5007K-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-32-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-UE32C5000Q-UE32C5000QW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-32-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-UE32C4000P-UE32C4000PW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-LED-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80%d1%8b-UA40C5000QR-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-UE32D5000PW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-UE46EH5000W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-UE55B7000WW-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%91%D1%8B%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D1%8F-%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9D%D0%B0%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D0%BE%D0%B5-%D0%BA%D1%80%D0%B5%D0%BF%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5-%D0%9D%D0%B0%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D0%B0%D1%8F-%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BB%D0%B8%D1%82-%D1%81%D0%B8%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BC%D0%B0-%D0%A1%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B4%D0%B0%D1%80%D1%82-AQ07RLAQ07RLN-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-C3510-TVGT-C3510T-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-%D0%A1%D0%BC%D0%B0%D1%80%D1%82%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-GT-S5830I-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-%D0%A1%D0%BC%D0%B0%D1%80%D1%82%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-Samsung-S6012-GT-S5830I-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-\xd0\x90\xd1\x83\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb8\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x92\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x96\xd0\x9a-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80\xd1\x8b-LE32B450C4W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-\xd0\x90\xd1\x83\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb8\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x92\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x96\xd0\x9a-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80\xd1\x8b-\xd0\x96\xd0\x9a-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80-40-\xd0\xa1\xd0\xb5\xd1\x80\xd0\xb8\xd1\x8f-5-Full-HD-LE40C530F1-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm

/SAMSUNG/Samsung-\xd0\x90\xd1\x83\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb8\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x92\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-LED-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80\xd1\x8b-UA40C5000QR-Russe-Manuels.htm

PRODUITS SAMSUNG :
Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide
Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes
Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360°
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung
Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir
Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800
G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100
Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet
Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir
Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB
Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes
Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique)
Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire
Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir
Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note
Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA
QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100
QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E6100 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung BD-ES5000
Samsung BD-ES6000 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170
Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung ES90 Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung EX1
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet
Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB
Samsung HMX-F80 Noir
Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir
Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir
Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-E5530 3D
Samsung HT-ES4200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D
Samsung HT-ES8200 3D
Samsung HW-E350
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE32E420
Samsung LE40D503
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MM-E320
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED
Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED
Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS51E530
Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display
Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung ST66 Noir
Samsung ST77 Blanc
Samsung ST77 Noir
Samsung ST77 Rouge
Samsung ST77 Violet
Samsung ST88 Noir
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE37ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung Wave 575
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB690 Noir
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go
T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York
Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune
Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir
We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0
We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0
Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Imprimante-l..> 23-Jul-2012 21:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 24-Jul-2012 14:00  6.0M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 24-Jul-2012 13:51  5.4M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 23-Jul-2012 21:57  4.3M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 24-Jul-2012 13:55  6.0M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 23-Jul-2012 21:39  3.8M  

[TXT]

 16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 23-Jul-2012 21:44  4.3M  

[TXT]

 17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-..> 23-Jul-2012 18:59  3.9M  

[TXT]

 19-Serie-3-Moniteur-..> 29-Jul-2012 10:18  4.7M  

[TXT]

 20ppm-Multifonction-..> 24-Jul-2012 14:04  6.0M  

[TXT]

 24ppm-Multifonction-..> 24-Jul-2012 14:08  6.5M  

[TXT]

 27-Serie7-Moniteur-s..> 29-Jul-2012 10:23  4.8M  

[TXT]

 32-LE32D450WXZF-seri..> 24-Jul-2012 16:22  5.7M  

[TXT]

 32-UE32D6200WXZF-ser..> 29-Jul-2012 10:12  4.6M  

[TXT]

 35-35ppm-Copieur-cou..> 24-Jul-2012 14:22  6.5M  

[TXT]

 40-UE40D6500WXZF-ser..> 23-Jul-2012 18:34  3.6M  

[TXT]

 46-LE46D550WXZF-seri..> 24-Jul-2012 16:17  6.9M  

[TXT]

 CLX-3185FW.htm          30-Aug-2012 10:57  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-..> 28-Jul-2012 10:42  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Galaxy-Y-S5360-Andro..> 05-Sep-2012 07:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 GalaxyAceGT-S5830.htm   30-Apr-2012 11:05  1.4M  

[TXT]

 GalaxySIIGT-I9100.htm   30-Apr-2012 10:59  914K  

[TXT]

 GalaxyTab8.9GT-P7310..> 30-Apr-2012 17:22  2.3M  

[TXT]

 GalaxyTab10.1GT-P750..> 30-Apr-2012 17:16  2.0M  

[TXT]

 GalaxyYGT-S5360.htm     30-Apr-2012 11:32  2.0M  

[TXT]

 LE32C350LE32C350D1W.htm 30-Apr-2012 11:12  1.9M  

[TXT]

 LE40C630LE40C630K1W.htm 01-May-2012 10:44  4.8M  

[TXT]

 LE40D503F7W-Samsung-..> 24-Jul-2012 16:31  6.3M  

[TXT]

 LE55C650-LE55C650L1W..> 24-Jul-2012 16:27  6.3M  

[TXT]

 Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 28-Nov-2012 17:46   82K  

[TXT]

 Liste-Produits-Manue..> 28-Nov-2012 06:57  213K  

[TXT]

 MM-C330D.htm            30-Apr-2012 11:18  2.0M  

[TXT]

 MM-D330D.htm            30-Apr-2012 17:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-Utilisateur-..> 05-Sep-2012 08:10  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 17:54  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 17:58  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:03  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:07  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:11  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:16  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:21  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 05-Sep-2012 08:19  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 05-Sep-2012 08:27  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Micro-chaine-MM-D330..> 23-Jul-2012 18:43  3.9M  

[TXT]

 N145Plus-NP-N145P-Ma..> 23-Jul-2012 19:31  3.9M  

[TXT]

 N150-NP-N150-Manuels..> 23-Jul-2012 18:53  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Nexus-S-noir-Open-ma..> 24-Sep-2012 11:11  4.0M  

[TXT]

 RSH5UEPN.htm            30-Apr-2012 18:01  3.4M  

[TXT]

 SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels..> 06-Oct-2012 18:04  2.6M  

[TXT]

 SGH-F490.htm            01-May-2012 10:22  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:01  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:02  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:47  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:44  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:45  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:07  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:07  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 11:59  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:02  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:08  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:11  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:12  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:00  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:10  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:12  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:47  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 20-Dec-2012 13:24  5.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:06  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 11:59  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:45  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:03  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:11  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:03  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:00  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:09  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:01  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:47  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:48  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:02  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:07  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Аудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:06  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Бытова..> 19-Dec-2012 21:48  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Мобиль..> 21-Dec-2012 11:58  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Мобиль..> 21-Dec-2012 12:03  5.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Мобиль..> 21-Dec-2012 12:02  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung--Informatiqu..> 06-May-2013 11:14  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-16-MP-Ecran-..> 09-Oct-2012 17:12  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-18-XTDVBEUE-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:08  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-20-XTDVBEUE-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-22-LE22D450W..> 07-Oct-2012 10:14  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-..> 09-Oct-2012 17:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-32-LE32D450W..> 24-Sep-2012 09:34  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-32-UE32D4000..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-40-LE40D550W..> 01-Oct-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-40-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:36  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-40-UE40D5700..> 04-Oct-2012 07:20  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-40-UE40D6500..> 04-Oct-2012 18:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-40-UE40D8000..> 07-Oct-2012 10:19  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:36  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:19  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:24  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:28  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:37  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:36  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:34  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:35  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-UE46D5700..> 24-Sep-2012 09:40  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-46-UE46D7000..> 02-Oct-2012 15:40  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-51-PS51E490W..> 06-Oct-2012 17:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-51-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:35  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-51-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:34  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-55-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:34  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-305U1A-A02-N..> 09-Oct-2012 17:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-320MXN-3-SSD..> 10-Oct-2012 06:44  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-320TSN-3D-SS..> 09-Oct-2012 07:48  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-400EXN-Japon..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-400TS-3-400T..> 17-Oct-2012 10:46  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-400TS-3D-400..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-400UXN-3-Jap..> 08-Oct-2012 18:42  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-400UXN-3-SSD..> 10-Oct-2012 06:45  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-460UT-B-Japo..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD..> 09-Oct-2012 07:47  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-708SC-Japon-..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-740SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:51  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-821SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:44  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-910MP-Manuel..> 06-Oct-2012 12:56  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-940SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-941SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-2012_Skype_E..> 01-Oct-2012 10:51  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-2243QW-Japon..> 08-Oct-2012 18:41  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-201204051657..> 07-Oct-2012 14:01  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-AQ09UGBN-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 14:54  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:17  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Po..> 06-Oct-2012 18:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Ma..> 24-Sep-2012 09:53  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Affichage-Dy..> 06-Feb-2013 07:13  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Appareil-pho..> 06-May-2013 08:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Appareils-me..> 19-Apr-2013 18:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Appareils-mo..> 31-May-2013 17:12  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Appareils-mo..> 31-May-2013 17:12  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-B2440MH-Japo..> 08-Oct-2012 18:41  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-BN68-04109G-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:05  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-CLP-367W-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 15:31  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-CW21Z503N-Ma..> 24-Sep-2012 10:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-CW21Z573N-Ma..> 04-Oct-2012 07:15  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camaras-Alta..> 29-Nov-2012 08:22  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 29-Nov-2012 08:24  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 29-Nov-2012 10:40  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 10-Jun-2013 08:11  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-et-Ca..> 26-Mar-2013 06:44  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camera-et-Ca..> 26-Mar-2013 06:45  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Camescopes-P..> 06-Jun-2013 07:26  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 08:01  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 07:45  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 07:45  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 08:01  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 08:00  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 07-Apr-2013 10:23  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Congelateur-..> 24-Sep-2012 10:54  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Cuisson-Four..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-DA-E550-CN-M..> 24-Sep-2012 16:43  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-DA68-01829P...> 07-Oct-2012 10:04  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-DA68-01829P...> 07-Oct-2012 10:04  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9D..> 24-Sep-2012 14:08  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-E1720NR-Japo..> 09-Oct-2012 07:49  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electroména..> 01-Dec-2012 07:34  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electrom-nag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:50  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 10:57  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:09  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Nov-2012 07:42  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:19  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:27  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Jan-2013 10:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:12  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:39  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:17  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:26  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Dec-2012 08:26  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Jan-2013 08:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 18-Jan-2013 14:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 28-Nov-2012 07:19  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Nov-2012 07:42  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:30  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 10:57  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:28  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:09  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Jan-2013 07:43  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 03-Dec-2012 15:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:49  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 24-Dec-2012 14:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:57  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 04-Jan-2013 16:24  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:28  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:38  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:16  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:26  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:16  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 13:14  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 11:00  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:48  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Jan-2013 07:45  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:25  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Feb-2013 14:49  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:22  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:21  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Jan-2013 16:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 28-Nov-2012 14:41  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:18  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 09-Nov-2012 18:22  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 23-Jan-2013 06:53  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 06-Feb-2013 07:09  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 12:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 17-Nov-2012 19:23  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 06-Feb-2013 07:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Dec-2012 08:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Dec-2012 07:34  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 20-Nov-2012 09:45  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Dec-2012 07:33  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:29  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 12-Feb-2013 17:51  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Feb-2013 14:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 18:59  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:49  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:40  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 13:17  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:41  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 10:55  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 04-Jan-2013 16:24  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Jan-2013 07:45  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Nov-2012 07:43  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:29  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Jan-2013 16:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 03-Dec-2012 15:10  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 09-Nov-2012 18:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:22  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 29-Nov-2012 10:09  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 31-May-2013 16:01  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 26-Mar-2013 07:29  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Dec-2012 07:33  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:31  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:29  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:27  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 28-Nov-2012 12:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jun-2013 07:26  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 03-Dec-2012 15:04  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jun-2013 07:27  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Entro-SPH-m3..> 09-Oct-2012 17:12  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Exhibit-4G-A..> 03-Dec-2012 15:42  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-NEXUS..> 24-Sep-2012 15:17  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Note-..> 24-Sep-2012 14:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-..> 24-Sep-2012 14:48  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-7..> 07-Oct-2012 11:16  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-1..> 24-Sep-2012 16:29  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-G..> 24-Sep-2012 10:42  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-S..> 24-Sep-2012 16:32  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro..> 16-Oct-2012 11:35  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro..> 09-Oct-2012 17:13  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-GSM-Cham..> 07-Apr-2013 10:25  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-GSM-E105..> 04-Jun-2013 17:03  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-GSM-E118..> 02-Jun-2013 22:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-GSM-E220..> 26-Mar-2013 07:34  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-GSM-E220..> 26-Mar-2013 06:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-S5610-GT..> 10-Jun-2013 08:03  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:23  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 26-Mar-2013 07:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:24  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 06-May-2013 09:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 05-Jun-2013 06:55  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 05-Jun-2013 06:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 26-Mar-2013 06:42  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:26  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 04-Jun-2013 16:39  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 06-May-2013 09:31  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:28  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 10-Jun-2013 08:05  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 05-Jun-2013 07:48  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-B5310-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:59  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-I9000-Man..> 02-Oct-2012 16:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM..> 05-Oct-2012 17:16  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-I9250-Man..> 05-Oct-2012 17:34  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-I9300-Man..> 06-Oct-2012 18:01  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_..> 05-Oct-2012 17:20  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-N8000-CN-..> 24-Sep-2012 16:50  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-N8000-Man..> 06-Oct-2012 18:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-P5110-Jap..> 09-Oct-2012 07:49  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-P6200-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 11:15  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-S5360-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 14:25  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_..> 24-Sep-2012 14:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_..> 05-Oct-2012 17:10  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-GT-S5830_UM_..> 05-Oct-2012 17:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Gainable-Sli..> 04-Oct-2012 07:11  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-n..> 23-Jul-2012 18:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-n..> 06-Oct-2012 12:05  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Note-..> 24-Sep-2012 14:44  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Note-..> 06-Oct-2012 17:57  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-..> 23-Jul-2012 18:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-III..> 23-Jul-2012 18:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-III..> 28-Jul-2012 10:34  7.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-Plu..> 24-Jul-2012 11:39  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL..> 06-Oct-2012 11:51  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL..> 06-Oct-2012 11:50  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S-noi..> 23-Jul-2012 18:26  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT..> 17-Sep-2012 16:19  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT..> 20-Nov-2012 10:03  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Spica..> 06-Oct-2012 12:17  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 15-Nov-2012 18:17  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 06-Oct-2012 17:40  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 24-Jul-2012 14:34  6.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 06-Oct-2012 17:36  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7..> 24-Jul-2012 14:35  6.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 24-Sep-2012 14:21  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 24-Sep-2012 14:22  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 09-Oct-2012 17:11  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-..> 06-Oct-2012 12:11  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Xcove..> 30-Aug-2012 10:56  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-Y-DUO..> 09-Oct-2012 17:13  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-mini-..> 17-Sep-2012 16:48  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Galaxy-noir-..> 17-Sep-2012 16:44  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 28-Nov-2012 17:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 29-Nov-2012 08:21  950K  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Home-Applian..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20  947K  

[TXT]

 Samsung-I9300-GT-I93..> 29-Nov-2012 10:21  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-IT-producten..> 26-Mar-2013 06:43  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-IT-producten..> 10-Jun-2013 07:26  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-IT-producten..> 26-Mar-2013 07:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:45  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 31-May-2013 17:12  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 22:07  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 22:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 22:08  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:46  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 10-Jun-2013 07:27  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:44  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 18:22  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:50  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 10-Jun-2013 07:26  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:40  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:41  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:40  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatica-..> 29-Nov-2012 08:23  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:10  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:49  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:49  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:05  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:27  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:45  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-May-2013 07:48  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:04  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 11:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 02-Jun-2013 22:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 12:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:32  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:10  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:30  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Jun-2013 07:27  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jun-2013 07:29  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:15  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:40  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:39  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 19:07  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:41  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:25  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 04-Jun-2013 18:21  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 07:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 12:16  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Jan-2013 16:23  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Feb-2013 18:51  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Jan-2013 07:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Feb-2013 18:51  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Feb-2013 18:52  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:24  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Apr-2013 11:55  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:21  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 01-Jan-2013 11:17  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Jan-2013 16:25  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Jan-2013 07:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 14:23  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 27-Feb-2013 14:48  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Apr-2013 11:02  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jan-2013 11:32  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jan-2013 11:32  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 18:37  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:29  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Feb-2013 15:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:36  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:38  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:14  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 09-Nov-2012 18:21  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:37  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 13-Jan-2013 18:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:15  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:04  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:45  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Jan-2013 16:23  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 24-Dec-2012 08:28  6.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Feb-2013 10:03  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 11:14  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 08:05  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Dec-2012 08:28  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:26  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 13-May-2013 17:34  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-May-2013 22:41  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Apr-2013 11:56  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:27  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Feb-2013 15:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:42  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 07:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 07:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 22:26  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:28  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:17  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Jun-2013 06:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:25  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:42  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:25  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:24  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Jun-2013 06:54  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 02-Jun-2013 11:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:13  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:39  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Jun-2013 19:38  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:23  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 06:46  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:41  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:21  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jun-2013 07:28  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 22:24  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 15:03  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:05  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:26  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 18:16  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:31  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:39  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 11:47  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:54  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:54  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:19  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 20:17  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 09-Nov-2012 18:23  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 14:19  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:07  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Feb-2013 15:36  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 02-Jun-2013 11:43  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:15  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:53  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 14-May-2013 07:22  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 08:03  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:13  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 08:03  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:18  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Apr-2013 10:50  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:26  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:33  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:13  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:11  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:05  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:05  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:06  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:06  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:31  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Apr-2013 10:26  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 01-Dec-2012 07:31  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 11:48  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:39  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:06  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:06  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:05  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:07  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:45  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:26  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:06  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:28  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Jan-2013 18:31  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Jan-2013 08:37  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:45  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 12:22  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:08  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:46  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:38  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 08:02  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 15-Jan-2013 17:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:15  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:56  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:49  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:52  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:48  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Jan-2013 07:49  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:15  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:47  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:06  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 15:04  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:48  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 09:04  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:45  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Apr-2013 10:51  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:31  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Apr-2013 11:56  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 15-Jan-2013 17:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:55  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:47  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:24  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 08:08  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:24  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:16  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:57  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 13-May-2013 22:06  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:14  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:22  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:16  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:07  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:56  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:25  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 08:24  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:19  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:16  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 08:07  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:23  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:42  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:04  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:05  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-May-2013 07:42  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 01-Dec-2012 07:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 13-Jan-2013 22:33  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 14:18  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:49  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:16  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 06:48  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:04  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:43  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:24  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:38  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:55  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:15  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:15  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:46  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 15-Jan-2013 17:14  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 18:17  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 09:29  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 06:41  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:45  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:09  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jan-2013 11:32  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 08:05  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Kit-Pieton-B..> 16-Oct-2012 11:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LA46C550J1F-..> 24-Sep-2012 17:00  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE19C350-LE1..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE22C452C4H-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE26B450-LE2..> 16-Oct-2012 11:33  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE26D450G1W-..> 05-Oct-2012 16:42  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE32A466-Man..> 04-Oct-2012 18:25  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE32A568-LE3..> 02-Oct-2012 15:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE32B450C4W-..> 04-Oct-2012 18:16  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE32C650-LE3..> 05-Oct-2012 16:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE32D400E1W-..> 04-Oct-2012 07:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE32D460C9H-..> 19-Oct-2012 14:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE32E420E2W-..> 06-Oct-2012 12:50  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE37A466-LE3..> 19-Oct-2012 15:02  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE40A577P2M-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE40B551A6W-..> 19-Oct-2012 14:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE40S71B-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:31  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE46A676-LE4..> 24-Sep-2012 10:04  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE46C630-LE4..> 07-Oct-2012 10:34  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-LE52A676-LE5..> 07-Oct-2012 10:06  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Lecteur-Mult..> 02-Oct-2012 16:09  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Lecteur-Mult..> 24-Sep-2012 14:29  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Livres-blanc..> 05-Jun-2013 19:37  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Livres-blanc..> 05-Jun-2013 19:37  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-ME40A-TP40-J..> 09-Oct-2012 07:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-ME46A-Japon-..> 09-Oct-2012 07:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-ME65B-Japon-..> 17-Oct-2012 10:52  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-..> 01-Oct-2012 11:00  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-ML-2160-Impr..> 09-Nov-2012 18:26  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-ML-2165W-Rou..> 06-Oct-2012 18:21  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-M_YUKON_2K_W..> 07-Oct-2012 10:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 30-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 31-May-2013 17:14  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 29-Nov-2012 08:22  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 03-Dec-2012 15:02  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 30-Nov-2012 18:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 02-Jun-2013 22:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobile-Table..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Sma..> 04-Jun-2013 18:22  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 07-Apr-2013 10:28  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 07-Apr-2013 10:29  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Moniteur-gra..> 08-Feb-2013 10:05  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Monitors-249..> 03-Dec-2012 15:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-N145Plus-NP-..> 05-Oct-2012 16:58  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-N150-NP-N150..> 05-Oct-2012 17:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NC190-Japon-..> 09-Oct-2012 07:48  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R..> 24-Sep-2012 10:48  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NP20-NP20FK0..> 05-Oct-2012 17:06  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NP300E5C-NP3..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NP300E5ZI-NP..> 16-Oct-2012 11:36  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NP300V5AH-Ma..> 04-Jun-2013 18:23  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NP530U3C-A01..> 16-Oct-2012 11:35  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-NS140SDXEA-M..> 01-Oct-2012 10:55  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Nexus-S-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 16:24  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Notebook-Ser..> 06-Oct-2012 18:29  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-7-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 16:38  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 16:31  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 16:30  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-Lite-n..> 17-Sep-2012 16:12  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7..> 17-Sep-2012 16:09  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7..> 06-Oct-2012 12:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Omnia-W-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 11:47  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-OFFICE-Co..> 31-May-2013 17:13  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-Office-LC..> 29-Nov-2012 08:21  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-Office-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-Office-Ne..> 03-Dec-2012 15:05  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-Office-No..> 03-Dec-2012 15:03  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PC-Office-No..> 03-Dec-2012 15:06  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PDP-TV-PN51D..> 01-Oct-2012 15:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PS42C450-PS4..> 02-Oct-2012 16:06  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PS50A566-PS5..> 16-Oct-2012 11:38  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PS50C450-PS5..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PS50C535-PS5..> 14-Oct-2012 21:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PS51D490A1W-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:33  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-PS51E530-ZF-..> 09-Oct-2012 17:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 06-May-2013 09:29  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 05-Jun-2013 06:56  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 05-Jun-2013 07:49  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Peripherique..> 02-Jun-2013 22:08  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Dec-2012 08:26  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Jan-2013 16:24  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 18:07  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 22-May-2013 07:33  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 27-May-2013 07:39  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 11:13  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 25-May-2013 11:35  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Jun-2013 07:46  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-May-2013 22:40  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 07:30  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 18:58  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 10-Jun-2013 08:04  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung- Photo-Cames..> 06-May-2013 09:30  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 10-Jan-2013 18:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 11:52  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 25-May-2013 11:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Feb-2013 18:47  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Feb-2013 18:48  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Jan-2013 16:24  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 13-May-2013 17:34  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 29-Nov-2012 10:08  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 31-May-2013 17:19  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 12-Feb-2013 17:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 31-May-2013 17:16  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Nov-2012 12:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-Nov-2012 08:18  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 09:33  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 25-May-2013 11:30  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-Feb-2013 07:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 27-Feb-2013 14:50  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 07-Feb-2013 15:37  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 30-Nov-2012 19:05  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 07:29  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 22-May-2013 06:40  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 07:28  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 18:55  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 07-Feb-2013 15:36  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 06:47  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Feb-2013 18:52  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 13-Jan-2013 18:08  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-Nov-2012 08:18  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 23-May-2013 07:39  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-May-2013 22:39  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 31-May-2013 16:01  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 11:06  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 19:00  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 11:02  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-Feb-2013 14:49  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 01-Dec-2012 07:32  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-May-2013 15:20  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 19:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 18-Nov-2012 11:04  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Player-Addic..> 17-Sep-2012 11:39  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Player-Duo-n..> 17-Sep-2012 11:35  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Player-HD-no..> 17-Sep-2012 11:31  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Player-One-n..> 06-Oct-2012 18:39  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 20-May-2013 22:40  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 05-Jun-2013 06:56  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 15:19  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 06-Jun-2013 07:26  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 06:47  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 15:20  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 06-Jun-2013 07:28  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 04-Jun-2013 18:25  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 15:20  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 10-Jun-2013 08:04  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 08:05  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 02-Jun-2013 11:45  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 04-Jun-2013 18:23  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 19-Apr-2013 18:57  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:23  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:23  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 27-Feb-2013 14:47  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 27-Feb-2013 14:47  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Portables-et..> 19-Apr-2013 11:06  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Presentation..> 07-Apr-2013 10:36  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Printers-Mul..> 06-Jun-2013 07:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-RE-C21VMS-Ma..> 01-Oct-2012 15:24  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-RR92HASX-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:26  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-RR92HAWW-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 11:10  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-RR92HAWW-Ref..> 09-Nov-2012 18:25  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-RV511-NP-RV5..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Refrigerateu..> 01-Oct-2012 11:18  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Refrigerateu..> 24-Sep-2012 10:20  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Refrigerator..> 03-Dec-2012 15:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-S-II-HDSHV-E..> 31-May-2013 17:15  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-S22B350B-Man..> 06-Oct-2012 17:46  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-S23A550H-Jap..> 10-Oct-2012 06:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-S5610-GT-S56..> 06-Oct-2012 12:37  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SCH-W999-CN-..> 24-Sep-2012 16:54  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SCX-4x28-Ser..> 02-Jun-2013 11:46  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SCX-3200-Man..> 09-Oct-2012 17:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SCX-3400-Pak..> 03-Dec-2012 15:04  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SGH-D500-Tel..> 09-Nov-2012 18:24  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SHV-E210S-S-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:39  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SHV-E300L-Co..> 31-May-2013 17:13  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SHW-M220L-Co..> 04-Jun-2013 16:41  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-SNE-60K_UM_E..> 07-Oct-2012 10:03  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 24-Sep-2012 14:38  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 24-Sep-2012 10:38  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 06-Oct-2012 11:58  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Sante-Ultras..> 28-May-2013 07:39  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Sprzet-kompu..> 29-Nov-2012 08:22  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 01-Dec-2012 07:32  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 16-Jan-2013 07:51  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 23-May-2013 07:38  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 25-May-2013 11:30  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 23-May-2013 07:41  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Téléphone-..> 29-Nov-2012 10:05  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-T22B300EW-Ma..> 09-Oct-2012 17:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-T240-JP-Manu..> 07-Oct-2012 10:36  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-T260-Japon-M..> 10-Oct-2012 06:44  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu..> 29-Nov-2012 08:23  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19..> 03-Dec-2012 15:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE..> 10-Dec-2012 08:06  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-20..> 29-Nov-2012 10:09  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED..> 05-Jun-2013 07:47  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED..> 05-Jun-2013 07:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED..> 19-Apr-2013 10:50  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD..> 06-May-2013 09:30  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Mar-2013 06:49  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:14  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 12:09  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:11  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:05  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 08:21  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:01  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:40  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:11  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:44  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:30  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:03  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:08  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:43  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:21  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:53  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:58  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Jan-2013 11:43  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 06:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Apr-2013 18:58  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:39  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:12  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:17  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:22  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:25  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:18  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 14:45  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:23  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:15  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:25  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:44  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 19:08  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 08:17  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:43  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:17  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:15  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 14:45  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:40  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 17:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 12:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:50  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:59  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:40  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:41  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:20  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:20  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:18  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 14:44  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 06:57  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:19  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:21  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:43  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:13  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:24  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:24  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:33  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:07  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 10:59  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:05  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:16  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 19:15  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 22:25  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:40  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Nov-2012 10:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 31-May-2013 17:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 12:21  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 31-May-2013 17:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:36  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Jun-2013 07:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Jun-2013 06:54  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:52  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 14-May-2013 08:08  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 11:53  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:23  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:32  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 14:39  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 17:34  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 15:02  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 18:33  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 22:01  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:24  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:15  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:29  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 14:42  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:48  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 17:34  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Jan-2013 12:05  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 18:16  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Nov-2012 11:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 12:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:19  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:04  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 14:40  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 19:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:06  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:23  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:37  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:41  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Mar-2013 07:26  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:55  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:26  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 08:00  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Nov-2012 20:17  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-May-2013 06:30  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Feb-2013 15:39  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 14:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Nov-2012 18:24  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Nov-2012 18:28  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Nov-2012 18:22  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 08:22  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 12:05  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:52  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Mar-2013 06:47  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 12:29  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:32  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:29  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:21  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 09:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 07:19  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:03  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:36  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:22  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 23-Jan-2013 06:52  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 11:00  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:03  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:22  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:04  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 09:40  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:23  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:21  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:15  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:01  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:17  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:14  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:17  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:19  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:58  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:42  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 11:53  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:07  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Dec-2012 22:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:43  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:16  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Mar-2013 12:16  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Jan-2013 14:23  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:49  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:41  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:16  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:30  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:19  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:41  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 07:18  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:22  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 18:56  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:22  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 07:18  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:04  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:04  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:17  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:37  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:30  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 10:59  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 09:44  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Nov-2012 10:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 08:25  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:24  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 18:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:14  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Feb-2013 18:51  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:41  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:27  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:59  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:25  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:13  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 09:41  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:19  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:11  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:50  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:48  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:09  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:28  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:46  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:28  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:30  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Feb-2013 18:50  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:33  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:18  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:47  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:15  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:58  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 11:48  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:44  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:25  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:19  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:47  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:38  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 17:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:49  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:44  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:51  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-Jan-2013 11:31  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 12:03  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:20  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:49  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:26  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:43  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:27  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:43  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:18  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:19  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 11:50  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:14  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:40  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-Jan-2013 11:31  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:48  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:24  5.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:44  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:11  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:25  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:26  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:24  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:19  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:26  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:45  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Apr-2013 11:56  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-May-2013 06:31  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 12:05  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:11  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:09  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:22  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:08  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 22:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:40  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:43  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:26  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:43  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:23  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 14:19  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:24  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 11:14  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:21  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:34  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:56  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:17  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 31-May-2013 17:18  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 14-May-2013 08:06  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-May-2013 22:40  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV-Video-3D-..> 04-Jun-2013 18:22  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV Audio-Vid..> 23-Jan-2013 06:53  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TV Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:19  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TVs-LED-TV-U..> 13-May-2013 21:57  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-TVs-LED-TV-U..> 13-May-2013 21:57  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Table-induct..> 09-Nov-2012 18:25  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 08:23  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Nov-2012 13:24  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 17:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:08  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 08:04  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 20-Nov-2012 09:57  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 12:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jan-2013 18:37  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 12:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:18  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:14  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 12:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:31  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:31  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jan-2013 18:31  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:16  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 12:21  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:14  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 08:25  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jun-2013 08:04  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:13  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 22:01  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:17  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 08:23  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:26  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 06:48  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:27  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:13  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-May-2013 06:47  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:05  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Apr-2013 13:30  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:10  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 11:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 20-Nov-2012 08:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 20-Nov-2012 09:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 14:57  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 11:43  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:42  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:08  1.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 22:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 16:41  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Feb-2013 14:49  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:06  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 12:05  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 16:42  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 03-Dec-2012 15:02  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 05-Jun-2013 06:53  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Apr-2013 11:55  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 18-Nov-2012 20:17  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:26  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:13  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-Jun-2013 07:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Feb-2013 10:03  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 10:55  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 01-Jan-2013 11:13  5.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 09:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Feb-2013 15:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:10  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Jan-2013 19:05  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 12:50  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 18:15  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Jan-2013 09:25  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Apr-2013 10:27  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Jan-2013 07:52  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 11:47  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 12:08  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Jan-2013 19:07  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Jan-2013 07:51  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:17  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Nov-2012 18:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Nov-2012 12:22  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:33  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 08:23  6.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 05-Jun-2013 07:49  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 14-Jan-2013 07:38  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:06  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Feb-2013 14:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 26-Mar-2013 06:49  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 26-Mar-2013 07:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:22  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Feb-2013 15:37  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 18:17  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Apr-2013 18:59  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jun-2013 08:03  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 08:26  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 30-Nov-2012 18:16  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:28  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:08  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:09  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:20  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:22  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Apr-2013 10:30  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:09  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 23-May-2013 07:40  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 18:16  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Apr-2013 10:31  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 17-Nov-2012 19:22  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 14-May-2013 08:06  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 21:59  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:22  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 11:48  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Apr-2013 18:57  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Jan-2013 08:39  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 26-Mar-2013 06:45  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:17  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:34  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Nov-2012 14:23  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:21  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:30  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:08  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Apr-2013 11:54  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 05-Feb-2013 18:57  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:20  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 09:28  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 04-Jan-2013 16:23  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Telephones-C..> 08-Feb-2013 10:05  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UA32ES5500-U..> 01-Oct-2012 10:49  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UA40ES5500-U..> 09-Oct-2012 07:57  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UD22B-Japon-..> 08-Oct-2012 18:42  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE19D4003BW-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:09  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE26EH4000-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 14:02  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE26EH4500-Z..> 04-Oct-2012 18:04  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE32D5700RS-..> 01-Oct-2012 10:43  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE32D6530WS-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE32EH4003W-..> 19-Oct-2012 14:57  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE32ES6710-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 10:34  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE37C5100QW-..> 02-Oct-2012 15:55  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40B6050-UE..> 14-Oct-2012 21:33  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40C6000-UE..> 24-Sep-2012 10:50  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40C6700-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 11:53  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40D6510WS-..> 09-Nov-2012 18:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40ES5500-Z..> 16-Oct-2012 11:54  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40ES7000-Z..> 07-Oct-2012 10:26  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE40ES8000-Z..> 02-Oct-2012 16:21  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46C6805-UE..> 14-Oct-2012 21:33  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46C7700-UE..> 24-Sep-2012 10:08  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46C8700-UE..> 04-Oct-2012 07:31  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46C8700XS-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:02  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46D5720RS-..> 04-Oct-2012 18:21  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46D6300SS-..> 02-Oct-2012 15:29  753K  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46D6530WS-..> 04-Oct-2012 18:02  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46ES6100W-..> 24-Sep-2012 10:23  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46ES6300-Z..> 01-Oct-2012 10:49  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46ES8000-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 09:46  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE46S870XS-M..> 01-Oct-2012 15:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE50EH5300W-..> 24-Sep-2012 09:57  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE55C8700-UE..> 07-Oct-2012 10:10  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE55ES6300-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 09:50  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE55ES6560S-..> 24-Sep-2012 09:43  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE55ES8000-Z..> 02-Oct-2012 15:35  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-UE75ES9000S-..> 01-Oct-2012 11:05  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-VC-UBL916-Ma..> 01-Oct-2012 15:35  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-VC331LLDC6S-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:17  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-VC331LLMA6S-..> 10-Oct-2012 06:43  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Video-tutori..> 07-Apr-2013 10:32  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-WEP480-CN-Ma..> 24-Sep-2012 17:03  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-3-noir-..> 17-Sep-2012 11:27  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-533-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 11:23  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-575-bla..> 24-Jul-2012 11:44  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-578-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 11:19  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-723-gri..> 24-Jul-2012 14:45  7.0M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 17-Sep-2012 11:14  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 28-Jul-2012 10:51  5.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Wave-noir-Op..> 17-Sep-2012 11:09  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1..> 17-Sep-2012 16:57  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-ZS31FASAB1S-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:14  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09..> 19-Oct-2012 14:59  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 19:11  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 18:55  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-electromenag..> 29-Nov-2012 08:21  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-lcd_business..> 10-Oct-2012 06:45  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Samsung-pascal_owner..> 10-Oct-2012 06:45  1.6M  

[TXT]

 SamsungGalaxyNoteGT-..> 30-Apr-2012 11:47  1.9M  

[TXT]

 SamsungGalaxySGT-I90..> 30-Apr-2012 11:26  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Serie-3-300E7A-NP300..> 23-Jul-2012 18:56  3.9M  

[TXT]

 T23A550T23A550.htm      23-Jul-2012 19:31  2.8M  

[TXT]

 UE40D6500ZFUE40D6500..> 30-Apr-2012 17:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 23-Jul-2012 18:46  3.8M  

[TXT]

 UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 24-Jul-2012 16:35  6.6M  

[TXT]

 UE60ES6100WXZF-UE60E..> 24-Jul-2012 16:43  7.3M  

[TXT]

 UE65C8700-UE65C8700X..> 24-Jul-2012 16:40  7.3M  

[TXT]

 Video-Samsung-Galaxy..> 28-Jul-2012 10:29  7.3M  

[TXT]

 Wave575GT-S5750E.htm    01-May-2012 10:05  3.2M  

[TXT]

 WaveIIGT-S8530.htm      01-May-2012 10:11  3.6M  

[TXT]

 samsung-Wave-II-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 11:06  3.3M

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLP-C300A

Samsung CLP-K300A

Samsung CLP-M300A

Samsung CLP-Y300A

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-D330

Samsung HT-D350

Samsung HT-D423

Samsung HT-D4500

Samsung HT-D5000 3D

Samsung HT-E4200 3D

Samsung HT-E4500 3D

Samsung HT-E5200 3D

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MLT-D1052S

Samsung MLT-D1082S

Samsung MLT-D1092S

Samsung MM-D430D

Samsung MV800 Noir

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43D450

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS51E450

Samsung PS51E490 3D

Samsung PS59D530

Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) Electric Range installation manual ENGLISH This manual is made with 100% recycled paper. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 1 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:442_ Before you begin before you begin ANTI-TIP DEVICE WARNING: To reduce the risk of tipping the appliance, the appliance must be secured by properly installed anti-tip devices packed with the appliance. a) A child or adult can tip the range and be killed. b) Install the anti-tip device to the structure and/or the range at rear right (or rear left) of the range bottom. c) Engage the range to the anti-tip device by leveling leg at rear right (or rear left) of the range bottom. d) Re-engage the anti-tip device if the range is moved. e) See installation instructions for details. f) Failure to do so can result in death or serious burns to children or adults. AbouT ThIs mANuAl READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS COMPLETELY AND CAREFULLY. Important note to the installer • Read all instructions contained in these installation instructions before installing range. • Remove all packing materials from the oven compartments before connecting the electrical supply to the range. • Observe all governing codes and ordinances. • Be sure to leave these instructions with the consumer. Important note to the consumer Keep these instructions for the local electrical inspector’s use. • As when using any appliance generating heat, there are certain safety precautions you should follow. • Be sure your range is installed and grounded properly by a qualified installer or service technician. • Make sure the wall coverings around the range can withstand the heat generated by the range. • To eliminate the need to reach over the surface elements, cabinet storage space above the elements should be avoided. • The range should not be placed on a base. FoR YouR sAFETY WARNINGWARNING If the information in this manual is not followed exactly, a fire or electrical shock may result causing property damage, personal injury or death. WARNINGWARNING Before beginning the installation, switch power off at the service panel and lock the service disconnecting means to prevent power from being switched on accidentally. When the service disconnecting means cannot be locked, securely fasten a prominent warning device, such as a tag, to the service panel. WARNINGWARNING This appliance must be properly grounded. WARNING Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 2 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4401 PREPARING TO INSTALL Preparing to install the range _3 preparing to install the range REmoVE PACKAGING Remove packaging materials. Failure to remove packaging materials could result in damage to the appliance. PREPARE Tools & PARTs What tools you will need Drill Adjustable Wrench Pliers 1/4˝ Nut Driver Phillips Screwdriver Flat Screwdriver Pencil Level What’s included with your range Template Anti-Tip Bracket Screws (2 ea) 4-Wire Cord or 3-Wire Cord (UL Approved 40 or 50 AMP) What’s not included Strain Relief (For Conduit Installation Only) Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 3 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:454_ Preparing to install the range ChECKING ThE INsTAllATIoN sITE Clearances and dimensions To install the range, refer to the following fi gure. For installation in CANADA, a Free-standing range is not to be installed closer than 12mm from any adjacent surface. CAUTION CAUTION This range has been designed to comply with the maximum allowable wood cabinet temperatures of 194°F. Make sure the wall covering, countertops and cabinets around the range can withstand the heat (up to 194°F) generated by the range. If not, discoloration, delamination or melting may occur. A B 36” 30” 24” 6” 25” 3” 24” 3” A : Cabinet opening 30” For U.S.A, 30”~31” For CANADA. B : Acceptable electrical outlet area Minimum dimensions IMPORTANT To eliminate the risk of burns or fi re caused by reaching over heated surface units, cabinet storage space located above the surface units should be avoided. If cabinet storage is to be provided, the risk can be reduced by installing a range hood that projects horizontally a minimum of 5” beyond the bottom of the cabinets. * 30” 30” ** 15” * 30” minimum clearance between the top of the cooking surface and the bottom of an unprotected wood or metal cabinet; or 24” minimum when the bottom of the wood or metal cabinet is protected by not less than 1/4” fl ame retardant millboard covered with not less than no.28 MSG sheet steel, 0.015” stainless steel, 0.024” aluminum or 0.020” copper. ** 15” minimum between the countertop and the adjacent cabinet bottom. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 4 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4602 CONNECTING THE POWER Connecting the power _5 connecting the power sTEP 1. mEETING ElECTRICAl CoNNECTIoN REQuIREmENTs CAUTION CAUTIONFor personal safety, do not use an extension cord with this appliance. Remove house fuse or open circuit breaker before beginning installation. This appliance must be supplied with the proper voltage and frequency, and connected to an individual properly grounded branch circuit, protected by a circuit breaker or fuse having amperage as specifi ed on the rating plate. The rating plate is located above the drawer on the oven frame. (Fig. 1 or Fig. 2) We recommend you have the electrical wiring and hookup of your range connected by a qualifi ed electrician. After installation, have the electrician show you where your main range disconnect is located. Check with your local utilities for electrical codes which apply in your area. Failure to wire your oven according to governing codes could result in a hazardous condition. If there are no local codes, your range must be wired and fused to meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70–Latest Edition. You can get a copy by writing: National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02269 Effective January 1, 1996, the National Electrical Code requires that new construction (not existing) utilize a 4-conductor connection to an electric range. When installing an electric range in new construction, follow Steps 2 and 3 for 4-wire connection. You must use a 3-wire or 4-wire, single-phase A.C. 208Y/120 Volt or 240/120 Volt, 60 hertz electrical system. If the electrical service provided does not meet the above specifi cations, have a licensed electrician install an approved outlet. Use only a 3-conductor or a 4-conductor UL-listed range cord. These cords may be provided with ring terminals on wire and a strain relief device. A range cord rated at 40 amps with 125/250 minimum volt range is required. A 50 amp range cord is not recommended but if used, it should be marked for use with nominal 13⁄8” diameter connection openings. Care should be taken to center the cable and strain relief within the knockout hole to keep the edge from damaging the cable. • Because range terminals are not accessible after range is in position, fl exible service conduit or cord must be used. NOTE If conduit is being used, go to Step 4 on page 9. ALL NEW BRANCH-CIRCUIT CONSTRUCTIONS, MOBILE HOMES, RECREATIONAL VEHICLES AND INSTALLATIONS WHERE LOCAL CODES DO NOT ALLOW GROUNDING THROUGH NEUTRAL, REQUIRE A 4-CONDUCTOR UL-LISTED RANGE CORD. (Fig. 1) (Fig. 2) Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 5 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:476_ Connecting the power sTEP 2. ACCEssING ThE PoWER CoRD CoNNECTIoN Remove the rear access cover and loosen the screw with a screwdriver. The terminal block will then be accessible. Access cover Terminal block Specifi ed power-supply-cord kit rating Range rating, watts Specifi ed rating of power-supply-cord kit, amperes Diameter (inches) of range connection opening 120/240 volts 3-wire Power cord Conduit 8,750 - 16,500 40 or 50A 13/8” 11/8” Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 6 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4802 CONNECTING THE POWER Connecting the power _7 sTEP 3. INsTAllING ThE PoWER CoRD For power cord installations, hook the strain relief over the power cord hole (13/8”) located below the rear of the drawer body. Insert the power cord through the strain relief and tighten the device. Strain relief Power cord Conduit connection plate • You must install the power cord with a strain relief. • Attach the strain relief to the 13/8” opening in conduit connection plate. Installing a 3-wire power cord WARNINGWARNING The neutral or ground wire of the power cord must be connected to the neutral terminal located in the center of the terminal block. The power leads must be connected to the lower left and the lower right terminals of the terminal block. 1. Remove the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. 2. Insert the 3 terminal screws through each power cord terminal ring and into the lower terminals of the terminal block. Be certain that the center wire (white/neutral) is connected to the center lower position of the terminal block. 3. Tighten screws securely into the terminal block. DO NOT remove the ground strap connection. 4. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the installation. Neutral Ground strap terminal Black White Red Black White Red Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 7 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:498_ Connecting the power Installing a 4-wire power cord WARNINGWARNING The neutral wire of the supply circuit must be connected to the neutral terminal located in the lower center of the terminal block. The power leads must be connected to the lower left and the lower right terminals of the terminal block. The 4th grounding lead must be connected to the frame of the range with the ground plate and the ground screw. 1. Remove the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. Remove the ground screw and ground plate and retain them. 2. Cut and discard the ground strap. Do not discard any screws. 3. Insert the one ground screw into the power cord ground wire terminal ring, through the ground plate, and into the frame of the range. 4. Insert the 3 terminal screws (removed earlier) through each power cord terminal ring and into the lower terminals of the terminal block. Be certain that the center wire (white/neutral) is connected to the center lower position of the terminal block. Tighten screws securely into the terminal block. 5. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the installation. Ground strap Ground plate Ground screw Neutral terminal Ground wire (Green) White Black Red Black White Red Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 8 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5002 CONNECTING THE POWER Connecting the power _9 sTEP 4. INsTAllING ThE CoNDuIT Remove the conduit connection plate from the rear of the drawer body and rotate it as shown below. The conduit hole (11/8”) must be used. 11/8” 13/8” 11 13/8” /8” 1. Prepare the conduit cord shown in Figure 1. 2. Install the conduit cord as shown in Figure 2. Conduit connection plate Strain relief Ring Body Figure 2 1” 31/2” 3/8” 1” 31/2” 3 wire 4 wire Knockout surface Figure 1 3/8” For conduit installations, insert the strain relief (not included) into the conduit hole (11/8”). Then thread the conduit cord through the body of the strain relief and fasten the ring. Reinstall the bracket. Installing a 3-wire conduit • Aluminum building wire may be used but it must be rated for the correct amperage and voltage to make the connection. Connect wires according to Step 4 depending on the number of wires. • Wire used, location and enclosure of splices, etc., must conform to good wiring practices and local codes. 1. Loosen the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. 2. Insert the center bare wire (white/neutral) tip through the bottom center terminal block opening. On certain models, the wire will need to be inserted through the ground strap opening and then into the bottom center block opening. 3. Insert the two side bare wire tips into the lower left and the lower right terminal block openings. 4. Tighten the screws until the wire is fi rmly secured (35 to 50 inch-lbs.). Do not over-tighten the screws since it could damage the wires. 5. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the installation. Black White Red Ground strap Neutral terminal Wire tips Red White Black Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 9 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5110_ Connecting the power Installing a 4-wire conduit • Aluminum building wire may be used but it must be rated for the correct amperage and voltage to make the connection. Connect wires according to this Step 4 depending on the number of wires. • Wire used, location and enclosure of splices, etc., must conform to good wiring practices and local codes. 1. Loosen the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. Remove the ground screw and ground plate and retain them. 2. Cut and discard the ground strap. Do not discard any screws. 3. Insert the ground bare wire tip between the range frame and the ground plate (removed earlier) and secure it in place with the ground screw (removed earlier). 4. Insert the bare wire (white/neutral) tip through the bottom center of the terminal block opening. 5. Insert the two side bare wire tips into the lower left and the lower right terminal block openings. 6. Tighten the screws until the wire is fi rmly secured (35 to 50 inch-lbs.). Do not over-tighten the screws since it could damage the wires. 7. Go to step 5 and proceed with the installation. Ground strap Ground plate White Black Red Neutral terminal Ground wire (Green) Wire tips White Black Red sTEP 5. REPlACING ThE ACCEss CoVER Replace the access cover on the range back. To replace the wire cover, insert double projections in the pockets located below the opening and tighten the screw. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 10 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:53Installing the range _11 03 INSTALLING THE RANGE installing the range INsTAllING ThE ANTI-TIP DEVICE WARNINGWARNING To reduce the risk of tipping, the appliance must be secured by properly installing the Anti-Tip device packed with the appliance. • Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the bracket. • Unless properly installed, the range could be tipped by stepping or sitting on the door. Injury may result from spilled hot liquids or from the range itself. Anti-Tip bracket Screw must enter wood or concrete *approximately 21/32”(16.5mm) *NOTE: To install Anti-Tip bracket, release the leveling leg. A minimum clearance of 21/32”(16.5mm) is required between the range bottom and the kitchen fl oor. 1. Locate the bracket using the template The Anti-Tip bracket is packaged with a template. The instructions include information necessary to complete the installation. Read and follow the instructions on the sheet (template) for range installation. 2. Level the range Level the range by adjusting the leveling legs with a wrench. Lower range Raise range Leveling leg Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 11 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5412_ Installing the range 3. Check your adjustments Use a spirit level to check your adjustments. Place the level diagonally on the oven rack or surface cooktop, and check each direction for level. 1. Check direction 1. 2. Check direction 2. If the spirit level doesn’t show level on the oven rack or surface cooktop, adjust the leveling legs with a wrench. FINAlIZING ThE INsTAllATIoN • Move range close enough to the opening to plug into the receptacle. • Slide range into position insuring that the rear left(or rear right) leg slides under the Anti-Tip bracket. The range will sit 0” away from the back wall when properly installed. • Carefully tip the range forward to insure that the Anti-Tip bracket engages the back brace and prevents tip-over. • Turn on the electrical power. Check the range for proper operation as described in the user manual. Anti-Tip bracket Leveling leg DG68-00109F-01 Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 12 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:54un monde de possibilités Nous vous remercions d'avoir choisi ce produit Samsung. Afin de bénéficier du meilleur du service après-vente, enregistrez votre appareil sur le site suivant : www.samsung.com/register 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) Manuel d'utilisation Manuel d'installation FRANÇAIS CANADIEN Ce manuel est en papier recyclé à 100%. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 1 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:552_ Avant de commencer avant de commencer DISPOSITIF ANTI-BASCULEMENT AVERTISSEMENT : Pour réduire le risque de basculement de l’appareil, ce dernier doit être sécurisé à l’aide des dispositifs anti-basculement correctement installés, fournis dans l’emballage. a) Adultes ou enfants peuvent faire basculer la cuisinière et être tués. b) Installez le dispositif anti-basculement sur la structure et/ou sur la cuisinière à l’arrière droit (ou arrière gauche) du dessous de l’appareil. c) Engagez le pied de mise à niveau de la cuisinière situé à l’arrière droit (ou arrière gauche) du dessous de l’appareil dans le dispositif anti-basculement. d) Engagez à nouveau le dispositif anti-basculement si la cuisinière est déplacée. e) Reportez-vous aux consignes d’installation pour plus d’informations. f) Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des brûlures graves ou des blessures mortelles chez l’enfant et l’adulte. A PrOPOS DE CE MANUEL LISEZ ENTIÈREMENT ET ATTENTIVEMENT CES INSTRUCTIONS. Note importante destinée à l'installateur • Lisez l'intégralité des consignes d'installation avant d'installer la cuisinière. • Retirez tous les éléments d'emballage des compartiments du four avant de raccorder la cuisinière à l'alimentation électrique. • Respectez tous les codes et règlements en vigueur. • Assurez-vous de laisser ces instructions à l'utilisateur. Note importante destinée à l'utilisateur Conservez précieusement ces instructions afin que la personne chargée du contrôle électrique puisse s'y reporter. • Comme pour tout appareil générant de la chaleur, certaines consignes de sécurité sont à respecter. • Assurez-vous que votre appareil est correctement installé et mis à la terre par un installateur qualifié ou un technicien spécialisé. • Assurez-vous que les revêtements muraux situés à proximité de l'appareil peuvent résister à la chaleur générée par celui-ci. • Pour ne pas avoir à accéder à l'espace au-dessus des éléments de cuisson, évitez d'y aménager des meubles de rangement. • La cuisinière ne doit pas être placée sur un socle. POUr VOTrE SÉCUrITÉ AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Si vous ne respectez pas scrupuleusement les informations contenues dans ce manuel, vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique et, par conséquent, des dégâts matériels, blessures ou accidents mortels. AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Avant de démarrer l'installation, coupez l'alimentation au panneau de commande et verrouillez les dispositifs de débranchement de la mise en service ; cette précaution évitera toute mise sous tension accidentelle de l'appareil. Si vous ne parvenez pas à verrouiller les moyens de débranchement de la mise en service, fixez fermement au panneau de commande un dispositif d'alarme bien visible. AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Cet appareil doit être correctement mis à la terre. AVERTISSEMENT Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 2 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5501 PREPARATION DE L'INSTALLATION Préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière _3 préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière rETrAIT DE L'EMBALLAGE Retirez le matériel d'emballage. Tout matériel d'emballage non retiré risque d'endommager l'appareil. PrEPArATION DES OUTILS ET DES PIECES Outils nécessaires Perceuse Clé à molette Pince Tournevis à douille de 1/4˝ Tournevis cruciforme Tournevis plat Crayon Niveau Accessoires fournis Modèle Support anti-basculement Vis (2 ch) Cordon 4 fils ou 3 fils (homologué UL 40 ou 50 AMP) Accessoires non fournis Protection contre la traction (pour le branchement des gaines uniquement) Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 3 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:564_ Préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière VÉrIFICATION DU LIEU D'INSTALLATION Dégagements et dimensions Pour procéder à l'installation de la cuisinière, reportez-vous au schéma suivant. Concernant les installations au CANADA, une cuisinière non encastrable ne peut pas être installée à moins de 12 mm de toute surface adjacente. ATTENTION ATTENTION Cette cuisinière a été conçue pour supporter une température maximale de 194 ºF, température maximale autorisée pour toute structure en bois. Assurez-vous que le revêtement mural, les plans de travail et les meubles voisins peuvent résister à la chaleur (jusqu'à 194 ºF) générée par la cuisinière. Dans le cas contraire, des éléments peuvent se décolorer, se décoller ou fondre. A B 36” 30” 24” 6” 25” 3” 24” 3” A : Ouverture du meuble 30” pour les Etats-Unis, 30”~31” pour le CANADA. B : emplacement autorisé pour la prise électrique Dimensions minimales IMPORTANT Pour éliminer tout risque de brûlure ou d'incendie lors de l'accès à l'espace situé au-dessus des éléments de cuisson chauds, évitez d'y aménager tout meuble de rangement. Si, toutefois, un meuble de rangement doit être monté, réduisez ce risque en installant une hotte d'aspiration assurant une protection horizontale d'au moins 5" au-delà du dessous du meuble. * 30” 30” ** 15” * dégagement minimal de 30” entre le dessus de la table de cuisson et le dessous d'un meuble en métal ou en bois non protégé, ou de 24” minimum si le dessous du meuble en métal ou en bois est protégé par un carton pâte inifugeant d'au moins 1/4” recouvert par au moins une feuille d'acier n°28 MSG, d'acier inoxydable de 0.015”, d'aluminium de 0.024” ou de cuivre de 0.020”. ** 15 ” minimum entre le plan de travail et le dessous du meuble adjacent. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 4 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5602 MISE SOUS TENSION Mise sous tension _5 Mise sous tension ETAPE 1 : rESPECT DES EXIGENCES EN MATIErE DE rACCOrDEMENTS ELECTrIQUES ATTENTION ATTENTION Pour votre sécurité, n'utilisez pas de rallonge pour brancher l'appareil. Retirez le fusible de l'installation électrique ou ouvrez le disjoncteur avant de démarrer l'installation. Cet appareil doit être alimenté par la fréquence et la tension adaptées. Il doit également être branché sur un circuit individuel correctement mis à la terre et protégé par un disjoncteur ou un fusible dont l'ampérage est conforme à celui spécifi é sur la plaque signalétique de l'appareil. La plaque signalétique est située au-dessus du tiroir sur la structure du four. (Fig. 1 ou Fig. 2) Nous vous recommandons de confi er le câblage et le branchement électriques de votre cuisinière à un électricien qualifi é. Une fois l'installation eff ectuée, demandez à l'électricien de vous montrer l'emplacement de débranchement principal de votre cuisinière. Vérifi ez auprès de votre service public les codes électriques s'appliquant à votre zone. Le non-respect des codes obligatoires pour le branchement de votre four peut s'avérer dangereux. S'il n'existe pas de codes locaux, votre cuisinière doit être branchée conformément aux exigences du Code national électrique, ANSI/NFPA N° 70 (dernière édition). Vous pouvez en obtenir une copie en adressant un courrier à : National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02269 Entré en vigueur le 1er janvier 1996, le Code électrique national exige que toute construction neuve (non existante) doit être équipée d'un branchement à 4 conducteurs pour les cuisinières électriques. Lorsque vous installez une cuisinière électrique dans une construction neuve, suivez les étapes 2 et 3 relatives aux connexions à 4 fi ls. Vous devez utiliser un système électrique à 3 ou 4 fi ls, monophasé CA de 208Y/120 V ou de 240/120 V (60 Hz). Si votre installation électrique n'est pas conforme aux spécifi cations ci-dessus, contactez un électricien agréé afi n d'installer une prise homologuée. Utilisez uniquement un cordon d'alimentation à 3 ou 4 fi ls fi gurant dans la liste UL. Ces cordons nécessitent des bornes rondes sur le fi l et un dispositif de protection contre la traction. Un cordon d'alimentation nominale de 40 A et de 125/250 V minimum est indispensable. Il n'est pas recommandé d'utiliser un cordon d'alimentation de 50 A, mais si toutefois vous en utilisé un, celui-ci doit être repéré pour être utilisé avec des ouvertures de connexion de diamètre nominal 13⁄8 ”. Veillez à bien centrer le câble et le dispositif de protection contre la traction dans le trou d'éjection afi n d'empêcher que le bord n'endommage le câble. • Etant donné que les prises de la cuisinière sont inaccessibles une fois la cuisinière installée, il est nécessaire d'utiliser une gaine ou un cordon fl exible. REMARQUE Si vous utilisez une gaine, suivez l'étape 4, page 9. TOUTES LES CONSTRUCTIONS DONT LES CIRCUITS DERIVES SONT NEUFS, LES MAISONS MOBILES, LES VEHICULES ET LES INSTALLATIONS DE LOISIRS DONT LES CODES LOCAUX NE PERMETTENT PAS UNE MISE A LA TERRE PAR UNE BORNE NEUTRE, NECESSITENT L'UTILISATION D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION A 4 FILS FIGURANT DANS LA LISTE UL. (Fig. 1). (Fig. 2). Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 5 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:576_ Mise sous tension ETAPE 2 : ACCES AU BrANCHEMENT DU COrDON D'ALIMENTATION Retirez le panneau d'accès situé à l'arrière et desserrez la vis à l'aide d'un tournevis. Vous pourrez alors accéder au bornier. Capot d'accès Bornier Classifi cation de l'équipement nécessaire à la mise sous tension Classifi cation générale, watts Classifi cation de l'équipement nécessaire à la mise sous tension, ampères Diamètre (pouces) de l'ouverture de connexion de la cuisinière 120 / 240 volts, 3 fi ls Cordon d'alimentation Gaine 8750 - 16500 40 ou 50 A 13/8” 11/8” Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 6 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5802 MISE SOUS TENSION Mise sous tension _7 ETAPE 3 : INSTALLATION DU COrDON D'ALIMENTATION Pour les installations de cordons d'alimentation, branchez le dispositif de protection de câble sur l'orifi ce du cordon d'alimentation (13/8”) situé sous la partie arrière du tiroir. Insérez le cordon d'alimentation dans le dispositif et serrez-le. Protection contre la traction Cordon d'alimentation Plaque de raccordement des gaines • Le cordon d'alimentation doit être installé au moyen d'une protection contre la traction. • Fixez la protection à l'ouverture 13/8” située dans la plaque de raccordement des gaines. Installation d'un cordon d'alimentation à 3 fi ls AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT La prise de terre ou la prise neutre du cordon d'alimentation doit être connectée à la borne neutre située au centre du bornier. Les câbles d'alimentation doivent être connectés aux bornes inférieures gauches et inférieures droites du bornier. 1. Retirez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. 2. Insérez les 3 vis de la borne dans les bornes inférieures du bornier en passant par chacun des anneaux de la borne du cordon d'alimentation. Assurez-vous que le fi l central (blanc/neutre) est relié à l'emplacement central inférieur du bornier. 3. Serrez fermement les vis dans le bornier. NE retirez PAS la connexion du conducteur de terre. 4. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 de la page 10 et procédez à l'installation. Conducteur de terre Borne neutre Noir Blanc rouge Noir Blanc rouge Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 7 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:598_ Mise sous tension Installation d'un cordon d'alimentation à 4 fi ls AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT La prise neutre du circuit d'alimentation doit être connectée à la borne neutre située au centre inférieur du bornier. Les câbles d'alimentation doivent être connectés aux bornes inférieures gauches et inférieures droites du bornier. Le 4ème câble de mise à la terre doit être connecté au bâti de la cuisinière au moyen de la plaque et de la vis de masse. 1. Retirez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. Retirez la vis et la plaque de terre et conservezles. 2. Coupez et éliminez le conducteur de terre. Ne jetez aucune vis. 3. Insérez la première vis de terre dans l'anneau de la borne du fi l de mise à la terre du cordon d'alimentation, en passant par la plaque de masse puis dans le bâti de la cuisinière. 4. Insérez les 3 vis de la borne (retirées précédemment) dans les bornes inférieures du bornier en passant par chacun des anneaux de la borne du cordon d'alimentation. Assurez-vous que le fi l central (blanc/neutre) est relié à l'emplacement central inférieur du bornier. Serrez fermement les vis dans le bornier. 5. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 de la page 10 et procédez à l'installation. Conducteur de terre Plaque de terre Vis de terre Borne neutre Fil de terre (Vert) Blanc Noir rouge Noir Blanc rouge Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 8 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:0002 MISE SOUS TENSION Mise sous tension _9 ETAPE 4 : INSTALLATION DE LA GAINE Retirez la plaque de connexion de la gaine de la partie arrière du tiroir, puis faites-la pivoter comme indiqué ci-dessous. Vous devez utiliser l'orifi ce de la gaine (11/8 ”). 11/8” 13/8” 11 13/8” /8” 1. Préparez le cordon de la gaine comme le montre la fi gure 1. 2. Installez le cordon de la gaine comme le montre la fi gure 2. Plaque de raccordement des gaines Protection contre la traction Anneau Corps Figure 2 1” 31/2” 3/8” 1” 31/2” 3 fi ls 4 fi ls Surface d'éjection Figure 1 3/8” Pour les installations de gaine, insérez le câble de tension (non fourni) dans l'orifi ce de la gaine (11/8 ”). Faites ensuite passer le cordon de la gaine dans le dispositif de protection, puis serrez l'anneau. Réinstallez le support. Installation d'un conduit à 3 fi ls • Un fi l de bâtiment en aluminium peut être utilisé mais il devra être doté de l'intensité et de la tension nominales correctes permettant d'établir la connexion. Connectez les fi ls en suivant l'étape 4 selon le nombre de fi ls utilisé. • Les fi ls utilisés, les emplacements, les jonctions de fi ls, etc. doivent être conformes aux bonnes pratiques de câblage et aux codes locaux. 1. Desserrez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. 2. Insérez l'extrémité du fi l nu (blanc/neutre) central dans l'emplacement inférieur central de l'ouverture du bornier. Sur certains modèles, le fi l devra être inséré dans l'ouverture du conducteur de terre puis dans l'emplacement inférieur central de l'ouverture du bornier. 3. Insérez les deux extrémités de fi l nu latérales dans les ouvertures inférieure gauche et inférieure droite du bornier. 4. Serrez les vis jusqu'à fi xation complète du fi l (35 à 50 pouce-livre). Ne serrez pas excessivement les vis sous peine d'endommager les fi ls. 5. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 de la page 10 et procédez à l'installation. Noir Blanc rouge Conducteur de terre Borne neutre Extrémités des câbles rouge Blanc Noir Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 9 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:0110_ Mise sous tension Installation d'un conduit à 4 fi ls • Un fi l de bâtiment en aluminium peut être utilisé mais il devra être doté de l'intensité et de la tension nominales correctes permettant d'établir la connexion. Connectez les fi ls en suivant l'étape 4 selon le nombre de fi ls utilisé. • Les fi ls utilisés, les emplacements, les jonctions de fi ls, etc. doivent être conformes aux bonnes pratiques de câblage et aux codes locaux. 1. Desserrez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. Retirez la vis et la plaque de terre et conservez-les. 2. Coupez et éliminez le conducteur de terre. Ne jetez aucune vis. 3. Insérez l'extrémité du fi l de terre nu entre le bâti de la cuisinière et la plaque de terre (retirée précédemment) et fi xez-la à l'aide de la vis de terre (retirée précédemment). 4. Insérez l'extrémité du fi l nu (blanc/neutre) dans l'emplacement inférieur central de l'ouverture du bornier. 5. Insérez les deux extrémités de fi l nu latérales dans les ouvertures inférieure gauche et inférieure droite du bornier. 6. Serrez les vis jusqu'à fi xation complète du fi l (35 à 50 pouce-livre). Ne serrez pas excessivement les vis sous peine d'endommager les fi ls. 7. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 et procédez à l'installation. Conducteur de terre Plaque de terre Blanc Noir rouge Borne neutre Fil de terre (Vert) Extrémités des câbles Blanc Noir rouge ETAPE 5 : rEMISE EN PLACE DU PANNEAU D'ACCES Replacez le panneau d'accès à l'arrière de la cuisinière. Pour replacer la protection du câblage, insérez les deux saillies dans les orifi ces situés sous les ouvertures et serrez la vis. Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 10 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:03Installation de la cuisinière _11 03 INSTALLATION DE LA CUISINIERE Installation de la cuisinière INSTALLATION DU DISPOSITIF ANTI-BASCULEMENT AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Afi n de réduire les risques de basculement, fi xez la cuisinière en installant correctement le dispositif anti-basculement fourni avec cette dernière. • Reportez-vous aux consignes d'installation fournies avec le support. • Si elle n'est pas correctement installée, la cuisinière risque de basculer si vous trébuchez ou vous asseyez sur la porte. Les liquides chauds renversés ou la cuisinière elle-même sont susceptibles de provoquer des blessures. Support antibasculement La vis doit pénétrer dans le bois ou le béton *approximativement 21/32” (16.5 mm) *REMARQUE desserrez le pied de mise à niveau pour installer le support anti-basculement. Un dégagement minimum de 21/32" (16.5 mm) est nécessaire entre le dessous de la cuisinière et le sol de la cuisine. 1. Déterminez l'emplacement du support à l'aide du modèle. Le support anti-basculement est fourni avec un modèle. Les consignes comportent les informations nécessaires à l'installation. Lisez et suivez les consignes fi gurant sur la fi che (modèle) pour l'installation de la cuisinière. 2. Mise à niveau de la cuisinière Mettez la cuisinière à niveau en ajustant les pieds de réglage à l'aide d'une clé. Abaissement de la cuisinière Elévation de la cuisinière Pied de mise à niveau Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 11 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:0312_ Installation de la cuisinière 3. Vérifi cation des réglages Utilisez un niveau à bulle pour vérifi er vos réglages. Placez le niveau en diagonale sur la grille du four ou la surface de la cuisinère et vérifi ez le niveau dans chaque direction. 1. Vérifi ez la direction 1. 2. Vérifi ez la direction 2. Si le niveau à bulle n'est pas à niveau sur la grille du four ou la surface de cuisson, ajustez les pieds de mise à niveau à l'aide d'une clé. MISE AU POINT DE L'INSTALLATION • Placez la cuisinière suffi samment près de l'ouverture pour permettre le branchement de la prise. • Positionnez la cuisinière en vous assurant que le pied arrière gauche (ou arrière droit) se place sous le support anti-basculement. La distance entre la cuisinière et le mur doit être de 0" lorsque cette dernière est correctement installée. • Inclinez avec précaution la cuisinière vers l'avant afi n de vous assurer que le support antibasculement s'emboîte dans la fi xation arrière et que la cuisinière ne bascule pas. • Mettez l'appareil sous tension. Vérifi ez que la cuisinière fonctionne correctement comme indiqué dans le manuel d'utilisation. Support antibasculement Pied de mise à niveau DG68-00109F-01 Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 12 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:04 E-MANUAL Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model______________ Serial No.______________Contents e-Manual Guide Viewing the e-Manual 1 Scrolling a Page 1 Using the Top Icons 1 Returning to the Home Page 2 Searching the Index 2 Searching Pages 2 Closing the e-Manual 2 Jumping to a Menu Item 2 Updating the e-Manual Getting Started Antenna Connection Video Device Connections 4 HDMI Connection 5 Component Connection 5 AV Connection Audio Device Connections 6 Digital Audio (Optical) Connection 7 Audio Output Connection 7 ARC (Audio Return Channel) Computer Connection 8 HDMI Connection 9 HDMI-to-DVI Connection Switching Between Video Sources Programming 11 Auto Program 11 Remove Scrambled Channels Channel Management 12 Remove Channels 13 Restore Removed Channels 13 Program Rating Lock 13 Blocking Programs Using the TV Rating 14 Blocking based on Movie Rating (MPAA) 14 Blocking Based on Canadian English Rating 15 Blocking Based on Canadian French Rating 15 Blocking Based on Downloadable U.S. Rating 15 Watching Blocked / Restricted Programs 15 Rename Analog Channels Favorite Channels 17 Add Favorite Channels 17 Remove Favorite Channels 18 Rearrange the Favorite Channels List 18 Rename a Favorite Channel List 18 Copy a Favorite Channels List Network Configuration 19 Wired Network 20 Wireless Network 20 PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above 20 LED 4300 Series models 21 Wireless Network Precautions 21 Network Security Protocols Wired Network Setup 22 Automatic Wired Network Setup 22 Manual Wired Network Setup 24 Failed Wired Connection Wireless Network Setup 25 Automatic Wireless Network Setup 26 Manual Wireless Network Setup 28 Using the WPS Button 28 Failed Wireless Connection 29 Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses Checking the Network Status Mobile Device Connection 31 Wi-Fi Direct 31 AllShare Settings 31 Rename the TV IIControlling the TV Smart Touch Control 32 Inserting the Batteries (AAA X 2) 32 Connecting to the TV 33 Reconnecting the Smart Touch Control 33 Battery Low Alarm 34 Buttons and Descriptions 36 Special Functions Using the touch pad 37 Dragging 37 Pressing 38 Flicking 38 Pressing and Holding 38 Pressing and Dragging 39 Scrolling Up/Down 39 Scrolling Left/Right 40 Changing Channels by Entering Numbers 40 Numerical Input Guide 40 Adjusting the Touch pad 41 Show Status and Notification Banner 41 Recommended 41 History 41 Deleting History Data 41 Searching Virtual Remote Control 42 Changing the Virtual Remote Control Panel 42 Change a position of the Virtual Remote Panel 42 Using the Number Panel 42 Using the Playback Control Panel 42 Using the Quick Access Panel 42 Adjusting the virtual remote control Universal Remote Setup 43 Connecting the IR Extender 44 Add the External Device 44 Using the Universal Remote Control 44 Registered External Device Management Entering Text using the Onscreen Keypad 45 Entering Text using the QWERTY Keypad 45 Additional Features SMART Interaction 46 Precautions 46 Face Recognition 46 TV Camera Use 47 Motion Control 47 Voice Recognition Voice Recognition 48 Operating Environment 49 Enabling Voice Recognition 49 Voice Recognition Tutorial 49 Basic Voice Recognition Use 49 Voice Recognition Settings 50 Interactive Voice Recognition Commands 50 Deactivating Voice Recognition Motion Control 51 Operating Environment 52 Motion Control Environment Test 52 Motion Control Tutorial 52 Motion Control Activation 53 Using the Basic Motion Controls 53 Motion Control Options 54 Motion Control Screen 54 The Screen Composition while Viewing TV 55 The Smart Hub Screen Composition Face Recognition 57 Operating Environment 58 Face Registration 58 Face Registration from the Smart Hub account information screen 59 Face Registration for the Smart Hub account using face recognition 59 Face Recognition Login Using Peripheral Devices 60 Keyboard Connection 60 Keyboard Use 61 Mouse Connection 61 Mouse Use II IIITV Viewing TV Viewing 62 Program Info 62 Change the Broadcast Signal 63 Guide 63 Change Channels 63 Change Category 63 Quick Navigation 64 Schedule Viewing 64 Checking the Program Info 65 Channel List 65 Change Channels 65 Genre 66 Change the Broadcast Signal 66 Change the Channel List Schedule Viewing 67 Digital Channel Schedule Viewing 68 Guide 68 Program Info 68 Analog Channel Schedule Viewing 68 Cancel a Schedule Viewing 68 Edit Schedule List 3D TV 69 Precautions 70 Restrictions 70 Tips 71 Activating 3D Mode 71 Setting 3D Effects PIP Analog Screen Calibration 73 Fine Tune Broadcast Audio Options 74 Digital Broadcast Audio Options 74 Analog Broadcast Audio Options Sports Mode Subtitles 75 Show Subtitles 75 Subtitle Options 75 Subtitle Display Options TV Settings Basic Picture Settings 76 Changing the Picture Mode 77 Picture Quality 77 Applying the Current Picture Quality Setting to Another Input 78 Picture Size 79 Screen Position 79 Picture Off 79 Reset Image Settings Advanced Settings Picture Options Basic Sound Settings 84 Changing the Sound Mode 85 Adjusting the Sound Settings 85 Auto Volume 85 TV Installation Type 85 Resetting the Sound 3D Audio Speaker Settings 87 Speaker Select 88 Digital Audio Output 88 Samsung Audio Device Connection IVClock and Timer 89 Setting the Time 90 Auto 90 Manual 90 Sleep Timer 91 On Timer 91 Off Timer Screen Protection and Maintenance 92 Eco Solution 93 Screen Burn Protection 93 Pixel Shift 93 Auto Protection Time 94 Scrolling 94 Side Gray 94 Auto Protection Time Password 95 Change Password Additional Features 96 Changing the Menu Language 96 Game Mode 96 Precautions and Restrictions 97 BD Wise 97 Menu Transparency 97 Sound Feedback 97 Panel Locking 97 Booting Logo 97 DivX® Video On Demand SMART TV Features Smart Hub 98 Agreements Required to Use Smart Hub 99 Samsung Account 99 Creating a Samsung Account 99 Logging In 100 Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy 100 Linking a Samsung Account to Other Accounts 100 Managing Accounts 101 Resetting Smart Hub Searching 101 Keyword Search 101 Setting Search Scope Status and Notification 102 Show Status and Notification Banner 102 Voice Recognition & Motion Control Configuration 102 Samsung Account Configuration 102 Network Configuration 102 Check Notifications Social 103 Social Settings 103 Checking the Application 103 Connecting a Service to a Samsung Account 104 Watching Videos 104 Friend Profile 104 Video Calling a Friend 104 Filters Apps 105 Precautions 106 Installing Standard Applications 106 Launching an Application 106 Samsung Apps 106 Searching for Apps 106 Installing Applications 107 Apps Management 107 Edit My Apps 108 Deleting Applications 108 Managing Application Folders 108 Application Lock/Unlock 108 Application Update IV V109 Fitness 109 Creating a Profile 109 Kids 110 WebBrowser 110 Social Networks 110 Linking Service Accounts 111 Apps Settings 111 Auto Ticker 111 Push Notification Settings 111 Channel-Bound Apps 111 Properties On TV 113 On TV Settings 113 On TV Setup 113 Recommendation Notice 113 Auto Start 113 Recommendation Method 113 Adult Contents Block 114 Watching an On-Air Recommended Program 114 Scheduled Recommended Program Info 114 Activating the Guide 114 Program Recommendations by Time Movies & TV Shows 116 Buying Movies 116 Playing Movies 116 Parental Control Photos, Videos & Music 117 Restrictions 118 Supported File Formats 118 USB Device Connection 118 USB Device Removal 119 Playing all the Content on a Storage Device 119 Clearing the Recent Playlist 119 Using Networked External Storage Devices 120 Allowing DLNA Device Connections 120 AllShare 120 Exporting Contents Videos 121 Changing the view mode 121 Playlist Creation 122 Opening a Different File 122 Video Scanning 123 Show Subtitles 123 Additional Video Playback Settings Music 124 Changing the view mode 124 Playlist Creation 125 Music Scanning 125 Opening a Different File 125 Additional Music Playback Settings Photos 126 Changing the view mode 126 Slide Show 126 Slide Show Settings 126 Playlist Creation 127 Opening a Different File 127 Background Music 127 Mini Player 127 Additional Photo Playback Settings Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 128 Precautions 129 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Setup 129 Using the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 129 Switching between Anynet+ Devices 130 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Device Menu 130 ARC Sharing Mobile Device Screens on the TV 131 Screen Mirroring 131 Mobile Device Connection VIOther Information Support 132 Remote Management 133 What is Remote Support? 133 How Does it Work? 134 e-Manual 134 Self Diagnosis 134 Picture Test 135 Sound Test 135 Motion Control Environment Check 135 Signal Information 135 Reset 136 Updating the Software 136 Update now 136 Auto Update 137 Usage Mode 137 Support Info Kensington Security Lock Display Resolution 138 PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above 138 IBM 138 MAC 139 VESA DMT 140 LED 4300 series models 140 IBM 140 MAC 141 VESA DMT Picture Size and Input Signal Supported 3D Resolutions 143 HDMI 143 3D Format: L/R, T/B 143 3D Format: Frame Packing 144 Component 144 Digital Channel 144 Videos/Photos 144 HDMI PC Mode Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec 145 Subtitle 145 External 145 Internal 146 Supported image resolutions 146 Supported music file formats 147 Video Codec 147 Other Restrictions 148 Video Decoders 148 Audio Decoders 3D Precautions 149 Viewing guidelines 150 CAUTION! 151 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Licenses Troubleshooting Screen Sound 3D TV Antenna (Air/Cable) Connection PC Connection Networking Miscellaneous Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Apps Photos, Videos & Music Reset the Personal Info and TV settings Web Browser VI VII1 e-Manual Guide Viewing the e-Manual The embedded e-Manual contains information about your TV's key features. Navigate to the screen menu and select e-Manual (Support > e-Manual (Troubleshooting)). 11 Select a category from the left side of the screen. 21 Select an item. The e-Manual will open on the page containing the selected information. " Words in blue refer to screen menu options and words in light blue refer to remote control buttons. " Arrows are used to indicate the menu path. (Example: Screen Menu > Support > e-Manual (Troubleshooting)) Scrolling a Page To scroll a page, use of one of the following methods: PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above ● Press the or button on the scroll bar at the right edge of the screen. ● Drag or flick up or down from the line on either the left or right edge of the touch pad. This method is not available with LED 4300 - 6300 series. ● Place the focus on the or button at the right edge of the screen, drag or flick up or down on the touch pad. LED 4300 - 6300 series ● Press the or button on the scroll bar at the right edge of the screen. ● Place the focus on the or button at the right edge of the screen, press the up or down arrow button on the remote. Using the Top Icons Use the Back, Forward, and Opened pages icons on the top left of the screen to navigate through pages. These icons are available when two or more pages are passed. Returning to the Home Page PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above To return to the home page, select the a button on the virtual remote panel or select on the top right of the screen. " To select a letter button (a, b, {, }), press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control to display a panel of the virtual remote. Flick the Touch Pad until the Playback Control Panel appears, select the a button, and then press the Touch Pad. LED 4300 - 6300 series To return to the home page, press the a button or select on the top right of the screen.2 Searching the Index PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Select the b button on the virtual remote panel or select on the top right of the screen to display the index. Select a term to display the page containing the term. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the b button or select on the top right of the screen to display the index. Select a term to display the page containing the term. Searching Pages PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Select the { button on the virtual remote panel or select on the top right of the screen, and enter search criteria. Select a page from the list of search results to display it. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the { button or select on the top right of the screen, and enter search criteria. Select a page from the list of search results to display it. Closing the e-Manual PDP 5500, LED 6400, 6800 and 7050/7100 series To close the e-Manual, press and hold the RETURN button or select at the upper-right corner of the screen. LED 4300 - 6300 series To close the e-Manual, press the EXIT button or select at the upper-right corner of the screen. Jumping to a Menu Item To directly jump to the menu item that is described in the current section, select Try Now. It is possible to jump from a menu item directly to the related section in the e-Manual. PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above On the screen menu, press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control and then select e-Manual on the virtual remote panel that appears on the screen. LED 4300 - 6300 series On the screen menu, press the E-MANUAL button that appears on the screen. " This feature may not be available, depending on the menu. Updating the e-Manual Press the button and select Apps, and then select More Apps. The e-Manual can be updated in the same way with an application update. On the More Apps screen, select Update Apps, and then select e-Manual from the list. The e-Manual starts updating to the latest version. However, Update Apps appears on the screen only when the update is required.2 3 Getting Started Antenna Connection Refer to the diagram and connect the antenna cable to the antenna input connector. Make sure that you do not bend the cable. The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. Connect the correct antenna cable for your viewing environment (over-the-air or cable broadcasting). However, an antenna connection is not necessary if you are using a cable box or satellite receiver. The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Video Device Connections This TV has a wide range of connectors for video input from video devices such as Blu-ray players, DVD players, camcorders and gaming consoles. Below is a list of featured connectors shown in descending order of picture quality. ● HDMI ● Component ● AV Connect the video device to the TV via an HDMI connector for the best picture quality. If the device does not have an HDMI connector, try a component connector to get the next best possible picture quality. The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. When connecting an external device, refer to the device's operating manual. The number of external device connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the manufacturer.4 HDMI Connection Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI cable to the video device's HDMI output connector and the TV's HDMI input connector. One of the following HDMI cable types is recommended: ● High-Speed HDMI Cable ● High-Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet Use an HDMI cable with a thickness of 14 mm or less. Using a non-certified HDMI cable may result in a blank screen or a connection error. " Some HDMI cables and devices may not be compatible with the TV due to different HDMI specifications. " This TV does not support the HDMI Ethernet Channel. The displayed image may differ depending on the model.4 5 Component Connection Connect the TV’s component video and audio input connectors to the external device’s component video and audio output connectors using a component cable, so that the connectors of the same color connect to each other, as shown in the figure. The displayed image may differ depending on the model. AV Connection Refer to the diagram and connect the AV cable to the TV's external input connectors and the device's AV output connectors. Certain models combine the external video input connector and the component Y connector into a single connector. If this is the case, connect the video cable to the Y connector. The displayed image may differ depending on the model.6 Audio Device Connections This TV has a wide range of connectors for audio input from devices such as amplifiers, Blu-ray players and DVD players. For better audio quality, it is a good idea to use an AV receiver. ● Digital Audio (Optical) ● Audio ● ARC (Audio Return Channel) The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model. When connecting an external device, refer to the device's operating manual. The number of external device connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the manufacturer. Digital Audio (Optical) Connection Refer to the diagram and connect the optical cable to the TV's digital audio output connector and the device's digital audio input connector. Connecting the device using an optical cable does not automatically turn off the TV speakers. To turn off the TV speakers, open the Speaker Select (Sound > Speaker Settings > Speaker Select) menu, then set External Speaker. Adjust the audio device's volume using its remote control. An unusual noise coming from the audio device while it is being used may indicate a problem with the audio device itself. If this is the case, ask for assistance from the audio device manufacturer. 5.1-channel audio for digital channels is only available with broadcasts that support 5.1-channel audio. The displayed image may differ depending on the model.6 7 Audio Output Connection Refer to the diagram and connect the audio cable to the TV's audio output connector and the device's audio input connector. The displayed image may differ depending on the model. ARC (Audio Return Channel) The ARC function is not available for LED 4300 and 5500 series model. This TV supports 3D and ARC (Audio Return Channel) functions via an HDMI cable. ARC enables digital sound to be output using just an HDMI cable. However, ARC is only available through the HDMI (ARC) port and only when the TV is connected to an ARC-enabled AV receiver. Connect the HDMI cable to the TV's HDMI (ARC) connector and the device's HDMI output connector. The displayed image may differ depending on the model.8 Computer Connection This TV supports the HDMI/DVI port for connect the computer. Not all computers are HDMI-enabled. In this case, use an HDMI-to-DVI cable to connect the computer to the TV. Refer to the "Display Resolution" for information on the resolution settings supported to the TV. HDMI Connection Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI cable to the TV's HDMI input port and the computer's HDMI output port. The displayed image may differ depending on the model.8 9 HDMI-to-DVI Connection Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI-to-DVI cable to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port and the computer's DVI output port. The HDMI-to-DVI connection is available through the HDMI (DVI) port only. DVI cannot carry audio. To listen to the computer sound, connect the external speaker to the computer’s audio output connector. The displayed image may differ depending on the model.10 Switching Between Video Sources Press the SOURCE button to switch between devices connected to the TV. For example, to switch to a game console connected to the second HDMI connector, press the SOURCE button. From the Source list, select HDMI2. The connector names may vary depending on the product. Select Tools at the upper-right corner of the Source screen to access the following functions. ● Edit Name: You can rename devices connected to the TV to more easily identify external sources. With a computer connected to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port via an HDMI cable, for example, you can change Edit Name to PC. With a computer connected to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, for example, you can change Edit Name to DVI PC. With an AV device connected to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, for example, you can change Edit Name to DVI Devices. ● Information: View detailed information about the connected devices. ● Refresh: Select this if a connected device does not appear in the list. If the list does not show the device after selecting Refresh, check the status of the TV-to-device connection. ● Remove USB: Remove the USB device from the list to safely. This function is only available when the USB device selected. To add a new external device to control it with the Touch Remote Control, press the SOURCE button and select Universal Remote Setup on the top right of the screen. Using the universal remote control, users can control external devices connected to the TV, such as a set-top box, Blu-ray player, and AV receiver. For details, see "Universal Remote Setup". " The Universal Remote Setup function is not available for LED 4300 series.10 11 Programming Scan and index available channels. Broadcasting Auto Program Antenna Cable Channel List Guide Schedule Manager Edit Channel Edit Favorites " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. You can also remove channels from the index, restore removed channels and designate favorite channels for a more convenient TV viewing experience. Programming is not necessary if you are connected to a cable or satellite receiver. Auto Program Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Auto Program Try Now Automatically scans and indexes all channels received through the TV's antenna input connector. 11 To start, navigate to Broadcasting and select Auto Program. 21 Select Start when prompted with a message. This initiates the Auto Program function. The process can take up to 30 minutes to complete. If starting the Auto Program function when there is an existing index of channels overwrites the previous index. Remove Scrambled Channels Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Clear Scrambled Channel Try Now Remove scrambled channels (ex: pay-per-view channels) from channel list. To remove scrambled channels, run this function. This function is enabled only for cable TVs when at least one digital channel is available.12 Channel Management Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Edit Channel Try Now Try Now Broadcasting Auto Program Antenna Cable Channel List Guide Schedule Manager Edit Channel Edit Favorites " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Remove channels from the index, restore removed channels, and rename analog channels. The Edit Channel screen icons indicate the following: ● : An analog channel ● : A favorite channel ● : A locked channel In the Edit Channel screen, select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to access the following options: ● Antenna: Choose between Cable and Air. ● Category: The TV's channel index is divided into different categories such as All, Added Ch., Recently Viewed and Mostly Viewed. Choose a category. ● Edit Favorites: You can designate frequently watched channels as favorites. For details, see "Favorite Channels". ● Information: View detailed information about the current program. Remove Channels Remove registered channels from the index. Removing channels appearing in the Recently Viewed or Mostly Viewed list clears the channels from the list only and does not remove them from the index. 11 From the screen, select the channels you wish to remove. Unselect channels by choosing them again. 21 Select the { button on the virtual remote panel or press the { button on regular remote control. The selected channel(s) will be deleted.12 13 Restore Removed Channels Restore removed channels. Removed channels are displayed in gray on the All list. In addition, the Add option is only available for removed channels. 11 From the screen, press TOOLS button. Select Category and then select All. 21 From the All list, select the channels you wish to restore. Unselect channels by choosing them again. 31 Select the { button on the virtual remote panel or press the { button on standard remote control. The selected channel(s) will be added. Program Rating Lock Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Program Rating Lock The Program Rating Lock blocks programs with ratings higher than those desired. This is useful for controlling what children watch on TV. This will not function for programs originating from external sources, such as DVD players or USB files. This PIN is required to watch a blocked program. The Program Rating Lock is available only in TV mode. Blocking Programs Using the TV Rating To block content, select a rating entry to lock. All programs at that level and higher are blocked and require the PIN to watch. To unblock a category, select the lock icon. To unblock all the categories in a row, select the lock under ALL. Categories on the left: ● TV-Y: Young children ● TV-Y7: Children 7 and over ● TV-G: General audience ● TV-PG: Parental guidance ● TV-14: Viewers 14 and over ● TV-MA: Mature audience Categories on the top: ● ALL: Lock all TV ratings. ● FV: Fantasy violence ● V: Violence ● S: Sexual situations ● L: Adult Language ● D: Sexually Suggestive Dialog14 Blocking based on Movie Rating (MPAA) Block movies based on their MPAA rating. This applies to all material with supplied ratings in the USA. From the MPAA: “The Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) has implemented a rating system that provides parents or guardians with advanced information on which films are appropriate for children.” Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To unblock a category, select the lock icon. ● G: General audience (no restrictions). ● PG: Parental guidance suggested. ● PG-13: Parents strongly cautioned. ● R: Restricted. Children under 17 should be accompanied by an adult. ● NC-17: No children under age 17. ● X: Adults only. ● NR: Not rated. Blocking Based on Canadian English Rating Block material based on its English Canadian rating. This applies to all rated material viewed on English-Canadian TV channels. Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To unblock a category, select the lock icon. ● C: Programming intended for children under age 8 ● C8+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own ● G: General programming, suitable for all audiences. ● PG: Parental Guidance ● 14+: Programming containing themes or content which may not be suitable for viewers under the age of 14 ● 18+: Adult programming14 15 Blocking Based on Canadian French Rating Block material based on its French Canadian rating. This applies to all rated material viewed on French-Canadian TV channels. Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To unblock a category, select the lock icon. G: General 8 ans+: Programming acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own 13 ans+: Programming that may not be suitable for children under the age of 13 16 ans+: Programming not suitable for children under the age of 16 18 ans+: Programming restricted to adults Blocking Based on Downloadable U.S. Rating Block material based on its Downloadable U.S. Rating. This rating system only applies to material originating from US DTV channels. Parental restriction information is automatically downloaded while watching DTV channels. This download may take several seconds. If the information is unavailable from the broadcasting station, the Downloadable U.S. Rating menu is deactivated. Parental restriction levels differ depending on the broadcasting station, and the default menu name and the Downloadable U.S. Rating name changes depending on the downloaded information. Even when the on-screen display is set to another language, the Downloadable U.S. Rating menu appears only in English. Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To unblock a category, select the lock icon. Watching Blocked / Restricted Programs To watch a blocked program, enter the PIN when requested. When initially showing a restricted program or movie, the screen is blank because the Program Rating Lock blocks it. Enter the PIN to unblock the program when a message appears requesting the code. Rename Analog Channels Select a channel you wish to rename from the Edit Channel screen, press TOOLS button, and then select Rename Channel from the list. You can now rename the selected channel. The new name can be up to 5 characters long.16 Favorite Channels Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Edit Favorites Try Now Broadcasting Auto Program Antenna Cable Channel List Guide Schedule Manager Edit Channel Edit Favorites " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. You can designate frequently watched channels as favorites. The channels assigned as a favorite are displayed with the symbol on the Edit Channel and channel list screens. You can create up to 5 favorite channel lists. You can also rename and edit favorite channel lists. From the Edit Channel screen, select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to access the following options: ● Antenna: Choose between Cable and Air. ● Edit Channel: You can manage the channels saved on the TV. For details, see "Channel Management". ● Information: View detailed information about the current program.16 17 Add Favorite Channels Add a channel to a favorite channels list. PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above 11 Select the a button on the virtual remote panel to bring up the channel list containing the channels you wish to add and then select the channels. However, the a button is available only when the Recently Viewed or Mostly Viewed channel list has one or more channel entries. 21 Select the b button to bring up a favorite channels list and then select the { button to add the selected channels. LED 4300 - 6300 series 11 Press the a button to bring up the channel list containing the channels you wish to add and then select the channels. However, the a button is available only when the Recently Viewed or Mostly Viewed channel list has one or more channel entries. 21 Press the b button to bring up a favorite channels list and then press the { button to add the selected channels. Remove Favorite Channels Remove channels from a favorite channels list. PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above 11 Select the b button on the virtual remote panel to bring up a favorite channels list and then select the channels you wish to remove. 21 Select the { button on the virtual remote panel to remove the channels from the list. LED 4300 - 6300 series 11 Press the b button to bring up a favorite channels list and then select the channels you wish to remove. 21 Press the { button to remove the channels from the list.18 Rearrange the Favorite Channels List Rearrange the order of the channels in a Favorite Channels List. PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above 11 Select the b button on the virtual remote panel to bring up the favorite channels list and select the channel you wish to move. 21 Select the a button on the virtual remote panel to rearrange the order of the selected channel. Press the touch pad to finish. LED 4300 - 6300 series 11 Press the b button to bring up the favorite channels list and select the channel you wish to move. 21 Press the a button to rearrange the order of the selected channel. Press E button to finish. Rename a Favorite Channel List Rename an existing favorite channels list. 11 Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display the list. Select Rename Favorites from the list. 21 Rename the list in the popup window. The new name can be up to 20 characters long. Copy a Favorite Channels List Copy channels from one favorite channels list to another. 11 Select the b button on the virtual remote panel or press b button on regular remote control to bring up a Favorite Channels List and select the channels you wish to copy. 21 Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display the list. Select Copy to Favorites from the list, and then select the Favorite Channels List(s) you wish to copy to. This copies over the channels to the selected Favorite Channels List(s).18 19 Network Configuration Connecting the TV to a network gives you access to online services such as the Smart Hub as well as software updates. Wired Network There are three ways to connect the TV to a Local Area Network (LAN). ● External Modem ● ① IP Router + ② External Modem ● Wall-mounted LAN Outlet20 Wireless Network PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above Connect the TV to the Internet using a standard router or modem. LED 4300 Series models Refer to the diagram and connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter (WIS09ABGNX or WIS12ABGNX) to the USB port. To connect wirelessly, the TV should be attach a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter on the TV. Then, connect the TV to the Internet using a standard router or modem. The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is sold separately. The picture may appear corrupted or have static for some channels when the TV is connected to the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter. If this occurs, establish a connection using one of the following methods or connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using a USB cable in a place that is not affected by radio interference. ● The USB right angle adapter: Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the USB right angle adapter. ● The USB extension cable: Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the USB extension cable. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter to the back of the TV near the top, using double-sided adhesive tape.20 21 Wireless Network Precautions PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above ● This TV supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g /n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. Otherwise when you play video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly. ● To use a wireless network, the TV must be connected to a wireless router or modem. If the wireless router supports DHCP, the TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. ● Select a channel that is not currently in use for the wireless router. If the channel set for the wireless router is currently being used by another device, the result is usually interference and/or a communications failure. ● Most wireless networks have an optional security system. To enable a wireless network's security system, you need to create a security key using characters and numbers. This security key is then needed to connect to the wireless network. LED 4300 Series models ● Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter supports the IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. Otherwise when you play video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly. ● To use a wireless network, the TV must be connected to a wireless router or modem. If the wireless router supports DHCP, the TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. ● Select a channel that is not currently in use for the wireless router. If the channel set for the wireless router is currently being used by another device, the result is usually interference and/or a communications failure. ● Most wireless networks have an optional security system. To enable a wireless network's security system, you need to create a security key using characters and numbers. This security key is then needed to connect to the wireless network. Network Security Protocols The TV only supports the following wireless network security protocols and is unable to connect to non-certified wireless routers: ● Authentication Modes: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK ● Encryption Types: WEP, TKIP, AES If the wireless router has been set to Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n mode and the Encryption Type to WEP or TKIP, Samsung TVs will not support the connection in compliance with the new Wi-Fi certification specifications. If the wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), it is possible to connect to the network using PBC (Push Button Configuration) or a PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS automatically configures the SSID and WPA key settings.22 Wired Network Setup Screen Menu > Network > Network Settings Try Now Network Network Status Network Settings Wi-Fi Direct AllShare Settings Device Name [TV]Samsung LE... " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Automatic Wired Network Setup The TV's wired network connection is automatically configured when it is connected to a network that supports DHCP. 11 Set Network type to Wired and then select Connect. 21 The TV attempts to connect to the network. A confirmation message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed. If the attempt fails, try again or connect manually. Manual Wired Network Setup If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values to connect to the network manually. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Refer to the "Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses" for more information.22 23 11 Set Network type to Wired and then select Connect. Network Settings Select your network type. Network type Wired Connect Plug a network cable into the back of your TV. 21 Select Stop when the TV attempts to connect to the network. Once the network connection has been interrupted, select IP Settings. Network Settings Connection verification cancelled. Wired network connection test is stopped. Change Network IP Settings Retry Close 31 From the IP Settings screen, set IP Setting to Enter manually, enter IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and the DNS Server values, and then select OK. IP Settings IP Setting Enter manually IP Address 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 DNS Setting Enter manually DNS Server 0.0.0.0 OK Cancel 41 The TV attempts to connect to the network again using the specified settings. A confirmation message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed.24 Failed Wired Connection No network cable found Try Now Try Now Make sure the network cable is plugged in. If it is connected, make sure the router is turned on. If it is on, try turning it off and on again. IP auto setting failed Try Now Perform the following or set the IP address manually from IP Settings. 11 Ensure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router and reset the router. 21 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Unable to connect to the network Try Now Check the following: 11 Check the IP Settings settings. 21 Ensure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router and unplug and then plug the router back in. 31 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet Try Now 11 Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port. 21 Check the DNS settings under IP Settings. 31 If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Network setup complete, but unable to connect to the Internet Try Now If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider.24 25 Wireless Network Setup Screen Menu > Network > Network Settings Network Network Status Network Settings Wi-Fi Direct AllShare Settings Device Name [TV]Samsung LE... " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Automatic Wireless Network Setup Connect the TV to the Internet via a wireless router. Check the wireless router's SSID and security key settings before attempting to connect. The security key can be found on the wireless router's configuration screen. 11 Setting Network type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. 21 Select the network (SSID) you wish to connect to. If the desired wireless router doesn't appear in the list, select Add Network and enter the network's SSID manually. 31 Enter the security key and select Done. If the selected network is not security-enabled, the TV will attempt a connection right away. 41 The TV attempts to connect to the network. A confirmation message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed. If the attempt fails, try again or connect manually.26 Manual Wireless Network Setup If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values to connect to the network manually. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Refer to the "Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses" for more information. 11 Setting Network type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. Network Settings Select your network type. Network type Wireless Wireless network AP0000 AP0001 Add Network You can connect your TV to the internet. Please select which wireless network to use. Refresh WPS(PBC) 21 Select the network (SSID) you wish to connect to. If the desired wireless router doesn't appear in the list, select Add Network and enter the network's SSID manually. 31 Enter the security key and select Done. If the selected network is not security-enabled, the TV will attempt a connection right away.26 27 41 Select Stop when the TV attempts to connect to the network. Once the network connection has been interrupted, select IP Settings. Network Settings Connection verification cancelled. Wireless network connection test is stopped. Change Network IP Settings Retry Close 51 From the IP Settings screen, set IP Setting to Enter manually, enter IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and the DNS Server values, and then select OK. IP Settings IP Setting Enter manually IP Address 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway 0.0.0.0 DNS Setting Enter manually DNS Server 0.0.0.0 OK Cancel 61 The TV attempts to connect to the network again using the specified settings. A confirmation message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed.28 Using the WPS Button If the router has a WPS push button, you can use it to connect the TV to the router automatically. WPS automatically configures the SSID and WPA key settings. 11 Setting Network type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks. 21 Select WPS(PBC) and then press the router's WPS button within two minutes. 31 The TV automatically acquires the SSID and security key settings and connects to the network. A confirmation message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed. Failed Wireless Connection Wireless network connection failed, or no wireless router selected. Try Now Try Now Go to Network Settings and select the correct router. Unable to connect to a wireless router Try Now Try Now Check the following: 11 Check that the router is turned on, and if it is, turn it off and on again. 21 Enter the correct security key if required. IP auto setting failed Try Now Perform the following or set the IP address manually from IP Settings. 11 Make sure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router and unplug and plug the router back in. 21 Enter the correct security key if required. 31 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information.28 29 Unable to connect to the network Try Now Check the following: 11 Check the IP Settings settings. 21 Enter the correct security key if required. 31 If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet Try Now 11 Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port. 21 Check the DNS settings under IP Settings. 31 If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Network setup complete, but unable to connect to the Internet Try Now If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider. Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses If the network requires a dynamic IP address, use an ADSL modem or router that supports the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values the TV needs to access the Internet, so they do not have to be entered manually. Most home networks use a dynamic IP address. If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually when setting up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If the network requires a static IP address, use an ADSL modem that supports DHCP. ADSL modems that support DHCP also allow static IP addresses.30 Checking the Network Status Screen Menu > Network > Network Status Try Now Network Network Status Network Settings Wi-Fi Direct AllShare Settings Device Name [TV]Samsung LE... " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. View the current network and Internet status. Mobile Device Connection Network Network Status Network Settings Wi-Fi Direct AllShare Settings Device Name [TV]Samsung LE... " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. You can either directly connect a mobile device to the TV with no need for a wireless router or connect them on the same network to play media files from the mobile device on the TV.30 31 Wi-Fi Direct Screen Menu > Network > Wi-Fi Direct Try Now Connect a mobile device that supports Wi-Fi Direct to the TV without using a wireless router. 11 Enable Wi-Fi Direct on the mobile device and then launch Wi-Fi Direct. The TV automatically scans for and displays a list of available devices. The TV's name also appears on the mobile device. 21 Select the device from the list to initiate a connection. If a connection request is made by the TV, a permission message appears on the mobile device and vice versa. Accept the request to connect the mobile device to the TV. AllShare Settings Screen Menu > Network > AllShare Settings This TV can play media files from computers or other DLNA-enabled devices connected to the TV via a network. For details, see "Using Networked External Storage Devices". In addition, this TV can be used as a display for mobile devices, including smartphones and tablets. For details, see "Screen Mirroring". Rename the TV Screen Menu > Network > Device Name Try Now Assign a unique name for your TV. The assigned name appears on the external devices connected to the TV via the network.32 Controlling the TV Smart Touch Control Smart Touch Control is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. The Smart Touch Control makes it easier and more convenient to use the TV. For example, you can use the remote control's built-in touch pad to move the focus and make selections as you would on a computer using a mouse. In addition, you can use the virtual remote panel displayed on the screen to change channels, play media files, and access favorites. Inserting the Batteries (AAA X 2) 11 Slightly lift the battery cover by pulling the strap or using a plastic card. Next, pull on the cover’s notch with a fingernail to remove the cover completely. " Check the location of the battery cover groove. The groove’s location may vary depending on the type of Smart Touch Control is provided with the product. 21 Insert 2 AAA batteries, making sure to align the positive and negative ends correctly. 31 Align the battery cover with the back of the remote control and press down along the edges until it is cleanly attached to the remote control. Connecting to the TV In order to operate the TV using a Smart Touch Control, you must first pair it to the TV via Bluetooth. However, the Smart Touch Control is only available for the paired Samsung TV. 11 To turn on the TV, point the Smart Touch Control at the remote control receiver of the TV and press the TV button. The remote control receiver's location may vary depending on the model. 21 A Bluetooth icon will appear at the bottom left of the screen as shown below. The TV will then attempt to connect to the Smart Touch Control automatically. 32 33 Reconnecting the Smart Touch Control If you need to reestablish the connection between the TV and the Smart Touch Control unit, press the pairing button at the back of the Smart Touch Control. The pairing button can be accessed by removing the Smart Touch Control's battery cover. Pressing the pairing button automatically reestablishes the connection between the control and the TV. Battery Low Alarm If the battery becomes low while using the Smart Touch Control, the following alarm window blinks and appears at the bottom of the left screen. If the alarm window pops up, replace the batteries of the Smart Touch Control. Use alkaline batteries for longer usage. 34 Buttons and Descriptions 34 35 Buttons Descriptions TV Turns the TV on/off. SOURCE Changes the source. STB Turn on and off the satellite or cable set-top box connected to the TV. For this, the Smart Touch Control must be configured as a universal remote control. Refer to "Universal Remote Setup" for more information. VOL Adjusts the volume. VOICE Run Voice Recognition. To speak a voice command, press and hold the VOICE button and say a voice command. Refer to "Voice Recognition" for more information. MUTE Turns the TV sound on/off. CH Changes the channel. MORE Displays the virtual remote panel on the screen. The virtual remote panel consists of a number panel, a playback control panel, and a quick access panel. Use the touch pad to select numbers and buttons. Refer to "Virtual Remote Control" for more information. Touch pad Drag your finger on the touch pad as you would on the touch pad of a laptop to move the focus displayed on the screen. To select item, press the touch pad. Refer to "Using the touch pad" for more information. RETURN / EXIT Returns to the previous menu. SMART HUB Launch Smart Hub. While an application is running, pressing the SMART HUB button terminates the application. Refer to "Smart Hub" for more information. GUIDE Check the digital channel broadcasting schedule. Refer to "Guide" for more information. LIGHT (for U.S.A. and Canada) Turn on the backlight for the buttons. The backlight lasts for only a few seconds. Turns the remote control light on or off. When on, the buttons become illuminated for a moment when pressed. (Using the remote control with this button set to On will reduce the battery usage time.) DVR (for U.S.A. and Canada) This button is only available when the Smart Touch Control is configured to function as a universal remote control to control a settop box. Run DVR (Digital Video Recording) in set-top box. MENU Opens the OSD. 3D Turns the 3D image on or off. Refer to "3D TV" for more information. ¥ (for the other countries) Enable Sports Mode for the optimal sports viewing experience. INFO (for the other countries) Displays information on the TV screen.36 Special Functions Press and hold the following Smart Touch Control buttons to access various special functions. Buttons Descriptions Touch pad Press and hold the touch pad while watching TV to display CH List on the screen. In addition, you can press and hold the touch pad for 2 seconds or more while an application is running to access the application's hidden features. (Not available with all applications.) RETURN Press and hold this button to quit the current process or app. MORE Press and hold the touch pad to select a desired function (e.g. e-Manual, TOOLS, INFO, etc.) easily.36 37 Using the touch pad Use the touch pad to perform various commands. Navigate to Tutorial (System > Device Manager > Smart Touch Control Settings > Tutorial) to view an on-screen guide to using the Smart Touch Control. Dragging Drag on the touch pad in the desired direction. Move the focus or the pointer in the direction the finger is dragging. Pressing Press the touch pad. This selects the focused item. 38 Flicking Flick on the touch pad in the desired direction. This moves the focus or scrolls the screen based on the direction and speed of the flick. Pressing and Holding Press and hold the touch pad while watching TV to display CH List on the screen. In addition, you can press and hold the touch pad for 2 seconds or more while an application is running to access the application's hidden features. (Not available with all applications.) Pressing and Dragging Press on the touch pad, drag and release. This moves the selected web item in a webpage or your current location on a map. 38 39 Scrolling Up/Down Scroll up/down the line on either the left or right edge of the touch pad. This scrolls a webpage or a list up/down. This scrolling feature easily accommodates both right-handed and left-handed users. Scrolling Left/Right Scroll left/right on the line at the top or bottom edge of the touch pad. This scrolls a horizontal webpage or the Smart Hub panel to the left/right. 40 Changing Channels by Entering Numbers While watching TV, tap on the protruding line on the left or right edge of the touch pad to bring up the numerical input window on the screen. Use your finger to enter the number for the channel you want to watch. The recognized number is displayed on the screen and the TV switches to the corresponding channel. However, the number you have entered may not be recognized properly by the TV. Refer to the guide below to ensure that your numerical entries are recognized accurately. Numerical Input Guide Refer to the diagrams below when entering numerical values. The TV may not recognize your entries if you do not follow the sequences shown below. Adjusting the Touch pad Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Smart Touch Control Settings > Touch Sensitivity Users can adjust the sensitivity of the Smart Touch Control’s touch pad. Set Touch Sensitivity to adjust sensitivity and make it more convenient to use.40 41 Show Status and Notification Banner Press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control and then select STATUS on the virtual remote panel to display the status and notification banner at the top of the screen. Refer to the "Status and Notification" for more information. Recommended This function is only available on U.S.A. and Canada. Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH and then select Recommended from the list displayed at the bottom of the screen. This shows the current/scheduled program and application recommendations. Select a program that is currently airing to jump to the corresponding channel or a program that is scheduled to air to set up a Schedule Viewing setting. Refer to the "Scheduled Recommended Program Info" for more information. Select an application to launch. Samsung Apps will launch if the selected application is not installed on the TV. Refer to the "Samsung Apps" for more information. History For U.S.A. and Canada Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH and then select History from the list displayed at the bottom of the screen. This displays an interactive list of recently accessed channels, media content and applications. For the other countries Press the HISTORY / SEARCH and then select History from the list displayed at the bottom of the screen. This displays an interactive list of recently accessed channels, media content and applications. Deleting History Data Screen Menu > Smart Features > Remove viewing history > History You can delete the history information about recently viewed channels, content and applications. Searching For U.S.A. and Canada Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH button on the Smart Touch Control. The list appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH button again. The keypad will appear on the screen. Enter search criteria to search not only many apps and their contents on the TV but also the Web. For more information, refer to "Searching". For the other countries Press the HISTORY / SEARCH button. The list appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the HISTORY / SEARCH button again. The keypad will appear on the screen. Enter search criteria to search not only many apps and their contents on the TV but also the Web. For more information, refer to "Searching".42 Virtual Remote Control Press the MORE button to display the virtual remote panel on the screen. The virtual remote panel consists of a number panel, a playback control panel, and a quick access panel. Use the touch pad to select numbers and buttons. Press and hold this button. A quick access panel of virtual remote panel appears. You can select screen buttons easily. Changing the Virtual Remote Control Panel Choose the number panel, playback control panel, or quick access panel as the panel to be shown on the screen. Use the touch pad to keep moving the focus left or right. The panel changes when the focus is moved beyond the leftmost or rightmost edge. Use left/right scroll function on the touch pad to change the panel easily. Change a position of the Virtual Remote Panel Press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control. The virtual remote panel appears on the screen. Press and hold the touch pad for one second. Users can change a position of the virtual remote panel of the screen. Using the Number Panel Use the number panel to enter numbers on a keypad screen or webpage or to change the channel while watching TV. Changing the channel using the number pad leaves a record, allowing you to easily return to previous channels. Using the Playback Control Panel Use the playback control panel to pause, rewind, fast forward, skip to the next file, and much more while enjoying media content. Using the Quick Access Panel Quickly access the INFO, TOOLS and e-Manual buttons. However, the availability of buttons may vary depending on the operating mode of the Smart Touch Control (with the TV only, as a universal remote, etc.). Adjusting the virtual remote control Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Smart Touch Control Settings > Onscreen Remote Size You can resize the virtual remote control. If the virtual remote control buttons are too small, enlarge the remote control window before using the virtual remote control.42 43 Universal Remote Setup Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Universal Remote Setup Try Now This function is not available for LED 4300 series. Device Manager Keyboard Settings Mouse Settings Smart Touch Control Settings Universal Remote Setup " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. This TV has a universal remote control feature that lets you control cable boxes, Blu-ray players, home theaters, and other third-party external devices connected to the TV using the TV's remote control. You can also use the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function to operate Samsung external devices with your TV's remote control without any additional setup. For more information, refer to "Anynet+ (HDMICEC)". Connecting the IR Extender Keep a distance of 0.16 ft at least between the IR Extender and the external device, as the illustration shows. Face the IR Extender toward the external device’s remote control signal receiver. Note that it should be no obstacle between IR Extender and external device. The presence of an obstacle will interfere with the transmission of the remote control signal. " The color and design of the IR Extender may vary depending on the model.44 Add the External Device 11 Turn on the external device you wish to set up universal remote function for and then press the SOURCE button to bring up the Source screen. 21 Select Universal Remote Setup from the top of the screen. This initiates the universal remote setup process. 31 Follow the on-screen instruction and set up the universal remote control. If it does not work, set up the remote control by entering the model number manually. Using the Universal Remote Control By configuring the universal remote control feature for a connector to which an external device is already connected, you can use the Smart Touch Control as a universal remote control simply by sending the input signals to the corresponding connector. Registered External Device Management Universal Remote Setup screen, select a registered external device. ● Source Setup: Change the TV's input connector that the external device is connected to. ● Synced Power off: Configure the external device to turn off when the TV is turned off. ● Rename: Rename the registered external device (up to 15 characters long). ● Delete: Remove the registered external device.44 45 Entering Text using the Onscreen Keypad An onscreen keypad appears when you need to enter text (entering the network password, logging into your Samsung account, etc.), allowing you to enter text using your remote control. Entering Text using the QWERTY Keypad Use the QWERTY keypad as you would a normal keyboard. Simply select the letters you want to enter them. Additional Features Select the icon from the keypad to access the following features: ● Language: Select a language from the list. ● Recommended text: Enable/disable the Recommended Text feature. Enabling the Recommended Text feature displays word recommendations based on the entered characters. To enter the word "Internet", for example, all you have to do is enter "In" and select the word "Internet" from the list of recommended words. ● Predict Next Letter: Enable/disable the Text Prediction feature. Enabling the Text Prediction feature eliminates the need to find and select individual character keys. However, this feature is limited to words that have previously been added to the dictionary. To enter the word "Internet", for example, select "I". A predicted word will then appear next to the I key. Simply select the predicted word to enter "Internet".46 SMART Interaction This TV features SMART Interaction, which recognizes a user's voice, actions, and face to enable TV operations without the use of a remote control. The motion control and facial recognition features require a separately-sold camera installed on the TV. Make sure that the TV is connected to the Internet when installing the camera so that it can download the software required for motion control. SMART Interaction makes it possible to configure settings and access features with ease. It takes approximately 15 seconds for voice and motion recognition to come online after turning on the TV. [ When connecting the TV camera to 2013 Samsung TV models, make sure to connect it to the specified USB port of the TV. Other USB ports are not supported for this purpose. Precautions Face Recognition This product saves thumbnail images of users' faces for use during the Face Login. Logging into the Smart Hub via face recognition may be less secure than logging in using an ID and password. TV Camera Use Under some circumstances and under certain legal conditions, the use/misuse of the TV camera may result in legal liability. There may be obligations under local privacy laws regarding the protection of individuals concerning personal data and on the free movement of such data, and possibly other laws including criminal laws, regulating camera surveillance both in the workplace and elsewhere. By using the TV camera, users agree that it will not be used (i) in locations where cameras are generally prohibited (such as bathrooms, locker rooms or changing rooms), (ii) in any manner that will result in an invasion of a person’s privacy or (iii) in violation of any applicable laws, regulations or statutes. If you are using a camera, first check the back for a sticker. Remove the sticker cover before adjusting the TV camera angle. When you are no longer using the camera, rotate the lens downward and secure it in place. This prevents any inadvertent or unintentional camera operation.46 47 Motion Control Motion Control works by using the camera, so the user must be within the camera's recognition range. The camera's recognition range varies depending on the ambient light level and other factors. Run Motion Control Environment Test before using Motion Control to determine the camera's recognition range. User may experience physical fatigue when using Motion Control for extended periods. Voice Recognition Voice Recognition is not available in all languages, dialects or regions. The performance varies depending on the language chosen, voice volume and ambient noise levels in the surrounding area. Voice Text Input requires the user's agreement with any third-party app’s voice privacy policy and to provide Samsung with the user's MAC address and other private information. Voice Text Input lets users enter text using voice commands instead of a mouse, keyboard or remote control. This feature is particularly useful for searching, browsing the web, and using applications that require text input. You must agree to the Supplemental Privacy Notices before using Interactive Voice Recognition.48 Voice Recognition Screen Menu > Smart Features > Voice Recognition This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. Voice Recognition Voice Recognition On Language US English TV Voice Voice Recognition Tutorial " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Voice Recognition lets you access and control specific functions of the TV using voice commands. For the accurate recognition of voice commands, pronounce words and phrases clearly in the language selected in Language. The TV's clock has to be set before you use Voice Recognition. Set the Clock (System > Time > Clock). To use the Voice Recognition, press the VOICE button and then say the command word/phrase 0.3ft to 0.4ft away from the microphone on the Smart Touch Control. Commands may not be recognized if you speak too softly or loudly. The optimal volume is approximately 75~80dB. Operating Environment The voice recognition rate varies depending on the volume/tone, pronunciation, and ambient environment (TV sound and ambient noise).48 49 Enabling Voice Recognition Press the VOICE button to run Voice Recognition. Say a command. You can use Voice Recognition to operate the TV. If Voice Recognition is not working, check to see if Voice Recognition (Smart Features > Voice Recognition) has been enabled. To use Voice Recognition, Voice Recognition must be set to On. When the Voice Recognition is running, the Motion Control is not available. Voice Recognition Tutorial Screen Menu > Smart Features > Voice Recognition > Voice Recognition Tutorial This lets you familiarize yourself with the basics of using Voice Recognition. Run Voice Recognition Tutorial or activate Voice Recognition and then say "Guide me". Basic Voice Recognition Use You can use the following commands anytime while Voice Recognition is active: ● Moving the Focus: Say "Focus Left", "Focus Right", "Focus Up", or "Focus Down" to move the focus. However, these commands can only be used in situations when the focus can be moved. ● Select Item: Say "Select". ● Available Voice Commands: Say "Guide me". A list of basic voice commands available in the current state is shown. ● All Voice Commands: Say "Guide me" and then "Show All" to display a complete list of voice commands by category. Say the name of a category. Only preset voice commands are recognized. Available voice commands may vary, depending on the software version. Voice Recognition Settings Screen Menu > Smart Features > Voice Recognition ● Language: Select a language for Voice Recognition. ● TV Voice: Enable/disable the TV's voice responses to your Voice Recognition commands and choose between a male and female voice. This function is not supported depending on the region.50 Interactive Voice Recognition Commands Interactive Voice Recognition allows you to set up a Schedule Viewing access VODs, search and launch applications, and execute various other commands without having to remember specific commands or keywords. Saying "Turn off the TV in 30 minutes," for example, instructs the TV to turn off after 30 minutes (Sleep Timer). Activate Interactive Voice Recognition and say a command. See the examples below: ● When you don't know which channel a specific program is on: "Play ." ● When you need information about a specific genre: "Which ***(genre name) shows are on today?" ● When you want to watch a program featuring a specific actor or directed by a specific director: "Please look up programs featuring ***(cast member). / Find me works directed by ***(director name)." ● When you want to find out more information about the program you are watching: "Who are the cast members in this program?" / "What's the title of this program?" ● When you want program recommendations: "Please recommend something to watch this evening." / "Are there any shows worth watching today?" ● When you want to operate the TV: "Adjust the volume to ten." / "Change to channel **" Deactivating Voice Recognition To deactivate Voice Recognition, say "Close Voice Recognition".50 51 Motion Control Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control Motion Control Motion Control On Animated Motion Guide Off Pointer Speed Medium Motion Control Environment Test Motion Control Tutorial " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Use Motion Control to change the channel, adjust the volume, move the pointer, and control other TV functions. Some applications may not support Motion Control. The motion control features require a separately-sold camera installed on the TV. Make sure that the TV is connected to the Internet when installing the camera so that it can download the software required for motion control. When the Voice Recognition is running, the Motion Control is not available. [ When connecting the TV camera to 2013 Samsung TV models, make sure to connect it to the specified USB port of the TV. Other USB ports are not supported for this purpose. Operating Environment Users should be located between 4.9ft and 13.1ft from the camera. The actual recognition range may vary depending on the camera angle and other factors. Motion Control relies on the TV camera and therefore will not function if the camera is pointed up or down. Adjust the camera to the correct angle. Do not point the camera directly at the sun or any other light source or obstruct its view. In order for the camera to recognize movement, the user has to stand out from the background. The appropriate ambient brightness is between 50 to 500 lux. (ex: 100 Lux: bathroom, 400 Lux: living room) Avoid direct sunlight when using Motion Control. Run Motion Control Environment Test to assess the camera's recognition range before using Motion Control.52 Motion Control Environment Test Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control > Motion Control Environment Test Run this test before using Motion Control to ensure proper functionality. 11 Run Motion Control Environment Test and select Start within 4.9ft and 13.1ft of the TV. If light reflects on the TV screen, user can be difficult to use Motion Control. 21 Adjust the camera angle so that you appear inside the square displayed on the screen. Once you have finished adjusting the camera angle, wave one hand slowly from left to right. Spread your hand out with the palm facing the TV. An arrow cursor appears on the screen when the TV recognizes the action. If recognition fails, try again. Motion Control Tutorial Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control > Motion Control Tutorial Run Motion Control and follow the instructions. This lets you familiarize yourself with the basics of using Motion Control. Motion Control Activation Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control > Motion Control Raise your hand with the palm facing the TV. Hold it for a moment and slowly wave your hand from side to side three or four times. When your hand is successfully recognized, the Motion Control is activated and a pointer is displayed on the screen. " Dropping your hand out of the range of the TV camera deactivates Motion Control. Raise your hand within 3 seconds to reactivate it.52 53 Using the Basic Motion Controls Available motion commands may vary, depending on what the TV is currently doing. The following basic motion control commands are available: ● Pointing Navigation: This action moves the cursor to the desired position. ● Run / Select: Make a fist to select an option or execute a command. Keeping your fist clenched is like holding down a remote control button. ● Return: Make a circle with your hand in the counterclockwise direction to return to the previous menu. ● Turning over screens: Hold one palm vertical, and swing to the left or right to change the Smart Hub screens. ● Scrolling a web page: While viewing a web page, make a fist on the scroll bar, and then move it up/down to scroll the page up/down. Motion Control Options Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control ● Animated Motion Guide: Displays an animated guide when user motion is detected. ● Pointer Speed: Set the speed of the pointer used in Motion Control.54 Motion Control Screen The Screen Composition while Viewing TV Launching Motion Control while watching TV displays the following icons on the screen: Screen Icons Explanation / Adjust the volume. Turns the TV sound on/off. / Changes the channel. Check the recommended program information and air times. Select a program from the list to view detailed information about that program. For more information, refer to "Scheduled Recommended Program Info". Launch Smart Hub. Enter a channel number using the number panel to jump to the channel. Use the playback control panel with the on-screen color buttons to control a media file that is currently playing. Change the source. Turn off the TV.54 55 The Smart Hub Screen Composition Launching Motion Control while using Smart Hub displays the following icons on the screen: Screen Icons Explanation / Adjust the volume. This function is only available on the On TV. Turns the TV sound on/off. This function is only available on the On TV. / Changes the channel. This function is only available on the On TV. Returns to the previous menu. Check the recommended program information and air times. Select a program from the list to view detailed information about that program. For more information, refer to "Scheduled Recommended Program Info". Displays the virtual remote panel on screen. Refer to the "Virtual Remote Control" for more information. Change the source. Turn off the TV.56 Retrieving Icons on the Screen When using Motion Control with Smart Hub, the icons will disappear automatically after two seconds of inactivity. To retrieve the icons, move the pointer to one of the three edges shown below (marked in blue) and then hold it there for 1 second. The icons will reappear on the screen. Screen Icons Explanation ① / / / / ② / / ③ / 56 57 Face Recognition Users can register their faces and log into their Smart Hub accounts through Face Recognition. One face may be registered per account. Depending on the ambient brightness level and the user's skin tone, the TV may have difficulty recognizing the user's face. The Face Recognition features require a separately-sold camera installed on the TV. Make sure that the TV is connected to the Internet when installing the camera so that it can download the software required for Face Recognition. [ When connecting the TV camera to 2013 Samsung TV models, make sure to connect it to the specified USB port of the TV. Other USB ports are not supported for this purpose. Operating Environment Users should be located between 4.9ft and 13.1ft from the camera. The actual recognition range may vary depending on the camera angle and other factors. The appropriate ambient brightness is between 50 to 500 lux. (ex: 100 Lux: bathroom, 400 Lux: living room) Face Recognition can recognize up to 5 different users at a time. The TV may have difficulty recognizing twins and people with similar faces as two different individuals. Note the following when using Face Recognition: ● Do not cover your face with a hat, a pair of sunglasses, or your hair. ● The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent the camera from recognizing your face accurately. ● Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as neutral as possible. ● User's facial expression when logging into your Samsung account must be the same as the facial expression during the registration process.58 Face Registration Users can register their faces to the Smart Hub accounts. Create a new account if you do not already have one. Refer to the "Creating a Samsung Account" section for details. Face Registration from the Smart Hub account information screen " Log into Smart Hub first. 11 Open the (Smart Features > Samsung Account > Edit Profile) menu, and select Register Face. 21 Read the instruction, select OK, and then enter the password for the Samsung account. 31 Select Take Picture, and the user’s face appears on the screen. Keep the face to be completely in the red dotted frame. The face is successfully registered when the frame turns green. " The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent the camera from recognizing your face accurately. " Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as neutral as possible. " It is better to select the checkbox beside I want to enter password as well for increased security for higher security. With the checkbox selected, the user must enter the password when logging in using face recognition. 41 Select Save to finish.58 59 Face Registration for the Smart Hub account using face recognition 11 From the Smart Hub login window, select Face recognition, and then select Start. The TV automatically recognizes the user's face. 21 Select a face to register from the list, and then select Register Face in the popup window. 31 Read the instruction from the popup window, select OK, and then select the account from the list. However, a user account appears in the list if the TV has a record of the user's account and the user is logged in. 41 Enter the password for the Samsung account. To make face recognition more accurate, scan the user's face again. 51 Select Take Picture. The user’s face appears on the screen. Keep the face completely within the red round. The face is successfully registered when the round turns green. Select OK to proceed. " The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent the camera from recognizing your face accurately. " Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as neutral as possible. " It is better to select the checkbox beside I want to enter password as well for increased security for higher security. With the checkbox selected, the user must enter the password when logging in using face recognition. Face Recognition Login Select Face recognition, and then select Start from the login window. The TV automatically recognizes a user's face. If recognition fails, try again. " The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent the camera from recognizing your face accurately. " Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as neutral as possible. " Once recognition succeeds, the TV logs into the Smart Hub automatically. If the TV recognizes two or more registered faces, a list of corresponding accounts appears. Select the appropriate account. Recognition of an unregistered face prompts a warning.60 Using Peripheral Devices Device Manager Keyboard Settings Mouse Settings Smart Touch Control Settings Universal Remote Setup " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. This TV can be controlled with a keyboard and a mouse instead of a remote control. These peripheral devices make it easier and more convenient to use the TV. Certain models do not support USB HID class keyboards and mice. Keyboard Connection Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Keyboard Settings Try Now Connect a keyboard to the TV for easier text entry. To use a USB keyboard, plug the keyboard cable into the TV's USB port. With a Bluetooth keyboard, pair it using the TV's Bluetooth function. The Bluetooth function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. ● Select Keyboard: Designate which keyboard to use. Only one keyboard can be used at a time. Try Now ● Add Bluetooth Keyboard: View a list of Bluetooth keyboards within range. Select the keyboard you wish to use. This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. ● Keyboard Options: Configure the language, type and other basic keyboard settings. Try Now Keyboard Use Use the following keyboard keys to control the TV. ● Arrows key (Moves the focus), Windows (m), Menu (TOOLS), Enter (Selects and activates), ESC (RETURN), Numbers (Numbers) ● F1 (a), F2 (b), F3 ({), F4 (}), F5 ( ), F6 (SOURCE button), F7 (CH LIST button), F8 (MUTE button), F9/F10 (Volume Control), F11/F12 (Change Channel) ● Page Up / Page Down: You can scroll up or down on web browser.60 61 Mouse Connection Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Mouse Settings Try Now Connect a mouse to the TV and right-click on the mouse to bring up the Go To screen. You can then use the screen menu, Smart Hub, and other TV functions using the mouse as you would on a computer. To use a USB mouse, plug the mouse cord into the TV's USB port. To use a Bluetooth mouse, pair it using the TV's Bluetooth function. The Bluetooth function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. ● Select Mouse: Designate which mouse to use. Only one mouse may be used at a time. Try Now ● Add Bluetooth Mouse: View a list of Bluetooth mice within range. This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. ● Mouse Options: Configure button assignments, pointer speed and other basic mouse settings. Try Now Mouse Use ● Left Button: Selects ● Right Button: Brings up the Go To screen, which includes options such as Power Off, Screen Menu, Smart Hub, and Tools. ● Page Up / Page Down on screen: Move the mouse wheel up and down. You can scroll up or down on web browser or screen.62 TV Viewing Broadcasting Auto Program Antenna Cable Channel List Guide Schedule Manager Edit Channel Edit Favorites " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Use this feature to view the program guide and program information more easily. However, these features are not available when viewing TV using a cable box or satellite receiver. Program Info Select the virtual remote panel's INFO button while watching TV to view information about the current program. However, Program Info is only available with digital channels. In order to use the Program Info, you must first set the TV's clock. To set the clock, navigate to Clock (System > Time > Clock). The Program Info may vary depending on the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for certain programs. Drag left/right on the touch pad to check out other programs or press the touch pad to set up a Schedule Viewing setting for the selected program. Refer to the "Schedule Viewing" section for more information about Schedule Viewing settings. Change the Broadcast Signal Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Antenna Try Now Choose an antenna to receive digital broadcast signals from. TV Viewing62 63 Guide Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Guide Try Now Try Now View each digital channel's programming schedule. Check the programming schedules and even setup a Schedule Viewing. Press the GUIDE button to launch the guide. Change Channels Select a channel from Guide to jump to that channel right away. Change Category PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Select the b button on the virtual remote panel to change the desired category. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the b button to change the desired category. Quick Navigation PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Select the a button on the virtual remote panel. A popup window will open. Dragging left or right on the touch pad moves the focus two hours back or forward, enabling faster browsing of the programming schedule. However, the focus cannot be on a time prior to the current time. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the a button. A popup window will open. Each press of the left or right arrow button moves the focus 2 hours back or forward, enabling faster browsing of the programming schedule. However, the focus cannot be on a time prior to the current time.64 Schedule Viewing Select a program that you wish to view, and then the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's INFO button to display the detailed information screen. Select Schedule Viewing from the detailed information screen to set up a Schedule Viewing. Schedule Viewing is only available for programs that haven't aired yet. PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Select the { button on the virtual remote panel and navigate to the Schedule Manager screen to view a list of reserved programs. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the { button and navigate to the Schedule Manager screen to view a list of reserved programs. Checking the Program Info Highlight a program and select the INFO button on the virtual remote panel or press the INFO button on regular remote control. This displays detailed information about the highlighted program. The Program Info may vary depending on the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for certain programs.64 65 Channel List Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Channel List Try Now Launch CH List while watching TV to change channels or to check what's on other channels. Press and hold the touch pad. This launches CH List. Alternatively, press the regular remote's CH LIST button to launch the Channel List. The Channel List screen icons indicate the following: ● : An analog channel ● : A favorite channel ● : A Schedule Viewing reserved channel ● : A locked channel Change Channels Select a channel to jump to it right away. To quickly scroll through the list, use the channel up/down buttons. The focus moves up and down the list in one page. Genre PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Drag left on the touch pad or press the left arrow button on the remote control and then select Genre. Select a desired TV channel genre. On the Added Ch. list, it is possible to filter channels by genre, if the channels contain proper genre information. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the left arrow button on the remote and select Genre. Select a desired TV channel genre. On the Added Ch. list, it is possible to filter channels by genre, if the channels contain proper genre information.66 Change the Broadcast Signal PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Drag right on the touch pad and then select Air or Cable. This will change the signal source immediately. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the right arrow button on the remote and select Air or Cable. This will change the signal source immediately. Change the Channel List PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Drag right on the touch pad and then switch to the Added Ch. or Favorites list. However, the Favorites list can only be selected if it contains at least one favorite channel. If no favorite channel was previously added, select Edit Favorites and add channels from the Edit Favorites screen. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the right arrow button on the remote and switch to the Added Ch. or Favorites list. However, the Favorites list can only be selected if it contains at least one favorite channel. If no favorite channel was previously added, select Edit Favorites and add channels from the Edit Favorites screen.66 67 Schedule Viewing Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Schedule Manager Try Now Broadcasting Auto Program Antenna Cable Channel List Guide Schedule Manager Edit Channel Edit Favorites " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Configure the TV to show a specific channel or program at a specific time and date. Before scheduling TV watching, make sure that the date and time is set properly under the System > Time > Clock menu. The icon appears next to programs that have been configured for a Schedule Viewing. Digital Channel Schedule Viewing Schedule Viewing for programs on digital channels can be set up through the following two options: ● Guide ● Program Info68 Guide From Guide, select a program you wish to view. Program Info Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's INFO button to display information about the current program. From the program information screen, drag left/right on the touch pad or press left/ right button on the remote control to select a program that has not yet aired and set up a Schedule Viewing for it. Analog Channel Schedule Viewing The Schedule Viewing function for programs on analog channels can be set up by specifying the time and date. 11 Run Schedule Manager and then select Schedule. 21 Specify that program's Antenna, Channel, Repeat, and Start Time and then select, OK to finish. Cancel a Schedule Viewing To cancel a Schedule Viewing for a specific program, select the program from the Schedule Manager screen. A popup menu will appear. Select Delete to cancel. Edit Schedule List Select an entry from the Schedule Manager screen and then select Edit from the popup menu. Edit the settings of the selected entry.68 69 3D TV Screen Menu > Picture > 3D 3D 3D Mode 3D Perspective 0 Depth 5 L/R Change L/R Image 3D → 2D Off " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. This TV is 3D-enabled. For the best 3D viewing experience, users must wear Samsung's 3D Active Glasses. The ideal viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen. We also recommend sitting with your eyes level with the screen. Precautions Carefully read the health and safety information concerning 3D viewing before viewing the TV in 3D. Refer to the "3D Precautions", for more information.70 Restrictions There are several restrictions when using 3D TV: ● Running the Smart Hub automatically deactivates 3D viewing. ● PIP cannot be used. ● Certain Picture options are disabled. ● IR Type Samsung 3D Active Glasses and third-party 3D glasses are not supported. Tips ● The left and right 3D images may initially overlap when the TV is turned on. It takes a moment for the display to optimize and the overlapping to go away. ● The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is another 3D product or electronic device turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. ● Whether or not 3D video is displayed in true HD is usually determined by the quality of the content.70 71 Activating 3D Mode Screen Menu > Picture > 3D > 3D Mode Choose a 3D mode according to the input signal. Available 3D modes may vary depending on the input signal. Some 3D contents may differ preferred 3D mode. In this case, change the desired 3D mode for watching. Select a 3D mode from the available 3D modes depending on the input signal. Available 3D modes may vary depending on the input signal. ● Off: Deactivates 3D viewing. ● Normal: Converts normal images to 3D images. Some formats do not support this mode. ● L/R: Splits a single image into left and right overlapping images to create the 3D effect. ● T/B: Splits a single image into top and bottom overlapping images to create the 3D effect. Resolutions supported by the TV may vary, depending on the 3D mode. For details, see "Supported 3D Resolutions". Setting 3D Effects There are several adjustments that can be made to make 3D content more enjoyable. ● 3D Perspective: Adjusts the 3D perspective. ● Depth: Adjusts the 3D depth. This option cannot be used if 3D mode is set to (L/R) or (T/B). ● L/R Change: Swaps the left and right pictures. ● 3D → 2D: Converts 3D images to normal images. This function is not available if 3D mode is set to (Normal) or (Off). ● 3D Light control: Adjust the brightness of 3D images. If the screen is too dark, select High. This function is only available on the LED 7050/7100 series, except 75-inch TVs.72 PIP Screen Menu > Picture > PIP Try Now Picture 3D PIP Off Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture Off Apply Picture Mode All Sources Reset Picture " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Display video from an external device on the main screen and the TV as a picture-in-picture. For example, you can display a Blu-ray movie on the main screen and simultaneously watch TV as a picture-in-picture. PIP is not available while the Smart Hub or 3D TV is active. Turning off the TV while PIP is active automatically deactivates PIP. ● PIP: Activates/deactivates PIP. ● Antenna: Select either Air or Cable as the input source for the sub-picture screen. ● Channel: Selects the PIP sub-picture channel. ● Size: Selects the PIP sub-picture size. ● Position: Selects the PIP sub-picture position. ● Sound Select: Selects the audio source. " Playing a game or using the karaoke feature on the main screen can result in a lower PIP picture quality. " To watch TV as a picture-in-picture, the main screen's source must be set to Component or HDMI. The PIP window supports TV signals only.72 73 Analog Screen Calibration Channel Settings Fine Tune Clear Scrambled Channel " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Analog pictures can become shaky and full of noise. If this happens, you can fine tune the signal and/or reduce noise to clear up the picture. Fine Tune Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Fine Tune Try Now Clear up shaky pictures. Fine tune the pictures until they are clear and then select Save or Close. Select Reset to reset the Fine Tune operation. This option is only available for analog broadcasts.74 Broadcast Audio Options Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Audio Options Try Now Configure the program's audio language. Using this option is different for analog and digital channels. Digital Broadcast Audio Options ● Preferred Language: Digital broadcasts are embedded with audio signals in multiple languages which users can choose from. You do not need to manually configure digital broadcasts that support the designated language. If the designated language is not supported, the default audio language chosen by the TV station will be heard. Try Now ● Visual Impaired: Activate the audio guide for the visually impaired. This is only available with broadcasts that provide this service. Try Now Analog Broadcast Audio Options ● Multi-Track Sound: Configure the audio for the current broadcast. You can select a sound you want to listen from among the ones being broadcasted. Multi-Track Sound may differ depending on the program being broadcast or broadcast signal. Although user set this option to stereo, if the broadcast signal or program is not supported a stereo, this option will be set to mono automatically. Try Now " Press INFO button to view the current broadcast's audio signal information. " Press TOOLS button while watching TV to access and configure the Multi-Track Sound setting. Sports Mode Screen Menu > Smart Features > Sports Mode This function is not available on U.S.A. and Canada. Enable Sports Mode for the optimal sports viewing experience. However, enabling Sports Mode disables the Picture, Sound and Broadcasting menu options. Disabling Sports Mode restores the previous Picture and Sound settings.74 75 Subtitles Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption Try Now View subtitles along with subtitle-enabled digital and analog broadcasts. Show Subtitles Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption > Caption Try Now Show subtitles. Subtitles will be displayed when you choose a broadcast that supports subtitles. " DVD Subtitles are only available when connected to an external input connector. Subtitle Options Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption > Caption Mode Try Now Select a subtitle mode. The list of modes may vary depending on the broadcast. ● Default / CC1 ~ CC4 / Text1 ~ Text4: (analog channels only) The analog caption function operates in either analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied from an external device to the TV. (Depending on the broadcasting signal, the analog caption function may or may not work with digital channels.) ● Default / CC1 ~ CC4 / Text1 ~ Text4 / Service1 ~ Service6: (Digital channels only) The digital caption function works with digital channels. Service1 – Service6 may not be available in digital caption mode depending on the broadcast. Subtitle Display Options Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption > Digital Caption Options Try Now Specify the foreground and background settings. This option is available for digital channels. ● Size: Choose the subtitle size from the list. ● Font Style: Choose the foreground style from the list. ● Font Color: Choose a foreground color from the list. ● Background Color: Choose a background color from the list. ● Font Opacity: Choose a foreground opacity level from the list. ● Background Opacity: Choose a background opacity level from the list. ● Return to Default: Restores all subtitle display options to the Default settings. Default applies settings chosen by the TV station. " The foreground and background color and opacity settings cannot be the same.76 TV Settings Basic Picture Settings Screen Menu > Picture Picture Picture Mode Standard • Backlight 12 • Contrast 100 • Brightness 45 • Sharpness 50 • Color 50 • Tint (G/R) G50 R50 " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. The basic image settings alter the look and feel of the image displayed on the TV screen. Changing the Picture Mode Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Mode Try Now Choose the optimal picture mode for your TV viewing conditions. When connected to a PC via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, only the Standard and Entertain modes can be chosen. ● Dynamic: This increases the brightness of the screen. It is most suitable for bright environments. ● Standard: This is the default mode. ● Natural: This is useful for reducing eye strain. This mode is available for LED TVs only. ● Movie: Darkens the screen and reduces glare. Appropriate for darkened rooms, for watching movies, and when experiencing eye fatigue. ● Entertain: Sharpens images for a more dynamic viewing experience. This mode is only available when connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable. ● Stadium: This is chosen automatically when Sports Mode is turned on under the Smart Features menu. This function is not available on U.S.A. and Canada.76 77 Picture Quality Screen Menu > Picture PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Choose a Picture Mode and then select the following options to display a slide bar that allows the corresponding setting to be adjusted. Adjust the value by dragging left/right on the touch pad and change the setting by dragging up/down on the touch pad. Adjusted values are applied to the current source and will remain in effect the next time the source is selected. When connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, only the Color and Tint (G/R) adjustment options can be chosen. LED 4300 - 6300 series Choose a Picture Mode and then select the following options to display a slide bar that allows the corresponding setting to be adjusted. Adjust the value by pressing the left/right arrow button on the remote and change the setting by pressing up/down arrow button on the remote. Adjusted values are applied to the current source and will remain in effect the next time the source is selected. When connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, only the Color and Tint (G/R) adjustment options can be chosen. ● Backlight Adjusts the brightness of individual pixels. Decreasing the brightness reduces power consumption. This option is only available for LED TVs. ● Cell Light Adjusts the brightness of the panel. Decreasing the brightness reduces power consumption. This option is only available for PDP TVs. ● Contrast Adjusts the screen contrast. Try Now ● Brightness Adjusts the overall brightness. Try Now ● Sharpness Sharpens or dulls the edges of objects. Try Now ● Color Adjusts the overall color saturation. Try Now ● Tint (G/R) Adjusts the ratio of green to red. Increase the green value to saturate the greens and the red value to saturate the reds. Try Now Applying the Current Picture Quality Setting to Another Input Screen Menu> Picture > Apply Picture Mode Try Now You can apply the picture quality setting that you configured for the TV to all external devices connected to the TV. To apply the setting to all external devices connected to the TV, select All Sources. To only apply the setting to the current input, select Current Source.78 Picture Size Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Size > Picture Size Try Now Most TV programs and videos are displayed in full screen, but some programs and videos don’t fit the screen. Users can change the picture size for such programs and videos. However, the available size options may differ, depending on the video source. For details, see "Picture Size and Input Signal". ● 16:9: Set the picture to the 16:9 wide-screen format. ● Zoom1: Magnifies the 16:9 screen size to up and down. A magnified picture can be moved up and down. ● Zoom2: Magnifies the Zoom1 screen size to up and down. A magnified picture can be moved up and down. ● Wide Fit: Enlarge the aspect ratio of the picture so it fits the entire screen. Enjoy 4:3 images as undistorted 16:9 images. ● 4:3: Sets the picture to basic 4:3 mode. [ Do not leave the TV in 4:3 mode for an extended period. The dark borders displayed on the left and right/top and bottom of the screen may cause image retention (screen burn). This is not covered by the warranty. This mode is available for PDP TVs only. ● Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cutoff. ● Smart View 1: Reduces a 16:9 picture by 50%. This mode is only available for LED TVs and in HDMI mode. ● Smart View 2: Reduces a 16:9 picture by 25%. This mode is only available for LED TVs and in HDMI or DTV mode.78 79 Screen Position Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Size > Position Try Now The screen position can be adjusted if Picture Size is set to Zoom1, Zoom2, Wide Fit, or Screen Fit. In DTV mode, the screen position cannot be adjusted if the Picture Size is set to Screen Fit. PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above 11 To adjust the screen position, select Position and then Position from the popup window. 21 Drag on the touch pad to move the screen. Once done, select Position and then Close. Select Reset to reset the screen position. LED 4300 - 6300 series 11 To adjust the screen position, select Position and then Position from the popup window. 21 Press the arrow buttons on the remote to move the screen. Once done, select Position and then Close. Select Reset to reset the screen position. Picture Off Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Off Try Now Turns off the screen and plays audio only. To turn the screen back on, press any button except TV and volume buttons. Reset Image Settings Screen Menu > Picture > Reset Picture Try Now Reset all image settings for the current Picture Mode to the default settings. This does not affect other Picture Modes.80 Advanced Settings Screen Menu > Picture > Advanced Settings Try Now Advanced Settings Dynamic Contrast High Black Tone Off Flesh Tone 0 RGB Only Mode Off Color Space Native White Balance 10p White Balance Off " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Use Advanced Settings to fine-tune how images are displayed on the TV screen. The Advanced Settings option is only available when Picture Mode is set to Standard or Movie. When the TV is connected to a computer via an HDMI-DVI cable, only White Balance and Gamma can be adjusted. ● Dynamic Contrast Automatically adjusts the screen contrast. Use this option to achieve the optimal contrast setting. Try Now ● Black Tone Adjusts the black color depth. Try Now ● Flesh Tone Adjusts the amount of red in skin-color tones. Try Now80 81 ● RGB Only Mode Adjusts the red, green, and blue levels individually. Try Now ● Color Space Adjusts the range of colors that can be expressed on screen. Auto automatically adjusts the color space depending on the input signal, and Native applies a range that is wider than the input signal. Custom allow the user to manually adjust a range of the desired color in the colors of the input signal. Try Now " Custom mode is only available with LED 6300 series and above. ● White Balance Adjusts the color temperature of the picture to make white objects look white and the overall picture appear natural. Adjust each color's luminosity with the offset menu and the brightness with the gain menu. To restore the default values, select Reset. Try Now ● 10p White Balance This function is not available with LED 4300, 5500 series and PDP 5500 series. Adjusts the white balance by adjusting the brightness of the red, green, and blue elements in 10-point intervals. This option is only available when Picture Mode is set to Movie and may not be supported by some external devices. ● Gamma Adjusts the primary color intensity. Try Now ● Expert Pattern This function is not available with LED 4300, 5500 series and PDP 5500 series. Displays picture calibration patterns on the screen without using a separate pattern generator or filter. Pattern1 is used to calibrate the contrast, and Pattern2 is used for calibrating the color and color saturation. If the screen menu disappears or a different menu is activated while the screen is being calibrated, this option will save the changes up to that point and automatically deactivate that menu. This feature is enabled in Component and HDMI modes only. ● Motion Lighting Adjusts the picture brightness depending on the on-screen movements for reduced power consumption. This feature is only available when Picture Mode is set to Standard and is not available in 3D mode. In addition, adjusting Contrast or Brightness automatically deactivates this feature. Try Now82 Picture Options Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Options Try Now Picture Options Color Tone Standard Digital Clean View Auto MPEG Noise Filter Auto HDMI Black Level Low Film Mode Off Auto Motion Plus Standard Cinema Black Off " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Use Picture Options to further improve the picture quality. When connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, users can only change Color Tone. ● Color Tone Adjusts the color tone. The setting is applied on an individual Picture Mode basis. When Picture Mode is changed, the corresponding setting will apply automatically. If Picture Mode is set to Dynamic, users can only choose between Cool and Standard. Try Now ● Digital Clean View Reduces static and ghosting caused by weak signals. This feature is only available for ATV channels. Selecting Auto Visualization displays the signal strength on the screen. Green indicates the best possible signal. Try Now ● MPEG Noise Filter Reduces MPEG noise and improves the video quality. Try Now82 83 ● HDMI Black Level This is available only for video input via an HDMI cable. Use this to reduce image retention that may occur when watching video from an external device. Choose one of the black levels. Try Now ● Film Mode Optimizes the picture quality for movies. Select the mode for watching movies. This feature is only available when watching TV or when the input signal is AV, Component (480i, 1080i), or HDMI (1080i). The Cinema Smooth option is only active when the TV inputs an HDMI 24Hz signal. The Cinema Smooth option is only available for PDP 5500 series. Try Now ● Black optimizer This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6800 series. Adjust overall black color depth to give a change to picture depth. This is not available when playing a media file or using the TV as a computer display. ● Auto Motion Plus Use this to reduce blur and judder from scenes with rapid movement. If you select Custom, you can configure the afterimage and screen trembling removal ratio and you can view a sharper image through the LED Clear Motion function. This feature is only available for LED 6300 series and above. " While Auto Motion Plus is running, select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's INFO button to display the resolution and frequency of the incoming video signal (60Hz). The displayed frequency is not the same as the frequency of the picture the TV is displaying when Auto Motion Plus is activated. ● Cinema Black This function is only available on the LED 7050/7100 series, except 75-inch TVs. In Movie mode, this feature dims the top and bottom areas of the video image to provide a more immersive viewing experience. ● LED Clear Motion Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clear picture. This function is only available for the LED 4300, 5500 series.84 Basic Sound Settings Screen Menu > Sound Sound Sound Mode Standard Sound Effect 3D Audio Low Speaker Settings Digital Audio Out Reset Sound " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Use the Sound Settings to change the sound mode, enable/disable surround sound, adjust the equalizer, and optimize the TV's sound. Changing the Sound Mode Screen Menu > Sound > Sound Mode Try Now Sound modes make adjustments to the sound output. However, Sound Modes are not available when using external speakers only. ● Standard: This is the normal sound mode. ● Music: This mode emphasizes normal music instead of voices. ● Movie: This mode is calibrated to provide the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice: This mode emphasizes voices. ● Amplify: This increases the overall intensity of high-frequency sounds for a better listening experience. It is designed for hearing-impaired listeners. ● Stadium: This is chosen automatically when Sports Mode is turned on under the Smart Features menu. This function is not available on U.S.A. and Canada.84 85 Adjusting the Sound Settings Screen Menu > Sound > Sound Effect Try Now Use sound effects to alter how the TV projects sound. These options are available only when Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker and Sound Mode is set to Standard. ● DTS TruSurround: Produces sound that will make you feel like you are sitting in a movie theater or concert hall. Try Now ● DTS TruDialog: Increases the voice intensity to make dialog clearer. Try Now ● Equalizer: Adjusts the speaker balance and makes bandwidth adjustments. Select Reset to reset the settings. Try Now Auto Volume Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > Auto Volume Try Now Because each station has its own set of broadcasting conditions, the volume may fluctuate as the channel changes. The Auto Volume function automatically adjusts the volume of a channel by lowering or raising the sound output. Normal applies a normal level of volume adjustment, whereas Night applies a slightly lower volume level than Normal and is ideal for nighttime TV viewing. To use the volume control of a connected source device, deactivate the Auto Volume function. When using the Auto Volume function with a source device, the device’s volume control may not function properly. TV Installation Type Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Installation Type Try Now Select the TV's installation type. Choose between Wall Mount and Stand to optimize the TV's sound automatically. Resetting the Sound Screen Menu > Sound > Reset Sound Try Now This resets all sound settings to the factory defaults.86 3D Audio Screen Menu > Sound > 3D Audio Sound Sound Mode Standard Sound Effect 3D Audio Low Speaker Settings Digital Audio Out Reset Sound " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. This function is only available with the PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series and higher. 3D audio technology provides immersive sound that matches the pop-up effect of 3D video by using perspective in the audio depth control. 3D Audio is only available while viewing 3D content.86 87 Speaker Settings Sound Sound Mode Standard Sound Effect 3D Audio Low Speaker Settings Digital Audio Out Reset Sound " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. If the TV's audio is sent to an external device such as a home theater system, you can designate which speakers to use and make adjustments to eliminate decoding speed echoes. Speaker Select Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > Speaker Select Try Now You can choose which speakers to use from among available several speakers. Choose one from the list of speakers. To use both the TV speakers and the AV receiver speakers simultaneously, set this option to TV Speaker. If there is a delay between the two sounds, choose any other than TV Speaker to mute the TV speakers. " Using the external speakers only disables the volume button and the mute function. In addition, certain Sound options will be disabled.88 Digital Audio Output Screen Menu > Sound > Digital Audio Out Try Now This TV is SPDIF-enabled. The Sony Philips Digital Interface (SPDIF) provides digital audio output to speakers and various digital devices, including A/V Receivers and home theaters. This feature reduces interference and distortion. ● Audio Format: Selects the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format. The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) formats may vary depending on the input source. Try Now ● Audio Delay: This setting helps correct timing mismatches between the audio and video tracks when watching TV and listening to audio through a digital audio device. Enabling the feature displays a slide bar that you can use to adjust the delay by up to 250ms. Try Now Samsung Audio Device Connection Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > SoundShare Settings This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher. Connect the TV to a Samsung audio device for a richer, clearer sound. This function is available for Samsung Audio Device supported the SoundShare function. Pair the Samsung audio device using the TV's Bluetooth function. Refer to the Samsung audio device's operating manual for more information on pairing. ● Add New Device Enables/disables SoundShare. Connection signals from new devices are ignored if they are set to Off. ● Samsung Audio Device List Displays a list of paired Samsung audio devices. Select a device to display its menu options. Activate/deactivate the audio device or remove it from the list. " When using a Bluetooth audio device, a slight mismatch between the audio and video may occur, depending on the content.88 89 Clock and Timer System Setup Menu Language English Time Device Manager Eco Solution Auto Protection Time 2 hours Change PIN " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Use the clock and timer to make scheduled use of the TV easier and more efficient. Once the clock has been set, you can select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's INFO button to check the current time. The clock must be reset every time the power is disconnected. Setting the Time Screen Menu > System > Time > Clock Try Now Set the clock manually or automatically.90 Auto Automatically download the correct time from a digital channel. To enable this option, an antenna cable has to be connected to the TV. The accuracy of the time information received may vary depending on the channel and signal. Set Clock Mode to Auto. " Time Zone and DST may not be supported depending on the country. ● DST: Set the DST (Daylight Savings Time). ● Time Zone: Choose your time zone. Time Offset Screen Menu > System > Time > Clock > Time Offset Try Now If the set time is not accurate, users can set the time offset to adjust the time difference hourly from -12 to +12 hour. Changing Time Offset is only available, when the Time is set to auto, and is set through a network. The current time will be set through a network, if the TV fails to receive the time information including the broadcast signal from TV stations. (ex: Watching TV via set-top box, Satellite receiver, or etc) Manual Manually enter the time. Set Clock Mode to Manual and then select Clock Set to enter the current time and date. Sleep Timer Screen Menu > System > Time > Sleep Timer Try Now This function automatically shuts off the TV after a preconfigured period of time. You can set the timer up to 180 minutes in 30 minute increments.90 91 On Timer Screen Menu > System > Time > On Timer Try Now Set the On Timer so that the TV turns on automatically at a chosen time. Only three On Timer settings can run concurrently. The clock must be set for the On Timer to work. ● Setup: Specify the dates and duration. Use Manual to specify the days of the week. ● Time: Specifies the on time. ● Volume: Specifies the volume when the TV turns on. ● Source: Selects a signal source from the list. Specify a channel or source to be displayed when the TV turns on. To specify a USB device, a USB device must first be connected to the TV. To playback media from an HDMI or Component source such as a DVD player or Blu-ray player, the device must already be turned on and playing the media when the TV is turned on. ● Antenna: Set Source to TV to select a broadcast signal. ● Channel: Set Source to TV to select a channel. ● Music / Photo: Set Source to USB to specify a USB device folder containing music and image files. Selecting both music and image files plays the music files and displays the images at the same time. " This feature will not function properly if the selected USB device does not contain media files or a folder has not been specified. " The slideshow will not start if there is only one image file on the USB device. " Folders with long names cannot be selected. " Always use different folder names for multiple USB devices. " Use a USB memory stick or multi-card reader. On Timer may not work with certain battery-powered USB devices, MP3 players, or PMPs because the TV may take too long to recognize the device. Off Timer Screen Menu > System > Time > Off Timer Try Now Set the Off Timer to turn the TV off automatically at a specific time. Only three Off Timer settings can be entered concurrently. The clock must be set for the Off Timer to work. ● Setup: Specifies the date or period to run the function. Use Manual to specify the days of the week. ● Time: Sets the time for the TV to automatically turn off.92 Screen Protection and Maintenance System Setup Menu Language English Time Device Manager Eco Solution Auto Protection Time 2 hours Change PIN " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Several onboard functions exist that help maintain the TV beyond its useful lifespan and decrease power consumption. Eco Solution Screen Menu > System > Eco Solution Try Now Eco Solution adjusts the TV's brightness level and prevents overheating to reduce overall power consumption. ● Energy Saving Select a brightness setting from the list to reduce the TV's power consumption. Try Now ● Eco Sensor Automatically adjusts the TV's brightness level based on the ambient light level to reduce the TV's power consumption. If the Eco Sensor has adjusted the screen's brightness level, you can manually adjust the screen's minimum brightness level by adjusting Min. Backlight or Min Cell Light (applicable models). If Eco Sensor is enabled and the Picture menu's Backlight or Cell Light (applicable models) value is changed, Eco Sensor is automatically disabled. This function is not available LED 4300 series. ● No Signal Power Off Select a time from the list. If no signal is received for the specified duration, the TV will automatically cut off the power to reduce power consumption. Try Now ● Auto Power Off If the TV remains turned on for four hours without any user input, the TV will automatically turn off to prevent overheating. Try Now92 93 Screen Burn Protection Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection This feature is only available for PDP TVs. To reduce the possibility of screen burn, the TV uses Pixel Shift screen burn prevention technology. Pixel Shift moves the picture slightly on the screen to avoid over-using some elements and underusing others. The Pixel Shift Time setting allows users to program the time between picture movements, in minutes. The TV also has the following additional screen burn protection functions: ● Pixel Shift ● Auto Protection Time ● Scrolling ● Side Gray Pixel Shift Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Pixel Shift Set the TV to very slightly shift pixels on the PDP screen in a horizontal or vertical direction to minimize burned-in after-images. The Pixel Shift value may differ depending on the monitor size and mode. It is not available in Screen Fit mode. Settings: ● Horizontal: Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels), Optimum settings for TV/AV/Component/HDMI: 4 ● Vertical: Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels), Optimum settings for TV/AV/Component/HDMI: 4 ● Time (minutes): 1 – 4 min, Optimum settings for TV/AV/Component/HDMI: 4 min Auto Protection Time Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Auto Protection Time If the screen displays a still image for a certain period of, the TV activates the screen saver to prevent the formation of burnt-in ghost images.94 Scrolling Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Scrolling This removes after-images on the screen by illuminating all the pixels on the PDP according to a set pattern. Use this when there are after-images or symbols on the screen, especially when a still image was displayed on the screen for a long time. The after-image removal function has to be executed for approximately 1 hour to effectively remove after-images. If the after-image is not removed the first time, repeat the process. Press any button to cancel this process. Side Gray Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Side Gray This allows selection of colors for the sidebars the TV displays when the screen size is set to 4:3. The default color is gray. Auto Protection Time Screen Menu > System > Auto Protection Time Select a time from the list. If a still image is shown on the screen for the specified duration of time, the TV will automatically activate the Screen Burn Protection function to prevent burnt-in ghost images. This feature is only available for LED TVs.94 95 Password System Device Manager Eco Solution Auto Protection Time 2 hours Change PIN General Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) On DivX® Video On Demand " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. This TV requires a password to lock out channels and to reset its settings to the factory default. Change Password Screen Menu > System > Change PIN Try Now Change the TV's password. 11 Run Change PIN and then enter the current password in the password field. The default password is 0000. 21 Enter a new password and then enter it again to confirm it. The password change is complete. If you forget the PIN code, press the buttons in the following sequence which resets the PIN to “0-0- 0-0”: For Standard Remote Control: In Standby mode: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (on) For Smart Touch Control: When the TV turnes on: MUTE → Volume up → RETURN → Volume down → RETURN → Volume up → RETURN96 Additional Features System Setup Menu Language English Time Device Manager Eco Solution Auto Protection Time 2 hours Change PIN " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. There are many elements available for customizing the TV for individual user preferences. Changing the Menu Language Screen Menu > System > Menu Language Try Now Select a menu language from the list. Game Mode Screen Menu > System > General > Game Mode Try Now Game Mode optimizes the TV's settings for playing video games on a gaming console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™. Read the following information before using Game Mode. Precautions and Restrictions ● Game Mode cannot be used for normal TV viewing. ● Connect the gaming console before enabling Game Mode. Otherwise, the picture quality may suffer. ● Game Mode can result in some images shaking. ● Enabling Game Mode automatically sets Picture Mode to Standard and Sound Mode to Movie. ● Once finished, disconnect the gaming console and disable Game Mode before plugging in a different external device.96 97 BD Wise Screen Menu > System > General > BD Wise This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6300 series and above. Connecting a Samsung DVD player, Blu-ray player, or home theater system that supports BD Wise enables you to enjoy the richest colors and picture quality possible. Enabling BD Wise automatically optimizes the TV's resolution. This feature is only available when the external device is connected via an HDMI cable. Menu Transparency Screen Menu > System > General > Menu Transparency Try Now Adjust the menu screen's transparency. Sound Feedback Screen Menu > System > General > Sound Feedback Try Now Adjust the sound feedback volume or disable it entirely. Sound feedback is an audio cue that plays when you move the focus or make a selection. Panel Locking Screen Menu > System > General > Panel Lock Try Now Lock or unlock all the keys on the front panel. The panel keys are located at the back of the TV and can be used to select options, to change the channel, and to adjust the volume. Booting Logo Screen Menu > System > General > Boot Logo Try Now Enable/disable displaying the logo while the TV starts up. DivX® Video On Demand Screen Menu > System > DivX® Video On Demand Try Now Product registration is required to play back videos protected with DivX® DRM. Visit the DivX website and register the code displayed on the screen.98 SMART TV Features Smart Hub Screen Menu > Smart Features > Open Smart Hub Try Now This TV features Smart Hub, a multi-purpose entertainment and family center. With Smart Hub, users can surf the web, download applications, and stay in touch with family and friends through social networking services. In addition, you can enjoy photo, video & music files stored on external storage devices. Press the button to launch Smart Hub. Choose a service using the icons displayed in the top part of the screen. ● Social: Watch the latest YouTube videos and you and your friends' video posts on Facebook and Twitter. You can also make video calls to friends by connecting the TV to a camera (sold separately). ● Apps: Samsung Apps offers an extensive collection of free and paid news, sports, weather, and gaming content you can directly download to and enjoy on your TV. ● On TV: Check a listing of programs that are currently airing and are scheduled to air. ● Movies & TV Shows: Purchase and watch movies and TV shows without the need for a separate external device. ● Photos, Videos & Music: Play back photo, video, and music files from an external storage device. Use † or … to change the Smart Hub screens. Agreements Required to Use Smart Hub Screen Menu > Smart Features > Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy Carefully read the terms and conditions to use Smart Hub, and determine whether or not to agree to them. Users cannot use Smart Hub fully unless they agree to them.98 99 Samsung Account Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account Samsung Account Log In Edit Profile Link Service Accounts Remove Accounts from TV Create Account Terms & Conditions Privacy Policy " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. A Samsung account allows you to get even more out of Smart Hub. You can create a Samsung account using your email address. Creating a Samsung Account Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Log In From the login screen, select Create Account and then follow the on-screen instructions. " Once a Samsung account has been created, a confirmation email will be sent to the email address you entered as your ID. Open the confirmation email and click on the confirmation button to finalize the Samsung account setup process. Creating a Samsung Account Using a Facebook Account Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Create Account > Create Samsung Account with Facebook A Facebook account makes it easier to create a Samsung account. When a Samsung account is created using a Facebook account, the Facebook account is also registered on the TV. Logging In Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Log In Use your Samsung account to log into the Smart Hub. Enter your ID and password and then select Log In. The Remember my password option lets you login without having to enter your password each time. Check this option to enable it. Check the Sign me in automatically option if you want to log into Smart Hub automatically. If you forgot your password, select Reset password to receive the password resetting instructions via email.100 Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Terms & Conditions / Privacy Policy Carefully read the terms and conditions to use Samsung Account, and determine whether or not to agree to them. Users cannot use Samsung Account fully unless they agree to them. However, you can only view the entire terms and conditions after signing in with your Samsung account and you can use your Samsung Account after agreeing to the terms and conditions. Linking a Samsung Account to Other Accounts Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Link Service Accounts Linking your Samsung account to other accounts lets you automatically log into your linked accounts when you log into your Samsung account. For example, you can download the Facebook application and link your Facebook account to your Samsung account. Logging into your Samsung account then automatically logs you into your Facebook account as well. Log into your Samsung account and select Link Service Accounts to view a list of applications that require login information. ● Register Service Account: Select an application, select Register, and then provide the ID and password. ● Edit: It is possible to change a registered account. Select an application, select Edit, and enter the ID and password for the new account. ● Remove: Select an application to which an account has been registered and then select Deregister. Managing Accounts Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account Using the Samsung Account menu, you can manage your Samsung account. You can only use this function after signing in with your Samsung account. ● Edit Profile: You can change the basic user information and register your photo and credit card information. ● Remove Accounts from TV: The Samsung account used to sign into the Smart Hub is automatically saved on the TV. You can delete your account information from among the saved accounts on the TV.100 101 Resetting Smart Hub Screen Menu > Smart Features > Smart Hub Reset It is possible to remove Samsung accounts and everything linked to them, including apps, from the TV. Enter the password when accessing this menu. To use Smart Hub fully again after resetting it, users are required to agree to the terms of conditions. Open the System menu, choose Setup, and then follow the initial setup process. Searching Users can search many apps and their contents on the TV as well as the Web. Keyword Search For U.S.A. and Canada Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH button. The list appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH button again. Enter search criteria using the on-screen keyboard that appears, and then select Done. A list of search results appears. Select a desired item from a list of search results. The selected item's page appears. For the other countries Press the HISTORY / SEARCH button. The list appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the HISTORY / SEARCH button again. Enter search criteria using the on-screen keyboard that appears, and then select Done. A list of search results appears. Select a desired item from a list of search results. The selected item's page appears. Setting Search Scope Select icon on the Search result screen. User can set up the desired search range in the scope list.102 Status and Notification A notification message window appears at the top of the screen when important messages concerning application updates and Samsung account logins are available. This message window notifies the user of the TV's operating status. Show Status and Notification Banner PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control and then select STATUS on the virtual remote panel that appears on the screen. The status and notification banner is shown at the top of the screen. LED 4300 - 6300 series Press the STATUS button. The status and notification banner is shown at the top of the screen. Voice Recognition & Motion Control Configuration Enable/disable the status and notification banner's Voice Recognition and Motion Control functions. It's also possible to perform the Motion Control Environment Test. Samsung Account Configuration Select My Account from the status and notification banner to manage your Samsung account. For more information, refer to "Managing Accounts". Network Configuration Select Network Settings from the status and notification banner to configure the network. For details on how to connect to a wired network, see "Wired Network Setup". For details on how to connect to a wireless network, see "Wireless Network Setup". Check Notifications If you were not able to check the notification message, you can see a list of unread notification messages in the status and notifications banner. You can also check notifications from Notifications (Smart Features > Notifications). Try Now Selecting a notification from the list allows you to perform corresponding actions with ease. To delete all notifications, select Delete All. Selecting Service Notice launches WebBrowser to display the notification webpage of the Samsung website.102 103 Social " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Watch the latest YouTube videos and you and your friends' video posts on Facebook and Twitter. You can also make video calls to friends by connecting the TV Camera (sold separately). Social Settings Screen Menu > Smart Features > Social Settings Try Now Checking the Application Certain applications need to be installed on the TV in order to use the Social feature. If a selected application has not been installed on your TV, you will need to install it first. For more information on installing applications, refer to "Samsung Apps". Connecting a Service to a Samsung Account Social service accounts need to be linked to a user's Samsung account first. If you do not have a social service account, create one by visiting the website of that service. For more information on connecting to a social service, refer to "Linking a Samsung Account to Other Accounts".104 Watching Videos Select Friends' Picks or What's Hot at the bottom of the Social screen to display a list of videos. Select a video from the list to view its information and then select Play. Friend Profile Select Friends at the bottom of the Social screen to display a list of Facebook and Twitter friends. Select a friend from the list. The selected friend's profile containing his/her basic information and posts is displayed Video Calling a Friend Select Video Call at the bottom of the Social screen. This launches Skype and displays a list of friends. Select a friend to call. Filters Log in to a Samsung account to use this function. Select either Friends' Picks or Friends and Video Call on the Social screen. Use the filter option at the top of the screen to rearrange the list. Select an item. However, this option cannot be used in the What's Hot list.104 105 Apps " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. Samsung Apps offers an extensive collection of free and paid news, sports, weather, and gaming content you can directly download to and enjoy on your TV. First, check the network and make sure the TV is connected to the Internet. Your TV needs to be connected to the Internet in order to use Apps. Precautions ● Due to the product characteristics featured on the Samsung Smart Hub, as well as limitations in available content, certain features, applications, and services may not be available on all devices or in all territories. Some Smart Hub features may also require additional peripheral devices or membership fees. Visit http://www.samsung.com for more information on specific device information and content availability. Services and content availability are subject to change without prior notice. ● Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for any interruption of the Smart Hub service caused by the service provider for any reason. ● Application services may be provided in English only and available content may vary, depending on the area. ● For more information about applications, visit the applicable service provider's website. ● An unstable Internet connection may cause delays or interruptions. In addition, applications may terminate automatically depending on the network environment. If this occurs, check your Internet connection and try again. ● Application services and updates may become unavailable. ● Application content is subject to change by the service provider without prior notice. ● The service details may vary depending on the user's firmware version. ● The application usage method may vary with future versions of the application. If this is the case, run the application's tutorial or visit the service provider's website.106 Installing Standard Applications Launching Smart Hub for the first time and loading the Apps screen. The TV is automatically downloads and installs the basic applications that correspond to the network your TV is connected to. The types of basic applications may vary depending on your location. Launching an Application Navigate to the Smart Hub's Apps screen and then select More Apps located at the bottom of the screen. The list of applications currently installed on your TV is displayed. From this list, select the application you want to launch. Select View (top of the screen) to rearrange the list of downloaded applications by the installation date, launch date, or title. Samsung Apps Samsung Apps offers various free and paid news, sports, weather, and gaming applications. Samsung Apps lets you search for applications and install them directly on your TV. Read and agree to the terms and conditions of use and then browse through the categories or directly search for applications. Try Now Searching for Apps Search for applications by name. On the Samsung Apps screen, select the Search Samsung Apps to bring up the keypad. Enter the application's name and then select Done. Installing Applications Select the application you wish to install to bring up a screen with detailed information about that application. Select Download to install the selected application. Paid applications, however, must be purchased before you can install them. Visit the Samsung Apps TV website at http:// tv.samsungapps.com and recharge your account with App Cash before purchasing paid applications.106 107 Apps Management You can customize the My Apps screen. You can also manage installed applications and configure application update settings Edit My Apps Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and then select Edit My Apps. You can customize the My Apps screen. Change Order From the Edit My Apps screen, select the applications you wish to rearrange, change the order, and then press the touch pad or press the E button on regular remote control. Removing Applications Remove unused applications from the My Apps' application list. Removed applications are moved to the More Apps list. From the Edit My Apps screen, select the applications you wish to remove and then move them to the first or last row of the My Apps list. An 'X' will appear at the top or bottom of the icons of the selected applications. Move the applications in the direction of the 'X'. A popup window will appear. Select Yes from the popup window to remove the selected applications from the My Apps list. From the Edit My Apps screen, select Delete All to remove all applications from the My Apps list. Adding Applications Applications that have been installed on the TV but do not show up in the My Apps list can be added to the list. Select the applications you wish to add from the More Apps list at the top of the Edit My Apps screen. Selected apps are added to the My Apps list.108 Deleting Applications Delete applications installed on your TV. Deleting an application deletes all data associated with that application. Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and then select Delete. A check box appears on the application icons. Select all the applications you wish to delete and then select Delete. A popup window appears. select Yes. Applications in gray cannot be deleted. " You can reinstall deleted applications for free from Samsung Apps. Managing Application Folders Create folders and manage applications by group. Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and then Create Folder. Enter a name for the new folder. Select Options to rename the folder or move applications to that folder. Application Lock/Unlock Lock/unlock applications. Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and then select Lock / Unlock. Enter the password and then select the applications you wish to lock. A lock symbol appears on the selected applications. To unlock, simply select the application again. Application Update When the application require to update to the latest version, select Apps and then select More Apps. On the More Apps screen, select Update Apps, and then select application from the list. The application starts updating to the latest version. However, Update Apps appears on the screen only when the update is required.108 109 Fitness Fitness is an application that helps you stay fit. Create a profile, set up an exercise plan, and start exercising according to a structured regimen. Read and agree to the terms and conditions before using Fitness. Try Now [ Do a warm-up or some stretches before exercising. Users must stop exercising immediately if they experience pain, or become dizzy, exhausted or short of breath. Creating a Profile Follow the on-screen instructions and enter your information to create a profile. Kids This is a quick launcher and recommended list for applications and content that is suitable for children and even provides services not currently installed on your TV. Using Kids, you can download applications and content for your children to your TV. Certain services, however, are fee-based. Try Now On the Kids screen, select the TOOLS button on the virtual remote panel or press the TOOLS button on regular remote control. The list screen appears. Select Tutorial Video from the list, user can view the introductory video for more information about Kids anytime.110 WebBrowser WebBrowser is a web-browsing application. Using WebBrowser, you can browse the Internet on your TV as you would on your computer and even watch TV while you surf the web. The browsing experience, however, may not be the same as it is on your computer. Use a keyboard and mouse for a more convenient web browsing experience. Try Now Social Networks Share your thoughts and comments about a program on the air through social networking services. Social Networks displays social network services such as Twitter, Facebook, Google Talk, on a single screen. You can even post messages and comments in the same manner as you would using a computer. You must first link your Samsung account to the respective SNS accounts before you can access them using Social Networks. For more information about using the service, visit the application's website. Linking Service Accounts Link your SNS (Twitter, Facebook, Google Talk, etc.) to your Samsung account. Launch Social Networks, select an SNS, and then register the account you have with that SNS. Once linked, you can use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to access the registered SNS. You can update your feed, post comments, and even change the viewing mode.110 111 Apps Settings Screen Menu > Smart Features > Apps Settings Try Now Configure the apps installed on your TV. Auto Ticker Configure selected tickers to display automatically when the TV is turned on. A ticker is a service that displays stock values, news, and weather updates on the screen in real-time. Enabling the Ticker service brings you up-to-the-minute information while you watch TV. From the Auto Ticker list, select the applications to run. If a selected application has not been installed on your TV, you will need to install it first. Push Notification Settings Enable/disable push notifications from applications. Push notifications are displayed on the screen as you watch TV. You can then select these notifications to get more information. Channel-Bound Apps Channel-Bound Apps can be used when watching a channel that supports applications for the current program's data services. Properties You can view the Apps version, the TV's serial number, and the Netflix ESN. In addition, you can check the TV's total and available memory capacity.112 On TV " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. This function is only available on U.S.A. and Canada. While you watch TV, a list of recommended programs on other channels appears on the screen. You can use this list to change the channel and find out more information about the recommended programs including how much time is left until they air. Branded content is only available on models for sale in the U.S.A. " Certain features within SMART Hub require internet access and may not be available based on service provider, language, dialect and region. " On TV's program and channel information recommendations may differ from actual information depending on service providers and broadcasts.112 113 On TV Settings Screen Menu > Smart Features > On TV Settings Try Now Customize the On TV screen. On TV Setup Set a broadcast media type and TV stations for the On TV screen, following the on-screen instructions. Recommendation Notice With this enabled, when one of popular TV programs that the user has often watched is currently on the air, the TV notifies the user. Auto Start You can configure On TV to automatically launch when the TV is turned on. Recommendation Method Determine whether to display upcoming TV programs by user preference or general popularity. Adult Contents Block With this enabled, adult TV programs are not listed on the On TV screen.114 Watching an On-Air Recommended Program Select a program from the right side of the screen. This changes the channel to the selected program. Scheduled Recommended Program Info The following list displays the information and viewing times of recommended programs that have not yet aired. Select a program from the list to see more information about the program and to access the following options: ● Jump to Channel: Jump to the selected program's channel. ● Timer: Set up a Schedule Viewing. ● Related Contents: Displays the related contents list of the selected program. Select a desired contents in the list. User can view the information screen of the selected contents. ● Share: Like/dislike the selected program or share information about the selected program via an SNS. Activating the Guide Select Guide at the bottom of the screen to launch the Guide. For more information, refer to "Guide". Program Recommendations by Time Select Timeline View at the bottom of the screen to display program recommendations for different times of the day.114 115 Movies & TV Shows " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. This function is not supported depending on the region. Movies & TV Shows recommends you Movies and TV Shows video on demand content. This aggregates multiple local VOD content local to help you browse and watch all you want in one place. Open Smart Hub and move to Movies & TV Shows. You can have recommendations and purchase VOD on TV. Enjoy Premium VOD on TV simply. This service or some of functions of it may be not available in some countries or region.116 Buying Movies To browse movies and TV shows, select one of the following on the bottom of the screen. ● Favorites: View the user’s preferred movies and TV shows. ● Featured: View the most outstanding movies and TV shows. ● Movies: View the latest movies. ● TV Shows: View the latest TV shows. Playing Movies Select Purchased at the lower-right corner of the screen. Select one of purchased movies and TV shows to play it. Parental Control Screen Menu > Smart Features > VOD Rating Lock Lock movies and TV shows rated a certain class or higher to prevent children from watching them. Open the Smart Features menu, choose VOD Rating Lock, and enter the passcode. Turn on VOD Rating Lock and set any necessary options.116 117 Photos, Videos & Music " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. " On the Photos, Videos & Music screen, the Enjoyed Content panel only shows recently-played media files from either removable storage devices connected to the TV via USB, or DLNA-enabled devices connected to the TV via network. Enjoy photo, video and music files from an external storage device directly on your TV. Back up important files before connecting an external storage device to the TV. Samsung will not be held responsible for damaged or lost files. Restrictions ● Supports MSC (Mass Storage Class) USB devices only. MSC is a class designation for mass storage devices. Types of MSC devices include external hard drives, flash card readers, and digital cameras. (USB hubs are not supported.) these kinds of devices must be connected directly to the TV's USB port. The TV may not be able to recognize the USB device or read the files on the device if it is connected to the TV via a USB extension cable. Do not disconnect the USB device while transferring files. ● When connecting an external hard drive, use the USB (HDD) port. We recommend that you use an external hard drive with its own power adapter. ● Certain digital cameras and audio devices may not be compatible with the TV. ● If there are multiple USB devices connected to the TV, the TV might not be able to recognize some or all the devices. USB devices that use high-power input (500mA or 5V) may not be supported. ● Supported file systems are FAT, exFAT, and NTFS. ● Sorting the files in Folder view mode can display up to 1,000 files per folder. If the USB device contains more than 8,000 files and folders, however, some files and folders might not be accessible. ● PTP connection mode is fully available only with digital cameras. When connecting a smartphone or tablet to the TV using PTP mode, it may not be recognized.118 Supported File Formats This TV is capable of playing back the following types of files. For more information, refer to the "Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec" section. ● Photos: .bmp, .jpg, .mpo, .png ● Music: .aac, .flac, .m4a, .mpa, .mp3, .ogg, .wma ● Video: .3gp, .avi, .asf, .flv, .m2ts, .mkv, .mov, .mp4, .mpg, .mts, .svi, .ts, .tp, .trp, .vob, .vro, .webm, .wmv ● Subtitles: .ass, .psb, .smi, .srt, .ssa, .sub, .ttxt, .txt With .avi, .mkv, and .mp4 files, the TV supports embedded subtitles. " Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV. USB Device Connection Plug the USB device into the TV's USB port. Play back stored media files as follows: ● Connecting a USB device while the TV is turned on displays a popup window. Select the type of media you want to play. ● Move to Photos, Videos & Music at the top of the Smart Hub screen. Select the type of media you want to play and then the USB device that contains the files. ● Select the USB device from the Source screen. A popup window appears. Select the type of media you want to play. USB Device Removal Press the SOURCE button to access the Source screen. Select the USB device you want to remove and then select Tools at the top of the screen. Select Remove USB from the list to safely remove the selected USB device.118 119 Playing all the Content on a Storage Device Select the All Content on the Photos, Videos & Music screen, you can play all the content saved on a storage device regardless of the type of content (videos, photos, music). Try Now Clearing the Recent Playlist Screen Menu > Smart Features > Remove viewing history > Photos, Videos & Music The Photos, Videos & Music screen displays thumbnails of recently-played media files. Selecting a thumbnail plays the media file. Using Networked External Storage Devices This TV can directly display media files from web storage devices and computers and DLNA-enabled devices connected to the TV over a network. To display the media files on an external storage device, the device must support DLNA and be connected to the same network as the TV. For more information, refer to the manual of the external storage device. For example, you can display the media files on your Smartphone or web storage in the following ways: ● Send a media playback request to the TV from a Smartphone or computer. ● Establish a link between the TV and a computer/Smartphone/web storage and play the media files. ● Use a Smartphone to send a request to the TV to play the media files stored on a computer or use a computer to request playing the media files stored on a Smartphone. ● Log into your Samsung account and play the media files stored on your web storage. " Certain media files stored on a networked external storage device may not play on the TV, depending on their resolution and format. In addition, certain functions may not be available. " Certain files may not play smoothly. If this is the case, use a USB storage device. Move to Photos, Videos & Music at the top of the Smart Hub screen. Select the media type and then the device where the media file is located. The folder and file list of the selected external storage device are shown.120 Allowing DLNA Device Connections Screen Menu > Network > AllShare Settings Selecting AllShare Settings screen Content Sharing displays a list of external storage devices connected to the same network as the TV. Select a device to allow it to connect to the TV. You can only play media files from devices that have been allowed to connect to the TV. This function is available for all DLNA DMC devices. Alternatively, you can send a media playback request from an external device that has not yet been allowed to connect to the TV and then accept the connection when prompted. AllShare AllShare makes it easy to retrieve and enjoy media files from computers and DLNA-enabled devices. However, computers need to be installed with AllShare PC and mobile devices need to support AllShare. For more information, visit the Samsung Content & Service portal (http://link.samsung.com). " You may experience compatibility issues when attempting to play media files via a third-party DLNA server. Exporting Contents From the Options list located at the top of the screen, select Send. Select all the contents files you wish to export and then select Send. This exports the selected files to a different storage device. Possible file export pairings are as follows: Source Device Target Device USB Device DLNA Device, SugarSync, Dropbox, Mobile Device Camera DLNA Device DLNA Device USB Device SugarSync, Dropbox USB Device Mobile Device USB Device120 121 Videos PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above Select the video file from the list or select the ∂ button on the virtual remote panel to play video. Use the Smart Touch Control or the on-screen buttons to control the video playback. Press the touch pad to bring up the on-screen buttons and press the RETURN button to hide them. To stop playing the file, select the ∫ button on the virtual remote panel or press the RETURN button. Try Now LED 4300 - 6300 series Select the video file from the list or select the ∂ button on the remote control to play video. Use the remote control or the on-screen buttons to control the video playback. Press the E button to bring up the on-screen buttons and press the RETURN button to hide them. To stop playing the file, press the ∫ button on remote control or press the RETURN button. Changing the view mode On the file list screen, select View on the top right of the screen and choose a category. The file list is sorted by the chosen category. Playlist Creation From the Options list at the top of the screen, select Play Selected, specify all the video files you wish to play, and then select Play. This creates a playlist. This creates a playlist. If the list is displayed in Folder view mode, only the files contained in the current folder can be selected. To select files from other folders, change the view mode.122 Opening a Different File ● Select the €/‚ on-screen button. ● Select the on-screen button and then Search Titles. Video Scanning PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above ● Drag left/right on the touch pad. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward. ● Select the †/ … button on the virtual remote panel. This changes the playback speed by up to 300%. To restore normal playback speed, select ∂ button. Alternatively, select the … button while paused to reduce the playback speed (1/8, 1/4, 1/2). Slow playback doesn't support audio and is available in the forward direction only. ● Select the ∑ button on the virtual remote panel to pause the screen and then select the ∑ button to scan through the paused video in 1-frame increments. Audio is not supported while the video is paused. ● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Scene. This will take you to a scene in the video. If the index information is damaged or unsupported, user will not be able to use the Search Scene function. ● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Time bar. This will take you to a time frame in the video. ● Select the € on-screen button. This plays the video from the beginning. LED 4300 - 6300 series ● Press the left/right arrow buttons on the remote control. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward. ● Press the †/ … button. This changes the playback speed by up to 300%. To restore normal playback speed, press ∂ button. Alternatively, press the … button while paused to reduce the playback speed (1/8, 1/4, 1/2). Slow playback doesn't support audio and is available in the forward direction only. ● Press the ∑ button to pause the screen and then press the ∑ button to scan through the paused video in 1-frame increments. Audio is not supported while the video is paused. ● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Scene. This will take you to a scene in the video. If the index information is damaged or unsupported, user will not be able to use the Search Scene function. ● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Time bar. This will take you to a time frame in the video. ● Select the € on-screen button. This plays the video from the beginning.122 123 Show Subtitles If the external storage device contains a subtitle file with the same name as the video file being played, you can choose to display subtitles on the screen. Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Subtitle Settings to show subtitles. If the subtitles appear corrupted, try changing the encoding setting. If the subtitles do not match the video, adjust the sync. If the subtitles are too small, increase the font size. Additional Video Playback Settings ● Repeat: Select the Repeat Mode on-screen button. This changes the repeat mode. Repeat One repeats the current file only, whereas Repeat All repeats all files contained in the folder. ● Picture Size: Select the Picture Size on-screen button and then select the picture size. ● Rotate: Select the Rotate on-screen button to rotate the current video 90 degrees clockwise. ● Receiver: Select the Receiver on-screen button and then power on the receiver. ● Picture Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Picture Mode. Select a picture mode. ● Sound Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Sound Mode. Select a sound mode. ● Audio Language: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Audio Language. Select an audio language. However, this option is only available with streaming videos that support multiple audio formats. ● Information: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Information to view detailed information about the current video.124 Music PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above To exit, select ∫ button on the virtual remote panel or press the RETURN button. Select the music file from the list or press the ∂ button on the virtual remote panel to play music. To exit, select ∫ button on the virtual remote panel or press the RETURN button. Try Now LED 4300 - 6300 series Select the music file from the list or press ∂ to play music. To exit, press ∫ or RETURN. Changing the view mode On the file list screen, select View on the top right of the screen and choose a category. The file list is sorted by the chosen category. Playlist Creation From the Options list at the top of the screen, select Play Selected, specify all the music files you want to play, and then select Play. This creates a playlist. If the list is displayed in Folder view mode, only the files contained in the current folder can be selected. To select files from other folders, change the view mode.124 125 Music Scanning PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above ● Select the †/ … button on the virtual remote panel. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward. ● Select the ∑ button on the virtual remote panel. This pauses the currently playing music file. LED 4300 - 6300 series ● Press the †/ … button. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward. ● Press the ∑ button. This pauses the currently playing music file. Opening a Different File ● Select the €/‚ on-screen button. ● Select a file from the playlist. Additional Music Playback Settings ● Repeat: Select the Repeat on-screen button. This changes the repeat mode. One Song repeats the current file only, whereas All repeats all files contained in the playlist. ● Shuffle: Select the Shuffle on-screen button. Choose between normal and random play. ● Receiver: Select the Receiver on-screen button and then power on the receiver. ● Sound Mode: Select the Sound Mode on-screen button. Select a sound mode. ● Information: Select the virtual remote panel's INFO button from the playlist to view detailed information about the selected file.126 Photos Select a photo from the list to display it on the screen. Press the touch pad or press the regular remote's E button to display the screen control buttons. Press RETURN to hide them. PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above To exit, press the ∫ or RETURN. Try Now LED 4300 - 6300 series To exit, press the ∫ button or RETURN button. Changing the view mode On the file list screen, select View on the top right of the screen and choose a category. The file list is sorted by the chosen category. Slide Show ● From the Options list located at the top of the screen, select Slide Show. You can view all photos in the list as a slideshow. ● Press ∂ from the list. ● Press ∂ or select the Start Slide Show on-screen button to begin the slideshow. Slide Show Settings ● Speed: Press the †/ … button or select the Slideshow Settings on-screen button and then select Speed. ● Effect: Select the Slideshow Settings on-screen button and then select Effects. Playlist Creation From the Options list at the top of the screen, select Play Selected. specify all the photos you want to play, and then select Play. This creates a playlist. If the list is displayed in Folder view mode, only the files contained in the current folder can be selected. To select files from other folders, change the view mode.126 127 Opening a Different File ● Drag left/right on the touch pad. ● Select the Previous / Next on-screen button. Background Music Enable music to play in the background during a slide show. However, all music files must be located on the same storage device. Select the Background Music on-screen button while a photo is displayed on the screen or a slide show is in progress. Select the music files you want to listen to and then Play. To play the files in a random order, select Shuffle. Mini Player When viewing photos with background music, you can control the music. Select Background Music from among the on-screen control buttons and select Mini Player. You can pause playback or skip to the previous or next song. Additional Photo Playback Settings ● Zoom: Select the Zoom on-screen button. Zoom in by up to a factor of 4. ● Rotate: Select the Rotate on-screen button. This rotates the current photo 90 degrees clockwise. ● Receiver: Select the Receiver on-screen button and then power on the receiver. ● Picture Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Picture Mode. Select a picture mode. ● Sound Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Sound Mode. Select a sound mode. However, this option is not available while background music is playing. ● Information: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Information to view detailed information about the current video.128 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) This SMART TV is enabled with Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), a feature that makes it possible to control Samsung external devices connected to the TV with ease. With Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can use the TV remote control to operate all compatible Samsung devices that are connected to the TV. However, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) only works with the remote control and not with the panel keys. " Use the TV's remote control to operate third-party cable boxes, Blu-ray players, and home theaters connected to the TV. For more information, refer to "Universal Remote Setup". Precautions ● This feature does not support other manufacturer's products. ● Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV using an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). In this case, you will need to replace the HDMI cable. ● The TV remote control may not function under certain circumstances. In this case, select the Anynet+ device again. ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) only works with external devices that support Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) and only when those devices are either in standby mode or turned on. ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) can control up to 12 compatible external devices (up to 3 of the same type). With home theater systems, however, the number of systems that can be controlled is limited to one. ● A home theater system that has been connected to the TV using an HDMI cable and an optical cable supports 2-channel audio only. However, the home theater is capable of supporting 5.1-channel audio from digital broadcasts. ● To listen to 5.1-channel audio from an external device, connect the device to the TV via an HDMI cable and the device's digital audio output connector directly to the home theater system.128 129 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Setup Screen Menu > System > Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Try Now Enable/disable Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC): Enables/disables Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Disabling this turns off all Anynet+-related features. Try Now ● Auto Turn Off: Turns off external devices when the TV is turned off. Some devices do not support this option. Try Now Using the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) You can operate external devices using just the TV remote control. Switching between Anynet+ Devices 11 Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display the list. Select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) from the list. A device selection screen will appear. 21 Select a device and wait for the switch to take place. This process may take up to 2 minutes to complete and cannot be cancelled when started. " Alternatively, switch to a different Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) device by selecting its name from the Source list. However, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) cannot be used if a connected input connector is selected.130 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Device Menu Once the TV has switched over to the selected device, you can access the device's menu using the TV's remote control. Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display the list. " The items displayed by Tools may vary, depending on the external device. ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC): A list appears showing Anynet+ compatible ones of external devices connected to the TV. Either choose View TV to close the current Anynet+ and watch TV, or choose an external device to switch to the device. ● (Connected Device) MENU: Display the menu of the connected device. If the target device is a DVD player, the DVD menu is shown. ● (Connected Device) Tools: Display a list of frequently-used functions that are available for the device. If the target device is a DVD player, the DVD playback menu is shown. Some external devices may not support this option. ● (Connected Device) Title Menu: Display the connected device's title menu. If the target device is a DVD player, the DVD title menu is shown. Some external devices may not support this option. ARC ARC enables digital sound to be output using just an HDMI cable. However, ARC is only available with AV receivers that support ARC.130 131 Sharing Mobile Device Screens on the TV The Screen Mirroring function is not available for LED 4300 series. This TV is capable of displaying mobile device screens. You can use the following features to enjoy video, photo, and music files from mobile devices directly on your TV. ● Use the Screen Mirroring menu to display a mobile device's screen on the TV. Screen Mirroring Screen Menu > Network > AllShare Settings > Screen Mirroring Displays mobile device screens on your TV wirelessly. However, Screen Mirroring is only available with mobile devices that support AllShare Cast. For more information, visit the mobile device manufacturer's website. " Depending on the network condition, screen or voice dropouts may occur when the Screen Mirroring function is running. Mobile Device Connection Run Screen Mirroring (Network > AllShare Settings > Screen Mirroring) function. Alternatively, press the SOURCE button and select Screen Mirroring from the source list. After running the Screen Mirroring, run Mirroring function on the mobile device. The TV will connect with the mobile device, and user can view the connected mobile device's screen on the TV.132 Other Information Support Support Remote Management e-Manual (Troubleshooting) Self Diagnosis Software Update Use Mode Home Use Contact Samsung " The displayed image may differ depending on the model. The TV has several built-in systems designed for user and TV system support. Remote Management Screen Menu > Support > Remote Management Try Now If you need assistance with your TV, you can use this feature to let Samsung Electronics diagnose your TV remotely. You will need to read and agree to the service agreement before using this feature. A Samsung Electronics technician will then diagnose, repair, and update your TV remotely. However, these features are only available when your TV is connected to the Internet.132 133 What is Remote Support? Samsung Remote Support service offers you one-on-one support with a Samsung Technician who can remotely. ● Diagnose your TV ● Adjust the TV settings for you ● Perform a factory reset your TV ● Install recommended firmware updates How Does it Work? Having a Samsung Tech remotely service your TV is really pretty simple Call Samsung Contact Center and ask for remote support. Open the menu on your TV and go to the Support section. Select Remote Management and Provide the Pin# to the agent. The agent will then access your TV. That's it!134 e-Manual Screen Menu > Support > e-Manual (Troubleshooting) This TV features a built-in electronic user manual. It is a comprehensive guide for using your Samsung TV. Refer to the "e-Manual" for more information. Self Diagnosis Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis Try Now Your TV is capable of diagnosing itself for picture-, sound-, and signal-related issues. The selfdiagnosis function consists of the following options: ● Picture Test ● Sound Test ● Motion Control Environment Check ● Signal Information ● Reset Picture Test Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Picture Test Try Now The Picture Test displays a high definition picture to examine it for flaws or faults. If the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion, the TV may have a problem. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. If the test picture is displayed properly, there may be a problem with the external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, check the signal strength or refer to the external device’s user manual.134 135 Sound Test Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Sound Test Try Now Use the built-in melody to check for sound problems. If no melody is played by the TV’s speakers, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker and then try again. If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. If the melody is played, there may be a problem with the external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. Motion Control Environment Check Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Motion Control Environment Check Test the ambient noise and brightness levels to see if they are suitable for SMART Interaction use. Signal Information Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Signal Information Try Now The signal Information displays the digital channel signal information and strength. Users can then adjust the antenna to increase the signal strength and receive HD channels. This option is only available for digital channels. Reset Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Reset Try Now This resets all settings to the factory default settings except for the network settings. Select Reset, enter the PIN code when requested, and then select Yes. All settings are then reset. The TV turns off and on again automatically and then displays the Setup screen. For more information on resetting the TV, refer to the user manual that came with the TV.136 Updating the Software Screen Menu > Support > Software Update Try Now Check your TV's software version and upgrade it if necessary. [ DO NOT turn off the TV’s power until the upgrade is complete. The TV will turn off and on automatically after completing the software upgrade. All video and audio settings return to the default settings after a software upgrade. Update now Screen Menu > Support > Software Update > Update now Try Now An online upgrade downloads and installs the upgrade software directly from the Internet. Configure the TV to connect to a network and make sure it can access the Internet. Select Online. Manual Update Download the latest update file from the Samsung website. Decompress the file and copy it into the root directory of a flash drive. Insert the flash drive one of the TV’s USB ports to install the update. Auto Update Screen Menu > Support > Software Update > Auto Update Try Now This option upgrades the TV while it is in Standby Mode. In Standby Mode, the TV appears to be turned off but still has access to the Internet. This allows the TV to upgrade itself automatically while it is not in use. Because the TV’s internal processes are operating, the screen may emit a faint glow, and this may continue for more than 1 hour until the software download is complete. Check the network configuration and internet connectivity and then enable this option.136 137 Standby Mode Upgrade Settings Specify when you want the upgrade to take place. This TV can be set to periodically check and install updates. Usage Mode Screen Menu > Support > Use Mode Try Now Select the TV's usage mode. If your TV has been unintentionally set to Store Demo, you can change the mode with this option. Store Demo should be used in retail environments only. With Store Demo, certain functions are disabled and the TV automatically resets itself after a certain amount of time. Support Info Screen Menu > Support > Contact Samsung Try Now Check the information below if your TV is not working properly or you need information on upgrading the software. The section below contains useful information about the product and instruction on obtaining the latest software.138 Kensington Security Lock A Kensington Security Lock is a physical device that can be used to protect the TV against theft. Look for the Kensington slot on the back of the TV. The slot has a K icon next to it. Wrap the lock around an object that is too heavy to carry and then thread it through the TV's Kensington slot. The lock, however, has to be purchased separately. The method of using a Kensington Security Lock may differ for each TV model. Refer to the Kensington Security Lock manual for more information. Display Resolution PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above Connect a computer to the TV and then configure the computer's resolution by referencing the table below. The optimal resolution is 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz. Choosing an output signal not included in the table can result in a blank screen or just the power indicator being turned on. Refer to the user manual of the graphics card and configure the resolution as indicated below. IBM Resolution (Dots x Lines) Standard Frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Clock Frequency (MHz) Polarity (Horizontal / Vertical) 720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+ MAC Resolution (Dots x Lines) Standard Frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Clock Frequency (MHz) Polarity (Horizontal / Vertical) 640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/- 832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/- 1152 x 870 75Hz 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/-138 139 VESA DMT Resolution (Dots x Lines) Standard Frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequency (Hz) Clock Frequency (MHz) Polarity (Horizontal / Vertical) 640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/- 640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/- 640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/- 800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+ 800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+ 800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+ 1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/- 1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/- 1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+ 1152 x 864 75Hz 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+ 1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+ 1280 x 800 60Hz 49.702 59.810 83.500 -/+ 1280 x 1024 60Hz 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+ 1280 x 1024 75Hz 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+ 1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+ 1440 x 900 60Hz 55.935 59.887 106.500 -/+ 1600 x 900RB 60Hz 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+ 1680 x 1050 60Hz 65.290 59.954 146.250 -/+ 1920 x 1080 60Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+140 LED 4300 series models Connect a computer to the TV and then configure the computer's resolution by referencing the table below. The optimal resolution is 1366 x 768 @ 60Hz. Choosing an output signal not included in the table can result in a blank screen or just the power indicator being turned on. Refer to the user manual of the graphics card and configure the resolution as indicated below. IBM Resolution Standard frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequenzcy (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) 720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+ MAC Resolution Standard frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequenzcy (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) 640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/- 832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-140 141 VESA DMT Resolution Standard frequency Horizontal Frequency (KHz) Vertical Frequenzcy (Hz) Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) Sync Polarity (H / V) 640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/- 640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/- 640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/- 800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+ 800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+ 800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+ 1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/- 1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/- 1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+ 1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+ 1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+142 Picture Size and Input Signal Input Signal Picture Size ATV, AV 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 Component (480i, 480p) 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 DTV (720p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Smart View 2 DTV (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 2 Component (720p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3 Component (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 1 (for LED TV), Smart View 2 (for LED TV) The Picture Size setting is applied to the current source and the applied Picture Size will remain in effect the next time the source is selected.142 143 Supported 3D Resolutions These specifications apply to a display ratio of 16:9 only. HDMI 3D Format: L/R, T/B Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 3D Format: Frame Packing Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30144 Component Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Digital Channel Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Videos/Photos Refer to the "Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec". HDMI PC Mode Supported 3D resolutions for HDMI PC mode apply to LED TVs only. The optimal resolution for HDMI PC mode is 1920 x 1080. The TV may not display 3D images properly and full screen view may not be available if set to a different resolution.144 145 Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec Subtitle External Name File Extension MPEG-4 Timed text .ttxt SAMI .smi SubRip .srt SubViewer .sub Micro DVD .sub or .txt SubStation Alpha .ssa Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass Powerdivx .psb Internal Name Container Xsub AVI SubStation Alpha MKV Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV SubRip MKV MPEG-4 Timed text MP4146 Supported image resolutions File Extension Type Resolution *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640 *.png PNG 4096x4096 *.bmp BMP 4096x4096 *.mpo MPO 15360x8640 Supported music file formats File Extension Type Codec Comments *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC Supports up to 2 channel *.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2 channel *.wma WMA WMA WMA 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel. WMA lossless audio is not supported. Supports up to M2 profile (except LBR mode) *.wav wav wav *.mid *.midi midi midi type 0, type 1 are supported. *.ape ape ape146 147 Video Codec File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.avi Divx 3.11 / 4 / 5 / 6 *.mkv *.asf MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 30 *.wmv *.mp4 AVI MKV H.264 BP/MP/HP AC3 LPCM *.3gp *.vro ASF MP4 Motion JPEG 640x480 6~30 8 ADPCM(IMA, MS) AAC *.mpg *.mpeg 3GP MOV Microsoft MPEG-4 v3 HE-AAC WMA *.ts *.tp FLV VRO Window Media Video v7,v8,v9 1920x1080 (WMV v7,v8, 30 DD+ MPEG(MP3) *.flv *.vob TS SVAF MPEG2 MSMPEG4 v3: 1280x720) *.svi *.m2ts MPEG1 *.mts *.divx MVC 24/25/30 60 VP6 640x480 4 *.webm WebM VP8 1920x1080 6~30 20 Vorbis Other Restrictions Codecs may not function properly if there is a problem with the content data. Video content does not play or does not play correctly if there is an error in the content or container. Sound or video may not work if they have standard bit rates/frame rates above the TV’s compatibility ratings. If the Index Table is wrong, the Seek (Jump) function does not work. When playing video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly because of data transmission speeds. Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player.148 Video Decoders ● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 (does not support FMO/ASO/RS) ● VC1 AP L4 is not supported. ● All video codecs excluding WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, and VP6: Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max ● GMC is not supported. ● Supports SVAF top/bottom and left/right only. ● Supports Blu-ray/DVD MVC specs only. Audio Decoders ● WMA 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channels. Supports up to M2 profile. (Excluding M0 LBR mode) ● WMA lossless audio is not supported. ● Vorbis is supported for up to 2 channels. ● DD+ is supported for up to 5.1 channels.148 149 3D Precautions Viewing guidelines ● In 3D view mode, the screen may flicker under florescent lighting (50Hz ~ 60Hz) or three-wave lighting. " In this case, it is advisable to turn off the lighting or adjust it to a low level. ● When switching the picture mode from 3D view, the 3D view mode turns off, and the Samsung Multi View 3D Glasses fail to operate, resulting in the display not operating properly. " Then, the 3D glasses turn off. ● If you lie on your side while watching TV with the 3D glasses, the picture may look darker or may not be visible. ● If the 3D glasses are defective or damaged, they cannot be repaired and should be exchanged for a new pair. The repair service is free of charge within the warranty period, which, however, does not cover damage from the user's fault. ● The actual 3D effect may be experienced differently depending on the viewer. The 3D effect may not be experienced by a person who has a great difference of vision in the left and right eyes. ● In 3D view mode, it is advisable to watch TV within the recommended distance. " The 3D function of the glasses may not work properly if you are out of the recommended distance for about 3 seconds. " If you stay out of the recommended range, the 3D glasses lose the wireless communications with the TV, and then the display turns off in few seconds before the glasses turn off. ● The 3D glasses may not work properly if there are any nearby active 3D devices or electronic or wireless communication devices (for example, a device that uses the 2.4GHz or 5GHz frequency range such as a microwave or AP). In this case, move the devices away from the 3D glasses. ● The Samsung Multi View 3D Glasses may not work properly near metal objects or in an electromagnetic field. In this case, move the metal objects or the electromagnetic device away from the 3D glasses. ● The vividness of the image may be deteriorated if you watch TV in a location that is exposed to direct sunlight or illumination. ● The temples of the 3D glasses are unfolded. Do not attempt to fold the temples with excessive force. This may damage the 3D glasses. ● If you lie on your side while watching TV with the 3D glasses, the picture may look darker or may not be visible. ● If watching 3D content for an extended time without averting your eyes elsewhere, the 3D glasses may turn off automatically. (for SSG-3570 models only) ● Take off the 3D glasses and put them on again if it does not work in 3D view mode in the first place. (for SSG-3570 models only)150 CAUTION! IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D IMAGES. READ THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS BEFORE YOU OR YOUR CHILD USE THE 3D FUNCTION. ● Adults should frequently check on children who are using the 3D function. If there are any complaints of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness or nausea, stop the child from viewing the 3D TV and ensure that they rest. ● Do not use the 3D glasses for any purpose other than the intended purpose, such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective goggles. ● Some viewers may experience discomfort such as dizziness, nausea and headaches while viewing 3D TV. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop watching the 3D content, remove the 3D glasses, and take a rest. ● An extended period of watching TV in 3D view mode may cause eye fatigue. In this case, stop watching the 3D content immediately, take off the 3D glasses and allow your eyes to rest. ● Do not use the 3D function or the 3D glasses while walking or moving around. Wearing the 3D glasses while moving around may result in injury due to running into objects, tripping and/or falling. ● If you sleep with the 3D glasses on, the temples on the glasses may become broken. ● The temples of the 3D glasses are unfolded. Do not attempt to fold the temples with excessive force. Folding the temples with excessive force may damage the 3D glasses. ● Do not shake your 3D glasses repeatedly. Shaking the glasses will power them on and can cause the battery to discharge faster than it should. (for SSG-3570 models only)150 151 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The following safety instructions are to ensure your personal safety and prevent property damage. Please read them to ensure the proper use of the product. ● Do not place the product in a location exposed to direct sunlight, heat, fire, or water. Exposure may result in a product malfunction or fire. ● Do not apply force to the lenses of the 3D glasses. Do not drop or bend the product. Applying force, dropping, or bending may result in a product malfunction. ● Keep components of the 3D glasses out of reach of children, and especially ensure children do not swallow one of the components. If your child swallowed a component, consult your doctor immediately. ● When cleaning the product, do not spray water or cleaner directly onto the surface of the product. Spraying water or cleaner directly onto the glasses may result in fire or electric shock, damage to the product's surface, or cause the indicator labels on the product's surface to come loose. ● Do not apply chemicals containing alcohol, solvent, or surfactant such as wax, benzene, thinner, pesticide, air freshener, lubricant, or cleaner to the product. These chemicals may cause the product's exterior to be discolored or cracked, or labels or instructions to be removed. Use only a soft cloth such as superfine fibers or cotton flannels for cleaning the product as the surface or the lenses easily cracks. Because the product can be easily scratched with foreign substances, make sure to dust off the cloth before using. ● Do not sleep while wearing the 3D glasses. Wearing the 3D glasses while sleeping may damage them. ● Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the 3D glasses by yourself. Do not use a product that is damaged. ● Take care that you do not injure your eyes with the edges of the frame of the 3D glasses when wearing them. ● Put the 3D glasses on and take them off with both hands. ● Use only approved batteries, and make sure to insert the batteries in the correct polarities. If the batteries are replaced in the wrong polarities, the batteries may implode or leak its internal chemicals, which may cause fire, inflict injury on users, or contaminate (damage) its environment. (for SSG-3570 models only) ● Keep the removed batteries out of childrens' reach to prevent children from swallowing them. If they swallow them, consult with a doctor immediately. (for SSG-3570 models only)152 Licenses DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s: 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535, 6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567, 7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 and 7,548,853. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS Premium Sound | 5.1 is a trademark of DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s: 6,285,767, 8,027,477, 5,319,713, 5,333,201, 5,638,452, 5,771,295, 5,970,152, 5,912,976, 7,200,236, 7,492,907, 8,050,434, 7,720,240, 7,031,474, 7,907,736 and 7,764,802. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS Studio Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.152 153 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. This license is not available for LED 4300 series. Open Source License Notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on the product menu. Open Source License Notice is written only English.154 Troubleshooting If the TV appears to have a problem, first review this list of possible problems and solutions. If none of the troubleshooting tips apply, visit www.samsung.com/support or contact Samsung Customer Service. Screen If there is a problem with the screen, run Picture Test (Support > Self Diagnosis > Picture Test) to diagnose the issue. If the test fails to identify a problem, there may be a problem with an external device or the signal strength. There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! Flickering and Dimming If your Samsung Television is flickering or dimming sporadically, you may need to disable some of the energy efficiency features. Disable Energy Saving (System > Eco Solution > Eco Sensor) and/or Energy Saving (System > Eco Solution > Energy Saving) and check again. Component Connections/Screen Color If you find that the color on your Samsung television screen is not correct or the black and white colors are off, run Self Diagnosis (Support > Self Diagnosis > Picture Test). If the test results are negative, check the following: Are the TV's video input connectors connected to the correct external device video output connectors? Check other connections as well. If the TV is connected to an external device via a component cable, check that the Pb, Pr, and Y jacks are plugged into their proper connectors. Screen Brightness If you find that the colors on your Samsung TV are correct but just a little too dark or bright, try adjusting the following settings first. Navigate to Picture and adjust Backlight/Cell Light (applicable models), Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Color, Tint (G/R) and other picture quality adjustment settings. Auto Motion Plus/Blur If you find that there is a blur or “ghost” shadow to the images on your television screen, you might be able to correct the issue using Auto Motion Plus (Picture > Picture Options > Auto Motion Plus). Unwanted Powering Off If your Samsung TV appears to turn off by itself, try disabling some of the TV's energy efficiency features. Check if Sleep Timer (System > Time > Sleep Timer) has been enabled. Sleep Timer automatically turns off the TV to save energy after a specified period of inactivity. If the Sleep Timer has not been enabled, see if No Signal Power Off (System > Eco Solution > No Signal Power Off) or Auto Power Off (System > Eco Solution > Auto Power Off) has been enabled. Problems Powering On When the TV is turned on, the remote control receiver flashes 5 times before the screen turns on. If you find that you are having problems powering on your Samsung television, there are a number of things to check before calling the service department. If the power cord is connected properly and the remote control is operating normally, the problem might be with the antenna cable connection or the cable/satellite box not being turned on. Check the antenna connection or turn on the cable/satellite box.154 155 There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! Unable to find a Channel Run Setup (System > Setup) or Auto Program (Broadcasting > Auto Program). The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. Store displays are all tuned to digital, HD (high definition) channels. If you have an analog cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. Many HD channels are upscaled from SD (Standard Definition) content. Look for a channel that is broadcasting true HD content. Cable/Satellite Subscribers: Try HD channels from the channel lineup. Air/Cable Antenna Connection: Try HD channels after performing the Auto Program operation. Adjust the cable/satellite box's video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. The picture is distorted. The compression of video content may cause picture distortions, especially in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. A weak or bad quality signal can cause picture distortions. This is not an issue with the TV. Mobile phones used close to the TV (within 1m) may cause noise in analog and digital channels. The color is wrong or missing. If you’re using a Component connection, make sure that the component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color problems or a blank screen. The color is poor or the picture is not bright enough. Navigate to Picture and adjust Picture Mode, Brightness, Sharpness, Color, and other picture adjustment settings. See if Energy Saving (System > Eco Solution > Energy Saving) has been enabled. Try resetting the picture. (Picture > Reset Picture) There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. If Picture Size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9. Change the cable/satellite box resolution. The picture is black and white. If you are using AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the TV's green component jack. The color is wrong or missing. If you are using a Component connection, make sure that the component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color problems or a blank screen.156 Sound If you find that there is a problem with the TV's speakers, run Sound Test (Support > Self Diagnosis > Sound Test) to diagnose the issue. If the audio is OK, the sound problem may be caused by the source or signal. There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. Please check the volume of the device (cable/satellite box, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.) connected to your TV. The picture is good but there is no sound. Navigate to Sound and set Speaker Select to TV Speaker. If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option. (For example, you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI if the box connected to your TV is using an HDMI cable.) If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. Reboot the connected device by disconnecting and then reconnecting the device’ s power cable. The speakers are making an odd sound. Make sure that the audio cable is connected to the correct audio output connector on the external device. For antenna or cable connections, check the signal information. A low signal level may cause sound distortions. Run Self Diagnosis (Support > Self Diagnosis > Sound Test). 3D TV There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! The 3D Active Glasses are not working correctly. Make sure the glasses are turned on. The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is another 3D product or electronic device turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. The 3D images don’t look quite right. The ideal viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen. We also recommend sitting with your eyes level with the screen. The batteries in the 3D glasses don’t last. Turn off the 3D glasses when you are not using them. If you leave the 3D glasses on, the battery lifespan is shortened.156 157 Antenna (Air/Cable) Connection There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! The TV is not receiving all channels. Make sure the coaxial cable is connected securely. Run Auto Program (Broadcasting > Auto Program) to add all available channels to the channel list. Verify that the antenna is positioned correctly. There are no captions on digital channels. Navigate to Caption (Broadcasting > Caption) and change the Caption Mode setting. Some channels may not have caption data. The picture is distorted. The compression of video content may cause picture distortions. This is especially true with fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. A weak signal can cause picture distortions. This is not a problem with the TV. PC Connection There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! The "Mode Not Supported" message appears. Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches a resolution supported by the TV. The video is OK but there is no audio. If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC. If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. Networking There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! The wireless network connection failed. Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP router. The Software Update over the network has failed. Check the network connection status. If the TV is not connected to a network, connect to a network. The upgrade will not proceed if you already have the latest software version.158 Miscellaneous There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! The TV is hot. Watching TV for an extended period of time causes the panel to generate heat. The heat from the panel is dissipated through internal vents running along the top part of the TV. The bottom portion, however, may feel hot to the touch after extended use. Children watching TV need constant adult supervision to prevent them from touching the TV. This heat, however, is not a defect and does not affect the TV's functionality. The picture won’t display in full screen. HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying upscaled SD (4:3) content. Black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen when you watch movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. Adjust the picture size options on your external device or set the TV to full screen. The "Mode Not Supported" message appears. Check the supported resolutions of the TV and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. The Captions item in the TV menu is grayed out. You cannot select the Caption menu if you have selected a source connected to the TV via HDMI or Component. The external device’s caption function must also be activated. The TV smells of plastic. This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The TV's Signal Information option is not activated in the Self Diagnosis. Verify that the current channel is a digital channel. Signal Information is only available with digital channels. The TV is tilted to the side. Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it. Broadcasting is grayed out. The Broadcasting menu is only available when Source is set to TV. The Broadcasting menu cannot be accessed while watching TV using a cable box or satellite receiver.158 159 There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! The settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. If Use Mode is set to Store Demo, the TV's audio and video settings are automatically reset every 30 minutes. Change Use Mode (Support > Use Mode) to Home Use. There is an intermittent loss of audio or video. Check the cable connections and reconnect them. Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If you are mounting the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90-degree connectors. There are small particles on the TV's bezel. This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. The PIP menu is not available. PIP functionality is only available when you are using an HDMI or Component source. A POP (TV’s internal banner ad) appears on the screen. Change Use Mode (Support > Use Mode) to Home Use. The TV is making a popping noise. The expansion and contraction of the TV's outer casing may cause a popping noise. This does not indicate a product malfunction. The TV is safe to use. The TV is making a humming noise. Your TV utilizes high-speed switching circuits and high levels of electrical current, and depending on the brightness level being used may seem slightly noisier than a conventional TV. Your TV has undergone strict quality control procedures that meet our demanding performance and reliability requirements. Some noise coming from the TV is considered normal and is not an acceptable cause for an exchange or refund. Image Retention (Burn In) Issue This issue affects PDP TVs only. Watching TV for an extended period of time or using the 4:3 screen ratio only may result in burn-ins. PDP TVs are equipped with Pixel Shift screen burn reduction technology. Pixel Shift technology reduces screen burn-ins in PDP TVs. It does this by moving the picture slightly vertically or horizontally. Use Screen Burn Protection (System > Screen Burn Protection) to prevent screen burn-ins.160 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! Anynet+ does not work. Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. Only one external device may be connected to Receiver. Check if the power cord of the Anynet+ device is properly connected. Check the cable connections of the Anynet+ device. Navigate to the System menu and verify that Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible. Anynet+ may not function under certain circumstances. (Searching channels, operating Smart Hub or Setup, etc.) If you have disconnected and then reconnected the HDMI cable, scan for devices again or turn your TV off and on. I want to start Anynet+. Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and then navigate to the System menu to see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. After checking, press TOOLS button, select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) and then choose a device. I want to exit Anynet+. Select View TV from the Anynet+ menu. Select a non-Anynet+ device from Source. The message "Connecting to Anynet+ device..." or "Disconnecting from Anynet+ device" appears on the screen. You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a viewing mode. Use the remote control after the TV has completed the Anynet+ configuration or has switched to a viewing mode. The Anynet+ device won't play. You cannot use the play function when Setup is progress. The connected device is not displayed. Check whether the device supports Anynet+. Check whether the HDMI cable is properly connected. Navigate to the System menu and verify that Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. Scan for Anynet+ devices again. Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV using an HDMI cable. Make sure the device is connected to your TV with an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+. If the connection is terminated because there has been a power failure or the HDMI cable has been disconnected, please scan for the device again. The TV audio is not being played through the receiver. Connect an optical cable to the TV and the receiver. ARC enables digital sound to be output via the HDMI (ARC) port. However, ARC is only available when the TV is connected to an audio receiver that supports ARC.160 161 Apps There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! Some application content only appears in English. How can I change the language? The application content language may be different from the user interface language. The ability to change the language depends on the service provider. Some application services do not work. Check with the service provider. Refer to the help section on the application service provider's website. Photos, Videos & Music There is something wrong with the TV. Try this! Some files can't be played back. This problem may occur with high-bitrate files. Most files can be played back, but you might experience problems with high-bitrate files. Reset the Personal Info and TV settings Reset Type Navigation Description TV settings Reset Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Reset Reset all the settings (Picture, Sound, Broadcasting and Smart Hub, etc), excluding the network settings, to factory defaults. Smart Hub Reset Screen Menu > Smart Features > Smart Hub Reset Reset all saved information relating to Samsung accounts and linked service accounts, as well as Smart Hub service agreements and applications.162 Web Browser 11 Select Web Browser. The browsing screen may differ from the one on your computer. 21 The web browser is not compatible with Java applications. 31 You cannot download files. If you attempt to download a file, you will receive an error message instead. 41 The web browser may not be able to access certain websites. 51 Playing Flash videos may be restricted. 61 E-commerce for online purchases is not supported. 71 With websites that have scrollable windows, scrolling through such a window can result in corrupted characters. 81 ActiveX is not supported. 91 Certain options are not accessible in Link Browsing mode. (Switch to Pointer Browsing to activate this.) 111 Only a limited number of fonts are supported. Certain symbols and characters may not be displayed properly. 111 The response to remote commands and the resulting on-screen display may be delayed while a webpage is loading. 121 Loading a webpage may be delayed or suspended completely with certain operating systems. 131 The copy and paste operations are not supported. 141 When composing an email or a simple message, certain functions such as the font size and color selection may not be available. 151 There is a limit to the number of bookmarks and the size of the log file that can be saved. 161 The number of windows that can be opened concurrently varies depending on the search conditions and the TV model. 171 The web browsing speed will vary depending on the network environment.162 163 181 Playing embedded video automatically disables PIP. Video playback may not commence after PIP is disabled. In this case, you will have to reload the page. 191 The web browser supports .mp3 audio files only. 211 The web browser supports a specific file format for importing and exporting bookmarks. (Compatible Format: Netscape-bookmarkfile- 1) 211 The folder tree information is not included when importing and exporting bookmarks. 221 Exporting bookmarks to a USB device connected to the TV saves the bookmarks under a folder named "Samsung SmartTV Bookmark". 231 If Clock (System > Time > Clock) has not been enabled, the browsing history will not be saved. 241 The browsing history is saved in the order of latest to oldest, with the oldest entries being overwritten first. 251 Depending on the types of video/audio codecs supported, it might not be possible to play back certain video and audio files during Flash playback. 261 A sudden change in the picture brightness inside a video window may affect the brightness of the screen. This problem applies to PDP TVs only. 271 Video sources from PC-optimized streaming service providers may not play properly on our proprietary web browser. 281 Using the on-screen QWERTY keyboard automatically disables PIP. (Except when entering a URL.) User Manual GT-I8730 www.samsung.com2 About this manual This device provides high quality mobile communication and entertainment using Samsung’s high standards and technological expertise. This user manual is specially designed to detail the device’s functions and features. • Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Images and screenshots may differ in appearance from the actual product. • Content may differ from the final product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of the manual, refer to the Samsung website, www.samsung.com. • Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the overall performance of the device. Applications related to the content may not work properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in. • Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. • Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by applications from any provider other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or applications to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. • You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services. To avoid additional charges, select an appropriate data tariff plan. For details, contact your service provider.About this manual 3 • Default applications that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an application provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed applications, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information Copyright Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics This guide is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics.About this manual 4 Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • The Android logo, Google ™, Google Maps ™, Google Mail ™, YouTube ™, Google Play™ Store, and Google Talk ™ are trademarks of Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Wi-Fi ®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™, Wi-Fi Direct ™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.5 Table of Contents Getting started 7 Device layout 8 Buttons 9 Package contents 10 Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery 13 Charging the battery 15 Inserting a memory card 17 Turning the device on and off 18 Holding the device 18 Locking and unlocking the device 18 Adjusting the volume 19 Switching to silent mode Basics 20 Indicator icons 21 Using the touch screen 24 Control motions 29 Page Buddy 29 Notifications 30 Home screen 32 Using applications 32 Applications screen 34 Help 34 Entering text 36 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network 37 Setting up accounts 38 Transferring files 39 Securing the device 41 Upgrading the device Communication 42 Phone 47 Contacts 51 Messaging 52 Email 54 Google Mail 55 Talk 56 Google+ 56 Messenger 57 ChatON Web & network 58 Internet 59 Chrome 60 Bluetooth 61 AllShare Play 62 Group Play 63 NFC 64 S Beam Media 65 Music Player 66 CameraTable of Contents 6 Settings 98 About Settings 98 Wi-Fi 99 Bluetooth 99 Data usage 99 More settings 101 Home screen mode 101 Blocking mode 102 Sound 102 Display 103 Storage 103 Power saving mode 104 Battery 104 Application manager 104 Location services 104 Lock screen 105 Security 107 Language and input 110 Cloud 110 Backup and reset 110 Add account 110 Motion 111 Accessory 112 Date and time 112 Accessibility 113 Developer options 114 About device Troubleshooting 72 Gallery 75 Video Player 76 YouTube 77 FM Radio Application & media stores 79 Play Store 80 Samsung Apps 80 S Suggest 81 Game Hub Utilities 82 S Memo 84 S Planner 86 Dropbox 87 Cloud 88 Clock 90 Calculator 90 Voice Recorder 91 S Voice 92 Google 93 Voice Search 93 My Files 94 Downloads Travel & local 95 Maps 96 Local 97 Navigation7 Getting started Device layout Back button Microphone Front camera Earpiece Menu button Multipurpose jack Touch screen Proximity/Light sensor Microphone for speakerphone Home button Power button Rear camera GPS antenna Flash Speaker Headset jack Main antenna Back cover Volume buttonGetting started 8 The microphone at the top of the device is active only when you use the speakerphone or take videos. • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Do not use a screen protector. This causes sensor malfunctions. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press and hold for 8-10 seconds to reset the device if it has fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes. • Press to lock or unlock the device. The device goes into lock mode when the touch screen turns off. Menu • Tap to open a list of options available for the current screen. • Tap and hold on the Home screen to launch Google search. Home • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to open the list of recent applications. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume.Getting started 9 Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Battery • Quick start guide Use only Samsung-approved software. Pirated or illegal software may cause damage or malfunctions, which are not covered by the warranty. • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Other accessories may not be compatible with your device. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Malfunctions caused by using unapproved accessories are not covered by the warranty service. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website.Getting started 10 Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the included battery. • Only microSIM cards work with the device. • Some LTE services may not be available depending on the service provider. For details about service availability, contact your service provider. 1 Remove the back cover. • Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover. • Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover. 2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards.Getting started 11 • Do not remove the protective tape covering the antenna, as this can damage the antenna. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to remove the memory card. • Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards. 3 Push the SIM or USIM card into the slot until it locks in place. 4 Insert the battery. 1 2 5 Replace the back cover.Getting started 12 Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Pull out the battery. 3 Push the SIM or USIM card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out.Getting started 13 Charging the battery Charge the battery before using it for the first time. Use the charger to charge the battery. A computer can be also used to charge the device by connecting them via the USB cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the device emits a warning tone and displays a low battery power message. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. Charging with the charger Plug the small end of the charger into the multipurpose jack of the device, and plug the large end of the charger into an electric socket. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.Getting started 14 • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the device. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The device should remain close to the electric socket while charging. Checking the battery charge status When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current battery charge status: Charging Fully chargedGetting started 15 Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary applications with the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of applications. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the brightness of the display. Inserting a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 32 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports only the FAT file system for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the extSdCard folder under the internal memory.Getting started 16 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. 3 Push the memory card into the slot until it locks in place. 4 Replace the back cover. Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Storage→Unmount SD card→OK. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Push the memory card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out. 3 Replace the back cover. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or damage to the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data.Getting started 17 Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Storage→Format SD card→Format SD card→Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored on the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Turning the device on and off When turning on the device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device. • Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. • Press and hold the Power button and tap Flight mode to disable the wireless features. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off.Getting started 18 Holding the device Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. Locking and unlocking the device When not in use, lock the device to prevent unwanted operation. Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and puts the device into lock mode. The device automatically gets locked if it is not used for a specified period. To unlock the device, press the Power button or the Home button when the touch screen is turned off, tap anywhere on the screen, and then flick your finger in any direction. You can use motion to unlock the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Motion. To unlock the device with motion, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then tilt the device forwards. Adjusting the volume Press the Volume button up or down to adjust the ringtone volume, or to adjust the sound volume when playing music or video.Getting started 19 Switching to silent mode Use one of the following methods: • Press and hold the Volume button down until it switches to silent mode. • Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Mute. • Open the notifications panel at the top of the screen, and then tap Sound. Set the device to alert you to various events in silent mode. Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Vibrate.20 Basics Indicator icons The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the device. The icons listed in the table below are most common. Icon Meaning No signal Signal strength Roaming (outside of normal service area) GPRS network connected EDGE network connected UMTS network connected HSDPA network connected HSPA+ network connected LTE network connected Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Call in progress Missed call Synced with the web Connected to computer No SIM or USIM card New text or multimedia message Alarm activated Silent mode activated Vibration mode activatedBasics 21 Icon Meaning Flight mode activated Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Using the touch screen Use only fingers to use the touch screen. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • Do not allow the touch screen to contact water. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. Finger gestures Tapping To open an application, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the on-screen keyboard, tap it with a finger.Basics 22 Dragging To move an icon, thumbnail, or preview to a new location, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Double-tap again to return.Basics 23 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Applications screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list, such as contacts. Pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out.Basics 24 Control motions Simple motions allow easy control of the device. Before using motions, make sure the motion feature is activated. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Motion, and then drag the Motion switch to the right. Excessive shaking or impact to the device may result in unintended inputs. To learn how to control motions properly, tap Apps→Settings→Motion→Learn about motions. (p.111) Rotating the screen Many applications allow display in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotating the device causes the display to automatically adjust to fit the new screen orientation. To prevent the display from rotating automatically, open the notifications panel and deselect Screen rotation. • Some applications do not allow screen rotation. • Some applications display a different screen depending on the orientation. The calculator turns into a scientific calculator when rotated to landscape.Basics 25 Picking up When you pick up the device after it has been idle for some time or when the screen has turned off, it vibrates if you have missed calls or new messages. Holding to ear While viewing call, message, or contact details, pick up and hold the device to your ear to make a call.Basics 26 Panning to move Tap and hold an item, and then move the device to the left or right to move the item to another panel on the Home screen or the Applications screen. Panning to browse When an image is zoomed in, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then move the device in any direction to browse the image.Basics 27 Double-tapping Double-tap the device to move to the top of a list of contacts or emails. Rotating While the screen is locked, tap and hold the screen, and then rotate the device to landscape orientation to launch the camera. To use this motion, on the Home screen, tap Apps→ Settings→Lock screen→Lock screen options, and then drag the Camera quick access switch to the right.Basics 28 Turning over Turn over the device to mute ringtone, pause media playback, or mute the FM radio (when using the speaker). Shaking • Shake the device to search for Bluetooth devices, or computers in Kies via Wi-Fi. • Shake the device to update the list of emails or information from Yahoo News, Yahoo Finance, or AccuWeather.Basics 29 Tilting Tap and hold two points on the screen, and then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out. Page Buddy Use this feature to use specific applications based on your actions. Pages related to your actions appear in the following conditions: • When you connect a headset or dock to the device. • When you are roaming. Notifications Notification icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen to report missed calls, new messages, calendar events, device status, and more. Drag down from the status bar to open the notifications panel. Scroll the list to see additional alerts. To close the notifications panel, drag up the bar that is at the bottom of the screen. From the notifications panel, you can view your device’s current status and use the following options: • Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature. • Sound: Activate or deactivate silent mode. You can vibrate or mute your device in silent mode.Basics 30 • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. • Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Mobile data: Activate or deactivate the data connection. • Blocking mode: Activate or deactivate blocking mode. In blocking mode, the device will block notifications. To select which notifications will be blocked, tap Settings→Blocking mode. • Power saving: Activate or deactivate power-saving mode. • AllShare Cast: Activate or deactivate the AllShare Cast feature. • Sync: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of applications. The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider. Home screen The Home screen is the starting point to access all of the device’s features. It displays indicator icons, widgets, shortcuts to applications, and others. The Home screen can have multiple panels. To view other panels, scroll left or right. Rearranging items Adding an application icon On the Home screen, tap Apps, tap and hold an application icon, and then drag it into a panel preview. Adding an item Customise the Home screen by adding widgets or folders. Tap and hold the empty area on the Home screen, and then select one of the following categories: • Apps and widgets: Add widgets or applications to the Home screen. • Folder: Create a new folder. Then, select an item and drag it to the Home screen.Basics 31 Moving an item Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. Removing an item Tap and hold an item, and drag it to the rubbish bin that appears at the top of the Home screen. When the rubbish bin turns red, release it. Rearranging panels Adding a new panel Tap →Edit page→ . Moving a panel Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Removing a panel Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the bottom of the screen. Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen. On the Home screen, tap →Set wallpaper→Home screen, and then select one of the following: • Gallery: See photos taken by the device’s camera or images downloaded from the Internet. • Live wallpapers: See animated images. • Wallpapers: See wallpaper images. Then, select an image and tap Set wallpaper. Or, select an image, resize it by dragging the frame, and then tap Done.Basics 32 Using applications This device can run many different types of applications, ranging from media to Internet applications. Opening an application On the Home screen or the Applications screen, select an application icon to open it. Opening from recently-used applications Press and hold the Home button to open the list of recently-used applications. Select an application icon to open. Closing an application Close applications not in use to save battery power and maintain device performance. Press and hold the Home button, tap , and then tap End next to an application to close it. To close all running applications, tap End all. Alternatively, press and hold the Home button, and then tap . Applications screen The Applications screen displays icons for all applications, including any new applications installed. On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Applications screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right.Basics 33 Rearranging applications Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. Organising with folders Put related applications together in a folder for convenience. Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to Create folder. Enter a folder name and then tap OK. Put applications into the new folder by dragging, and then tap Save to save the arrangement. Rearranging panels Pinch on the screen, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Installing applications Use application stores, such as Samsung Apps, to download and install applications. Uninstalling applications Tap →Uninstall, and then select an application to uninstall it. Default applications that come with the device cannot be uninstalled. Sharing applications Share downloaded applications with other users via email, Bluetooth, or other methods. Tap →Share app, select applications, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. The next steps vary depending on the method selected.Basics 34 Help Access help information to learn how to use the device and applications or configure important settings. Tap Help on the Applications screen. Select an item to view tips. To reset help pop-ups if you have hidden them, tap Show help tip pop-ups, and then select items by ticking. Entering text Use the Samsung keyboard or the voice input feature to enter text. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Changing the keyboard type Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select the type of keyboard to use. Using the Samsung keyboard Changing the keyboard layout Tap →Portrait keyboard types, and then tap Qwerty keyboard or 3x4 keyboard. On the 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap repeatedly the key corresponding to the character. Break to the next line. Delete a preceding character. Enter numerals and punctuation marks. Enter uppercase. Set options for the Samsung keyboard. Enter a space.Basics 35 Entering uppercase Tap before entering a character. For all caps, tap it twice. Changing language keyboards Slide the space key left or right to change language keyboards. Handwriting Tap and hold , tap , and then write a word with a finger. Suggested words appear as characters are entered. Select a suggested word. Entering text by voice Activate the voice input feature and then speak into the microphone. The device displays what you speak. If the device does not recognise your words correctly, tap the underlined text and select an alternative word or phrase from the dropdown list. To change the language or add languages for the voice recognition, tap the current language. When you are finished, tap Tap to pause.Basics 36 Copying and pasting Tap and hold over text, drag or to select more or less text, and then tap to copy or to cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. To paste it into a text entry field, place the cursor at the point where it should be inserted, and then tap →Paste. Connecting to a Wi-Fi network Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. (p. 98) Turning Wi-Fi on and off Open the notifications panel, and then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on or off. • Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors. • Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. Joining Wi-Fi networks On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Wi-Fi, and then drag the Wi-Fi switch to the right. Select a network from the list of detected Wi-Fi networks, enter a password if necessary, and then tap Connect. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. After the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will automatically connect to it any time it is available. Adding Wi-Fi networks If the desired network does not appear in the networks list, tap Add Wi-Fi network at the bottom of the networks list. Enter the network name in Network SSID, select the security type and enter the password if it is not an open network, and then tap Save.Basics 37 Forgetting Wi-Fi networks Any network that has ever been used, including the current network, can be forgotten so the device will not automatically connect to it. Select the network in the networks list, and then tap Forget. Setting up accounts Google applications, such as Play Store, require a Google account, and Samsung Apps requires a Samsung account. Create Google and Samsung accounts to have the best experience with the device. Adding accounts Follow the instructions that appear when opening a Google application without signing in to set up a Google account. To sign in with or sign up for a Google account, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→ Add account→Google. After that, tap New to sign up, or tap Existing, and then follow onscreen instructions to complete the account setup. More than one Google account can be used on the device. Set up a Samsung account as well. Removing accounts On the Applications screen, tap Settings, select an account name under Accounts, select the account to remove, and then tap Remove account.Basics 38 Transferring files Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. The following file formats are supported by some applications. Some file formats are not supported depending on the version of the device’s software. • Music: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac, flac, wav, amr, awb, mid, midi, xmf, mxmf, imy, rtttl, rtx, and ota • Image: bmp, gif, jpg, and png • Video: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, asf, dvix, m4v, webm, and mkv • Document: doc, docx, dot, dotx, xls, xlsx, xltx, csv, ppt, pptx, pps, ppsx, pot, potx, pdf, hwp, txt, asc, rtf, and zip Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer application that manages media libraries, contacts, and calendars, and syncs them with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Connecting with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on the computer. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open Windows Media Player and sync music files.Basics 39 Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device→Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Securing the device Prevent others from using or accessing personal data and information stored in the device by using the security features. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. Setting a face unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face unlock. Fit your face in the frame to be captured. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face unlock fails. Setting a face and voice unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face and voice. Fit your face in the frame to be captured and then set a voice command. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face and voice unlock fails.Basics 40 Setting a pattern On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Pattern. Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup unlock PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. Setting a PIN On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→PIN. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Setting a password On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Password. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it.Basics 41 Unlocking the device Turn on the screen by pressing the Power button or the Home button, and enter the unlock code. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for details on how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→About device→Software update→Update.42 Communication Phone Use this application to make or answer a call. Tap Phone on the Applications screen. Making calls Making a call Use one of the following methods: • Keypad: Enter the number using the keypad, and then tap . • Logs: Make a call from the history of incoming and outgoing calls and messages. • Favourites: Make a call from the list of favourite contacts. • Contacts: Make a call from the contacts list. Speed dial numbers For speed dial numbers, tap and hold the corresponding digit. Number prediction When entering numbers on the keypad, automatic predictions appear. Select one of these to make a call.Communication 43 Finding contacts Enter a name, phone number, or email address to find a contact in the contacts list. As characters are entered, predicted contacts appear. Select one to place a call to it. Making an international call Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, and then tap . During a call The following actions are available: • : Hold a call. Or press and hold the headset button. Tap to retrieve the held call, or press and hold the headset button. • Add call: Dial a second call. • Keypad: Open the keypad. • Speaker: Activate the speakerphone. Keep the device away from your ears when using the speakerphone. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • Headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device. • Swap: Switch between two calls. • Merge: Make a multiparty call when connected to two calls. Repeat this to add more parties. This feature is available only if the multiparty call service is active. • →Contacts: Open the contacts list. • →Message: Send a message. • →S Memo: Create a memo. • →Transfer: Connect the first party to the second party. This disconnects you from the conversation. • →Manage conference call: Have a private conversation with one party during a multiparty call or disconnect one party form the multiparty call.Communication 44 Adding contacts To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, enter the number and tap Add to Contacts. Viewing call logs Tap Logs to view the history of incoming and outgoing calls. To filter a call log, tap →View by, and then select an option. Fixed dialling number The device can be set to restrict outgoing calls only to numbers with specified prefixes. Those prefixes are stored in the SIM or USIM card. Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Fixed Dialling Numbers→Enable FDN, and then enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. Tap FDN list and add numbers. Call barring The device can be set to prevent certain calls from being made. For example, international calling can be disabled. Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call barring, select a call type, select a call barring option, and then enter a password. Receiving calls Answering a call When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press the headset button. If the call waiting service is active, another call can be made. When the second call is answered, the first call is put on hold.Communication 45 Rejecting a call When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press and hold the headset button. To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, tap Reject call with message. To create the rejection message, tap →Call settings→Set reject messages. Automatically rejecting calls from unwanted numbers Tap →Call settings→Call rejection, drag the Auto reject mode switch to the right, and then tap Auto reject list. Tap Create, enter a number, assign a category, and then tap Save. Missed calls If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of missed calls. Call waiting Call waiting is a service provided by the service provider. A user can use this service to suspend a current call and switch to an incoming call. This service is not available for video calls. To make use of this service, tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call waiting. Call forwarding The device can be set to send incoming calls to a specified number. Tap →Call settings→Call forwarding, and then select a call type and condition. Enter a number and tap Enable. Ending a call Tap End call to end a call. Or press the headset button.Communication 46 Video calls Making a video call Enter the number or select a contact from the contacts list, and then tap to make a video call. During a video call The following actions are available: • Switch camera: Switch between the front and rear camera. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • →Hide me: Hide your image from the other party. • →Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party. • →Keypad: Open the keypad. • →Switch to headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device. • →Speaker off: Deactivate the speakerphone feature. Tap and hold the other party’s image to access the following options: • Capture image: Capture the other party’s image. • Record video: Take a video of the other party’s images. It is illegal in many countries to record a call without the other party’s prior permission. Tap and hold your image to access the following options: • Switch camera: Switch between the front and rear camera. • Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party.Communication 47 Swapping images Drag an image of either party onto the other party’s image to swap the images. Contacts Use this application to manage contacts, including phone numbers, email addresses, and others. Tap Contacts on the Applications screen. Managing contacts Creating a contact Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field.Communication 48 Editing a contact Select a contact to edit, and then tap . Deleting a contact Tap →Delete. Setting a speed dial number Tap →Speed dial setting, select a speed dial number, and then select a contact for it. To remove a speed dial number, tap and hold it, and then tap Remove. Searching for contacts Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Use the index at the right side of the contacts list for quick scrolling, by dragging a finger along it. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • / : Make a voice or video call. • : Compose a message. • : Compose an email. Importing and exporting contacts Syncing with Google Contacts Tap →Merge with Google. Contacts synced with Google Contacts appear with in the contacts list. If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Google Contacts, and vice versa.Communication 49 Syncing with Samsung Contacts Tap →Merge with Samsung. Contacts synced with Samsung Contacts appear with in the contacts list. If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Samsung Contacts, and vice versa. Importing contacts Tap →Import/Export→Import from SIM card, Import from SD card, or Import from USB storage. Exporting contacts Tap →Import/Export→Export to SIM card, Export to SD card, or Export to USB storage. Sharing contacts Tap →Import/Export→Share namecard via, select contacts, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. Favourite contacts Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Search: Search for contacts. • Add to Favourites: Add contacts to favourites. • Remove from Favourites: Remove contacts from favourites. • Grid view / List view: View contacts in grid or list form.Communication 50 Contact groups Adding contacts to a group Select a group, and then tap . Select contacts to add, and then tap Done. Managing groups Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Create: Make a new group. • Search: Search for contacts. • Change order: Tap and hold next to the group name, drag it up or down to another position, and then tap Done. • Delete groups: Select user-added groups, and then tap Delete. Default groups cannot be deleted. Sending a message or email to a group’s members Select a group, tap →Send message or Send email, select members, and then tap Done. Business card Create a business card and send it to others. Tap Set up my profile, enter details, such as phone number, email address, and postal address, and then tap Save. If user information has been saved when you set up the device, select the business card in ME, and then tap to edit. Tap →Share namecard via, and then select a sharing method.Communication 51 Messaging Use this application to send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS). Tap Messaging on the Applications screen. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while you are outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider. Sending messages Tap , add recipients, enter a message, and then tap . Use the following methods to add recipients: • Enter a phone number. • Tap , select contacts, and then tap Done. Use the following methods to make a multimedia message: • Tap and attach images, videos, contacts, memos, events, and others. • Tap →Insert smiley to insert emoticons. • Tap →Add subject to enter a subject. Sending scheduled messages While composing a message, tap →Scheduled message. Set a time and date, and then tap OK. The device will send the message at the specified time and date. • If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network, or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent. • This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update the information.Communication 52 Viewing incoming messages Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact. Select a contact to view the person’s message. Listening to a voice message Tap and hold 1 on the keypad, and then follow the instructions from your service provider. Email Use this application to send or view email messages. Tap Email on the Applications screen. Setting up email accounts Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account, such as Google Mail, or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap →Settings→ . Sending messages Tap the email account to use, and then tap at the top of the screen. Enter recipients, subject, and message, and then tap . Tap to add a recipient from the contacts list. Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients. Tap to attach images, videos, contacts, memos, events, and others. Tap to insert images, events, contacts, and location information into the message.Communication 53 Sending scheduled messages While composing a message, tap →Schedule sending. Tick Schedule sending, set a time and date, and then tap Done. The device will send the message at the specified time and date. • If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network, or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent. • This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update the information. Reading messages Select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Open attachments. Reply to the message. Add this email address to the contacts list. Delete the message. Mark the message as a reminder. Forward the message. Tap the attachment tab to open attachments, and then tap next to an attachment to save it.Communication 54 Google Mail Use this application to quickly and directly access the Google Mail service. Tap Google Mail on the Applications screen. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • This application may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Sending messages In any mailbox, tap , enter recipients, a subject, and a message, and then tap . Tap →Attach picture to attach images. Tap →Attach video to attach videos. Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients. Tap →Save draft to save the message for later delivery. Tap →Discard to start over. Reading messages Mark the message as unread. Add a label to this message. Preview attachment. Keep this message for long-term storage. Mark the message as a reminder. Delete this message. Reply to this message. Reply to all recipients or forward this message to others. Add this email address to the contacts list.Communication 55 Labels Google Mail does not use actual folders, but uses labels instead. When Google Mail is launched, it displays messages labelled Inbox. Tap to view messages in other labels. To add a label to a message, select the message, tap , and then select the label to assign. Talk Use this application to chat with others via Google Talk. Tap Talk on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Public profile Tap the account ID at the top of the friends list to change the availability status, image, or status message. Adding friends Tap , enter the email address of the friend to add, and then tap DONE. Chatting with friends Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen, and then tap . To add a friend to chat, tap →Add to chat. To end the chat, tap →End chat.Communication 56 Switching between chats Scroll left or right. Deleting chat history Chats are automatically saved. To delete chat history, tap →Clear chat history. Google+ Use this application to stay connected with people via Google’s social network service. Tap Google+ on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Tap All circles to change the category, and then scroll up or down to view posts from your circles. Tap to use other social network features. Messenger Use this application to chat with others via Google+ instant messaging service. Tap Messenger on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen, and then tap .Communication 57 ChatON Use this application to chat with any device that has a mobile phone number. Tap ChatON on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Create the buddies list by entering phone numbers or email addresses of Samsung accounts, or selecting buddies from the list of suggestions. Select a buddy to start chatting. To sync contacts on the device with ChatON, tap Settings→Sync contacts.58 Web & network Internet Use this application to browse the Internet. Tap Internet on the Applications screen. Viewing webpages Tap the address field, enter the web address, and then tap Go. Tap to share, save, or print the current webpage while viewing a webpage. Opening a new page Tap →New window. To go to another webpage, tap , scroll left or right, and tap the page to select it. Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Bookmarks To bookmark the current webpage, tap →Add bookmark. To open a bookmarked webpage, tap , and then select one.Web & network 59 History Tap →History to open a webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the history, tap →Clear history. Tap →History→Most visited to open a webpage from the list of most visited webpages. Saved pages To view saved webpages, tap →Saved pages. Links Tap and hold a link on the webpage to open it in a new tab, save, or copy. To view saved links, tap →Downloads. Sharing webpages To share a webpage address with others, tap →Share page. To share a part of a webpage, tap and hold the desired text, and then tap →Share. Chrome Use this application to search for information and browse webpages. Tap Chrome on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Viewing webpages Tap the address field, and then enter a web address or search criteria. Opening a new page Tap →New tab. To go to another webpage, tap , and then select a webpage.Web & network 60 Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. Syncing with other devices Sync open tabs and bookmarks to use with Chrome on another device, when you are logged in with the same Google account. To view open tabs on other devices, tap →Other devices. Select a webpage to open. To view bookmarks, tap . Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth feature. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. To activate Bluetooth, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth, and then drag the Bluetooth switch to the right.Web & network 61 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth→Scan, and detected devices are listed. Select the device you want to pair with, and then accept the auto-generated passkey on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many applications support data transfer via Bluetooth. An example is Gallery. Open Gallery, select an image, tap →Bluetooth, and then select one of the paired Bluetooth devices. After that, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device to receive the image. The transferred file is saved in the Bluetooth folder. If a contact is received, it is added to the contacts list automatically. AllShare Play Use this application to play contents saved on various devices over the Internet. You can play and send any file on any device to another device or web storage server. To use this application, you must sign in to your Samsung account and register two or more devices as file servers. The registration methods may vary depending on the device type. To get more details, tap →Settings→Customer support. Tap AllShare Play on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Sending files Select a device or web storage, select a file, and then tap . Sharing files Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then use the following options: • Group Play: Share screens with multiple other devices that are connected to the same Wi-Fi network. • Facebook / Twitter / Flickr / Picasa: Upload files to a social network site.Web & network 62 Playing files on a remote device Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then select a device. • Supported file formats may differ depending on connected devices as a media player. • Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection. Managing contents on a web storage server Select a web storage server, and then view and manage your files. Group Play Use this application to share images, documents, and music with other devices that are connected to the same Wi-Fi network. Tap Group Play on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Sharing files 1 Tap Share picture, Share document, or Share music, select the files to share, and then tap Done. 2 Enter a PIN code and tap Done. Joining another Group Play Tap another device under Join, enter the PIN code, and then tap OK.Web & network 63 NFC Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for transportation or events after downloading the required applications. The battery contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the battery carefully to avoid damaging the NFC antenna. If the screen is locked, your device will not read NFC tags or receive data. To activate the NFC feature, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→ NFC. Drag the NFC switch to the right. Reading information from an NFC tag Place the device near an NFC tag. The information from the tag will appear. Making a purchase with the NFC feature Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile payment service. To register or get details about the service, contact your service provider. Touch the back of your device to the NFC card reader. Sending data via Android Beam Use the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→NFC. Drag the Android Beam switch to the right. Select an item, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap your device’s screen.Web & network 64 S Beam Use this feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents. Do not send copyright-protected data via S Beam. Doing so may violate copyright laws. Samsung is not responsible for any liabilities caused by the illegal use of copyrighted data. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→S Beam. Drag the S Beam switch to the right. Select a file, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap your device’s screen. If both devices try to send data simultaneously, the file transfer may fail.65 Media Music Player Use this application to listen to music. Tap Music Player on the Applications screen. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software version. • Some files may not play properly depending on the encoding used. Playing music Select a music category, and then select a song to play. Open the playlist. Skip to the next song. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Pause and resume playback. Adjust the volume. Open Music square. Change the repeat mode. Restart the currently-playing song or skip to the previous song. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Turn on shue. Select a sound eect.Media 66 Setting a song as ringtone To use the currently-playing song as ringtone, tap →Set as→Phone ringtone. Creating playlists Make an own selection of songs. Tap Playlists, and then tap →Create playlist. Enter a title and tap OK. Tap Add music, select songs to include, and then tap Done. To add the currently-playing song to a playlist, tap →Add to playlist. Playing music by mood Play music grouped by mood. The playlist is automatically created by the device. When a new song is added, tap Music square→ →Library update. Tap Music square and select a cell of mood. Or select multiple cells by dragging your finger. Camera Use this application to take photos or videos. Use Gallery to view photos and videos taken with the device’s camera. (p. 72) Tap Camera on the Applications screen. The camera automatically shuts off when unused. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy.Media 67 Taking photos Taking a photo Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. When the subject is in focus, the focus frame turns green. Tap to take the photo. Indicates which storage is in use. Switch between still and video mode. Open the image viewer to display photos. Switch between the front and rear camera. Change the ash setting. Change the shooting mode. Select among various eects that are available. Change the camera settings. Scene mode Predefined settings make point-and-shoot photos easier to take. Tap →Scene mode. • Portrait: Use this setting for a human subject. • Landscape: Use this setting to take photos of blue skies and landscapes with richer colours. • Sports: Use this setting for fast-moving subjects. • Party/Indoor: Use this setting for well-lit indoor scenes. • Beach/Snow: Use this setting for well-lit or sunny outdoor scenes. • Sunset: Use this setting for richer colours and sharper contrasts. • Dawn: Use this setting for very subtle colours.Media 68 • Autumn colour: Use this setting for red-shifted background scenery. • Text: Use this setting for books or posters. • Candlelight: Use this setting for images of bright light against a dark background. • Firework: Use this setting for high-contrast scenes. • Backlight: Use this setting for subjects with bright lights behind them. • Night: Use this setting for images taken in darker conditions. Shooting mode Several photo effects are available. Tap →Shooting mode. • Single shot: Take a single photo. • Panorama: Take a photo composed of many photos strung together. • Share shot: Send a photo directly to another device via Wi-Fi Direct. • Buddy photo share: Set the device to recognise a person’s face that you have tagged in a photo and send it to that person. • Smile shot: Take a photo while the camera waits for a subject to smile. • Cartoon: Take a photo that looks like a drawing. Panoramic photos A panoramic photo is a wide landscape image consisting of multiple shots. Tap →Shooting mode→Panorama. Tap and move the camera in any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the viewfinder, the camera automatically takes another shot in a panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, tap again.Media 69 Taking videos Taking a video Slide the still-video switch to the video icon, and then tap to take a video. To stop recording, tap . • Manual focus is not available in video mode. • The zoom function may not be available when recording at the highest resolution. Recording mode Switch between the front and rear camera. Change recording mode. Change the ash setting. Select among various eects that are available. Change the camera settings. Indicates which storage is in use. Switch between still and video mode. Open the video player to play videos. Media 70 Tap to change recording mode. • Normal: Use this mode for normal quality. • Limit for MMS: Use this mode to lower quality for sending via messaging. Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods: • Use the Volume button to zoom in or out. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. • The zoom function may not be available when shooting at the highest resolution. • The zoom in/out effect is available when using the zoom feature while shooting video. Configuring settings for Camera Tap to configure settings for Camera. Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary depending on the mode used.Media 71 • Edit shortcuts: Reorganise shortcuts to frequently-used options. • GPS tag: Attach a GPS location tag to the photo. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting. • Self portrait: Take a photo of yourself. • Self recording: Take a video of yourself. • Flash: Activate or deactivate the flash. • Shooting mode: Change the shooting mode. • Recording mode: Change recording mode. • Effects: Select among various photo effects that are available. • Scene mode: Change the scene mode. • Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure. • Focus mode: Select a focus mode. Auto focus is camera-controlled. Macro is for very close objects. • Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. • Resolution: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory. • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects.Media 72 • Metering: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • Contextual filename: Set the camera to display contextual tags. • Take photos using voice: Set the camera to take photos with voice commands. • Save as flipped: Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene. • Image quality: Set the quality level for photos. Higher quality images require more storage space. • Video quality: Set the quality level for videos. • Storage: Select the memory location for storage. • Reset: Reset the camera settings. Shortcuts Reorganise shortcuts for easy access to the camera’s various options. Tap →Edit shortcuts. Tap and hold an option and drag it to a slot at the left of the screen. The other icons can be moved within the list by tapping and dragging them. Gallery Use this application to view images and videos. Tap Gallery on the Applications screen. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the software installed on the device. • Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded.Media 73 Viewing images Launching Gallery displays available folders. When another application, such as Email, saves an image, the download folder is automatically created to contain the image. Likewise, capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Select a folder to open it. In a folder, images are displayed by creation date. Select an image to view it in full screen. Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image. Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods to zoom in an image: • Double-tap anywhere to zoom in. • Spread two fingers apart on any place to zoom in. Pinch to zoom out, or double-tap to return. Viewing images using the motion feature Use the motion feature to execute a function with particular motion. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Motion, drag the Motion switch to the right, and then select features by ticking. To stop using a motion feature, drag the Motion switch to the left. To set the sensitivity for each motion feature, tap Sensitivity settings, select a feature, and then use the adjustable slide bar. Playing videos Video files show the icon on the preview. Select a video to watch it and tap . Editing images When viewing an image, tap and use the following functions: • Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current folder. • Face tag: Register the faces in the image as face tags.Media 74 • Tag buddy: Set the camera to display contextual tags. • Add weather tag: Add a weather tag. • Copy to clipboard: Copy to clipboard. • Rotate left: Rotate anticlockwise. • Rotate right: Rotate clockwise. • Crop: Resize the blue frame to crop and save the image in it. • Edit: Launch the Photo editor application. • Set as: Set the image as a wallpaper or a contact image. • Buddy photo share: Send the image to a person whose face is tagged in the image. • Print: Print via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. The device is only compatible with some Samsung printers. • Rename: Rename the file. • Scan for nearby devices: Search for devices that have media sharing activated. • Details: View image details. Deleting images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap . • When viewing an image, tap . Sharing images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap to send them to others. • When viewing an image, tap to send it to others or share it via social network services. Setting as wallpaper When viewing an image, tap →Set as to set the image as wallpaper or to assign it to a contact.Media 75 Video Player Use this application to play video files. Tap Video Player on the Applications screen. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the device's software. • Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. Playing videos Select a video to play. Change screen ratio. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Restart the current video or skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Adjust the volume. Reduce the size of the video screen. Pause and resume playback. Deleting videos Tap →Delete, select videos by ticking, and then tap Delete. Sharing videos Tap →Share via, select videos by ticking, tap Done, and then select a sharing method.Media 76 YouTube Use this application to watch videos from the YouTube website. Tap YouTube on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Watching videos Tap , and then enter a keyword. Select one of the returned search results to watch a video. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display full screen. Pause or resume playback. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Change display quality. Add the video to the playlist. Search for videos. Rotate the screen to portrait orientation. Send the URL to others. Sharing videos Select the video to view, tap , and then select a sharing method. Uploading videos Select your account, tap , select a video, enter information for the video, and then tap .Media 77 FM Radio Listen to music and news on the FM radio. To listen to the FM radio, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna. Tap FM Radio on the Applications screen. Listening to the FM radio Plug a headset into the device before launching the FM radio. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically when running for the first time. Tap to turn on the FM radio. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. Add the current radio station to the favourites list. Turn the FM radio on or off. Access services for the current station. Adjust the volume. Search for an available radio station. Fine-tune the frequency. Record a song from the FM radio.Media 78 Scanning radio stations Tap →Scan, and then select a scan option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio screen. Adding stations to the favourites list Scroll to a radio station, and then tap to add the station to the favourites list.79 Application & media stores Play Store Use this application to purchase and download applications and games that are able to run on the device. Tap Play Store on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing applications Browse applications by category, or tap to search with a keyword. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Install. If there is a charge for the application, tap the price, and follow on-screen instructions to complete the purchase process. • When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. • To install applications that you downloaded from other sources, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→Security→Unknown sources. Uninstalling applications Uninstall the applications purchased from Play Store. Tap →My Apps, select an application to delete in the list of installed applications, and then tap Uninstall.Application & media stores 80 Samsung Apps Use this application to purchase and download dedicated Samsung applications. For more information, visit www.samsungapps.com. Tap Samsung Apps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. If a Samsung account is not registered, follow on-screen instructions to create a Samsung account. To complete the subscription process, read the terms and conditions, and then tap Accept to agree to them. Installing applications Browse applications by category. Tap to select a category. To search for an application, tap at the top of the screen, and then enter a keyword in the search field. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Get. When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. S Suggest Use this application to browse and download the latest applications suggested by Samsung. Tap S Suggest on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Application & media stores 81 Game Hub Use this application to access games. Tap Game Hub on the Applications screen. Scroll left or right and select a game to download from Samsung Apps.82 Utilities S Memo Use this application to create a memo using images and voice recordings. Tap S Memo on the Applications screen. Composing memos Append another page to the current memo. Hide the toolbar. Jot down or draw a memo. Undo and redo the last action. Enter a memo. Erase the handwritten memo. Switch to view mode. When jotting down a memo, tap once more to change the pen type, line thickness, or pen colour. When erasing the handwritten memo, tap once more to change the eraser size or clear the memo.Utilities 83 View more colours. Adjust the highlighter transparency. Change the pen type. Change the line thickness. Change the pen colour. To change the sheet background, tap →Change background. Inserting images or a voice recording Tap to insert multimedia files. Tap to insert a voice recording. Make a voice recording to insert. Mark the memo as important. Insert a multimedia le. Browsing memos Browse memo thumbnails by scrolling up or down. To search for a memo, tap →Search. To delete memos, tap →Delete. To sort memos by date, title, text, or others, tap →Sort by. To change the view mode, tap →View by list. To create a memo by importing a file, tap →Import S Memo. To sync memos with Google Docs or Evernote, tap →Sync. To create a folder, tap →Create folder.Utilities 84 To move memos to another folder, tap →Move. To copy memos, tap →Copy. To change the S Memo settings, tap →Settings. To view the tutorial for S Memo, tap →Tutorial. Viewing a memo Tap the memo thumbnail to open it. To send the memo to others, tap →Share via. To save the memo as an image file or a PDF file, tap →Export. To save the memo as an event, tap →Create event. To set the memo as a widget or wallpaper for the Home screen, tap →Set as. To print the memo via a USB or Wi-Fi connection, tap →Print. The device is only compatible with some Samsung printers. To edit the memo, tap the screen. To play the voice recording, tap . S Planner Use this application to manage events and tasks. Tap S Planner on the Applications screen. Creating events or tasks Tap , and then use one of the following methods: • Quick add: Create an event or task from a memo. This feature is available only for English and Korean. • Add event: Enter an event with an optional repeat setting. • Add task: Enter a task with an optional priority setting.Utilities 85 To add an event or task more briefly, tap a date to select it and tap it again. Enter a title and specify which calendar to use or sync with. Then tap Edit event details or Edit task details to add more details, such as how often the event repeats, when it has an advance alert, or where it takes place. Attach a map showing the location of the event. Enter the location in the Location field, tap next to the field, and then pinpoint the precise location by tapping and holding on the map that appears. Attach a memo from S Memo. Tap Memos, and then compose a new memo or select one of the existing memos. Attach an image. Tap Images, and then take a photo or select one of the existing images. Syncing with Google Calendar On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Google under Accounts→ a Google account, and then tick Sync Calendar. To manually sync for updating, on the Applications screen, tap S Planner→ →Sync. To display synced events or tasks, tap →Settings→Calendars, select the Google account, and then tap Done.Utilities 86 Changing calendar type Tap , and then select one from among different types of calendars including year, month, week, and others. A pinch gesture can be used to change calendar type. For example, pinch to change from the monthly calendar to the yearly calendar, and spread apart to change yearly calendar back to monthly calendar. Searching for events Tap →Search, and then enter a keyword to search for. To view today’s events, tap Today at the top of the screen. Deleting events Select a date or event, and then tap →Delete. Sharing events Select an event, tap →Share via, and then select a sharing method. Dropbox Use this application to save and share files with others via the Dropbox cloud storage. When you save files to Dropbox, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other computers that have Dropbox installed. Tap Dropbox on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. When running Dropbox for the first time, tap Start to activate it. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To upload files to Dropbox, tap → →Upload here→Photos or videos or Other files. To open a file in Dropbox, tap , and then select a file. While viewing the file, tap Favorite to add it to the favourites list. To open favourite files, tap .Utilities 87 Cloud Use this feature to sync files or back up settings and application data with your Samsung account or Dropbox. Tap Settings→Cloud on the Applications screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Syncing with the Samsung account Tap your Samsung account or Sync settings to sync files. Backing up or restoring data Tap Device backup to back up or restore data with your Samsung account. Syncing with Dropbox If an account is not set up, tap Set account, and then enter the Dropbox account. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. Once you sign in, tap Allow and the device automatically syncs files with Dropbox whenever you make some changes.Utilities 88 Clock Use this application to set alarms, check the time in any location in the world, measure the duration of an event, set a timer, or use as the desk clock. Tap Clock on the Applications screen. Turn this alarm on or off. Alarm Setting alarms Tap Create alarm, set a time for the alarm to go off, select days for the alarm to repeat, and then tap Save. • Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Smart alarm: Set a time for the alarm to go off before the preset time.Utilities 89 Stopping alarms Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. Drag outside the large circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap and hold the alarm, and then tap Delete. World clock Creating clocks Tap Add city, and then enter a city name or select a city from the cities list. To apply summer time, tap and hold a clock, and then tap DST settings. Deleting clocks Tap →Delete, select clocks, and then tap Delete. Stopwatch Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times. Tap Reset to clear lap time records. Timer Set the duration, and then tap Start. Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off. Desk clock Tap to view in full screen.Utilities 90 Calculator Use this application for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Applications screen. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen rotation is disabled, tap →Scientific calculator. To see calculation history, tap to hide the keypad. To clear history, tap →Clear history. To change the character size for history, tap →Text size. Voice Recorder Use this application to record or play voice memos. Tap Voice Recorder on the Applications screen. Recording voice memos Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone at the bottom of the device. Tap to pause recording. Tap to finish recording. Start recording. Recording elapsed time Display the list of voice memos.Utilities 91 Playing voice memos Select a voice memo to play. • : Adjust the playback speed. • : Trim the voice memo. • : Adjust the volume by dragging the volume bar up or down. • : Stop playback. • : Pause playback. To send a voice memo to others, tap →Share via, select a voice memo, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. Managing voice memos In the list of voice memos, tap and select one of the following: • Share via: Select voice memos to send, and then select a sharing method. • Delete: Select voice memos to delete. • Settings: Change the voice recorder settings. • End: Close the voice recorder. S Voice Use this application to command the device by voice to dial a number, send a message, write a memo, and more. Tap S Voice on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Here are several examples of spoken commands: • Open music • Launch calculator • Call Lulu mobile • Dial Lulu work • Check scheduleUtilities 92 Tips for better voice recognition • Speak clearly. • Speak in quiet places. • Do not use offensive or slang words. • Avoid speaking in dialectal accents. The device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands depending on your surroundings or how you speak. Google Use this application to search not only the Internet, but also applications and their contents on the device as well. Tap Google on the Applications screen. Searching the device Tap the search field, and then enter a keyword. Alternatively, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. If no results are returned from the applications, the web browser appears, displaying the search results. Search scope To select what applications to search, tap →Settings→Phone search, and then tick the items to search for.Utilities 93 Google Now Launch Google search to view Google Now cards that show the current weather, public transit info, your next appointment, and more when you are most likely to need it. Join Google Now when opening Google search for the first time. To change Google Now settings, tap →Settings→Google Now. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Voice Search Use this application to search webpages by speaking. Tap Voice Search on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Speak a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. Select one of the suggested keywords that appear. My Files Use this application to access all kinds of files stored in the device, including images, videos, songs, and sound clips. Tap My Files on the Applications screen. Select a folder to open it. To go back to the parent folder, tap . To return to the root directory, tap .Utilities 94 In a folder, tap , and then use one of the following options: • Select all: Select all files to apply the same option to them at once. • Create folder: Create a folder. • Search: Search for files. • View by: Change the view mode. • Sort by: Sort files or folders. • Settings: Change the file manager settings. Downloads Use this application to see what files are downloaded through the applications. Tap Downloads on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To see the files downloaded from the Internet, tap Internet downloads, otherwise, tap Other downloads to see the files downloaded from other applications, such as Email. Select a file to open it with an appropriate application.95 Travel & local Maps Use this application to pinpoint the location of the device, search for places, or get directions. Tap Maps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Searching for locations Tap , enter an address, and then tap . Select a location to view the detailed location information. To search for nearby locations, tap . Once the location is found, tap and use one of the following functions: • Clear Map: Clear the map. • Make available offline: Save the map of a specified area to view it offline. • Directions: Get directions for the found location. • Layers: Overlay multiple layers including satellite images, traffic information, and more. • Settings: Change the map settings. • Help: View information about using the map. To view current location, tap .Travel & local 96 Getting directions for a destination 1 Tap . 2 Tap , and then select a method to enter starting and ending locations: • My current location: Use current location for starting location. • Contacts: Select from the contacts list. • Point on map: Pinpoint by tapping on the map. • My Places: Select from the list of favourite places. 3 Select a travel method, such as driving, public transit, or walking, and then tap GET DIRECTIONS. 4 Select one of the routes that appear, and then tap MAP VIEW to view details. Local Use this application to search for nearby restaurants, banks, bus stops, and more. Tap Local on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a place category, and then select a place from the list of search results. • Map: Pinpoint the place on the map. • Directions: Search for a route to the place. • Call: Call the place’s phone number. To add a place category, tap →Add a search on the category list, enter a keyword to search into the text field.Travel & local 97 Navigation Use this application to search for a route to a destination. Tap Navigation on the Applications screen. • Navigation maps, your current location, and other navigational data may differ from actual location information. You should always pay attention to road conditions, traffic, and any other factors that may affect your driving. Follow all safety warnings and regulations while driving. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Specify the destination by using one of the following methods: • Speak the destination address. • Enter the destination address. • Select the destination address from the contacts list. • Select the destination from the list of starred places. Once a route is found, follow on-screen instructions to navigate to the destination.98 Settings About Settings Use this application to configure the device, set application options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Applications screen. Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. To use options, tap . • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced→Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. When entering power-saving mode, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi connections. When this happens, the device automatically accesses data networks if it is set to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid data-usage bills, set this option to Always. Setting Network notification The device can detect open Wi-Fi networks and display an icon on the status bar to notify when available. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced and tick Network notification to activate this feature.Settings 99 Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct connects two devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access point. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→Wi-Fi Direct. Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount, and customise the settings for the limitation. • Mobile data: Set to use data connections on any mobile network. • Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for the mobile data usage. • Data usage cycle: Enter monthly reset date to monitor your data usage. To use more options, tap . • Data roaming: Set to use data connections when you are roaming. • Restrict background data: Set to disable sync in the background while using a mobile network. • Auto sync data: Set the device to sync contact, calendar, email, bookmark, and social network image data automatically. • Show Wi-Fi usage: Set to show your data usage via Wi-Fi. • Mobile hotspots: Search for and use another device’s mobile network. More settings Customise settings to control connections with other devices or networks.Settings 100 Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. Mobile networks • Mobile data: Use to allow packet switching data networks for network services. • Data roaming: Use the device to connect to another network when you are roaming or your home network is not available. • Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs). • Network mode: Select a network type. • Network operators: Search for available networks and select a network for roaming. Tethering and portable hotspot • Portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Use the portable Wi-Fi hotspot to share the device’s mobile network connection with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network. • USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile network connection with a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless modem for the computer. • Bluetooth tethering: Use the Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile network connection with computers via Bluetooth. • Help: Learn more about USB, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth tethering. VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). NFC • NFC: Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information. • Android Beam: Turn on the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices.Settings 101 S Beam Activate the S Beam feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents, to devices that support NFC and Wi-Fi Direct. Nearby devices • File sharing: Activate media sharing to allow other DLNA-enabled devices to access media files on your device. • Shared contents: Set to share your content with other devices. • Device name: Enter a media server name for your device. • Allowed devices list: View the list of devices that can access your device. • Not-allowed devices list: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your device. • Download to: Select a memory location for saving media files. • Upload from other devices: Set to accept uploads from other devices. AllShare Cast Activate the AllShare Cast feature and share your display with others. Kies via Wi-Fi Connect the device to Samsung Kies via a Wi-Fi network. Home screen mode Select a Home screen mode (basic or easy). Blocking mode Select which notifications will be blocked or set to allow notifications for calls from specified contacts in blocking mode.Settings 102 Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Vibration intensity: Adjust the force of the vibration notification. • Device ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls. • Device vibration: Add or select a vibration pattern. • Default notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages, missed calls, and alarms. • Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. • Keytones: Set the device to sound when tapping the buttons on the keypad. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when selecting an application or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when locking or unlocking the touch screen. • Haptic feedback: Set the device to vibrate when touching keys. Display Change the settings for the display. • Wallpaper: – Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. – Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. – Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. • Page buddy: Set the device to open contextual pages based on your actions. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display.Settings 103 • Auto-rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Smart stay: Set to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at the display. • Font style: Change the font type for display text. • Font size: Change the font size. • Touch key light duration: Set the duration for the touch button backlight. • Display battery percentage: Set to view the remaining battery life. • Auto adjust screen tone: Set to save power by adjusting the brightness of the display. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the memory. Power saving mode Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for power-saving mode. • CPU power saving: Set the device to limit some system resource usage. • Screen power saving: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the display. • Background colour: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the background colour of Internet. • Turn off haptic feedback: Set the device to turn off the vibration when touching keys. • Learn about Power saving mode: Discover how to reduce battery consumption.Settings 104 Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. Application manager View and manage the applications on your device. Location services Change settings for GPS functionality. • Use wireless networks: Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks for finding the current location. • Use GPS satellites: Set to use the GPS satellite for finding the current location. • Location and Google search: Set to use your current location for Google search and other Google services. Lock screen Change settings for securing the device. • Screen lock: Activate the screen lock feature. • Lock screen options: Change the settings for the locked screen. These settings are applied only when you set the swipe lock option. – Shortcuts: Set to show and edit application shortcuts on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. – Information ticker: Set to show news or stock information on the locked screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Settings 105 – Clock: Set to show the clock on the locked screen. – Dual clock: Set to show the dual clock on the locked screen. – Weather: Set to show weather information on the locked screen. – Help text: Set to show the help text on the locked screen. – Camera quick access: Set the device to launch the camera by tapping and holding the screen and rotating the device while the screen is locked. – Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when the screen is locked. – Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a specified function. • Owner information: Enter your information that is shown on the locked screen. Security Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: – Encrypt: Set to encrypt files when you save them to a memory card. – Full encryption: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card. – Exclude multimedia files: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card, except for media files. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device.Settings 106 • Remote controls: Set to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. – Account registration: Add or view your Samsung account. – Use wireless networks: Set to allow location data collection and to determine the location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi and mobile networks. • SIM Change Alert: Activate or deactivate the Find my mobile feature which helps locate the device when lost or stolen. • Find my mobile web page: Access the SamsungDive website (www.samsungdive.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device on the SamsungDive website. • Set up SIM card lock: – Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before using the device. – Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data. • Make passwords visible: By default, the device hides passwords for security. Set the device to display passwords as they are entered. • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Choose to install applications from any source. If not chosen, download applications only from Play Store. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various applications. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password.Settings 107 Language and input Change the settings for text input. Language Select a display language for all menus and applications. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input. Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select input languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . • Portrait keyboard types: Change the keyboard layout. • Input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Continuous input: Set to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. • Keyboard swipe: Set to switch text input modes by sweeping your finger left or right across the keyboard. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Settings 108 • Handwriting: Customise settings for handwriting mode, such as recognition time, pen thickness, or pen colour. • Advanced: – Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. – Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. – Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. – Key-tap vibration: Set the device to vibrate when a key is touched. – Key-tap sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Tutorial: Learn how to enter text with the Samsung keyboard. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Voice recogniser Select a voice recognition engine. Voice search For Samsung voice recognition, use the following options: • Language: Select a language for the voice recognition. • Open via the home key: Set to launch S Voice by pressing the Home button twice. • Use location data: Set to use location information for voice search results. • Hide offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Help: Access help information for S Voice. • About: View version information. • Voice control: Set the device to recognise voice commands for controlling your device. You can select the features to control with voice commands. • Auto-start speaker: Set to automatically turn on the speakerphone when making a call with S Voice.Settings 109 • Show body of message: Set to view the text of a new message received while in driving mode. • Wake up command: Set to start voice recognition by saying a wake up command while using S Voice. • Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise commands for controlling the device when the screen is locked. • Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a specified function. • Check missed events: Set to check missed calls, messages, or events when S Voice is launched by pressing the headset button. • Home address: Enter your home address to use location information with the voice command feature. • Log in to Facebook: Enter your Facebook account information by voice. • Log in to Twitter: Enter your Twitter account information by voice. For Google voice recognition, use the following options: • Language: Select a language for the voice recognition. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Text-to-speech output • Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and specify applications to use in driving mode.Settings 110 Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Cloud Change settings for syncing data or files with your Samsung account or Dropbox cloud storage. Backup and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. • Back up my data: Set to back up settings and application data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set to restore settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Add account Add email or SNS accounts. Motion Activate the motion feature and change settings for motion recognition. • Direct call: Set to make a voice call by picking up and holding the device near your ear while viewing call, message, or contact details. • Smart alert: Set the device to alert you if you have missed calls or new messages when you pick up the device.Settings 111 • Double tap to top: Set to move to the top of a list of contacts or email messages when you double-tap the device. • Tilt to zoom: Set to zoom in or out while viewing images in Gallery or browsing webpages, when you tap and hold two points with your fingers and then tilt the device back and forth. • Pan to move icon: Set to move an item to another page when tapping and holding the item and then panning the device to the left or right. • Pan to browse images: Set to scroll through an image by moving the device in any direction when the image is zoomed in. • Shake to update: Set the device to search for Bluetooth devices by shaking it. • Turn over to mute/pause: Set to mute incoming calls, alarms, music, and the FM radio by placing the device face down. • Sensitivity settings: Adjust the reaction speed for each motion. • Learn about motions: View the tutorial for controlling motions. Accessory Change the accessory settings. • Dock sound: Set the device to play a sound when your device is connected to or removed from a car or desktop dock. • Audio output mode: Set to use the dock speaker when your device is connected to a car or desktop dock. • Desk home screen display: Set the device to show the desk clock when your device is connected to a car or desktop dock. • Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting.Settings 112 Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across time zones. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Automatic time zone: Set to receive time zone information from the network when you move across time zones. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Accessibility Accessibility services are special features for those with certain physical disabilities. Access and alert the following settings to improve accessibility to the device. • Auto-rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Speak passwords: Set the device to read aloud passwords you enter with Talkback. • Answering/ending calls: – The home key answers calls: Set the device to answer an incoming call when pressing the Home button. – Answer calls using voice: Set to answer or reject an incoming call with voice commands. – The power key ends calls: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power button.Settings 113 • Accessibility shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility on the quick menu that appears when you press and hold the Power button. • TalkBack: Activate Talkback, which provides voice feedback. • Font size: Change the font size. • Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility. • Text-to-speech output: – Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . – Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. – Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. – Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and specify applications to use in driving mode. • Enhance web accessibility: Set applications to install web scripts to make their web content more accessible. • Sound balance: Adjust the sound balance when using a dual headset. • Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with one earbud. • Turn off all sounds: Mute all device sounds. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. Developer options Change the settings for application development. • Desktop backup password: Set a password to secure your backup data. • Stay awake: Set the screen to remain on while you are charging the battery. • Protect SD card: Set to request a confirmation when reading data from a memory card. • USB debugging: Activate USB debugging mode to connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. • Allow mock locations: Allow mock locations and service information to be sent to a Location Manager service for testing. • Select debug app: Select applications to debug and prevent errors when you pause debugging.Settings 114 • Wait for debugger: Set to prevent the selected application from loading until the debugger is ready. • Show touches: Set to show the pointer when you touch the screen. • Show pointer location: Set to show the coordinates and traces of the pointer when you touch the screen. • Show layout boundaries: Set to show boundaries. • Show GPU view updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated with the GPU. • Show screen updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated. • Window animation scale: Select a speed for opening and closing pop-up windows. • Transition animation scale: Select a speed for switching between screens. • Animator duration scale: Select how long pop-up windows will be shown. • Disable hardware overlays: Set to hide hardware overlays. • Force GPU rendering: Set to use 2D hardware acceleration to improve graphic performance. • Strict mode: Set the device to flash the screen when applications perform long operations. • Show CPU usage: Set to list all active processes. • Profile GPU rendering: Set to check the time of GPU rendering time. • Enable traces: Set to capture traces of application and system performance. • Do not keep activities: Set to end a running application when you launch a new application. • Limit background processes: Set to limit the number of processes that can run in the background. • Show all ANRs: Set the device to alert you to unresponsive applications that are running in the background. About device Access device information and update device software.115 Troubleshooting When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: • Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. • PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. • PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. • PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for more details. The touch screen responds slowly or improperly If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the following: • Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices. • Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take it to your local Samsung Service Centre.Troubleshooting 116 Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close programs or reset the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button for 8-10 seconds. The device reboots automatically. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Backup and reset→Factory data reset→Reset device→Erase everything. Calls are being dropped When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose your connection to the network. Move to another area and try again. Outgoing calls are not connected • Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key. • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. Incoming calls are not connected • Ensure that your device is turned on. • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected.Troubleshooting 117 Audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. When dialling from contacts, the call is not connected • Ensure that the correct number is stored in the contact list. • Re-enter and save the number, if necessary. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the contact’s phone number. The device beeps and the battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device. The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off • The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts with a clean, soft cloth and try charging the battery again. • If the battery no longer charges completely, dispose of the old battery properly and replace it with a new battery (refer to your local ordinances for proper disposal instructions). Your device is hot to the touch When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance.Troubleshooting 118 Error messages appear when launching the camera Your Samsung device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Error messages appear when launching the FM radio The FM radio application on your Samsung device uses the headset cable as an antenna. Without a headset connected, the FM radio cannot receive radio stations. To use the FM radio, first ensure that the headset is properly connected. Next, scan for and save the available radio stations. If you still cannot use the FM radio after performing these steps, try accessing your desired station with another radio receiver. If you can hear the station with another receiver, your device may require service. Contact a Samsung Service Centre. Error messages appear when opening music files Some music files may not play on your Samsung device for a variety of reasons. If you receive error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that your device supports the file type.Troubleshooting 119 Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to, if necessary. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly.www.samsung.com English (EU). 03/2013. Rev. 1.2 Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or software version, and is subject to change without prior notice. imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register 7.1CH Blu-ray™ Home Entertainment System user manual HT-F9750W HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 1 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 1 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:01 013-06-04 오전 10:00:01| 2 English Safety Information WARNING • To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture. CAUTION • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. • The Mains plug is used as a disconnect device and shall stay readily operable at any time. • This apparatus shall always be connected to an AC outlet with a protective grounding connection. • To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall be readily operable. Warning TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER(OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN This symbol indicates “dangerous voltage” inside the product that presents a risk of electric shock or personal injury. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. This symbol indicates important instructions accompanying the product. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT This Compact Disc player is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER product. Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. CAUTION • INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED, AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 2 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 2 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:20 013-06-04 오전 10:00:20English 3| 01 Safety Information Disc Storage & Management • Holding Discs - Fingerprints or scratches on a disc may reduce sound and picture quality or cause skipping. - Avoid touching the surface of a disc where data has been recorded. - Hold the disc by the edges so that fingerprints will not get on the surface. - Do not stick paper or tape on the disc. • Cleaning Discs - If you get fingerprints or dirt on a disc, clean it with a mild detergent diluted in water and wipe with a soft cloth. - When cleaning, wipe gently from the inside to the outside of the disc. - Disc Storage  Do not keep in direct sunlight.  Keep in a cool ventilated area.  Keep in a clean protection jacket and store vertically. Handling Cautions • Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing. Do not put objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the apparatus. • To turn this apparatus off completely, you must pull the power plug out of the wall socket. Consequently, the power plug must be easily and readily accessible at all times. • Do not touch the power plug with a wet hand. It can cause an electric shock. • Do not plug multiple electric devices into the same wall socket. Overloading a socket can cause it to overheat, resulting in a fire. • Maintenance of the Cabinet - Before connecting other components to this product, be sure to turn them off. - If you move your product suddenly from a cold place to a warm place, condensation may occur on the operating parts and lens and cause abnormal disc playback. If this occurs, unplug the product, wait for two hours, and then connect the plug to the power outlet. Then, insert the disc, and try to play back again. • If the product makes an abnormal noise or produces a burning smell or smoke, turn off the power switch immediately and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet. Then, contact the nearest customer service centre for technical assistance. Do not use the product. Using the product as it is may cause a fire or an electric shock. Licence Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under a licence from U.S. Patent No’s: 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535, 6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567, 7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 and 7,548,853. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, and DTS or DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS Neo:Fusion is a trademark of DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx. com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under licence. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 3 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 3 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:21 013-06-04 오전 10:00:21| 4 English Safety Information The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licencing LLC in the United States and other countries. Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited. Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™, and the logos are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commerciallyproduced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Centre at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.” This product incorporates proprietary technology under licence from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. - Open Source Licence Notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licences are available on the product menu. Using the 3D Function IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D PICTURES. Read and understand the following safety information before using the 3D function. • Some viewers may experience discomfort while viewing 3D TV such as dizziness, nausea, and headaches. If you experience any such symptom, stop viewing 3D TV, remove the 3D Active Glasses, and rest. • Watching 3D images for an extended period of time may cause eye strain. If you feel eye strain, stop viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses, and rest. • A responsible adult should frequently check on children who are using the 3D function. If there are any reports of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D TV and rest. • Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes (such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc.) • Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while walking or moving around. Using the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while moving around may cause you to bump into objects, trip, and/or fall, and cause serious injury. • If you want to enjoy 3D content, connect a 3D device (3D compliant AV receiver or TV) to the product’s HDMI OUT port using a high-speed HDMI cable. Put on 3D glasses before playing the 3D content. • The product outputs 3D signals only through HDMI cable connected to the HDMI OUT port. • As the video resolution in 3D play mode is fixed according to the resolution of the original 3D video, you can not change the resolution to your preference. • Some functions such as BD Wise, screen size adjustment, and resolution adjustment may not operate properly in 3D play mode. • You must use a high-speed HDMI cable for proper output of the 3D signal. • Stay at least three times the width of the screen from the TV when watching 3D images. For example, if you have a 46 inch screen, stay 3.5 meters from the screen. • Place the 3D video screen at eye level for the best 3D picture. • When the product is connected to some 3D devices, the 3D effect may not function properly. • This product does not convert 2D content into 3D. • “Blu-ray 3D” and “Blu-ray 3D” logo are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 4 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 4 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:22 013-06-04 오전 10:00:22English 5| 01 Safety Information Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved; No part or whole of this user’s manual may be reproduced or copied without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. Contents SAFETY INFORMATION 2 Warning 3 Disc Storage & Management 3 Handling Cautions 3 Licence 4 Using the 3D Function 5 Copyright GETTING STARTED 6 Disk and Format Compatibility 7 Logos of Discs the Product can Play 10 Accessories 11 Front Panel 11 Rear Panel 12 Remote Control CONNECTIONS 14 Connecting the Speakers 17 Connecting to TV/External Devices 18 Connecting to a Network Router SETTINGS 19 The Initial Settings Procedure 19 The Home Screen 19 Accessing the Settings Screen 20 Settings Menu Functions 24 Auto Sound Calibration 25 Networks and the Internet 28 Upgrading Software MEDIA PLAY 30 The All Content Screen 30 Playing Commercial Discs 30 Playing Files on a USB Device 31 Playing a Disc with User Recorded Content 31 Using the AllShare Network Function 32 Controlling Video Playback 35 Controlling Music Playback 39 Playing Photo Contents 40 Listening to Radio 41 Using the Special Effects Remote Control Buttons NETWORK SERVICES 43 Logging In to Your Samsung Account 43 Before Using Movies & TV Shows or Apps 44 Using Movies & TV Shows 44 Using Apps 48 Screen Mirroring 48 Using the Web Browser 51 Linking your Internet Service Accounts to the Product 51 BD-LIVE™ APPENDIX 52 Additional Information 56 Troubleshooting 59 Specifications  Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.  An administration fee may be charged if either a. an engineer is called out at your request and there is no defect in the product (i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual) b. you bring the unit to a repair centre and there is no defect in the product (i.e. where you have failed to read this user manual).  The amount of such administration charge will be advised to you before any work or home visit is carried out. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 5 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 5 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:22 013-06-04 오전 10:00:22| 6 English Getting Started Disk and Format Compatibility Disc Types and content your Product can Play Media Disc Type Details VIDEO Blu-ray Disc 3D Blu-ray Disc BD-ROM or BD-RE/-R disc recorded in the BD-RE format. DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DVD-VIDEO, recorded DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R discs that have been recorded and finalised, or a USB storage media containing DivX, MKV, MP4 contents. MUSIC CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R Music recorded on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R discs or a USB storage media containing MP3 or WMA contents. PHOTO CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R Photos recorded on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R discs or a USB storage media containing JPEG contents. | NOTES |  The product may not play certain CD-RW/-R and DVD-R because of the disc type or recording conditions.  If a DVD-RW/-R disc has not been recorded properly in DVD video format, it will not be playable.  Your product will not play content that has been recorded on a DVD-R at a bit rate that exceeds 10 Mbps.  Your product will not play content that has been recorded on a BD-R or USB device at a bit rate that exceeds 30 Mbps.  Playback may not work for some types of discs, or when you use specific operations, such as angle change and aspect ratio adjustment. Information about the discs is written in detail on the disc box. Please refer to this if necessary.  When you play a BD-J title, loading may take longer than a normal title or some functions may perform slowly. Disc Types your Product cannot Play • HD DVD • DVD-ROM/PD/MV-Disc, etc • DVD-RAM • Super Audio CD (except CD layer) • DVD-RW(VR mode) • CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/ CD-G/CD-I/LD (CD-Gs play audio only, not graphics.) • 3.9 GB DVD-R Disc for Authoring. | NOTES |  This product may not respond to all operating commands because some Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and CD discs allow specific or limited operation and provide only certain features during playback. Please note that this is not a defect in the product.  Samsung cannot guarantee that this product will play every disc bearing the Blu-ray Disc, DVD or CD logo because disc formats evolve, and problems and errors may occur during the creation of Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and CD software and/or the manufacture of discs.  Please contact the SAMSUNG Customer Care Centre at, if you have questions or encounter difficulty when playing Blu-ray Disc, DVD, or CD discs in this product. Also, refer to rest of this user manual for additional information on playback restrictions.  Some commercial discs and DVD discs purchased outside your region may not play on this product. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 6 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 6 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:23 013-06-04 오전 10:00:23English 7| 02 Getting Started Region Code Both products and discs are coded by region. These regional codes must match for a disc to play. If the codes do not match, the disc will not play. The Region Number for this product is displayed on the rear panel of the product. Disc Type Region Code Area Blu-ray Disc A North America, Central America, South America, Korea, Japan, Taiwan, Hong Kong and South East Asia. B Europe, Greenland, French territories, Middle East, Africa, Australia and New Zealand. C India, China, Russia, Central and South Asia. DVD-VIDEO 1 The U.S., U.S. territories and Canada 2 Europe, Japan, the Middle East, Egypt, Africa, Greenland 3 Taiwan, Korea, the Philippines, Indonesia, Hong Kong 4 Mexico, South America, Central America, Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Caribbean 5 Russia, Eastern Europe, India, North Korea, Mongolia 6 China | NOTES |  If the Region number of a Blu-ray Disc/DVDs does not correspond to the Region number of this product, the product cannot play the disc. Logos of Discs the Product can Play Blu-ray Disc 3D Blu-ray Disc BD-LIVE Dolby DTS PAL broadcast system in U.K, France, Germany, etc. DivX Java HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 7 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 7 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:24 013-06-04 오전 10:00:24| 8 English Getting Started  Limitations - Even when a file is encoded by a supported codec listed above, the file might not be played if its content is defective or corrupted. - Normal playback is not guaranteed if the file's container information is wrong or the file itself is corrupted. - Files having higher bit or frame rates than standard may stutter when played back. - The seek (skip) function is not available if the file's index table is damaged. - When you playback a file remotely through a network connection, video playback may stutter depending on the network speed. - Some USB/Digital camera devices may not be compatible with the product.  Video decoder - Supports up to H.264 Level 4.1 (except for FMO/ASO/ RS) - Does not support VC1 AP L4 - Except for WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, VP6 Below 1280 X 720: 60 frame max Above 1280 X 720: 30 frame max - Does not support GMC 2 or higher - Supports SVAF Top/Bottom, Side by Side Only - Supports BD MVC Spec Only  Audio decoder - Supports WMA 10 Pro (Up to 5.1) - Does not support WMA lossless audio. - Supported ADPCM IMA, MS. - Does not support ADPCM (A-Law, μ-Low) - Does not support QCELP, AMR NB/WB - Supports vorbis (Up to 2ch), - Supports Dolby Digital Plus (Up to 7.1ch)  Comments - MPEG4 : Supports up to GMC 1-Warping Point. - H.264 : Supports up to BP/MP/HP Level 4.1. - WMV : Supports V9, VC1 SP/MP/AP L3. - MPEG1 : Does not support D-picture. - MPEG2 : Supports up to Hight Profile High Level. Supported Formats Video File Support File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit Rate (Mbps) Audio Codec *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP MOV FLV VRO VOB PS TS SVAF Divx 3.11 / 4 / 5 / 6 1920x1080 (WMV v7,v8, MSMPEG4 v3 : 1280x720) 6~30 30 Dolby Digital LPCM ADPCM (IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA Dolby Digital Plus MPEG(MP3) DTS (Core) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/ MP/HP Motion JPEG Microsoft MPEG-4 v3 Window Media Video v7, v8, v9 MPEG2 MPEG1 VP6 640x480 - 4 MVC - 24/25/30 60 *.webm WebM VP8 1920x1080 6~30 20 Vorbis HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 8 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 8 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:26 013-06-04 오전 10:00:26English 9| 02 Getting Started ❑ Supported DivX subtitle file formats *.ttxt, *.smi, *.srt, *.sub, *.txt | NOTES |  Some MKV and MP4 format discs may not play, depending on their video resolution and frame rate. Music File Support File Extension Container Audio Codec Support Range *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 - *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC - *.flac FLAC FLAC Supports up to 2ch *.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2ch *.wma WMA WMA Supports WMA 10 Pro (Up to 5.1) Does not support WMA lossless audio Supports up to M2 profile Does not support LBR mode *.wav wav wav - *.mid *.midi midi midi type 0 and type 1 *.ape ape ape Does not support X13, NVT Picture File Support File Extension Type Resolution *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640 *.png PNG 4096x4096 *.bmp BMP 4096x4096 *.mpo MPO 15360x8640 Notes on the USB connection • Your product supports USB storage media, MP3 players, digital cameras, and USB card readers. • The product does not support folder or file names longer than 128 characters. • Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the product. • Your product supports the FAT 16, FAT 32, and NTFS file systems. • Connect USB devices directly to the product’s USB port. Connecting through a USB cable may cause compatibility problems. • Inserting more than one memory device into a multi-card reader may cause the reader to operate improperly. • The product does not support the PTP protocol. • Do not disconnect a USB device during a “loading” process. • The bigger the image resolution, the longer the image takes to display. • This product cannot play MP3 files with DRM (Digital Rights Management) downloaded from commercial sites. • Your product only supports video that is under 30fps (frame rate). • Your product only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices such as thumb drives and USB HDD. (HUB is not supported.) • Certain USB HDD Devices, multi-card readers and thumb drives may not be compatible with this product. • If some USB devices require excessive power, they may be limited by the circuit safety device. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 9 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 9 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:26 013-06-04 오전 10:00:26| 10 English Getting Started • If playback from a USB HDD is unstable, provide additional power by plugging the HDD into a wall socket. If the problem continues, contact the USB HDD manufacturer. • SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) • This product can play back AVCHD format discs. These discs are normally recorded and used in camcorders. • The AVCHD format is a high definition digital video camera format. • The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format compresses images with greater efficiency than the conventional image compressing format. • Some AVCHD discs use the “x.v.Colour” format. This product can play back AVCHD discs that use the “x.v.Colour” format. • “x.v.Colour” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. • “AVCHD” and the AVCHD logo are trademarks of Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. and Sony Corporation. | NOTES |  Some AVCHD format discs may not play, depending on the recording conditions.  AVCHD format discs need to be finalised.  “x.v.Colour” offers a wider colour range than normal DVD camcorder discs.  Some DivX, MKV and MP4 format discs may not play, depending on their video resolution and frame rate. Accessories Check for the supplied accessories below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP MUTE TV SOUND S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP TV HOME VOL TUNING / CH FUNCTION TV/SOURCE 3D SOUND SOUND EFFECT SEARCH SMART HUB A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST BD RECEIVER User Manual HDMI Cable ASC microphone FM Antenna Power Cable Soft Cloth Remote Control/ Batteries (AAA size) HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 10 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 10 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:27 013-06-04 오전 10:00:27English 11| 02 Getting Started Front Panel FUNCTION STOP OPEN/CLOSE POWER PLAY/PAUSE DISC TRAY HIGH-END VACUUM TUBE SOUND 5V 0.5A VACUUM TUBE AMP VOLUME CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR DISPLAY USB | NOTES |  Cellular phones or mobile devices placed near the vacuum tube amp or electronic products placed on the top of the product can cause audio noise or distortion.  When the product is on, do not let children touch the product's surface. It will be hot.  To upgrade the product's software through the USB jack, you must use a USB flash drive.  When the product displays the Blu-ray Disc menu, you cannot start the movie by pressing the 6 button on the product or the remote. To play the movie, you must select Play Movie or Start in the disc menu, and then press the E button.  If you use the Internet service or play the USB device contents on the TV, you cannot select the BD/DVD mode with the FUNCTION button. Stop the playing contents on the TV first to select the BD/DVD mode. Rear Panel HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTORS COOLING FAN AUX IN * FM ANTENNA HDMI OUT HDMI IN ASC IN LAN TERMINAL EXTERNAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN (OPTICAL) POWER CORD * Connecting the FM Antenna 1. Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM ANT Jack. 2. Slowly move the antenna wire around until you find a location where reception is good, then fasten it to a wall or other rigid surface. | NOTES |  Maintain a minimum of 10 cm of clear space on all sides of the home cinema to ensure adequate ventilation. Do not obstruct the cooling fan or ventilation holes.  This product does not receive AM broadcasts. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 11 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 11 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:29 013-06-04 오전 10:00:29| 12 English Getting Started Remote Control Tour of the Remote Control Press to apply the 3D sound effect. Turn the product on and off. Press to open and close the disc tray. Press numeric buttons to operate options. Press to skip backwards or forwards. Press to output the audio signal to the home cinema speakers or the TV Speaker. (See page 42) Cut off the sound temporarily. Use to adjust the level of the subwoofer. Select on-screen menu items and change menu value. Return to the previous menu. Press to view the disc menu. Press to use the Tools menu. These buttons are used both for menus on the product and also several Blu-ray Disc functions. Press to search contents. Press to select the home cinema's mode (HDMI1, AUX, BD/DVD, etc.). or Press to select TV's video mode. Press to stop/play a disc. Press to use Smart Hub. Turns the remote control light on or off. When on, the buttons become illuminated for a moment when pressed. (Using the remote control with this button set to ON will reduce the battery usage time.) If you want to change to Home Cinema mode on the remote control, check this button's LED colour. - Home Cinema : Orange - TV : Green Press to exit the menu. Select MONO or STEREO for radio broadcasts. Use to set a preset radio frequency. Press to search backwards or forwards. Search for active FM stations and to change channels. Use to enter the Popup menu/Title menu. Use to display the playback information when playing a Blu-ray/DVD disc. Press to move to the Home screen. Set a Sleep time to shut off the product. Press to apply sound effects. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP MUTE TV SOUND S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP TV HOME VOL TUNING / CH FUNCTION TV/SOURCE 3D SOUND SOUND EFFECT SEARCH SMART HUB A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST BD RECEIVER Adjust the volume. Press to pause a disc. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 12 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 12 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:31 013-06-04 오전 10:00:31English 13| 02 Getting Started Installing batteries in the Remote Control Battery size: AAA 1 2 | NOTES |  Make sure to match the “+” and “–” ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the compartment.  Assuming typical TV usage, the batteries last for about one year.  The remote control can be used up to approximately 7 meters from the product in a straight line. Setting up the Remote Control You can control certain functions of your TV with this remote control. To operate a TV with the Remote Control 1. Press the TV button to set the remote control to TV mode. 2. Turn on your TV. 3. While holding down the POWER button, enter the code corresponding to your brand of TV. • If there is more than one code listed for your TV in the table, enter one at a time to determine which code works. • Example : For a Samsung TV While holding down the POWER button, use the number buttons to enter 00. If that does not work, try 15, then 16, etc. 4. If the TV turns off, the setting is complete. • You can use the TV POWER, VOLUME, CHANNEL, and Numeric buttons (0~9). | NOTES |  The remote may not be able to control some functions, depending on your brand of TV. Also, the remote control may not work on some brands of TVs.  The remote control will work with Samsung TVs by default. TV Control Codes Brand Code Admiral (M.Wards) 56, 57, 58 A Mark 01, 15 Anam 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 AOC 01, 18, 40, 48 Bell & Howell (M.Wards) 57, 58, 81 Brocsonic 59, 60 Candle 18 Cetronic 03 Citizen 03, 18, 25 Cinema 97 Classic 03 Concerto 18 Contec 46 Coronado 15 Craig 03, 05, 61, 82, 83, 84 Croslex 62 Crown 03 Curtis Mates 59, 61, 63 CXC 03 Daewoo 02, 03, 04, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34, 35, 36, 48, 59, 90 Daytron 40 Dynasty 03 Emerson 03, 15, 40, 46, 59, 61, 64, 82, 83, 84, 85 Fisher 19, 65 Funai 03 Futuretech 03 General Electric (GE) 06, 40, 56, 59, 66, 67, 68 Hall Mark 40 Hitachi 15, 18, 50, 59, 69 Inkel 45 JC Penny 56, 59, 67, 86 JVC 70 KTV 59, 61, 87, 88 KEC 03, 15, 40 KMC 15 LG (Goldstar) 01, 15, 16, 17, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 Luxman 18 LXI (Sears) 19, 54, 56, 59, 60, 62, 63, 65, 71 Magnavox 15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 60, 62, 72, 89 Marantz 40, 54 Matsui 54 MGA 18, 40 Brand Code Mitsubishi/MGA 18, 40, 59, 60, 75 MTC 18 NEC 18, 19, 20, 40, 59, 60 Nikei 03 Onking 03 Onwa 03 Panasonic 06, 07, 08, 09, 54, 66, 67, 73, 74 Penney 18 Philco 03, 15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 62, 69, 90 Philips 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54, 62, 72 Pioneer 63, 66, 80, 91 Portland 15, 18, 59 Proton 40 Quasar 06, 66, 67 Radio Shack 17, 48, 56, 60, 61, 75 RCA/Proscan 18, 59, 67, 76, 77, 78, 92, 93, 94 Realistic 03, 19 Sampo 40 Samsung 00, 15, 16, 17, 40, 43, 46, 47, 48, 49, 59, 60, 98 Sanyo 19, 61, 65 Scott 03, 40, 60, 61 Sears 15, 18, 19 Sharp 15, 57, 64 Signature 2000 (M.Wards) 57, 58 Sony 50, 51, 52, 53, 55 Soundesign 03, 40 Spectricon 01 SSS 18 Sylvania 18, 40, 48, 54, 59, 60, 62 Symphonic 61, 95, 96 Tatung 06 Techwood 18 Teknika 03, 15, 18, 25 TMK 18, 40 Toshiba 19, 57, 63, 71 Vidtech 18 Videch 59, 60, 69 Wards 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54, 60, 64 Yamaha 18 York 40 Yupiteru 03 Zenith 58, 79 Zonda 01 Dongyang 03, 54 HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 13 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 13 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:32 013-06-04 오전 10:00:32| 14 English Connections This section describes various methods of connecting the product to other external components. Before moving or installing the product, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power cord. Connecting the Speakers Surround (L) Surround (R) Product Subwoofer Centre Wireless Receiver Module Front/ Front Top (L) Front/ Front Top (R) Position of the product Place it on a stand or cabinet shelf, or under the TV stand. Selecting the Listening Position The listening position should be located about 2.5 to 3 times the distance of the TV's screen size away from the TV. For example, if you have a 46 inch screen, locate the listening position 2.92 to 3.50 meters from the screen. Front/Front Top Speakers Place these speakers in front of your listening position, facing inwards (about 45°) toward you. Place the front speakers so that their tweeters will be at the same height as your ear. Align the front face of the front/front top speakers with the front face of the centre speaker or place them slightly in front of the centre speakers. Centre Speaker It is best to install the Centre Speaker at the same height as the front/front top speakers. You can also install it directly over or under the TV. Surround Speakers Place these speakers to the side of your listening position. If there isn't enough room, place these speakers so they face each other. Position them about 60 to 90cm above your ear, facing slightly downward. * Unlike the front/front top and centre speakers, the surround speakers are used mainly for sound effects. Sound will not come from them all the time. Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical. Place it anywhere you like. * Surround speakers must be connected to the wireless receiver module. Speaker Components SWA-6000 Wireless Receiver Subwoofer Module Speaker Cable x 2 Front/Front Top x 2 Surround x 2 Centre Screw (5x20) x 16 Stand x 4 Stand Base x 4 HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 14 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 14 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:33 013-06-04 오전 10:00:33English 15| 03 Connections Installing the Speakers on the Tallboy Stand 1. Straighten the speaker cable and put it into the hole on the Stand Base. 2. Turn the Stand Base upside-down and connect it to the Stand. 3. Use the driver to combine the screws on the 3 marked holes. 4. Connect the upper Speaker to the assembled Stand. 5. Insert a screw clockwise into the hole on the rear of the speaker using a screwdriver. 6. This is the appearance after the speaker is installed. Follow these steps to install other speaker. Connecting The Speakers 1. Match each speaker cable bundle to the correct speaker by matching the colour coded plug on each bundle to the coloured sticker on the bottom of each speaker. 2. To attach speaker wire to each speaker: a. Press down the red tab on the back of the speaker, insert the red wire, and then release the tab. b. Press down the black tab on the back of the speaker, insert the black wire, and then release the tab. 3. Connect the speaker wire plugs from each speaker to the back of the product by matching the colours of the speaker plugs to the colours of the speaker jacks. 4. Connect the left and right surround speakers to the wireless receiver module. Again, match the colour of the plugs to the jacks on the wireless receiver module. 5. Plug the power cord of the wireless receiver module into a wall outlet. 6. Turn on the product. The product and wireless receiver module will now communicate with each other and you will hear sound from the Surround speakers. Black Red 4 Speaker Stand 6 Stand Base Stand 1 2 3 5 or HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 15 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 15 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:37 013-06-04 오전 10:00:37| 16 English Connections ASC IN SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ T L N SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ Surround Speaker (L) Surround Speaker (R) Subwoofer Centre Speaker Front/Front Top Speaker (L) Front/Front Top Speaker (R) Wireless Receiver Module * This product should be connected with the SWA-6000 only. | CAUTION |  If you want to install the product on the wall, fasten the screws or nails on the wall firmly and use the holes on the rear of speaker to install. However, when you install it, accessories (nails or screws) and installation is not provided by the company.  Do not let children play with or near the speakers. They could get hurt if a speaker falls.  When connecting the speaker wires to the speakers, make sure that the polarity (+/ –) is correct.  Keep the subwoofer speaker out of reach of children to prevent children from inserting their hands or alien substances into the duct (hole) of the subwoofer speaker.  Do not hang the subwoofer on the wall using the duct (hole).  The wireless receiving antenna is built into the wireless receiver module. Keep it away from water and moisture.  For optimal listening performance, make sure that the area around the wireless receiver module location is clear of any obstructions.  If you hear no sound from the wireless surround speakers, switch the mode to Dolby Pro Logic II.  In 2-CH mode, you will hear no sound from the wireless surround speakers. | NOTES |  If you place a speaker near your TV set, the screen colour may be distorted because of the magnetic field.  Place the wireless receiver module at the rear of the listening position. If the wireless receiver module is too close to the product, sound from the speakers may be disrupted because of interference.  If you use a device such as a microwave oven, wireless LAN Card, Bluetooth equipment or any other device that uses the 2.4/5.8GHz frequencies near the product, sound from the speakers may be disrupted because of interference.  The maximum transmission distance from the product to the wireless receiver module is about 10m, but may vary depending on your operating environment. If a steel-concrete wall or metallic wall is between the product and the wireless receiver module, the system may not operate at all, because the radio wave cannot penetrate metal.  If the product doesn't make a wireless connection, you need to run an ID Set between the product and wireless receiver module. With the product turned off, press "0""1""3""5" on the remote control. Turn on the wireless receiver module. Then, press and hold the “ID SET” button on the back of the wireless receiver module for 5 seconds, and then turn the product on. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 16 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 16 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:41 013-06-04 오전 10:00:41English 17| 03 Connections Connecting to TV/External Devices HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 LAN AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R HDMI IN HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 R Red W White External Devices Connecting to a TV Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI OUT jack on the back of the product to the HDMI IN jack on your TV. If you have set the product's remote control to operate your TV, press the TV SOURCE button on the remote control and select HDMI as the external source of the TV. Connecting to External Devices To select the correct mode for an external device, press the FUNCTION button. Each time you press the button, the mode changes in this order : BD/DVD  D. IN  AUX  HDMI1  HDMI2  FM  BT Method 1 HDMI IN : Connecting to an External Component with a HDMI Cable Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI IN jack on the back of the product to the HDMI OUT jack on your digital device.  Select the HDMI1 or HDMI2 mode. Method 2 AUX IN : Connecting an External Analogue Component Using a RCA audio cable (not supplied), connect the AUDIO In jack on the product to the AUDIO Out jack on the external analogue component.  Select the AUX mode. • Be sure to match the colours on the cable plugs to the colours on the input and output jacks. Method 3 OPTICAL : Connecting an External Digital Audio Component To connect the digital audio output of digital signal components such as Cable Boxes and Satellite Receivers (Set-TopBoxes). Using a digital optical cable (not supplied), connect the Optical Digital Audio In jack on the product to the Digital Optical Out jack of the external digital device.  Select the D. IN mode. | NOTES |  To see video from your Cable Box/Satellite receiver, you must connect its video output directly to your TV.  This system supports Digital sampling frequencies of 32 kHz or higher from external digital components.  This system supports only DTS and Dolby Digital audio. MPEG audio, a bitstream format, is not supported HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 17 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 17 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:43 013-06-04 오전 10:00:43| 18 English Connections Connecting to a Network Router You can connect your product to your network router using one of the methods illustrated below. Wired Network HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R Broadband service Broadband service Broadband modem (with integrated router) Broadband modem Router Or | NOTES |  Your router or your Internet Service Provider's policies may prevent the product from accessing Samsung's software update server. If this occurs, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for more information.  DSL users, please use a router to make a network connection.  To use the AllShare function, you must connect your PC to your network as shown in the illustrations on the above. The connection can be wired or wireless. Wireless Network Broadband service Wireless IP sharer | NOTES |  If your wireless IP router supports DHCP, this product can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network.  Set your wireless IP router to Infrastructure mode. Adhoc mode is not supported.  The product supports only the following wireless security key protocols: - WEP (OPEN/SHARED), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)  Select a channel on the wireless IP router that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP router is currently being used by another device nearby, it will result in interference and communication failure.  In compliance with the newest Wi-Fi certification specifications, Samsung home cinema do not support WEP, TKIP, or TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixed) security encryption in networks running in the 802.11n mode.  Wireless LAN, by its nature, may cause interference, depending on the operating conditions (AP performance, distance, obstacles, interference by other radio devices, etc). HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 18 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 18 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:45 013-06-04 오전 10:00:45English 19| 04 Settings The Initial Settings Procedure • The Home menu will not appear if you do not configure the initial settings. • The OSD (On Screen Display) may change in this product after you upgrade the software version. • The access steps may differ depending on the menu you selected. The Initial Settings Procedure lets you set the OSD and menu languages, configure the connection to your home network, choose the aspect ratio output (screen size and format) that is correct for your TV, and apply an upgrade to your product's software, if one is available. For complete Initial Settings instructions, follow the order in the screen. | NOTES |  If you want to display the Initial Settings screen again and make changes, select Settings > System > Setup in the Home screen or select the Reset option. (See page 22) The Home Screen Movies & TV Shows Apps Photos, Videos & Music Add App Add App Add App Web Browser Settings aSamsung Account dScreen Mirroring 1 2 34 5 6 7 1 Movies & TV Shows : Download movies and TV Shows from the Internet. | NOTES |  Depending on your country, this menu function may not be supported. 2 Apps : Access various for pay or free-of-charge applications. 3 Photos, Videos & Music : Play photos, videos or music content from Disc, USB, PC or mobile devices. 4 Settings : Set various functions to suit your personal preferences. 5 Recommended Apps : A list of useful and popular apps we recommend you download. 6 Web Browser : You can access the Internet using the Web Browser application. 7 RED (A) : Press the RED (A) button on your remote to create and/or log in to your personal Samsung account. BLUE (D) : Set up the wireless mirroring function between the home cinema and a smart phone or tablet.  Selecting an Option on the Home Screen 1. To select an option on the Home screen, move the cursor using the ▲▼◄► buttons until it highlights the option of your choice, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  If you leave the product in the stop mode for more than 5 minutes without using it, a screen saver will appear on your TV. If the product is left in the screen saver mode for more than 20 minutes, the power will automatically turn off. Accessing the Settings Screen 1. Select Settings on the Home screen, and then press E. The Settings screen appears. Display UHD Output Auto 3D Settings TV Aspect Ratio 16:9 Original BD Wise Off Resolution Auto Movie Frame (24Fs) Auto DVD 24fps Conversion Off Display Audio Network Smart Features System Support Settings 2. To access the menus, sub-menus, and options on the Settings screen, please refer to the remote control illustration on the next page. Settings HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 19 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 19 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:49 013-06-04 오전 10:00:49| 20 English Settings Buttons on the Remote Control Used for the Settings Menu S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP HOME A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST 2 4 3 1 1 HOME Button : Press to move to the Home screen. 2 RETURN Button : Return to the previous menu. 3 E (Enter) / DIRECTION Button : • Press ▲▼◄► to move the cursor or select an item. • Press the E button to activate the currently selected item or confirm a setting. 4 EXIT Button : Press to exit the current menu. Detailed Function Information Each Settings function, menu item, and individual option is explained in detail on-screen. To view an explanation, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select the function, menu item, or option. The explanation will usually appear on the right of the screen. A short description of each Settings function starts on this page. Additional information on some of the functions is also in the Appendix of this manual. Settings Menu Functions Display UHD Output This option outputs HDMI video at UHD resolution. This is only available when Movie Frame is set to Auto. | NOTES |  To use this feature, you must connect the product to a device that supports UHD resolution and you must have content that plays at 24Fs (film speed). 3D Settings Set up the 3D related functions.  3D Blu-ray Playback Mode: Select whether to play a Blu-ray Disc with 3D contents in 3D Mode. If you move to the Home or Smart Hub Home menu while in 3D mode, the product will switch to 2D automatically.  Screen Size: Enter the size of the TV attached to the product. The product will automatically adjust the 3D output to the screen size of the TV. TV Aspect Ratio Lets you adjust the output of the product to the screen size of your TV. See page 52. BD Wise BD Wise is Samsung’s latest interconnectivity feature. When you connect a Samsung product and a Samsung TV with BD Wise to each other via HDMI, and BD Wise is on in both the product and TV, the product outputs video at the video resolution and frame rate of the Blu-ray/DVD Disc. Resolution Lets you set the output resolution of the HDMI video signal to BD Wise, Auto, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p. The number indicates the number of lines of video per frame. The i and p indicate interlaced and progressive scan, respectively. The more lines, the higher quality. Movie Frame (24Fs) Setting the Movie Frame (24Fs) feature to Auto lets the product adjust its HDMI output to 24 frames per second automatically for improved picture quality if attached to a 24Fs compatible TV. • You can enjoy the Movie Frame (24Fs) feature only on a TV supporting this frame rate. • Movie Frame is only available when the product is in the HDMI 1080p output resolution modes. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 20 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 20 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:53 013-06-04 오전 10:00:53English 21| 04 Settings DVD 24fps Conversion Converts DVD playback to 24 frames per second and outputs it via HDMI. This option is only available when Movie Frame (24Fs) is set to on. Smart Hub Screen Size Lets you select the optimal size for the Smart Hub Screen. HDMI Colour Format Lets you set the colour space format for the HDMI output to match the capabilities of the connected device (TV, monitor, etc). HDMI Deep Colour Lets you set the product to output video from the HDMI OUT jack with Deep Colour. Deep Colour provides more accurate colour reproduction with greater colour depth. Progressive Mode Lets you improve picture quality when viewing DVDs. Audio Speaker Settings Lets you adjust the following speaker settings and turn the test tone on and off so you can test the speakers.  Level: Lets you adjust the relative loudness of each speaker from 6db to -6db. For example, if you like deep bass, you can increase the loudness of the subwoofer by 6db.  Distance: Lets you adjust the relative distance of each speaker from the listening position up to 9 meters. The farther the distance, the louder the speaker will be.  Test Tone: Lets you run the Test Tone function so you can test your adjustments. Setting Test Tone to On turns the Test Tone on. Setting it to Off turns it off. Auto Sound Calibration The product automatically recognize the sound field optimized for your environment. Equaliser Lets you configure the Equaliser settings manually. Smart Volume Lets you set the product so that the volume remains stable when a scene change occurs or when you change the channel. Speaker Selection Lets you select which speakers you want active, either the TV's speakers or the home cinema's speakers. Audio Return Channel Lets you direct the sound from the TV to the Home Cinema speakers. Requires a HDMI connection and an Audio Return Channel (ARC) compatible TV. • If Audio Return Channel is set to on and you are using an HDMI cable to connect the product to the TV, digital optical input will not work. • If Audio Return Channel is set to auto and you are using an HDMI Cable to connect the product to the TV, ARC or digital optical input is selected automatically. Digital Output Lets you set the Digital Output to match the capabilities of the AV receiver you’ve connected to the product. For more details, please refer to the digital output selection table. (See page 54) Dynamic Range Control Lets you apply dynamic range control to Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD audio.  Auto: Automatically controls the dynamic range of Dolby TrueHD audio, based on information in the Dolby TrueHD soundtrack. Also turns dynamic range control off for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus.  Off: Leaves the dynamic range uncompressed, letting you hear the original sound.  On: Turns dynamic range control on for all three Dolby formats. Quieter sounds are made louder and the volume of loud sounds is reduced. Downmixing Mode Lets you select the multi-channel downmix method that is compatible with your stereo system. You can choose to have the product downmix to normal stereo or in surround compatible stereo. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 21 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 21 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:54 013-06-04 오전 10:00:54| 22 English Settings Audio Sync When the product is attached to a digital TV, lets you adjust the audio delay so that the audio syncs with the video. You can set the delay between 0 and 300 milliseconds. Network Network Status Lets you check the current network and Internet status. Network Settings Configure the network connection so you can enjoy various features such as Internet services or AllShare Wi-Fi functionality, and perform software upgrades. Wi-Fi Direct Lets you connect a Wi-Fi Direct device to the product using a peerto-pear network, without the need for a wireless router. Note that if the product is connected to a wireless network, it may be disconnected when you use Wi-Fi Direct. | NOTES |  Text files, such as files with a .TXT or .DOC extension, will not display when you are using the Wi-Fi Direct function. AllShare Settings Lets you control which devices on your network, such as smart phones and tablets, can share content with your TV. Device Name Lets you assign an identifying name to the product. You use this name to identify the product when you are connecting external Wi-Fi devices (smart phones, tablets, etc.) to it. BD-Live Settings Set various BD-Live functions. BD-Live allows you to access extra features available on some Blu-ray Discs if you are connected to the Internet.  BD-Live Internet Connection : Lets you fully allow, partly allow, or prohibit a BD-Live Internet connection.  BD Data Management : Manage BD data downloaded from a BDLive service or Blu-ray Disc. Smart Features Apps Settings Lets you configure App notification settings and view basic info about your Apps.  Push Notification Settings : Receive notifications from selected services.  Properties : See basic info about Apps. VOD Rating Lock You can lock access to Video on Demand (VOD) content based on its rating. | NOTES |  The default security PIN is 0000.  Depending on your country, this menu function may not be supported. Terms & Conditions, Privacy Policy Lets you view the Smart Hub Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy. Reset Smart Hub Resets all Smart Hub settings to their default settings. | NOTES |  The default security PIN is 0000. System Setup Lets you re-run the Initial Settings procedure. Language You can select the language you prefer for the On-Screen menu, disc menu, subtitles, etc. • The language you select for the disc menu, disc audio, or subtitles will only appear if it is supported on the disc. Device Manager You can connect a wireless USB keyboard or mouse to the USB port on the front of the product.  Keyboard Settings: Lets you configure a wireless USB keyboard connected to the product. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 22 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 22 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:55 013-06-04 오전 10:00:55English 23| 04 Settings | NOTES |  You can use the keyboard only when a QWERTY keyboard screen or window appears in the Web Browser.  Mouse Settings: Lets you configure a wireless USB mouse connected to the product. You can use the mouse in the product's menu in the same way you use a mouse on your PC.  To use a mouse with the product's menu: 1. Connect the USB mouse to the product. 2. Click the primary button you selected in Mouse Settings. The Simple Menu appears. 3. Click the menu options you want. | NOTES |  Some USB HID keyboards and mice may not be compatible with your product.  Some HID keyboard keys may not work.  Wired USB keyboards are not supported.  Some applications may not be supported.  If a wireless HID Keyboard does not operate because of interference, move the keyboard closer to the product. Security The default security PIN is 0000. Enter the default PIN to access the security function if you haven't created your own PIN.  BD Parental Rating: Restrict playback of Blu-ray discs with specific ratings unless the PIN is entered.  DVD Parental Rating: Prevents playback of DVDs with a rating above a specific numerical rating you have set unless the PIN is entered.  Change PIN: Change the 4-digit PIN used to access security functions.  If you forget your PIN 1. Remove any disc or USB storage device. 2. Press and hold the 5 button on the front panel for 5 seconds or more. All settings will revert to the factory default settings. | NOTES |  When the factory default settings are restored, all the user stored BD data is deleted. General You can specify the display brightness and time zone.  Front Display: Lets you change the brightness of the front panel.  Time Zone: You can specify the time zone that is applicable to your area.  Menu Transparency: Adjust the transparency of the menu box. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ is a convenient function that offers linked operations with other Samsung products that have the Anynet+ feature and lets you control those products with one Samsung TV remote. To operate this function, you must connect this product to an Anynet+ Samsung TV using an HDMI cable. If you want to use an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function, please follow the instructions below. 1) Connect the product to an Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant Samsung TV using HDMI Cable. 2) Set the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) feature to On in both the TV and the product. 3) Search for and then select the product in the TV's Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) list. For more exact instructions, see the Anynet+ section of the TV's user's manual. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 23 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 23 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:56 013-06-04 오전 10:00:56| 24 English Settings DivX® Video On Demand View DivX® VOD Registration Codes to purchase and play DivX® VOD contents. Support Remote Management When activated, lets Samsung Call Centre agents diagnose and fix problems with the product remotely. Requires an active Internet connection. Remote Management service might not be available in some countries. Software Update For more information about the Software Update function, see "Upgrading Software" on page 28. Usage Mode Lets you set the Use mode. If you are using the home cinema at home, always select Home. Store is for retail display settings only. Contact Samsung Provides contact information for assistance with your product. Reset Reverts all settings to their defaults except for the network and Smart Hub settings, and then starts the Setup function. Requires that you enter your security PIN. The default security PIN is 0000 Auto Sound Calibration By setting the Auto Sound Calibration (ASC) function just once when you relocate or install the product, you can have the product automatically recognize the distance between speakers, levels between channels, and frequency characteristics to create a 7.1-channel sound field optimized for your environment. ASC IN LAN SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRON FRON IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R ASC microphone Auto Sound Calibration Select whether to run and apply automatic sound calibration. • Off: Produces sound according to the speaker configuration specified in speaker settings. • On: Runs Auto Sound Calibration and produces sound according to the calibrated speaker settings. Measurement Before running the calibration, make sure no disc is left in the disc tray. 1. Plug the ASC microphone into the ASC IN jack. 2. Place the ASC microphone at the listening position. • Auto Sound Calibration automatically sets up speakers in the following sequence : Front L  Centre  Front R  Surround R  Front Top R  Front Top L  Surround L  Subwoofer • Press the RETURN button to cancel the Auto Sound Calibration Setting. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 24 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 24 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:56 013-06-04 오전 10:00:56English 25| 04 Settings Networks and the Internet When you connect this product to a network, you can use network based applications and functions such as Smart Hub and BD-LIVE, and upgrade the product's software through the network connection. For more information about accessing and using Internet services, see the Network Services chapter of this manual on pages 43~51. Instructions for configuring the network connection start below. Configuring your Network Connection If you didn't configure your network connection during the initial settings procedure or you need to reset the network connection, follow the directions below. Before you begin, contact your Internet Service Provider to find out if your IP address is static or dynamic. If it is dynamic, and you have a wired or wireless network, we recommend using the Automatic configuration procedures described below. If you are connecting to a wired network, connect the product to your router using a LAN cable before you start the configuration procedure. To begin configuring your network connection, follow these steps: 1. In the Home screen, select Settings, and then press the E button. 2. Select Network, and then press the E button. 3. Select Network Settings, and then press the E button. 4. Go to the instructions for Wired networks starting below or the instructions for Wireless networks starting on page 26. Wired Network ❑ Wired – Automatic After following Steps 1 to 3 above: 1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network type to Wired. Then, select Connect and press the E button. The product detects the wired connection, verifies the network connection and then connects to the network. 2. When it is done, highlight OK, and then press E button. ❑ Wired - Manual If you have a static IP address or the automatic procedure does not work, you'll need to set the Network Settings values manually. After following Steps 1 to 3 above: 1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network type to Wired. Then, select Connect and press the E button. The product searches for a network, and then displays the connection failed message. | NOTES |  If it is possible to connect the home cinema to your network wirelessly, select Change Network at this point, change the Network type to Wireless, and then go to the instructions for wireless networks on page 26. Network Settings Wired network connection failed. MAC Address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX IP Address 0. 0. 0. 0 Subnet Mask 0. 0. 0. 0 Gateway 0. 0. 0. 0 DNS Server 0. 0. 0. 0 Unable to connect to the network. Try the following: check if your IP address is set correctly in IP Settings. Contact your Internet service provider for more information. Change Network IP Settings Retry Close 2. Use the ◄► buttons to select IP Settings, and then press the E button. The IP Settings screen appears. 3. Select the IP setting field, and then set it to Enter manually. 4. Select a value to enter (IP Address, for example), and then press E. Use the number keypad on your remote control to enter the numbers for the value. You can also enter numbers using the ▲▼ buttons. Use the ◄► buttons on the remote control to move from entry field to entry field within a value. When done with one value, press the E button. 5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to another value, and then enter the numbers for that value following the instructions in Step 4. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you have filled in all values. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 25 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 25 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:57 013-06-04 오전 10:00:57| 26 English Settings | NOTES |  You can get the Network values from your Internet provider. 7. When finished entering all the values, select OK, and then press the E button. The home cinema verifies the network connection and then connects to the network. Wireless Network You can setup a wireless network connection in three ways: - Wireless Automatic - Wireless Manual - WPS(PBC) Before you configure the wireless network connection, disconnect any wireless network device currently connected to the product or, if applicable, the product's current wired connection. ❑ Wireless - Automatic After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network Connection" on page 25: 1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network type to Wireless. The product searches for and then displays a list of the available networks. Network Settings Select your network type. Network type Wireless Wireless network You can connect your Blu-ray player to the internet. Please select which wireless network to use. si-ap iptime iptime5G KIMING_VTOWER TIAS Refresh WPS(PBC) 2. Select the desired network, and then press the E button. 3. On the Security screen, enter your network's security code or pass phrase. Enter numbers directly using the number buttons on your remote control. Enter letters by selecting a letter with ▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing E button. 4. When finished, select Done, and then press the E button. The product verifies the network connection and then connects to the network. | NOTES |  You should be able to find the security code or pass phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or modem. ❑ Wireless - Manual If you have a static IP address or the Automatic procedure does not work, you'll need to set the Network Settings values manually. After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network Connection" on page 25: 1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network type to Wireless. The product searches for and then displays a list of the available networks. 2. Scroll through the list, select the desired network or Add Network, and then press the E button. 3. If you selected a network in Step 2, go to Step 6. If you selected Add Network, go to Step 4. 4. Enter your wireless network or wireless router's name. • Enter numbers directly using the number buttons on your remote control. • Enter letters by selecting a letter with the ▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing the E button. • To display capital letters (or redisplay small letters if capital letters are displayed), select , and then press the E button. • To display symbols and punctuation, select 123#&, and then press the E button. To redisplay letters, select 123#&, and then press the E button. When finished, select Done, and then press the E button. 5. On the Security type screen that appears, use the ▲▼ buttons to select the network's Security type, and then press the E button. On the next screen, enter your network's security code or pass phrase. • Enter numbers directly using the number buttons on your remote control. • Enter letters by selecting a letter with the ▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing the E button. When finished, select Done, and then press the E button. The product searches for the network. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 26 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 26 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:58 013-06-04 오전 10:00:58English 27| 04 Settings 6. The Network connection fail screen appears. Use ◄► buttons to select IP Settings, and then press the E button. 7. Select the IP setting field, and then set it to Enter manually. 8. Select a network value to enter (IP Address, for example), and then press E button. Use the number keypad on your remote control to enter the numbers for the value. You can also enter numbers using the ▲▼ buttons. Use the ◄► buttons on the remote control to move from entry field to entry field within a value. When done with one value, press the E button. 9. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to another value, and then enter the numbers for that value following the instructions in Step 8. 10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until you have filled in all values. | NOTES |  You can get the Network values from your Internet provider. 11. When finished, select OK, and then press the E button. The Security Screen appears. 12. On the Security screen, enter your network's Security Code or Pass Phrase. Enter numbers directly using the number buttons on your remote control. Enter letters by selecting a letter with the ▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing the E button. 13. When finished, select Done at the right of the screen, and then press the E button. The product verifies the network connection and then connects to the network. 14. After the home cinema verifies the network, select OK, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  You can also begin the Manual Network setting by going to Settings >Network > Network Status. ❑ WPS(PBC) One of the easiest ways to set up the wireless network connection is using the WPS(PBC) function. If your wireless router has a WPS(PBC) button, follow these steps: After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network Connection" on page 25: 1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network type to Wireless. The product searches for and then displays a list of the available networks. 2. Scroll the list down, select WPS(PBC), and then press the E button. 3. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router within two minutes. Your product automatically acquires all the network settings values it needs and connects to your network. The product connects to the network after the network connection is verified. 4. When it is done, highlight OK, and then press E button. | NOTES |  For WPS connection, set your wireless router’s security encryption to AES. Setting to WEP security encryption does not support WPS connection. Wi-Fi Direct The Wi-Fi Direct function allows you to connect Wi-Fi Direct devices to the product and each other using a peer-to-peer network, without a wireless router. | NOTES |  Some Wi-Fi Direct devices may not support the AllShare function if connected via Wi-Fi Direct. If this is the case, change the network connection method you used to connect the device to the home cinema.  Wi-Fi Direct transmissions can interfere with the Bluetooth signal. Before you use the Bluetooth function, we strongly recommend that you turn off the Wi-Fi Direct function on any device in which it is currently on. 1. Turn on the Wi-Fi direct device and activate its Wi-Fi Direct function. 2. In the Home screen, select Settings, and then press the E button. 3. Select Network, and then press the E button. 4. Select Wi-Fi Direct, and then press the E button. The Wi-Fi Direct devices that you can connect appear. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 27 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 27 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:59 013-06-04 오전 10:00:59| 28 English Settings Refresh Close Wi-Fi Direct Device Name : [HTS]F9750W Select your Wi-Fi Direct device to connect to. AndroidXXXXXXX Disconnected 5. You have three ways to complete the Wi-Fi connection: • Through the Wi-Fi device. • Through the product using PBC. • Through the product using a PIN. Each is covered below. Through the Wi-Fi Device 1. On the Wi-Fi device, follow the device's procedure for connecting to another Wi-Fi Direct device. See the device's user manual for instructions. 2. When you have completed the procedure, you should see a pop-up on your TV screen saying that a device that supports Wi-Fi Direct has requested to connect. Select OK, and then press the E button to accept. 3. The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as connected. • The PBC and PIN procedures connect devices automatically. Through the Product Using PBC 1. Select the Wi-Fi Direct device you want to connect to this product, and then press the E button. 2. The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as connected. Through the Product Using a PIN 1. Select the Wi-Fi Direct device you want to connect to this product, and then press the E button. 2. The PIN pop-up appears. 3. Note the PIN code in the pop-up, and then enter it into the appropriate field in the Wi-Fi Direct device you want to connect. 4. The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as connected. | NOTES |  The current wired or wireless network connection will be disconnected when you use the Wi-Fi Direct function.  Text files, such as files with a .TXT or .DOC extension, will not display when you are using the Wi-Fi Direct function. Upgrading Software The Software Update menu allows you to upgrade the product’s software for performance improvements or additional services. • Never turn the product off or back on manually during the update process. 1. In the Home menu, select Settings, and then press the E button. 2. Select Support, and then press the E button. 3. Select Software Update, and then press the E button. 4. To download update software and update now, select Update now, and then press the E button. See "Update now" on next page for details. 5. To let the product download update software automatically when available, select Auto update, and then press the E button. See "Auto update" on the next page for details. | NOTES |  The upgrade is complete when the product turns off, and then turns on again by itself.  Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for product malfunction caused by an unstable Internet connection or consumer negligence during a software upgrade.  If you want to cancel the upgrade while the upgrade software is downloading, press the E button.  When a system upgrade is progress, "UPDATE" is displayed on the front panel. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 28 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 28 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:00 013-06-04 오전 10:01:00English 29| 04 Settings Update now You can use Update now to update the software through your network connection or by using a USB flash drive. The network instructions are below. The USB flash drive instructions are on this page. 1. Select Update now, and then press the E button. The Update now pop-up appears. 2. The product searches on line for the latest software version. 3. If it does not find an update, the "There are no new updates for you at the moment." pop-up appears. Press the E button to exit. 4. If it finds a new version, the Update Request popup appears. 5. Select OK. The product upgrades the software, turns off, and then turns on automatically. 6. If you do not select OK or Cancel in one minute, the product stores the new upgrade software. You can upgrade the software later using Auto update. 7. If you select Cancel, the product cancells the upgrade. | NOTES |  When the system upgrade is done, check the software details in the Product Information section of the Contact Samsung screen.  Do not turn off the product during the software upgrade. It may cause the product to malfunction. Auto update You can set the Auto update function so that the product downloads new upgrade software when it is in Auto update mode. In Auto update mode, the product is off, but its Internet connection is active. This allows the product to download upgrade software automatically, when you are not using it. 1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Auto update, and then press the E button. 2. Select On or Off. If you select On, the product will automatically download new upgrade software when it is in Auto update mode with the power off. If it downloads new upgrade software, the product will ask you if you want to install it when you turn the product on. | NOTES |  To use the Auto update function, your product must be connected to the Internet. Update by USB 1. Visit www.samsung.com. 2. Click SUPPORT on the top right of the page. 3. Enter the product's model number into the search field. As you enter the model number, a drop down will display products that match the model number. 4. Left click your product's model number in the drop down list. 5. On the page that appears, scroll down to and then click Firmware Manuals & Downloads. 6. Click Firmware in the centre of the page. 7. Click the ZIP button in the File column on the right side of the page. 8. Click Send in the first pop-up that appears. Click OK in the second pop-up to download and save the firmware file to your PC. 9. Unzip the zip archive to your computer. You should have a single folder with the same name as the zip file. 10. Copy the folder to a USB flash drive. 11. Make sure no disc is inserted in the product, and then insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the product. 12. In the product’s menu, go to Settings > Support > Software Update. 13. Select Update now. 14. The product searches for the software on the USB drive. When it finds the software,the Update Request pop-up appears. 15. Select OK. The product upgrades the software, turns off, and then turns on automatically. | NOTES |  There should be no disc in the product when you upgrade the software using the USB jack.  When the system upgrade is done, check the software details in the Product Information section of the Contact Samsung screen.  Do not turn off the product during the software upgrade. It may cause the product to malfunction.  Software upgrades using the USB jack must be performed with a USB flash drive only. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 29 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 29 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:02 013-06-04 오전 10:01:02| 30 English Media Play Your home cinema can play content located on Blu-ray/ DVD/CD discs, USB devices, PCs, smart phones, tablets, and on the Web. To play content located on your PC or a mobile device, you must connect the PC or mobile device and the product to your network. To play content on your PC, you must also download and install AllShare network software or already have DLNA network software on your PC. | NOTES |  PCs running Windows 7 and Windows 8 have DLNA software (Play To) built in. The All Content Screen For all media, the All Content screen or one of its sub screens is your primary means of accessing and playing contents saved on a variety of devices, either connected directly or using your network. Using the All Content Screen To access the All Content screen, select Photos, Videos & Music on the Home screen, and then press the E button. Playing Commercial Discs 1. Press the  button to open the disc tray. 2. Place a disc gently into the disc tray with the disc’s label facing up. 3. Press the  button to close the disc tray. Playback starts automatically. 4. If playback does not start automatically, press the 6 button on the remote or see “The All Content Screen” above. Playing Files on a USB Device There are two methods you can use to play or view multimedia files located on a USB device through your product. Method 1 1. Turn the product on. 2. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front panel of the product. The New Device Connected pop-up appears. Movies & TV Shows Apps Photos, Videos & Music V Apps Pho Vide Mus V Apps Pho e Photos Videos Music All Content New device connected. USB Flash Disk Add App Add App Add App Web Browser Settings | NOTES |  If the pop-up does not appear, go to Method 2. 3. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Photos, Videos, Music or All Content, and then press the E button. Depending on how the contents are arranged, you will see either folders, individual files, or both. | NOTES |  Even though the product will display folders for all content types, it will only display files of the Content Type you selected in Step 3. For example, if you selected music, you will only be able to see music files. You can change this selection by returning to the Photos, Videos & Music screen, and then going to Step 4 in Method 2 below. 4. If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a folder, and then press the E button. 5. Select a file to view or play, and then press the E button. 6. Press the RETURN button to exit a folder or the Exit button to return to the Home screen. 7. Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how to control playback of videos, music, and pictures on a USB device. Method 2 1. Turn the product on. 2. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front panel of the product. 3. Select Photos, Videos & Music on the Home screen, and then press the E button. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 30 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 30 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:03 013-06-04 오전 10:01:03English 31| 05 Media Play 4. Select Photos, Videos, Music or All Content, and then press the E button. Depending on how the contents are arranged, you will see either folders, individual files, or both. | NOTES |  Even though the product will display folders for all content types, it will only display files of the Content Type you selected in Step 4. For example, if you selected music, you will only be able to see music files. You can change this selection by returning to the Photos, Videos & Music screen and repeating Step 4. 5. Use the ◄► buttons to select the desired device and then press the E button. 6. If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a folder, and then press the E button. 7. Press the RETURN button to exit a folder or the Exit button to return to the Home screen. 8. Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how to control playback of videos, music, and pictures on a USB device. | NOTES |  If you insert a disc when playing a USB device or phone, the device mode changes to "Disc" automatically.  If your cellular phone is DLNA compatible, you can play contents without connecting a USB cable. See "Using the AllShare Network Function" on page 31. Playing a Disc with User Recorded Content You can play multimedia files you have recorded on Bluray, DVD, or CD discs. 1. Place a user recorded disc into the disc tray with the disc’s label facing up, and then close the tray. The Device Connected pop-up appears. 2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select the type of content you want to view or play - Photos, Videos or Music - and then press the E button. | NOTES |  Even though the product will display folders for all content types, it will only display files of the Content Type you selected in Step 2. For example, if you selected music, you will only be able to see music files. You can change this selection by returning to the Home screen and repeating Step 2. 3. A screen appears listing the contents of the disc. Depending on how the contents are arranged, you will see either folders, individual files, or both. 4. If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a folder, and then press the E button. 5. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a file to view or play, and then press the E button. 6. Press the RETURN button one or more times to exit a current screen, exit a folder, or to return to the Home screen. Press the Exit button to return directly to the Home Screen. 7. Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how to control playback of videos, music, and pictures on a disc. Using the AllShare Network Function AllShare lets you play Photos, Videos or Music located on your PC or your DLNA compatible device through the product using a wireless network connection. To Download the AllShare Software AllShare makes it easy to retrieve and enjoy media files from computers and DLNA-enabled devices. However, computers need to be installed with AllShare PC and mobile devices need to support AllShare. For more information, visit the Samsung Content & Service portal (http://link.samsung.com). | NOTES |  You may experience compatibility issues when attempting to play media files via a third-party DLNA server. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 31 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 31 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:06 013-06-04 오전 10:01:06| 32 English Media Play Playing Content Located on your PC or DLNA Device through the Product AllShare Connection PC Product Play back PC's files 1. Connect the product, your PC, and/or your DLNA compatible device to the same wireless network. 2. Follow the directions in the AllShare software Installation/Instruction manual to set up devices and files for playing or viewing. 3. Select Photos, Videos & Music on the product's Home screen, and then press the E button. The Photos, Videos & Music screen appears. 4. Select the type of content you want to play - Photos, Videos, Music or All Content - and then press the E button. 5. On the next screen, select AllShare, and then press the E button. 6. In the list of AllShare connected devices that appears, select your PC or other AllShare compatible device, and then press the E button. A screen listing the available files appears. 7. Select the file you want to play or view, and then press the E button. Controlling the Playback of Content Located on Your PC with your Smart Phone Control PC's files to Product AllShare Connection PC Smart Phone Product Play back PC's files 5V 0.5A (Only available with Samsung phones supporting AllShare functionality.) 1. Connect the product, your PC, and your DLNA compatible cellular phone to the same wireless network. 2. Follow the directions in the AllShare software Installation/Instruction manual to set up devices and files for playing or viewing. 3. On your computer, using the AllShare software, confirm your phone is connected. 4. On the phone, select the file you want to view or play, and then select the Home cinema system as the playback device. 5. On the phone, start playback. Controlling Video Playback You can control the playback of video content located on a Blu-ray/DVD disc, USB device, mobile device or PC. Depending on the disc or contents, some of the functions described in this manual may not be available. Buttons on the Remote Control used for Video Playback 0 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP 1 2 1 Using the disc menu, title menu, popup menu and title list DISC MENU During playback, press this button to display the Disc menu. TITLE MENU During playback, press this button to display the Title menu. • If your disc has a playlist, press the View button to go to the playlist. POPUP MENU During playback, press this button to display the Popup menu. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 32 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 32 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:08 013-06-04 오전 10:01:08English 33| 05 Media Play 2 Playback related buttons The product does not play sound in Search, Slow, or Step mode. • To return to normal speed playback, press the 6 button. 6 Starts playback. 5 Stops playback. 7 Pauses playback. Fast Motion Play During playback, press the 3 or  button. Each time you press the 3 or  button, the playback speed will change. Slow Motion Play In pause mode, press the  button. Each time you press the  button, the playback speed will change. Step Motion Play In pause mode, press the 7 button. Each time you press the 7 button, a new frame appears. Skip Motion Play During playback, press the 1 or 2 button. Each time you press the 1 or 2 button, the disc moves to the previous or next chapter or file. Using the TOOLS Menu During playback, press the TOOLS button. Play from the Beginning Select to return to the beginning of the movie, and then press the E button. 3D Use 3D menu to select Side by Side or Top Bottom option if the 3D content currently playing does not properly appear in 3D mode. | NOTES |  Use 3D menu only for 3D contents of Side by Side or Top Bottom format. If applied to 2D contents, it may not be displayed properly. Search Scene You can use the Search Scene function during playback to view or start a movie from the scene of your choice. | NOTES |  If the index information in the file is damaged or the file does not support indexing, you will not be able to use the Search Scene function.  If you are using the DLNA function after connecting to a computer through your network, Search Scene may not be supported. Search Titles If there is more than one movie on the disc or device, select to start a different title. 1. Select Search Titles, and then press the E button. 2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a title, and then press the E button. Chapter Search Select to play the chapter of your choice. 1. Select Chapter Search, and then press the E button. 2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a chapter, and then press the E button. Search Time Bar Select to play the movie from a selected time point. 1. Select Search Time Bar, and then press the E button. 2. Using the number buttons, enter the time point you want to go to, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  You can also use the ◄► buttons to advance or rewind the movie. The movie advances or rewinds one minute each tme you press the ◄► buttons. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 33 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 33 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:12 013-06-04 오전 10:01:12| 34 English Media Play Repeat Mode Select to repeat a title, chapter, or specific section. - Off : Select to return to normal playback. - Title : Choose to repeat a selected title. - Chapter : Choose to repeat a specific chapter. - Repeat A-B : Choose to repeat a specific section. 1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Repeat A-B, and then press the E button. 2. Press the E button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A). Let the movie play. 3. Press the E button at the point where you want repeat play to stop (B). | NOTES |  You must set point (B) at least 5 seconds of playing time after point (A). Picture Mode Select to set the picture mode. - Dynamic : Increases sharpness and brightness. - Standard : Choose this setting for most viewing applications. - Movie : The best setting for watching movies. - User : Lets you adjust the sharpness and noise reduction function respectively. | NOTES |  When you use the BD wise function, this menu will not appear. Equaliser Mode Select to use the Equaliser. Equaliser Settings Select to set the Equaliser. | NOTES |  It only appears when equaliser mode is on. Audio Select to set the desired audio language. Audio Sync In some cases when the product is connected to a digital TV, the audio signal may not synchronize with the video signal. If this occurs, adjust the audio delay time to match the video signal. Subtitle Select to set the desired subtitle language. Subtitle Settings Select to set the desired subtitle options. Angle To view a scene from another angle. The Angle option displays the number of angles available to view (1/1, 1/2, 1/3, etc.). BONUSVIEW Video Select to set the desired bonusview option. BONUSVIEW Audio Full Screen Select to set the size of the video image. Choose Original, Mode1 (larger), or Mode2 (largest). Information Select to view video file information. | NOTES |  Depending on the disc or storage device, the Tools menu may differ.  Video files with high bit rates of 20Mbps or more strain the product’s capabilities and may stop playing during playback. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 34 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 34 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:12 013-06-04 오전 10:01:12English 35| 05 Media Play Using the View & Options Menus On the screen that lists the video files, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select View or Options in the upper right, and then press the E button. Videos View Date Displays all the folders with videos by date. If you select a folder, and then press E button, displays all the videos in the folder by date. Title Displays all the video files on the media or storage device by title. Folder Displays all the folders on the media or storage device. Options Play Selected Play Selected lets you create a playlist by selecting specific files to play. It works essentially the same way for all media. See Creating a Playlist from a CD on page 37. Send Select Send to upload selected files to apps (Picasa, Facebook etc) or devices. To use Send, you need to establish an account with the on-line site, and then log in using the Log In function. | NOTES |  Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options View menus may differ. All options may not be displayed.  The View and Options menus are usually available when you are viewing video files on a USB flash drive, a PC, a disc you recorded yourself, or a mobile device. They are usually not available if you are viewing a commercial Blu-ray, DVD, or CD disc. Controlling Music Playback You can control the playback of music content located on a DVD, CD, USB, mobile device or PC. Depending on the disc or contents, some of the functions described in this manual may not be available. Buttons on the Remote Control used for Music Playback 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP 1 4 5 3 6 2 1 NUMBER buttons : If numbered tracks are displayed, press the number of a track. The selected track is played. 2 1 2 buttons : Move to the previous/next track. 3 5 button : Stops a track. 4 Fast Play (Audio CD (CD-DA) only) During playback, press the 3 or  button. Each time you press the 3 or  button, the playback speed will change. 5 7 button : Pause a track. 6 6 button : Plays the currently selected track. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 35 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 35 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:13 013-06-04 오전 10:01:13| 36 English Media Play Music Screen Controls 00:09 00:43 TRACK 001 TRACK 001 00:43 TRACK 002 03:56 TRACK 003 04:41 TRACK 004 04:02 TRACK 005 03:43 TRACK 006 03:40 TRACK 007 04:06 TRACK 008 03:52 TRACK 009 03:04 TRACK 010 04:02 Options off off Pause a track. Play a track. Move to the previous track. Move to the next track. Rewind the track. Advance the track. 1 , Repeat one track or all tracks. Play tracks in random order. Display the Equaliser. Adjust the equaliser manually. (Only when equaliser mode is on) To access the controls, play a track, and then use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to the control of your choice. | NOTES |  The Music Screen controls are only accessible when a track is playing.  All controls do not appear at the same time. Using the View & Options Menus On the screen that lists the music files, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select View or Options in the upper right, and then press the E button. Music View Track Displays all the music tracks on the media or storage device. Album Displays all the music on the media or storage by album. Artist Displays all the music files on the media or storage device by artist Genre Displays all music on the media or storage by genre. Folder Displays all the folders on the media or storage device. Options Play Selected Play Selected lets you create a playlist by selecting specific files to play. It works essentially the same way for all media. See Creating a Playlist on an Audio CD on page 37. Send Select Send to upload selected files to apps (Picasa, Facebook etc) or devices. To use Send, you need to establish an account with the on-line site, and then log in using the Log In function. Ripping The Ripping function converts CD audio to the mp3 format and saves the converted files on a USB device or the mobile device connected to the product. See Ripping on page 38. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 36 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 36 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:14 013-06-04 오전 10:01:14English 37| 05 Media Play Information Select to see content information. Encoding Select to manage the text encoding options. | NOTES |  Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options menu may differ. All options may not be displayed. Repeating Tracks on an Audio CD You can set the product to repeat tracks on an audio CD (CD-DA/MP3). 1. During playback, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select in the lower left corner of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Use the ▲▼ to select the Repeat mode you want - Off, One Song, or All - and then press the E button. 00:09 00:43 TRACK 001 TRACK 001 00:43 TRACK 002 03:56 TRACK 003 04:41 TRACK 004 04:02 TRACK 005 03:43 TRACK 006 03:40 TRACK 007 04:06 TRACK 008 03:52 TRACK 009 03:04 TRACK 010 04:02 Options off off Shuffling Tracks on an Audio CD You can set the product to play tracks on an audio CD (CD-DA/MP3) at random. 1. During playback, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select in the lower left corner of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Use the ▲▼ to set the Shuffle mode Off or On, and then press the E button. Creating a Playlist from a CD 1. With the Playback screen displayed, select the Options button and then press the E button. The Options menu appears. 2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Play Selected , and then press the E button. The Play Selected screen appears. 3. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a track, and then press the E button. A check appears to the left of the track. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select and check additional tracks. 5. To remove a track from the list, move to the track, and then press the E button again. The check on the track is removed. 6. When done, press the ▲▼ buttons to select Play, and then press the E button. The Music Playback screen reappears listing only the tracks you checked. The selected tracks play automatically. | NOTES |  You can create a playlist with up to 99 tracks from Audio CDs (CD-DA).  If you have created a playlist, Play Selected is replaced by Edit playlist on the Options menu.  On the Play Selected screen, you can also choose Select All, Deselect All, and Cancel. ~ Use Select All to select all tracks. This cancells your individual track selections. When you press the RETURN button on your remote or select Play and then press the E button, all tracks will appear on the Music Playback screen, and the product will begin to play all tracks from Track 001. ~ Use Deselect All to deselect all selected tracks at once. Then, select individual tracks or use Select All to select all the tracks, and then press the RETURN button on your remote or select Play and then press the E button. If you do not use Select All or select individual tracks, the Playlist will not change. ~ Cancel cancells any changes you made on the Play Select screen. When you return to the Playback screen, the Playlist will be unchanged. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 37 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 37 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:17 013-06-04 오전 10:01:17| 38 English Media Play Ripping 1. Insert a USB device into the USB jack on the front of the product. 2. With the Playback screen displayed, select the Options button and then press the E button. The Options menu appears. 3. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Ripping, and then press the E button. The Ripping screen appears. 4. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a track, and then press the E button. A check appears to the left of the track. 5. Repeat Step 4 to select and check additional tracks. 6. To remove a track from the list, move to the track, and then press the E button again. The check on the track is removed. 7. When done, select the Rip button using the ▲▼ buttons, and then press the E button. The Rip pop-up appears. 8. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select the device to store the ripped files on, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  Do not disconnect the device while ripping is in progress. 9. If you want to cancel ripping, press the E button and then select Yes. Select No to continue ripping. 10. When ripping is complete, the “Successfully Ripped.” message appears. Press the Ebutton. 11. Press the RETURN button to go back to the Playback screen. | NOTES |  This function is not available with DTS Audio CDs.  This function may not be supported by some discs.  Ripping encodes music to the .mp3 format at 192kbps.  On the Ripping screen, you can also choose Select All and or Clear All. - Use Select All to select all tracks and press the E button. This cancells your individual track selections. - Use Clear All to deselect all selected tracks at once. Using Bluetooth You can use a Bluetooth device to enjoy music with high quality stereo sound, all without wires! What is Bluetooth? Bluetooth is a technology that enables Bluetoothcompliant devices to interconnect with each other easily using a short wireless connection. • A Bluetooth device may hum or malfunction: - When a part of your body is in contact with the receiving/transmitting system of the Bluetooth device or the Home Cinema. - When it is subject to electrical variation from obstructions caused by a wall, corner or office partitioning. - When it is exposed to electrical interference from same frequency-band devices including medical equipment, microwave ovens and wireless LANs. • Pair the Home Cinema with the Bluetooth device while the two are close together. • The further the distance is between the Home Cinema and the Bluetooth device, the worse the quality is. If the distance exceeds the Bluetooth operational range, the connection is lost. • In poor reception-sensitivity areas, the Bluetooth connection may not work properly. • The Home Cinema has an effective reception range of up to 10 meters in all directions if there are no obstacles. The connection will be automatically cut off if the device is out of this range. Even within this range, the sound quality may be degraded by obstacles such as walls or doors. • This wireless device may cause an electric interference during its operation. To connect the Home Cinema to a Bluetooth device Connect Bluetooth device Check if the Bluetooth device supports the Bluetooth compliant stereo headset function. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 38 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 38 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:18 013-06-04 오전 10:01:18English 39| 05 Media Play 1. Press the FUNCTION button on the remote control of the product to display the BT message. 2. Select the Bluetooth menu on the Bluetooth device you want to connect. For instructions, refer to the Bluetooth device's manual. 3. Select the Stereo headset menu on the Bluetooth device. • You will see a list of devices. 4. Select "[HTS]Fxxxxx" from the searched list. • When the Home Cinema is connected to the Bluetooth device, the device name of the connected Bluetooth device, followed by the name of home cinema will appear on the front display of home cinema. 5. Play music on the connected device. • You can listen to the music playing on the connected Bluetooth device over the Home Cinema system. | NOTES |  The Home Cinema only supports Middle Quality SBC data (up to 237kbps@48kHz), and does not support High Quality SBC data (328kbps@44.1kHz).  The AVRCP feature is supported. It's functionality will differ, depending on the specifications of the connected device.  Connect only to a Bluetooth device that supports the A2DP Profile.  Only one Bluetooth device can be paired at a time.  The search or connection functions may not work properly in the following cases: - If there a strong electric field near or around the home cinema. - If several Bluetooth devices are simultaneously paired with product. - If the Bluetooth device is turned off, not in place, or malfunctions. - Note that such devices as microwave ovens, wireless LAN adapters, fluorescent lights, and gas stoves use the same frequency range as the Bluetooth device, and can cause electric interference. To disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Home Cinema You can disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Home Cinema. For instructions, refer to the Bluetooth device's manual. • When the Home Cinema is disconnected from the Bluetooth device, the Home Cinema will display DISCONNECTED on the front display. To disconnect the Home Cinema from the Bluetooth device Press the ( ) button on the front panel of the Home Cinema to switch from BT to another mode or turn off the Home Cinema. • Except when you disconnect the home cinema by changing functions, the connected Bluetooth device will wait a certain time for a response from the Home Cinema before terminating the connection. (Disconnection time may differ, depending on the Bluetooth device.) | NOTES |  In Bluetooth connection mode, the Bluetooth connection will be lost if the distance between the Home Cinema System and the Bluetooth device exceeds 10 meters. When the Bluetooth device comes back into effective range or you restart the Bluetooth device, you have to pair the device and home cinema again to reconnect.  In Bluetooth mode, the screen saver will start if the Bluetooth device stays in the Ready state for 5 minutes. To reconnect the Bluetooth device, turn off the screen saver, and then connect the device. To turn off the Screen saver, press any button on the remote control (the Volume button, a number button, etc.) Playing Photo Contents You can play photo contents located on a DVD, USB, mobile device or PC. Using the Tools Menu During playback, press the TOOLS button. Previous Select to move to the previous picture. Next Select to move to the next picture. Start / Stop Slide Show Select to play/pause the slide show. Slideshow Settings  Speed : Select to set a slide show's speed.  Effects : Select to set a slide show's special effects. Zoom Select to enlarge the current picture. (Enlarge up to 4 times) HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 39 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 39 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:19 013-06-04 오전 10:01:19| 40 English Media Play Rotate Select to rotate the picture. (This will rotate the picture either clockwise or counter clockwise.) Background Music Select to listen to music while viewing a slide show. Settings  Picture Mode - Dynamic : Choose to increase Sharpness. - Standard : Choose for most viewing applications. - Movie : This is the best setting for watching movies. - User : Lets you adjust the sharpness and noise reduction function respectively.  Information : Shows the picture information. Equaliser Mode Customize your own personal sound preferences using the equaliser settings. Equaliser Settings This function is only available when Equaliser Mode is On. | NOTES |  Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options menu may differ. All options may not be displayed.  To enable the background music function, the photo file must be in the same storage media as the music file. However, the sound quality can be affected by the bit rate of the MP3 file, the size of the photo, and the encoding method.  You can't enlarge the subtitle and PG graphic in the full screen mode. Using the View and Options Menus When you See the Photo File List Photos View Date Groups all the photo files on the media or storage device by Date. Click a group to see the photos in that group. Title Displays all the photo files on the media or storage device by title. Folder Displays all the folders on the media or storage device. Options Slide Show Starts the slide show. Shows all the files in the current folder, one after another. If you want to create a slide show with a selected group of photos, see Play Selected below. Play Selected Play Selected lets you create a playlist by selecting specific files to play. It works essentially the same way for all media. See Creating a Playlist on an Audio CD on page 37. Send Select Send to upload selected files to on line sites (Picasa, Facebook etc) or devices. To use Send, you need to establish an account with the on-line site, and then log in using the Log In function. | NOTES |  Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options menu may differ. All options may not be displayed. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 40 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 40 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:20 013-06-04 오전 10:01:20English 41| 05 Media Play Listening to Radio Using Buttons on the Remote Control 1. Press the FUNCTION button to select FM. 2. Tune to the desired station. • Preset Tuning 1 : Press the 5 button to select Preset and then press the TUNING/CH (,.) button to select the preset station. - Before you can tune to preset stations, you must add preset stations to the product's memory. • Manual Tuning : Press the 5 button to select Manual and then press the TUNING/CH (,.) button to tune to a lower or higher frequency. • Automatic Tuning : Press the 5 button to select Manual and then press and hold the TUNING/ CH (,.) button to automatically search the band. Setting Mono/Stereo Press the MO/ST button. • Each time the button is pressed, the sound switches between STEREO and MONO. • In a poor reception area, select MONO for a clear, interference-free broadcast. Presetting Stations Example : Presetting FM 89.10 into memory. 1. Press the FUNCTION button to select FM. 2. Press the TUNING/CH (,.) button to select <89.10>. 3. Press the TUNER MEMORY button. • NUMBER flashes on the display. 4. Press the TUNER MEMORY button again. • Press the TUNER MEMORY button before NUMBER disappears from the display on its own. • After you press the TUNER MEMORY button, NUMBER disappears from the display and the station is stored in memory. 5. To preset another station, repeat steps 2 to 4. • To tune to a preset station, press the 5 button to select Preset and then press the TUNING/CH (,.) button to select the preset station. Using the Special Effects Remote Control Buttons SOUND EFFECT Function SOUND EFFECT Lets you select a mode that optimizes the sound. 1. Press the SOUND EFFECT button. 2. Press the ▲▼ button to select the desired mode: DSP, Dolby Pro Logic II or SFE Mode. 3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired sound effect. ❑ DSP MP3 Enhancer  Power Bass  Football  Off • MP3 Enhancer : Helps enhance your sound experience (ex. mp3 music). You can upscale your MP3 level sound (24 kHz, 8bit) to CD level sound (44.1 kHz, 16bit). • Power Bass : Increases the volume level of bass tones and provides thudding sound effects. • Football : Creates a more dynamic, realistic, stadium like sound. For listening to football, soccer, and other sporting events. • Off : Select for normal listening. ❑ Dolby Pro Logic II Movie  Music  Game  Matrix  Pro Logic  Off • Movie : Adds realism to a movie soundtrack. • Music : When listening to music, you can experience sound effects as if you are listening to the actual performance. • Game : Enhances the excitement of a game’s sound. • Matrix : Select to hear multi channel surround sound. • Pro Logic : Select to listen to a 2CH sound source in 5.1CH surround sound with all speakers active. - A specific speaker(s) may not output depending on the input signal. • Off : Select for normal listening. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 41 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 41 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:21 013-06-04 오전 10:01:21| 42 English Media Play ❑ SFE Mode Symphony Hall in Boston (Hall 1)  Philharmonic Hall in Bratislava (Hall 2)  Jazz Club in Seoul B  Church in Seoul  Amphitheater (Rock)  Off • Symphony Hall in Boston (Hall 1) : Provides a clear vocal as if listening in a concert hall. • Philharmonic Hall in Bratislava (Hall 2) : Also provides a clear vocal as if listening in a concert hall but, less powerful than HALL1. • Jazz Club in Seoul B : Recommended setting for Jazz. • Church in Seoul : Gives the feel of being in a grand church. • Amphitheater (Rock) : Recommended setting for Rock. • Off : Select this for normal listening. 3D Sound 3D SOUND You can enjoy more natural and vivid surround sound with enriched tones by adjusting the depth of sound using the level options. Off  High  Low | NOTES |  3D Sound is not available in FM mode. TV Sound TV SOUND You can listen via Home theatre speakers or TV Speaker with TV SOUND button. 1. Connect the HDMI cable to TV and Home cinema. (See page 17 ) 2. Set the connected Home cinema and TV to Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) On. 3. Press the TV SOUND button on the remote control. 4. Each time you press the TV SOUND button, TV SOUND ON/OFF flashes shortly on the Display part on the Front panel, then change to D. IN. - TV SOUND ON : Output to Home theatre speakers. - TV SOUND OFF : Output to Anynet+ connected TV Speaker. ❑ Use in this case: 1) If you want to listen to the sound via home cinema speaker when you watch a TV. 2) If you want to listen to the sound from the USB media that plugged to the TV via home cinema speaker. ❑ TV SOUND ON/OFF support specification Connected TV Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Setting TV Sound ON TV Sound OFF Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) supported TV ON O O OFF O X Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) not supported TV No operation O X HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 42 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 42 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:22 013-06-04 오전 10:01:22English 43| 06 Network Services You can enjoy various network services such as streaming video or on-line apps by connecting the product to your network. To use network services, you must first: 1. Connect the product to the network. (See page 18) 2. Configure the network settings. (See pages 25~27) Logging In to Your Samsung Account Before you access Movies & TV Shows or Apps, we suggest you log in to your Samsung account. To log in to your Samsung account, follow these steps: 1. With the Home screen displayed, press the RED (A) button. The Log In screen appears. 2. Select the Email field, and then press the E button. The keyboard pop-up appears. 3. Using the keyboard, enter your e-mail address. When finished, select the Done button, and then press the E button. The Log In screen re-appears. 4. Select the Password field, and then press the E button. The keyboard pop-up appears. 5. Using the keyboard, enter your password. When finished, select the Done button, and then press the E button. The Log In screen re-appears. 6. To make the log in process easier next time, select Sign me in automatically, and then press the E button. 7. Select Log in, and then press the E button. The product logs you in to your account. Your account e-mail is displayed on the bottom left of the screen. | NOTES |  If you selected Sign me in automatically, the next time you log in, the product will automatically enter your e-mail and password. All you need to do is select Log In.  If your e-mail address and password are not displayed when the Log In screen appears, select the button with the down pointing arrow head next to the Email field, and then press the E button. A drop down list of all your registered accounts will appear. Select your account, and then press the E button. The product will fill in the e-mail and password fields.  If you press the RED (A) button after you have logged in, the My Account pop-up appears. On the pop-up, you can select Logout, Change Account Information, Link Service Accounts, Remove Accounts from the Device, and Deactivate Account.  To rent movies and purchase for pay apps,you must have a credit card registered in your account. If you haven’t registered a card, select Change Account Information. On the Change Account information page, select Register Card, press the E button, and then follow the directions on the screen. Before Using Movies & TV Shows or Apps If you haven’t set up Smart Hub, when you use Movies & TV Shows or Apps for the first time, the product will ask you to perform the Smart Hub set up procedure. 1. On the Home screen, select either Movies & TV Shows or Apps, and then press the E button. If you have selected Apps, go to Step 4. 2. If you selected Movies & TV Shows, the Smart Hub pop-up appears asking if you want to set up Smart Hub. Select Yes, and then press the E button. The Welcome screen appears. 3. Select Start, and then press the E button. The Smart Hub Terms & Conditions, Privacy Policy screen appears. 4. On the Smart Hub Terms & Conditions, Privacy Policy screen, you must review and agree to both the Smart Hub Terms and Conditions and the Privacy Policy to use Smart Hub. 5. Scroll down, and then click the View Details buttons to review the full documents. 6. When done reading, scroll up to the first entry field, and press the E button to agree to the Terms and Conditions and consent to the Privacy Policy. 7. Press the ► button twice to go to the Supplemental Privacy Notices screen. 8. Click the View Details button to view the entire notice. 9. When done reading, scroll up to the top entry field, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  You do not need to consent to the Supplemental Privacy Notice, but one or more Smart TV features or functionalities may not be available if you do not. 10. Press the ► button twice. The Setup Complete screen appears. Press the E button. Network Services HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 43 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 43 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:24 013-06-04 오전 10:01:24| 44 English Network Services Using Movies & TV Shows You can download or stream for pay and free-of-charge movies and TV shows and view them on your TV. Movies & TV Shows Featured Recommended Favourites Featured Movies TV Shows Purchased 1. On the Home screen, select Movies & TV Shows, and then press the E button. 2. Select one of the Featured or Recommended movies, and then press the E button. The page for that movie appears. OR Use the ▼ button to go to the bottom of the screen. Select Favourites, Featured, Movies, TV Shows, or Purchased, and then press the E button. On the page that appears, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a show or movie, and then press the E button. On the TV Shows or Movies screen, you can also select What's New?, Most Popular, or Genres to see more available shows or movies. On the Genre screen, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a Genre, and then press the E button. To make a selection on a page displaying TV shows or movies, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to make a selection, and then press the E button. 3. To watch a selection, select Watch Now, and then press the E button. A selection screen appears listing various locations from which you can rent the film along with prices. 4. Select a location, and then press the E button. Follow the directions on the screen to start the movie. | NOTES |  If you haven't logged into your Samsung account, the Log in screen will appear after Step 3 and you will need to log in.  If you don't have a credit card associated with your Samsung account, after you log in, the Register Card screen will appear. Follow the directions on the screen. You must have a credit card registered to your account to rent movies and to purchase for-pay apps. Using Apps You can download the applications from the Internet, and access various for pay or free-of-charge application and view them on your TV. To access some applications, you need to have a Samsung account. The Apps Screen at a Glance Samsung TV 2 3 4 5 WebBrowser Apps Apps More Apps 1 Recommended My Apps Apps 1 2 3 4 1 Recommended : Displays recommended contents managed by Samsung. Gives you access to various for pay or free-of- charge applications you can download. 2 Featured Applications : Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to highlight the displayed Feature Application, and then press the E button. Information about the featured application appears. 3 My Apps : Displays your personal gallery of applications modifiable on the More Apps screen. 4 More Apps : Select More Apps to access the More Apps screen where you can add to, modify, and delete applications and see all downloaded applications. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 44 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 44 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:25 013-06-04 오전 10:01:25English 45| 06 Network Services Downloading Applications You can download for pay or free-of-charge applications through Samsung Apps. 1. On the Apps screen, select Samsung Apps, and then press the E button. The Samsung Apps screen appears. 2. Across the top of the screen, under What's New?, you'll see a series of new apps. Use the ◄► buttons to scroll the list right or left, and then select an app. Press the E button to see more information about the app. If the app is free, select Download, and then press the E button to download the app. If it is a for-pay app select Buy, press the E button, and then follow the instructions on the screen. | NOTES |  To buy an app, you must be logged into your Samsung account and have a credit card registered to the account. Press the RED (A) button on your remote to log in.  If you haven’t registered a card, after you log in, press the RED (A) button again, and then select Change Account Information in the pop-up that appears. On the Change Account information page, select Register Card, press the E button, and then follow the directions on the screen.  You can also access and download apps from the categories listed on the left of the screen. For instructions, see Step 4. 3. After the app has downloaded, select Run, and then press the E button to run the app now. To run the app later, press the RETURN button. In either case, the icon for the app will appear on the Apps screen. 4. To see additional apps, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to the category list on the left side of the screen. 5. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a category. Each time you move the highlight to another category, a different set of applications appears on the right. 6. Use the ► button to move to the applications and the ▲▼◄► buttons to move from app to app. 7. To see more information about an app, select it, and then press the E button. 8. To download the app, follow the directions in Steps 2 and 3. Starting an Application 1. Select Apps on the Home screen, and then press the E button. 2. On the Apps screen, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select an app, and then press the E button. The app starts. Using the More Apps Screen More Apps WebBrowser WebBrowser Category : XXXXX | Version : X.XXX | Size : XX.XKB Samsung Apps View : Date Downloaded Options 1 /23 Storage 109.48 MB / 629.43 MB The More Apps Screen lists all the apps you have downloaded and lets you: • Sort the apps on the More Apps screen by Date Downloaded, Recently Opened, and Title. • Apply a number of Options Menu functions to the apps listed in the My Apps section of the Apps screen including updating apps, moving apps into a folder, deleting the apps from My Apps, and locking the apps. • Start apps. Sorting the Apps To sort the apps on the More Apps screen, follow these steps: 1. On the Home screen, select Apps, and then press the E button. 2. On the Apps screen, use the ▼ button to move to the More Apps hotspot at the bottom of the page, and then press the E button. 3. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to move to View at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 4. In the drop down that appears, select Date Downloaded, Recently Opened, or Title, and then press the E button. The apps on the More Apps screen are sorted by the criteria you have chosen. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 45 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 45 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:30 013-06-04 오전 10:01:30| 46 English Network Services Using the Options Menu Functions Lock/Unlock Using the Lock/Unlock function and the Security PIN, you can lock applications so they cannot be started on either the Apps screen or the More Apps screen. The default PIN is 0000. 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Lock/Unlock, and then press the E button. 3. When the Lock Service appears, enter the PIN using the number buttons on your remote control. 4. To lock an application, select the application, and then press the E button. A lock appears on the app. Repeat to lock other, individual apps. 5. To unlock a locked app, select the application, and then press the E button. 6. To lock all the apps at once, use the ▲► buttons to select the Lock All button, and then press the E button. 7. To unlock all the locked apps at once, use the ▲► buttons to select the Unlock All button and then press the E button. 8. Press the RETURN button twice to return to the Apps screen. Locked apps will display a lock on the upper right side. Edit My Apps Edit My Apps lets you add apps to and delete apps from My Apps. It also lets you change the position of an app in My Apps. Add an App to My Apps 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E button. The Edit My Apps screen appears. 3. Select a full colour app from the top row of apps, and then press the E button. The full colour app icon appears in the My Apps area below and the app icon in the top row is grayed out. | NOTES |  Grayed out apps are already in My Apps. 4. When you return to the Apps screen, the app will appear in the My Apps area. Delete an App from My Apps 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E button. The Edit My Apps screen appears. 3. Select the app you want to delete from My Apps, press the E button, and then press the ▲▼◄► buttons in the direction of the . The Remove from My Apps pop-up appears. 4. Select Yes, and then press the E button. 5. When you return to the Apps screen, the app will have been removed from the My Apps area. Move an App in My Apps 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E button. The Edit My Apps screen appears. 3. Select the app you want to move in My Apps, press the E button, and then press the ▲▼◄► buttons to move the app icon in the direction of one of the arrows (<, >, ^, etc.) that appears around the app icon. The app icon moves in the direction you have chosen. 4. After you have placed the app icon where you want, press the E button. 5. When you return to the Apps screen, the app will be positioned in the location you had selected. Create Folder Create Folder lets you create a folder on the More Apps screen into which you can put apps. 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Create Folder, and then press the E button. The Set Folder Name pop-up appears. 3. Press the E button. The keyboard appears. 4. Select the Clear button on the right side, and then press the E button to remove Folder 1 from the entry field. Then, using the keyboard, enter the name you want to apply to the folder. 5. When finished, select the Done button on the right side, and then press the E button. The pop-up reappears. 6. Select OK, and then press the E button. The new folder appears in the list of apps on the left side of the screen. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 46 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 46 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:36 013-06-04 오전 10:01:36English 47| 06 Network Services Move to Folder Move to Folder lets you move apps to the folder of your choice. 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Move to Folder, and then press the E button. The Move to Folder screen appears. 3. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to an app, and then press the E button to select the app. A check appears in the upper left corner of the app. 4. To deselect an app, press the E button. The check disappears. 5. Repeat Step 3 to select additional apps. | NOTES |  To select all the downloaded apps, select Select All at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button. To deselect all the apps, select Deselect All at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button. 6. When done, select Select folder at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. The Select Folder pop-up appears. 7. In the Select Folder pop-up, use the ▲▼ buttons to select the folder you want to move the apps you selected to, and then press the E button. 8. The Apps Moved pop up appears. Press the E button. 9. To open the folder, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to highlight the folder, and then press the E button. Rename Folder Rename Folder lets you rename an existing folder. 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Rename Folder, and then press the E button. The Rename Folder screen appears, and a folder is highlighted. 3. User the ▲▼◄► buttons to highlight a folder of your choice, and then press the E button. The Rename pop-up appears. 4. Press the E button. The keyboard appears. 5. Enter the new name for the folder. When finished, select Done on the right side, and then press the E button. The Rename popup reappears displaying the new name. 6. Select OK, and then press the E button. The folder is renamed. 7. Select Close on the right side of the screen, and then press the E button. Delete Delete lets you delete apps and folders from the My Apps screen. If there are apps in a folder, both the folder and the apps are deleted together. Delete removes apps permanently. If you decide you want to use an app you deleted, you will need to download it again. 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. 2. Select Delete, and then press the E button. The Delete screen appears. 3. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to an app, or folder and then press the E button to select. A check appears in the upper left corner of the app or folder you selected. 4. To deselect an app, press the E button. The check disappears. 5. Repeat Step 3 to select additional apps or folders. | NOTES |  To select all the downloaded apps, select Select All at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button. To deselect all the apps, select Deselect All at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button. 6. After you have made all your selections, select Delete at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. The deleting pop-up appears. 7. Select Yes, and then press the E button. All the apps you selected are deleted. | NOTES |  You cannot immediately delete a locked app or folder. If you select a locked app or folder to delete, when you perform Step 7, the Lock Service pop-up appears. Enter the Security PIN into the pop-up, and then press the E button. The lock will be released and the app or folder will be deleted. Update Apps Update Apps automatically searches the Internet for updated versions of the apps you have downloaded and updates them if it finds newer versions. 1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to go to Options at the top of the screen, and then press the E button. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 47 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 47 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:36 013-06-04 오전 10:01:36| 48 English Network Services 2. Select Update Apps, and then press the E button. 3. The unit searches the Internet for newer versions of your apps. If there are new apps, the Update Apps pop-up appears. 4. To download the update for a particular app, highlight the app, and then press the E button. A check appears to the left of the app. 5. To deselect the app, highlight it, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  To select all the updates, select Select All on the right of the pop-up, and then press the E button. To deselect all the updates, select Deselect All, and then press the E button. 6. After you have selected the updates you want to download, select Update on the right side of the pop-up, and then press the E button. 7. The unit downloads the updates you have chosen. A download bar appears in each app icon as the update for that app is downloaded. The download is complete when the download bars disappear. Screen Mirroring The Screen Mirroring function lets you view the screen of your smart phone or smart device on the TV you have connected to the home cinema system. 1. With the Blu-ray's Home screen displayed, press the BLUE (D) button on the remote. The Screen Mirroring pop-up appears. 2. Launch AllShare Cast on your device. 3. On your device, find the name of the home cinema system in the list of available devices and then select it. 4. The TV displays a connecting message (for example, Connecting to Android_92gb...) and then displays the connected message. 5. In a few moments, the screen of your device appears on the TV screen. | NOTES |  When you are using the Screen Mirroring function, video stuttering or audio dropouts may occur, depending on your environment.  You can connect to a device that supports AllShare Cast. Note that connecting to such a device may not be fully supported depending on the manufacturer. For further information on mobile connection support, refer to the manufacturer’s web site.  Bluetooth transmissions can interfere with the Screen Mirroring signal. Before using the Screen Mirroring function, we strongly recommend that you turn off the Bluetooth function on your smart phone or smart device. Using the Web Browser You can access the Internet using the Web Browser application. Select Web Browser on the Home screen, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  When you run the Web Browser with the product connected by HDMI to a BD Wise compatible TV - and BD Wise is on - the browser is maximized to fill the screen and the TV's resolution is set to the optimal resolution automatically.  The Web Browser is not compatible with Java applications.  If you attempt to download a file, and the file cannot be saved, an error message will appear.  E-commerce (purchasing products online) is not supported.  ActiveX is not supported.  Access may be blocked to some websites or to web browsers operated by certain businesses. Link Browsing and Pointer Browsing The Web Browser provides two types of browsing, Pointer Browsing and Link Browsing. When you launch the browser for the first time, Pointer Browsing is active. If you are using a mouse to navigate in the Web Browser, we recommend leaving Pointer Browsing active. If you are using your remote to navigate in the Web Browser, we recommend that you replace Pointer Browsing with Link Browsing. Link Browsing moves a highlight from one link to the next in the Web Browser and is much faster than Pointer Browsing if you are using your remote. To activate Link Browsing, follow these steps: 1. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons on your remote to move the pointer to the Link Browser icon on the top right of the screen. The Link Browser icon is the third icon from the right. The pointer will be in the correct position if the icon turns blue and the words “Link Browsing” appear on the screen. 2. Press the E button. Link Browsing is activated and will remain active whenever you bring up the Web Browser. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 48 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 48 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:37 013-06-04 오전 10:01:37English 49| 06 Network Services The Control Panel at a Glance The Control Panel, which runs across the top of the screen, has a series of icons which start a number of useful functions. The icons are described below, starting with the icon on the far left of the screen. 1 http://www.samsung.com 100% 1 • : Moves to the previous page. • : Moves to the next web page. • : Displays the Bookmarks and History screen. You can bookmark the current page, select an existing bookmark, and edit and delete bookmarks. You can also view your browsing history and select a page to revisit. • : Moves to the Home screen of the Web Browser. • http://www.samsung.com : Lets you enter a page address manually using the keyboard pop-up. • : Reloads the current page so that it is refreshed on the screen. • : Adds the current page to your bookmarks. • : Lets you search for information by entering words or characters using the keyboard pop-up. See Using the Keyboard Popup on this page. • 100% : Lets you enlarge or shrink the screen by various percentages. • : Turns on the PIP function. • : Lets you switch between Pointer Browsing and Link Browsing. • : Lets you configure the Browser’s settings. See Using the Setting Menu on page 50. • : Closes the Web Browser. Using the Keyboard Pop-up When you click the http://www.samsung.com , the or access a data or text entry field, and then press the E button, the keyboard pop-up appears. http://www.samsung.com Caps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  Clear q w e r t y u i o p ^ *  123#& a s d f g h j k l ~ @ ! Done z x c v b n m , . ? -  Cancel ENG www. .com /  4  As you enter characters, recommended text will be shown. 100% To use the keyboard pop-up with your remote, follow these steps: 1. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons on your remote to move the highlight to a letter or number of your choice. 2. Press the E button to enter the letter or number into the entry field. 3. To access capital letters, move the highlight to the Caps key on the top left, and then press the E button. Press the E button again with the Caps key highlighted to access small letters again. 4. To access symbols and additional punctuation marks, highlight the 123#& button on the left, and then press the E button. 5. To delete a character you entered, move the highlight to the  button, and then press the E button. 6. To delete all the characters you entered, move the highlight to the Clear button, and then press the E button. 7. When finished entering, move the highlight to the Done button, and then press the E button. | NOTES |  If you have a wireless keyboard connected to your product, you can use the wireless keyboard to enter letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation. Note that the wireless keyboard will work only when the keyboard popup appears and can only be used to enter letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 49 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 49 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:38 013-06-04 오전 10:01:38| 50 English Network Services Options on the Keyboard Pop-Up To access the keyboard pop-up options, highlight the button on the bottom left of the keyboard, and then press the E button. Language Select the language for the keyboard. You can select English, French, Russian, etc. Recommended Text The keyboard will suggest recommended words as you enter text. You can turn this function On or Off. Predict Next Letter The keyboard will predict the next letter as you enter letters. The predictions appear in a ring around the letter you have just entered. You can select a predicted letter or move to another letter. You can turn this function On or Off. Using the Setting Menu The Setting menu contains functions that control how the Browser operates and Browser security functions. To open the Setting menu, highlight the icon in the Control Panel, and then press the E button. To select an option in the setting menu, highlight the option, and then press the E button. http://www.samsung.com Enable Grabbing Approved Sites Private browsing on Web Browser Settings Help Close 100% Enable/ Disable Grabbing Turns the Grabber function On and Off. When the Grabber function is on, you can move a web page up and down without dragging the scroll bar. The Grabber function is only available in Pointer Browsing. Approved Sites Lets you restrict your children’s access to inappropriate web pages by allowing access only to the web sites you have registered. Every time you access Approved Sites, the PIN screen appears. The first time you access Approved Sites, enter the default PIN, 0000 using the number buttons on your remote. You can change the PIN using the Reset password for the Approved Sites function. See below.  Approved Sites feature : Turns the Approved Sites function on or off.  Reset password for Approved Sites : Change the Approved Sites password.  Add current site : Lets you add the currently displayed web site to the Approved Sites list.  Manage Approved Sites : Lets you key in URLs to add to the Approved Sites List and delete sites from the Approved Sites list. If you turn Approved Sites on and have not added any sites to the Approved Sites list, you will not be able to access any Internet sites. Private browsing on/off Enable or disable the Privacy mode. When the Privacy mode is enabled, the browser does not retain the URLs of sites you visit. If you want to enable Privacy mode, select OK. If the Privacy mode is running, the “Stop” icon appears in front of the URL at the top of the screen. To disable Privacy mode, select it again when Privacy mode is enabled. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 50 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 50 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:40 013-06-04 오전 10:01:40English 51| 06 Network Services Web Browser Settings  Set as homepage : You can set the Browser's home page.  Pop-up Block : Turns the Popup Block on and off.  Ad Block : You can determine whether to block advertisements and select the URLs for which advertisements are blocked.  General : You can delete personal in information such as website history and browsing data (cookies, etc.), and reset all web browser settings to their factory defaults.  Encoding : You can set the Encoding setting for web pages to Automatic or select the encoding format manually from a list.  Pointer : You can set the speed of the cursor when the cursor is set to Pointer and turn Smart Cursor On and Off.  Browser Information : Displays the version number and copyright information for the Web Browser. Help Provides basic information about the operation of the Web Browser. | NOTES |  Depending on the web site, some of the Web Browser Setting functions may not be activated. Functions that are not activated are greyed out and cannot be used. Linking your Internet Service Accounts to the Product The Link Service Accounts function lets you link your product to your accounts with Internet services that the product can log you in to the service automatically when you start the app for that service. To create a service account link, follow these steps: 1. On the Home screen, press the RED (A) button on your remote to log in to your Samsung Account. 2. After you have logged in, press the RED (A) button on your remote again. 3. Select Link Service Accounts in the My Account pop-up, and then press the E button. 4. On the Link Service Accounts screen, select the service you want to link to the product, and then press the E button. 5. Select Register, and then press the E button. 6. In the ID and Password screen, enter the ID you use to log in to the service you selected using the popup keyboard. When finished, select Done, and then press the E button. 7. Repeat the same process for the password. When finished select Done, and then press the E button. 8. Select OK, and then press the E button. BD-LIVE™ Once the product is connected to your network, you can enjoy various movie-related service contents available on BD-LIVE compliant discs. 1. Attach a USB flash drive to the USB jack on the front of the product, and then check its remaining memory. The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate the BD-LIVE services. 2. Select Settings on the Home screen, and then press the E button. 3. Select Network, and then press the E button. 4. Select BD-Live Settings, and then press the E button. 5. Select BD Data Management, and then press the E button. 6. Select Select Device, and then press the E button. 7. Select USB device, and then press the E button. 8. Insert a Blu-ray Disc that supports BD-LIVE. 9. Select an item from the list of BD-LIVE service contents provided by the disc manufacturer. | NOTES |  The way you use BD-LIVE and the provided contents may differ, depending on the disc manufacturer. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 51 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 51 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:42 013-06-04 오전 10:01:42| 52 English Appendix Additional Information Notes Connections HDMI OUT • Certain HDMI output resolutions may not work, depending on your TV. • You must have a HDMI connection to enjoy videos with 3D technology. • A long HDMI cable may cause screen noise. If this occurs, set HDMI Deep Colour to Off in the menu. Settings 3D Settings • For some 3D discs, to stop a movie during 3D playback, press the 5 button once. The movie stops and the 3D mode option is de-activated. To change a 3D option selection when you are playing a 3D movie, press the 5 button once. The Blu-ray menu appears. Press the 5 button again, then select 3D Settings in the Blu-ray menu. • Depending on the content and the position of the picture on your TV screen, you may see vertical black bars on the left side, right side, or both sides. TV Aspect Ratio • Depending on the disc type, some aspect ratios may not be available. • If you select an aspect ratio and option which is different than the aspect ratio of your TV screen, then the picture might appear to be distorted. • If you select 16:9 Original, your TV may display 4:3 Pillarbox (black bars on sides of picture). BD Wise (Samsung Products only) • When BD Wise is on, the Resolution setting automatically defaults to BD Wise and BD Wise appears in the Resolution menu. • If the product is connected to a device that does not support BD Wise, you can not use the BD Wise function. • For proper operation of BD Wise, set the BD Wise option in both the product and the TV to On. Digital Output • Be sure to select the correct Digital Output or you will hear no sound or just loud noise. • If the HDMI device (AV receiver, TV) is not compatible with compressed formats (Dolby Digital, DTS), the audio signal outputs as PCM. • Regular DVDs do not have BONUSVIEW audio and Navigation Sound Effects. • Some Blu-ray Discs do not have BONUSVIEW audio and Navigation Sound Effects. • This Digital Output setup does not affect the analogue (L/R) audio or HDMI audio output to your TV. It affects the optical and HDMI audio output when your product is connected to an AV receiver. • If you play MPEG audio soundtracks, the audio signal outputs as PCM regardless of your Digital Output selections (PCM or Bitstream). • Digital Output can be activated when Speaker Selection is set to TV Speaker. BD-Live Internet Connection • The Internet connection may be restricted while you are using BD-LIVE contents. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) • Depending on your TV, certain HDMI output resolutions may not work. Please refer to the user manual of your TV. • This function is not available if the HDMI cable does not support CEC. • If your Samsung TV has an Anynet+ logo, then it supports the Anynet+ function. BD Data Management • In the external memory mode, disc playback may be stopped if you disconnect the USB device in the middle of playback. • Only those USB devices formatted in the FAT file system (DOS 8.3 volume label) are supported. We recommend you use USB devices that support USB 2.0 protocol with 4 MB/sec or faster read/write speed. • The Resume Play function may not work after you format the storage device. • The total memory available to BD Data Management may differ, depending on the conditions. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 52 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 52 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:42 013-06-04 오전 10:01:42English 53| 07 Appendix DivX® Video On Demand • For more information about DivX(R) VOD, visit “http://vod.divx.com”. Front Display • You cannot change the brightness of the button and the VOL +, - button. Speaker Settings • When Speaker Selection is set to TV Speaker, audio is produced through the TV speakers. • Running the Auto Sound Calibration function takes about 3 minutes. • Make sure there is no disc in the product when you run the Auto Sound Calibration function. • If the ASC microphone is disconnected during the Auto Sound Calibration setup, the setup will be cancelled. • When the Auto Sound Calibration function is activated, the DSP, Dolby Pro Logic ll and SFE Mode will not work. • If the product is connected to external devices or other components (such as an AUX, D. IN), the Auto Sound Calibration Setup may not work properly. HDMI audio • When HDMI audio is output to the TV speakers, it is automatically down-mixed to 2 channels. Audio Return Channel • When Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is Off, the Audio Return Channel function is not available. • Using an HDMI cable not certified for ARC (Audio Return Channel) may cause a compatibility problem. • The ARC function is only available if an ARCcompliant TV is connected. Playback Playing Video files • Video files with high bit rates of 20Mbps or more strain the product’s capabilities and may stop playing during playback. Selecting the Audio Language • The ◄► indicator will not appear on the screen if the BONUSVIEW section does not contain any BONUSVIEW audio settings. • The languages available through the Audio Language function depend on the languages that are encoded on the disc. This function or certain languages may not be available. • Some Blu-ray Discs may allow you to select either the PCM or Dolby Digital audio soundtrack in English. Selecting the Subtitle Language • Depending on the Blu-ray Disc / DVD, you may be able to change the subtitle language in the Disc Menu. Press the DISC MENU button. • This function depends on the selection of subtitles that are encoded on the disc and may not be available on all Blu-ray Discs/DVDs. • Information about the main feature BONUSVIEW mode will also appear if the Blu-ray Disc has a BONUSVIEW section. • This function changes both the primary and secondary subtitles at the same time. • The total number of primary and secondary subtitles are displayed respectively. Playing JPEG files • You can’t enlarge the subtitle and PG graphic in the full screen mode. Media Play Dolby Pro Logic II Mode • Before selecting Dolby Pro Logic II mode, connect your external device to the AUDIO INPUT jacks (L and R) on the product. If you connect to only one of the inputs (L or R), you cannot listen to surround sound. Using the TOOLS button while playing pictures • If the system is connected to a BD Wise compliant TV that has set BD Wise to On, the Picture Settings menu will not appear. • The Background Music function will not work unless the music file and the photo file are located on the same storage media. Also, sound quality can be impacted by the bit rate of the MP3 music file, the size of the photos, and the encoding method. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 53 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 53 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:43 013-06-04 오전 10:01:43| 54 English Appendix Digital Output Selection Setup PCM Bitstream (Unprocessed) Bitstream (Re-encoded DTS) Bitstream (Re-encoded Dolby D) Connection HDMI supported AV receiver Audio Stream on Blu-ray Disc PCM Up to PCM 7.1ch PCM DTS re-encoded Re-encoded Dolby Digital * Dolby Digital Up to PCM 5.1ch Dolby Digital DTS re-encoded Re-encoded Dolby Digital * Dolby Digital Plus Up to PCM 7.1ch Dolby Digital Plus DTS re-encoded Re-encoded Dolby Digital * Dolby TrueHD Up to PCM 7.1ch Dolby TrueHD DTS re-encoded Re-encoded Dolby Digital * DTS Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS DTS re-encoded Re-encoded Dolby Digital * DTSHD High Resolution Audio Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS re-encoded Re-encoded Dolby Digital * DTS-HD Master Audio Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS-HD Master Audio DTS re-encoded Re-encoded Dolby Digital * Audio Stream on DVD PCM PCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM 2ch Dolby Digital Up to PCM 5.1ch Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DTS Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS DTS DTS Definition for Blu-ray Disc Any Decodes the main feature audio and BONUSVIEW audio stream together into PCM audio and adds Navigation Sound Effects. Outputs only the main feature audio stream so that your AV receiver can decode the audio bitstream. You will not hear BONUSVIEW audio or Navigation Sound Effects. Decodes the main feature audio and BONUSVIEW audio stream together into PCM audio and adds Navigation Sound Effects, then re-encodes the PCM audio into DTS bitstream. Decodes the main feature audio and BONUSVIEW audio stream together into PCM audio and adds Navigation Sound Effects, then re-encodes the PCM audio into Dolby Digital bitstream or PCM.  If the Source Stream is 2ch or mono, “Re-encoded Dolby D” Setting are not applied. Output will be PCM 2ch. Blu-ray Discs may include three audio streams : - Main Feature Audio : The audio soundtrack of the main feature. - BONUSVIEW audio : An additional soundtrack such as the director or actor’s commentary. - Navigation Sound Effects : When you choose some menu navigation, Navigation Sound Effects may sound. Navigation Sound Effects are different on each Blu-ray Disc. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 54 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 54 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:44 013-06-04 오전 10:01:44English 55| 07 Appendix Resolution according to the contents type Contents Type Setup Blu-ray Disc E-contents/ Digital contents BD Wise Resolution of Blu-ray Disc 1080p@60F Auto Movie Frame : Auto UHD Output : Auto 2160p@24F 2160p@24F UHD Output : Off 1080p@24F 1080p@24F Movie Frame : Off Max. Resolution of TV input Max. Resolution of TV input Movie Frame : Auto (24Fs)  1080p & 1080i only 1080p@24F 1080p@24F 1080p 1080p@60F 1080p@60F 1080i 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 720p 576p/480p 576p/480p 576p/480p Contents Type Setup DVD BD Wise 480i Auto Movie Frame : Auto DVD 24fps Conversion : Auto UHD Output : Auto 2160p@24F UHD Output : Off 1080p@24F DVD 24fps Conversion : Off Max. Resolution of TV input Movie Frame : Off Max. Resolution of TV input Movie Frame : Auto (DVD 24fps Conversion : Auto)  1080p & 1080i only 1080p@24F 1080p 1080p@60F 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 576p/480p 576p/480p | NOTES |  If the TV you connected to the product does not support Movie Frame or the resolution you selected, the message "If no pictures are shown after selecting Yes, please wait for 15 seconds to return to the previous resolution. Do you want to change the resolution?" appears. If you select Yes, the TV's screen will go to blank for 15 seconds, and then the resolution will revert to the previous resolution automatically.  If the screen stays blank after you have changed the resolution, remove all discs, and then press and hold the 5 button on the top of the product for more than 5 seconds. All settings are restored to the factory default. Run the Initial Settings procedure again. Then, go to Settings > Display > Resolution in the Menu, and select the correct resolution for your TV.  When you run the Initial Settings procedure, re-select the language and aspect ratio (screen size and format) only. Resetting does not affect your network settings, so you should be able to skip Network Setup and Software Update.  When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data will be deleted.  The Blu-ray Disc must have the 24 frame feature for the product to use the Movie Frame (24Fs) mode. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 55 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 55 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:44 013-06-04 오전 10:01:44| 56 English Appendix Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when this product does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the product, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized dealer or Samsung Electronics Service Centre. Symptom Check/Remedy I cannot eject the disc. • Is the power cord plugged securely into the outlet? • Turn off the power and then turn it back on. Playback does not start. • Check the region number of the Blu-ray/DVD disc. Blu-ray/DVD disc purchased from abroad may not be playable. • CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs cannot be played on this product. • Make sure that the rating level is correct. Playback does not start immediately when the Play/Pause button is pressed. • Are you using a deformed disc or a disc with scratches on the surface? • Wipe the disc clean. Sound is not produced. • The home cinema does not play sound during fast playback, slow playback,and step motion playback. • Are the speakers connected properly? Is the speaker setup correctly customized? • Is the disc severely damaged? Sound can be heard only from a few speakers and not all 8. • On certain Blu-ray/DVD discs, sound is output from the front speakers only. • Check if the speakers are connected properly. • Adjust the volume. • When listening to a CD, radio or TV, sound is output to the front speakers only. Dolby Digital 7.1 CH Surround Sound is not produced. • Is there "Dolby Digital 7.1 CH" mark on the disc? Dolby Digital 7.1 CH Surround Sound is produced only if the disc is recorded with 7.1 channel sound. • Is the audio language correctly set to Dolby Digital 7.1-CH in the information display? The remote control does not work. • Are you operating the remote within its operational range and within the proper angle relative to the sensor? • Are the batteries drained? • Have you selected the mode (TV/BD) functions of the remote control (TV or BD) correctly? • The disc is rotating but no picture is produced. • Picture quality is poor and the picture is shaking. • Is the TV power on? • Are the video cables connected properly? • Is the disc dirty or damaged? • A poorly manufactured disc may not be playable. Audio language and subtitles do not work. • Audio language and subtitles will not work if the disc does not contain them. The menu screen does not appear even when the menu function is selected. • Are you using a disc that does not contain menus? HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 56 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 56 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:45 013-06-04 오전 10:01:45English 57| 07 Appendix Symptom Check/Remedy The aspect ratio cannot be changed. • You can play 16:9 Blu-ray/DVD discs in 16:9 Full mode, 4:3 Letter Box mode, or 4:3 Pan-Scan mode, but 4:3 Blu-ray/DVD discs are played in 4:3 ratio only. Refer to the Blu-ray Disc jacket and then select the appropriate function. • The product is not working. (Example: The power goes out or a strange noise is heard.) • The Product is not working normally. • Press and hold the remote control's 5 button for 5 seconds in STANDBY mode. - Using the RESET function will erase all stored settings. Do not use this unless necessary. You have forgotten the rating level password. • With no disc in the product, press and hold the product's 5 button for longer than 5 seconds. INIT appears on the display and all settings will return to the default values. Then, press the POWER button. - Using the RESET function will erase all stored settings. Do not use this unless necessary. Can't receive radio broadcasts. • Is the antenna connected properly? • If the antenna's input signal is weak, install an external FM antenna in an area with good reception. While listening to TV audio through the Product, no sound is heard. • If the OPEN/CLOSE ^ button is pressed while listening to TV audio using the D. IN or AUX functions, the Blu-ray/DVD disc functions are turned on and the TV audio is muted. "Not Available" appears on screen. • The features or action cannot be completed at this time because: 1. The Blu-ray/DVD disc's software restricts it. 2. The Blu-ray/DVD disc's software doesn’t support the feature (e.g., angles) 3. The feature is not available at the moment. 4. You’ve requested a title or chapter number or search time that is out of range. If the HDMI output is set to a resolution your TV cannot support (for example, 1080p), you may not see a picture on your TV. • Press and hold the 5 button on front panel for more than 5 seconds with no disc in the product. All settings will revert to the factory settings. No HDMI output. • Check the connection between the TV and the HDMI jack of the product. • Check if your TV supports 576p/480p/720p/1080i/1080p HDMI input resolution. Abnormal HDMI output screen. • If random noise appears on the screen, it means that TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 57 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 57 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:46 013-06-04 오전 10:01:46| 58 English Appendix Symptom Check/Remedy AllShare function I can see folders shared through AllShare, but I cannot see the files. • AllShare only shows Video, Photo, and Music files. Other types of files are not displayed. Video is played intermittently. • Check if the network is stable. • Check if the network cable is properly connected and if the network is not overloaded. • The wireless connection between the DLNA compatible device and the product is unstable. Check the connection. The AllShare connection between the product and PC is unstable. • IP address under the same subnetwork should be unique, otherwise IP collision can results in such a phenomenon. • Check if you have a firewall enabled. If so, disable the firewall function. BD-LIVE I cannot connect to the BD-LIVE server. • Test whether the network connection is active by using the Network Status function. • Check whether a USB memory device is connected to the product. • The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate the BD-LIVE service. You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 52) • See if the BD-LIVE Internet Connection option is set to Allow(All). • If all above fails, contact the contents provider or update to the latest firmware. When using the BD-LIVE service, an error occurs. • The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate the BD-LIVE service. You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 52) | NOTES |  When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data will be deleted. HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 58 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 58 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:46 013-06-04 오전 10:01:46English 59| 07 Appendix General Weight 3.30 kg Dimensions 430.00 (W) x 55.00 (H) x 314.50 (D) mm Operating Temperature Range +5°C to +35°C Operating Humidity Range 10 % to 75 % FM Tuner Signal/noise ratio 55 dB Usable sensitivity 12 dB Total harmonic distortion 0.5 % HDMI Video 2D : 2160p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p 3D : 1080p, 720p Audio PCM multichannel audio, Bitstream audio, PCM audio Amplifier Front speaker output 165W x 2(3) Front Top speaker output 165W x 2(3) Centre speaker output 170W(3) Surround speaker output 165W x 2(3) Subwoofer speaker output 170W(3) Frequency response Analogue input : 20Hz~20kHz (±3dB) Digital input : 20Hz~40kHz (±4dB) S/N Ratio 70dB Channel separation 60dB Input sensitivity (AUX)500mV Specifications HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 59 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 59 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:47 013-06-04 오전 10:01:47| 60 English Appendix Speaker (7.1ch speaker system) Speaker system Impedance Frequency range Output sound pressure level Rated input Maximum input Dimensions (W x H x D) (Unit : mm) Weights (Unit : kg) Front/ Front Top 3  140Hz~ 20kHz 87dB/W/M 165W 330W 90.0 x 1302.0 x 70.0 (Stand base: 250 x 250) 7.65 Surround 90.0 x 1252.0 x 70.0 (Stand base: 250 x 250) 6.82 Centre 170W 340W 360.0 x 70.0 x 65.9 0.98 Subwoofer 40Hz ~ 160Hz 88dB/W/M 205.6 x 390.6 x 350.6 6.33 • Network speeds equal to or below 10Mbps are not supported. • Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd reserves the right to change the specifications without notice. • Weight and dimensions are approximate. • Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. ❑ SWA-6000 Weight 1.1 kg Dimensions (W x H x D) 76.2 x 228.6 x 152.4 mm Operating Temperature Range +5°C to +35°C Operating Humidity Range 10 % to 75 % Output 165W x 2 CH Frequency range 20Hz~20KHz S/N Ratio 65dB HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 60 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 60 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:47 013-06-04 오전 10:01:47ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ ً ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ Samsung. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ www.samsung.com/register 7.1CH Blu-ray™ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ HT-F9750W HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 1 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 1 22013-06-04 오전 10:08:58 013-06-04 오전 10:08:58| 2 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ • ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ، ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺮﺫﺍﺫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ً ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ. ﻳﻈﻞ • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ً ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ. • ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ، ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ، ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء (ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ). ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ. ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺟﻬﺪﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ" ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔﺍﻟﺒﺪﻧﻴﺔ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ: ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ 1 ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ LASER PRODUKT KLASSE 1 LASER LAITE LUOKAN 1 LASER APPARAT KLASS 1 LÁSER CLASE 1 PRODUCTO ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ 1 ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ 1. ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ. ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 2 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 2 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:07 013-06-04 오전 10:09:07| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ3 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ 01 ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ • ﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ - ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ. - ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻪﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. - ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻊ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ. - ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. • ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ - ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺤﻪﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ. - ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ، ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ. - ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ  ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ.  ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ.  ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪﻓﻲ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ. ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ُﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺫﺍﺫ. ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ • ﻻ ﺗ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺮ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ٍ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ - ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. - ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﺛﻢ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺜﺖ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Dolby .Laboratories D ﻭﺭﻣﺰ Pro Logicﻭ Dolby ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ .Dolby Laboratories ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ: 6,487,535ﻭ 5,978,762ﻭ 5,974,380ﻭ 5,956,674 7,272,567ﻭ 7,003,467ﻭ 7,212,872ﻭ 6,226,616ﻭ 7,333,929ﻭ 7,930,184ﻭ 7,392,195ﻭ 7,668,723ﻭ ﺃﻭ DTSﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ DTS-HDﻭ DTS ﺇﻥ .7,548,853ﻭ DTS-HD ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭDTS Neo:Fusion ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ DTS, Inc. ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ©2012 ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ DTS, Inc. ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ. ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX® :DIVX ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ DivX, LLC، ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ .Rovi Corporation ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ®DivX Certified ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX. ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓﻣﻮﻗﻊ divx.com ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX. ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DIVX ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ: ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ DivX ®Certified ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ (VOD) ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺴﻢ DivX VOD ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ vod.divx.com ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ُ ®DivX Certified ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®DivX ﺑﺪﻗﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ HD 1080p، ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ. ﺇﻥ ®DivX ﻭ®DivX Certified ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Rovi Corporation ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ. ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ 7,519,274 ;7,515,710 ;7,460,668 ;7,295,673 :ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 3 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 3 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:08 013-06-04 오전 10:09:08| 4 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ HDMI High-ﻭ HDMI Definition Multimedia Interface ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ HDMI ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ HDMI Licensing LLC ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ﻭﺗﻌﺪ Oracle ﻭJava ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Oracle ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔﻟﻬﺎ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ. ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Rovi Corporation. ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ. ﺇﻥ ™Blu-ray Disc ﻭ™Blu-ray ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ .Blu-ray Disc Association ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ Cinavia ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ً ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ، ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ. ﻳﺘﻢﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ Cinavia ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻼء Cinavia ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ .http://www.cinavia com. ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ Cinavia ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ،ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔﻣﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San ".Diego, CA, 92138, USA ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Verance Corporation ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 7,369,677 ﻭﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻷﺳﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ. ﺗﻌﺪ Cinavia ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Verance Corporation. ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ 2004-2010 ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Verance Corporation. ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Verance. ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ. - ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ، ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ "ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﺍﻗﺮﺃﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻮﻋﺒﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ ً ﺗﻌﺒﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻉ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ، ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺎﻣﻦ ً ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻄ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ، ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ. ً ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻄ • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻤﺌﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ، ﻓﺎﻣﻨﻊ ﻃﻔﻠﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ. ً ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻄ • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ (ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔﺇﻟﺦ.) • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻭ/ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ، ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ. • ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ (ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ) ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ HDMI OUT ِ ﺍﺭﺗﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ. ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. • ﻳُﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ .HDMI OUT ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ً • ﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ، ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ. • ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ BD Wise ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ. ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ • ﺍﺑﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ 46 ﺑﻮﺻﺔ، ﻓﺎﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ 3.5 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ. • ﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ. • ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ "Blu-ray 3D" ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "Blu-ray 3D" ﻳﻌﺪ • .Blu-ray Disc Association ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 4 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 4 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:09 013-06-04 오전 10:09:09| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ5 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ 01 ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ .Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ 2013 © ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ً ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ؛ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ً ﺟﺰءﺍﻣﻨﻪﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics .Co.,Ltd ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ 2 ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ 3 ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ 3 ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ 3 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ 4 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ 5 ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 6 ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ 7 ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ 10 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ 11 ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ 11 ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ 12 ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ 14 ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ 17 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ/ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ 18 ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 19 ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ 19 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 19 ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 20 ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 24 ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ 25 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ 28 ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 30 ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ 30 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ 30 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB 31 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ 31 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ AllShare 32 ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 35 ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ 39 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 40 ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ 41 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 43 ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung 43 ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 44 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ 44 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 48 ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 48 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ 51 ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ BD-LIVE™ 51 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 52 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ 56 ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ 59 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ  ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ.  ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃ. ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ً ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ (ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ) ﺏ. ﺇﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ (ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ).  ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 5 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 5 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:10 013-06-04 오전 10:09:10| 6 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ Blu-ray Disc ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ Blu-ray ﻗﺮﺹ .BD-RE ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ BD-RE/-R ﺃﻭ BD-ROM ﻗﺮﺹ ،DVD-RW ،DVD-VIDEO ،DVD+RW ،DVD-R DVD+R ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+Rﻭ DVD-VIDEO ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻫﺎ، ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ DivX ﻭ .MP4ﻭ MKV ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ،CD-RW/-R ،DVD-RW/-R BD-RE/-R BD-RE/-R ﺃﻭ DVD-RW/-R ﺃﻭ CD-RW/-R ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ MP3 ﺃﻭ WMA. ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ،CD-RW/-R ،DVD-RW/-R BD-RE/-R ﺃﻭ BD-RE/-R ﺃﻭ DVD-RW/-R ﺃﻭ CD-RW/-R ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ JPEG. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD-RW/-R ﻭDVD-R ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD-RW/-R ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DVD، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ  ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ DVD-R ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ 10 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.  ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ BD-R ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ 30 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ، ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﺗﻮﺟﺪﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺒﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ.  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ BD-J، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺒﻂء. ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ HD DVD • • ﻗﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﺦ ،DVD-ROM/PD/MV DVD-RAM • • ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ (ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ) (VR ﻭﺿﻊ) DVD-RW • CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/ • CD-G/CD-I/LD (ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD-G ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ.) 3.9 ﺑﺴﻌﺔ DVD-R ﻗﺮﺹ • ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻭDVD ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ًﻋﻴﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.  ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ Blu-ray Disc ﺃﻭ DVD ﺃﻭ CD ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻭDVD ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ.  ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء SAMSUNG، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray Disc ﺃﻭ DVD ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 6 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 6 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:11 013-06-04 오전 10:09:11| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ7 ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02 ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ. ﻭﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ، ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ Blu-ray ﻗﺮﺹ Disc A ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ. B ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ. C ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺁﺳﻴﺎ. DVD-VIDEO 1 ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ 2 ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﻣﺼﺮ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ 3 ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺒﻲ 5 ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ 6 ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray Disc/DVD ﻻ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ Blu-ray ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray Disc ﻗﺮﺹ Dolby BD-LIVE DTS ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺚ PAL ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ﻭﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ DivX Java HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 7 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 7 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:12 013-06-04 오전 10:09:12| 8 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ Resolution ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ (ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ) ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ (ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ) ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ (ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ) ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ avi.* mkv.* asf.* wmv.* mp4.* 3gp.* vro.* mpg.* mpeg.* ts.* tp.* trp.* mov.* flv.* vob.* svi.* m2ts.* mts.* divx.* AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP MOV FLV VRO VOB PS TS SVAF Divx 3.11 / 4 6 / 5 / 1080×1920 ،WMV v7،v8) :MSMPEG4 v3 (720×1280 30 30~6 Dolby Digital LPCM ADPCM (MS ،IMA) AAC HE-AAC WMA Dolby Digital Plus (MP3) MPEG (Core) DTS MPEG4 SP/ ASP /H.264 BP MP/HP Motion JPEG Microsoft MPEG-4 v3 Window Media ،v8 ،Video v7 v9 MPEG2 MPEG1 4 - 480×640 VP6 60 24/25/30 - MVC Vorbis 20 30~6 1080×1920 VP8 WebM webm.*  ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ - ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ. ً ﺃﻋﻼﻩ، ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻟﻔ - ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔﺃﻭ ﺎ. ً ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪﺗﺎﻟﻔ - ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. - ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ (ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ) ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. - ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. - ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB/ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.  ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ (FMO/ASO/RS ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء) 4.1 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ H.264 ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ - VC1 AP L4 ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ - VP6ﻭ MVCﻭ MSMPEG4 v3ﻭ v8ﻭ WMV v7 ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ - ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 720 × 1280: ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ 60 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ 720 × 1280: ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ 30 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ - ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ GMC 2 ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ - ﺗﺪﻋﻢ SVAF ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ، ًﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ - ﺗﺪﻋﻢﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ BD MVC ﻓﻘﻂ  ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ (5.1 ﺣﺘﻰ) WMA 10 Pro ﺗﺪﻋﻢ - - ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ WMA lossless. .MS ،ADPCM IMA ﺩﻋﻢ - (μ-Low ،A-Law) ADPCM ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ - AMR NB/WBﻭ QCELP ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ - - ﺗﺪﻋﻢ vorbis (ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ)، (7.1 ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ) Dolby Digital Plus ﺗﺪﻋﻢ -  ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ GMC 1-Warping Point ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : MPEG4 - .4.1 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ BP/MP/HP ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : H.264 - .VC1 SP/MP/AP L3ﻭ V9 ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : WMV - - MPEG1 : ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ D. .Hight Profile High Level ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : MPEG2 - HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 8 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 8 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:15 013-06-04 오전 10:09:15| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ9 ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02 ❑ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ DivX ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ txt.*ﻭ sub.*ﻭ srt.*ﻭ smi.*ﻭ ttxt.* | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ MKV ﻭMP4، ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻬﺎ. ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ MPEG mp3.* MPEG1 Audio (ﺻﻮﺕ) ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ - m4a.* mpa.* aac.* - AAC MPEG4 *.FLAC FLAC flac ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ *.Vorbis OGG ogg ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ WMA WMA wma.* ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ WMA 10 (5.1 ﺣﺘﻰ) Pro ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ WMA lossless ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ M2 ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ LBR - wav wav wav.* mid.* midi.* 1 ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ 0 ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ midi midi ape ape ape.* ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ NVTﻭ X13 ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ jpg.* jpeg.* 8640×15360 JPEG 4096×4096 PNG png.* 4096×4096 BMP bmp.* 8640×15360 MPO mpo.* ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ USB • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ MP3 ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ USB. • ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ 128 ﺎ. ً ﺣﺮﻓ • ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB/ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ FAT 16 ﻭFAT 32 ﻭNTFS. • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ PTP. • ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ". • ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ، ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. • ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3 ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑـ DRM (ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ) ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ 30 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﻓﻘﻂ (ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ). • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻓﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ (MSC) ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ USB. (HUB ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.) • ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ USB ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 9 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 9 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:16 013-06-04 오전 10:09:16| 10 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ • ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ USB ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ USB. • ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ SAMSUNG ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. AVCHD (ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ) • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ. • ﺇﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ. • ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ. • ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ AVCHD ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "x.v.Colour". ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ AVCHD ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "x.v.Colour". .Sony Corporation ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ "x.v.Colour" ﺇﻥ • Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. ﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ AVCHD ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "AVCHD" ﻳﻌﺪ • .Sony Corporationﻭ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD، ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.  ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD.  ﺗﻘﺪﻡ "x.v.Colour" ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ. ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ.  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ DivX ﻭMKV ﻭMP4، ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP MUTE TV SOUND S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP TV HOME VOL TUNING / CH FUNCTION TV/SOURCE 3D SOUND SOUND EFFECT SEARCH SMART HUB A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST BD RECEIVER ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ/ ﻗﻄﻌﺔﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ (ﺑﺤﺠﻢ AAA) HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 10 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 10 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:17 013-06-04 오전 10:09:17| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ11 ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02 ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ USB ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻏﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ/ﻏﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ HIGH-END VACUUM TUBE SOUND 5V 0.5A | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻏﺔﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ. ً ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎ.  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ  ﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ USB، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ.  ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Blu-ray Disc، ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ6 ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" ﺃﻭ "ﺑﺪء" ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ BD/DVD ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﺭ FUNCTION. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ً ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ BD/DVD. ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ HDMI * ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM ﻣﺪﺧﻞ HDMI ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ (ﺑﺼﺮﻱ) HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ASC * ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ FM ANT. 2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﺪﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪﺑﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ 10 ﺳﻢﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ.  ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ AM. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 11 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 11 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:19 013-06-04 오전 10:09:19| 12 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP MUTE TV SOUND S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP TV HOME VOL TUNING / CH FUNCTION TV/SOURCE 3D SOUND SOUND EFFECT SEARCH SMART HUB A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST BD RECEIVER ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ. ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺎ. ً ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ً ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ Disc ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Smart Hub. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ. ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. .(ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ BD/DVDﻭ AUXﻭ HDMI1) ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ" ﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ. ﺎ. ً ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ FM ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 42) ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ/ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ، ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ. ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ: ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ: ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. (ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.) ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .Blu-ray/DVD ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 12 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 12 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:21 013-06-04 오전 10:09:21| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ13 ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02 ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ: AAA 2 1 | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ "+" ﻭ "–" ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.  ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻡﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.  ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 7 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 3. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ. • ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 00. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﻔﻠﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﺠﺮﺏ 15، ﺛﻢ 16، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ. 4. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻭ"ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ" ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ (0 ﺇﻟﻰ 9). | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ، ﺣﺴﺐ ً ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.  ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ .Samsung ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ Admiral (M.Wards) 58 ,57 ,56 15 ,01 A Mark Anam ,06 ,05 ,04 ,03 ,02 ,01 ,12 ,11 ,10 ,09 ,08 ,07 14 ,13 48 ,40 ,18 ,01 AOC Bell & Howell (M.Wards) 81 ,58 ,57 60 ,59 Brocsonic 18 Candle 03 Cetronic 25 ,18 ,03 Citizen 97 Cinema 03 Classic 18 Concerto 46 Contec 15 Coronado 84 ,83 ,82 ,61 ,05 ,03 Craig 62 Croslex 03 Crown 63 ,61 ,59 Curtis Mates 03 CXC Daewoo ,17 ,16 ,15 ,04 ,03 ,02 ,23 ,22 ,21 ,20 ,19 ,18 ,29 ,28 ,27 ,26 ,25 ,24 ,48 ,36 ,35 ,34 ,32 ,30 90 ,59 40 Daytron 03 Dynasty Emerson ,61 ,59 ,46 ,40 ,15 ,03 85 ,84 ,83 ,82 ,64 65 ,19 Fisher 03 Funai 03 Futuretech General (GE) Electric 68 ,67 ,66 ,59 ,56 ,40 ,06 40 Hall Mark 69 ,59 ,50 ,18 ,15 Hitachi 45 Inkel 86 ,67 ,59 ,56 JC Penny 70 JVC 88 ,87 ,61 ,59 KTV 40 ,15 ,03 KEC 15 KMC (LG (Goldstar ,38 ,37 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,01 44 ,43 ,42 ,41 ,40 ,39 18 Luxman (LXI (Sears ,62 ,60 ,59 ,56 ,54 ,19 71 ,65 ,63 Magnavox ,59 ,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15 89 ,72 ,62 ,60 54 ,40 Marantz 54 Matsui 40 ,18 MGA ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ 75 ,60 ,59 ,40 ,18 Mitsubishi/MGA 18 MTC 60 ,59 ,40 ,20 ,19 ,18 NEC 03 Nikei 03 Onking 03 Onwa Panasonic ,66 ,54 ,09 ,08 ,07 ,06 74 ,73 ,67 18 Penney Philco ,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15 ,03 90 ,69 ,62 ,59 Philips ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15 72 ,62 91 ,80 ,66 ,63 Pioneer 59 ,18 ,15 Portland 40 Proton 67 ,66 ,06 Quasar 75 ,61 ,60 ,56 ,48 ,17 Radio Shack RCA/Proscan ,78 ,77 ,76 ,67 ,59 ,18 94 ,93 ,92 19 ,03 Realistic 40 Sampo Samsung ,43 ,40 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,00 ,49 ,48 ,47 ,46 98 ,60 ,59 65 ,61 ,19 Sanyo 61 ,60 ,40 ,03 Scott 19 ,18 ,15 Sears 64 ,57 ,15 Sharp Signature 2000 (M.Wards) 58 ,57 55 ,53 ,52 ,51 ,50 Sony 40 ,03 Soundesign 01 Spectricon 18 SSS Sylvania ,59 ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 62 ,60 96 ,95 ,61 Symphonic 06 Tatung 18 Techwood 25 ,18 ,15 ,03 Teknika 40 ,18 TMK 71 ,63 ,57 ,19 Toshiba 18 Vidtech 69 ,60 ,59 Videch Wards ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15 64 ,60 18 Yamaha 40 York 03 Yupiteru 79 ,58 Zenith 01 Zonda 54 ,03 Dongyang HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 13 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 13 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:22 013-06-04 오전 10:09:22| 14 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺎﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ً ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻃﺮﻗ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ (ﻳﺴﺮﻯ) ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ) ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ) ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(ﻳﻤﻨﻰ) ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻥﻉ ﻉﺍﻡﺕﺱﺍﻝﺍ ﻉﺽﻭﻡ ﺩﻉﺏﻱ ﻥﺃ ﻱﻍﺏﻥﻱ ﻑﺍﻉﺽﺃ 3 ﻯﻝﺇ 2.5 ﻥﻡ ﺓﻑﺍﺱﻡﺏ ﻥﻭﻱﺯﻑﻱﻝﺕﻝﺍ .ﻥﻭﻱﺯﻑﻱﻝﺕﻝﺍ ﺓﺵﺍﺵ ﻡﺝﺡ ﺓﺵﺍﺵ ﻙﻱﺩﻝ ﻥﺍﻙ ﺍﺫﺇ ،ﻝﺍﺙﻡﻝﺍ ﻝﻱﺏﺱ ﻯﻝﻉ ﻉﺍﻡﺕﺱﺍﻝﺍ ﻉﺽﻭﻡ ﺩﺩﺡﻑ ،ﺓﺹﻭﺏ 46 ﻡﺝﺡﺏ ﻥﻉ ﺭﺍﺕﻡﺃ 3.50 ﻯﻝﺇ 2.92 ﺩﻉﺏﺕ ﺓﻑﺍﺱﻡﺏ .ﺓﺵﺍﺵﻝﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ، ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ( ٤٥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ) ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ً ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ. ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ، ﻓﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ً ﻗﻠﻴﻼ. ﻟﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ. ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ 60 ﺇﻟﻰ 90 ﺳﻢ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ، ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ * ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ، ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ً ﺃﺑﺪﺍ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ًﻫﺎﻣﺎ. ﺿﻌﻪﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً ﺃﻣﺮﺍ * ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ. ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ SWA-6000 ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ 2 (20×5) ٍ 16 ﺑﺮﺍﻍ 4 ﺣﻮﺍﻣﻞ 2 ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ 2 ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ 4 ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 14 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 14 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:23 013-06-04 오전 10:09:23| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ15 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ 03 ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ 1. ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ. 2. ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ. 3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻚ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ. 4. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ. 5. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻔﻚ. 6. ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ. 2. ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ: a. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ. b. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ. 3. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ. 4. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻗﻢﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. 5. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ًﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ. 6. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ 4 6 2 1 3 5 ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻖ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 15 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 15 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:27 013-06-04 오전 10:09:27| 16 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ASC IN SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ T L N SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ) ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ) ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍ ﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍ ﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ (ﻳﺴﺮﻯ) ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍ ﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍ ﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ (ﻳﻤﻴﻦ) * ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ SWA-6000 ﻓﻘﻂ. | ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ |  ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ. ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ، ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ (ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ) ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ.  ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﻌﺒﺜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ.  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ (+/ –). ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ (ﻓﺘﺤﺔ) ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.  ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ  ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﻯ (ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ). ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ.  ﺇﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ  ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ.  ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ Dolby Pro Logic II.  ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 2-CH، ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ً ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ًﺟﺪﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ  ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ً ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ.  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ LAN ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetooth ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ 2.4/5.8 ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ً ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ. ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺧﺮﺳﺎﻧﻲ  ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 10 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ًﺎ، ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺫ. ﻓﻮﻻﺫﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡﻣﻄﻠﻘ  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ، ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ" ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ "5""3""1""0" ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ID SET (ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ)" ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ِ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 16 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 16 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:31 013-06-04 오전 10:09:31| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ17 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ 03 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ/ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 LAN AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R HDMI IN HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ R ﺃﺣﻤﺮ W ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI OUT ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI IN ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺇﺫ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOURCE ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ HDMI ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ FUNCTION. ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ، ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ : BT  FM  HDMI2  HDMI1  AUX  D. IN  BD/DVD ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ HDMI : ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ HDMI ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ HDMI ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.  ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ HDMI1 ﺃﻭ HDMI2. ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ : ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ RCA (ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ)، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ.  ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ AUX. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ. ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ : ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ (ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ). ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ (ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ)، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ. .D. IN ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ  | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ً ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.  ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ/ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ  ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 32 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ.  ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ DTS ﻭDolby Digital ﻓﻘﻂ. MPEG audio، ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ، ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 17 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 17 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:32 013-06-04 오전 10:09:32| 18 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ (ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ) ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ Samsung. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ (ISP) ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.  ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ DSL، ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻮﺟﻪﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.  ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ IP ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ IP ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ DHCP، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ DHCP ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.  ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ IP ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.  ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻭ (TKIP/AES) WPA-PSKﻭ (OPEN/SHARED) WEP - (TKIP/AES) WPA2-PSK  ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ IP ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺍﺭ، ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ IP ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.  ﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ Wi-Fi، ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ WEP ﺃﻭ TKIP ﺃﻭ TKIP-AES (WPS2 ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 802.11n. ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ  ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ LAN ﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﺑﺤﻜﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ، ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ (ﺃﺩﺍء ﻧﻘﻄﺔﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ). HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 18 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 18 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:34 013-06-04 오전 10:09:34| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ19 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04 ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ • ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ OSD (ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ) ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ (ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ) ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ً ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ > ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 22) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ Apps ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Screen Mirroring d Samsung ﺣﺴﺎﺏ a 4 3 21 7 6 5 1 ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ : ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻚ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.  2 Apps : ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ/ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ. 3 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ : ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ USB ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ. 4 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ : ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ. 5 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ : ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ. 6 ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. 7 ﺃﺣﻤﺮ (A) : ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. ﺃﺯﺭﻕ (D) : ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ.  ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 1. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►ﺣﺘﻰﻳﺘﻢﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﺬﻱﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ،ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ، ﻓﺴﺘﻄﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 20 ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ 16:9 ﺃﺻﻠﻲ BD Wise ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24Fs) ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ DVD 24Fs ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ Smart ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 2. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 19 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 19 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:38 013-06-04 오전 10:09:38| 20 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP HOME A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST 2 4 3 1 1 ﺯﺭ HOME : ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 2 ﺯﺭ RETURN : ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. 3 ﺯﺭE (ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ) / ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ : • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. 4 ﺯﺭ EXIT : ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ. ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ. ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ. ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ HDMI ﺑﺪﻗﺔ UHD. ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ". | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ، ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ UHD، ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ (ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ). ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ. : 3D Blu-ray ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ  ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 3D. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Smart Hub ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.  ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ : ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 52. BD Wise BD Wise ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ Samsung ﻭﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ BD Wise ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ HDMI ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ BD Wise ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ .Blu-ray/DVD Disc ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ HDMI ﻋﻠﻰ BD Wise ﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ1080p ﻭ1080i ﻭ720p ﻭ576p/480p. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻓﻴﻦ i ﻭp ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ. ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ، ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ. ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24Fs) ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ HDMI ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ 24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ 24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ. • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ 1080p HDMI. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 20 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 20 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:42 013-06-04 오전 10:09:42| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ21 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04 ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ DVD 24Fs ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD ﺇﻟﻰ 24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ HDMI. ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Smart Hub ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ Smart .Hub ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ HDMI ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ (ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ). ﻟﻮﻥ HDMI ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI OUT ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ. ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ.  ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ : ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻦ 6 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 6- ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ 6 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ.  ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ 9 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ. ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ، ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ.  ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﻤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺘﻚ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ً ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ، ﺇﻣﺎ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ HDMI ﻭﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ (ARC). • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 54) ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ Dolby Digital ﻭDolby .Dolby True HDﻭ Digital Plus  ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ : ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ً Dolby TrueHD ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ Dolby TrueHD. ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ Dolby Digitalﻭ Dolby Digital ﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ .Plus  ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.  ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ Dolby ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔﻛﻠﻬﺎ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ً ﻫﺪﻭءﺍ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 21 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 21 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:43 013-06-04 오전 10:09:43| 22 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ، ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ 0 ﻭ300 ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare Wi-Fi، ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ. Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ، ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ .TXT ﺃﻭ .DOC ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ .Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ AllShare ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ، ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ (ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ، ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺑﻪ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ BD-Live ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ BD-Live ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ BD-Live ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. Disc ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ  ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-Live : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ BD-Live.  ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD : ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-Live ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ .Blu-ray Disc ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ Smart ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.  ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ : ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ.  ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ : ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ VOD ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﻪ. ً ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ (VOD) ﻭﻓﻘ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ (PIN) ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ 0000. ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻚ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ  ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ، ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ Smart Hub ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻬﺎ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ Smart Hub ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Smart Hub ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔﻟﻬﺎ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ (PIN) ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ 0000. ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ، ﺇﻟﺦ. • ﻟﻦ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ USB ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ.  ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ USB ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 22 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 22 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:44 013-06-04 오전 10:09:44| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ23 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04 | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ QWERTY ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ USB ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.  ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ: 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. 2. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ. 3. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺍﺕ USB HID ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.  ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .HID  ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ USB ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ.  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ HID ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ، ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ 0000. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.  ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ BD ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ : ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ.  ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ DVD ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ : ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ .PIN  ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ : ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ 4 ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ .USB 2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ5 ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ. ٍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. ﻋﺎﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ.  ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ.  ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ.  ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ : ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ Samsung ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ Anynet+ ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ Anynet+ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ،Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 1) ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI. 2) ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. 3) ﻟﺬﺍ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺴﻢ Anynet+ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 23 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 23 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:44 013-06-04 오전 10:09:44| 24 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ DivX® Video On Demand ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX® VOD ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX® VOD ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ، ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻮﻛﻼء ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ Samsung ﺑﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻧﺸﻂ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 28. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ً ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ. ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔﻓﻘﻂ. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ Samsung ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﻚ. ﺇﻉ. ﺽ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭSmart Hub، ﺛﻢ ﺑﺪء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ (PIN) ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ. ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ (PIN) ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ .0000 ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ (ASC) ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ، ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء 7.1 ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﺘﻚ. ASC IN LAN SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRON FRON IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ. • ﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ. ً ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ • ﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ً ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. 1. ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ASC IN . 2. ﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ. • ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ  ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ  ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ  ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ  ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ  ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ  ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ  ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ RETURN ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 24 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 24 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:45 013-06-04 오전 10:09:45| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ25 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﺜﻞ Smart Hub ﻭBD-LIVE ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ، ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺼﻞ "ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 43 ﺇﻟﻰ 51. ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ، ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔﺇﺫﺍﻣﺎﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺎ ﺃﻡ ً ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ. ﻓﺈﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ً ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ، ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ً IP ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻓﻨﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ LAN ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ. ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 4. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 26. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ❑ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ: 1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ً ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺳﻠﻜﻴًّﺎ، ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. 2. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ❑ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ: 1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ، ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﻓﺸﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 26. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ. XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX MAC ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ 0 .0 .0 .0 IP ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ 0 .0 .0 .0 ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ 0 .0 .0 .0 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺎﺭﺓ ّ ﻋﺒ 0 .0 .0 .0 DNS ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ً ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP. ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ 2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ IP، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ (ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ)، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ E. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4. 6. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ 4 ﻭ5 ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 25 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 25 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:46 013-06-04 오전 10:09:46| 26 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. 7. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ E. ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ً ﻣﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ: - ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ - ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ WPS(PBC) - ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ. ❑ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﻓﻲ " ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ :25 1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ. ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ. ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻠﻮ ﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. si-ap iptime iptime5G KIMING_VTOWER TIAS WPS(PBC) ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓﻣﺮﻭﺭ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ً ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ. ❑ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ :25 1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ. ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. 2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 2، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 6. ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4. 4. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ. • ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ً • ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ ▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. • ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ (ﺃﻭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ)، ﺣﺪﺩ ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. • ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ، ﺣﺪﺩ #123&، ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭE .E. ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ، ﺣﺪﺩ #123&، ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. • ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ً • ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ ▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 26 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 26 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:47 013-06-04 오전 10:09:47| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ27 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04 6. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ IP، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ. 8. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ (ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ)، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 9. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 8. 10. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ 8 ﻭ9 ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. 11. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ. 12. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ً ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 13. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. 14. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. WPS(PBC)  ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ (WPS(PBC ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻓﺈﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺯﺭ (WPS(PBC، ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ: ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﻓﻲ " ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ :25 1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ. ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ (WPS(PBC، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ (WPS(PBC ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ. ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. 4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ WPS، ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ AES. ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ WEP ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ WPS. Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ، ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.  ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ. 2. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 27 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 27 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:48 013-06-04 오전 10:09:48| 28 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ : HTS]F9750W] ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹﺑﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ. AndroidXXXXXXX ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ 5. ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi-Fi: • ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi. • ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ PBC. • ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi 1. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺁﺧﺮ. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ. 2. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻗﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. 3. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ُﻣ ً ﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ. • ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ PBC ﻭ PIN ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ PBC 1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ُﻣ ً ﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ. ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN 1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ PIN. 3. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ. 4. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ُﻣ ً ﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ .Wi-Fi ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ  ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ .TXT ﺃﻭ .DOC ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi. ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ. ً • ﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 4. ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ. 5. ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻪﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.  ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E  ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "UPDATE" (ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 28 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 28 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:49 013-06-04 오전 10:09:49| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ29 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ. 1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ". 2. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. 3. ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ، ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ.". ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ. 4. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ". 5. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. 6. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ". 7. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ، ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ Samsung".  ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻪ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺎ. ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ً ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪﻧﺸﻄ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ. 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.  ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ USB .www.samsung.com ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ .1 2. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ SUPPORT ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ. 3. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ، ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ. ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ. 4. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ُ 5. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ .Firmware Manuals & Downloads 6. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ Firmware ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ. 7. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ZIP ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ. 8. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ Send ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ OK ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. 9. ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺭﺷﻴﻒ zip ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ُﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢﻣﻠﻒ zip. 10. ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ُﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ. 11. ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. 12. ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ > ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ > ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. 13. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ. 14. ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB. ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ". 15. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻘﺒﺲ .USB  ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ Samsung".  ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻪ.  ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻘﺒﺲ USB ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 29 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 29 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:51 013-06-04 오전 10:09:51| 30 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD/CD ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ AllShare ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ DLNA ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Windows 7 ﻭWindows 8 ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻣﻀﻤﻦ (Play To) DLNA ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ، ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ً ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ، ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻚ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ  ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ. 2. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ً ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ. 3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ  ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ. ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. 4. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ6ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ" ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻚ. ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. 2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻢﺗﻢ ﻮ ﻴ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ". ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ Apps ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﻝﻭﻡﺡﻡ USB ﺹﺭﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ. 3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ً ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻭﻓﻘ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ، ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. 4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭE. 5. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭE. 6. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ RETURN ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ Exit ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ. 7. ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ 32 ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB. ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. 2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 30 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 30 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:51 013-06-04 오전 10:09:51| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ31 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ، ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4. 5. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E 6. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 7. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 8. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 32 ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ، ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻗﺮﺹ" ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ DLNA، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ AllShare" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 31. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray، ﺃﻭ DVD، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ. 1. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ً ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ". 2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ - ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ - ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 2. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ .2 3. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ، ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ. 4. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ، ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ◄►▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 6. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ، ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 7. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 32 ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ AllShare ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ DLNA ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ AllShare ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً ﺳﻬﻼ.ﻋﻠﻰ َﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ DLNA ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ً ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤ ُ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ AllShare ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ AllShare. ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ، ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ //:Samsung (http .(link.samsung.com | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ DLNA ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 31 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 31 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:54 013-06-04 오전 10:09:54| 32 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ DLNA ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ AllShare ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ DLNA ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. 2. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ/ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ - ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ - ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ AllShare، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 6. ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ AllShare ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ AllShare، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ. 7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ AllShare ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ (ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ Samsung ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare.) 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ DLNA ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. 2. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ/ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. 3. ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ، ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. 4. ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ Blu-ray ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 5. ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ /Blu-ray DVD، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ. ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 0 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP 1 2 1 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ DISC MENU ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. TITLE MENU ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ. • ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. POPUP MENU ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 32 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 32 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:57 013-06-04 오전 10:09:57| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ33 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05 2 ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ. • ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ6. 6 ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. 5 ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ً ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ. 7 ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ. ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ ، ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ . ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ، ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .7 ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ7، ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ1ﺃﻭ2. ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ1ﺃﻭ 2، ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TOOLS. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3D "ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ" ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3D ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ًﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 3D. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ًﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ. ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﺔ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ.  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ DLNA ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ. ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ. 1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ. 1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. 1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ◄► ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ  ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ .►◄ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 33 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 33 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:01 013-06-04 오전 10:10:01| 34 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ، ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ، ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ. - ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. - ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. - ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ. - ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃ-ﺏ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ. 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃ-ﺏ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ (A). ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ. 3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻒ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ (B). | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ٍ  ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ (B) ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ (A). ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. - ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ : ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ. - ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ : ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ. - ﺃﻓﻼﻡ : ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. - ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ : ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD wise، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ. ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻴﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ" ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ .(ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﺎ 1/3ﻭ 1/2ﻭ 1/1) ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ BONUSVIEW ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ bonusview ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. BONUSVIEW ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ، ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ1 (ﺃﻛﺒﺮ)، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ2 (ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ). ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ، ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.  ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 34 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 34 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:02 013-06-04 오전 10:10:02| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ35 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺩﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 37. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ (ﻣﺜﻞ Picasa ﻭ Facebook ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.  ﻋﺎﺩﺓﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray، ﺃﻭ DVD، ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ. ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP 1 4 5 3 6 2 1 ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ: ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. 2 ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ21: ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. 3 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5 : ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. 4 ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ (ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻘﻂ) ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ. ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ، ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ً ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ. 5 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 7 : ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ 6 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 6: ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 35 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 35 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:03 013-06-04 오전 10:10:03| 36 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ 00:09 00:43 TRACK 001 00:43 TRACK 001 03:56 TRACK 002 04:41 TRACK 003 04:02 TRACK 004 03:43 TRACK 005 03:40 TRACK 006 04:06 TRACK 007 03:52 TRACK 008 03:04 TRACK 009 04:02 TRACK 010 ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ off off ﺎ. ً ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. , 1 ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ. ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ. (ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ) ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ.  ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺩﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ. ﻓﻨﺎﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 37. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ (ﻣﺜﻞ Picasa ﻭFacebook ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ" ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ mp3 ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 37. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 36 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 36 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:04 013-06-04 오전 10:10:04| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ37 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05 ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ .(CD-DA/MP3) 1. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ - ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺃﻭ ﻴ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ، ﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ - ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻢ ﻰ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 00:09 00:43 TRACK 001 00:43 TRACK 001 03:56 TRACK 002 04:41 TRACK 003 04:02 TRACK 004 03:43 TRACK 005 03:40 TRACK 006 04:06 TRACK 007 03:52 TRACK 008 03:04 TRACK 009 04:02 TRACK 010 ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ off off ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ .ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ (CD-DA/MP3) 1. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ▲▼ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ 1. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. 3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. 4. ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. 5. ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. 6. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ُ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 99 ً ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ .(CD-DA) ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑـ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.  ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ، ﻭ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ، ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ. ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ 001. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 37 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 37 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:08 013-06-04 오전 10:10:08| 38 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ 1. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ USB ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. 2. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. E. 3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ. 4. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. 5. ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. 6. ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. 7. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ. 8. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ. 9. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ. 10. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ". ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 11. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ DTS.  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ.  ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ mp3 ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 192 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭ  ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ. - ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ E. ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ. - ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ،ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ً ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ! ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ Bluetooth؟ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ: - ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ/ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. - ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ، ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ. - ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ LAN ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ. • ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺳﺎءﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ّﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 10 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ. ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ. ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ. ً ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼ • ً ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 38 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 38 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:10 013-06-04 오전 10:10:10| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ39 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ FUNCTION ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ BT. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. • ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ "HTS]Fxxxx]" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ. ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ • ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. 5. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ SBC ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ (ﺣﺘﻰ 237 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 48 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ)، ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ SBC ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ (328 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 44.1 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ).  ﻣﻴﺰﺓ AVRCP ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ. ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ، ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ُ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ.  ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ A2DP.  ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ.  ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ. - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. - ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ، ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ. - ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ LAN ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ً ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴًّﺎ. ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ً ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ • ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﻌﺮﺽ DISCONNECTED ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ. ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ( ) ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ BT ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ. • ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ، ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. (ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ً ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.) | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 10 ﻣﺘﺮ. ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ّ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.  ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ (ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ DVD، ﺃﻭ USB، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ" ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TOOLS. ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ / ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺎ. ً ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ  ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ.  ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. (ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ) HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 39 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 39 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:11 013-06-04 오전 10:10:11| 40 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. (ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ.) ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ  ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ - ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ : ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ. - ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ : ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ. - ﺃﻓﻼﻡ : ﻫﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ. - ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ : ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.  ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ : ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ. ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.  ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. ﻭﻟﻜﻦ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ MP3 ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ.  ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ PG ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺼﻨﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ً ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ. ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 37. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Picasa، Facebook) ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ، ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 40 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 40 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:12 013-06-04 오전 10:10:12| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ41 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05 ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ FUNCTION ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ FM. 2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. • ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ 1: ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNING/CH (,.) ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. - ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. • ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ: ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNING/CH (,.) ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. • ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ: ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNING/CH (,.) ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ/ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ MO/ST. • ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ، ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ .MONOﻭ STEREO • ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ MONO ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ٍﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ. ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ FM 89.10 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ FUNCTION ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ FM. .<89.10> ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ (.,) TUNING/CH ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .2 3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORY. • ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 4. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORY ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORYﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ. • ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORY، ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. 5. ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ،ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 2 ﺇﻟﻰ 4. ً • ﺎ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﻄﺔﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ TUNING/CH (,.) ﺎ. ً ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ SOUND ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ EFFECT ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ SOUND EFFECT. 2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ: DSPﺃﻭ .SFE ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ Dolby Pro Logic II 3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ❑ DSP (ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ)  Football  Power Bass  MP3 Enhancer ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ • MP3 Enhancer : ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ mp3). ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ MP3 (24 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ، 8 ﺑﺖ) ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ (44.1 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ، 16 ﺑﺖ). • Power Bass : ﻳﺰﻳﺪﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﻡ. • Football : ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺩ. ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ،ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ، ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. Dolby Pro Logic II ❑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ  Pro Logic  Matrix  ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ  ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ  ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ • ﺃﻓﻼﻡ : ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. • ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ : ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ. • ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ : ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ. • Matrix : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ. • Pro Logic : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ 5.1 ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ. - ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ (ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ) ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﺑﺎﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 41 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 41 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:13 013-06-04 오전 10:10:13| 42 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ❑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ SFE ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻤﻔﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻄﻦ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ  (1 ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻬﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺗﺴﻼﻓﺎ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ  (2 ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ  B ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻴﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ  ﻣﺪﺭﺝ (ﺭﻭﻙ)  ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ًﺻﻮﺗﺎ • ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻤﻔﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻄﻦ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ 1) : ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ً ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ. ًﺻﻮﺗﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ • ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻬﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺗﺴﻼﻓﺎ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ 2) : ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ً ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ، ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﻮﺓﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺔ 1. • ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ B : ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺯ. • ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻴﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ : ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺴﺔﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ. • ﻣﺪﺭﺝ (ﺭﻭﻙ) : ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻙ. • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. 3D ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ SOUND ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ. ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ  ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ  ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ FM. ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ TV SOUND ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOUND. 1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ HDMI ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 17) 2. ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ On .Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOUND ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. 4. ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOUND، ﻳﻮﻣﺾ TV SOUND ON/OFF (ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ) ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ D. IN. - TV SOUND ON : ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. - TV SOUND OFF : ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ (ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ) ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ +Anynet. ❑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ: 1) ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. 2) ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ USB ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. ❑ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ +Anynet ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ (HDMI-CEC) ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ +Anynet (HDMI-CEC) O O ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ X O ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡﻣﻦ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ X O HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 42 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 42 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:14 013-06-04 오전 10:10:14| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ43 ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ً ﺃﻭﻻ: ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ 1. ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 18) 2. ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 25 ﺇﻟﻰ 27) ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung. ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: 1. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A). ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. 3. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. 5. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 6. ﻭﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻲ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ 7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻲ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ. ﻓﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺣﻘﻞ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺣﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ. ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ.  ﻻﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﺍء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Smart Hub، ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ Smart Hub ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ Apps، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ Apps، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4. 2. ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ Smart Hub ﻟﻠﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، Smart Hub ﺃﻡ ﻻ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻨﻮﺩ 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart Hub ﻭﻧﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ. 4. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart Hub ﻭﻧﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ، ﻳﻠﺰﻡﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart Hub ﻭﻧﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ، ٍﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ .Smart Hub 5. ّﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ. 6. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ، ّﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ. 7. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ. 8. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ. 9. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ، ّﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ، ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart TV ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. 10. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 43 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 43 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:17 013-06-04 오전 10:10:17| 44 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ، ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻭ ﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺰ ﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻯ 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭﻫﺎ. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3، ﻭﻳﻠﺰﻡ  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ Samsung، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung. ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Samsung TV ﺏﻱﻭﻝﺍ ﺡﻑﺹﺕﻡ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 1 5 4 3 2 ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ Appsﻱ Apps 2 1 3 4 ﺍﻝﺕﻁﺏﻱﻕﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺕﻁﺏﻱﻕﺍﺕ 1 ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ : ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ Samsung. ﻳﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ. 2 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ : ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ. 3 Appsﻱ : ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ. 4 ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 44 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 44 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:19 013-06-04 오전 10:10:19| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ45 ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06 ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ .Samsung Apps 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ Samsung Apps، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ Samsung Apps. ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺎ ﺃﻭ ً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻳﻤﻴﻨ ً ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ً ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺎ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻲ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﺍء، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung ﻭﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A)ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.  ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4. 3. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ٍ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN. ﻭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. 4. ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 5. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺌﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ، ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ، ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ. 6. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ. 7. ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩﻩ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 8. ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ 2 ﻭ3. ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 1. ﺣﺪﺩ Apps ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ WebBrowser XX.XKB :ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ | X.XXX :ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ | XXXXX :ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ 1 /23 ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ... ﻋﺮﺽ : ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ 109.48 MB / 629.43 MB Samsung Apps WebBrowser ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ: • ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ً ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ. ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ • ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. • ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ Apps، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ً ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ 4. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ، ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 45 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 45 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:25 013-06-04 오전 10:10:25| 46 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻗﻔﻞ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ. ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ 0000. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. 4. ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ،ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ. 5. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E 6. ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 7. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 8. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ. ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ، ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ. 4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻪﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ . ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻪﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ (>، <، ^، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ. 4. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E 5. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ. ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. 3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. 5. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ 6. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 46 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 46 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:31 013-06-04 오전 10:10:31| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ47 ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06 ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ. 3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ 4. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ. 5. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ً ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍ، ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 6. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺪﺩ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ. .E 7. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .8 .E 9. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺇﻉ. ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻉ. ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ. 3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. 4. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ 6. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ. 7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ .E ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ٍﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء. ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ، ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﻟﺬﺍ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺭﻏﺒﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ، ﻓﺴﻴﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ. 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ 4. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ. 5. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 6. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ، ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ 7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 7. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺛﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﻭﺗﺤﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ. 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 47 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 47 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:32 013-06-04 오전 10:10:32| 48 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. 4. ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. 5. ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺣﺪﺩﻩ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 6. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ .7 ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻛﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﻭﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ. ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ) ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. 1. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻣﻨﺘﺞ Blu-ray ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ (D) ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Screen Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ). 2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ AllShare Cast ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. 3. ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢﻣﻨﺘﺞ Blu-ray ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩﻩ. ٍﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ 4. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ Android_92gb...)، ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. 5. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ)، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ، ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻚ.  ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ AllShare Cast. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ. ً ﺑﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻓﻘ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ، ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ.  ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ). ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ) ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ HDMI ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ BD Wise - ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ BD Wise ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ - ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.  ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Java.  ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.  ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ (ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ.  ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ActiveX ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.  ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻫﻤﺎ؛ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ، ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺎ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ً ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﺸﻄ ﺎ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ً ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﺸﻄ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ. ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻟﻜﻨﻪﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: 1. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ. ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ 2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺎﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ً ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﻧﺸﻄ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 48 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 48 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:33 013-06-04 오전 10:10:33| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ49 ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06 ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ، ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻋﻠﻰ ًﻋﺪﺩﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ. ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ً ﺑﺪءﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ، 1 http://www.samsung.com 100% 1 • : ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. • : ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • : ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ، ً ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ. ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. • : ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ : • http://www.samsung.com ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. • : ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • : ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ. • : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ. • %100 : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻨﺴﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. • : ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ PIP (ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ). • : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ. • : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 50. • : ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ http://www.samsung.com ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﻰ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺮ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻮ ﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. http://www.samsung.com Caps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  q w e r t y u i o p ^ *  123#& a s d f g h j k l ~ @ ! z x c v b n m , . ? -  ENG www. .com /  4  ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ. ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ 100% ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: 1. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ. 2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. 3. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Caps ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Caps ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 4. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ #123& ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ  ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 6. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 7. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 49 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 49 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:34 013-06-04 오전 10:10:34| 50 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ. ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪﻟﻠﺘﻮ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭ ﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻢ ﻰ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. http://www.samsung.com ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽﺧﺎﺹ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ 100% /ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ. ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ، ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﻘﺔﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ، ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ، ﻭﻫﻮ 0000، ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.  ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ : ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ.  ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ : ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ.  ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ : ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ.  ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ : ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ URL ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ، ً ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ. ًﺎ، ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻨ ّ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﻣﻤﻜ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ URL ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" (ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ) ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ URL ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩﻩﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺎ. ً ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﻣﻤﻜﻨ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 50 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 50 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:37 013-06-04 오전 10:10:37| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ51 ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06 ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ  ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ.  ﺣﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ : ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.  ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ URL ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺠﺒﻬﺎ.  ﻋﺎﻡ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ (ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ)، ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.  ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.  ﻣﺆﺷﺮ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ.  ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ : ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﺗﻘﺪﻡﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ | ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ  ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ، ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ. ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: 1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung. 2. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ Myﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 4. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 6. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 7. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 8. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. BD-LIVE™ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ. ِﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ USB ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ .1 ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ 1 ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ .BD-LIVE 2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ BD-Live، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 5. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 6. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. 8. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE. 9. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺔﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ً ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ، ﻭﻓﻘ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 51 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 51 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:39 013-06-04 오전 10:10:39| 52 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ HDMI OUT ً • ﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI، ﻭﻓﻘ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. • ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ HDMI ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ 3D. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ HDMI ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D • ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ 3D، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻣﺮﺓ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ 3D. ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ 3D. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ 3D ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ 3D، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Blu-ray. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Blu-ray. ً • ﺎ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻓﻘ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ. ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ً • ﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ، ﻭﻓﻘ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ 16:9 ﺃﺻﻠﻲ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ 4:3 (ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ). (ﻓﻘﻂ Samsung ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ) BD Wise • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ BD Wise، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ، ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ BD Wise ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ BD Wise ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD Wise، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD Wise. • ﻭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD Wise ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ، ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ BD Wise ﻓﻲ ٍﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ، ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ. • ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ HDMI (ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ (Dolby Digital ﺃﻭ DTS)، ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ PCM. • ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ. • ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ. • ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ (ﻳﻤﻴﻦ/ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ) ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ HDMI ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭHDMI ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. • ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ MPEG، ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ PCM ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ (PCM ﺃﻭ ﺩﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ). • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ BD-Live • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ .BD-LIVE Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ً • ﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI، ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. • ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ .CEC • ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ +Anynet، ﻓﺴﻴﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ +Anynet. ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻴﺌﺔﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ FAT (ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ DOS 8.3). ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ USB 2.0 ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔﻗﺮﺍءﺓ/ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. • ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ً • ﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD، ﻭﻓﻘ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 52 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 52 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:40 013-06-04 오전 10:10:40| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ53 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07 DivX® Video On Demand ﺧﺪﻣﺔ • ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ DivX(R) VOD، ."http://vod.divx.com" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ • ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ VOL + ﻭ - . ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. • ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 3 ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ .SFEﻭ DSP، Dolby Pro Logic ll • ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ (ﻣﺜﻞ AUX، D.IN)، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ. ﺻﻮﺕ HDMI • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ HDMI ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ (Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ. • ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ (ARC) ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ARC. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ • ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺑﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ًﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ • ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ◄► ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺴﻢ BONUSVIEW ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ .BONUSVIEW • ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ PCM ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ Dolby Digital ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ً • ﺎ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ Blu-ray / DVD، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻘ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ DISC MENU. • ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray .Disc/DVD • ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ BONUSVIEW ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ .BONUSVIEW • ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. • ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ JPEG • ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ PG ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ Dolby Pro Logic II ﻭﺿﻊ ِﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،Dolby Pro Logic II ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ • ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺴﻲ AUDIO INPUT (ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻴﻦ (ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ)، ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TOOLS (ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ) ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ BD Wise ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ BD Wise ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. • ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ MP3 ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 53 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 53 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:41 013-06-04 오전 10:10:41| 54 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ PCM ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ Bitstream (ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ) Bitstream (DTS ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ) Bitstream ﻣﻌﺎﺩ Dolby D) ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ) ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ HDMI ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS PCM PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ PCM Dolby Digital ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ * Dolby Digital ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital PCM 5.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ Dolby Digital ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ * Dolby Digital Plus ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital Plus PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ Dolby Digital ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ * Dolby TrueHD ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby TrueHD PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ Dolby Digital ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ * ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS DTS PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ DTS Dolby Digital ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ * ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ DTS-HD ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 7.1 DTS-HD ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ * ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 7.1 ﺑﺪﻗﺔ DTS-HD DTS-HD ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ * ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital PCM 5.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ DTS DTS DTS PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ DTS ﺩﻗﺔﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Blu-ray ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ BONUSVIEW ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ. ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺚ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ. ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ. ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺚ ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ DTS. ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺚ ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ Dolby Digital ﺃﻭ .PCM ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ  ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "Dolby D ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ". PCM ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ: - ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ : ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. - ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW : ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺜﻞ. - ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ : ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ. ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ .Blu-ray HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 54 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 54 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:41 013-06-04 오전 10:10:41| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ55 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07 ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ/ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ Blu-ray ﺩﻗﺔﻗﺮﺹ 1080p@60F BD Wise ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ 2160p@24F 2160p@24F ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ : UHD ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 1080p@24F 1080p@24F ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ : UHD ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ (24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ) 1080p@24F 1080p@24F * 1080p ﻭ1080i ﻓﻘﻂ 1080p@60F 1080p@60F 1080p 1080i 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 720p 576p/480p 576p/480p 576p/480p ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ DVD ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ 480i BD Wise ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 2160p@24F ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 1080p@24F ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ DVD ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ) 1080p@24F * 1080p ﻭ1080i ﻓﻘﻂ 1080p@60F 1080p 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 576p/480p 576p/480p | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﻧﻌﻢ"، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ 15 ٍ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ؟". ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ "ﻧﻌﻢ"، ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ 15 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺛﻮﺍﻥ. ٍ  ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ، ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 5 ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ > ﻋﺮﺽ > ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ، ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ (ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ) ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. ً ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺍ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ).  ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 55 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 55 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:42 013-06-04 오전 10:10:42| 56 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ، ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics. ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ/ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ؟ • ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray/DVD. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray/DVD ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD-ROM ﻭDVD-ROM ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ. ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ً ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ؟ ً ﻗﺮﺻﺎ • ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ • ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ. ٌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ. • ﻻ ﺗ • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ؟ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ. • ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ .Dolby Digital 7.1 CH • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "Dolby Digital 7.1 CH" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ؟ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ Dolby Digital 7.1 CH ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ 7.1. • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dolby Digital 7.1-CH ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ. • ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (TV/BD) ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ (TV ﺃﻭ BD) ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ • ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. • ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ. • ﻫﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ • ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ؟ • ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺭﺩﻱء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻼﻥ. • ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ. ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﻫﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 56 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 56 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:43 013-06-04 오전 10:10:43| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ57 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07 ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ/ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ. • ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD 16:9 ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 16:9 ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ 4:3 ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ 4:3 ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD discs 4:3 ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ 4:3 ﻓﻘﻂ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻏﻼﻑ Blu-ray Disc، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ. • ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ. (ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ.) • ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ٍ • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STANDBY ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ (ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ). - ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ RESET (ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ) ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ. ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ. . • ٍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ INIT ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. - ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ RESET (ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ) ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ. ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ. • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ • ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ، ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺗﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ/ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ^ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ D. IN ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AUX، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ "ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ: ً ﻗﻴﻮﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ. Blu-ray/DVD ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ .1 2. ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ) 3. ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ. 4. ﺗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، 1080p)، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ٍ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ. ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ HDMI ﺑﺪﻗﺔ 576p/480p/720p/1080i/1080p. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ (HDCP). HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 57 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 57 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:44 013-06-04 오전 10:10:44| 58 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ/ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ AllShare، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. • ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ AllShare ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. • ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ DLNA ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ AllShare ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ. ً ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺍ، ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ IP ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ. ً ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ . • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ًﺎ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ BD-LIVE ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ -BD .LIVE ً • ﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻧﺸﻄ • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻡ ﻻ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ 1 ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 52) • ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ BD-Live ﻋﻠﻰ (ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ (ﻟﻠﻜﻞ). • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE، ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ 1 ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 52) | ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |  ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 58 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 58 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:45 013-06-04 오전 10:10:45| ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ59 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07 ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ 3.30 ﻛﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 430.00 ﻣﻠﻢ (ﻋﺮﺽ) × 55.00 ﻣﻠﻢ (ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ) × 314.50 ﻣﻠﻢ (ﻋﻤﻖ) ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ C+5° ﺇﻟﻰ C°+35 ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ 10 % ﺇﻟﻰ 75 % ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ FM ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ/ﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء 55 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ 12 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ 0.5 % HDMI ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 2160pﻭ1080pﻭ 1080iﻭ 720pﻭ 576p/480p : 2D 1080pﻭ 720p : 3D ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ Bitstream ﻭﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ × 3)2 ﺃﻭﻡ) ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ × 3)2 ﺃﻭﻡ) ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ 170 ﻭﺍﻁ (3 ﺃﻭﻡ) ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ × 3)2 ﺃﻭﻡ) ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 170 ﻭﺍﻁ (3 ﺃﻭﻡ) ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ : ﻣﻦ 20 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ (3± ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ) ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ : ﻣﻦ 20 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ (4± ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ) ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء 70 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ 60 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ AUX) 500) ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 59 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 59 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:46 013-06-04 오전 10:10:46| 60 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ 10 ﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. • ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ. • ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ. • ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ. • ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. SWA-6000 ❑ 1.1 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ (ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ) ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻠﻢ 152.4 × 228.6 × 76.2 ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ C+5° ﺇﻟﻰ C°+35 ﻣﻦ 10 % ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ 75 % 165 ﻭﺍﺕ x 2 ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻦ 20 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ 65 ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ (ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺓ 7.1) ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ (ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ : ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ) ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ (ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ) (ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ : ﻣﻠﻢ) ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻺﺧﺎﻝ ّ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ 7.65 90.0 × 1302.0 × 70.0 (ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ: 250 × 250) 87 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ/ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ 330 ﻭﺍﻁ ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ 140 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ 3 ﺃﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ 6.82 90.0 × 1252.0 × 70.0 (ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ: 250 × 250) ﻣﺠﺴﻤﺔ 0.98 360 × 70.0 × 65.9 170 ﻭﺍﻁ 340 ﻭﺍﻁ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ 6.33 205.6 × 390.6 × 350.6 /ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ 88 ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ 40 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 160 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 60 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 60 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:46 013-06-04 오전 10:10:46HT-F9750W Merci d'avoir acheté ce produit Samsung. Pour obtenir notre service complet, veuillez enregistrer votre produit sur www.samsung.com/register Système Home Entertainment Blu-ray™ 7.1 canaux Manuel d'utilisation imaginez les possibilités HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 1 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 1 22013-06-04 오전 10:05:57 013-06-04 오전 10:05:57| 2 Français Consignes de Sécurité Avertissement POUR RÉDUIRE LES RISQUES D’ÉLECTROCUTION, NE RETIREZ JAMAIS LE CAPOT (NI L’ARRIÈRE). LES PIÈCES DE CE PRODUIT NE SONT PAS RÉPARABLES PAR L’UTILISATEUR. VEUILLEZ CONTACTER UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIÉ POUR TOUTE RÉPARATION. ATTENTION RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION NE PAS OUVRIR Ce symbole indique la présence d’une tension dangereuse dans l’appareil, présentant un risque d’électrocution ou de blessures. ATTENTION : POUR ÉVITER TOUT RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION, LA BROCHE LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DOIT ÊTRE TOTALEMENT INSÉRÉE DANS LE TROU PLUS LARGE. Ce symbole indique les directives importantes qui accompagnent le produit. AVERTISSEMENT • Afin de réduire tout risque d’incendie ou d’électrocution, n’exposez jamais cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité. ATTENTION • Évitez toute projection d’eau sur l’appareil et ne posez jamais d’objet contenant un liquide dessus (ex : un vase). • La fiche permet de débrancher l’appareil et doit toujours être facilement accessible. • Cet appareil doit toujours être branché à une prise de courant alternatif reliée à la terre. • Pour débrancher l'appareil, il convient de retirer la fiche de la prise murale, il faut donc que cette dernière soit facilement accessible. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1 PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 Le lecteur de disque compact est homologué comme produit LASER DE CLASSE 1. L'utilisation des commandes, les réglages ou l'exécution de procédures autres que celles spécifiées ci-dessus peuvent conduire à une exposition à des radiations dangereuses. ATTENTION DES RAYONS LASER INVISIBLES SONT PRÉSENTS LORSQUE L'APPAREIL EST OUVERT OU QUE LES DISPOSITIFS DE VERROUILLAGE SONT CIRCONVENUS. ÉVITEZ L'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 2 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 2 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:03 013-06-04 오전 10:06:03Français 3| 01 Consignes de Sécurité Rangement et gestion des disques • Comment tenir le disque - Des empreintes digitales ou des rayures sur la surface d'un disque peuvent altérer la qualité du son et de l’image ou provoquer des sauts. - Évitez de toucher la surface du disque sur laquelle les données ont été enregistrées. - Tenez le disque par les bords afin de ne pas laisser d’empreintes sur sa surface. - Ne collez pas de papier ou d’adhésif sur le disque. • Nettoyage des disques - En cas d’empreintes ou de saleté sur un disque, nettoyez-le à l'aide d'eau additionnée de détergent doux et d’un chiffon doux. - Lors de son nettoyage, essuyez le disque du centre vers le bord. - Rangement des disques  N’exposez pas le disque à la lumière directe du soleil.  Stockez-le dans un endroit frais et aéré.  Rangez-le dans une pochette propre et verticalement. Précautions de manipulation • Évitez toute projection d’eau sur l’appareil. Ne posez jamais d’objet contenant un liquide (ex : un vase) dessus. • Pour éteindre complètement l'appareil, vous devez retirer le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale. Par conséquent, le cordon d'alimentation doit être facilement accessible à tout moment. • Ne tenez pas le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains mouillées. Vous risquez de vous exposer à un choc électrique. • Ne branchez pas plusieurs appareils électriques sur une prise murale. Surcharger une prise murale peut provoquer une surchauffe et donc un incendie. • Entretien du meuble - Avant de brancher un composant sur cet appareil, assurez-vous que celui-ci est hors tension. - Si vous déplacez soudainement l'appareil d'un endroit froid à un endroit chaud, de la condensation pourra se former sur les pièces et la lentille, et occasionner des problèmes de lecture. Dans pareil cas, débranchez l'appareil et patientez deux heures avant de le rebrancher sur la prise d’alimentation. Insérez ensuite le disque et essayez à nouveau de le lire. • Si vous entendez un bruit inhabituel ou décelez un dégagement anormal de fumée ou une odeur suspecte, coupez immédiatement l’alimentation et débranchez la fiche électrique de la prise murale. Puis contactez le service après-vente le plus proche pour obtenir de l’aide. N’utilisez plus l'appareil. Utiliser l'appareil en l’état peut provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique. Licence Fabriqué sous licence par Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic et le symbole représentant deux D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories. Fabriqué sous licence des brevets américains n° 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535, 6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567, 7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 et 7,548,853. DTS, DTS-HD, le Symbole, et DTS ou DTS-HD et le Symbole ensemble sont des marques déposées et DTS Neo:Fusion est une marque déposée de DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. Tous droits réservés. À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX : DivX® est un format vidéo numérique créé par la société DivX, LLC, filiale de Rovi Corporation. Ceci est un appareil DivX Certified® qui prend en charge la lecture des vidéos DivX. Pour obtenir les détails et en savoir plus sur les outils logiciels qui vous permettent de convertir vos fichiers au format vidéo DivX, consultez le site Web à l’adresse suivante : divx.com. À PROPOS DU FORMAT VIDÉO À LA DEMANDE DIVX : Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré afin de servir à visionner des films vidéo à la demande (VOD) au format DivX achetés dans le commerce. Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, identifiez l’emplacement de la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Allez sur le site Web vod.divx.com pour obtenir de plus amples informations sur la procédure d’enregistrement. Les appareils DivX Certified® peuvent lire des vidéos DivX® dans une résolution HD de 1080p, y compris les programmes d’appel. DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos qui leur sont associés sont des marques déposées de Rovi Corporation ou de ses filiales et font l’objet d’une licence. Cette norme est couverte par un ou plusieurs des brevets américains suivants : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 3 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 3 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:04 013-06-04 오전 10:06:04| 4 Français Consignes de Sécurité Les termes HDMI et HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, et le logo HDMI sont des marques de commerce ou des marques déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ou ses filiales. D'autres noms mentionnés peuvent être des marques de commerce de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Ce produit intègre la technique de protection contre la copie applicable aux brevets américains ainsi que d’autres droits de propriété intellectuelle de Rovi Corporation. Il est interdit de tenter de démonter l’appareil et d’en étudier le fonctionnement en vue de le reproduire. Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ et les logos y afférents sont des marques de commerce de Blu-ray Disc Association. Cet appareil utilise la technologie Cinavia qui limite l'utilisation de copies non autorisées de certains films et vidéos ainsi que leurs bandes son disponibles dans le commerce. Lorsqu'une utilisation interdite d'une copie non autorisée est détectée, un message s'affiche et la lecture ou la copie est interrompue. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations sur la technologie Cinavia, veuillez consulter le « Cinavia Online Consumer Information Centre » (Centre d'informations consommateur en ligne Cinavia) à l'adresse http:// www.cinavia.com. Pour toute demande d'informations complémentaires par courrier concernant Cinavia, envoyez une carte postale comportant votre adresse postale à : Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, États-Unis. Cet appareil intègre une technologie brevetée sous licence de Verance Corporation et qui est protégée par le brevet américain 7 369 677 ainsi que par d'autres brevets américains et internationaux accordés et en attente ainsi que par des droits d'auteur et une protection commerciale confidentielle pour certains aspects de cette technologie. Cinavia est une marque de commerce de Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Tous droits réservés par Verance. Il est interdit de tenter de démonter l’appareil et d’en étudier le fonctionnement en vue de le reproduire. - Avis de licence libre En cas d'utilisation de logiciels libres, les licences libres sont disponibles dans le menu du produit. Utilisation de la fonction 3D CONSIGNES IMPORTANTES RELATIVES À LA SANTÉ ET LA SÉCURITÉ EN CAS DE VISIONNAGE D'IMAGES 3D. Lisez attentivement les consignes de sécurité avant d'utiliser la fonction 3D. • Certains utilisateurs peuvent ressentir une gêne en visionnant des images de télévision en 3D, comme par exemple des vertiges, des nausées ou des maux de tête. Dès que vous ressentez l'un de ces symptômes, arrêtez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D, retirez les lunettes Active 3D et essayez de vous reposer. • Le visionnage d'images en 3D sur une période de temps prolongée peut occasionner une fatigue oculaire. Dès que vous ressentez une fatigue oculaire, cessez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D, retirez les lunettes Active 3D et essayez de vous reposer. • Des enfants utilisant la fonction 3D doivent être constamment surveillés par un adulte responsable. Au moindre signalement de fatigue visuelle, mal de tête, vertige ou nausée, interrompez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D par les enfants, et laissez-les se reposer. • N'utilisez pas les lunettes Active 3D à d'autres fins (comme lunettes de vue, de soleil ou de protection, par exemple). • N'utilisez pas la fonction 3D ou les lunettes Active 3D en marchant ou en bougeant. En utilisant la fonction 3D ou en portant des lunettes Active 3D en cours de marche ou de mouvement, vous risquez de vous cogner contre des objets, de trébucher et/ou de tomber, et de vous blesser gravement. • Pour bénéficier du visionnage de contenus en 3D, connectez un appareil 3D (récepteur AV ou téléviseur compatible 3D) au port de sortie SORTIE HDMI de l'appareil à l'aide d'un câble HDMI haut débit. Veillez à porter des lunettes 3D avant de visionner le contenu 3D. • Le produit émet des signaux 3D uniquement via le câble HDMI connecté au port de sortie HDMI OUT. • La résolution de l'image vidéo en mode de lecture 3D étant déterminée par la définition de l'image vidéo 3D d'origine, vous ne pourrez pas modifier la résolution de l'image selon vos préférences. • Des fonctions telles que BD Wise, l'adaptation de la taille de l'écran ou le réglage de la résolution peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement en mode de lecture 3D. • Il vous faut obligatoirement utiliser un câble HDMI haut débit pour garantir une émission appropriée du signal 3D. • Lorsque vous visionnez des images en 3D, assurezvous de vous tenir éloigné du téléviseur à une distance équivalente à au moins trois fois la taille de l'écran. Par exemple, si vous avez un écran 46 pouces, vous devrez rester à une distance de 3,5 mètres (138 pouces) du téléviseur. • Positionnez l'écran à hauteur des yeux pour mieux apprécier l'image en 3D. • Lorsque l'appareil est connecté à plusieurs appareils 3D, l'effet 3D peut ne pas fonctionner correctement. • Ce lecteur ne convertit pas de contenus 2D en contenus 3D. • « Blu-ray 3D » et le logo « Blu-ray 3D » sont des marques de commerce de Blu-ray Disc Association. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 4 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 4 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:05 013-06-04 오전 10:06:05Français 5| 01 Consignes de Sécurité Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. Tous droits réservés ; il est interdit de reproduire ou de copier tout ou partie de ce manuel d'utilisation sans l'accord préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. Sommaire CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ 2 Avertissement 3 Rangement et gestion des disques 3 Précautions de manipulation 3 Licence 4 Utilisation de la fonction 3D 5 Copyright MISE EN ROUTE 6 Compatibilité des disques et des formats 7 Logos des disques pouvant être lus sur cet appareil 10 Accessoires 11 Panneau avant 11 Panneau arrière 12 Télécommande BRANCHEMENTS 14 Connexion des enceintes 17 Connexion de périphériques externes/du téléviseur 18 Connexion à un routeur réseau PARAMÈTRES 19 Procédure de réglage des paramètres initiaux 19 L’écran Accueil 19 Accéder à l’écran Paramètres 20 Fonctions du menu Paramètres 24 Etalonnage automatique du son 25 Réseaux et Internet 28 Mise à niveau du logiciel MEDIA PLAY 30 L’écran Tout le contenu 30 Lecture de disques disponibles dans le commerce 30 Lecture de fichiers sur un périphérique USB 31 Lecture d’un disque dont le contenu est enregistré par l’utilisateur 31 Utilisation de la fonction Réseau AllShare 32 Contrôle de la lecture Vidéo 35 Contrôle de la lecture de Musique 39 Visionnage des photos 40 Ecouter la radio 41 Utilisation des touches de contrôle d’effets spéciaux de la télécommande SERVICES RÉSEAU 43 Connexion à votre compte Samsung 43 Avant d’utiliser Films et Émissions de télévision ou Applications 44 Utilisation de Films et Émissions de télévision 44 Utilisation de Applications 48 Screen Mirroring 48 Utilisation de Navigateur Web 51 Lier vos comptes de service Internet à l’appareil 51 BD-LIVE™ ANNEXES 52 Informations complémentaires 56 Dépannage 59 Caractéristiques techniques  Les figures et les illustrations du présent Manuel d'utilisation sont fournies à titre de référence uniquement et peuvent différer de l'apparence du produit réel.  Des frais supplémentaires pourront vous être facturés dans les cas suivants : a. vous demandez l'intervention d'un ingénieur mais il s'avère que l'appareil ne présente aucune anomalie (par ex. vous n'avez pas lu ce Manuel d'utilisation). b. vous portez l'unité à un centre de réparation mais il s'avère que celle-ci ne présente aucune défaillance (par ex. vous n'avez pas lu ce Manuel d'utilisation).  Le montant de ces frais administratifs vous sera notifié avant que tout travail ou toute visite à votre domicile ne soit effectué(e). HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 5 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 5 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:06 013-06-04 오전 10:06:06| 6 Français Mise en Route Compatibilité des disques et des formats Types de disques et contenus pouvant être lus sur cet appareil Support Type de disque Détails VIDÉO Disque Blu-ray Disque Blu-ray 3D Disque BD-ROM ou BD-RE/-R disc enregistré au format BD-RE. DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DVD-VIDEO, disques DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R enregistrés qui ont été enregistrés et finalisés, ou un support de stockage USB possédant des contenus DivX, MKV, MP4. MUSIQUE CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R Musique enregistrée sur des disques CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R ou un support de stockage USB possédant des contenus MP3 ou WMA. PHOTO CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R Photos enregistrées sur des disques CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R ou un support de stockage USB possédant des contenus JPEG. | REMARQUE |  Selon le type de disque ou les conditions d'enregistrement, il se peut que certains disques CD-RW/-R et DVD-R ne puissent pas être lus sur cet appareil.  Si un disque DVD-RW/-R n'a pas été enregistré correctement au format vidéo DVD, il ne pourra pas être lu.  Votre appareil ne lit pas les contenus ayant été enregistrés sur un disque DVD-R selon un débit binaire dépassant les 10 Mbps.  Il ne lit pas les contenus ayant été enregistrés sur un disque BD-R ou un périphérique USB selon un débit binaire dépassant les 30 Mbps.  La lecture peut être inopérante sur certains types de disque ou lorsque vous effectuez des opérations spécifiques telles que les changements d'angle ou le réglage du format de l'image. Des informations détaillées concernant le disque sont inscrites sur le boîtier. Consultez-les si nécessaire.  Lors de la lecture d'un titre BD-J, il se peut que le chargement prenne plus de temps que pour un titre normal et que certaines fonctions s'exécutent plus lentement que d'habitude. Types de disques ne pouvant pas être lus sur cet appareil • HD DVD • Disque DVD-ROM/PD/ MV, etc. • DVD-RAM • CD Super Audio (à l'exception de la couche CD) • DVD-RW (mode VR) • CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/ CD-G/CD-I/LD (Les CD-G lisent des données audio uniquement et non des données graphiques.) • Disque DVD-R 3,9 Go enregistrable. | REMARQUE |  Il se peut que l'appareil ne réponde pas à toutes les commandes car certains disques Blu-ray, DVD et CD ne permettent qu'un fonctionnement limité ou spécifique et offrent certaines fonctions seulement lors de la lecture. Nous attirons votre attention sur le fait qu'il ne s'agit pas d'un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil.  Samsung ne peut garantir que cet appareil pourra lire tous les disques portant les logos Blu-ray, DVD ou CD car les formats évoluent et des problèmes et erreurs peuvent se produire lors de la création d'un logiciel BD, DVD et CD et/ ou la fabrication du disque.  Veuillez contacter le service après-vente de SAMSUNG pour toute question ou tout problème concernant la lecture des disques Blu-ray, DVD ou CD sur cet appareil. Vous pouvez également vous reporter au manuel d'utilisation pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les restrictions en matière de lecture.  Il se peut que certains disques et DVD du commerce achetés en dehors de votre zone ne puissent pas être lus sur cet appareil. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 6 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 6 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:07 013-06-04 오전 10:06:07Français 7| 02 Mise en Route Code régional Les produits et les disques sont codés par région. Ces codes régionaux doivent correspondre pour que le disque puisse être lu. Si les codes ne correspondent pas, le disque ne sera pas lu. Le code régional de ce lecteur figure sur le panneau arrière de l’appareil. Type de disque Code régional Zone Disque Blu-ray A Amérique du Nord, Amérique centrale, Amérique du Sud, Corée, Japon, Taïwan, Hong Kong et Sud-Est asiatique. B Europe, Groenland, France d'outre-mer, Moyen-Orient, Afrique, Australie et NouvelleZélande. C Inde, Chine, Russie, Asie centrale et Asie du Sud. DVD VIDÉO 1 États-Unis, Territoires organisés des États-Unis et Canada 2 Europe, Japon, Moyen-Orient, Égypte, Afrique, Groenland 3 Taïwan, Corée, Philippines, Indonésie, Hong Kong 4 Mexique, Amérique du Sud, Amérique centrale, Australie, Nouvelle-Zélande, Îles du Pacifique, Caraïbes 5 Russie, Europe de l’Est, Inde, Corée du Nord, Mongolie 6 Chine | REMARQUE |  Si le code régional d'un disque Blu-ray/DVD ne correspond pas à celui de l'appareil, ce dernier ne peut pas lire le disque. Logos des disques pouvant être lus sur cet appareil Disque Blu-ray Disque Blu-ray 3D BD-LIVE Dolby DTS Norme de lecture PAL au Royaume-Uni, en France, en Allemagne, etc. DivX Java HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 7 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 7 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:07 013-06-04 오전 10:06:07| 8 Français Mise en Route Formats pris en charge Prise en charge des fichiers vidéo Extension de fichier Conteneur Codec vidéo Résolution (Définition) Vitesse de défilement (FPS) Débit binaire (Mbps) Codec audio *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP MOV FLV VRO VOB PS TS SVAF Divx 3.11 / 4 / 5 / 6 1920x1080 (WMV v7,v8, MSMPEG4 v3 : 1280x720) 6~30 30 Dolby Digital LPCM ADPCM (IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA Dolby Digital Plus MPEG(MP3) DTS (Core) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/ MP/HP Motion JPEG Microsoft MPEG-4 v3 Window Media Video v7, v8, v9 MPEG2 MPEG1 VP6 640x480 - 4 MVC - 24/25/30 60 *.webm WebM VP8 1920x1080 6~30 20 Vorbis  Limitations - Même lorsque le fichier est codé selon un codec pris en charge énuméré ci-dessus, ce fichier pourra ne pas être lu si son contenu est défectueux ou corrompu. - La lecture normale ne sera pas garantie si les informations relatives au conteneur du fichier sont erronées ou si le fichier lui-même est corrompu. - Les fichiers ayant un débit binaire ou une vitesse de défilement supérieur(e) à la normale peuvent présenter des discontinuités lors de la lecture. - La fonction Recherche (Saut) sera indisponible si la table d'indexage du fichier est corrompue. - Lors de la lecture d'un fichier à distance via une connexion réseau, la lecture vidéo peut présenter des discontinuités en fonction de la vitesse du réseau. - Le lecteur peut ne pas être pas compatible avec certains périphériques USB ou certaines caméras numériques.  Décodeur vidéo - Prend en charge le format H.264 de niveau 4.1 (sauf pour FMO/ASO/RS) - Ne prend pas en charge les formats VC1 AP L4 - Sauf pour WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, VP6 Inférieure à 1280 x 720 : 60 images maxi. Supérieure à 1280 x 720 : 30 images maxi. - Ne prend pas en charge le format GMC 2 ou supérieur - Prend en charge les formats SVAF Supérieur/Inférieur, Côte à côte uniquement - Prend en charge le format BD MVC Spec. uniquement  Décodeur audio - Prend en charge le format WMA 10 Pro (jusqu'à 5.1) - Ne prend pas en charge le format audio sans perte WMA. - ADPCM IMA, MS pris en charge. - Ne prend pas en charge le format ADPCM (A-Law, μ-Low) - Ne prend pas en charge les formats QCELP, AMR NB/WB - Prend en charge le format vorbis (jusqu'à 2 ca), - Prend en charge le Dolby Digital Plus (jusqu'à 7.1 ca)  Observations - MPEG4 : Prend en charge le format GMC 1-Warping Point. - H.264 : Prend en charge le format BP/MP/HP de niveau 4.1. - WMV : Prend en charge V9, VC1 SP/MP/AP L3. - MPEG1 : Ne prend pas D-picture en charge. - MPEG2 : Prend en charge jusqu'à Hight Profile High Level. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 8 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 8 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:09 013-06-04 오전 10:06:09Français 9| 02 Mise en Route ❑ Formats des fichiers de sous-titrage DivX pris en charge *.ttxt, *.smi, *.srt, *.sub, *.txt | REMARQUE |  Il est possible que certains disques de format MKV ou MP4 ne puissent pas être lus, selon la résolution de l’image vidéo et sa vitesse de défilement. Prise en charge des fichiers musicaux Extension de fichier Conteneur Codec audio Plage de prise en charge *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 - *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC - *.flac FLAC FLAC Prend en charge jusqu'à 2 ca *.ogg OGG Vorbis Prend en charge jusqu'à 2 ca *.wma WMA WMA Prend en charge le format WMA 10 Pro (jusqu'à 5.1) Ne prend pas en charge le format audio sans perte WMA Prend en charge jusqu’au profil M2 Ne prend pas en charge le mode LBR *.wav wav wav - *.mid *.midi midi midi type 0 et type 1 *.ape ape ape Ne prend pas en charge les formats X13, NVT Prise en charge de fichier image Extension de fichier Type Résolution (Définition) *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640 *.png PNG 4096x4096 *.bmp BMP 4096x4096 *.mpo MPO 15360x8640 Remarques sur la connexion USB • Cet appareil prend en charge les supports de stockage USB, les lecteurs MP3, les caméras numériques et les lecteurs de carte USB. • Cet appareil ne gère pas les noms de dossier ou de ficher dépassant 128 caractères. • Il peut ne pas être compatible avec certains périphériques USB ou certaines caméras numériques. • Il prend en charge les systèmes de fichiers FAT 16, FAT 32 et NTFS • Effectuez la connexion des périphériques USB directement au port USB de l'appareil. La connexion via un câble USB peut causer des problèmes de compatibilité. • L’insertion de plusieurs périphériques de mémoire dans un lecteur multicarte peut entraîner le dysfonctionnement de celui-ci. • L'appareil ne prend pas en charge le protocole PTP. • Ne déconnectez pas un périphérique USB durant un processus de « chargement ». • Plus la résolution de l’image est élevée, plus le délai d'affichage de cette image est long. • Cet appareil ne peut pas lire les fichiers MP3 de type DRM (Gestion des droits numériques) téléchargés depuis des sites commerciaux. • Votre appareil ne prend en charge que les vidéos dont la vitesse de défilement des images est inférieure à 30 fps. • Il ne prend en charge que les périphériques de classe de stockage de masse (MSC) USB tels que les clés USB et les disques durs USB. (HUB n'est pas disponible.) • Certains disques durs USB, lecteurs multicartes et clés USB peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec cet appareil. • Si certains périphériques USB requièrent une puissance excessive, ils pourront être limités par le dispositif de sécurité du circuit. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 9 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 9 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:10 013-06-04 오전 10:06:10| 10 Français Mise en Route • Si la lecture à partir d'un disque dur USB est instable, fournissez-lui une alimentation supplémentaire en branchant le disque dur dans une prise murale. Si le problème persiste, contactez le fabricant du disque dur USB. • SAMSUNG ne peut être tenu responsable de la corruption de fichiers de données ou de la perte de données. AVCHD (Codec vidéo avancé haute définition) • Cet appareil prend en charge les disques au format AVCHD. Ces disques sont normalement enregistrés et lus sur des caméscopes. • Le format AVCHD est un format vidéo numérique haute définition. • Le format MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 compresse les images de manière plus efficace que le format de compression d'image conventionnel. • Certains disques AVCHD utilisent le format « x.v.Colour ». Cet appareil peut lire les disques AVCHD faisant appel au format « x.v.Colour ». • « x.v.Colour » est une marque de commerce de Sony Corporation. • « AVCHD » et le logo AVCHD sont des marques de commerce de Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. et de Sony Corporation. | REMARQUE |  En fonction des conditions d’enregistrement, il est possible que certains disques au format AVCHD ne puissent pas être lus.  Les disques au format AVCHD doivent être finalisés.  Le format « x.v.Colour » offre une gamme de couleurs plus large qu’un DVD de caméscope normal.  Il est possible que certains disques de format DivX, MKV ou MP4 ne puissent pas être lus, selon leur résolution d’image vidéo et leur vitesse de défilement. Accessoires Vérifiez que les accessoires ci-dessous sont fournis. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP MUTE TV SOUND S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP TV HOME VOL TUNING / CH FUNCTION TV/SOURCE 3D SOUND SOUND EFFECT SEARCH SMART HUB A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST BD RECEIVER Manuel d'utilisation Câble HDMI Microphone ASC Antenne FM Câble d'alimentation Chiffon doux Télécommande/ Piles (taille AAA) HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 10 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 10 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:10 013-06-04 오전 10:06:10Français 11| 02 Mise en Route Panneau avant HIGH-END VACUUM TUBE SOUND 5V 0.5A FONCTION ARRÊT OUVERTURE/FERMETURE MARCHE/ ARRÊT LECTURE/PAUSE TIROIR DISQUE AMPLIFICATEUR À TUBE À VIDE RÉGLAGE DU VOLUME CAPTEUR DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE ÉCRAN USB | REMARQUE |  Les téléphones portables ou les périphériques mobiles placés à proximité de l’amplificateur à tube à vide ou des dispositifs électroniques posés sur l’appareil peuvent provoquer des bruits parasites ou une distorsion.  Tenez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants lorsqu’il est sous tension afin d’éviter tout risque de brûlure.  Pour mettre à niveau le logiciel de l’appareil via la prise USB, vous devez utiliser une clé USB à mémoire flash.  Lorsque l'appareil affiche le menu du disque Blu-ray, vous ne pouvez pas lancer la vidéo en appuyant sur le bouton 6 situé sur l'appareil ou la télécommande. Pour lire la vidéo, sélectionnez Lire la vidéo ou Démarrer dans le menu du disque puis appuyez sur le bouton E.  Si vous utilisez le service Internet ou si le contenu du périphérique USB est lu sur le téléviseur, vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner le mode BD/DVD avec le bouton FUNCTION. Arrêtez tout d'abord la lecture du contenu sur le téléviseur pour sélectionner le mode BD/DVD. Panneau arrière HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R PRISES DE SORTIE DES ENCEINTES VENTILATEUR ENTRÉE AUX * ANTENNE FM SORTIE HDMI ENTREE HDMI ENTRÉE ASC PRISE LAN ENTRÉE AUDIO NUMÉRIQUE EXTÉRIEURE (OPTIQUE) CORDON D'ALIMENTATION * Connexion de l’antenne FM 1. Branchez l’antenne FM fournie dans la prise FM ANT (ANTENNE FM). 2. Déplacez progressivement le fil de l’antenne jusqu’à trouver une position dans laquelle la réception est de qualité, fixez-le ensuite solidement à un mur ou une autre surface solide. | REMARQUE |  Veillez à prévoir un minimum d'espace libre de 10 cm sur tous les côtés du Home cinéma dans le but de garantir une ventilation appropriée. Veuillez à ne pas obstruer le ventilateur ou les orifices d’aération.  Cet appareil ne reçoit pas les émissions AM. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 11 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 11 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:13 013-06-04 오전 10:06:13| 12 Français Mise en Route 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP MUTE TV SOUND S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP TV HOME VOL TUNING / CH FUNCTION TV/SOURCE 3D SOUND SOUND EFFECT SEARCH SMART HUB A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST BD RECEIVER Télécommande Boîtier de la télécommande Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre l'appareil. Appuyez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir et fermer le tiroir disque. Permet d'émettre le signal audio vers les enceintes du Home cinéma ou l'enceinte du téléviseur. (Reportez-vous en page 42) Permet de régler le niveau du caisson de basses. Permet de sélectionner le mode Home cinéma (HDMI1, AUX, BD/ DVD, etc.). ou Appuyez ici pour sélectionner le mode vidéo du téléviseur. Permet d’activer ou de désactiver l’éclairage de la télécommande. Lorsqu’il est activé, les boutons s’allument un instant lorsqu’ils sont pressés. (Utiliser la télécommande avec ce bouton activé réduit la durée d’utilisation de la batterie.) Si vous souhaitez changer le mode Home Cinéma sur la télécommande, vérifiez la couleur de la DEL du bouton. - Home Cinéma : Orange - TV : Verte Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer à l’écran Accueil. Permet de régler l'heure de mise en veille de l'appareil. Appuyez sur les touches numériques pour commander les options. Appuyez sur ces touches pour effectuer un saut vers l'arrière ou l'avant. Permet de régler le volume. Permet de couper le son momentanément. Appuyez sur cette touche pour visualiser le menu du disque. Appuyez ici pour arrêter ou démarrer la lecture d'un disque. Sélectionnez les éléments de menu à l’écran, puis changez la valeur du menu sélectionné. Permet de revenir au menu précédent. Ces touches sont utilisées à la fois pour les menus de l'appareil et certaines fonctions liées aux disques Blu-ray. Appuyez sur cette touche pour utiliser le menu Outils. Appuyez sur cette touche pour utiliser Smart Hub. Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher du contenu. Appuyez sur ces touches pour effectuer une recherche vers l'arrière ou l'avant. Appuyez sur cette touche pour suspendre la lecture d’un disque. Permet de rechercher les stations FM actives et de changer les canaux en conséquence. Permet d'accéder au menu contextuel/menu titre. Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les effets sonores. Permet de sélectionner les réglages MONO ou STEREO pour les radiodiffusions. Appuyez sur cette touche pour quitter le menu. Permet d'afficher les informations relatives à la lecture, en cours de lecture d'un disque Blu-ray/DVD. Permet de configurer une fréquence radio préréglée. Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer l'effet sonore 3D. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 12 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 12 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:15 013-06-04 오전 10:06:15Français 13| 02 Mise en Route Insertion des piles dans la télécommande Taille des piles : AAA 1 2 | REMARQUE |  Veillez à faire correspondre les extrémités « + » et « - » des piles avec le dessin situé à l’intérieur du compartiment.  Sur la base d’une utilisation classique, la durée de vie des piles est d’environ un an.  La portée de la télécommande en ligne droite est d'environ 7 mètres par rapport à l'appareil. Réglage de la télécommande Vous pouvez contrôler certaines fonctions de votre téléviseur à l’aide de cette télécommande. Faire fonctionner un téléviseur à l’aide de la télécommande 1. Appuyez sur la touche TV pour régler la télécommande en mode TV. 2. Allumez votre téléviseur. 3. Tout en maintenant la touche MARCHE/ARRÊT appuyée, saisissez le code correspondant à la marque de votre téléviseur. • Si plusieurs codes correspondant à votre téléviseur figurent dans le tableau, saisissez-les les uns après les autres afin de déterminer quel code fonctionne. • Exemple : Dans le cas d'un televiseur Samsung Tout en maintenant la touche MARCHE/ARRÊT appuyée, utilisez les touches numériques pour saisir 00. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, essayez 15, puis 16, etc. 4. Si le téléviseur s'éteint, le réglage est terminé. • Vous pouvez utiliser les touches MARCHE/ ARRÊT TV, VOLUME, CANAL ainsi que les touches numériques (0 à 9). | REMARQUE |  Il est possible que la télécommande ne soit pas compatible avec certaines marques de téléviseurs. Il est également possible que certaines fonctions ne puissent pas être activées en fonction de la marque de votre téléviseur.  La télécommande fonctionne par défaut avec les téléviseurs Samsung. Codes TV utilisables Marque Code Admiral (M.Wards) 56, 57, 58 A Mark 01, 15 Anam 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 AOC 01, 18, 40, 48 Bell & Howell (M.Wards) 57, 58, 81 Brocsonic 59, 60 Candle 18 Cetronic 03 Citizen 03, 18, 25 Cinema 97 Classic 03 Concerto 18 Contec 46 Coronado 15 Craig 03, 05, 61, 82, 83, 84 Croslex 62 Crown 03 Curtis Mates 59, 61, 63 CXC 03 Daewoo 02, 03, 04, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34, 35, 36, 48, 59, 90 Daytron 40 Dynasty 03 Emerson 03, 15, 40, 46, 59, 61, 64, 82, 83, 84, 85 Fisher 19, 65 Funai 03 Futuretech 03 General Electric (GE) 06, 40, 56, 59, 66, 67, 68 Hall Mark 40 Hitachi 15, 18, 50, 59, 69 Inkel 45 JC Penny 56, 59, 67, 86 JVC 70 KTV 59, 61, 87, 88 KEC 03, 15, 40 KMC 15 LG (Goldstar) 01, 15, 16, 17, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 Luxman 18 LXI (Sears) 19, 54, 56, 59, 60, 62, 63, 65, 71 Magnavox 15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 60, 62, 72, 89 Marantz 40, 54 Matsui 54 MGA 18, 40 Marque Code Mitsubishi/MGA 18, 40, 59, 60, 75 MTC 18 NEC 18, 19, 20, 40, 59, 60 Nikei 03 Onking 03 Onwa 03 Panasonic 06, 07, 08, 09, 54, 66, 67, 73, 74 Penney 18 Philco 03, 15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 62, 69, 90 Philips 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54, 62, 72 Pioneer 63, 66, 80, 91 Portland 15, 18, 59 Proton 40 Quasar 06, 66, 67 Radio Shack 17, 48, 56, 60, 61, 75 RCA/Proscan 18, 59, 67, 76, 77, 78, 92, 93, 94 Realistic 03, 19 Sampo 40 Samsung 00, 15, 16, 17, 40, 43, 46, 47, 48, 49, 59, 60, 98 Sanyo 19, 61, 65 Scott 03, 40, 60, 61 Sears 15, 18, 19 Sharp 15, 57, 64 Signature 2000 (M.Wards) 57, 58 Sony 50, 51, 52, 53, 55 Soundesign 03, 40 Spectricon 01 SSS 18 Sylvania 18, 40, 48, 54, 59, 60, 62 Symphonic 61, 95, 96 Tatung 06 Techwood 18 Teknika 03, 15, 18, 25 TMK 18, 40 Toshiba 19, 57, 63, 71 Vidtech 18 Videch 59, 60, 69 Wards 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54, 60, 64 Yamaha 18 York 40 Yupiteru 03 Zenith 58, 79 Zonda 01 Dongyang 03, 54 HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 13 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 13 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:16 013-06-04 오전 10:06:16| 14 Français Branchements Dans ce chapitre, vous trouverez plusieurs méthodes vous expliquant comment connecter votre appareil à d’autres composants externes. Avant de déplacer ou d'installer l'appareil, éteignez-le et débranchez le cordon d'alimentation. Connexion des enceintes Module de réception sans fil Ambiophonique (G) Appareil Ambiophonique (D) Enceinte Caisson de centrale graves Avant/ Supérieur avant (G) Avant/ Supérieur avant (D) Position de l’appareil Posez-le sur un support, sur une étagère ou sous un meuble TV. Choix de la position d’écoute La position d’écoute doit être située à une distance équivalente à environ 2,5 à 3 fois la taille de l’écran du téléviseur. Si vous avez par exemple un écran 46 pouces, situez les positions d’écoute entre 2,92 et 3,5 m de l'écran. Enceintes avant/ supérieure avant Placez les enceintes face à votre position d’écoute en les orientant vers vous (d’environ 45°). Positionnez-les de manière à ce que les haut-parleurs d’aigus se situent à la hauteur de vos oreilles. Alignez la face avant des enceintes avant/supérieure avant avec la face avant de l’enceinte centrale ou avancez-les légèrement par rapport à l’enceinte centrale. Enceinte centrale Il est préférable d’installer l’enceinte centrale à la même hauteur que les enceintes avant/ supérieure avant. Vous pouvez également l’installer directement sur ou sous le téléviseur. Enceintes ambiophoniques Placez les enceintes ambiophoniques de chaque côté de votre position d’écoute. Si vous ne disposez pas d’assez de place, positionnez-les face à face. Elles doivent être situées à environ 60 à 90 cm de vos oreilles et légèrement inclinées vers le sol. * Contrairement aux enceintes avant/supérieure avant et centrale, les enceintes ambiophoniques servent principalement pour les effets sonores. Elles n’émettent donc pas de son en permanence. Caisson de graves La position du caisson de graves n’a pas d’importance. Vous pouvez l’installer où vous voulez. * Les enceintes ambiophoniques doivent être reliées au module de réception sans fil. Accessoires des enceintes SWA-6000 Module de réception Caisson de basse sans fil Câble d’enceinte x 2 Ambiophonique x 2 Avant/Supérieur avant x 2 Centre Vis (5x20) x 16 Pied x 4 Socle x 4 HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 14 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 14 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:17 013-06-04 오전 10:06:17Français 15| 03 Branchements Installation des enceintes sur le pied type Tallboy 1. Redressez le câble pour enceinte et insérez-le dans l’orifice sur le socle. 2. Retournez le socle et emboîtez-le sur le pied. 3. Utilisez un tournevis pour insérer les vis dans les 3 orifices repérés. 4. Branchez l'enceinte supérieure au pied ainsi monté. 5. À l’aide d’un tournevis, serrez une vis dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre dans le trou situé à l’arrière de l’enceinte. 6. Voici à quoi ressemble le haut-parleur une fois celui-ci installé. Respectez cette procédure pour installer l’autre enceinte. Connexion des enceintes 1. Chaque ensemble de câble d'enceinte doit être relié à l'enceinte correspondante. Pour cela, la prise avec le codage couleur sur chaque ensemble doit correspondre à l'autocollant coloré situé sur la face inférieure de chaque enceinte. 2. Pour fixer le câble d'enceinte à chaque enceinte : a. Appuyez sur la languette rouge située à l’arrière de l’enceinte, insérez le câble rouge, puis relâchez la languette. b. Appuyez sur la languette noire située à l’arrière de l’enceinte, insérez le câble noir, puis relâchez la languette. 3. Branchez les fiches des câbles de chaque enceinte à l’arrière de l'appareil en respectant les couleurs entre les fiches et les prises femelles des enceintes. 4. Connectez les enceintes ambiophoniques gauche et droite au module de réception sans fil. À nouveau, respectez la correspondance entre la couleur des fiches et celle des prises du module de réception sans fil. 5. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation du module de réception sans fil à la prise murale. 6. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. L’appareil et le module de réception sans fil communiquent à présent entre eux et le son est émis par les enceintes ambiophoniques. Noir Rouge 4 Enceinte Pied 6 Socle Pied 1 2 3 5 ou HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 15 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 15 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:21 013-06-04 오전 10:06:21| 16 Français Branchements ASC IN SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ T L N SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ Enceintes avant/ supérieure avant (G) Enceintes avant/ supérieure avant (D) * Ce produit doit être connecté au module SWA-6000 uniquement. Enceinte ambiophonique (G) Enceinte ambiophonique (D) Caisson de graves Enceinte centrale Module de réception sans fil | ATTENTION |  Si vous souhaitez installer l'appareil au mur, fixez les vis ou les clous fermement au mur et utilisez pour l'installation les orifices situés à l'arrière de l'enceinte. Cependant, lorsque vous installez l'appareil au mur, les accessoires (clous ou vis) et l'installation ne sont pas fournis par notre entreprise.  Ne laissez pas jouer des enfants avec ou à proximité des enceintes. Ils peuvent se blesser en cas de chute d'une enceinte.  Lors du raccordement des câbles d'enceinte aux enceintes, assurez-vous que la polarité (+/ –) est correcte.  Conservez l'enceinte de caisson de graves hors de portée des enfants afin d'éviter qu'ils ne mettent leurs mains ou des objets étrangers dans le conduit (orifice) de l'enceinte du caisson de graves.  N'accrochez pas le caisson de graves au mur à l'aide du conduit (orifice).  L’antenne de réception sans fil est intégrée au module de réception sans fil. Maintenez l’appareil à l’abri de l’eau et de l’humidité.  Pour un résultat d’écoute optimal, assurez-vous que la zone autour du module de réception sans fil est bien dégagée.  Si aucun son n’est émis par les enceintes ambiophoniques sans fil, basculez en mode Dolby Pro Logic II.  En mode 2-CH, aucun son n’est émis par les enceintes ambiophoniques sans fil. | REMARQUE |  Si vous placez une enceinte à proximité de votre téléviseur, la couleur des images peut être déformée en raison du champ magnétique.  Placez le module de réception sans fil en arrière de la position d’écoute. Si le module de réception sans fil est situé trop près de l’appareil, le son émis par les enceintes peut être interrompu en raison d’interférences.  Si un appareil du type four à micro-ondes, carte LAN sans fil, dispositif Bluetooth ou tout autre appareil fonctionnant sur des fréquences 2,4/5,8 GHz est installé à proximité du produit, des interférences risquent de se produire dans les haut-parleurs.  La distance maximale de transmission entre l’appareil et le module de réception sans fil est d’environ 10 m, mais elle peut varier en fonction de l’environnement de fonctionnement. Si l’appareil et le module de réception sans fil sont séparés par un mur en béton armé ou en métal, le système est susceptible de ne pas fonctionner du tout, car l'onde radio ne traverse pas le métal.  Si l'appareil n’établit pas de connexion sans fil, vous devez exécuter un réglage ID entre l'appareil et le module de réception sans fil. Éteignez l’appareil, puis appuyez sur les touches « 0 »« 1 »« 3 »« 5 » de la télécommande. Allumez le module de réception sans fil. Puis, appuyez sur le bouton « ID SET » situé à l'arrière du module de réception sans fil et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 5 secondes. Enfin, mettez l’appareil sous tension. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 16 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 16 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:24 013-06-04 오전 10:06:24Français 17| 03 Branchements Connexion de périphériques externes/du téléviseur HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 LAN AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R HDMI IN HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R Méthode 1 Méthode 2 Méthode 3 R Rouge W Blanc Périphériques externes Connexion de l'appareil à un téléviseur À l'aide d'un câble HDMI, connectez la prise HDMI OUT située à l'arrière de l'appareil à la prise HDMI IN de votre téléviseur. Si vous avez réglé la télécommande de l'appareil de manière à ce qu'elle fonctionne avec votre téléviseur, appuyez sur le bouton TV SOURCE de la télécommande et sélectionnez HDMI comme source externe du téléviseur. Connexion de périphériques externes Pour sélectionner le mode correct pour un périphérique externe, appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION. Chaque appui sur cette touche change le mode selon cet ordre : BD/DVD  D. IN  AUX  HDMI1  HDMI2  FM  BT Méthode 1 ENTRÉE HDMI : Connexion d'un composant externe à l'aide d'un câble HDMI À l'aide d'un câble HDMI, connectez la prise HDMI IN située à l'arrière de l'appareil à la prise HDMI OUT de votre périphérique numérique.  Sélectionnez le mode HDMI1 ou HDMI2. Méthode 2 ENTRÉE AUX : Connexion d’un composant analogique externe En utilisant un câble audio RCA (non fourni), connectez la prise d'Entrée AUDIO située sur l'appareil à la prise de Sortie AUDIO située sur le composant analogique externe.  Sélectionnez le mode AUX. • Assurez-vous de faire correspondre les couleurs des fiches des câbles avec celles des prises d'entrée et de sortie. Méthode 3 OPTIQUE : Connexion d’un composant audio numérique externe Pour connecter la sortie audio numérique des composants à signaux numériques tels que les récepteurs câble/satellite (décodeur). Connectez la prise d'entrée audio numérique optique de l'appareil à la prise de sortie optique numérique du périphérique numérique externe à l'aide d'un câble optique numérique (non fourni).  Sélectionnez le mode D. IN. | REMARQUE |  Pour visionner un film depuis votre récepteur câble/satellite, vous devez connecter sa prise de sortie vidéo directement à votre téléviseur.  Ce système prend en charge les fréquences d’échantillonnage numériques de 32 kHz minimum provenant de composants numériques externes.  Ce système prend en charge uniquement les données audionumériques DTS et Dolby. Les données audio MPEG, un format type train de bits n'est pas pris en charge. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 17 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 17 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:25 013-06-04 오전 10:06:25| 18 Français Branchements Connexion à un routeur réseau Vous pouvez connecter votre appareil à votre routeur réseau en utilisant l'une des méthodes illustrées cidessous. Réseau câblé HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2 ASC IN LAN POWER SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRONT TOP L FRONT TOP R IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R Service large bande Service large bande Modem large bande (avec routeur intégré) Modem large bande Routeur Ou | REMARQUE |  Votre routeur ou la politique de votre fournisseur de services Internet peut empêcher l’accès de l’appareil au serveur de mise à jour du logiciel Samsung. Si cela se produit, contactez votre fournisseur de services Internet pour plus d’informations.  Les utilisateurs DSL doivent passer par un routeur pour la connexion au réseau.  Pour utiliser la fonction AllShare, vous devez connecter l’ordinateur au réseau, tel qu’indiqué sur les illustrations ci-dessus. La connexion peut être câblée ou sans fil. Réseau sans fil Dispositif de partage IP sans fil Service large bande | REMARQUE |  Si le dispositif de partage IP sans fil prend en charge le protocole DHCP, votre appareil pourra utiliser une adresse DHCP ou une adresse IP fixe pour la connexion au réseau sans fil.  Réglez le routeur IP sans fil en mode Infrastructure. Le mode Ad-hoc n'est pas pris en charge.  L'appareil ne prend en charge que les protocoles de clé de sécurité sans fil suivants : - WEP (OPEN/SHARED), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)  Sélectionnez un canal qui est actuellement non utilisé sur le routeur IP sans fil. Si le canal défini pour le routeur IP sans fil est en cours d’utilisation par un autre périphérique à proximité, il pourra en résulter des interférences et un échec de communication.  Conformément aux nouvelles spécifications de certification Wi-Fi, le Home cinéma ne prend pas en charge le cryptage de sécurité en réseau WEP, TKIP ou TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixte) lorsque le mode 802.11n est en cours.  Par nature, le réseau LAN peut provoquer des interférences, selon les conditions de fonctionnement (performance du point d'accès, distance, obstacles, interférences avec d'autres appareils radio, etc.). HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 18 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 18 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:27 013-06-04 오전 10:06:27Français 19| 04 Paramètres Procédure de réglage des paramètres initiaux • Le menu Accueil n'apparaîtra pas si vous ne configurez pas les paramètres initiaux. • L'affichage à l'écran (OSD) peut changer sur cet appareil après la mise à niveau de la version du logiciel. • Les étapes d'accès peuvent varier selon le menu sélectionné. La procédure des paramètres initiaux vous permet de définir les langues du menu et de l'affichage à l'écran. Configurez la connexion à votre réseau domestique, sélectionnez la sortie du format de l'image (taille et format d'écran) correspondant à votre téléviseur, puis effectuez la mise à niveau du logiciel de l'appareil, s'il en existe une version disponible. Pour obtenir les instructions complètes sur les paramètres initiaux, suivez les instructions à l'écran. | REMARQUE |  Si vous souhaitez afficher à nouveau l'écran des paramètres initiaux afin d'y effectuer des modifications, sélectionnez Paramètres > Système > Configuration dans l'écran d'accueil ou avec l'option Réinitialiser. (Voir page 22) L'écran Accueil Films et séries télé Applications Photos, vidéos et musique Ajouter l'application Navigateur Web Paramètres aCompte Samsung dScreen Mirroring 1 2 34 5 6 7 Ajouter l'application Ajouter l'application 1 Films et séries télé : permet de télécharger des films et des émissions de télévision sur Internet. | REMARQUE |  Selon le pays, cette fonction de menu peut ne pas être prise en charge. 2 Applications : vous permet de télécharger/ accéder à diverses applications gratuites ou payantes. 3 Photos, vidéos et musique : Permet de lire des photos, des vidéos ou des fichiers musicaux contenus sur un disque, une clé USB, un ordinateur ou des périphériques mobiles. 4 Paramètres : Permet de régler diverses fonctions selon vos préférences. 5 Applications recommandées : une liste des applications utiles et populaires que nous recommandons de télécharger. 6 Navigateur Web : Vous pouvez accéder à Internet à l'aide de l'application Web Browser. 7 ROUGE (A) : appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A) de votre télécommande pour créer et/ou vous connecter à votre compte personnel Samsung. BLEU (D) : Permet de configure la fonction de mise en miroir sans fil entre le Home cinéma et un smartphone ou une tablette.  Sélection d'une option sur l'écran Accueil 1. Pour sélectionner une option sur l'écran Accueil, déplacez le curseur à l'aide des boutons ▲▼◄► jusqu'à ce que l'option de votre choix soit mise en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Si l'appareil reste en mode Arrêt pendant plus de 5 minutes sans l'utiliser, un écran de veille s'affichera sur le téléviseur. Si l'appareil reste en mode d’écran de veille pendant plus de 20 minutes, l'alimentation sera automatiquement coupée. Accéder à l'écran Paramètres 1. Sélectionnez Paramètres sur l'écran Accueil, puis appuyez sur E. L'écran Paramètres apparaît. Affichage Sortie UHD Auto. Paramètres 3D Format TV 16:9 Original BD Wise Arrêt Résolution Auto. Trame vidéo (24Fs) Auto. Convers. 24 img/s DVD Arrêt Affichage Audio Réseau Fonctions Smart Système Assistance Paramètres 2. Pour accéder aux menus, sous-menus et options sur l'écran Paramètres, veuillez vous reporter à l'illustration de la télécommande sur la page suivante. Paramètres HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 19 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 19 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:31 013-06-04 오전 10:06:31| 20 Français Paramètres Touches de la télécommande utilisées pour le menu Paramètres S/W LEVEL EXIT INFO RETURN TOOLS SLEEP HOME A B C D TUNERMEMORY MO/ST 2 4 3 1 1 Touche HOME : Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer à l’écran Accueil. 2 Touche RETURN : Permet de revenir au menu précédent. 3 Touche E (Entrée) / DIRECTION : • Appuyez sur ▲▼◄► pour déplacer le curseur ou sélectionner un élément. • Appuyez sur la touche E pour activer l'élément sélectionné actuellement ou confirmer un réglage. 4 Touche EXIT : Appuyez sur cette touche pour quitter le menu actuellement sélectionné. Informations détaillées sur les fonctions Chaque fonction Paramètres, élément de menu, et chaque option sont expliqués en détails à l'écran. Pour afficher les informations, utilisez les touches ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner la fonction, l'élément de menu ou l'option. Les informations apparaissent en général à droite de l'écran. Une brève description des différentes fonctions liées aux paramètres s'affiche sur cette page. Vous pourrez également trouver des informations complémentaires sur certaines fonctions dans l'Annexe de ce manuel. Fonctions du menu Paramètres Affichage Sortie UHD Cette option émet un signal vidéo HDMI en sortie à une résolution de UHD. Disponible uniquement lorsque la trame vidéo est en mode Auto.. | REMARQUE |  Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez connecter l'appareil à un périphérique prenant en charge la résolution UHD et votre contenu doit lire à 24 images/seconde (vitesse de film). Paramètres 3D Permet de configurer les fonctions relatives à la 3D.  Mode lecture Blu-ray 3D: Vous permet de choisir de lire en mode 3D ou non un disque Blu-ray comportant des contenus 3D. Si vous passez au menu Accueil ou Accueil Smart Hub tout en étant en mode 3D, l'appareil passera automatiquement en 2D.  Taille écran: Permet d'entrer la taille du téléviseur connecté à l'appareil. L'appareil règle automatiquement la sortie 3D en fonction de la taille de l'écran du téléviseur. Format TV Vous permet de régler la sortie de l'appareil sur la taille de l'écran de votre téléviseur. Reportez-vous à la page 52. BD Wise BD Wise est la fonctionnalité d’interconnectivité de Samsung la plus récente. Lorsque vous connectez un appareil Samsung et un téléviseur Samsung doté de la fonction BD Wise via l'interface HDMI et que l'appareil et le téléviseur disposent tous deux de la fonctionnalité BD Wise, le produit émet des images dont la résolution vidéo et la vitesse de défilement sont identiques à celles du disque Blu-ray/DVD. Résolution Cette option vous permet de régler la définition du signal vidéo HDMI respectivement sur les valeurs BD Wise, Auto., 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p. Ces valeurs sont indicatives du nombre de lignes vidéo par image. Les lettres i et p signifient respectivement balayage entrelacé (i) et balayage progressif (p). Plus il y a de lignes, plus la qualité de l'image est élevée. Trame vidéo (24Fs) Le réglage de la fonction Trame vidéo (24Fs) sur Auto vous permet de spécifier automatiquement la sortie HDMI de l'appareil sur 24 images par seconde pour une qualité d'image améliorée si un téléviseur compatible 24Fs est connecté. • Vous ne pouvez bénéficier de la fonction Trame vidéo (24Fs) que sur un téléviseur prenant en charge cette vitesse de défilement. • Vous pouvez sélectionner Movie Frame uniquement lorsque le produit est en modes de résolution de sortie HDMI 1080p. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 20 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 20 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:35 013-06-04 오전 10:06:35Français 21| 04 Paramètres Convers. 24 img/s DVD Permet de convertir la lecture d’un DVD en 24 images par seconde et de la diffuser via un branchement HDMI. Disponible uniquement lorsque la fonction Trame vidéo (24Fs) est activée. Taille écran Smart Hub Permet de sélectionner la taille optimale de l'écran Smart Hub. Format couleur HDMI Vous pouvez régler le format de l'espace chromatique pour la sortie HDMI afin qu'il corresponde aux capacités de l'appareil branché (télévision, moniteur, etc.). Couleur intense HDMI Cette option vous permet de régler l'appareil pour émettre des données vidéo en sortie avec Couleur intense via la prise HDMI OUT. L'option Couleur intense permet une reproduction plus fidèle des couleurs, notamment en termes de profondeur. Mode progressif Cette option permet d'améliorer la qualité de l'image lors de la lecture d'un DVD. Audio Paramètre haut-parleur Vous permet de régler les paramètres des enceintes suivantes et d'activer et désactiver la tonalité d'essai afin de tester les enceintes.  Niveau: vous permet de régler le niveau sonore relatif de chaque enceinte de 6 dB à -6 dB. Par exemple, si vous aimez les basses puissantes, vous pouvez augmenter le niveau sonore du caisson de graves de 6 dB.  Distance: vous permet de régler la distance relative de chaque enceinte à partir de la position d'écoute jusqu'à 9 mètres. Plus la distance est grande, plus le son de l'enceinte sera fort.  Test tonalité: vous permet d'exécuter la fonction de Tonalité d'essai afin que vous puissiez tester vos réglages. Régler la Tonalité d’essai sur On permet d’activer cette tonalité d’essai. La régler sur Off permet de la désactiver. Etalonnage automatique du son L’appareil reconnaît automatiquement le champ acoustique adapté à votre environnement. Egaliseur Cette option vous permet de configurer manuellement les réglages de l'égaliseur. Volume intelligent Cette option vous permet de régler l'appareil de sorte que le volume demeure stable lorsqu'un changement de scène se produit ou lorsque vous changez de chaîne. Sélect. hautparleur Cette option vous permet de sélectionner les haut-parleurs activés, ceux du téléviseur ou ceux du Home cinéma. Fonct. Retour Audio Cette option vous permet de diriger le son du téléviseur vers les hautparleurs du Home cinéma. Elle nécessite une connexion HDMI et un téléviseur compatible avec la fonction Canal de retour audio (ARC). • Si la fonction Audio Return Channel (Canal de retour audio) est activée et si vous utilisez un câble HDMI pour connecter l'appareil au téléviseur, l'entrée optique numérique ne fonctionne pas. • Si la fonction Canal de retour audio est réglée sur Auto et si vous utilisez un câble HDMI pour connecter l'appareil au téléviseur, l'ARC ou l'entrée optique numérique sont sélectionnés automatiquement. Sortie numérique Cette option vous permet de définir la Sortie numérique de manière à ce qu'elle corresponde aux capacités du récepteur AV que vous avez connecté à l'appareil. Pour les détails, reportezvous au tableau de sélection des sorties numériques. (Voir page 54) Contrôle de la dynamique Cette option vous permet d'appliquer le contrôle de la dynamique au son Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus et Dolby TrueHD.  Auto.: Contrôle automatiquement la plage dynamique de l'audio Dolby TrueHD selon les informations fournies par la piste audio Dolby TrueHD. Désactive également le contrôle de la plage dynamique pour Dolby Digital et Dolby Digital Plus.  Arrêt: la plage dynamique reste non compressée, vous permettant ainsi d'entendre le son original.  Activé: cette option active le contrôle de la dynamique pour les trois formats Dolby. Les sons les moins forts sont amplifiés et le volume des sons forts est abaissé. Mode sousmixage Permet de sélectionner la méthode du sous-mixage multicanal compatible avec le système stéréo utilisé. Vous pouvez alors choisir de spécifier le sous-mixage de l'appareil sur l'option stéréo normal ou stéréo compatible surround. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 21 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 21 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:36 013-06-04 오전 10:06:36| 22 Français Paramètres Sync. audio Lorsque l'appareil est relié à un téléviseur numérique, cette option vous permet de régler le temps de retard audio afin que le son soit synchronisé avec la vidéo. Vous pouvez régler le retard entre 0 et 300 millisecondes. Réseau État du réseau Permet de vérifier le réseau actuel et l'état d'Internet. Paramètres réseau Configurez la connexion du réseau pour profiter des diverses fonctions telles que les services Internet ou les fonctionnalités Wi-Fi AllShare, et effectuer des mises à niveau de logiciel. Wi-Fi Direct Permet de connecter un périphérique Wi-Fi Direct à l'appareil via un réseau peer-to-peer, sans qu'il soit nécessaire de recourir à un routeur sans fil. Notez que si l’appareil est connecté à un réseau sans fil, il peut être déconnecté si vous utilisez Wi-Fi Direct. | REMARQUE |  Les fichiers texte, tels que ceux ayant l’extension .TXT ou .DOC, ne sont pas affichés lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Wi-Fi Direct. Paramètres AllShare Vous permet de commander quels périphériques de votre réseau, tels que les smartphones et les tablettes, peuvent partager le contenu de votre téléviseur. Nom du périph. Cette option vous permet d'affecter un nom identifiant l'appareil. Vous utilisez ce nom pour identifier l'appareil lorsque vous lui connectez des périphériques Wi-Fi externes (Smartphones, tablettes, etc.). Paramètres BD-Live Permet de régler diverses fonctions de BD-Live. BD-Live vous permet d'accéder à des fonctions complémentaires disponibles sur certains disques Blu-ray si vous êtes connecté à Internet.  Connexion internet BD-Live : Permet d'interdire ou d'autoriser, en tout ou partie, une connexion Internet BD-Live.  Gestion données BD : Permet de gérer les données BD téléchargées depuis un service BD-Live ou un disque Blu-ray. Fonctions Smart Paramètres applis Vous permet de configurer les réglages de notification d’applications et de visualiser leurs informations de base.  Paramètres de notification Push : Permet de recevoir des notifications des services demandés.  Propriétés : Reportez-vous aux informations de base sur les applications. Verr. classif. VOD Vous pouvez verrouiller l'accès au contenu des Vidéos à la demande (VOD) en fonction de sa classification. | REMARQUE |  PIN de sécurité par défaut : 0000.  Selon le pays, cette fonction de menu peut ne pas être prise en charge. Cond. gén., polit. confidentialité Vous permet de visualiser les Conditions générales ainsi que la Politique de confidentialité concernant l’utilisation du Smart Hub. Réinitialiser Smart Hub Permet de réinitialiser tous les réglages du Smart Hub sur leurs paramètres par défaut. | REMARQUE |  Le code PIN de sécurité par défaut est 0000. Système Configuration Cette option vous permet de relancer la procédure de réglage des paramètres initiaux. Langue Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue de votre choix pour le menu à l’écran, le menu du disque, les sous-titres, etc. • La langue que vous avez sélectionnée pour le menu du disque, la bande-son du disque ou les soustitres apparaîtra seulement si elle est prise en charge sur le disque. Gest. périph. Vous pouvez brancher une souris ou un clavier USB sans fil au port USB situé à l'avant de l'appareil.  Paramètres clavier: cette option vous permet de configurer un clavier USB sans fil connecté à l'appareil. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 22 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 22 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:37 013-06-04 오전 10:06:37Français 23| 04 Paramètres | REMARQUE |  Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier uniquement lorsqu'un écran ou une fenêtre de clavier QWERTY apparaît dans le navigateur Web.  Paramètres souris: cette option vous permet de configurer une souris USB sans fil connecté à l'appareil. Vous pouvez utiliser la souris dans le menu de l'appareil de la même manière que vous utilisez une souris sur votre ordinateur.  Pour utiliser une souris avec le menu de l'appareil : 1. Connectez la souris USB à l'appareil. 2. Cliquez sur le bouton principal que vous avez sélectionné dans Paramètres souris. Le menu Simple s'affiche. 3. Cliquez sur les options du menu que vous désirez. | REMARQUE |  Certains claviers et souris USB HID peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec votre produit.  Certaines touches de clavier HID peuvent ne pas fonctionner.  Les claviers USB câblés ne sont pas pris en charge.  Certaines applications peuvent ne pas être prises en charge.  Si un clavier HID sans fil ne fonctionne pas en raison d'interférence, rapprochez le clavier de l'appareil. Sécurité Le code PIN de sécurité par défaut est 0000. Pour accéder à la fonction de sécurité, entrez le code PIN par défaut si vous n'avez pas créé votre propre code PIN personnel.  Contrôle parent. BD: Empêche la lecture des disques Blu-ray avec des classifications particulières jusqu'à la saisie du code PIN.  Contrôle parent. DVD: Cette option empêche la lecture des disques DVD ayant une classification supérieure à une classification numérique particulière que vous avez sélectionnée jusqu'à la saisie du code PIN.  Modifier PIN: cette option permet de modifier le code PIN à 4 chiffres utilisé pour accéder aux fonctions de sécurité.  En cas d'oubli du code PIN 1. Retirez tout disque ou périphérique de stockage USB. 2. Appuyez et maintenez le bouton 5 situé sur la façade pendant 5 secondes minimum. Tous les paramètres seront réinitialisés sur leur valeur d'origine. | REMARQUE |  Lorsque les réglages d'usine par défaut sont rétablis, toutes les données Blu-ray utilisateur stockées sur l'appareil seront effacées. Général Vous pouvez spécifier la luminosité de l'affichage et le fuseau horaire.  Affichage du lecteur: cette option permet de modifier la luminosité du panneau avant.  Fuseau Horaire: vous pouvez spécifier le fuseau horaire applicable à votre région.  Transparence menu: cette option permet de régler la transparence du cadre de menu. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ est une fonction pratique qui autorise des commandes liées entre plusieurs produits Samsung compatibles Anynet+ et vous permet de contrôler ces produits via une télécommande de téléviseur Samsung. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez connecter cet appareil à un téléviseur Samsung Anynet+ à l'aide d'un câble HDMI. Si vous voulez utiliser une fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), veuillez suivre les instructions ci-dessous. 1) Connectez l'appareil à un téléviseur Samsung compatible Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) à l'aide d'un câble HDMI. 2) Définissez la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) sur Activé à la fois sur le téléviseur et l'appareil. 3) Recherchez puis sélectionnez le produit dans la liste des téléviseurs Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Pour obtenir des instructions plus exactes, consultez la section Anynet+ du manuel d'utilisation du téléviseur. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 23 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 23 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:38 013-06-04 오전 10:06:38| 24 Français Paramètres DivX® Vidéo à la demande Affichez les codes d'enregistrement DivX® VOD pour acheter et lire des contenus DivX® VOD. Assistance Gestion à distance Lorsque cette option est activée, elle permet aux agents du Centre d’assistance téléphonique de Samsung de diagnostiquer et de résoudre à distance des problèmes concernant l'appareil. Elle nécessite une connexion Internet active. Le service Gestion à distance pourrait ne pas être disponible dans certains pays. Mise à jour du logiciel Pour obtenir de plus amples informations sur la fonction de Mise à jour logicielle, consultez « Mise à niveau du logiciel » en page 28. Mode d'utilisation Vous permet de régler le mode d’utilisation Si vous utilisez le Home cinéma à votre domicile, sélectionnez toujours Home. Store est destiné aux réglages pour l’affichage magasin uniquement. Contacter Samsung Permet d’obtenir les informations de contact pour les demandes d’assistance portant sur l'appareil. Réinitialisation Permet de réinitialiser tous les réglages sur leur valeur par défaut à l’exception de ceux du réseau et du Smart Hub, puis de démarrer la fonction Configuration. Il est nécessaire d’entrer le code PIN de sécurité. Le code PIN de sécurité par défaut est 0000. Etalonnage automatique du son En réglant la fonction de calibrage automatique du son ASC (Auto Sound Calibration) lorsque vous déplacez ou installez l’appareil pour la première fois, l’appareil reconnaît automatiquement la distance entre les enceintes, les niveaux entre les canaux et les caractéristiques de la fréquence pour créer un champ acoustique 7.1 canaux adapté à votre environnement. ASC IN LAN SPEAKERS OUT CENTER SUBWOOFER FRONT L FRONT R FRON FRON IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ AUX IN FM ANT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN L R Microphone ASC Etalonnage automatique du son Sélectionnez si vous exécutez et appliquez le calibrage automatique du son. • Arrêt : permet de produire un son en fonction de la configuration des enceintes spécifiée dans les paramètres des enceintes • Activé : permet d’exécuter le calibrage automatique du son et de produire un son en fonction des paramètres des enceintes calibrées. Mesure Avant d’exécuter le calibrage, assurez-vous qu’aucun disque n’est présent dans le tiroir disque. 1. Branchez le microphone ASC sur la prise ASC IN. 2. Placez le microphone ASC sur la position d’écoute. • Le calibrage automatique du son configure automatiquement les enceintes selon la séquence suivante : Avant G  Centre  Avant D  Surround D  Avant D.  Avant G.  Surround G  Caisson basses • Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour annuler le réglage du calibrage automatique du son. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 24 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 24 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:38 013-06-04 오전 10:06:38Français 25| 04 Paramètres Réseaux et Internet Lorsque vous connectez cet appareil à un réseau, vous pouvez utiliser les applications et les fonctions basées sur les réseaux telles que Smart Hub et BD-LIVE, et mettre à niveau le logiciel de l'appareil via la connexion réseau. Pour plus d'informations concernant l'accès et l'utilisation des services Internet, reportez-vous au chapitre Services réseau de ce manuel en pages 43 à 51. Les instructions permettant la configuration de la connexion réseau débutent ci-dessous. Configuration de votre connexion réseau Si vous ne configurez pas votre connexion au réseau au cours de la procédure de configuration initiale ou si vous devez réinitialiser la connexion au réseau, respectez les instructions ci-dessous. Avant de commencer, contactez votre fournisseur de services Internet pour savoir si votre adresse IP est fixe ou dynamique. Si vous avez une adresse IP dynamique et utilisez un réseau câblé ou sans fil, nous vous recommandons de suivre les procédures de Configuration automatique décrites ci-dessous. Si vous vous connectez à un réseau câblé, connectez l'appareil à votre routeur en utilisant un câble LAN avant d'entreprendre la procédure de configuration. Pour commencer la configuration de votre connexion réseau, respectez les étapes suivantes : 1. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis appuyez sur le bouton E 2. Sélectionnez Réseau et appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Sélectionnez Paramètres réseau et appuyez sur le bouton E. 4. Consultez les instructions pour les Réseaux câblés qui débutent ci-dessous ou les instructions pour les Réseaux sans fil commençant en page 26. Réseau câblé ❑ Wired – Automatic Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 ci-dessus : 1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de réseau sur Câble. Puis sélectionnez Connexion puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'appareil détecte la connexion câblée, vérifie la connexion réseau, puis il se connecte au réseau. 2. Une fois terminé, mettez OK en surbrillance et appuyez sur le bouton E. ❑ Câblé – Manuel Si vous disposez d'une adresse IP fixe ou si la procédure automatique est inopérante, vous devrez définir les valeurs de Paramètres réseau manuellement. Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 ci-dessus : 1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de réseau sur Câble. Puis sélectionnez Connexion puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Le produit recherche un réseau, puis affiche le message d'échec de la connexion. | REMARQUE |  S’il est possible de connecter votre Home cinéma à votre réseau sans fil, sélectionnez maintenant Modifier réseau, changez le Type de réseau pour Sans fil et passez aux instructions concernant les réseaux sans fil à la page 26. Paramètres réseau Echec de la connexion au réseau câblé. Adresse MAC XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX Adresse IP 0. 0. 0. 0 Masque ss-réseau 0. 0. 0. 0 Passerelle 0. 0. 0. 0 Serveur DNS 0. 0. 0. 0 Echec connexion réseau. Essayez solut. suiv. : vérif. si adr. IP est définie correctement dans Paramètres IP. Contactez le fournisseur de services Internet pour plus d’infos. Modifier réseau Param. IP Réess. Fermer 2. Utilisez les boutons ◄► pour sélectionner les Param. IP puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'écran Paramètres IP apparaît. 3. Sélectionnez le champ Config. IP puis définissez Entrer manuellement. 4. Sélectionnez une valeur à entrer (adresse IP, par exemple) et appuyez sur E. Utilisez le clavier numérique de votre télécommande pour saisir les chiffres de la valeur. Vous pouvez également saisir les chiffres en utilisant les boutons ▲▼. Utilisez les touches ◄► de la télécommande pour passer d'un champ d'entrée à l'autre pour une valeur. Une fois terminé avec une valeur, appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou▼ pour passer à une autre valeur et saisissez les chiffres pour cette valeur en respectant les instructions contenues dans l’étape 4. 6. Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 jusqu’à ce que vous ayez renseigné toutes les valeurs. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 25 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 25 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:39 013-06-04 오전 10:06:39| 26 Français Paramètres | REMARQUE |  Vous pouvez obtenir les valeurs du réseau auprès de votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 7. Après avoir terminé la saisie de toutes les valeurs, sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. Le Home cinéma vérifie la connexion réseau puis il se connecte au réseau. Réseau sans fil Vous pouvez configurer une connexion à un réseau sans fil de trois manières : - Sans fil automatique - Sans fil manuel - WPS(PBC) Avant de configurer la connexion au réseau sans fil, déconnectez tous les périphériques réseau sans fil actuellement connectés à l'appareil ou, le cas échéant, la connexion câblée actuelle de l’appareil. ❑ Sans fil - Automatique Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 dans « Configuration de votre connexion réseau » en page 25: 1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de réseau sur Sans fil. L'appareil recherche puis affiche une liste des réseaux disponibles. Paramètres réseau Sélectionnez type de réseau. Type de réseau Sans fil Réseau sans fil Vous pouvez connecter votre Lecteur Blu-ray à Internet. Sélectionnez le réseau sans fil à utiliser. si-ap iptime iptime5G KIMING_VTOWER TIAS Rafraîchir WPS(PBC) 2. Sélectionnez le réseau souhaité et appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Sur l'écran Sécurité, entrez le code de sécurité ou la phrase de passe correspondant à votre réseau. Saisissez directement les nombres en utilisant les touches numériques de la télécommande. Saisissez les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à l'aide des touches ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 4. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'appareil se connecte au réseau une fois que la connexion réseau a été confirmée. | REMARQUE |  Vous devriez pouvoir trouver la phrase de passe ou le code de sécurité sur l'un des écrans de configuration servant à la configuration du routeur ou du modem. ❑ Sans fil - Manuel Si vous disposez d'une adresse IP fixe ou si la procédure automatique est inopérante, vous devrez définir les valeurs de Paramètres réseau manuellement. Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 dans « Configuration de votre connexion réseau » en page 25: 1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de réseau sur Sans fil. L'appareil recherche puis affiche une liste des réseaux disponibles. 2. Faites défiler la liste, sélectionnez le réseau souhaité ou l'option Ajouter réseau, et appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Si vous avez sélectionné un réseau à l'étape 2, passez à l'étape 6. Si vous sélectionnez Ajouter réseau, passez à l'étape 4. 4. Saisissez le nom de votre réseau sans fil ou de votre routeur sans fil. • Saisissez directement les chiffres en utilisant les boutons numériques de votre télécommande. • Saisissez les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à l'aide des boutons ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. • Pour afficher les lettres en majuscule ou réaffichez des lettres en minuscule si des majuscules sont affichées, sélectionnez , puis appuyez sur le bouton E. • Pour afficher des symboles et la ponctuation, sélectionnez 123#&, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour réafficher des lettres, sélectionnez 123#&, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Sur l’écran Type de sécurité qui s’affiche, sélectionnez le type de Sécurité du réseau à l’aide des boutons ▲▼ et appuyez sur le bouton E. Sur l'écran suivant, entrez le code de sécurité ou la phrase de passe correspondant à votre réseau. • Saisissez directement les nombres en utilisant les touches numériques de la télécommande. • les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à l'aide des touches ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’appareil recherche le réseau. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 26 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 26 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:40 013-06-04 오전 10:06:40Français 27| 04 Paramètres 6. L'écran d'échec de la connexion réseau apparaît. Utilisez les boutons ◄► pour sélectionner Param. IP puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. Sélectionnez le champ Config. IP puis définissez Entrer manuellement. 8. Sélectionnez une valeur de réseau à entrer (adresse IP, par exemple) et appuyez sur le bouton E. Utilisez le clavier numérique de votre télécommande pour saisir les chiffres de la valeur. Vous pouvez également saisir les chiffres en utilisant les boutons ▲▼. Utilisez les touches ◄► de la télécommande pour passer d'un champ d'entrée à l'autre pour une valeur. Une fois terminé avec une valeur, appuyez sur le bouton E. 9. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou▼ pour passer à une autre valeur et saisissez les chiffres pour cette valeur en respectant les instructions contenues dans l’étape 8. 10. Répétez les étapes 8 et 9 jusqu’à ce que vous ayez renseigné toutes les valeurs. | REMARQUE |  Vous pouvez obtenir les valeurs du réseau auprès de votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 11. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. L'écran Sécurité apparaît. 12. Sur l'écran Sécurité, entrez le code de sécurité ou la phrase de passe correspondant à votre réseau. Saisissez directement les nombres en utilisant les touches numériques de la télécommande. Saisissez les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à l'aide des touches ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 13. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé, sur la droite de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'appareil se connecte au réseau une fois que la connexion réseau a été confirmée. 14. Lorsque le Home cinéma a vérifié le réseau, sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Vous pouvez également commencer le réglage manuel du réseau en allant à Paramètres >Réseau > État du réseau. ❑ WPS(PBC) L'une des méthodes la plus facile pour configurer la connexion au réseau sans fil consiste à utiliser la fonction WPS(PBC). Si votre routeur sans fil dispose d'un bouton WPS(PBC), respectez les étapes suivantes : Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 dans « Configuration de votre connexion réseau » en page 25: 1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de réseau sur Sans fil. L'appareil recherche puis affiche une liste des réseaux disponibles. 2. Faites défiler la liste vers le bas, sélectionnez WPS(PBC), puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton WPS(PBC) situé sur votre routeur dans les deux minutes qui suivent. L'appareil obtient automatiquement toutes les valeurs des paramètres réseau nécessaires et se connecte au réseau. L'appareil se connecte au réseau une fois que la connexion réseau a été confirmée. 4. Une fois terminé, mettez OK en surbrillance et appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Pour la connexion WPS, réglez le cryptage de sécurité de votre routeur sur AES. Si le cryptage de sécurité est réglé sur WEP, la connexion WPS n'est pas prise en charge. Wi-Fi Direct La fonction Wi-Fi Direct vous permet de connecter les périphériques par Wi-Fi Direct à l'appareil et entre eux en utilisant un réseau point à point, sans utiliser un routeur sans fil. | REMARQUE |  Certains périphériques Wi-Fi Direct peuvent ne pas prendre en charge la fonction AllShare en cas de connexion via Wi-Fi Direct. Si tel est le cas, changez la méthode de connexion réseau que vous avez utilisée pour connecter le périphérique au Home cinéma.  Les transmissions Wi-Fi Direct peuvent créer des interférences avec le signal Bluetooth. Avant d'utiliser la fonction Bluetooth, nous vous recommandons fortement de désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Direct sur un périphérique sur lequel il est actuellement activé. 1. Allumez le périphérique Wi-Fi direct et activez la fonction Wi-Fi Direct. 2. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Sélectionnez Réseau, et appuyez sur le bouton E. 4. Sélectionnez Wi-Fi Direct, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Les périphériques Wi-Fi Direct que vous pouvez connecter s’affichent. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 27 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 27 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:41 013-06-04 오전 10:06:41| 28 Français Paramètres Rafraîchir Fermer Wi-Fi Direct Nom Periph. : [HTS]F9750W Sélect. le périph. Wi-Fi Direct pour la connexion. AndroidXXXXXXX Déconnecté 5. Vous avez trois manières de procéder à la connexion Wi-Fi. • Via le périphérique Wi-Fi. • Via l'appareil en utilisant l'option PBC. • Via l'appareil en utilisant un code PIN. Chacune d’elles est indiquée ci-dessous. Via le périphérique Wi-Fi 1. Sur le périphérique Wi-Fi, suivez la procédure du périphérique pour la connexion à un autre périphérique Wi-Fi Direct. Concernant les instructions, reportez-vous au manuel d’utilisation du périphérique. 2. Lorsque vous aurez terminé la procédure, vous devriez voir une fenêtre contextuelle sur l’écran de votre téléviseur indiquant qu’un périphérique qui prend en charge Wi-Fi Direct demande à se connecter. Sélectionnez OK, puis appuyez sur le bouton E pour accepter. 3. La fenêtre contextuelle de connexion s’affiche, suivie de la fenêtre contextuelle Connecté. Lorsqu’elle se ferme, vous devez voir le périphérique listé sur l’écran Wi-Fi Direct en tant que connecté. • Les procédures PBC et PIN connectent les périphériques automatiquement. Via l'appareil en utilisant l'option PBC 1. Sélectionnez le périphérique Wi-Fi Direct que vous voulez connecter à cet appareil puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. La fenêtre contextuelle de connexion s’affiche, suivie de la fenêtre contextuelle Connecté. Lorsqu’elle se ferme, vous devez voir le périphérique listé sur l’écran Wi-Fi Direct en tant que connecté. Via l'appareil en utilisant un code PIN 1. Sélectionnez le périphérique Wi-Fi Direct que vous voulez connecter à cet appareil puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. La fenêtre contextuelle PIN s’affiche. 3. Notez le code PIN de la fenêtre contextuelle, puis saisissez-le dans le champ approprié du périphérique Wi-Fi Direct que vous voulez connecter. 4. La fenêtre contextuelle de connexion s’affiche, suivie de la fenêtre contextuelle Connecté. Lorsqu’elle se ferme, vous devez voir le périphérique listé sur l’écran Wi-Fi Direct en tant que connecté. | REMARQUE |  La connexion actuelle au réseau câblée ou sans fil sera déconnectée lorsque vous utilisez la fonction WiFi Direct.  Les fichiers texte, tels que ceux ayant l’extension .TXT ou .DOC, ne sont pas affichés lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Wi-Fi Direct. Mise à niveau du logiciel Le menu Mise à niveau du logiciel vous permet de mettre le logiciel de l'appareil à niveau pour en améliorer la performance et obtenir des services supplémentaires. • Évitez d’éteindre et de rallumer le produit manuellement durant le processus de mise à jour. 1. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Assistance puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Sélectionnez Mise à jour du logiciel, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 4. Pour télécharger la mise à jour du logiciel et mettre à jour maintenant, sélectionnez MàJ maintenant, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour de plus amples détails, reportez-vous à MàJ maintenant à la page suivante. 5. Pour permettre au logiciel de télécharger les mises à jour automatiquement dès qu’elles sont disponibles, sélectionnez Mise à jour auto puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour de plus amples détails, reportezvous à Mise à jour auto à la page suivante. | REMARQUE |  La mise à niveau est terminée lorsque l'appareil s’éteint et s’allume ensuite par lui-même.  Samsung Electronics n’accepte aucune responsabilité légale concernant un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil provoqué par une connexion Internet instable ou une négligence de la part de l’utilisateur durant la mise à jour du logiciel.  Si vous souhaitez annuler la mise à niveau en cours de téléchargement, appuyez sur le bouton E.  Lorsque la mise à niveau du système est en cours, « UPDATE » s'affiche sur la façade. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 28 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 28 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:42 013-06-04 오전 10:06:42Français 29| 04 Paramètres MàJ maintenant Vous pouvez utiliser Mettre à jour maintenant pour mettre à jour le logiciel via votre connexion réseau ou en utilisant une clé USB à mémoire flash. Les instructions du réseau sont indiquées ci-dessous. Les instructions de la clé USB à mémoire flash se trouvent sur cette page. 1. Sélectionnez MàJ maintenant, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Mettre à jour maintenant s'affiche. 2. L’appareil recherche en ligne la version du logiciel la plus récente. 3. S’il ne trouve pas de mise à jour, la fenêtre contextuelle « Il n'y a actuellement aucune nouvelle mise à jour pour vous. » apparaît. Appuyez sur le bouton E pour quitter. 4. S’il trouve une nouvelle version, la fenêtre contextuelle Demande de mise à jour apparaît. 5. Sélectionnez OK. L’appareil procèdera à la mise à niveau du logiciel, puis s’éteindra et se rallumera automatiquement. 6. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas OK ou Annuler en une minute, l'appareil stocke la nouvelle mise à niveau du logiciel. Vous pouvez mettre à niveau le logiciel par la suite en utilisant la fonction Mise à jour automatique. 7. Si vous sélectionnez Annuler, la mise à niveau sera annulée par l'appareil. | REMARQUE |  Lorsque la mise à niveau du système est terminée, vérifiez les informations du logiciel dans la section Informations sur le produit de l’écran Contacter Samsung.  N'éteignez pas l'appareil durant la mise à niveau du logiciel. Ceci peut provoquer le dysfonctionnement de l'appareil. Mise à jour auto Vous pouvez régler la fonction Mise à jour automatique de sorte que l'appareil télécharge de nouveaux logiciels de mise à niveau lorsqu'il est en mode Mise à jour automatique. En mode Mise à jour automatique, l'appareil est éteint mais sa connexion à Internet reste activée. Ceci permet à l'appareil de télécharger automatiquement des logiciels de mise à niveau lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé. 1. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner Mise à jour auto, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Activé ou Arrêt. Si vous sélectionnez Activé, l'appareil télécharge automatiquement le nouveau logiciel de mise à jour lorsqu'il est en mode Mise à jour automatique et hors tension. Avant de télécharger le nouveau logiciel de mise à niveau, l'appareil vous demandera si vous souhaitez l’installer à la mise sous tension de l’appareil. | REMARQUE |  Pour utiliser la fonction Mise à jour automatique, l'appareil doit être connecté à Internet. Mise à jour par USB 1. Connectez-vous sur www.samsung.com. 2. Cliquez sur SUPPORT en haut à droite de la page. 3. Entrez le numéro de modèle de l’appareil dans le champ de recherche. Une fois que vous avez entré le numéro du modèle, une liste déroulante affiche les produits correspondant aux numéros de modèle. 4. Effectuez un clic gauche sur le numéro de modèle du produit dans la liste déroulante. 5. Sur la page qui s'affiche, faites défiler puis cliquez sur Firmware Manuals & Downloads. 6. Cliquez sur Firmware au centre de la page. 7. Cliquez sur le bouton ZIP dans la colonne Fichier située sur le côté droit de la page. 8. Cliquez sur Send dans la première fenêtre contextuelle qui apparaît. Cliquez sur OK dans la seconde fenêtre contextuelle qui apparaît pour le téléchargement puis enregistrez le fichier micrologiciel sur votre PC. 9. Dézippez le dossier compressé sur l'ordinateur. Vous devriez avoir un seul dossier dézippé portant le même nom que le fichier compressé. 10. Copiez le dossier sur une clé USB à mémoire flash. 11. Vérifiez qu’aucun disque n'est inséré dans l'appareil, puis insérez la clé USB à mémoire flash dans le port USB de l'appareil. 12. Dans le menu de l'appareil, accédez à Paramètres > Assistance > Mise à jour du logiciel. 13. Sélectionnez MàJ maintenant. 14. L’appareil recherche le logiciel sur la clé USB. Lorsqu’il trouve le logiciel, la fenêtre contextuelle Demande de mise à jour apparaît. 15. Sélectionnez OK. L’appareil procèdera à la mise à niveau du logiciel, puis s’éteindra et se rallumera automatiquement. | REMARQUE |  Aucun disque ne doit être inséré dans l’appareil lors de la mise à niveau du logiciel via la prise USB.  Lorsque la mise à niveau du système est terminée, vérifiez les informations du logiciel dans la section Informations sur le produit de l’écran Contacter Samsung.  N'éteignez pas l'appareil durant la mise à niveau du logiciel. Ceci peut provoquer le dysfonctionnement de l'appareil.  Les mises à niveau logicielles via la prise USB doivent être effectuées uniquement à l’aide d’une clé USB à mémoire flash. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 29 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 29 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:43 013-06-04 오전 10:06:43| 30 Français Media Play Votre Home cinéma peut lire le contenu situé sur des disques Blu-ray/DVD/CD, des périphériques USB, des ordinateurs, des smartphones, des tablettes et sur Internet. Pour lire le contenu situé sur votre ordinateur ou un périphérique mobile, vous devez connecter l’ordinateur ou le périphérique mobile et l’appareil à votre réseau. Pour lire le contenu sur votre ordinateur, vous devez également télécharger et installer le logiciel de réseau AllShare ou posséder déjà le logiciel de réseau DLNA sur votre ordinateur. | REMARQUE |  Les ordinateurs fonctionnant sous Windows 7 et Windows 8 possèdent le logiciel DLNA (Play To) intégré. L'écran Tout le contenu Pour tous les supports, l'écran Tout le contenu ou l'un de ses sous-écrans constituent le moyen essentiel d'accéder aux contenus enregistrés sur différents périphériques directement connectés ou reliés au réseau. Utilisation de l'écran Tout le contenu Pour accéder à l'écran Tout le contenu, sélectionnez des photos, vidéos et musique à l'écran d'accueil puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Lecture de disques disponibles dans le commerce 1. Appuyez sur le bouton ^ pour ouvrir le tiroir disque. 2. Introduisez doucement le disque dans le tiroir, face imprimée dirigée vers le haut. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton ^ pour fermer le tiroir disque. La lecture démarre automatiquement. 4. Si la lecture ne démarre pas automatiquement, appuyez sur le bouton 6 de la télécommande ou consultez la section « L'écran Tout le contenu » cidessous. Lecture de fichiers sur un périphérique USB Vous pouvez recourir à deux méthodes différentes pour lire ou afficher via votre appareil les fichiers multimédia stockés sur un périphérique USB. Méthode 1 1. Mettez l'appareil sous tension. 2. Connectez le périphérique USB sur le port USB situé à l'avant de l'appareil. La fenêtre contextuelle Nouveau périphérique connecté s'affiche. Films et séries télé Applications Photos, vidéos et musique Applications Pho vidé mus Applications Pho é Photos Vidéos Musique Tout le contenu Nv. périph. conn. Clé USB Navigateur Web Paramètres Ajouter l'application Ajouter l'application Ajouter l'application | REMARQUE |  Si la fenêtre n'apparaît pas, passez à la méthode 2. 3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner Photos, Vidéos, Musique ou Tout le contenu, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. En fonction de la manière dont le contenu est classé, vous verrez soit des dossiers, soit des fichiers individuels ou les deux types d'éléments. | REMARQUE |  Même si l’appareil affiche les dossiers de tous types de contenus, il n'affichera que les fichiers correspondant au type de contenu que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3. Par exemple, si vous avez sélectionné de la musique, vous ne pourrez visionner que les fichiers musicaux. Vous pouvez changer cette sélection en revenant à l’écran Photos, vidéos et musique puis en passant à l’étape 4 dans la méthode 2 ci-dessous. 4. Si nécessaire, servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner un dossier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Sélectionnez un fichier à visualiser ou lire, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour quitter un dossier ou sur le bouton Quitter pour revenir à l'écran d'accueil. 7. Consultez les pages 32 à 40 pour obtenir plus d'instructions concernant la méthode de contrôle de la lecture de vidéos, musiques et photos sur un périphérique USB. Méthode 2 1. Mettez l'appareil sous tension. 2. Connectez le périphérique USB sur le port USB situé à l'avant de l'appareil. 3. Sélectionnez Photos, vidéos et musique sur l'écran d'accueil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 30 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 30 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:44 013-06-04 오전 10:06:44Français 31| 05 Media Play 4. Sélectionnez les Photos, Vidéos, Musique ou Tout le contenu, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. En fonction de la manière dont le contenu est classé, vous verrez soit des dossiers, soit des fichiers individuels ou les deux types d'éléments à la fois. | REMARQUE |  Même si l’appareil affiche les dossiers de tous types de contenus, il n'affichera que les fichiers correspondant au type de contenu que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 4. Par exemple, si vous avez sélectionné de la musique, vous ne pourrez visionner que les fichiers musicaux. Vous pouvez modifier cette sélection en revenant à l’écran Photos, vidéos et musique puis en répétant l’étape 4. 5. Utilisez les boutons ◄► pour sélectionner le périphérique souhaité, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Si nécessaire, servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner un dossier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour quitter un dossier ou sur le bouton Quitter pour revenir à l'écran d'accueil. 8. Consultez les pages 32 à 40 pour obtenir plus d'instructions concernant la méthode de contrôle de la lecture de vidéos, musiques et photos sur un périphérique USB. | REMARQUE |  Si vous insérez un disque en cours de lecture de contenu sur un périphérique de stockage USB ou un téléphone, le mode de l'appareil passe automatiquement à « Disque ».  Si votre téléphone cellulaire est compatible DLNA, vous pouvez lire le contenu sans la connexion d'un câble USB. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction Réseau AllShare » à la page 31. Lecture d’un disque dont le contenu est enregistré par l’utilisateur Vous pouvez lire les fichiers multimédia que vous avez enregistrés sur des disques Blu-ray, DVD ou CD. 1. Placez un disque enregistré par l'utilisateur dans le tiroir disque en veillant à ce que l'étiquette du disque soit orientée vers le haut puis fermez le tiroir disque. La fenêtre contextuelle du périphérique connecté s’affiche. 2. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner le type de contenu que vous voulez visionner ou lire - Photos, Vidéos ou Musique - puis appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Même si l'appareil affiche les dossiers pour tous les types de contenus, il affiche uniquement les fichiers du type de contenu que vous avez sélectionné à l’Étape 2. Par exemple, si vous avez sélectionné Musique, vous ne pourrez voir que les fichiers musicaux. Vous pouvez modifier cette sélection en revenant à l'écran d'accueil et en répétant l'étape 2. 3. Un écran listant le contenu du disque apparaît. En fonction de la manière dont le contenu est classé, vous verrez soit des dossiers, soit des fichiers individuels ou les deux types d'éléments à la fois. 4. Si nécessaire, servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner un dossier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner un fichier à visionner ou à lire, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Appuyez une ou plusieurs fois sur le bouton RETURN pour quitter l'écran actuel, quitter un dossier ou revenir à l'écran d'accueil. Appuyez sur le bouton Quitter pour revenir directement à l'écran d'accueil. 7. Consultez les pages 32 à 40 pour obtenir plus d'instructions concernant la méthode de contrôle de la lecture de vidéos, musiques et photos sur un disque. Utilisation de la fonction Réseau AllShare AllShare vous permet de lire des photos, regarder des vidéos ou écouter de la musique situées sur votre ordinateur ou un périphérique compatible DLNA via l'appareil en utilisant une connexion à un réseau sans fil. Pour télécharger le logiciel AllShare AllShare facilite la récupération et la lecture de fichiers multimédias à partir d'ordinateurs et de périphériques compatibles DLNA. Toutefois, AllShare PC doit être installé sur les ordinateurs, et les périphériques mobiles doivent prendre en charge AllShare. Pour plus d'informations, visitez le portail de service et contenu de Samsung (http://link.samsung.com). | REMARQUE |  Vous risquez de rencontrer des problèmes de compatibilité en tentant de lire des fichiers multimédias via un serveur DLNA d'un autre fabricant. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 31 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 31 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:47 013-06-04 오전 10:06:47| 32 Français Media Play Lecture du contenu situé sur votre ordinateur ou un périphérique DLNA via l'appareil Connexion AllShare Ordinateur Appareil Lecture des fichiers de l’ordinateur 1. Connectez l'appareil, votre ordinateur et/ou votre périphérique DLNA compatible au même réseau sans fil. 2. Suivez les directives du manuel d’installation/ instruction du logiciel AllShare pour installer les périphériques et les fichiers à lire ou à visualiser. 3. Sélectionnez Photos, vidéos et musique sur l'écran d'accueil de l’appareil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'écran Photos, vidéos et musique apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez le type de contenu que vous souhaitez lire - Photos, Vidéos, Musique ou Tout le contenu, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Sur l’écran suivant, sélectionnez Allshare, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Dans la liste des périphériques connectés Allshare qui apparaît, sélectionnez votre ordinateur ou un autre périphérique compatible Allshare, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Un écran listant les fichiers disponibles s'affiche. 7. Sélectionnez le fichier que vous voulez lire ou visualiser, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Commander la lecture du contenu de votre ordinateur avec votre Smartphone Connexion AllShare Ordinateur Smartphone Commande des fichiers de l’ordinateur sur l'appareil Appareil Lecture des fichiers de l’ordinateur ( Disponible uniquement avec les téléphones Samsung qui prennent en charge la fonctionnalité AllShare) 1. Connectez l'appareil, votre ordinateur et votre téléphone mobile compatible DLNA au même réseau sans fil. 2. Suivez les directives du manuel d’installation/ instruction du logiciel AllShare pour installer les périphériques et les fichiers à lire ou à visualiser. 3. Sur votre ordinateur, en utilisant le logiciel AllShare, confirmez la connexion de votre téléphone. 4. Sur le téléphone, sélectionnez le fichier que vous souhaitez visualiser ou lire, puis sélectionnez le Home cinéma en tant que périphérique de lecture. 5. Sur le téléphone, démarrez la lecture. Contrôle de la lecture Vidéo Vous pouvez commander la lecture du contenu vidéo stocké sur un disque Blu-ray/DVD, un périphérique USB, un périphérique mobile ou un ordinateur. En fonction du disque ou du contenu, certaines fonctions décrites dans ce manuel peuvent ne pas être disponibles. Touches de la télécommande servant à la lecture vidéo 0 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP 1 2 1 Utilisation du menu du disque, du menu des titres, du menu contextuel et de la liste des titres DISC MENU Au cours de la lecture, appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Disque. TITLE MENU Au cours de la lecture, appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Titre. • Si le disque possède une liste de lecture, appuyez sur le bouton Afficher pour y accéder. POPUP MENU Au cours de la lecture, appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Contextuel. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 32 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 32 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:49 013-06-04 오전 10:06:49Français 33| 05 Media Play 2 Touches liées à la lecture L'appareil ne lit pas de données audio en mode Recherche, Lecture au ralenti ou Lecture pas à pas. • Pour reprendre la lecture à une vitesse normale, appuyez sur le bouton 6. 6 Permet de démarrer la lecture. 5 Permet d'arrêter la lecture. 7 Permet d’interrompre la lecture. Lecture rapide Pendant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton 3 ou . Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton 3 ou  la vitesse de lecture change. Lecture au ralenti En mode Pause, appuyez sur le bouton . Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton , la vitesse de lecture change. Lecture pas à pas En mode Pause, appuyez sur le bouton 7. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton 7, une nouvelle image apparaît. Saut de lecture Pendant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton 1 ou 2. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton 1 ou 2, le disque se déplace sur le chapitre ou le fichier précédent ou suivant. Utilisation du menu OUTILS Durant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Lire depuis le début Sélectionnez cette option pour revenir en début de film, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3D Utilisez le menu 3D pour sélectionner l'option Côte-à-côte ou Haut-bas si le contenu 3D en cours de lecture n'apparaît pas correctement en mode 3D. | REMARQUE |  N’utilisez le menu 3D que pour du contenu 3D de format Côte- à-côte ou Haut-bas. S'il est utilisé pour du contenu 2D, il ne s'affichera pas correctement. Rech. scène Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Rech. scène durant la lecture pour visualiser ou démarrer un film à partir de la scène de votre choix. | REMARQUE |  Si les informations d'index contenues dans le fichier sont endommagées ou si le fichier ne prend pas en charge l'indexage, vous ne serez pas en mesure d'utiliser la fonction Rech. scène.  Si vous utilisez la fonction DLNA après avoir connecté un ordinateur via votre réseau, la fonction Rech. scène peut ne pas être prise en charge. Rech. titres Si le disque ou le périphérique contient plusieurs films, sélectionnez cette option pour lancer un autre titre. 1. Sélectionnez Rech. titres et appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner un titre puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Rechercher des chapitres Sélectionnez cette option pour lire le chapitre de votre choix. 1. Sélectionnez Rechercher des chapitres et appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner un chapitre, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Rech. barre de temps Sélectionnez cette option pour lire le film à partir d'un point temporel spécifique. 1. Sélectionnez Rech. barre de temps et appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Servez-vous des boutons numériques pour entrer le point temporel de destination, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Vous pouvez également vous servir des boutons ◄► pour avancer dans le film ou le rembobiner. Le film effectue respectivement une avance ou un retour d'une minute à chaque fois que vous appuyez sur les boutons ◄►. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 33 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 33 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:53 013-06-04 오전 10:06:53| 34 Français Media Play Mode Répétition Sélectionnez cette option pour répéter un titre, un chapitre ou une section spécifique. - Arrêt : cette option permet de revenir en mode de lecture normale. - Titre : cette option permet de répéter la lecture d'un titre spécifique. - Chapitre : cette option permet de répéter la lecture d'un chapitre spécifique. - Répétition A-B : cette option permet de répéter la lecture d'une section spécifique. 1. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner la section A-B à répéter, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton E à l'emplacement sur lequel vous souhaitez démarrer la répétition (A). Lancez la lecture du film. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton E à l'emplacement sur lequel vous souhaitez arrêter la répétition (B). | REMARQUE |  Vous devez définir le point (B) à un intervalle d'au moins 5 secondes de temps de lecture après le point (A). Mode Image Sélectionnez cette option pour régler le mode image. - Dynamique : permet d'accentuer la netteté et la luminosité. - Standard : Choisissez ce réglage pour la plupart des applications d'affichage. - Cinéma : ce réglage est le mieux adapté au visionnage de films. - Utilisateur : Ce réglage vous permet de régler respectivement la fonction de netteté et de réduction de bruit. | REMARQUE |  Ce menu n'apparaît pas lors de l'utilisation de la fonction BD Wise. Mode égaliseur Sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser l’égaliseur. Paramètres Egaliseur Sélectionnez cette option pour régler l’égaliseur. | REMARQUE |  Ne s’affiche que lorsque le mode Égaliseur est activé. Audio Sélectionnez cette option pour régler la langue de bande son souhaitée. Sync. audio Dans certains cas, lorsque le produit est connecté à un téléviseur numérique, le signal audio peut ne pas être synchronisé avec le signal vidéo. Lorsque cela se produit, il faut régler le temps de retard audio de manière à ce qu'il corresponde au signal vidéo. Sous-titres Sélectionnez cette option pour régler la langue des sous-titres souhaitée. Param. de sous-titre Sélectionnez cette option pour régler les sous-titres souhaités. Angle Utilisé pour regarder une scène sous un autre angle. L’option Angle affiche le nombre d'angles disponibles (1/1, 1/2, 1/3, etc.). BONUSVIEW Vidéo Sélectionnez cette option pour régler l’option bonusview désirée. BONUSVIEW Audio Plein écran Permet de régler la taille de l'image vidéo. Choisissez Original, Mode1 (plus grand), ou Mode2 (le plus grand). Information Permet d'afficher les informations relatives au fichier vidéo. | REMARQUE |  Le menu Outils peut varier en fonction du disque ou du périphérique de stockage.  La lecture des fichiers vidéo au débit binaire élevé, égal ou supérieur à 20 Mbps, exerce une forte charge sur les capacités de l’appareil et risque, de ce fait, de s’interrompre en cours de lecture. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 34 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 34 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:53 013-06-04 오전 10:06:53Français 35| 05 Media Play Utilisation des menus Afficher et Options Sur l’écran listant les fichiers vidéos, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner Afficher ou Options en haut à droite, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Vidéos Afficher Date Permet d'afficher tous les dossiers contenant des vidéos classés par date. Si vous sélectionnez un dossier et appuyez sur le bouton E, toutes les vidéos contenues dans ce dossier s’affichent classées par date. Titre Permet d'afficher tous les fichiers vidéos sur le support ou le périphérique de stockage par titre. Dossier Permet d'afficher tous les dossiers contenus sur le support ou le périphérique de stockage. Options Lire élém. sél. Lire l'élément sélectionné vous permet de créer une liste de lecture en sélectionnant les fichiers spécifiques à lire. Elle fonctionne essentiellement de la même manière sur tous les supports. Consultez la section Création d'une liste de lecture à partir d'un CD à la page 37. Envoyer Sélectionnez Envoyer permet d'envoyer des fichiers sélectionnés sur des applications (Picasa, Facebook, etc.) ou des périphériques. Pour utiliser la fonction Envoyer, il vous faut établir un compte auprès du site en ligne, et y accéder en utilisant la fonction Connexion. | REMARQUE |  Les menus Affichage des options peuvent varier en fonction du disque ou du périphérique de stockage utilisé. Toutes les options peuvent ne pas s'afficher.  Les menus Afficher et Options sont généralement disponibles lorsque vous regardez des fichiers vidéos sur une clé USB à mémoire flash, un ordinateur, un disque que vous avez enregistré vous-même ou un périphérique mobile. Ils ne sont en général pas disponibles si vous regardez un disque Blu-ray, DVD ou CD du commerce. Contrôle de la lecture de Musique Vous pouvez commander la lecture du contenu musical stocké sur un DVD, CD, un périphérique USB, un périphérique mobile ou un ordinateur. En fonction du disque ou du contenu, certaines fonctions décrites dans ce manuel peuvent ne pas être disponibles. Touches de la télécommande servant à l'écoute de musique 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 DISC MENU TITLE MENU POPUP 1 4 5 3 6 2 1 Touches NUMÉRIQUES : Si les pistes numérotées sont affichées, appuyez sur le numéro d’une piste. La piste sélectionnée est alors reproduite. 2 Touches 1 2 : Permet de passer à la piste précédente/suivante. 3 Touche 5 : Permet d'arrêter la lecture d'une piste. 4 Lecture rapide (CD audio (CD-DA) uniquement) Pendant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton 3 ou . Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton 3 ou , la vitesse de lecture change. 5 Touche 7 : Mise en pause d’une piste. 6 Touche 6 : permet de lire la plage sélectionnée. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 35 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 35 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:54 013-06-04 오전 10:06:54| 36 Français Media Play Commandes de l’écran Musique 00:09 00:43 TRACK 001 TRACK 001 00:43 TRACK 002 03:56 TRACK 003 04:41 TRACK 004 04:02 TRACK 005 03:43 TRACK 006 03:40 TRACK 007 04:06 TRACK 008 03:52 TRACK 009 03:04 TRACK 010 04:02 Options off off Mise en pause d’une piste. Lecture d’une piste. Permet de revenir à la plage précédente. Permet de passer à la piste suivante. Permet de rembobiner la piste. Permet d'avancer sur la piste. 1 , Répétition d'une piste ou de toutes les pistes. Lecture des pistes dans un ordre aléatoire. Affichage de l’égaliseur. Ajustement manuel de l’égaliseur. ( Uniquement lorsque le mode Égaliseur est activé) Pour accéder aux commandes, lancez la lecture d'une piste, puis servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄► afin de passer à la commande de votre choix. | REMARQUE |  Les commandes de l’écran Musique sont accessibles uniquement lorsqu’une piste est en lecture.  Toutes les commandes ne s’affichent pas simultanément. Utilisation des menus Afficher et Options Sur l’écran listant les fichiers de musique, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner Afficher ou Options en haut à droite, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Musique Afficher Piste Permet d'afficher toutes les pistes de musique contenues sur le support ou le périphérique de stockage. Album Permet d'afficher toutes les musiques contenues sur le support ou le stockage classées par album. Artiste Permet d'afficher tous les fichiers de musique contenus sur le support ou le périphérique de stockage classés par artiste. Genre Permet d'afficher toutes les musiques contenues sur le support ou le stockage classées par genre. Dossier Permet d'afficher tous les dossiers sur le support ou périphérique de stockage. Options Lire élém. sél. Lire l'élément sélectionné vous permet de créer une liste de lecture en sélectionnant les fichiers spécifiques à lire. Elle fonctionne essentiellement de la même manière sur tous les supports. Consultez la section Création d'une liste de lecture sur un CD audio à la page 37. Envoyer Sélectionnez Envoyer permet d'envoyer des fichiers sélectionnés sur des applications (Picasa, Facebook, etc.) ou des périphériques. Pour utiliser la fonction Envoyer, il vous faut établir un compte auprès du site en ligne, et y accéder en utilisant la fonction Connexion. Extraction La fonction Extraction permet de convertir un CD audio en format mp3 et de sauvegarder les fichiers convertis sur une clé USB ou sur le périphérique mobile connecté à l'appareil. Consultez la section Extraction à la page 38. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 36 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 36 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:55 013-06-04 오전 10:06:55Français 37| 05 Media Play Information Permet d'afficher les informations relatives au contenu. Encodage Permet de gérer les options d'encodage du texte. | REMARQUE |  Le menu Options peut varier en fonction du disque ou du périphérique de stockage utilisé. Toutes les options peuvent ne pas s'afficher. Répétition des pistes d’un CD Audio Vous pouvez régler l'appareil pour répéter les pistes d’un CD audio (CD-DA/MP3). 1. Pendant la lecture, utilisez le bouton ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner dans le coin à gauche en bas de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner le mode de répétition que vous souhaitez - Arrêt, 1 musique , ou Tous – puis appuyez sur le bouton p pp y E. 00:09 00:43 TRACK 001 TRACK 001 00:43 TRACK 002 03:56 TRACK 003 04:41 TRACK 004 04:02 TRACK 005 03:43 TRACK 006 03:40 TRACK 007 04:06 TRACK 008 03:52 TRACK 009 03:04 TRACK 010 04:02 Options off off Lecture aléatoire des pistes d’un CD Audio Vous pouvez régler l'appareil pour lire les pistes d’un CD audio (CD-DA/MP3) de façon aléatoire. 1. Pendant la lecture, utilisez le bouton ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner dans le coin à gauche en bas de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour Arrêt ou Activé le mode Aléatoire et appuyez sur le bouton E. Création d'une liste de lecture à partir d'un CD 1. Lorsque l'écran Lecture est affiché, sélectionnez le bouton Options, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Le menu Options apparaît. 2. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner Lire élém. sél. puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Lire élément sélectionné apparaît. 3. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner une piste, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Une coche s’affiche à la gauche de la piste. 4. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner et cocher des pistes supplémentaires. 5. Pour retirer une piste de la liste, accéder à la piste et appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton E. La coche de la piste est retirée. 6. Une fois terminé, appuyez sur les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner Lecture, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner et cocher des pistes supplémentaires. Pour retirer une piste de la liste, accéder à la piste et appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton E. La coche de la piste est retirée. | REMARQUE |  Vous pouvez créer une liste de lecture comportant jusqu'à 99 pistes extraites de différents CD audio (CD-DA).  Lorsque vous créez une liste de lecture, l'option Lire élém. sél. est remplacée par Modif liste lec dans le menu Options.  Sur l'écran Lire élément sélectionné, vous pouvez également choisir Sélectionner tout, Tout désélectionner, et Annuler. ~ Utilisez Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner toutes les pistes. Ceci annule vos sélections de piste individuelles. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche RETURN de votre télécommande ou que vous sélectionnez Lecture puis appuyez sur le bouton E, toutes les pistes s’affichent sur l’écran de lecture de musique et l'appareil commence à lire toutes les pistes à partir de la piste 001. ~ Utilisez l’option Tout désélectionner pour désélectionner en une seule fois toutes les pistes sélectionnées. Puis sélectionnez les pistes individuelles ou utilisez Sélectionner tout puis appuyez sur le bouton RETURN de votre télécommande ou sélectionnez Lecture puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Si vous n'utilisez pas l'option Sélectionner tout ou ne sélectionnez pas de piste individuelle, la liste de lecture ne sera pas modifiée. ~ Annuler annule tout changement effectués sur l’écran de la sélection de lecture. Lorsque vous revenez à l’écran de la liste de lecture, elle sera inchangée. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 37 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 37 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:58 013-06-04 오전 10:06:58| 38 Français Media Play Extraction 1. Insérez un périphérique USB dans la prise USB située à l'avant de l'appareil. 2. Lorsque l'écran Lecture est affiché, sélectionnez le bouton Options, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Le menu Options apparaît. 3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner Extraction, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'écran Extraction s'affiche. 4. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner une piste, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Une coche s’affiche à la gauche de la piste. 5. Répétez l’étape 4 pour sélectionner et cocher des pistes supplémentaires. 6. Pour retirer une piste de la liste, accéder à la piste et appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton E. La coche de la piste est retirée. 7. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Extract. à l'aide du bouton ▲▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Extraire s'affiche. 8. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner le périphérique de stockage des fichiers extraits, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Ne débranchez pas le périphérique lorsque l'extraction est en cours d’exécution. 9. Si vous souhaitez annuler l'extraction, appuyez sur le bouton E puis sélectionnez Oui. Sélectionnez Non pour continuer l'extraction. 10. Lorsque l'opération est terminée, le message « Extract. réussie. » s'affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton E. 11. Appuyez sur la touche RETURN pour revenir à l’écran de la liste de lecture. | REMARQUE |  Cette fonction n'est pas disponible avec les CD Audio DTS.  Cette fonction n'est pas prise en charge par certains disques.  L’extraction encode la musique au format .mp3 à 192 kbps.  Dans l'écran Extraction, vous pouvez également choisir entre les options Sélectionner tout et Tout suppr. - Utilisez Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner toutes les pistes puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Cette action annule toutes vos sélections de pistes individuelles. - Utilisez Tout suppr pour désélectionner en une seule fois toutes les pistes sélectionnées. Utilisation du système Bluetooth Vous pouvez utiliser un périphérique Bluetooth pour écouter de la musique avec un son stéréo de haute qualité, tout cela sans fil ! Qu’est-ce que Bluetooth ? Le système Bluetooth est une technologie qui permet de connecter facilement entre eux des périphériques compatibles Bluetooth à l'aide d'une liaison sans fil courte distance. • Un périphérique Bluetooth peut bourdonner ou être défectueux : - Si une partie de votre corps est en contact avec le système de réception/transmission du périphérique Bluetooth ou du Home cinéma. - Lorsque l’appareil est soumis à des variations électriques liées à la présence d’obstructions (ex. : mur, coin ou cloison de bureau). - Lorsque l’appareil est exposé à des interférences électriques provenant d’appareils utilisant la même bande de fréquences (exemple : équipements médicaux, fours à micro-ondes et réseaux LAN sans fil). • Associer l'Ensemble Home cinéma et le périphérique Bluetooth, les deux étant près l’un de l’autre. • Plus la distance est grande entre l'Ensemble Home cinéma et le périphérique Bluetooth, plus la qualité de la transmission se dégrade. Si la distance excède la plage opérationnelle Bluetooth, la connexion est perdue. • Dans les zones où la réception est faible, la connexion Bluetooth peut ne pas fonctionner correctement. • La portée de réception maximale de l'Ensemble Home cinéma est de 10 m dans toutes les directions, si aucun obstacle ne se trouve sur le chemin parcouru par le signal. La connexion sera automatiquement coupée si le périphérique est hors de portée. Même si la distance est respectée, il est possible que la qualité sonore soit détériorée par des obstacles (ex. : murs, portes). • Ce périphérique sans fil peut provoquer des interférences électriques durant son fonctionnement. Pour connecter le Home cinéma à un périphérique Bluetooth Connecter Périphérique Bluetooth Vérifiez que le périphérique Bluetooth prend en charge la fonction écouteurs stéréo compatible Bluetooth. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 38 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 38 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:59 013-06-04 오전 10:06:59Français 39| 05 Media Play 1. Appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION de la télécommande de l'appareil pour afficher le message BT. 2. Sélectionnez le menu Bluetooth sur le périphérique Bluetooth que vous désirez connecter. Pour les instructions, reportez-vous au manuel d’utilisation de ce périphérique Bluetooth. 3. Sélectionnez le menu des écouteurs stéréo sur le périphérique Bluetooth. • Une liste de périphériques s’affiche. 4. Sélectionnez « [HTS]Fxxxxx » dans la liste. • Lorsque l'Ensemble Home cinéma est connecté au périphérique Bluetooth, le nom de ce périphérique Bluetooth connecté suivi du nom du Home cinéma s’affiche en façade du Home cinéma. 5. Lisez de la musique sur le périphérique connecté. • Vous pouvez maintenant écouter la musique enregistrée sur le périphérique Bluetooth connecté depuis votre Home cinéma. | REMARQUE |  Le Home cinéma prend en charge uniquement les données d’ordinateur monocarte de qualité moyenne (jusqu’à 237 kbps@48 kHz) mais il ne prend pas en charge les données d’ordinateur monocarte de haute qualité (328 kbps@44,1 kHz).  La fonctionnalité AVRCP est prise en charge. Sa fonctionnalité diffère en fonction des spécifications du périphérique connecté.  Effectuez uniquement la connexion à un périphérique Bluetooth qui prend en charge le profil A2DP.  Un seul périphérique Bluetooth peut être associé à la fois.  Les fonctions de recherche ou de connexion peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement dans les cas suivants: - En présence d’un fort champ électrique à proximité ou autour du Home cinéma. - Si plusieurs périphériques Bluetooth sont associés simultanément à l'appareil. - Si le périphérique Bluetooth est éteint, mal positionné ou s'il connaît des dysfonctionnements. - Notez que les appareils tels que les fours à microondes, les adaptateurs LAN sans fil, les lampes fluorescentes et les fours à gaz pour le chauffage des locaux utilisent la même plage de fréquences que le périphérique Bluetooth, et peuvent provoquer des interférences électriques. Pour déconnecter le périphérique Bluetooth du Home cinéma Vous pouvez déconnecter le périphérique Bluetooth du Home cinéma. Pour les instructions, reportez-vous au manuel d’utilisation de ce périphérique Bluetooth. • Lorsque le Home cinéma est déconnecté du périphérique Bluetooth, le message « DISCONNECTED » s’affiche en façade. Pour déconnecter le Home cinéma du périphérique Bluetooth Appuyez sur le bouton ( ) en façade du Home cinéma pour passer du mode BT à un autre mode ou éteindre le Home cinéma. • Le périphérique Bluetooth connecté attend un certain temps la réponse du Home cinéma avant de terminer la connexion, hormis si vous déconnectez le Home Cinéma via le changement des fonctions. (Le temps de déconnexion peut varier en fonction du périphérique Bluetooth.) | REMARQUE |  En mode Bluetooth, la connexion sera perdue si la distance entre le Home cinéma et le périphérique Bluetooth dépasse 10 m. Lorsque le périphérique Bluetooth est replacé dans la portée conseillée ou lorsque vous le redémarrez, vous devez apparier à nouveau le périphérique et le Home cinéma pour les reconnecter.  En mode Bluetooth, l’économiseur d’écran s’active si le périphérique Bluetooth reste en l’état Prêt pendant 5 minutes. Pour reconnecter le périphérique Bluetooth, désactivez l’économiseur d’écran puis connectez le périphérique. Pour désactiver l’économiseur d’écran, appuyez sur n’importe quel bouton de la télécommande (le bouton Volume, une touche numérique, etc.) Visionnage des photos Vous pouvez visionner les photos contenues dans un DVD, une mémoire USB, un périphérique mobile ou un ordinateur. Utilisation du menu Outils Durant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS. Précédent Sélectionnez cette option pour déplacer l'image précédente. Suivant Sélectionnez cette option pour déplacer l'image suivante. Lancer/Arrêter le diaporama Sélectionnez cette option pour lire ou mettre en pause le diaporama. Paramètres du diaporama  Vitesse : Sélectionnez cette option pour régler la vitesse du diaporama.  Effets : Sélectionnez cette option pour régler les effets spéciaux du diaporama. Zoom Sélectionnez cette option pour agrandir l'image actuellement sélectionnée. (Agrandissement jusqu'à 4 fois la taille réelle) HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 39 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 39 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:00 013-06-04 오전 10:07:00| 40 Français Media Play Pivoter Sélectionnez cette option pour faire tourner l'image. (Ceci entraînera la rotation de l'image dans le sens des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans le sens inverse.) Fond musical Sélectionnez cette option pour écouter de la musique tout en visionnant un diaporama. Paramètres  Mode Image - Dynamique : Cette option permet d'accroître la netteté. - Standard : Choisissez cette option pour la plupart des applications de visualisation. - Cinéma : Ceci est le réglage le mieux adapté au visionnage de films. - Utilisateur : Ce réglage vous permet de régler respectivement la fonction de netteté et de réduction de bruit.  Information : Permet d'afficher les informations concernant l’image. Mode égaliseur Personnalisez vos préférences de son à l'aide des paramètres de l'égaliseur. Paramètres Egaliseur Cette fonction est également disponible lorsque Mode égaliseur est Activé. | REMARQUE |  Le menu Options peut varier en fonction du disque ou du périphérique de stockage utilisé. Toutes les options peuvent ne pas s'afficher.  Pour activer la fonction de musique de fond, le fichier photo et le fichier musical doivent être contenus sur le même support de stockage. Cependant, la qualité sonore peut être affectée par le débit binaire du fichier MP3, la taille de la photo et la méthode d'encodage utilisée.  Vous ne pouvez pas agrandir les sous-titres et les graphiques PG pour les afficher en mode plein écran. Utilisation des menus Affichage et Options en cas de visualisation de la liste des fichiers photos Photos Afficher Date Permet de grouper tous les fichiers photos sur le support ou périphérique de stockage par date. Cliquez sur un groupe pour lire les photos dans ce groupe. Titre Permet d'afficher tous les fichiers photos sur le support ou périphérique de stockage par titre. Dossier Permet d'afficher tous les dossiers sur le support ou périphérique de stockage. Options Diaporama Permet de démarrer le diaporama. Permet d'afficher tous les fichiers dans le dossier actuel, l'un après l'autre. Si vous souhaitez créer un diaporama avec un groupe de photos sélectionnées, voir Lire l'élément sélectionné ci-dessous. Lire élém. sél. Lire l'élément sélectionné vous permet de créer une liste de lecture en sélectionnant les fichiers spécifiques à lire. Elle fonctionne essentiellement de la même manière sur tous les supports. Consultez la section Création d'une liste de lecture sur un CD audio à la page 37. Envoyer Sélectionnez Envoyer pour envoyer des fichiers sélectionnés sur des applications en ligne (Picasa, Facebook, etc.) ou des périphériques. Pour utiliser la fonction Envoyer, il vous faut établir un compte auprès du site en ligne, et y accéder en utilisant la fonction Connexion. | REMARQUE |  Le menu Options peut varier en fonction du disque ou du périphérique de stockage utilisé. Toutes les options peuvent ne pas s'afficher. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 40 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 40 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:01 013-06-04 오전 10:07:01Français 41| 05 Media Play Ecouter la radio Utilisation des touches de la télécommande 1. Appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION pour sélectionner FM. 2. Syntonisez la station désirée. • Syntonisation préréglée 1 : Appuyez sur la touche 5 pour sélectionner Prédéfini puis appuyez sur la touche TUNING/CH (,.) pour sélectionner la station préréglée. - Avant de syntoniser des stations préréglées, vous devez ajouter les stations préréglées à la mémoire de l'appareil. Reportez-vous à la page 42 pour obtenir des instructions. • Syntonisation manuelle : Appuyez sur la touche 5 pour sélectionner Manuel puis appuyez sur la touche TUNING/CH (,.) pour syntoniser une fréquence inférieure ou supérieure. • Syntonisation automatique : Appuyez sur la touche 5 pour sélectionner Manuel puis appuyez et maintenez la touche TUNING/ CH (,.) pour rechercher la fréquence automatiquement. Réglage Mono/Stéréo Appuyez sur la touche MO/ST. • À chaque appui sur la touche, le son commute entre STEREO et MONO. • Dans une région où la réception est faible, sélectionnez MONO pour une diffusion claire et sans interférence. Préréglage des stations Exemple : Préréglage de FM 89.10 dans la mémoire. 1. Appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION pour sélectionner FM. 2. Appuyez sur la touche TUNING/CH (,.) pour sélectionner <89.10>. 3. Appuyez sur la touche TUNER MEMORY. • NUMBER clignote sur l’écran. 4. Appuyez à nouveau sur la touche TUNER MEMORY. • Appuyez sur la touche TUNER MEMORY avant que NUMBER disparaisse lui-même de l’écran. • Après avoir appuyé sur la touche TUNER MEMORY, NUMBER disparaît de l’écran et la station est stockée en mémoire. 5. Pour prérégler une autre station, répétez les étapes 2 à 4. • Pour syntoniser une station préréglée, appuyez sur le bouton 5 pour sélectionner Préréglage puis appuyez sur le bouton TUNING/CH (,.) pour sélectionner la station préréglée. Utilisation des touches de contrôle d’effets spéciaux de la télécommande Fonction EFFET SONORE SOUND EFFECT Vous permet de sélectionner un mode qui optimise le son. 1. Appuyez sur la touche SOUND EFFECT. 2. Appuyez sur les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner le mode souhaité. DSP, Dolby Pro Logic II ou Mode SFE. 3. Appuyez sur les touches ◄► pour sélectionner l’effet sonore souhaité. ❑ DSP MP3 Enhancer  Power Bass  Football  Arrêt • MP3 Enhancer : cette fonction permet d’optimiser votre expérience sonore (ex. : musique mp3) Vous pouvez effectuer une mise à l’échelle du son MP3 (24 kHz, 8 bits) vers un son de CD (44,1 kHz, 16 bits). • Power Bass : cette fonction augmente le niveau du volume des basses et procure des effets de basse plus puissants. • Football : permet de créer le son comme un stade plus dynamique et réaliste. Pour écouter le football, soccer, et autres événements sportifs. • Arrêt : Sélectionnez cette option pour une écoute normale. ❑ Dolby Pro Logic II Cinéma  Musique  Jeux  Matrix  Pro Logic  Arrêt • Cinéma : ajoute du réalisme à la bande son. • Musique : lorsque vous écoutez de la musique, vous pouvez faire l’expérience d’effets sonores comme si vous écoutiez la performance réelle. • Jeux : améliore la qualité sonore du jeu. • Matrix : sélectionnez cette option pour obtenir un son ambiophonique multicanaux de qualité. • Pro Logic : sélectionnez cette option pour écouter une source sonore 2CH en son ambiophonique 5.1CH avec toutes les enceintes sous tension. - Il est possible qu’une enceinte spécifique ne puisse pas émettre de son en fonction du signal d’entrée. • Arrêt : sélectionnez cette option pour une écoute normale. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 41 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 41 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:01 013-06-04 오전 10:07:01| 42 Français Media Play ❑ Mode SFE Symphony Hall à Boston (Salle 1)  Philharmonic Hall à Bratislava (Salle 2)  Club jazz à Séoul B  Eglise à Séoul  Amphithéâtre (Rock)  Arrêt • Symphony Hall à Boston (Salle 1) : fournit des voix claires comme dans une salle de concert. • Philharmonic Hall à Bratislava (Salle 2) : fournit également un son clair comme dans une salle de concert, mais moins puissant qu’avec la fonction HALL1. • Club jazz à Séoul B : Réglage recommandé pour le jazz. • Eglise à Séoul : Donne l’impression de se trouver dans une cathédrale. • Amphithéâtre (Rock) : Réglage recommandé pour le rock. • Arrêt : Sélectionnez cette option pour une écoute normale. Son 3D 3D SOUND Vous pouvez profiter d’un son plus naturel et ambiophonique clair avec des tonalités enrichies par ajustement de la profondeur du son à l’aide des options de niveau. Arrêt  Elevé  Faible | REMARQUE |  Le son 3D n'est pas disponible en mode FM. Son du téléviseur TV SOUND Vous pouvez écouter le son via Haut-parleurs Home Cinéma ou Haut-parleur TV avec le bouton TV SOUND. 1. Connectez le câble HDMI au téléviseur et au Home cinéma. (Reportez-vous en page 17) 2. Placez le Home cinéma et le téléviseur connectés sur Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Activé. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton TV SOUND de la télécommande. 4. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton TV SOUND, TV SOUND ON/OFF clignote brièvement à l'écran sur la façade puis passe à D. IN. - TV SOUND ON (SON DU TÉLÉVISEUR ACTIVÉ) : émet le son jusqu'aux Hautparleurs Home Cinéma. - TV SOUND OFF (SON DU TÉLÉVISEUR DÉSACTIVÉ) : émet jusqu'aux Haut-parleur TV connectés par Anynet+. ❑ Utilisez dans ce cas. 1) Si vous voulez écouter le son à travers les enceintes du Home cinéma lorsque vous regardez la télévision. 2) Si vous voulez écouter le son à partir d'une clé USB branchée au téléviseur à travers les enceintes du Home cinéma. ❑ Spécification de prise en charge TV SOUND ON/OFF Téléviseur connecté Paramètre Anynet+ (HDMICEC) TV Sound ON TV Sound OFF Téléviseur prenant en charge le paramètre Anynet+ (HDMICEC) MARCHE O O ARRÊT O X Téléviseur ne prenant pas en charge le paramètre Anynet+ (HDMICEC) Aucune opération O X HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 42 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 42 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:02 013-06-04 오전 10:07:02Français 43| 06 Services Réseau Vous pouvez profiter de différents services réseau tels qu’une lecture vidéo en transit ou une application en ligne en connectant l'appareil au réseau. Pour utiliser les services réseau, vous devez d’abord : 1. Connectez l'appareil au réseau. (Reportez-vous en page 18) 2. Configurez les paramètres réseau. (reportez-vous aux pages 25 à 27) Connexion à votre compte Samsung Avant d’accéder aux Films et Émissions de télévision ou Applications, nous vous suggérons de vous connecter à votre compte Samsung. Pour vous connecter à votre compte Samsung, suivez ces étapes : 1. Lorsque l’écran d’accueil est affiché, appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A). L’écran Connexion s’affiche. 2. Sélectionnez le champ E-mail et appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle du clavier s’affiche. 3. A l’aide du clavier, saisissez votre adresse e-mail. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Terminé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Connexion s’affiche à nouveau. 4. Sélectionnez le champ Mot de passe et appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle du clavier s’affiche. 5. A l’aide du clavier, saisissez votre mot de passe. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Terminé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Connexion s’affiche à nouveau. 6. Pour faciliter votre prochaine connexion, sélectionnez Connexion auto, et appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. Sélectionnez Connex. et appuyez sur le bouton E. L’appareil vous connecte à votre compte. L’e-mail de votre compte est affiché en bas à gauche de l’écran. | REMARQUE |  Si vous avez sélectionné Connexion auto, lors de votre prochaine connexion, l’appareil entrera automatiquement votre e-mail et votre mot de passe. Vous devez simplement sélectionner Connexion.  Si votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe ne sont pas affichés lorsque l’écran Connexion apparaît, sélectionnez le bouton possédant la flèche pointant vers le bas accompagnant le champ Email, et appuyez sur le bouton E. Une liste déroulante de tous vos comptes enregistrés s’affiche. Sélectionnez votre compte puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’appareil remplit les champs E-mail et Mot de passe.  Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A) après vous être connecté, la fenêtre contextuelle Mon compte apparaît. Dans la fenêtre contextuelle, vous pouvez sélectionner Déconnexion, Modifier les informations du compte, Établir une liaison avec les comptes du service, Retirer le compte du périphérique et Désactiver le compte.  Pour louer des films et acheter des applications payantes, vous devez posséder une carte de crédit enregistrée sur votre compte. Si aucune carte n’est enregistrée, sélectionnez Modifier les informations du compte. Sur la page Modifier les informations du compte, sélectionnez Enregistrer carte et appuyez sur le bouton E, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Avant d’utiliser Films et Émissions de télévision ou Applications Si vous n’avez pas configuré Smart Hub, lorsque vous utilisez Films et Émissions de télévision ou Applications pour la première fois, l’appareil vous demandera d’effectuer la procédure de configuration Smart Hub. 1. Sur l’écran d’accueil, sélectionnez Films et séries télé ou Applications, et appuyez sur le bouton E. Si vous avez sélectionné Applications, passez à l'étape 4. 2. Si vous avez sélectionné Films et séries télé, la fenêtre contextuelle Smart Hub apparaît en vous demandant de configurer Smart Hub. Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Bienvenue s’affiche. 3. Sélectionnez Démarrer et appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Conditions générales, Politique de confidentialité Smart Hub s’affiche. 4. Sur cet écran, vous devez lire et accepter les Conditions générales et la Politique de confidentialité de Smart Hub pour utiliser leurs services. 5. Déroulez le texte et cliquez sur les boutons Afficher les détails pour prendre connaissance de tous les documents. 6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, revenez au début du texte au premier champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton E pour accepter les Conditions générales et la Politique de confidentialité. 7. Appuyez deux fois sur le bouton ► pour accéder à l’écran Notifications complémentaires de confidentialité. 8. Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les détails pour lire la totalité de la notification. 9. La lecture terminée, revenez au début du texte au premier champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Il n'est pas nécessaire d’accepter la Notification complémentaire de confidentialité, mais une ou plusieurs des dispositions ou fonctionnalités Smart TV peuvent ne pas être disponibles si vous ne le faites pas. 10. Appuyez deux fois sur le bouton ►. L'écran Configuration terminée apparaît. Appuyez sur le bouton E. Services Réseau HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 43 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 43 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:04 013-06-04 오전 10:07:04| 44 Français Services Réseau Utilisation de Films et Émissions de télévision Vous pouvez télécharger ou lire en continu des films et des émissions de télévision payants ou gratuits et les regarder sur votre téléviseur. Films et séries télé Recommandé Recommandé Favoris Recommandé Films Emissions TV Acheté 1. Sur l’écran d’accueil, sélectionnez Films et séries télé, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez entre les films Recommandé ou Recommandé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La page relative à ce film s’affiche. OU Utilisez le bouton ▼ pour accéder au bas de l’écran. Sélectionnez Favoris, Recommandé, Films, Emissions TV ou Acheté, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Sur la page qui s’affiche, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner une émission ou un film, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Sur l’écran Émissions de télévision ou Films, vous pouvez également sélectionner Nouveautés, Le plus populaire ou Genres pour voir davantage d’émissions ou de films disponibles. Sur l’écran Genre, utilisez les touches ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner un Genre, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour effectuer une sélection sur une page affichant des émissions de télévision ou des films, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Pour regarder une sélection, sélectionnez Regarder maintenant, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Un écran de sélection s’affiche listant divers emplacements à partir desquels vous pouvez louer le film ainsi que son prix. 4. Sélectionnez un emplacement et appuyez sur le bouton E. Suivez les indications à l’écran pour démarrer le film. | REMARQUE |  Si vous ne vous êtes pas connecté à votre compte Samsung, l’écran Connexion s’affiche après l’étape 3 et vous devez vous connecter.  Si vous n’avez pas de carte de crédit associée à votre compte Samsung, après vous être connecté, l’écran Enregistrer une carte s’affiche. Suivez les indications portées à l’écran. Vous devez avoir une carte de crédit enregistrée sur votre compte pour louer des films et acheter des applications payantes. Utilisation de Applications Cette option vous permet de télécharger les applications depuis l'Internet, et d'accéder à diverses applications gratuites ou payantes que vous pouvez ensuite visionner sur votre téléviseur. Pour accéder à certaines applications, vous devez posséder un compte Samsung. L'écran Applications d'un coup d'œil Samsung TV 2 3 4 5 Navigateur Web Applications Applications Plus d'applis 1 Recommandé Mes applis Applications 1 2 3 4 1 Recommandé : affiche les contenus recommandés gérés par Samsung. Cette option vous permet d'avoir accès aux applications payantes ou gratuites que vous pouvez télécharger. 2 Applications représentées : utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour mettre l’Application représentée affichée en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3 Mes applis : affiche votre galerie personnelle d'applications modifiables sur l'écran Toutes les applis téléchargées. 4 Plus d'applis : Sélectionnez Plus d'applis pour accéder à l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées sur lequel vous pouvez ajouter, modifier et supprimer des applications et voir toutes les applications téléchargées. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 44 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 44 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:05 013-06-04 오전 10:07:05Français 45| 06 Services Réseau Téléchargement des applications Vous pouvez télécharger des applications payantes ou gratuites via Samsung Apps. 1. Sur l’écran Apps, sélectionnez Samsung Apps, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Samsung Apps apparaît. 2. Sous Nouveautés, sur la largeur du haut de l’écran, s’affiche une série de nouvelles applications. Utilisez les boutons ◄► pour passer d’une application à l’autre vers la gauche ou vers la droite, puis sélectionnez une application. Appuyez sur le bouton E pour afficher davantage d’informations concernant cette application. Si l’application est gratuite, sélectionnez Téléch., puis appuyez sur le bouton E pour télécharger l’application. Si l’application est payante, sélectionnez Ach., puis appuyez sur le bouton E et suivez les instructions portées à l’écran. | REMARQUE |  Pour acheter une application, vous devez être connecté à votre compte Samsung et posséder une carte de crédit enregistrée sur ce compte. Appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A) de votre télécommande pour vous connecter.  Si vous n’avez pas de carte enregistrée, après vous être connecté, appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A) à nouveau et sélectionnez Modifier les informations du compte dans la fenêtre contextuelle qui apparaît. Sur la page Modifier les informations du compte, sélectionnez Enregistrer une carte, puis suivez les instructions portées à l’écran.  Vous pouvez également accéder et télécharger des applications à partir des catégories listées sur la gauche de l’écran. Pour les instructions, reportezvous à l'étape 4. 3. Lorsque l’application a été téléchargée, sélectionnez Exécuter, puis appuyez sur le bouton E pour lancer à présent l’application. Pour lancer l’application ultérieurement, appuyez sur le bouton RETURN. Dans tous les cas, l’icône de l’application apparaîtra sur l’écran Applications. 4. Pour visualiser plus d’applications, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour passer à la liste des catégories du côté gauche de l’écran. 5. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner une catégorie. Chaque fois que vous déplacez la surbrillance sur une autre catégorie, un nouvel ensemble d'applications s'affiche sur la droite. 6. Utilisez le bouton ► pour passer aux applications et les boutons ▲▼◄► pour passer d’une application à une autre. 7. Pour davantage d’informations concernant une application, sélectionnez-la, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 8. Pour télécharger l’application, suivez les indications des étapes 2 et 3. Démarrer une application 1. Sélectionnez Applications sur l'écran Accueil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sur l’écran Applications, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner une application, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’application démarre. Utilisation de l'écran Toutes les applis téléchargées Plus d'applis WebBrowser WebBrowser Catégorie : XXXXX | Version : X.XXX | Taille : XX.XKB Samsung Apps Vue : Date téléchargement Options 1 /23 Stockage 109.48 MB / 629.43 MB L’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées liste les applications que vous avez téléchargées et vous permet : • De trier les applications sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées par Date téléchargement, Ouvert récemment et Titre. • D’attribuer un numéro de fonctions du menu Options aux applications listées dans la section Mes applis de l’écran Applications qui inclut la mise à jour des applications, le déplacement des applications dans un dossier, la suppression des applications de Mes applis et le verrouillage des applications. • De démarrer les applications. Trier les applications Pour trier les applications sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, suivez ces étapes : 1. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Applications, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sur l’écran Applications, utilisez le bouton ▼ pour accéder à la Zone active téléchargée au bas de la page, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour passer à Afficher en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 4. Dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît, sélectionnez Date téléchargement, Ouvert récemment ou Titre, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Les applications de l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées sont triées selon le critère que vous avez retenu. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 45 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 45 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:11 013-06-04 오전 10:07:11| 46 Français Services Réseau Utilisation de fonctions du menu Options Verr / Déverr L’utilisation de la fonction Verrouiller/Déverrouiller et du code PIN de sécurité vous permet de verrouiller les applications afin qu’elles ne puissent être démarrées depuis l’écran Applications ou depuis l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées. Le code PIN par défaut est 0000. 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Verr / Déverr, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Lorsque Verrouiller le service apparaît, saisissez le code PIN en utilisant les touches numériques de votre télécommande. 4. Pour verrouiller une application, sélectionnez cette application, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Un verrou apparaît sur l’application. Répétez pour verrouiller individuellement une autre application. 5. Pour déverrouiller une application verrouillée, sélectionnez cette application, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Pour verrouiller toutes les applications en une fois, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour sélectionner le bouton Verr. tout, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. Pour déverrouiller toutes les applications verrouillées en une fois, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour sélectionner le bouton Déverr. tout, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 8. Appuyez deux fois sur le bouton RETURN pour revenir à l’écran Applications. Les applications verrouillées affichent un verrou en haut à droite. Modif mes applis Modifier mes applis vous permet d’ajouter et de supprimer des applications de Mes applis. Il vous permet également de changer la position d’une application dans Mes applis. Ajouter une application à Mes applis. 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Modifier mes applis, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Modifier mes applis apparaît. 3. Sélectionnez une application en couleur dans la rangée supérieure des applications, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’icône de l’application en couleur apparaît dans la zone Mes applis audessous et l’icône de l’application dans la rangée supérieure est grisée. | REMARQUE |  Les applications grisées sont déjà dans Mes applis. 4. Lorsque vous revenez à l’écran Applications, l’application s’affiche dans la zone Mes applis. Supprimer une application de Mes applis 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Modif mes applis, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Modifier mes applis apparaît. 3. Sélectionnez l’application que vous souhaitez supprimer de Mes applis, appuyez sur le bouton E, puis sur les boutons ▲▼◄► dans la direction de la . La fenêtre contextuelle Retirer de mes applis apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Lorsque vous revenez à l’écran Applications, l’application a été retirée de la zone Mes applis. Déplacer une application dans Mes applis 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Modif mes applis, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Modifier mes applis apparaît. 3. Sélectionnez l’application que vous souhaitez déplacer dans Mes applis, appuyez sur le bouton E puis sur les boutons ▲▼◄► pour déplacer l’icône de l’application dans la direction de l’une des flèches (<, >, ^, etc.) qui apparaît autour de l’icône. L’icône de l’application se déplace dans la direction que vous avez choisie. 4. Lorsque vous avez placé l’icône de l’application à l’emplacement souhaité, appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Lorsque vous revenez à l’écran Applications, l’application est positionnée à l’emplacement que vous avez sélectionné. Créer dossier L’option Créer dossier vous permet de créer un dossier sur l’écran Téléchargé dans lequel vous pouvez placer les applications. 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Créer dossier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Régler le nom de dossier apparaît. 3. Appuyez sur le bouton E. Le clavier apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez le bouton Effacer sur le côté droit et appuyez sur le bouton E pour retirer Dossier 1 du champ d’entrée. Puis, à l’aide du clavier, entrez le nom que vous souhaitez appliquer au dossier. 5. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Terminé sur le côté droit, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle apparaît à nouveau. 6. Sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. Le nouveau dossier s’affiche dans la liste des applications du côté gauche de l’écran. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 46 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 46 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:17 013-06-04 오전 10:07:17Français 47| 06 Services Réseau Dépl. ds doss. L’option Déplacer vers un dossier vous permet de déplacer des applications vers le dossier de votre choix. 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Dépl. ds doss., puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Déplacer vers un dossier apparaît. 3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour vous déplacer vers une application, puis appuyez sur le bouton E pour sélectionner cette application. Une coche s’affiche dans le coin supérieur gauche de l’application. 4. Pour désélectionner une application, appuyez sur le bouton E. La coche disparaît. 5. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner des applications supplémentaires. | REMARQUE |  Pour sélectionner toutes les applications téléchargées, sélectionnez Sélectionner tout en haut à droite de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour désélectionner toutes les applications, sélectionnez Tout désélectionner en haut à droite de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Sélec. dossier, en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Sélectionner le dossier apparaît. 7. Dans la fenêtre contextuelle Sélectionner le dossier, utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner le dossier dans lequel vous souhaitez déplacer l’application que vous avez sélectionnée, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 8. La fenêtre contextuelle Applications déplacées apparaît. Appuyez sur le bouton E. 9. Pour ouvrir le dossier, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour mettre le dossier en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Renommer doss. L’option Renommer le dossier vous permet de renommer un dossier existant. 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Renommer doss., puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Renommer le dossier apparaît et un dossier est en surbrillance. 3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour mettre le dossier de votre choix en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Renommer apparaît. 4. Appuyez sur le bouton E. Le clavier apparaît. 5. Entrez le nouveau nom pour le dossier. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé sur le côté droit, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Renommer réapparaît en affichant le nouveau nom. 6. Sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. Le dossier est renommé. 7. Sélectionnez Fermer sur le côté droit de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Supprimer L’option Supprimer vous permet de supprimer des applications et des dossiers à partir de l’écran Mes applis. Si un dossier contient des applications, le dossier et les applications sont supprimés ensemble. L’option Supprimer retire les applications de manière permanente. Si vous décidez d’utiliser une application que vous avez supprimée, vous devez la télécharger à nouveau. 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 2. Sélectionnez Supprimer et appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Supprimer apparaît. 3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour vous déplacer vers une application ou un dossier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E pour la(le) sélectionner. Une coche s’affiche dans le coin supérieur gauche de l’application ou du dossier que vous avez sélectionné(e). 4. Pour désélectionner une application, appuyez sur le bouton E. La coche disparaît. 5. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner des applications ou des dossiers supplémentaires. | REMARQUE |  Pour sélectionner toutes les applications téléchargées, sélectionnez Sélectionner tout en haut à droite de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour désélectionner toutes les applications, sélectionnez Tout désélectionner en haut à droite de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Lorsque vous avez réalisé toutes vos sélections, sélectionnez Supprimer en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle de suppression s'affiche. 7. Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur le bouton E. Toutes les applications que vous avez sélectionnées sont supprimées. | REMARQUE |  Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer immédiatement une application ou un dossier verrouillé(e). Si vous sélectionnez une application ou un dossier verrouillé(e) pour la(le) supprimer, lorsque vous effectuez l’étape 7, la fenêtre contextuelle Service verrouillé apparaît. Entrez le code PIN de sécurité dans la fenêtre contextuelle, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Le verrou sera libéré et l’application ou le dossier sera supprimé(e). MàJ applis L’option Mettre à jour les applications permet de rechercher automatiquement sur Internet les versions mises à jour des applications que vous avez téléchargées et de les mettre à jour lorsque de nouvelles versions sont disponibles. 1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 47 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 47 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:17 013-06-04 오전 10:07:17| 48 Français Services Réseau 2. Sélectionnez MàJ applis, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. L’appareil recherche sur Internet les nouvelles versions de vos applications. Si de nouvelles applications sont disponibles, la fenêtre contextuelle Mettre à jour les applications apparaît. 4. Pour télécharger la mise à jour d’une application particulière, mettez l’application en surbrillance et appuyez sur le bouton E. Une coche s’affiche à la gauche de l’application. 5. Pour désélectionner l’application, mettez-la en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Pour sélectionner toutes les mises à jour, sélectionnez Sélectionner tout à droite de la fenêtre contextuelle, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour désélectionner toutes les mises à jour, sélectionnez Tout désélectionner, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Lorsque vous avez sélectionné les mises à jours que vous souhaitez télécharger, sélectionnez MAJ sur le côté droit de la fenêtre contextuelle, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. L’appareil télécharge les mises à jour que vous avez choisies. Une barre de téléchargement s’affiche dans chaque icône d’application pour indiquer qu’une mise à jour de cette application est téléchargée. Le téléchargement est terminé lorsque les barres de téléchargement disparaissent. Screen Mirroring La fonction de mise en miroir vous permet de voir l’écran de votre smartphone ou de votre périphérique intelligent sur le téléviseur que vous avez connecté au Home cinéma. 1. Avec l’écran d’accueil du Blu-ray affiché, appuyez sur le bouton BLEU (D) de la télécommande. L'écran Screen Mirroring apparaît. 2. Lancez AllShare Cast sur votre périphérique. 3. Sur votre périphérique, localisez le nom du Home cinéma dans la liste des périphériques disponibles et sélectionnez-le. 4. Le téléviseur affiche un message de connexion en cours (par exemple, Connexion à Android_92gb…) puis il affiche le message Connecté. 5. Après quelques instants, l’écran de votre périphérique s’affiche sur l’écran du téléviseur. | REMARQUE |  Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Projection de l'écran, une lecture vidéo saccadée ou des interruptions audio peuvent se produire, en fonction de votre environnement.  Vous pouvez connecter à un périphérique prenant en charge la fonction AllShare Cast. Notez que la connexion à un tel périphérique peut ne pas être prise en charge selon le fabricant. Pour en savoir plus sur la prise en charge de la connexion mobile, reportez-vous au site Web du fabricant.  Les transmissions par Bluetooth peuvent créer des interférences avec le signal Projection de l'écran. Avant d'utiliser la fonction de mise en miroir, nous vous recommandons fortement d'éteindre la fonction Bluetooth sur votre smartphone ou votre périphérique intelligent. Utilisation de Navigateur Web Vous pouvez accéder à Internet à l'aide de l'application Web Browser. Sélectionnez Navigateur Web sur l'écran d'accueil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Lorsque vous lancez Navigateur Web avec l'appareil connecté par HDMI à un téléviseur compatible BD Wise - et que BD Wise est activé - le navigateur est maximisé pour remplir l’écran et la résolution du téléviseur est automatiquement optimisée.  L'application Web Browser est incompatible avec les applications Java.  Si vous essayez de télécharger un fichier qui ne peut être enregistré, un message d'erreur s'affichera.  Le E-commerce, (pour l’achat d’appareils en ligne), n’est pas pris en charge.  ActiveX n’est pas pris en charge.  L'accès à certains sites Web ou à des navigateurs Web activés par certaines activités peut être bloqué. Navigation par lien et Navigation par pointeur Le Navigateur Web propose deux types de navigation, la navigation par pointeur et la navigation par lien. Lorsque vous lancez le navigateur pour la première fois, la navigation par pointeur est activée. Si vous naviguez dans le Navigateur Web en utilisant une souris, nous vous recommandons de maintenir la navigation par pointeur activée. Si vous naviguez dans le Navigateur Web en utilisant la télécommande, nous vous recommandons d’employer la navigation par lien au lieu de la navigation par pointeur. La navigation par lien déplace la surbrillance d’un lien au suivant dans le Navigateur Web et elle est beaucoup plus rapide que la navigation par pointeur si vous utilisez la télécommande. Pour activer la navigation par lien, suivez ces étapes : 1. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► de la télécommande pour déplacer le pointeur sur l’icône Navigateur par lien du navigateur par lien en haut à droite de l’écran. L’icône Navigateur par lien du navigateur par lien est la troisième en partant de la droite. Le pointeur sera dans la position correcte si l’icône vire au bleu et si les mots « Navig. ac lien » apparaissent sur l’écran. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton E. La navigation par lien est activée et le restera chaque fois que vous accéderez au Web Browser. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 48 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 48 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:18 013-06-04 오전 10:07:18Français 49| 06 Services Réseau Le panneau de commande en un coup d’œil Le panneau de commande, qui occupe la largeur en haut de l’écran, contient une série d’icônes qui permettent de gérer plusieurs fonctions utiles. Ces icônes sont décrites ci-dessous, en commençant par celle la plus à gauche sur l’écran. 1 http://www.samsung.com 100% 1 • : permet de passer à la page précédente. • : permet de passer à la page Web suivante. • : permet d’afficher l’écran des signets et de l’historique. Vous pouvez attribuer un signet à la page actuelle, sélectionner un signet existant et modifier ou supprimer des signets. Vous pouvez également consulter l’historique de votre navigation et sélectionner une page dans le but de la revisiter. • : permet d'accéder à l’écran d’accueil de Navigateur Web. • http://www.samsung.com : vous permet d’entrer manuellement l’adresse d’une page en utilisant la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier. • : actualise la page actuelle pour la rafraîchir à l’écran. • : permet d'ajouter la page actuellement sélectionnée à vos signets. • : vous permet de rechercher des informations en entrant des mots ou des caractères en utilisant la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier. Reportez-vous à Utilisation de la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier sur cette page. • 100% : vous permet d’agrandir ou de rétrécir l’écran de divers pourcentages. • : permet d’activer la fonction PIP. • : vous permet de commuter entre la navigation par pointeur et la navigation par lien. • : vous permet de configurer les réglages du navigateur. Reportez-vous à Utilisation du menu Réglage en page 50. • : permet de fermer le Navigateur Web. Utilisation de la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier Lorsque vous cliquez sur l’adresse http://www.samsung.com , le champ ou l’accès à un champ d’entrée de données ou de texte et que vous appuyez sur le bouton E, la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier apparaît. http://www.samsung.com Caps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0  Effacer q w e r t y u i o p ^ *  123#& a s d f g h j k l ~ @ ! Terminé z x c v b n m , . ? -  Annuler ENG www. .com /  4  Au fur et à mesure de la saisie, le texte suggéré s’affiche. 100% Pour utiliser la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier sur votre télécommande, suivez ces étapes : 1. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► de la télécommande pour déplacer la surbrillance sur la lettre ou le chiffre de votre choix. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton E pour entrer la lettre ou le chiffre dans le champ d’entrée. 3. Pour accéder aux majuscules, déplacez la surbrillance sur la touche Caps en haut à gauche, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton E avec la touche Caps en surbrillance pour accéder à nouveau aux lettres minuscules. 4. Pour accéder aux symboles et aux signes de ponctuation supplémentaires, mettez en surbrillance le bouton 123#& sur la gauche, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Pour supprimer un caractère saisi, déplacez la surbrillance sur le bouton , puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Pour supprimer tous les caractères saisis, déplacez la surbrillance sur le bouton Effacer, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. Une fois la saisie terminée, déplacez la surbrillance sur le bouton Terminé, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. | REMARQUE |  Si vous disposez d’un clavier sans fil connecté à votre appareil, vous pouvez utiliser ce clavier sans fil pour saisir les lettres, les chiffres, les symboles et la ponctuation. Notez que le clavier sans fil fonctionnera uniquement lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier apparaît et qu’il peut uniquement être utilisé pour saisir les lettres, les chiffres, les symboles et la ponctuation. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 49 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 49 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:19 013-06-04 오전 10:07:19| 50 Français Services Réseau Options de la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier Pour accéder aux options de la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier, mettez en surbrillance le bouton situé en bas à gauche du clavier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Langue Permet de sélectionner la langue pour le clavier. Vous pouvez sélectionner Anglais, Français, Russe, etc. Texte recommandé Le clavier suggère les mots recommandés lorsque vous entrez du texte. Vous pouvez Activé ou Arrêt cette fonction. Prédiction de la lettre suivante Le clavier prédit la lettre suivante lorsque vous tapez des lettres. Les prédictions apparaissent dans un cercle entourant la lettre que vous venez d’entrer. Vous pouvez sélectionner la lettre prédite ou passer à une autre lettre. Vous pouvez Activé ou Arrêt cette fonction. Utilisation du menu Réglage Le menu Réglage contient des fonctions qui gèrent le fonctionnement du navigateur ainsi que des fonctions de sécurité pour ce dernier. Pour ouvrir le menu Réglage, mettez en surbrillance l’icône sur le panneau de commande, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour sélectionner une option dans le menu de réglage, mettez cette option en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. http://www.samsung.com Activer la saisie Sites approuvés Navigation privée activée Param. navigateur Web Aide Fermer 100% Activer la saisie/ Désactiver la saisie Permet d'activer (Activé) et de désactiver (Arrêt) la fonction de capture. Lorsque la fonction de capture est activée, vous pouvez déplacer une page Web vers le haut et vers le bas sans faire glisser la barre de défilement. La fonction de capture est disponible uniquement en navigation par pointeur. Sites approuvés Cette option vous permet de restreindre l’accès des enfants aux pages Web inappropriées en autorisant uniquement l’accès aux sites Web que vous avez enregistrés. L’écran demandant le code PIN apparaît lors de chaque accès à l’option Sites approuvés. Lorsque vous accédez à Sites approuvés pour la première fois, entrez le code PIN par défaut, 0000 à l’aide des touches numériques de la télécommande. Vous pouvez changer le code PIN en utilisant la fonction Réinitialiser le mot de passe pour les sites approuvés. Voir ci-dessous.  Fonction Sites approuvés: permet d’activer ou de désactiver la fonction Sites approuvés.  Réinit mot de passe pr sites approuvés: permet de modifier le mot de passe pour les sites approuvés.  Aj. site actuel: vous permet d’ajouter le site Web actuellement affiché à la liste des sites approuvés.  Gérer les sites approuvés: vous permet de saisir les adresses URL à ajouter à la Liste des sites approuvés et de supprimer des sites de cette liste. Si vous activez la fonction Sites approuvés en ayant ajouté aucun site à la liste des sites approuvés, vous ne pourrez pas accéder à aucun sites Internet. Navigation privée activée/ désact. Permet d’activer ou de désactiver le mode Confidentialité. Lorsque ce mode est activé, le navigateur ne retient pas les URL des sites que vous visitez. Si vous souhaitez activer le mode Confidentialité, sélectionnez OK. Si le mode Confidentialité est actif, l’icône « Arrêt » apparaît en face de l’URL en haut de l’écran. Pour désactiver le mode Confidentialité, sélectionnez-le à nouveau lorsqu’il est activé. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 50 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 50 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:22 013-06-04 오전 10:07:22Français 51| 06 Services Réseau Param. navigateur Web  Déf. comme page acc. : vous pouvez régler la page d’accueil du navigateur.  Bloquer pop-up : permet d'activer ou de désactiver le blocage de fenêtre contextuelle.  Blocage de page : Vous pouvez définir si les annonces publicitaires sont bloquées et sélectionner les URL pour lesquelles ces annonces publicitaires sont bloquées.  Général : Vous pouvez supprimer les données personnelles des informations telles que l’historique des sites Web et les données de navigation (cookies, etc.), et réinitialiser tous les réglages du navigateur Web sur leurs valeurs par défaut d’usine.  Encodage : vous pouvez définir l’encodage pour les pages Web comme étant Automatique ou sélectionner manuellement le format d’encodage parmi une liste.  Curseur : vous pouvez régler la vitesse du curseur lorsque celui-ci est défini comme Pointeur et Activé et Arrêt le Curseur intelligent.  Infos navigateur : permet d’afficher le numéro de version et les informations relatives aux droits d’auteur associés au Navigateur Web. Aide Elle présente les informations de base concernant l’utilisation du Navigateur Web. | REMARQUE |  En fonction du site Web, certaines fonctions de Réglage du navigateur Web peuvent ne pas être activées. Les fonctions qui ne sont pas activées sont grisées et sont inopérantes. Lier vos comptes de service Internet à l’appareil La fonction Établir une liaison avec les comptes de service vous permet de lier votre appareil et vos comptes de service Internet afin que l’appareil vous connecte automatiquement à un service lorsque vous lancez une application qui est liée à ce service. Pour créer une liaison à un compte de service, respectez les étapes suivantes : 1. Sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A) de votre télécommande pour vous connecter à votre Compte Samsung. 2. Une fois connecté, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton ROUGE (A) de votre télécommande. 3. Sélectionnez Associer comptes du service dans la fenêtre contextuelle Mon compte, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 4. Sur l’écran Établir une liaison avec les comptes de service, sélectionnez le service que vous souhaitez lier à l’appareil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Sélectionnez Enregistrer et appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Sur l’écran Identifiant et mot de passe, entrez l’identifiant que vous utilisez pour vous connecter au service sélectionné à l’aide du clavier de la fenêtre contextuelle. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. Répétez la même procédure pour le mot de passe. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 8. Sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. BD-LIVE™ Une fois que l'appareil est connecté au réseau, vous pouvez profiter de différents contenus de services liés aux films en utilisant des disques compatibles BD-LIVE. 1. Insérez une clé USB à mémoire flash dans la prise USB située à l’avant de l'appareil, puis contrôlez sa mémoire restante. Le périphérique de mémoire doit avoir au moins 1 Go d'espace libre pour satisfaire aux exigences des services BD-LIVE. 2. Sélectionnez Paramètres sur l'écran Accueil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 3. Sélectionnez Réseau et appuyez sur le bouton E. 4. Sélectionnez Paramètres BD-Live, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 5. Sélectionnez Gestion données BD, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 6. Sélectionnez Sélection périph., puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 7. Sélectionnez le périphérique USB, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. 8. Insérez un disque Blu-ray prenant en charge la technologie BD-LIVE. 9. Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste des contenus de service BD-LIVE fournis par le fabricant de disque. | REMARQUE |  L’utilisation du service BD-LIVE ainsi que des contenus fournis peuvent varier selon le fabricant du disque. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 51 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 51 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:23 013-06-04 오전 10:07:23| 52 Français Annexes Informations complémentaires Remarque Branchements SORTIE HDMI • Selon votre téléviseur, il est possible que certaines résolutions de sortie HDMI ne fonctionnent pas. • Vous devez disposer d'une connexion HDMI pour visionner les vidéos en 3D. • Un câble HDMI trop long peut provoquer du bruit à l'écran. Si tel est le cas, réglez Couleur intense HDMI sur Arrêt dans le menu. Paramètres Paramètres 3D • Sur certains disques 3D, pour arrêter un film en cours de lecture 3D, appuyez une seule fois sur le bouton 5 Le film s’arrête et l’option 3D est désactivée. Pour changer la sélection de l’option 3D lorsque vous regardez un film 3D, appuyez une fois sur le bouton 5. Le menu Blu-ray apparaît. Appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton 5, puis sélectionnez Paramètres 3D dans le menu Blu-ray. • Selon le contenu et le positionnement de l'image sur l'écran de votre téléviseur, vous pouvez visualiser apparaître des barres verticales noires à droite ou à gauche de l'écran ou sur les deux côtés à la fois. Format TV • Selon le type de disque utilisé, certains formats d'image peuvent être indisponibles. • Si vous sélectionnez un format d’image différent de celui de votre téléviseur, il est possible que l’image affichée soit déformée. • Si vous sélectionnez l'option 16:9 Original, le téléviseur pourra afficher l'image dans un encadrement horizontal au format 4:3 Pillarbox (bandes noires sur les côtés de l’image). BD Wise (produits Samsung uniquement) • Lorsque la fonction BD Wise est activée, le paramètre Résolution est automatiquement spécifié sur BD Wise et BD Wise apparaît dans le menu Résolution. • Si l'appareil est connecté à un appareil ne prenant pas en charge BD Wise, vous ne pourrez pas utiliser la fonction BD Wise. • Pour garantir le bon fonctionnement de BD Wise, réglez l’option BD Wise de l'appareil et du téléviseur sur Activé. Sortie numérique • Assurez-vous de sélectionner la sortie numérique appropriée, sinon vous n'entendrez aucun son ou un son très fort. • Si le périphérique HDMI (récepteur AV, téléviseur) n'est pas compatible avec les formats compressés (Dolby digital, DTS), le signal audio sera émis en sortie au format PCM. • Les DVD n’ont pas habituellement de fonctionnalité audio BONUSVIEW ni d’effet sonore de navigation. • Certains disques Blu-ray ne sont pas dotés de fonctionnalité audio BONUSVIEW ni d’effet sonore de navigation. • La configuration de la sortie numérique n’affecte pas la sortie audio analogique (G/D) ou HDMI de votre téléviseur. Elle affecte les sorties audio optique et HDMI lorsque l'appareil est connecté à un récepteur AV. • Si vous lisez des pistes de son audio MPEG, le signal audio sera émis en sortie au format PCM indépendamment de vos sélections de sortie numérique (PCM ou Bitstream). • La sortie numérique peut être activée lorsque Sélect. haut-parleur est réglé sur Haut-parleur TV. Connexion internet BD-Live • Il est possible que la connexion Internet soit limitée lorsque vous utilisez des contenus BD-LIVE. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) • Selon votre téléviseur, il est possible que certaines résolutions de sortie HDMI ne fonctionnent pas. Veuillez vous reporter au manuel d'utilisation de votre téléviseur. • Cette fonction sera indisponible si le câble HDMI ne prend pas en charge le format CEC. • Si votre téléviseur Samsung dispose d'un logo Anynet+, cela signifie qu'il est compatible Anynet+. Gestion données BD • En mode mémoire externe, la lecture du disque pourra s’arrêter si vous déconnectez le périphérique USB en cours d'exécution. • Seuls les périphériques USB formatés selon le système de fichiers FAT (label de volume DOS 8.3) sont pris en charge. Nous vous recommandons d'utiliser des périphériques USB prenant en charge le protocole USB 2.0 avec une vitesse de lecture/ d'écriture supérieure ou égale à 4 Mo/s. • La fonction Resume Play (Reprise de la lecture) peut être inopérante après le formatage du périphérique de stockage. • La capacité totale de mémoire disponible pour l'option Gestion données Blu-ray peut varier selon les conditions. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 52 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 52 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:24 013-06-04 오전 10:07:24Français 53| 07 Annexes DivX® Vidéo à la demande • Pour plus d'informations concernant DivX(R) à la demande(VOD), veuillez visiter le site « http://vod. divx.com ». Affichage du lecteur • Vous ne pouvez pas changer la luminosité de la touche ni de la touche VOL +, -. Paramètre haut-parleur • Lorsque Sélect. haut-parleur est réglé sur Hautparleur TV, le son est émis depuis les enceintes du téléviseur. • L’exécution de la fonction Auto Sound Calibration (Calibrage automatique du son) prend environ 3 minutes. • Assurez-vous qu’il n’y a aucun disque dans l’appareil lorsque vous exécutez la fonction Auto Sound Calibration (Calibrage automatique du son). • Si le microphone ASC est débranché pendant la configuration du calibrage automatique du son, la configuration sera annulée. • Lorsque la fonction Auto Sound Calibration (Calibrage automatique du son) est activée, les modes DSP, Dolby Pro Logic ll et SFE ne fonctionnent pas. • Si l’appareil est connecté à des périphériques externes ou à d’autres composants (comme p. ex. AUX, D. IN), la configuration du calibrage automatique du son peut ne pas être effectuée correctement. Son HDMI • Lorsque le son HDMI sort vers les haut-parleurs du téléviseur, il subit automatiquement un mixage final en deux canaux. Fonct. Retour Audio • Lorsque la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est désactivée, la fonction Audio Return Channel (Fonct. Retour Audio) est indisponible. • L’utilisation d’un câble HDMI non certifié pour ARC (Audio Return Channel (Fonct. Retour Audio)) peut provoquer un problème de compatibilité. • La fonction ARC est uniquement disponible si un téléviseur compatible ARC est connecté. Lecture Lecture des fichiers vidéo • La lecture des fichiers vidéo au débit binaire élevé, égal ou supérieur à 20 Mbps, exerce une forte charge sur les capacités du lecteur et risque, de ce fait, de s’interrompre en cours d’exécution. Sélection de la langue de la bande son • L’indicateur ◄► ne s’affichera pas à l’écran si la section BONUSVIEW ne contient pas de réglages BONUSVIEW audio. • La disponibilité des langues proposées via la fonction de la langue de la bande son dépend des langues encodées sur le disque. Par conséquent, cette fonction ou certaines langues peuvent être indisponibles. • Certains disques Blu-ray vous autorisent à sélectionner la bande son anglaise PCM ou Dolby Digital. Sélection de la langue des sous-titres • En fonction du disque Blu-ray/DVD, vous pouvez changer la langue des sous-titres dans le Menu du disque. Appuyez sur la touche DISC MENU. • Cette fonction dépend de la sélection des soustitres encodés sur le disque et peut ne pas être disponible sur tous les disques Blu-ray/DVD. • Les informations concernant la fonction principale ou le mode BONUSVIEW s’afficheront également si le disque Blu-ray dispose d'une section BONUSVIEW. • Cette fonction modifie à la fois les sous-titres principaux et secondaires au même moment. • Le nombre total de sous-titres principaux et secondaires s’affiche. Lecture de fichiers JPEG • Vous ne pouvez pas agrandir les sous-titres ou les graphiques PG (Accord parental) pour les afficher en mode plein écran. Media Play Mode Dolby Pro Logic II • Avant de sélectionner le mode Dolby Pro Logic II, connectez votre périphérique externe aux prises AUDIO INPUT (ENTRÉE AUDIO) (L et R) de l’appareil. Si vous ne le connectez pas aux deux prises (L et R), vous ne profiterez pas du son ambiophonique. Utilisation de la touche TOOLS (OUTILS) lors du visionnage d’images. • Si le système est connecté à un téléviseur compatible BD Wise dont la fonction BD Wise est activée, le menu Picture Settings (Paramètres des images) ne s'affiche pas. • La fonction Background Music (Musique de fond) ne fonctionne que si le fichier musical et le fichier photo sont situés sur le même support de stockage. Cependant, la qualité sonore peut être affectée par le débit binaire du fichier musical MP3, la taille des photos et la méthode d'encodage utilisée. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 53 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 53 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:25 013-06-04 오전 10:07:25| 54 Français Annexes Sélections des sorties numériques Configuration PCM Train de bits (non traités) Train de bits (DTS Réencodé) Train de bits (Dolby D. Réencodé) Connexion Récepteur AV prenant en charge l'interface HDMI Flux de données audio sur disque Blu-ray PCM Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca PCM DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé * Dolby Digital Jusqu'à PCM 5,1 ca Dolby Digital DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé * Dolby Digital Plus Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca Dolby Digital Plus DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé * Dolby TrueHD Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca Dolby TrueHD DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé * DTS Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé * DTSHD High Resolution Audio Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé * DTS-HD Master Audio Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS-HD Master Audio DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé * Flux de données audio sur DVD PCM PCM 2 ca PCM 2 ca PCM 2 ca PCM 2 ca Dolby Digital Jusqu'à PCM 5,1 ca Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DTS Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS DTS DTS Résolution pour disque Blu-ray Any Décode la principale fonction audio et le flux de données audio BONUSVIEW en données PCM et ajoute des effets sonores de navigation. Émet uniquement le flux de données audio de la fonction principale, de sorte que votre récepteur AV puisse décoder les trains de bits audio. Vous n’entendrez pas de données audio BONUSVIEW ni d'effets sonores de navigation. Décode la principale fonction audio et le flux de données audio BONUSVIEW en données PCM et ajoute des effets sonores de navigation, puis réencode les données audio PCM en trains de bits DTS. Décode la principale fonction audio et le flux de données audio BONUSVIEW en données PCM et ajoute des effets sonores de navigation, puis réencode les données audio PCM en trains de bits Dolby Digital ou PCM.  Si le flux de données source est 2 ca ou mono, le réglage « Re-encoded Dolby D » (Dolby D. réencodé) ne sera pas appliqué. La sortie sera PCM 2 ca. Les disques Blu-ray peuvent contenir trois types de flux de données audio : - Principale fonction audio : Bande son de la fonction principale. - Fonctionnalité audio BONUSVIEW : Bande son supplémentaire, comportant, par exemple, le commentaire du réalisateur ou de l’acteur. - Effets sonores de navigation : Lorsque vous choisissez une navigation via un quelconque menu, les effets sonores de navigation peuvent retentir. Les effets sonores de navigation sont différents sur chaque disque Blu-ray. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 54 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 54 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:26 013-06-04 오전 10:07:26Français 55| 07 Annexes Résolution selon le type de contenus Type de contenu Configuration Disque Blu-ray E-content/Contenus numériques BD Wise Résolution du disque Blu-ray 1080p@60F Auto. Trame vidéo : Auto. Sortie UHD : Auto. 2160p@24F 2160p@24F Sortie UHD : Arrêt 1080p@24F 1080p@24F Trame vidéo : Arrêt Résolution optimale de l'entrée du téléviseur Résolution optimale de l'entrée du téléviseur Trame vidéo : Auto. (24 images/seconde)  1080p et 1080i uniquement 1080p@24F 1080p@24F 1080p 1080p@60F 1080p@60F 1080i 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 720p 576p/480p 576p/480p 576p/480p Type de contenu Configuration DVD BD Wise 480i Auto. Trame vidéo : Auto. Convers. 24 img/s DVD : Auto. Sortie UHD : Auto. 2160p@24F Sortie UHD : Arrêt 1080p@24F Convers. 24 img/s DVD : Arrêt Résolution optimale de l'entrée du téléviseur Trame vidéo : Arrêt Résolution optimale de l'entrée du téléviseur Trame vidéo : Auto. (Convers. 24 img/s DVD : Auto.)  1080p et 1080i uniquement 1080p@24F 1080p 1080p@60F 1080i 1080i 720p 720p 576p/480p 576p/480p | REMARQUE |  Si le téléviseur connecté à l'appareil ne prend pas en charge la fonction Trame vidéo ou la résolution sélectionnée, le message suivant apparaîtra : « Si, après avoir sélectionné "Oui", aucune image n'apparaît, patientez 15 secondes pour revenir à la résolution précédente. Modifier la résolution? ». Si vous sélectionnez Oui, l'écran du téléviseur deviendra blanc pendant 15 secondes, puis la résolution reviendra automatiquement à sa précédente valeur.  Si l'écran est toujours blanc après que vous ayez changé de résolution, éjectez le disque inséré, puis appuyez sur le bouton 5 situé sur le panneau supérieur de l'appareil et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de 5 secondes. Tous les réglages d'usine seront alors rétablis. Exécutez à nouveau la procédure des paramètres initiaux. Accédez ensuite aux options Paramètres > Affichage > Résolution du menu, puis sélectionnez la résolution adaptée à votre téléviseur.  Lors de l'exécution de la procédure des paramètres initiaux, sélectionnez à nouveau la langue et le format de l'image (taille et format d'écran) uniquement. La réinitialisation n'affecte pas vos paramètres réseaux, par conséquent, vous devriez pouvoir sauter l'étape de la configuration réseau et celle de la mise à jour du logiciel.  Lorsque les réglages d'usine par défaut sont rétablis, toutes les données Blu-ray utilisateur stockées sur l’appareil seront effacées.  Pour que l'utilisateur puisse utiliser le mode Trame vidéo (24Fs), le disque Blu-ray doit être doté d'une fonction 24 images. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 55 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 55 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:27 013-06-04 오전 10:07:27| 56 Français Annexes Dépannage Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous lorsque cet appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement. Si le problème que vous rencontrez n’est pas répertorié ci-dessous ou si les consignes ne vous sont d’aucune aide, éteignez l’appareil, débranchez le cordon d’alimentation et contactez le revendeur agréé le plus proche ou un centre de dépannage Samsung Electronics. Problème Vérification/Solution Le disque ne peut pas être éjecté. • Le cordon d’alimentation est-il branché correctement sur la prise secteur ? • Coupez l’alimentation électrique, puis rallumez-la. La lecture ne démarre pas. • Vérifiez le numéro de zone du disque Blu-ray/DVD. Les disques Blu-ray/DVD achetés à l’étranger peuvent ne pas être compatibles. • Les CD-ROM et DVD-ROM ne peuvent pas être lus sur ce lecteur. • Vérifiez que le niveau de classification est approprié. La lecture ne démarre pas immédiatement lorsque le bouton Lecture/Pause est actionné. • Le disque est-il déformé ou rayé ? • Nettoyez le disque. Aucun son n’est produit. • Le système home cinéma n’émet aucun son pendant la lecture rapide, au ralenti, et en mode pas à pas. • Les enceintes sont-elles correctement branchées ? La configuration des enceintes est-elle réglée correctement ? • Le disque est-il sale ou endommagé ? Le son est émis par certaines enceintes et non par l’ensemble des 8 enceintes. • Sur certains disques Blu-ray/DVD, le son est émis depuis les enceintes avant uniquement. • Vérifiez que les enceintes sont correctement raccordées. • Réglez le volume. • Lorsque vous écoutez un CD, la radio ou la télévision, le son est émis par les enceintes avant uniquement. Le son ambiophonique Dolby Digital 7.1 CH n’est pas produit. • Le disque porte-t-il l’indication « Dolby Digital 7.1 CH » ? Le son ambiophonique Dolby Digital 7.1 CH est produit uniquement si le disque est enregistré au format 7.1. • La langue audio est-elle correctement réglée sur Dolby Digital 7.1-CH dans l’affichage des informations ? La télécommande ne fonctionne pas. • Faites-vous fonctionner la télécommande dans sa plage opérationnelle et dans l’angle correct par rapport au capteur ? • Les piles sont-elles déchargées ? • Avez-vous sélectionné correctement les fonctions (TV/BD) de mode de la télécommande (TV ou BD) ? • Le disque tourne mais aucune image ne s’affiche. • La qualité est mauvaise et l’image tremble. • Le téléviseur est-il sous tension ? • Les câbles vidéo sont-ils correctement branchés ? • Le disque est-il sale ou endommagé ? • La lecture d’un disque de mauvaise fabrication peut s’avérer impossible. La langue de la bandeson et les sous-titres ne fonctionnent pas. • La langue de la bande son et les sous-titres ne fonctionnent pas si le disque n’en comporte pas. L’écran de menu n’apparaît pas même si la fonction de menu est sélectionnée. • Le disque que vous utilisez contient-il des menus ? HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 56 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 56 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:27 013-06-04 오전 10:07:27Français 57| 07 Annexes Problème Vérification/Solution Impossible de modifier le format d'image. • La lecture des disques Blu-ray/DVD 16:9 est possible en mode 16/9 Plein écran, 4/3 Boîte aux lettres ou 4/3 Panoramique – Balayage en revanche, les disques Blu-ray/DVD 4:3 peuvent être lus au format 4:3 uniquement. Reportez-vous à la pochette du disque Blu-ray et sélectionnez la fonction appropriée. • L'appareil ne fonctionne pas. (exemple : l’appareil s’éteint ou émet un bruit anormal). • L'appareil ne fonctionne pas normalement. • Appuyez et maintenez la touche 5 de la télécommande pendant 5 secondes en mode VEILLE. - L’utilisation de la fonction RÉINITIALISATION efface tous les réglages enregistrés. N’utilisez ce bouton que si cela est vraiment nécessaire. Vous avez oublié le mot de passe du niveau de classification. • Sans disque dans le lecteur, appuyez et maintenez la touche 5 de l'appareil pendant plus de 5 secondes. Le message INIT s’affiche sur l’écran et les réglages par défaut sont rétablis. Puis, appuyez sur la touche MARCHE/ARRÊT. - L’utilisation de la fonction RÉINITIALISATION efface tous les réglages enregistrés. N’utilisez ce bouton que si cela est vraiment nécessaire. Réception des émissions de radio impossible. • L’antenne est-elle correctement branchée ? • Si le signal d’entrée de l’antenne est faible, installez une antenne FM extérieure dans une zone bénéficiant d’une bonne réception. Lors de l’écoute du son du téléviseur via l'appareil, aucun son n’est entendu. • Si la touche OUVERTURE/FERMETURE ^ est appuyée lors de l’écoute du son du téléviseur en utilisant le D. IN ou les fonctions AUX, les fonctions du disque Blu-ray/ DVD sont activées et le son du téléviseur est coupé. « Indisponible » s’affiche à l’écran. • Les fonctions ou les commandes ne peuvent être exécutées pour le moment car : 1. Le logiciel du disque Blu-ray/DVD les limite. 2. Le logiciel du disque Blu-ray/DVD ne prend pas en charge la fonction en question (par ex. : les angles). 3. La fonction n'est pas disponible pour le moment. 4. Vous avez demandé un titre, un numéro de chapitre ou un temps de recherche hors de portée du disque. Il est possible que l'écran du téléviseur n'affiche pas d'image lorsque la résolution de la sortie HDMI n'est pas prise en charge par le téléviseur (par exemple 1080p). • Appuyez et maintenez la touche 5 du panneau avant pendant plus de 5 secondes en l'absence de disque inséré dans l'appareil. Tous les paramètres seront réinitialisés sur leur valeur d'origine. Aucune sortie HDMI. • Vérifiez la connexion entre le téléviseur et la prise HDMI de l'appareil. • Vérifiez que votre téléviseur prend en charge les résolutions d'entrée HDMI 576p/480p/720p/1080i/1080p. Écran de sortie HDMI anormal. • Si du bruit aléatoire apparaît à l'écran, cela signifie que le téléviseur ne prend pas en charge la protection HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 57 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 57 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:28 013-06-04 오전 10:07:28| 58 Français Annexes Problème Vérification/Solution Fonction AllShare Je peux voir les dossiers partagés via AllShare mais pas les fichiers. • AllShare affiche uniquement les fichiers vidéos, photos et musicaux. Les autres types de fichiers ne sont pas affichés. La vidéo est lue par intermittence. • Vérifiez si le réseau est stable. • Vérifiez que le câble réseau est correctement branché et que le réseau n'est pas surchargé. • La connexion sans fil entre l’appareil compatible DLNA et l'appareil est instable. Vérifiez la connexion. La connexion AllShare entre l'appareil et l'ordinateur est instable. • L’adresse IP sous le même sous-réseau doit être unique, dans le cas contraire une collision IP peut résulter de ce phénomène. • Vérifiez si vous avez un pare-feu activé. Si tel est le cas, désactivez la fonction pare-feu. BD-LIVE Je n'arrive pas à me connecter au serveur BDLIVE. • Vérifiez si la connexion réseau est active ou non en utilisant la fonction État réseau. • Vérifiez si le périphérique de mémoire USB est connecté à l'appareil. • Le périphérique de mémoire doit avoir au moins 1 Go d'espace libre pour satisfaire aux exigences du service BD-LIVE. Vous pouvez vérifier la taille disponible dans Gestion données Blu-ray. (Voir page 52) • Vérifiez si l’option Connexion Internet BD-Live est spécifiée sur Allow(All) (Permettre tout). • Si toutes les mesures préconisées ci-dessus échouent, contactez le fournisseur de contenus ou mettez à jour l'appareil à l'aide de la dernière version de micrologiciel disponible. Une erreur s'est produite en cours d'utilisation du service BD-LIVE. • Le périphérique de mémoire doit avoir au moins 1 Go d'espace libre pour satisfaire aux exigences du service BD-LIVE. Vous pouvez vérifier la taille disponible dans Gestion données Blu-ray. (Voir page 52) | REMARQUE |  Lorsque les réglages d'usine par défaut sont rétablis, toutes les données Blu-ray utilisateur stockées sur le lecteur seront effacées. HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 58 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 58 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:29 013-06-04 오전 10:07:29Français 59| 07 Annexes Généralités Poids 3.30 kg Dimensions 430.00 (L) x 55.00 (H) x 314.50 (P) mm Plage de températures de fonctionnement 5 à 35 °C Plage de taux d'humidit 10 à 75 % Tuner FM Rapport signal/bruit 55 dB Sensibilité utilisable 12 dB Distorsion harmonique totale 0.5 % HDMI Vidéo 2D : 2160p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p 3D : 1080p, 720p Audio Audio PCM multicanaux, audio Bitstream et audio PCM Amplificateur Sortie de l’enceinte avant 165 W x 2(3) Sortie de l’enceinte supérieure avant 165 W x 2(3) Sortie de l’enceinte centrale 170 W(3) Sortie de l’enceinte ambiophonique 165 W x 2(3) Sortie du caisson de basse 170 W(3) Réponse en fréquence Entrée analogique : 20 Hz~20 kHz (±3 dB) Entrée numérique : 20 Hz~40 kHz (±4 dB) Rapport signal/bruit 70 dB Séparation des canaux 60 dB Sensibilité d’entrée (AUX) 500 mV Caractéristiques techniques HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 59 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 59 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:30 013-06-04 오전 10:07:30| 60 Français Annexes Enceinte (Système d’enceintes 7.1 canaux) Enceintes Impédance Plage de fréquences Niveau de pression acoustique de sortie Entrée nominale Entrée maximale Dimensions (L x H x P) (Unité : mm) Poids (Unité : kg) Avant/ Supérieur avant 3  140 Hz~ 20 kHz 87 dB/W/M 165 W 330 W 90.0 x 1302.0 x 70.0 (Socle: 250 x 250) 7.65 Ambiophonique 90.0 x 1252.0 x 70.0 (Socle: 250 x 250) 6.82 Centre 170 W 340 W 360.0 x 70.0 x 65.9 0.98 Caisson de graves 40 Hz ~ 160 Hz 88 dB/W/M 205.6 x 390.6 x 350.6 6.33 • Les vitesses de réseau égales ou inférieures à 10 Mbps ne sont pas prises en charge. • Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd se réserve le droit de modifier les caractéristiques techniques sans avis préalable. • Le poids et les dimensions sont approximatifs. • La conception et les caractéristiques techniques sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis. • Pour l’alimentation et la consommation d’énergie, reportez-vous à l'étiquette apposée sur l'appareil. ❑ SWA-6000 Poids 1.1 kg Dimensions (L x H x P) 76.2 x 228.6 x 152.4 mm Plage de températures de fonctionnement +5 à 35 °C Plage de taux d'humidité de fonctionnement 10 à 75 % Puissance 165 W x 2 CH Plage de fréquences 20 Hz~20 KHz Rapport signal/bruit 65 dB HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 60 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 60 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:31 013-06-04 오전 10:07:31AH68-02646M-02 Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre. Comment contacter Samsung dans le monde Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung, veuillez contacter le Service Consommateurs Samsung. SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE ﺑـ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ، ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء SAMSUNG. Area Contact Centre  Web Site ` Asia Pacific AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com CHINA 400-810-5858 www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698 4698 www.samsung.com/hk (Chinese) www.samsung.com/hk_en (English) INDIA 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com/in INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 www.samsung.com/id JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com/my PHILIPPINES 1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for PLDT 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for Digitel 1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for Globe 02-5805777 www.samsung.com/ph SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com THAILAND 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com/th TAIWAN 0800-329-999 0266-026-066 www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com ` Middle East U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com OMAN 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ae (English) www.samsung.com/ae_ar (Arabic) KUWAIT 183-2255 (183-CALL) BAHRAIN 8000-4726 QATAR 800-2255 (800-CALL) Area Contact Centre  Web Site EGYPT 08000-726786 www.samsung.com JORDAN 800-22273 065777444 www.samsung.com/ Levant(English) SYRIA 18252273 www.samsung.com/ Levant(English) IRAN 021-8255 www.samsung.com MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www.samsung.com SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com/sa (Arabic) TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com ` Africa NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 www.samsung.com GHANA 0800-10077 0302-200077 www.samsung.com COTE D’ IVOIRE 8000 0077 www.samsung.com SENEGAL 800-00-0077 www.samsung.com CAMEROON 7095- 0077 www.samsung.com KENYA 0800 545 545 www.samsung.com UGANDA 0800 300 300 www.samsung.com TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 ) www.samsung.com BOTSWANA 0800-726-000 www.samsung.com NAMIBIA 8197267864 www.samsung.com ANGOLA 91-726-7864 www.samsung.com ZAMBIA 211350370 www.samsung.com HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 61 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 61 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:31 013-06-04 오전 10:07:31 I9100 Mode d’emploiUtilisation de ce mode d’emploi 2 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Nous vous remercions de la confiance que vous nous accordez en achetant cet appareil mobile Samsung. Cet appareil vous permettra de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et caractéristiques de votre téléphone. À lire avant toute utilisation ● Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi et toutes les précautions qui y sont indiquées avant d’utiliser votre téléphone, afin de l’utiliser en toute sécurité. ● Les instructions et descriptions mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre téléphone. ● Les illustrations utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. ● Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer en fonction du produit et de votre version logicielle et peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur www.samsung.com. ● Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier en fonction du téléphone ou de votre version logicielle. ● La mise en forme et la distribution de ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur le système d’exploitation Google Android et peuvent varier en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’utilisateur. ● Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 3 ● Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou de compatibilité causés par la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. ● Vous pouvez améliorer la version logicielle de votre appareil mobile en vous connectant sur le site www.samsung.com. ● Les sons, les fonds d’écran et les images fourni(e)s avec ce téléphone sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est restreint à une utilisation entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires respectifs. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ce matériel à des fins commerciales ou autres constitue une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Samsung n’est pas responsable des infractions sur les droits d’auteur commises par l’utilisateur. ● Veuillez conserver ce mode d’emploi afin de pouvoir le consulter ultérieurement. Icônes Avant de démarrer, familiarisez-vous avec les icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi : Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres appareils Remarque—remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires ► Référence: pages contenant plus d’informations. Exemple : ► p. 12 (signifie « voir page12») → Suivi de: séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour effectuer une étape. Exemple: depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→A propos du téléphone (signifie que vous devez d’abord appuyer sur Paramètres, puis sur A propos du téléphone) [ ] Crochets : touches de l’appareil, par exemple: [ ] (symbolise la touche Menu)Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 4 Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales relatives aux droits d’auteur. Ce mode d’emploi ne peut être reproduit, même en partie, ni distribué, traduit ou diffusé sous quelque forme ou par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, y compris par le biais de photocopies, d’enregistrements, ou stocké dans un système de stockage ou de recherche documentaire, sans l’autorisation préalable écrite de Samsung Electronics. Marques déposées ● SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. ● Les logos Android, Google ™, Google Maps ™, Google Mail ™, YouTube ™, Google Play ™, et Google Talk ™ sont des marques déposées de Google Inc. ● Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ● Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ou de ses filiales. Les autres marques sont déposées et demeurent la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. ● Windows Media Player ® est une marque déposée de Microsoft Corporation. ● Wi-Fi ®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™, Wi-Fi Direct ™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques commerciales déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 5 ● DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos associés sont des marques de Rovi Corporation ou de ses filiales, et sont utilisées sous licence. ● Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX DivX® est un format vidéo numérique créé par DivX, LLC, filiale de Rovi Corporation. Cet appareil est un appareil DivX Certified® officiel qui lit les vidéos DivX. Rendez-vous sur le site www.divx.com pour plus d’informations et pour obtenir des outils logiciels capables de convertir vos fichiers en vidéos DivX. Cet appareil DivX Certified® peut lire des vidéos DivX® d'une résolution allant jusqu’à 720p HD, ainsi que du contenu Premium. Peut lire des vidéos DivX® jusqu’à 1080p HD À PROPOS DE DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND (Vidéo à la demande) Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré pour pouvoir lire des films DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD ou vidéo à la demande). Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, repérez la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Rendezvous ensuite sur vod.divx.com pour plus d’informations sur les modalités d’enregistrement.Table des matières 6 Table des matières Assemblage ................................................................... 10 Contenu du coffret ........................................................................ 10 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie ............................ 11 Mettre la batterie en charge ....................................................... 12 Insérer une carte mémoire ......................................................... 15 Fixer une dragonne ...................................................................... 17 Démarrage ..................................................................... 18 Allumer/éteindre l’appareil ........................................................ 18 Présentation de l’appareil ........................................................... 19 Utiliser l’écran tactile .................................................................... 23 Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches ............................................................................................ 24 Présentation de l’écran d’accueil ............................................... 24 Accéder aux applications ............................................................ 27 Personnaliser le téléphone ......................................................... 29 Saisir du texte ................................................................................ 34 Télécharger des applications à partir de Play Store ............. 38 Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web ........................................... 39 Synchroniser des données .......................................................... 40 Communication ............................................................ 42 Appels .............................................................................................. 42 Messagerie ...................................................................................... 48 Google Mail .................................................................................... 50 E-mail ............................................................................................... 52 Talk ................................................................................................... 54 Chat + ............................................................................................... 55 Google+ ........................................................................................... 55 Social Hub ....................................................................................... 56 MI ...................................................................................................... 56Table des matières 7 Divertissements ............................................................ 57 Appareil photo .............................................................................. 57 Vidéos .............................................................................................. 67 Galerie .............................................................................................. 68 Editeur de photos ......................................................................... 70 Créateur de vidéo ......................................................................... 71 Lecteur MP3 ................................................................................... 73 Radio FM ......................................................................................... 76 Informations personnelles .......................................... 79 Contacts .......................................................................................... 79 Calendrier ....................................................................................... 83 Tâche ................................................................................................ 84 Mémo ............................................................................................... 85 Mémo vocal .................................................................................... 86 Web ................................................................................. 87 Internet ............................................................................................ 87 Maps ................................................................................................. 90 Latitude ........................................................................................... 92 Adresses .......................................................................................... 92 Navigation ...................................................................................... 93 Recherche ....................................................................................... 93 YouTube ........................................................................................... 94 Play Store ........................................................................................ 95 Actualités et météo ...................................................................... 95 App Shop ........................................................................................ 96 Sauvegarde .................................................................................... 96 Jeux .................................................................................................. 97 Maps ................................................................................................. 97 Cinéday ............................................................................................ 97 Sonneries ........................................................................................ 98Table des matières 8 Météo ............................................................................................... 98 Orange et moi ................................................................................ 98 Connectivité .................................................................. 99 Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 99 Wi-Fi ................................................................................................ 101 Wi-Fi direct .................................................................................... 104 AllShare ......................................................................................... 105 Partager une connexion de données ..................................... 107 GPS ................................................................................................. 109 Connexions PC ............................................................................. 111 Connexions VPN .......................................................................... 113 Outils ............................................................................ 115 Horloge .......................................................................................... 115 Calculatrice ................................................................................... 118 Téléchargements ......................................................................... 118 Kies air ............................................................................................ 119 Mini journal .................................................................................. 120 Mes fichiers ................................................................................... 121 Polaris Office ................................................................................ 121 Gestion de tâches ....................................................................... 123 Commande vocale ...................................................................... 124 Discussion ..................................................................................... 124 Paramètres .................................................................. 125 Accéder au menu Paramètres .................................................. 125 Wi-Fi ................................................................................................ 125 Bluetooth ...................................................................................... 125 Utilisation des données ............................................................. 125 Plus... .............................................................................................. 125 Appels ............................................................................................ 127 Son .................................................................................................. 129Table des matières 9 Affichage ....................................................................................... 129 Economie d'énergie .................................................................... 131 Stockage ........................................................................................ 131 Batterie .......................................................................................... 132 Applications ................................................................................. 132 Comptes et synchro. ................................................................... 132 Services de localisation ............................................................. 132 Sécurité .......................................................................................... 133 Langue et saisie ........................................................................... 135 Sauvegarder et réinitialiser ..................................................... 139 Station d'accueil .......................................................................... 139 Date & heure ................................................................................ 140 Accessibilité ................................................................................. 140 Mouvement ................................................................................. 141 Options de développement ..................................................... 141 A propos du téléphone ............................................................. 142 Dépannage ................................................................. 143 Consignes de sécurité ............................................... 149 Index ............................................................................ 161Assemblage 10 Assemblage Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents: ● Téléphone mobile ● Batterie ● Adaptateur pour micro-SIM1 ● Guide de prise en main rapide Utilisez exclusivement des logiciels homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de logiciels piratés ou illégaux peut occasionner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements qui ne sont pas couverts par la garantie du fabricant. ● Les éléments fournis avec votre téléphone peuvent varier en fonction des logiciels et accessoires disponibles dans votre région ou proposés par votre opérateur. ● Vous pouvez acquérir d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. ● Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. ● Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, ne soient pas compatibles avec votre appareil. 1. L'adaptateur pour micro-SIM vous permet d’utiliser dans votre appareil une carte micro-SIM (version miniature d’une carte SIM standard). Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cet accessoire ne soit pas disponible.Assemblage 11 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un service de téléphonie mobile, une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle permet de vous identifier et contient tous les détails de votre abonnement (code PIN, services en option, etc.). Pour bénéficier des services 3G ou 3G+, vous devez vous procurer une carte USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module). Pour installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie: 1 Si votre appareil est allumé, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage enfoncée et appuyez sur Éteindre→OK pour l’éteindre. 2 Retirez le cache de la batterie. Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache de la batterie. 3 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas. N’introduisez pas de carte mémoire dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM.Assemblage 12 4 Insérez la batterie. 5 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place. Mettre la batterie en charge Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Vous pouvez recharger le téléphone à l’aide d’un chargeur ou en le branchant sur un ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs et des câbles de connexion homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles de connexion non homologués peut provoquer l’explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre appareil.Assemblage 13 ● Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, le téléphone émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d’avertissement. L’icône de batterie est alors vide et clignote. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, le téléphone s’éteint automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre le téléphone en marche. ● Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, il est impossible d’allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Laissez une batterie épuisée se recharger pendant quelques minutes avant d’essayer d’allumer l’appareil. › Recharger la batterie avec un chargeur 1 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du chargeur sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dommages résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.Assemblage 14 2 Branchez l’autre extrêmité du chargeur sur une prise de courant. ● Vous pouvez utiliser le téléphone lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Dans ce cas, il est possible que le rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de temps. ● Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. ● Il est possible que le téléphone chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de rechargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du téléphone. ● Si le téléphone ne se charge pas correctement, apportezle, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. 3 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le chargeur du téléphone, puis de la prise de courant. Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager l’appareil. Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un bouton marche/arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l’alimentation. Lorsqu’il est utilisé, le chargeur doit rester à proximité de la prise. › Recharger la batterie avec un câble de connexion PC Avant de recharger le téléphone, assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est allumé. 1 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples du téléphone.Assemblage 15 2 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble de connexion PC sur un port USB de l’ordinateur. En fonction du type de câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez, il est possible que le rechargement tarde à démarrer. 3 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le câble de connexion PC du téléphone, puis de l’ordinateur. Insérer une carte mémoire Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires, vous devez utiliser une carte mémoire. Le téléphone est compatible avec les cartes mémoire microSD™ ou microSDHC ™ d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 32Go (en fonction du fabricant et du modèle de carte mémoire). Samsung utilise des normes industrielles standardisées pour les cartes mémoire. Néanmoins, il est possible que certaines marques de cartes mémoire ne soient pas entièrement compatibles avec votre téléphone. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager votre téléphone ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. ● Seule la structure de fichiers FAT est compatible avec les cartes mémoire de votre téléphone. Lorsque vous insérez une carte formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, votre téléphone vous invite à la reformater entièrement. ● Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. ● Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans votre appareil, le répertoire des fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier external_sd du menu Mes fichiers.Assemblage 16 1 Retirez le cache batterie et la batterie. 2 Insérez la carte en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. 4 Remettez la batterie et le cache batterie en place. › Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer une carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable l’éjecter pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applications→ Paramètres→Stockage→Démonter la carte SD→OK. 2 Retirez le cache batterie et la batterie. 3 Poussez la carte avec précaution jusqu’à ce qu'elle ressorte du téléphone. 4 Retirez la carte de son emplacement. 5 Retirez la carte mémoire. 6 Remettez la batterie et le cache batterie en place. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque le téléphone y transfère ou lit des données. Vous risqueriez de perdre des données et d’endommager la carte mémoire ou le téléphone.Assemblage 17 › Formater une carte mémoire Formater une carte mémoire sur un ordinateur peut entraîner des problèmes de compatibilité avec votre téléphone. Formatez la carte mémoire uniquement dans le téléphone. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, sélectionnez Applications→Paramètres →Stockage→Formater la carte SD→Formater la carte SD→ Tout supprimer. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Fixer une dragonne 1 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 2 Faites passer une dragonne à travers la fente et accrochez-la au point d’attache. 3 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.Démarrage 18 Démarrage Allumer/éteindre l’appareil Pour allumer le téléphone: 1 Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage enfoncée. 2 Si vous allumez votre appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Pour éteindre votre appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre→OK. ● Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétant dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. ● Pour utiliser uniquement les services hors-réseau de votre appareil, c’est-à-dre les fonctions autres que les fonctions d’appel, Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, activez le mode Hors-ligne. Pour ce faire, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage enfoncée et appuyez sur Hors-ligne.Démarrage 19 Présentation de l’appareil ›Aspect du téléphone 1. Activé uniquement lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Haut-parleur ou lorsque vous enregistrez des vidéos. Objectif photo avant Capteur de proximité Touche Accueil Touche de volume Capteur de luminosité Touche Menu Connecteur à fonctions multiples Écouteur Écran tactile Touche Recherche Microphone Microphone1Démarrage 20 › Touches Touche Fonction Marche/ Arrêt/ Verrouillage Allumer l’appareil (maintenez la touche enfoncée). Accéder aux menus rapides (maintenez la touche enfoncée). Verrouiller l’écran tactile. Menu Ouvrir la liste des options disponibles dans l’écran actuel. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrir l’application de recherche (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Ouvrir la fenêtre de recherche en cours d’utilisation de certaines applications (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Accueil Revenir à l’écran d’accueil. Ouvrir la liste des applications récentes (maintenir enfoncée). Retour Revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume Régler le volume de l’appareil. Prise audio 3,5 mm Antenne intégrée Objectif photo arrière Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage Haut-parleur Cache de la batterie FlashDémarrage 21 ›Icônes d’information Les icônes qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique. Icône Description Aucun signal Puissance du signal Réseau GPRS connecté Réseau EDGE connecté Réseau 3G connecté Ouvrir les connexions Wi-Fi disponibles Wi-Fi connecté Wi-Fi Direct connecté Bluetooth activé Kit piéton Bluetooth connecté GPS activé Appel en cours Appel en attente Haut-parleur activé Appel manqué Chargement de données Téléchargement de donnéesDémarrage 22 Icône Description Transfert d’appel activé Connecté à un ordinateur Modem USB activé Point d’accès Wi-Fi activé Pas de carte SIM/USIM Nouveau SMS ou MMS Nouvel e-mail Nouveau message vocal Alarme activée Notification d’événement Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale) Mode Discret activé Vibreur activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Lecture audio en cours Lecture audio en pause Radio FM activée en arrière-plan Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie 10:00 Heure actuelleDémarrage 23 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile de votre appareil vous permet de sélectionner des éléments et des fonctions en toute facilité. Découvrez les manipulations de base relatives à l’utilisation de l’écran tactile. ● N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus afin de ne pas rayer l’écran. ● Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. ● Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. ● Pour une utilisation optimale de l’écran tactile, retirez le film de protection avant d’utiliser le téléphone. ● L’écran tactile comporte une couche qui détecte les petites charges électriques émises par le corps humain. Pour de meilleures performances, appuyez sur l’écran tactile du bout du doigt. L’écran tactile ne réagit pas si vous utilisez des objets pointus, tels qu’un stylet ou un stylo. Contrôlez le fonctionnement de l’écran tactile à l’aide des manipulations suivantes: ● Appuyer: appuyez sur l’écran tactile pour sélectionner ou lancer un menu, une option ou une application. ● Maintenir enfoncé: pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options contextuelles, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant plus de 2 secondes. ● Faire glisser : posez votre doigt et faites-le glisser vers le bas, le haut, la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre les éléments des différentes listes. ● Glisser/déposer: maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément, puis faites-le glisser pour déplacer l’élément.Démarrage 24 ● Appuyer deux fois: appuyez brièvement à deux reprises sur l’écran tactile pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière sur les photos ou les pages Web que vous visionnez. ● Passé un certain délai d’inactivité, votre téléphone éteint l’écran tactile automatiquement. Pour réactiver l’écran tactile, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage ou sur la touche Accueil. ● Vous pouvez également régler la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Affichage→ Mise en veille de l’écran. Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle du téléphone. Pour verrouiller, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage enfoncée. Pour déverrouiller, activez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage ou sur la touche Accueil, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur l'écran. Présentation de l’écran d’accueil Lorsque l’appareil est en mode veille, l’écran d’accueil apparaît. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, vous pouvez afficher l’état de votre téléphone et accéder à ses applications. L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre l’un des volets de l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en bas de l’écran pour accéder directement au volet correspondant.Démarrage 25 ›Ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil Vous pouvez personnaliser l’écran d’accueil en lui ajoutant des raccourcis pour accéder à des applications, des widgets ou des dossiers. Pour ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil : 1 Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter ou maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Sélectionnez la catégorie d’éléments → un élément: ● Widgets : ajouter des widgets à l’écran d’accueil. ● Raccourcis : ajouter des raccourcis pour accéder par exemple aux applications, aux favoris et aux contacts. ● Dossiers : créer un nouveau dossier ou ajouter des dossiers pour vos contacts. ● Fonds d’écran: définir une image d’arrière-plan. ›Déplacer les éléments sur l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément à déplacer. 2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à l’emplacement désiré. › Supprimer des éléments de l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer. La corbeille apparaît au bas de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à la corbeille. 3 Lorsque l’élément apparaît en rouge, relâchez-le.Démarrage 26 ›Utiliser le volet des raccourcis Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou lorsque vous utilisez une application, appuyez sur la zone des icônes d’information et faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil et accéder aux informations de réseau et à la liste des notifications (messages reçus, appels manqués, événements etc.). Pour masquer la liste, faites glisser votre doigt de bas en haut. Dans le volet des raccourcis, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● WiFi: activer ou désactiver la fonction de connexion Wi-Fi. ►p.102 ● Bluetooth: activer ou désactiver la fonction de connexion Bluetooth. ►p.99 ● GPS: activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. ● Données mobiles : activer ou désactiver votre connexion de données. ● Rotation auto: activer ou désactiver la rotation automatique de l’écran. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de votre zone géographique et du forfait auquel vous avez souscrit auprès de votre opérateur. ›Ajouter ou supprimer des volets d’écran d’accueil Vous pouvez ajouter de nouveaux volets à l’écran d’accueil ou bien en supprimer de façon à organiser les widgets selon vos préférences et vos besoins. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier. Vous pouvez également placer deux doigts sur l’écran, puis les resserrer pour passer en mode Modification. 2 Ajoutez ou supprimez des volets en effectuant les opérations suivantes: ● Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur sa miniature et faites-la glisser dans la corbeille en bas de l’écran. ● Pour ajouter un nouveau volet, appuyez sur .Démarrage 27 ● Pour changer l’ordre des volets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur la miniature correspondante, puis faites-la glisser à l’endroit désiré. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ]. Accéder aux applications Pour accéder aux applications du téléphone: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applications pour accéder au menu des applications. 2 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre un écran de menus. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en bas de l’écran pour accéder directement à l’écran de menus correspondant. 3 Sélectionnez une application. ● Lorsque vous utilisez des applications fournies par Google, vous devez disposer d’un compte Google. Si vous ne disposez pas de compte Google, inscrivez-vous vite à ce service gratuit. ● Vous pouvez ajouter un raccourci vers une application en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de l’application dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez ensuite déplacer l’icône vers l’emplacement de votre choix sur l’écran d’accueil. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Appuyez sur la touche Accueil pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. ● Si vous faites pivoter le téléphone lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctions, l’interface bascule automatiquement. Afin de conserver l'orientation initiale de l'appareil, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur Rotation auto. ● Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil, vous pouvez réaliser une capture d’écran en appuyant simultanément sur la touche Accueil et sur la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage. Pour enregistrer l’image, appuyez sur Mes fichiers→Pictures →Screenshots.Démarrage 28 › Organiser les applications Vous pouvez organiser les applications de la liste en modifiant leur ordre ou en les regroupant par catégories. Vous pouvez organiser les applications uniquement en mode Grille personnalisable. 1 Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur [ ] →Type d'affichage→Grille personnalisable pour basculer en mode Grille personnalisable (si nécessaire). 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier→OK. 3 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une application. 4 Faites glisser l’icône de l’application vers l’emplacement souhaité. Vous pouvez déplacer l’icône d’une application vers un autre écran de menus. Vous pouvez aussi déplacer les applications les plus utilisées près de l'icône Accueil. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] →Enreg. Pour ajouter un dossier ou une page à l’écran de menus: 1 Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier. 2 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une application. 3 Faites glisser l’icône de l’application vers Ajouter un dossier ou Ajouter une page au bas de l’écran. 4 Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour ajouter plusieurs applications. 5 Faites glisser Ajouter un dossier ou Ajouter une page vers l’écran de menus. Un nouveau dossier ou un nouveau volet contenant les applications est ajouté à l’écran de menus. 6 Si vous avez ajouté un dossier, nommez-le, puis appuyez sur OK. 7 Appuyez sur [ ] →Enreg. Pour changer l’ordre des écrans de menus: 1 Dans la liste des applications, placez deux doigts sur l’écran, puis resserrez-les. 2 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur la miniature d’un écran, puis faites-la glisser à l’endroit désiré.Démarrage 29 ›Accéder aux applications récentes 1 Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. 2 Sélectionnez l’application désirée. ›Utiliser le gestionnaire de tâches Votre téléphone est un appareil multitâche. Il peut exécuter plusieurs applications simultanément. Toutefois, le mode multitâche peut provoquer des blocages, des problèmes de mémoire ou entraîner une consommation supplémentaire d’énergie. Pour éviter ces problèmes, arrêtez les applications inutiles fonctionnant en arrière-plan en utilisant le gestionnaire de tâches. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gestion de tâches→Applications actives. La liste de toutes les applications actuellement utilisées sur votre téléphone s’affiche. 2 Pour fermer une application, appuyez sur Fin. Pour fermer toutes les applications actives, appuyez sur Quitter tout. Personnaliser le téléphone Tirez le meilleur de votre téléphone en le personnalisant pour qu’il réponde à vos envies et vos préférences. › Régler la date et l’heure 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Date & heure. 2 Réglez la date et l’heure et modifiez d’autres options.Démarrage 30 ›Activer ou désactiver la tonalité des touches Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Son→Sons tactiles. ›Activer le profil Discret Pour activer ou désactiver le profil Discret de votre téléphone, procédez de l’une des façons suivantes: ● Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage enfoncée et appuyez sur Profil Discret. ● Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis maintenez la touche # enfoncée. › Changer de sonnerie 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Son→Sonnerie du téléphone. 2 Choisissez une sonnerie dans la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. › Sélectionner un fond d’écran d’accueil 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] →Fond d’écran→ une option. 2 Sélectionnez une image. 3 Appuyez sur Enreg. ou Définir fond d’écran. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de l’utilisation des images ou des fonds d’écran fourni(e)s par défaut avec votre téléphone.Démarrage 31 › Régler la luminosité de l’écran 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Affichage→Luminosité. 2 Décochez la case située à côté de Luminosité automatique. 3 Pour régler la luminosité, faites glisser le curseur . 4 Appuyez sur OK. Le niveau de luminosité de l’écran influe sur la vitesse de déchargement de la batterie. ›Définir un verrouillage de l’écran Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile en activant la fonction de verrouillage de l’écran. Vous devez alors dessiner un modèle de déverrouillage d'écran, saisir un mot de passe ou un code PIN de déverrouillage d'écran chaque fois que vous activez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. ● Si vous oubliez votre code de déverrouillage, apportez votre téléphone dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. ● Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de codes de sécurité, d’informations confidentielles ou d’autres dommages résultant de l’utilisation de logiciels illégaux. Définir un modèle de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de l'écran→Modèle. 2 Prenez connaissance des instructions affichées et des exemples de modèles, puis appuyez sur Suivant. 3 Dessinez un modèle en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran pour relier au moins 4points. 4 Appuyez sur Continuer. 5 Dessinez à nouveau le modèle pour confirmer. 6 Appuyez sur Confirmer.Démarrage 32 Définir un code PIN de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de l'écran→Code PIN. 2 Saisissez un code PIN (numérique) de déverrouillage d’écran et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Confirmez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur OK. Définir un mot de passe de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de l'écran→Mot de passe. 2 Saisissez un mot de passe (alphanumérique) de déverrouillage d’écran et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Confirmez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK. Configurer un déverrouillage par détection faciale 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de l'écran→Déverrouillage visage. 2 Appuyez sur Configurer→Continuer. 3 Réglez l’appareil pour ajuster votre visage dans la zone prévue à cet effet. 4 Une fois votre visage correctement ajusté, appuyez sur Continuer. 5 Effectuez la configuration du code de déverrouillage secondaire.Démarrage 33 › Verrouiller la carte SIM ou USIM Vous pouvez verrouiller votre téléphone en activant le code PIN fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Configurer blocage SIM→Verrouiller carte SIM. 2 Saisissez votre code PIN et appuyez sur OK. Lorsque le verrouillage PIN est activé, vous devez saisir votre code PIN chaque fois que vous allumez votre téléphone. ● Si vous saisissez un code PIN erroné à plusieurs reprises, votre carte SIM ou USIM se bloque. Vous devez alors saisir le code PIN de déverrouillage (PUK) afin de débloquer la carte SIM ou USIM. ● Si vous bloquez votre carte SIM ou USIM en saisissant un code PUK erroné, apportez-la chez votre revendeur pour la faire débloquer. ›Activer la fonction de traçage du mobile Lorsque quelqu’un introduit une autre carte SIM/USIM que la vôtre dans votre appareil, la fonction de traçage du mobile envoie automatiquement le nouveau numéro de téléphone aux destinataires spécifiés, afin de vous aider à le localiser et à le récupérer. Pour utiliser cette fonction et contrôler l’appareil à distance sur le Web, vous devez créer un compte Samsung. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Traçage du mobile. 2 Appuyez sur Connexion, saisissez l’adresse e-mail et le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung, puis appuyez une nouvelle fois sur Connexion. Pour créer un compte Samsung, appuyez sur Créer.Démarrage 34 3 Appuyez sur Destinataires. 4 Saisissez une nouvelle fois le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung, puis appuyez sur OK. 5 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone précédé de l’indicatif du pays (avec +). 6 Rédigez le message à envoyer aux destinataires. 7 Appuyez sur OK. Pour obtenir plus d’informations concernant cette fonction, connectez-vous sur le site www.samsungdive.com. Saisir du texte Vous pouvez saisir du texte en utilisant les caractères du clavier virtuel ou en utilisant l’option d’écriture manuscrite. Vous ne pouvez pas saisir du texte dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez utiliser une langue prise en charge. ►p.135 › Modifier le type de clavier Vous pouvez modifier le type de clavier. Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur Mode de saisie→ un type de clavier (Samsung ou Swype). Vous pouvez également saisir du texte oralement. Appuyez sur Saisie Google Voice, puis sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans le cadre de la fonction de saisie vocale. › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung 1 Appuyez sur →Types de clavier Portrait, puis choisissez un mode de saisie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des modes de saisie à touches (AZERTY ou clavier traditionnel) ou l’écriture manuscrite. 2 Saisissez le texte en appuyant sur les touches alphanumériques ou en écrivant sur l’écran.Démarrage 35 Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 6 5 7 8 1 2 3 4 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier la casse. 2 Basculer entre les modes Symbole/Numérique et ABC. 3 Accéder aux paramètres du clavier. Modifier le type de clavier (maintenir enfoncée). 4 Saisir du texte oralement. Cette icône n’est disponible que si vous avez activé la fonction de saisie vocale du clavier Samsung. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible en fonction de la langue de saisie sélectionnée. 5 Effacer la saisie. 6 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 7 Insérer un point. Ouvrir le volet des symboles (maintenir enfoncée). 8 Insérer un espace. Démarrage 36 › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Swype 1 Appuyez sur le premier caractère d’un mot et faites glisser votre doigt en le maintenant sur l’écran vers le second caractère. 2 Continuez ainsi jusqu’à la fin du mot. 3 Relâchez votre doigt après le dernier caractère. 4 Lorsque le mot souhaité apparaît correctement, appuyez sur pour insérer un espace. Si le mot souhaité ne s’affiche pas, choisissez un autre mot dans la liste affichée. 5 Répétez les étapes 1 à 4 pour rédiger tout votre texte. ● Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les touches pour saisir du texte. ● Vous pouvez également maintenir une touche enfoncée pour saisir les caractères de la moitié supérieure de la touche. Lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche jusqu’à ce que la liste de caractères apparaisse, vous pouvez saisir des caractères spéciaux et des symboles.Démarrage 37 Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 1 3 2 4 5 6 8 7 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier la casse. 2 Accéder aux paramètres du clavier (maintenir enfoncée). 3 Basculer entre les modes Symbole/Numérique et ABC. 4 Modifier la langue de saisie. 5 Effacer la saisie. 6 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 7 Saisir du texte oralement. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible en fonction de la langue de saisie sélectionnée. 8 Insérer un espace.Démarrage 38 › Copier et coller du texte Lorsque vous saisissez du texte, vous pouvez exploiter la fonction copier-coller pour utiliser le même texte dans d’autres applications. 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un passage du texte. 2 Faites glisser ou pour sélectionner le texte à copier. 3 Appuyez sur pour copier le texte, ou sur pour couper le texte et l’insérer dans le presse-papiers. 4 Dans une autre application, positionnez le texte à l’emplacement où vous souhaitez coller le texte. 5 Appuyez sur →Coller pour insérer le texte du pressepapiers dans le champ de saisie. Télécharger des applications à partir de Play Store La plate-forme Google qui équipe votre téléphone permet d’enrichir ses fonctions en installant des applications supplémentaires. Play Store vous permet d’acquérir facilement et rapidement des applications et des jeux pour mobiles. ● Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. ● Votre téléphone enregistrera les fichiers utilisateur des applications téléchargées dans la mémoire interne moviNAND™. Pour enregistrer les fichiers sur la carte mémoire, branchez votre téléphone sur un PC et copiez les fichiers à partir de la mémoire interne vers la carte mémoire.Démarrage 39 ›Installer une application 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Play Store. 2 Appuyez sur Accepter dans la fenêtre des conditions d’utilisation. 3 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement. ›Désinstaller une application 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil de Play Store, appuyez sur [ ] →Mes applications. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur Désinstaller→OK. Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web Lorsque vous téléchargez des fichiers ou des applications sur le Web, votre téléphone les enregistre dans la carte mémoire. Les fichiers téléchargés sur le Web peuvent contenir des virus potentiellement dangereux pour le téléphone. Pour réduire les risques, téléchargez uniquement des fichiers provenant de sources fiables. Certains fichiers multimédia intègrent le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM) visant à protéger les droits d’auteur. Cette protection peut empêcher le téléchargement, la copie, la modification ou le transfert de certains fichiers.Démarrage 40 Pour télécharger des fichiers sur le Web: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement. Pour installer des applications téléchargées à partir de sites Web autres que Google Play Store, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sécurité→Sources inconnues→OK. Synchroniser des données Vous pouvez synchroniser des données avec différents serveurs Web et les sauvegarder ou les restaurer. Une fois la synchronisation terminée, le téléphone reste connecté au Web. Si une modification est apportée sur le Web, les informations mises à jour s’affichent sur votre téléphone et la synchronisation débute automatiquement, et inversement. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. › Paramétrer un compte de serveur 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur Ajouter compte→ un type de compte. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer la configuration du compte.Démarrage 41 ›Activer la synchronisation automatique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur OFF près du menu Comptes et synchro. 3 Sélectionnez un compte. 4 Sélectionnez les applications à synchroniser. Pour exclure des applications de la synchronisation automatique, décochez les cases situées à côté des applications concernées. › Synchroniser des données manuellement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro. 2 Sélectionnez un compte. 3 Appuyez sur Sync maintenant. Votre téléphone commence à synchroniser les données que vous avez sélectionnées.Communication 42 Communication Appels Découvrez comment utiliser les fonctions d’appel de votre téléphone: passer un appel, répondre à un appel, utiliser les options disponibles en cours d’appel ou personnaliser les autres fonctions. › Passer un appel et y répondre Vous pouvez utiliser les touches physiques du téléphone ou celles de l’écran tactile pour passer, accepter, refuser ou terminer un appel. ● Lorsque vous activez le capteur de proximité, votre téléphone s’éteint automatiquement et verrouille l’écran tactile afin d’éviter les saisies accidentelles lorsque vous tenez le téléphone près de votre visage. ►p.128 ● L’électricité statique de votre corps ou de vos vêtements peut interférer avec le capteur de proximité au cours d’un appel. Passer un appel 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis saisissez le numéro de téléphone à appeler précédé de son indicatif régional. 2 Pour passer un appel vocal, appuyez sur . Pour passer un appel visio, appuyez sur . 3 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin. ● Utilisez le répertoire pour enregistrer les numéros que vous composez fréquemment. ►p.79 ● Pour accéder rapidement au journal d’appels et composer les numéros récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Téléphone →Journal.Communication 43 Répondre à un appel 1 Lorsque vous recevez un appel, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faites-la glisser hors du cercle. Pour désactiver la sonnerie lorsque le téléphone sonne, appuyez sur la touche de volume. 2 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin. Rejeter un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faitesla glisser hors du cercle. Pour envoyer un message lorsque vous rejeter des appels entrants, appuyez sur Rejeter l’appel avec message. Définissez au préalable un message texte à envoyer aux correspondants. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→ Définir messages de rejet. Appeler un numéro international 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 0 enfoncée pour insérer le caractère +. 2 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone que vous souhaitez composer en entier (indicatif du pays, indicatif régional et numéro de téléphone), puis appuyez sur pour appeler ce numéro. ›Utiliser le kit piéton En branchant un kit piéton sur l’appareil, vous pouvez répondre aux appels et les contrôler en gardant les mains libres: ● Appuyez sur la touche du kit piéton pour répondre à un appel. ● Pour rejeter un appel, maintenez la touche du kit piéton enfoncée. ● Pour placer un appel en attente ou reprendre un appel mis en attente, maintenez la touche du kit piéton enfoncée. ● Pour raccrocher, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche du kit piéton.Communication 44 ›Utiliser des options au cours d’un appel vocal Au cours d’un appel vocal, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● Pour régler le niveau sonore de l’appel, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. ● Pour placer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . Pour récupérer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . ● Pour passer un appel alors qu’un autre est déjà en cours, appuyez sur Ajouter et composez le nouveau numéro. ● Pour répondre à un deuxième appel, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faites-la glisser hors du cercle lorsqu’un signal d’appel retentit. Le téléphone vous demande alors si vous souhaitez mettre fin au premier appel ou le mettre en attente. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de mise en attente des appels. ● Pour ouvrir l’écran de numérotation, appuyez sur Clavier. ● Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur HP. Dans un environnement bruyant, il vous sera difficile d’entendre clairement votre correspondant avec la fonction haut-parleur. Utilisez le mode combiné classique pour une meilleure qualité sonore. ● Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet. ● Pour discuter avec l’autre correspondant via un kit piéton Bluetooth, appuyez sur Casque. ● Pour ouvrir le répertoire, appuyez sur [ ] →Contacts. ● Pour ajouter un mémo, appuyez sur [ ] →Mémo. ● Pour basculer entre les deux appels, appuyez sur Permuter. ● Pour lancer une conférence téléphonique, composez un second numéro ou répondez à un autre appel, puis appuyez sur Fusionner lorsque vous êtes en liaison avec le deuxième correspondant. Répétez cette même procédure pour ajouter d’autres correspondants. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de conférence téléphonique.Communication 45 ›Utiliser des options pendant un appel visio Au cours d’un appel visio, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● Pour passer de l’objectif avant à l’objectif arrière, et vice-versa, appuyez sur Objectif. ● Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet. ● Pour que votre correspondant ne voit plus votre image, appuyez sur [ ] →Masquer. ● Pour changer l’image à afficher à votre correspondant, appuyez sur [ ] →Image sortante. ● Pour ouvrir l’écran de numérotation, appuyez sur [ ] → Clavier. ● Pour discuter avec l’autre correspondant via un kit piéton Bluetooth, appuyez sur [ ] →Basculer sur le kit piéton. ● Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur [ ] →Activer/ désactiver haut-parleur. ● Pour utiliser l’image de votre correspondant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son image. Vous pouvez capturer l’image à l’écran ou enregistrer l’appel visio. ›Afficher les appels manqués et rappeler les numéros correspondants Votre téléphone affiche les appels manqués à l’écran. Pour composer le numéro correspondant à un appel manqué, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et sélectionnez l’appel manqué. ›Utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires Vous pouvez utiliser diverses autres fonctions d’appel comme le rejet automatique, le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN), le renvoi ou l’interdiction d’appel.Communication 46 Définir le rejet automatique Pour rejeter automatiquement certains appels, utilisez l’option de rejet automatique. Pour activer le rejet automatiquement des appels et créer des listes de rejet automatique: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Rejet de l’appel. 2 Appuyez sur Mode de rejet automatique→ une option. Paramètre Fonction Tous les numéros Rejeter tous les appels. Numéros rejetés auto Rejeter les appels des numéros de téléphone répertoriés dans la liste de rejet automatique. 3 Appuyez sur Liste de rejet automatique. 4 Appuyez sur Ajouter. 5 Appuyez sur une option dans Critères correspondants (si nécessaire). 6 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. 7 Pour ajouter d’autres numéros, répétez les étapes 4et6. Utiliser le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN) En mode FDN, votre téléphone restreint l’émission d’appels qui n’est alors possible que pour les numéros enregistrés dans la liste FDN. Pour activer le mode FDN: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Paramètres supplémentaires→Numérotation fixe→Activer FDN. 2 Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM et appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur Liste FDN et ajoutez les contacts à utiliser en mode FDN.Communication 47 Transférer des appels Le transfert d’appel est une fonction réseau qui permet de transférer les appels entrants vers un autre numéro prédéfini. Vous pouvez configurer cette fonction différemment pour plusieurs situations, lorsque vous ne pouvez pas répondre aux appels, lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne ou lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans une zone couverte par le réseau par exemple. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Transfert d’appel→ un type d’appel. 2 Sélectionnez une condition. 3 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone vers lequel vos appels doivent être transférés et appuyez sur Activer. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau. Configurer la restriction d’appel La restriction d’appel est une fonction réseau qui interdit certains types d’appel ou qui empêche d’autres personnes de passer des appels avec votre téléphone. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Paramètres supplémentaires→Restriction d’appel→ un type d’appel. 2 Sélectionnez une option de restriction d’appel. 3 Saisissez votre mot de passe d’interdiction d’appel, puis appuyez sur OK. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau. Configurer le signal d’appel Le signal d’appel est une fonction réseau qui vous permet d’être averti de l’arrivée d’un second appel lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour les appels vocaux. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Paramètres supplémentaires→ Signal d’appel. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau.Communication 48 ›Afficher le journal d’appels Vous pouvez afficher le journal de vos appels en fonction de leur catégorie. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→Journal. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Afficher par→ une option pour trier le journal d’appels. À partir du journal d’appels, vous pouvez appeler ou envoyer un message directement à un contact en faisant glisser votre doigt rapidement sur son nom vers la gauche ou la droite. 3 Sélectionnez l’un des journaux pour en afficher les détails. À partir des détails de l’appel, vous pouvez rappeler ce correspondant, lui envoyer un message ou l’ajouter au répertoire ou à la liste noire. Messagerie Découvrez comment créer et envoyer des messages texte (SMS), multimédia (MMS) et comment afficher ou gérer les messages envoyés ou reçus. L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors des zones couvertes par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. › Envoyer un SMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messagerie. 2 Appuyez sur .Communication 49 3 Ajoutez les destinataires de votre message. ● Entrez manuellement les numéros de téléphone, en les séparant par un point-virgule ou une virgule. ● Sélectionnez les numéros de téléphone à partir des listes en appuyant sur . 4 Appuyez sur Saisissez un message et saisissez le texte de votre message. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] →Insérer émoticône. 5 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. › Envoyer un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messagerie. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Ajoutez les destinataires de votre message. ● Entrez manuellement les numéros de téléphone ou les adresses e-mail, en les séparant par un point-virgule ou une virgule. ● Sélectionnez les numéros de téléphone ou les adresses e-mail à partir des listes en appuyant sur . Lorsque vous saisissez une adresse e-mail, le téléphone convertit automatiquement le message en MMS. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter un objet et ajoutez l’objet du message. 5 Appuyez sur Saisissez un message et saisissez le texte de votre message. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] →Insérer émoticône. 6 Appuyez sur et ajoutez un élément. Vous pouvez sélectionner un fichier à partir de la liste des fichiers ou capturer une photo, enregistrer une vidéo ou un mémo vocal. 7 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message.Communication 50 ›Afficher un SMS ou un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messagerie. Vos messages sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion par contact, comme pour une messagerie instantanée. 2 Sélectionnez un contact. 3 Pour un MMS, sélectionnez un message pour en afficher les détails. › Écouter la messagerie vocale Si vous avez configuré le téléphone pour que les appels auxquels vous ne pouvez pas répondre soient dirigés vers votre boîte vocale, vos correspondants pourront vous laisser un message vocal. Pour accéder à votre messagerie vocale et écouter vos messages vocaux : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 1 enfoncée. 2 Suivez les instructions du serveur de messagerie vocale. Pour pouvoir accéder au serveur de messagerie vocale, vous devez d’abord enregistrer son numéro. Contactez votre opérateur qui vous fournira ce numéro. Google Mail Vous pouvez récupérer les nouveaux e-mails directement dans votre boîte de réception à partir de Gmail ™. Lorsque vous accédez à cette application, l’écran Boîte de réception s’affiche. Le nombre total de messages non lus s’affiche dans la barre de titre et les messages non lus apparaissent en gras. ● Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. ● Le menu Gmail peut s’intituler différemment en fonction de votre zone géographique.Communication 51 › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Google Mail. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Saisissez un nom ou une adresse dans le champ du destinataire. 4 Saisissez l’objet, ainsi que le contenu du message. 5 Pour joindre un fichier image, appuyez sur [ ] →Joindre un fichier→ un fichier. 6 Appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. › Consulter les e-mails 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Google Mail. 2 Sélectionnez un e-mail. En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes: ● Pour répondre à l’e-mail, appuyez sur . ● Pour répondre à tous les destinataires, appuyez sur →Rép. à tous. ● Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur →Transférer. ● Pour afficher une pièce jointe, appuyez sur AFFICHER. Pour l’enregistrer sur votre téléphone, appuyez sur ENREGISTRER. ● Pour archiver le message, appuyez sur . ● Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur . ● Pour identifier le message comme non lu, appuyez sur . ● Pour passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent, faites défiler respectivement vers la gauche ou la droite.Communication 52 › Organiser les e-mails par libellé Vous pouvez organiser votre messagerie en affectant un libellé à vos messages ou en leur ajoutant des étoiles pour faire ressortir les messages importants. Vous pouvez ainsi trier les messages en fonction du libellé. Ajouter un libellé à un message 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un message. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Choisissez le libellé à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Ajouter une étoile de suivi à un message Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, appuyez sur . L’icône à côté du message est activée. Filtrer les messages 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, appuyez sur . 2 Sélectionnez le libellé des messages à afficher. E-mail Découvrez comment envoyer ou consulter des e-mails via votre compte de messagerie électronique personnel ou professionnel. › Créer un compte e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail. 2 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. 3 Appuyez sur Suivant. Pour configurer un compte Exchange ActiveSync, sélectionnez Config. manuelle→Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.Communication 53 4 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Une fois le compte de messagerie créé, les e-mails sont téléchargés sur votre téléphone. Si vous avez créé plus de deux comptes, vous pouvez passer d’un compte e-mail à l’autre. Sélectionnez le nom de compte en haut de l’écran et choisissez celui dont vous souhaitez récupérer les messages. › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Ajoutez les destinataires de votre message. ● Entrez manuellement les adresses e-mail, en les séparant par un point-virgule ou une virgule. ● Sélectionnez les adresses e-mail à partir des listes en appuyant sur . ● Pour ajouter d’autres destinataires, appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter Cc/Cci. 4 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’objet et indiquez un objet. 5 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie du texte et rédigez votre e-mail. 6 Appuyez sur et joignez un fichier. Vous ne pouvez pas joindre les fichiers protégés par le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM). 7 Appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. Si vous êtes hors connexion ou en dehors de votre zone de couverture, le message est conservé dans le fil des messages jusqu’à votre prochaine connexion ou jusqu’à ce que vous vous trouviez de nouveau dans une zone couverte par votre opérateur.Communication 54 ›Afficher un e-mail Lorsque vous ouvrez un compte e-mail, vous pouvez afficher hors connexion les e-mails précédemment récupérés ou vous connecter au serveur de messagerie pour consulter vos nouveaux messages. Une fois les messages récupérés, vous pouvez les lire hors connexion. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Actualiser pour mettre à jour la liste des messages. 3 Sélectionnez un e-mail. En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes: ● Pour passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent, appuyez sur ou . ● Pour répondre à l’e-mail, appuyez sur . ● Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur . ● Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur . ● Pour enregistrer une pièce jointe sur votre appareil, sélectionnez l’onglet de pièce jointe → . Talk Découvrez comment discuter avec votre famille ou vos amis par l’intermédiaire de Google Talk ™. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. ›Ajouter des amis à votre liste d’amis 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. 2 Sélectionnez un compte Google. La liste des amis vous permet de voir tous vos contacts Google Talk en un seul coup d’œil.Communication 55 3 Appuyez sur . 4 Saisissez l’adresse e-mail d’un contact et appuyez sur TERMINÉ. Lorsque votre ami accepte l’invitation, ce dernier est ajouté à votre liste d’amis. ›Démarrer une session de discussion 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. 2 Sélectionnez un nom dans la liste de vos amis. L’écran de discussion s’ouvre. 3 Saisissez votre message et appuyez sur . 4 Pour clôturer une session de discussion, appuyez sur [ ] → Arrêter le chat. Chat + Découvrez comment envoyer et recevoir des messages instantanés d’amis et de proches grâce au service de messagerie instantanée Messenger de Google+. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Chat +. Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un compte. 2 Saisissez et envoyez votre message. Google+ Découvrez comment accéder au service de réseau social de Google. Vous pouvez créer des groupes pour partager des centres d’intérêt et avis ou pour envoyer et recevoir des messages instantanés, tout comme vous pouvez charger vos photos.Communication 56 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Google+. Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un compte. 2 Sélectionnez une fonction de réseau social. Social Hub Découvrez comment accéder à Social Hub ™, l’application de communication intégrée pour les services de réseaux sociaux, les e-mails, les messages, les contacts ou les agendas. Visitez le site socialhub.samsungapps.com pour obtenir plus d’informations. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Social Hub. 2 Découvrez et exploitez le contenu proposé par Social Hub. MI Découvrez comment discuter avec votre famille ou vos amis par l’intermédiaire de n’importe quel client de messagerie instantané universel. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur MI. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, cochez la case J'accepte toutes les conditions ci-dessus et appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Appuyez sur Ajouter compte→ un client de messagerie. 4 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe pour vous connecter. 5 Vous pouvez immédiatement discuter avec vos amis et votre famille.Divertissements 57 Divertissements Appareil photo Découvrez comment capturer et visionner des photos et des vidéos. Vous pouvez prendre des photos d’une résolution allant jusqu’à 3264x2448 pixels (8mégapixels) et enregistrer des vidéos d’une résolution allant jusqu’à 1920x1080pixels. ● L’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. ● Il est possible que les capacités de la mémoire diffèrent en fonction de la scène photographiée ou des conditions de prise de vue. › Capturer une photo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 1 2 4 6 5 3 Divertissements 58 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. 2 Ouvrir la fenêtre de visualisation des photos pour afficher les dernières photos capturées. 3 Raccourcis de l’appareil photo. ● : modifier les paramètres du flash. ● : basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des raccourcis vers les options le plus fréquemment utilisées. ►p.67 4 Afficher l’emplacement de stockage par défaut. 5 Basculer en mode Caméscope. 6 Capturer une photo. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de volume pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis les écarter (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière). Il est possible que la fonction Zoom ne soit pas disponible lors d’une prise de vue avec une résolution élevée. 4 Appuyez à l’endroit qui doit être mis au point sur l’écran d’aperçu. Le cadre de l’image se déplace à l’endroit où vous appuyez et devient vert lorsque la mise au point du sujet est terminée. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. La photo est enregistrée automatiquement.Divertissements 59 Après avoir pris des photos, appuyez sur l’icône de visualisation des images pour les visionner. ● Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de photos. ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière) ou appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. ● Pour envoyer la photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. ● Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur Supprimer. ● Pour définir la photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’attribuer à un correspondant, appuyez sur Plus→Définir comme. ● Pour renommer la photo, appuyez sur Plus→Renommer. › Capturer des photos à l’aide des options prédéfinies Votre appareil photo propose des paramètres prédéfinis pour différents types de scènes. Il vous suffit de sélectionner le mode approprié aux conditions et aux sujets de vos prises de vue. Par exemple, si vous prenez des photos la nuit, sélectionnez le mode Nuit dont l’exposition est supérieure à une photo prise de jour. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur →Mode scène→ une scène → [ ]. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.Divertissements 60 › Capturer une photo en mode Autoportrait Vous pouvez prendre facilement des photos de vous-même en utilisant l’objectif avant. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur →Autoportrait. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. › Capturer une photo en mode Sourire Votre appareil photo peut reconnaître les visages et vous aider à prendre des photos lorsque vos sujets sourient. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Sourire. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur . 5 Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo vers le sujet. Votre appareil reconnaît les visages sur une photo et détecte les sourires. Lorsque le sujet sourit, l’appareil prend automatiquement une photo. › Capturer une photo en mode Beauté Vous pouvez masquer les imperfections des visages en utilisant le mode Beauté. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Beauté. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.Divertissements 61 › Capturer une photo en mode Panorama Vous pouvez prendre de larges photos panoramiques en utilisant le mode Panorama. Ce mode est conseillé pour photographier les paysages. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Panorama. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre la première photo. 5 Déplacez doucement le téléphone dans une direction et alignez le cadre vert avec l’objectif. Lorsque le cadre vert est aligné avec l’objectif, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement la photo suivante. 6 Répétez l’étape5 pour terminer la photo panoramique. › Capturer une photo d’action Vous pouvez prendre des photos d’un sujet en mouvement et les regrouper en une seule photo pour illustrer l’action. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Action. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour capturer la première photo. 5 Déplacez le téléphone afin de suivre le sujet en mouvement. L’appareil capture automatiquement les clichés suivants. 6 Continuez de suivre le sujet jusqu’à ce que l’appareil ait capturé tous les clichés nécessaires pour composer la photo d’action.Divertissements 62 › Capturer une photo en mode Dessin animé Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des effets de dessin animé. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Dessin animé. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. › Personnaliser les paramètres de l’appareil photo Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur pour accéder aux options suivantes: Paramètre Fonction Modifier les raccourcis Modifier les raccourcis permettant d’accéder aux options couramment utilisées. Autoportrait Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. Flash Modifier les paramètres du flash. Vous pouvez allumer ou éteindre le flash manuellement ou paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il déclenche automatiquement le flash lorsque cela est nécessaire. Mode de capture Modifier le mode de prise de vue. Mode scène Modifier le mode de scène. Valeur d’exposition Régler la valeur d’exposition. Mode focus Prendre des photos en gros plan ou bien paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il effectue automatiquement une mise au point sur des sujets ou des visages. Retardateur Définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’appareil doit prendre une photo.Divertissements 63 Paramètre Fonction Effets Appliquer des effets spéciaux, par exemple des tons sépia ou noir et blanc. Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution. Balance des blancs Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. ISO Régler la sensibilité du capteur d’images. Mesure Sélectionner un type d’indice d’exposition. Visibilité extérieure Activer ou désactiver la visibilité extérieure pour sélectionner des conditions de luminosité appropriées. Stabilisateur Réduire les flous dus aux vibrations ou aux mouvements de l’appareil. Contraste auto Ajuster automatiquement les contrastes entre votre sujet et l’arrière-plan. Détection clignements Régler l’appareil photo pour qu’il vous alerte lorsqu’il détecte des yeux fermés. Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. Qualité d’image Définir le niveau de qualité des photos. Balise GPS Paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il ajoute les informations de localisation aux photos. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez activer les services de localisation. ►p.110 Enregistré comme retourné Configurer l’appareil photo de manière à ce qu’il fasse automatiquement pivoter l’image quand vous prenez une photo avec l’objectif avant. Stockage Sélectionner un emplacement de stockage par défaut où enregistrer les photos prises. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des prises de vue.Divertissements 64 › Enregistrer une vidéo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Faites glisser le curseur vers le caméscope pour basculer en mode Caméscope. 3 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 1 2 6 5 4 3 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier les paramètres du caméscope. 2 Ouvrir la fenêtre de visualisation pour afficher les dernières vidéos enregistrées. 3 Raccourcis du caméscope. ● : modifier les paramètres du flash. ● : modifier le mode d’enregistrement. Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des raccourcis vers les options le plus fréquemment utilisées. ►p.67Divertissements 65 Numéro Fonction 4 Barre d'état du caméscope. ● : durée des vidéos que vous pouvez enregistrer (en fonction de la mémoire disponible) ● : emplacement de stockage par défaut 5 Basculer en mode Appareil photo. 6 Enregistrer une vidéo. 4 Appuyez sur la touche de volume pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis les écarter (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière). Il est possible que la fonction Zoom ne soit pas disponible lors d’un enregistrement avec une résolution élevée. 5 Appuyez sur pour commencer à enregistrer. 6 Appuyez sur pour arrêter l’enregistrement. La vidéo est enregistrée automatiquement. Il est possible que le caméscope ne puisse pas enregistrer les vidéos correctement sur une carte mémoire dont le taux de transfert est lent. Après avoir enregistré des vidéos, appuyez sur l’icône de visualisation des images pour les visionner. ● Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de vidéos. ● Pour envoyer la vidéo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. ● Pour supprimer la vidéo, appuyez sur Supprimer. ● Pour lire la vidéo, appuyez sur ou sur Plus→Lire. ● Pour renommer la vidéo, appuyez sur Plus→Renommer. Divertissements 66 › Personnaliser les paramètres du caméscope Avant de commencer à enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur pour accéder aux options suivantes: Paramètre Fonction Modifier les raccourcis Modifier les raccourcis permettant d’accéder aux options couramment utilisées. Flash Modifier les paramètres du flash. Vous pouvez éteindre ou allumer le flash manuellement. Mode enreg. Modifier le mode d’enregistrement. Valeur d’exposition Régler la valeur d’exposition. Retardateur Définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’appareil doit commencer à filmer. Effets Appliquer des effets spéciaux, par exemple des tons sépia ou noir et blanc. Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution. Balance des blancs Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Visibilité extérieure Activer ou désactiver la visibilité extérieure pour sélectionner des conditions de luminosité appropriées. Qualité vidéo Définir le niveau de qualité des vidéos. Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. Enregistré comme retourné Configurer le caméscope de manière à ce qu’il fasse automatiquement pivoter l’image quand vous enregistrez une vidéo avec l’objectif avant. Stockage Sélectionner un emplacement de stockage où stocker les vidéos enregistrées. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des prises de vue.Divertissements 67 › Modifier les icônes de raccourcis Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des raccourcis vers les options le plus fréquemment utilisées. 1 Depuis l’aperçu, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier les raccourcis ou sur →Modifier les raccourcis. 2 Appuyez de manière prolongée sur une icône de la liste des options, puis faites la glisser dans la zone des raccourcis. Pour supprimer des raccourcis, appuyez de manière prolongée sur une icône et faites-la glisser dans la liste des options. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’aperçu. Vidéos Découvrez comment utiliser le lecteur vidéo pour visionner toutes sortes de vidéos. Le lecteur vidéo est compatible avec les formats de fichiers suivants: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv, WebM (Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, Sorenson Spark, VC-1, DivX®, DivX® 3.11, WMV7/8, VP8). ● En fonction de la version logicielle du téléphone, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. ● Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Vidéos. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. 3 Les icônes suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture: Icône Fonction Changer le format de l’écran vidéo. Lire la vidéo sur d’autres appareils DLNA. Revenir au fichier précédent. Effectuer un retour rapide dans le fichier (en maintenant la touche enfoncée).Divertissements 68 Icône Fonction Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre, appuyez sur . Passer au fichier suivant. Effectuer une avance rapide dans le fichier (en maintenant la touche enfoncée). Activer le son Surround 5.1 lorsqu’un kit piéton est branché. Régler le volume. Galerie Découvrez comment visionner les photos et regarder les vidéos enregistrées dans la mémoire du téléphone et sur une carte mémoire. › Formats de fichiers compatibles Type Format Image bmp, gif, jpg, png Vidéo 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv, WebM (Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, Sorenson Spark, VC-1, DivX®, DivX® 3.11, WMV7/8, VP8). ● Évitez de verrouiller l’écran du téléphone pendant que vous visionnez une vidéo DivX à la demande. Chaque fois que vous verrouillez l’écran pendant la lecture d’une vidéo DivX à la demande, le nombre de locations disponibles diminue. ● En fonction de la version logicielle du téléphone, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. ● Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire disponible. Divertissements 69 ›Afficher une photo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Choisissez un dossier. 3 Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur ou en haut à droite de l’écran. 4 Sélectionnez une photo (sans icône de lecture). En mode affichage d’une photo, les options suivantes sont disponibles: ● Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de photos. ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour effectuer un zoom arrière). Si vous avez activé les mouvements d’inclinaison, vous pouvez effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière en maintenant la pression sur deux points de l'écran, puis en inclinant l’appareil d’avant en arrière. ● Pour envoyer la photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Envoyer via. ● Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur Supprimer. ● Pour partager la photo avec d’autres personnes via AllShare ou des sites Web communautaires, appuyez sur [ ] →Partager via. ● Pour définir la photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’attribuer à un correspondant en tant qu’image d’ID appelant, appuyez sur [ ] →Définir comme. ● Pour utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires avec la photo, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus, puis utilisez les options suivantes: - Copier: copier un fichier photo. - Imprimer: imprimer la photo à l’aide d’une connexion WiFi ou USB. Votre appareil est compatible uniquement avec certaines imprimantes Samsung. - Modifier: modifier la photo. ►p.70 - Rogner: redimensionner la photo.Divertissements 70 - Mouvement: accéder aux paramètres servant à contrôler la reconnaissance de mouvements sur votre appareil. - Rotation à gauche: faire pivoter la photo dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre. - Rotation à droite: faire pivoter la photo dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. - Diaporama: démarrer un diaporama en utilisant les photos enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné. - Renommer: renommer la photo. - Détails : afficher les détails de la photo. › Lire une vidéo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo (avec l’icône ). 3 Pour contrôler la lecture, servez-vous des touches virtuelles. ►p.67 Editeur de photos Vous pouvez retoucher des photos et appliquer plusieurs effets. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Editeur de photos. 2 Appuyez sur Sélectionner image→ une image. Pour prendre une nouvelle photo, appuyez sur Capturer une image. 3 Appuyez sur →Nouvelle sélection→OK. ● Pour redimensionner la bordure de sélection, appuyez sur →Ajouter à la sélection ou Supprimer de la sélection. ● Pour inverser la sélection, appuyez sur →Inverser la sélection. ● Pour modifier le format de la sélection, appuyez sur .Divertissements 71 ● Pour faire pivoter ou retourner l’image, appuyez sur . ● Pour rogner l’image, appuyez sur . ● Pour annuler ou répéter votre dernière action, appuyez sur ou . 4 Faites glisser votre doigt sur la zone à sélectionner. 5 Appuyez sur pour appliquer un effet de couleur ou appuyez sur pour appliquer un effet de filtre. Pour utiliser d’autres outils tels que la copie et la distorsion, appuyez sur . 6 Selectionnez une variation de l’effet à appliquer. 7 Ajustez l’image comme vous le souhaitez (si nécessaire), puis appuyez sur OK. 8 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Sauveg. 9 Saisissez un nom pour l’image, puis appuyez sur OK. Créateur de vidéo Vous pouvez éditer des vidéos et appliquer plusieurs effets. Le créateur de vidéos prend en charge les résolutions vidéo et les codecs suivants: Type Format Résolutions 176x144, 320x240, 640x480, 720x480, 1280x720 Codecs H.264, H.263, MPEG4 Selon les résolutions vidéo et les codecs, il est possible que certains fichiers vidéo de la Galerie ne puissent pas être lus. › Créer une vidéo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Créateur de vidéo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage.Divertissements 72 3 Appuyez sur Nouveau projet. 4 Sélectionnez un thème et appuyez sur Appliquer. 5 Sélectionnez l’icône appropriée sur le panneau gauche de l’écran pour ajouter des fichiers multimédia. 6 Maintenez votre doigt sur un fichier, puis faites-le glisser vers le panneau situé au bas de l’écran et appuyez sur OK. ● Pour ajouter d’autres fichiers, répétez l’étape 6. ● Pour sélectionner la durée d’affichage d’une image, faites glisser l’image vers la ligne rouge et sélectionnez l’icône de durée sur l’écran d’aperçu. ● Pour supprimer des images ou des vidéos, maintenez votre doigt sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers la corbeille. ● Pour déplacer des images ou des vidéos, maintenez votre doigt sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. 7 Appuyez sur et ajoutez un effet de transition entre les images ou les vidéos. 8 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Export film. 9 Sélectionnez une option de résolution →Oui. › Couper un segment de vidéo 1 Lancez le créateur de vidéos et ajoutez des fichiers multimédia. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Faites glisser une image ou une vidéo vers la ligne rouge. 4 Déplacez le crochet de départ vers le point où vous souhaitez commencer la nouvelle vidéo. 5 Déplacez le crochet de fin vers le point où vous souhaitez terminer la nouvelle vidéo. 6 Enregistrez la vidéo éditée.Divertissements 73 ›Diviser une vidéo 1 Lancez le créateur de vidéos et ajoutez des fichiers multimédia. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Faites glisser une image ou une vidéo vers la ligne rouge. 4 Déplacez le point où vous souhaitez diviser le fichier en deux parties et appuyez sur . 5 Enregistrez la vidéo éditée. ›Appliquer un effet à une vidéo 1 Lancez le créateur de vidéos et ajoutez des fichiers multimédia. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Faites glisser une image ou une vidéo vers la ligne rouge. 4 Sélectionnez une option d’effet. 5 Enregistrez la vidéo éditée. Lecteur MP3 Découvrez comment écouter vos morceaux de musique favoris à tout moment grâce au lecteur MP3. Le lecteur MP3 est compatible avec les formats de fichiers suivants: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, asf, wma, ogg, oga, aac, flac. ● En fonction de la version logicielle du téléphone, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. ● Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire disponible. Divertissements 74 ›Ajouter des fichiers audio dans le téléphone Commencez par transférer des fichiers dans votre téléphone ou dans une carte mémoire: ● Téléchargez sur le Web. ►p.87 ● Téléchargez depuis un ordinateur à l’aide du logiciel Samsung Kies. ►p.111 ● Recevez des fichiers via Bluetooth. ►p.101 ● Synchronisez avec Windows Media Player11. ►p.111 ● Copiez des fichiers dans une carte mémoire. ►p.112 › Écouter de la musique Après avoir transféré des fichiers audio dans votre téléphone ou sur une carte mémoire: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Lecteur MP3. 2 Choisissez une catégorie de musique. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier audio. 4 Les icônes suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture: Icône Fonction Régler le volume. Activer le son Surround 5.1 lorsqu’un kit piéton est branché. Activer le mode Aléatoire. Modifier le mode de répétition (désactivé, répéter la lecture d’un seul ou de tous les fichiers). Redémarrer la lecture; Revenir au fichier précédent (appuyer dans les 3secondes). Effectuer un retour rapide dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre, appuyez sur . 1 1Divertissements 75 Icône Fonction Passer au fichier suivant. Effectuer une avance rapide dans le fichier (en maintenant la touche enfoncée). 1. Ces icônes s’affichent uniquement lorsque vous appuyez sur l’écran du lecteur. › Créer une liste de lecture 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Lecteur MP3. 2 Appuyez sur Listes de lecture. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Créer. 4 Saisissez le titre de votre nouvelle liste de lecture, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. 5 Appuyez sur Ajouter une musique. 6 Sélectionnez les fichiers que vous souhaitez ajouter et appuyez sur Ajouter. Pendant la lecture, vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers à une liste de lecture en appuyant sur [ ] →Ajouter à liste de lecture. ›Ajouter des morceaux à la liste rapide Vous pouvez ajouter des morceaux à la liste rapide et les enregistrer en tant que liste de lecture. Pendant la lecture, appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter à liste rapide pour ajouter le morceau en cours de lecture à la liste rapide. Pour accéder à la liste rapide, depuis l’écran principal du lecteur de musique, appuyez sur Listes de lecture→Liste rapide. Pour enregistrer la liste rapide sous forme de liste de lecture, appuyez sur [ ] →Enregistrer comme liste de lecture.Divertissements 76 › Personnaliser les paramètres du lecteur MP3 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Lecteur MP3. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres. 3 Pour personnaliser votre lecteur MP3, définissez les paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Egaliseur Sélectionner un type d’égaliseur par défaut. Effets sonores Sélectionner un effet sonore. Menu musique Sélectionner les catégories de musique à afficher sur l’écran de l’audiothèque. Affichage Afficher une image animée pendant l’écoute. Paroles Afficher les paroles pendant la lecture, si disponibles. Désactiv. auto MP3 Configurer le lecteur MP3 pour qu’il s’éteigne automatiquement passé un certain délai. Radio FM Découvrez comment écouter de la musique et les actualités en utilisant la radio FM. Pour écouter la radio FM, vous devez brancher un casque ou des écouteurs qui font office d’antenne radio. › Écouter la radio FM 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations disponibles. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio FM pour la première fois, l’appareil lance une recherche automatique des stations.Divertissements 77 3 Sélectionnez la station de radio désirée dans la liste, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM. 4 Les touches suivantes permettent de contrôler la radio FM: 1 4 2 2 3 5 Numéro Fonction 1 Allumer ou éteindre la radio FM. 2 Rechercher une station de radio disponible. 3 Ajouter la station de radio en cours d’écoute à la liste des favoris. 4 Régler le volume. 5 Ajuster la fréquence. › Enregistrer automatiquement une station de radio 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Analyser→ une option de recherche. La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations disponibles. 4 Sélectionnez la station de radio désirée dans la liste, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM.Divertissements 78 ›Ajouter une station à la liste des favoris 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 3 Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur . 4 Sélectionnez la station de radio désirée. 5 Pour ajouter la station à la liste des favoris, appuyez sur . › Personnaliser les paramètres de la radio FM 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres. 3 Pour personnaliser votre radio FM, définissez les paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Lecture en arrière-plan Indiquer si vous souhaitez écouter la radio FM en arrière-plan lorsque vous utilisez d’autres applications. Si cette fonction est active, vous pouvez contrôler la radio FM depuis le volet des raccourcis. Nom de la station Indiquer si le nom de la station doit s’afficher sur l’écran de la radio FM. Ces noms ne sont disponibles que pour les stations de radio qui les fournissent. Fréquence alternative Indiquer si la radio FM doit tenter de changer de fréquence lorsque le signal d’une station est faible. Désactiv. auto radio Régler la radio FM pour qu’elle s’éteigne automatiquement passé un certain délai.Informations personnelles 79 Informations personnelles Contacts Découvrez comment créer et gérer la liste de vos contacts personnels ou professionnels. Pour tous vos contacts, vous pouvez enregistrer des noms, des numéros de téléphone mobile ou fixe, des adresses e-mail, des dates d’anniversaire et plus encore. ›Ajouter un nouveau contact 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 4 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact. 5 Appuyez sur pour ajouter ce contact dans la mémoire sélectionnée. Vous pouvez également créer un contact à partir de l’écran de numérotation. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier. 2 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone. 3 Appuyez sur Ajouter→Créer un contact. 4 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 5 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact. 6 Appuyez sur pour ajouter ce contact dans la mémoire sélectionnée.Informations personnelles 80 › Rechercher un contact 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou vers le bas. Vous pouvez également faire glisser votre doigt à droite de l’index pour faire défiler rapidement la liste. 3 Sélectionnez un contact. Une fois le contact localisé, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● Pour appeler le contact, appuyez sur ou sur . ● Pour envoyer un message, appuyez sur . ● Pour modifier les coordonnées du contact, appuyez sur . ›Définir un numéro d’appel abrégé 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Numérotation rapide. 3 Sélectionnez un numéro d’emplacement → un contact. 4 Sélectionnez un numéro de téléphone (si nécessaire). Depuis l’écran de numérotation, vous pouvez composer rapidement ce numéro en maintenant votre doigt appuyé sur le chiffre associé. › Créer une carte de visite 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur Configurer mon profil. 3 Saisissez vos coordonnées personnelles. 4 Appuyez sur . Vous pouvez envoyer votre carte de visite en la joignant à un message ou à un e-mail, ou en la transférant à l’aide de la fonction sans fil Bluetooth.Informations personnelles 81 › Créer un groupe de contacts En créant des groupes de contacts, vous pouvez gérer plusieurs contacts simultanément et envoyer des messages ou des e-mails à tous les membres d’un groupe. Commencez par créer un groupe. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts→Groupes. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Nouveau. 3 Saisissez le nom du groupe, puis sélectionnez la sonnerie à associer au groupe. 4 Appuyez sur Ajouter membre, sélectionnez les contacts à ajouter au groupe et appuyez sur . 5 Appuyez sur . ›Importer ou exporter des contacts depuis et vers une carte SIM Pour copier des contacts à partir de la carte SIM ou USIM dans le téléphone: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Importer depuis la carte SIM. 3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 4 Sélectionnez les contacts à copier et appuyez sur .Informations personnelles 82 Pour copier des contacts à partir du téléphone sur la carte SIM ou USIM: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Exporter vers la carte SIM. 3 Sélectionnez les contacts à copier et appuyez sur →OK. ›Importer ou exporter des contacts depuis et vers une carte SD Vous pouvez importer ou exporter des fichiers (au format vcf) depuis et vers une carte mémoire ou le stockage USB de votre appareil. Importer des contacts 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Importer depuis stockage USB or Importer depuis la carte SD. 3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 4 Choisissez entre importer un seul contact, plusieurs contacts ou l’ensemble des contacts, puis appuyez sur OK. 5 Sélectionnez les contacts à importer, puis appuyez sur OK. Exporter des contacts 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Exporter vers le stockage USB or Exporter vers la carte SD. 3 Appuyez sur OK pour confirmer.Informations personnelles 83 Calendrier Découvrez comment créer et gérer les événements quotidiens, hebdomadaires ou mensuels et définir des alarmes pour vous souvenir des événements importants. › Créer des événements 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyer pour créer un événement ou sur [ ] →Créer. 3 Si un message d'alerte à propos de la synchronisation du calendrier apparaît, appuyez sur OK. 4 Saisissez les détails de l’événement. 5 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. ›Afficher des événements Pour modifier l’affichage du calendrier: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Sélectionnez un mode d’affichage en haut de l’écran du calendrier. Pour afficher les événements d’une date spécifique : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Sélectionnez une date dans le calendrier. En affichage mensuel, les dates comportant des événements programmés sont représentées par un petit carré. ● Pour passer directement à une certaine date en la saisissant manuellement, appuyez sur [ ] →Accés, saisissez la date en appuyant sur + ou -, puis sur Régler. ● Pour sélectionner la date du jour, appuyez sur [ ] →Aujourd’hui. 3 Sélectionnez un événement pour en afficher les détails. Vous pouvez envoyer l’évènement à d’autres personnes en appuyant sur [ ] →Envoyer via→ une option.Informations personnelles 84 › Répéter l’alarme d’un événement Si vous définissez une alarme pour un événement, l’icône de l’alarme s’affichera à l’heure spécifiée. 1 Ouvrez le volet de raccourcis situé en haut de l’écran. 2 Sélectionnez la notification d’événement. 3 Sélectionnez un événement pour en afficher les détails. Pour répéter l’alarme de l’événement, cochez la case de l’événement et appuyez sur Répéter. Tâche Découvrez comment créer une liste de tâches et régler les alarmes pour vous rappeler les tâches importantes ou définir une priorité. › Créer une tâche 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Tâche. 2 Appuyez sur Créer tâche ou sur [ ] →Créer tâche pour créer une tâche. 3 Saisissez les détails de la tâche. 4 Appuyez sur Sauveg. ›Afficher une tâche 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Tâche. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Trier par→ une option pour trier les tâches. 3 Sélectionnez une tâche pour en afficher les détails. Pour les tâches associées à un délai d’exécution, vous pouvez indiquer le statut « terminé» en sélectionnant la case à cocher correspondante.Informations personnelles 85 Mémo Découvrez comment enregistrer une information importante pour la consulter ultérieurement. › Créer un mémo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo. 2 Si un mémo a déjà été enregistré, appuyez sur Créer un mémo ou sur [ ] →Créer pour créer un mémo. 3 Saisissez le texte de votre mémo et appuyez sur Enreg. ›Afficher des mémos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo. 2 Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur [ ] →Recherche ou maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée (si nécessaire). 3 Sélectionnez un mémo pour en afficher les détails. ● Pour modifier le mémo, appuyez sur . ● Pour utiliser d'autres fonctions avec un mémo, appuyez sur . Option Fonction Supprimer le mémo. Changer la couleur du mémo. Verrouiller le mémo. Imprimer le mémo à l’aide d’une connexion Wi-Fi ou USB. Votre appareil est compatible uniquement avec certaines imprimantes Samsung. Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes en appuyant sur [ ] →Envoyer→ une option.Informations personnelles 86 Mémo vocal Découvrez comment utiliser le dictaphone de votre téléphone. › Enregistrer un mémo vocal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo vocal. 2 Appuyez sur Enreg. pour commencer à enregistrer. 3 Parlez dans le microphone. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Arrêter. Le mémo est enregistré automatiquement. 5 Pour enregistrer d’autres mémos vocaux, appuyez de nouveau sur Enreg. › Écouter un mémo vocal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo vocal. 2 Appuyez sur Liste. 3 Sélectionnez un mémo vocal à lire. Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo vocal en appuyant sur [ ] →Partager.Web 87 Web Les services Web nécessitent une connexion de données. Pour choisir le meilleur forfait de connexion, contactez votre opérateur. Internet Découvrez comment accéder à des pages Web et enregistrer des favoris. ● L’accès au Web et le téléchargement de contenu multimédia peuvent entraîner des frais supplémentaires. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. ● La disponibilité de certaines icônes dépend de votre zone géographique. › Surfer sur le Web 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet pour ouvrir la page d’accueil. Pour accéder à une page Web spécifique, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’adresse (URL), saisissez l’adresse de la page Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à. 2 Utilisez les touches suivantes pour naviguer dans les pages Web: 1 2 3 Numéro Fonction 1 Saisir l’adresse de la page Web à afficher. 2 Ouvrir la liste des favoris enregistrés, des pages enregistrées et de l’historique Internet récent. 3 Afficher les miniatures des fenêtres de navigation actives.Web 88 En cours de navigation sur une page Web, utilisez les options suivantes: ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour effectuer un zoom arrière). Si vous avez activé les mouvements d’inclinaison, vous pouvez effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière en maintenant la pression sur deux points de l'écran, puis en inclinant l’appareil d’avant en arrière. ● Pour actualiser la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] →Actualiser. ● Pour aller à la page suivante de l’historique, appuyez sur [ ] → Page suivante. ● Pour ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur [ ] →Nouvelle fenêtre. ● Pour ouvrir une fenêtre sans enregistrer vos données de navigation, appuyez sur [ ] →Nouv. fen. priv. ● Pour ajouter la page aux favoris, appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter un favori. ● Pour envoyer l’adresse de la page Web à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] →Partager page. ● Pour rechercher du texte sur la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] → Rech. sur page. ● Pour passer à l’affichage du bureau, appuyez sur [ ] → Affichage bureau. ● Pour enregistrer la page Web en cours afin de la lire ultérieurement en ligne, appuyez sur [ ] →Enregistrer pour la lecture hors connexion. Vous pouvez afficher les pages enregistrées en appuyant sur →Pages enreg. ● Pour régler les paramètres de luminosité et de couleur de l’écran, appuyez sur [ ] →Luminosité/Couleur. ● Pour afficher les détails de la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] → Info page. ● Pour afficher l’historique de téléchargement, appuyez sur [ ] →Téléchargements. ● Pour imprimer la page Web ou l’écran en cours sur une imprimante reliée, appuyez sur [ ] →Imprimer. Votre appareil est compatible uniquement avec les imprimantes Samsung. ● Pour personnaliser les paramètres du navigateur, appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.Web 89 › Rechercher des informations oralement Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’URL. 3 Appuyez sur et prononcez un mot-clé dans le microphone de l’appareil. L’appareil recherche les informations et les pages Web correspondant au mot-clé. › Créer des favoris de pages Web Vous pouvez ajouter un favori manuellement si vous connaissez l’adresse de sa page Web. Pour ajouter un favori : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur →Favoris. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Dernière page favorite consultée. Pour ajouter la page Web que vous étiez en train de consulter aux favoris, passez à l’étape5. 4 Saisissez le titre d’une page Web et son adresse (URL). 5 Appuyez sur . Dans la liste des favoris, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un favori et utilisez les options suivantes: ● Pour ouvrir la page Web dans la fenêtre affichée, appuyez sur Ouvrir. ● Pour ouvrir la page Web dans une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur Ouvrir nouvelle fenêtre. ● Pour modifier les détails du favori, appuyez sur Modifier le favori. ● Pour ajouter le raccourci du favori sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Ajouter raccourci à l'écran d'accueil. ● Pour envoyer l’adresse de la page Web à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager le lien.Web 90 ● Pour copier l’adresse de la page Web, appuyez sur Copier l'URL du lien. ● Pour supprimer le favori, appuyez sur Supprimer le favori. ● Pour utiliser la page Web en tant que page d’accueil du navigateur, appuyez sur Définir comme page d’accueil. ›Accéder à l’historique récent 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur →Historique. 3 Sélectionnez une page Web à ouvrir. Vous pouvez ajouter une page Web à la liste des favoris en appuyant sur . Maps Découvrez comment utiliser Google Maps ™ pour rechercher votre position, parcourir la carte en ligne pour afficher une rue, une ville ou un pays et calculer un itinéraire. ● Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. ● Pour trouver votre position et effectuer une recherche sur la carte, vous devez activer les services de localisation. ►p.110 › Rechercher un lieu spécifique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Maps . 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur OK. La carte affiche votre position actuelle. 3 Appuyez sur . Pour localiser un endroit à proximité, appuyez sur .Web 91 4 Saisissez un mot clé pour la localisation, puis appuyez sur . Pour effectuer une recherche de localisation oralement, appuyez sur . 5 Sélectionnez le lieu dont vous voulez afficher les détails. ● Pour afficher une liste de l’ensemble des résultats de votre recherche, appuyez sur LISTE DES RÉSULTATS. ● Pour afficher votre position actuelle, appuyez sur . ● Pour basculer sur le mode Boussole qui permet de changer l’orientation de la carte dès que vous déplacez l’appareil, appuyez sur . ● Pour ajouter une étoile de favori au lieu, appuyez sur le nom du lieu → . › Calculer un itinéraire vers une destination spécifique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Maps . 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Saisissez les adresses du lieu de départ et du lieu d’arrivée. Pour saisir une adresse à partir de votre liste de contacts ou de vos lieux favoris ou pour indiquer un lieu sur la carte, appuyez sur →Contacts, Point sur la carte ou Mes adresses. 4 Sélectionnez un mode de déplacement (voiture, bus ou à pied) et appuyez sur ITINÉRAIRE. En fonction du mode de déplacement sélectionné, il est possible que plusieurs itinéraires s’affichent. 5 Sélectionnez un itinéraire pour afficher les détails de votre déplacement, puis appuyez sur PLAN pour afficher l’itinéraire sur la carte. Pour utiliser la navigation à guidage vocal, appuyez sur . 6 Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher uniquement une partie de l’itinéraire. 7 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Effacer résultats.Web 92 Latitude Découvrez comment partager votre position avec vos amis et afficher leur position à l’aide de Google Latitude ™. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Latitude. Le téléphone se connecte automatiquement à Google Latitude. 2 Appuyez sur →Sélectionner dans mes contacts ou Ajouter en indiquant l'adresse e-mail. 3 Sélectionnez un ami à ajouter ou saisissez une adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur Ajouter des amis. 4 Appuyez sur Oui. Lorsque votre ami accepte votre invitation, vous pouvez partager des positions. 5 Appuyez sur PLAN. La position de vos amis est marquée avec leur photo sur la carte. Adresses Découvrez comment rechercher un lieu à proximité de votre position. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Adresses. 2 Choisissez une catégorie. Le téléphone recherche des lieux à proximité de votre position actuelle reliés à la catégorie sélectionnée. 3 Sélectionnez le nom d’un lieu pour en afficher les détails. 4 Pour afficher le lieu sur une carte, appuyez sur Plan. Pour afficher l’itinéraire jusqu’à la destination, appuyez sur Itinéraire. Pour afficher le numéro de téléphone du lieu, appuyez sur Appel.Web 93 Navigation Découvrez comment utiliser le système de navigation GPS pour rechercher et afficher votre destination avec des indications vocales. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigation. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Saisissez votre destination en utilisant l’une des méthodes suivantes: ● Prononcer le nom de votre destination en disant par exemple «3 rue Molière, Paris ». ● Saisir la destination à l’aide du clavier virtuel. ● Sélectionner votre destination à partir des adresses de vos contacts. ● Sélectionner votre destination à partir de la liste de vos lieux favoris. Recherche Vous pouvez rechercher des données enregistrées sur votre téléphone ou sur le Web. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Recherche. 2 Saisissez un mot ou quelques lettres d’un mot à rechercher. 3 Sélectionnez les données auxquelles vous souhaitez accéder.Web 94 YouTube Découvrez comment visionner et partager des vidéos via YouTube. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. › Visionner des vidéos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo dans la liste. 3 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 4 Contrôlez la lecture à l’aide des icônes affichées à l’écran. › Partager des vidéos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur → une option. › Mettre des vidéos en ligne 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Pour allumer le caméscope, appuyez sur . 3 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour commencer à enregistrer. 5 Appuyez sur pour arrêter l’enregistrement. 6 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour mettre en ligne la vidéo que vous venez d’enregistrer.Web 95 7 Sélectionnez votre compte Google s’il est relié à YouTube. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner Ajouter un compte et configurer un compte pour ouvrir une session dans YouTube. Si vous téléchargez une vidéo pour la première fois, sélectionnez un type de réseau pour le chargement de la vidéo. 8 Saisissez les détails du chargement et appuyez sur Envoyer. Play Store Vous pouvez télécharger des jeux, des sonneries ou d’autres applications à partir de Google Play. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Play Store. 2 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur le téléphone. ► p. 38 Actualités et météo Découvrez comment afficher la météo et lire les actualités à la une ainsi que d’autres articles. ›Afficher la météo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Actualités et météo. 2 Appuyez sur MÉTÉO en haut de l’écran. Votre téléphone recherche votre position actuelle et affiche la météo correspondante. Vous pouvez modifier la position pour afficher la météo dans une autre région. Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres→ Paramètres de la météo et décochez la case Utiliser ma position. Sélectionnez ensuite sur un emplacement dans Définir un lieu.Web 96 › Lire les articles de journaux 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Actualités et météo. 2 Faites défiler vers la gauche pour sélectionner un sujet d’actualité en haut de l’écran. 3 Sélectionnez un article. Pour ajouter des sujets d’actualité, appuyez sur [ ] → Paramètres→Paramètres de l’actualité→Sélectionner des sujets. App Shop Vous pouvez rechercher et télécharger des applications depuis Orange App Shop. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur App Shop. 2 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur le téléphone. Sauvegarde Vous pouvez sauvegarder vos contacts sur votre compte Orange et les restaurer si nécessaire. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Sauvegarde. 2 Synchronisez vos contacts entre ceux de l’appareil et ceux de votre compte Orange. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur.Web 97 Jeux Vous pouvez télécharger des jeux depuis Orange App Shop. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Jeux. 2 Localisez un jeu et téléchargez-le sur l’appareil. Maps Vous pouvez rechercher une rue ou une adresse, localiser votre position et obtenir un itinéraire vers une destination définie. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Maps . 2 Retrouvez une rue ou une adresse sur la carte, ou obtenez des informations de trafic ou locales. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Cinéday Vous pouvez obtenir des réductions sur vos tickets de cinéma, accédez gratuitement à des bandes annonces, consulter les programmes, et lire les actualités et les interviews les plus récentes. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Cinéday. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible.Web 98 Sonneries Vous pouvez télécharger des sonneries et des musiques depuis Orange App Shop. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Sonneries. 2 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur le téléphone. Météo Vous pouvez obtenir les toutes dernières mises à jour météo pour votre ville ou une autre région publiées par Orange Weather. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Météo. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. Orange et moi Vous pouvez rapidement vérifier le solde de votre compte, vous informer sur les promotions offertes par les partenaires Orange, découvrir de nouvelles applications Orange et obtenir de l’aide. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Orange et moi. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible.Connectivité 99 Connectivité Bluetooth Bluetooth est une technologie de communication sans fil à courte portée, capable d’échanger des informations dans un rayon de 10mètres sans nécessiter de connexion matérielle. Il est inutile d’aligner les appareils pour envoyer des données via Bluetooth. Si les appareils sont à portée l’un de l’autre, vous pouvez échanger des informations, même si les deux appareils ne sont pas dans la même pièce. ● Samsung n’est pas responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ● Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. ● Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains autres, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. ›Activer la fonction sans fil Bluetooth Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres, puis sur l’option OFF près du menu Bluetooth. Connectivité 100 › Rechercher d’autres appareils Bluetooth et s’y connecter 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Bluetooth→Recherche des périphériques. 2 Sélectionnez un appareil. 3 Saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth de l’appareil ou celui de l’autre appareil si celui-ci en possède un, puis appuyez sur OK. Sinon, appuyez sur Accepter pour que votre code PIN corresponde à celui de l’autre appareil. Lorsque l’utilisateur de l’autre appareil saisit le même code PIN ou accepte la connexion, la connexion entre les deux appareils est effective. Lorsque la connexion est établie avec succès, l’appareil recherche automatiquement les services disponibles. Il est possible que certains appareils, notamment les kits piéton et les kits mains-libres pour voiture, possèdent un code PIN Bluetooth fixe, par exemple 0000. Si tel est le cas, vous devez saisir ce code. › Envoyer des données par la fonction sans fil Bluetooth 1 Sélectionnez un fichier ou un élément, par exemple un contact, un événement, un mémo ou un fichier multimédia à partir de l'application correspondante ou à partir de Mes fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez une option d’envoi de données via Bluetooth. La méthode de sélection d’une option peut varier selon le type de données. 3 Recherchez un appareil Bluetooth à associer au vôtre.Connectivité 101 › Recevoir des données par la fonction sans fil Bluetooth 1 Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Bluetooth, puis cochez la case correspondant à votre appareil. Pour sélectionner la durée de visibilité de votre appareil, appuyez sur [ ] →Expiration de la visibilité. 2 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth et appuyez sur OK. Sinon, appuyez sur Accepter pour que votre code PIN corresponde à celui de l’autre appareil. 3 Appuyez sur Accepter pour confirmer que vous autorisez la réception des données provenant de l’autre appareil. Les données reçues sont enregistrées dans le dossier Bluetooth du menu Mes fichiers. Si vous recevez un contact, il est automatiquement enregistré dans le répertoire. Wi-Fi Découvrez comment exploiter les capacités de réseau sans fil de votre téléphone pour vous connecter à tout réseau local sans fil (Wi-Fi) compatible avec la norme IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n. Vous pouvez vous connecter à Internet ou à d’autres appareils réseau dès qu’un point d’accès sans fil est disponible. Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée. Il est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur.Connectivité 102 ›Activer la fonction Wi-Fi Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres, puis sur l’option OFF près du menu Wi-Fi. Le réseau Wi-Fi activé et fonctionnant en arrière-plan consomme de l’énergie. Pour économiser votre batterie, activez la fonction Wi-Fi seulement lorsque vous en avez besoin. › Rechercher un réseau Wi-Fi et s’y connecter 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi. Le téléphone recherche automatiquement les réseaux Wi-Fi disponibles. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau. 3 Saisissez un mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau (si nécessaire). 4 Appuyez sur Connexion. ›Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi manuellement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi→Ajouter un réseau. 2 Saisissez le SSID du réseau et choisissez le type de sécurité. 3 Définissez les paramètres de sécurité en fonction du type de sécurité choisi. 4 Appuyez sur Enreg.Connectivité 103 › Se connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi avec WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) Grâce à WPS, vous pouvez vous connecter à un réseau sécurisé. Pour vous connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi avec un bouton WPS: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau indiqué comme étant un réseau protégé disponible, puis cochez la case Afficher les options avancées. 3 Appuyez sur le menu déroulant WPS. 4 Appuyez sur Bouton Push→Connexion. 5 Appuyez sur un bouton WPS au niveau du point d’accès dans un délai de 2minutes. Pour vous connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi avec un code PIN WPS: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau indiqué comme étant un réseau protégé disponible, puis cochez la case correspondant au menu Afficher les options avancées. 3 Appuyez sur le menu déroulant WPS. 4 Sélectionnez PIN du point d'accès ou PIN de ce périphérique →Connexion. 5 Au niveau du point d’accès, entrez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur le bouton de démarrage.Connectivité 104 ›Définir les paramètres de configuration IP statique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau, puis cochez la case correspondant au menu Afficher les options avancées. 3 Appuyez sur le menu déroulant Paramètres IP. 4 Appuyez sur Statique. 5 Modifiez les paramètres IP du point d’accès (adresse IP, longueur du préfixe réseau, passerelle, DNS, etc.). 6 Appuyez sur Connexion. Wi-Fi direct Découvrez comment utiliser la fonction Wi-Fi Direct pour raccorder deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. › Connecter votre appareil à un autre appareil Wi-Fi 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Wi-Fi Direct. 2 Appuyez sur OFF près du menu Wi-Fi Direct, puis appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur Analyser. 4 Sélectionnez un appareil, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Dès que le propriétaire de l’autre appareil accepte la connexion, l’appairage est terminé. 5 Pour désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Direct, appuyez sur Terminer la connexion.Connectivité 105 › Envoyer des données via Wi-Fi Direct 1 Sélectionnez un fichier ou un élément, par exemple un mémo, un fichier multimédia ou une adresse Web à partir de l’application correspondante ou à partir de Mes fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez une option d’envoi de données via un réseau WiFi. La méthode de sélection d’une option peut varier selon le type de données. 3 Recherchez et sélectionnez un appareil Wi-Fi. › Recevoir des données via Wi-Fi Direct Lorsque vous recevez des données, ces dernières sont automatiquement enregistrées sur votre appareil. Les données reçues sont enregistrées dans le dossier ShareViaWifi du menu Mes fichiers. AllShare Découvrez comment utiliser le service DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) pour partager des fichiers multimédia entre des appareils compatibles DLNA en utilisant un réseau Wi-Fi. Vous devez d’abord activer la fonction Wi-Fi et ajouter un profil Wi-Fi. ►p.102 › Personnaliser les paramètres DLNA pour partager des fichiers multimédia Vous devez activer le partage multimédia pour autoriser d’autres appareils compatibles DLNA à accéder à vos fichiers multimédia. Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus sur les appareils compatibles DLNA, selon le modèle. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur AllShare. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.Connectivité 106 3 Pour personnaliser la fonction DLNA, configurez les paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Nom de l’appareil Saisir un nom pour désigner votre appareil en tant que serveur de médias. Partager les vidéos Activer le partage de vidéos avec d’autres appareils compatibles DLNA. Partager les photos Activer le partage d’images avec d’autres appareils compatibles DLNA. Part. musique Activer le partage de musiques avec d’autres appareils compatibles DLNA. Charger depuis d’autres périphériques Indiquer si vous autorisez ou non le téléchargement à partir d’autres appareils. Mémoire par défaut Sélectionner l’emplacement de la mémoire par défaut pour enregistrer vos fichiers multimédia téléchargés. Sous-titres Configurer votre téléphone pour afficher des sous-titres. › Lire vos fichiers sur un autre appareil compatible DLNA 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur AllShare. 2 Appuyez sur Mon appareil. 3 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fichiers multimédia et un fichier. 4 Sélectionnez un lecteur: celui qui lira les fichiers multimédia. La lecture démarre en utilisant le lecteur sélectionné. 5 Pour contrôler la lecture, utilisez les icônes de votre téléphone. En fonction du réseau et du serveur auquel vous êtes connecté, il est possible que les fichiers soit mis en mémoire tampon lors de la lecture.Connectivité 107 › Lire les fichiers d’un appareil à l’autre 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur AllShare. 2 Appuyez sur App. distant. Votre appareil recherche automatiquement les autres appareils compatibles DLNA. 3 Sélectionnez un appareil et définissez-le en tant que serveur média : celui qui contient les fichiers multimédia. 4 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fichiers multimédia et un fichier. 5 Sélectionnez un lecteur: celui qui lira les fichiers multimédia. La lecture démarre en utilisant le lecteur sélectionné. 6 Pour contrôler la lecture, utilisez les icônes de votre téléphone. Partager une connexion de données Découvrez comment définir votre appareil en tant que modem ou point d’accès sans fil et comment partager sa connexion de données avec des PC ou d’autres appareils. › Partager la connexion de données de votre téléphone via une connexion Wi-Fi 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Point d’accès et modem. 2 Appuyez sur Point d’accès mobile→OK afin d’activer le point d’accès Wi-Fi.Connectivité 108 3 Appuyez sur Configurer point d’accès afin de personnaliser le point d’accès Wi-Fi : Paramètre Fonction SSID du réseau Afficher et modifier le nom de votre appareil indiqué aux périphériques externes. Sécurité Sélectionner le type de sécurité. Mot de passe Afficher ou modifier la clé réseau afin d’empêcher l’accès non autorisé au réseau. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enreg. 5 À partir d’un autre appareil, recherchez le nom de votre téléphone dans la liste des connexions disponibles et connectez-vous au réseau. Votre appareil partage la connexion de données disponible sur l’autre appareil. › Partager la connexion de données de votre appareil via un branchement USB 1 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Point d’accès et modem. 3 Appuyez sur Modem USB pour activer la fonction modem USB. Votre téléphone partage sa connexion de données avec votre ordinateur. Pour cesser de partager la connexion de données, décochez la case située à côté de Modem USB. La méthode de partage de la connexion de données peut différer en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’ordinateur.Connectivité 109 › Partager la connexion de données de votre appareil via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Point d’accès et modem. 2 Appuyez sur Modem Bluetooth pour activer la fonction modem correspondante. 3 Sur un autre appareil, recherchez votre appareil et connectezles. Assurez-vous de bien avoir activé la fonction Bluetooth et le paramètre de visibilité. GPS Votre téléphone est équipé d’un récepteur GPS (Global Positioning System). Découvrez comment activer les services de localisation. Pour améliorer la qualité de réception GPS, évitez d’utiliser votre téléphone dans les conditions suivantes: ● entre des immeubles, dans des tunnels ou des passages souterrains ou à l’intérieur des bâtiments; ● en cas de mauvaises conditions météorologiques; ● à proximité de champs magnétiques ou de lignes à haute tension. Ne touchez et ne couvrez pas la zone de l’antenne interne avec vos mains ou tout autre objet lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions GPS. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible.Connectivité 110 ›Activer les services de localisation Pour recevoir des informations relatives à votre position et effectuer une recherche sur la carte, vous devez activer les services de localisation. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Services de localisation. 2 Pour activer les services de localisation, définissez les paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Services de localisation Google Configurer le téléphone pour qu’il utilise les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou mobiles pour localiser votre position. Satellites GPS Configurer le téléphone pour qu’il utilise les satellites GPS pour localiser votre position. Utiliser fonction Aide à la localisation Utiliser les capteurs afin d’améliorer le positionnement à pied lorsque le signal GPS ne passe pas. Il peut y avoir des écarts entre les estimations du capteur et votre emplacement réel. Localisation & recherche Google Configurer l’appareil de manière à ce qu’il utilise votre position actuelle pour la recherche et d’autres services Google.Connectivité 111 Connexions PC Découvrez comment connecter votre téléphone à un ordinateur à l’aide du câble de connexion PC, et cela dans divers modes de connexion USB. En connectant l’appareil à un ordinateur, vous pouvez synchroniser des fichiers à l’aide de Windows Media Player, transférer directement des données depuis et vers votre appareil et utiliser le logiciel Samsung Kies. › Se connecter avec Samsung Kies Assurez-vous que le logiciel Samsung Kies est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez le télécharger à partir du site Web de Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies). 1 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 2 Double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre PC pour lancer Samsung Kies. 3 Copiez des fichiers depuis l’ordinateur vers le téléphone. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. › Synchroniser avec Windows Media Player Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. 1 Branchez un câble de connexion PC entre le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre appareil et un ordinateur sur lequel est installé Windows Media Player. Une fois la connexion établie, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît sur l’ordinateur. 2 Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers audio. 3 Modifiez ou saisissez le nom de votre appareil dans la fenêtre contextuelle (le cas échéant). 4 Sélectionnez et faites glisser les fichiers audio voulus vers la liste de synchronisation. 5 Lancez la synchronisation.Connectivité 112 › Connecter le téléphone en tant que périphérique de stockage de masse Vous pouvez connecter votre téléphone à un ordinateur en tant que disque amovible et accéder à son répertoire de fichiers. Si vous insérez une carte mémoire, vous pouvez accéder à son répertoire de fichiers en utilisant le téléphone en tant que lecteur de carte mémoire. Le répertoire des fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît en tant que disque amovible, indépendamment de la mémoire interne. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Utilitaires USB→ Connecter le stockage au PC. 2 Appuyez sur OK pour confirmer (si nécessaire). 3 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 4 Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Connecter le stockage au PC. 5 Appuyez sur OK pour confirmer (si nécessaire). 6 Ouvrez le dossier pour afficher les fichiers. 7 Copiez des fichiers depuis l’ordinateur vers votre appareil. 8 Une fois l’opération terminée, appuyez sur Désactiver le stockage USB. Pour déconnecter le téléphone de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur l’icône de périphérique USB dans la barre des tâches Windows, puis sur l’option Retirer le périphérique de stockage de masse en toute sécurité. Débranchez ensuite le câble de connexion PC. Si vous n’effectuez pas cette manipulation, vous risquez de perdre les données stockées sur la carte mémoire ou de l’endommager.Connectivité 113 Connexions VPN Vous pouvez créer des réseaux virtuels privés (VPN) et vous y connecter de façon sécurisée via un réseau public, par exemple Internet. Votre téléphone doit déjà être configuré avec un accès Internet. Vous devez modifier les connexions si vous rencontrez des problèmes d’accès à Internet. Si vous n’êtes pas certain des informations de connexion à saisir, consultez votre opérateur. › Paramétrer les connexions VPN 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→VPN. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez activer la fonction de verrouillage d’écran. 2 Appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau VPN. 3 Personnalisez le profil de connexion. La disponibilité des options dépend du type de VPN. Paramètre Fonction Nom Saisir un nom pour le serveur VPN. Type Sélectionnez un type de VPN. Adresse serveur Saisir l’adresse IP du serveur VPN. Secret L2TP Paramétrer le téléphone pour utiliser le mot de passe secret L2TP. Identifiant IPSec Saisir un nom d’utilisateur. Clé pré- partagée IPsec Définir la touche prépartagée.Connectivité 114 Paramètre Fonction Certificat utilisateur IPSec Sélectionner un certificat utilisateur utilisé par le serveur VPN pour vous identifier. Vous pouvez importer des certificats à partir du serveur VPN ou en télécharger à partir du Web. Certificat AC IPSec Sélectionner une autorité de certification (CA) utilisée par le serveur VPN pour vous identifier. Vous pouvez importer des certificats à partir du serveur VPN ou en télécharger à partir du Web. Cryptage PPP (MPPE) Utiliser cette option pour crypter des données avant de les envoyer au serveur VPN. Afficher les options avancées Sélectionner cette option pour modifier les paramètres réseau avancés. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enreg. › Se connecter à un réseau virtuel privé 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→VPN. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau virtuel privé pour vous y connecter. 3 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe, puis appuyez Connexion.Outils 115 Outils Horloge Découvrez comment régler et contrôler les alarmes et les horloges mondiales. Vous pouvez également utiliser le chronomètre et l’horloge de bureau. › Créer une nouvelle alarme 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→Alarme. 2 Appuyez sur Nouvelle alarme ou [ ] →Créer. 3 Définissez les détails de l’alarme. Cochez la case Alarme intelligente pour activer des sons naturels simulés avec l’écran d’alarme avant le déclenchement de l’alarme principale. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enregistrer. ›Arrêter une alarme Lorsque l’alarme sonne: ● Pour arrêter l’alarme, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faites-la glisser hors du cercle. ● Pour répéter l’alarme après une durée spécifiée, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faites-la glisser hors du cercle. › Supprimer une alarme 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→Alarme. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Supprimer. 3 Sélectionnez les alarmes à supprimer. 4 Appuyez sur Supprimer.Outils 116 › Créer une horloge mondiale 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→Horloge mondiale. 2 Appuyez sur Ajouter une ville ou sur [ ] →Ajouter. 3 Saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Pour choisir une ville sur la carte du monde, appuyez sur . 4 Pour ajouter d’autres horloges mondiales, répétez les étapes2 et3. Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une horloge, puis appuyez sur Heure d’été. ›Utiliser le chronomètre 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→Chronomètre. 2 Appuyez sur Début pour commencer à chronométrer. 3 Appuyez sur Tour pour enregistrer des temps intermédiaires. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Arrêt. 5 Appuyez sur Réinit. pour effacer les temps enregistrés. ›Utiliser le minuteur 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→Minuteur. 2 Définissez la durée du minuteur. 3 Appuyez sur Démarrer pour lancer le minuteur. 4 Quand la durée du minuteur est écoulée, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faites-la glisser hors du cercle pour arrêter l’alarme.Outils 117 ›Utiliser l’horloge de bureau L’horloge du bureau affiche l’heure, la date et la météo. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→Horloge bureau. 2 Appuyez sur pour afficher l’horloge de bureau en plein écran. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres. 4 Modifiez les options suivantes: Paramètre Fonction Masquer la barre d’état Afficher ou non la barre d’état en haut de l’écran. Fond d’écran Sélectionner l’image d’arrière-plan pour l’horloge de l’écran d’accueil. Affich. heure/ calendrier Activer cette fonction pour afficher l’horloge ou le calendrier. AccuWeather Activer cette fonction pour afficher la météo de la ville où vous vous trouvez. Vous pouvez également configurer l’horloge de bureau pour qu’elle mette automatiquement à jour les dernières informations et sélectionner une unité de température. Luminosité Régler la luminosité de l’écran. Restaurer valeurs par déf. Réinitialiser les paramètres de l’horloge de bureau par défaut. Station d'accueil Utiliser le haut-parleur de la station d’accueil raccordée lorsque votre appareil est connecté à un véhicule ou à une station d’accueil de bureau.Outils 118 Calculatrice Découvrez comment effectuer des calculs mathématiques sur votre téléphone, comme avec une calculatrice classique. › Effectuer des calculs 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calculatrice. 2 Utilisez les touches de la calculatrice affichées à l’écran pour réaliser des opérations mathématiques de base. Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique. Si vous avez désactivé la fonction de rotation automatique, appuyez sur [ ] →Calculatrice scientifique. ›Afficher l’historique du calcul 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calculatrice. 2 Effectuez des calculs. 3 Appuyez sur pour fermer le clavier de la calculatrice. L’historique du calcul s’affiche. 4 Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur [ ] →Effacer l’historique. Téléchargements Découvrez comment gérer les historiques des fichiers téléchargés depuis un site Web ou un e-mail. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléchargements. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier de téléchargement. 3 Pour ouvrir un fichier, sélectionnez-le dans l’historique. Pour supprimer un fichier téléchargé, cochez la case correspondante dans l’historique et appuyez sur .Outils 119 Kies air Kies air vous permet de connecter votre appareil à un autre appareil via une connexion Wi-Fi. Depuis un navigateur, vous pouvez afficher et gérer les fichiers multimédia, les contacts, les messages et toute autre donnée enregistrée sur votre appareil. › Personnaliser les paramètres Kies air 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Kies air. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres. 3 Modifiez les options suivantes: Paramètre Fonction Nom de l’appareil Afficher ou modifier le nom de votre appareil. Demande d’accès Paramétrer cette option pour recevoir des demandes d’autorisation d’autres appareils lors de l’utilisation de Kies air. Activer la visibilité Configurer l’appareil pour que d’autres appareils le détectent. Durée écoulée Sélectionner le délai à l'issue duquel l'appareil doit mettre fin à la connexion. Verrouiller le contenu Sélectionner les types de données à ne pas afficher sur d’autres appareils. Réinitialisation Réinitialiser les paramètres par défaut. › Connecter votre appareil à un autre appareil via un réseau Wi-Fi 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Kies air→Démarrer. 2 Saisissez l’adresse Web affichée par Kies air dans le navigateur de l’autre appareil.Outils 120 3 Appuyez sur Autoriser (si nécessaire). Une fois la connexion établie, vous pouvez visualiser les données de votre appareil sur l’autre appareil. 4 Pour mettre fin à la connexion, appuyez sur Arrêt. Mini journal Découvrez comment constituer un journal photographique. › Créer un mini journal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mini journal. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur Oui. 3 Si vous avez déjà enregistré un mini journal, appuyez sur Créer journal pour ajouter une nouvelle entrée. 4 Modifiez la date et définissez la météo (si nécessaire). 5 Appuyez sur Ajouter photo et ajoutez une image ou prenez une photo. 6 Appuyez sur Appuyez pour ajouter le texte, saisissez du texte, puis appuyez sur OK. 7 Appuyez sur Enreg. ›Afficher un mini journal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mini journal. 2 Sélectionnez un journal. Pour publier un mini journal sur un site web communautaire, appuyez sur [ ] →Publier.Outils 121 Mes fichiers Découvrez comment accéder rapidement et facilement à toutes vos images, vidéos, musiques, fichiers audio et autres types de fichiers stockés dans le téléphone ou dans une carte mémoire. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mes fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier → un fichier. Dans un dossier, appuyez sur [ ] pour utiliser les options suivantes: ● Pour envoyer un fichier à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. ● Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur Créer dossier. ● Pour supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers, appuyez sur Supprimer. ● Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur Afficher par. ● Pour trier les fichiers ou les dossiers, appuyez sur Lister par. ● Pour déplacer un fichier vers un autre dossier, appuyez sur Déplacer. ● Pour copier un fichier dans un autre dossier, appuyez sur Copier. ● Pour renommer un fichier, appuyez sur Renommer. ● Pour modifier les paramètres du gestionnaire de fichiers, appuyez sur Paramètres. Polaris Office Découvrez comment créer et afficher des documents Polaris Office sur votre téléphone et votre carte mémoire. › Créer un document 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Polaris Office. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, enregistrez-vous en tant qu’utilisateur en ligne ou ignorez l’enregistrement.Outils 122 3 Appuyez sur → un type de document. 4 Saisissez des données dans le document. 5 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Enregistrer. 6 Saisissez le nom du document, puis sélectionnez l’emplacement d’enregistrement. 7 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. › Ouvrir un document 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Polaris Office. 2 Appuyez sur Mes fichiers→ un document. 3 Consultez le document. ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour effectuer un zoom arrière). Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [ ] → Zoom→ une option. ● Pour ouvrir la barre d’outils permettant de modifier le document (fichier Word, Excel ou Power Point), appuyez sur [ ] →Mode d'édition. ● Pour rechercher du texte dans le document, appuyez sur [ ] →Rechercher. ● Pour ajouter un signet à la page actuelle, appuyez sur [ ] →Presse-papiers. ● Pour ajuster la taille du document à l’écran, appuyez sur [ ] →Redistribution de texte. ● Pour accéder à une page spécifique, appuyez sur [ ] →Aller à. ● Pour envoyer le fichier à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] →Envoyer le fichier. ● Pour imprimer le fichier, appuyez sur [ ] →Imprimer. Votre appareil est compatible uniquement avec certaines imprimantes Samsung. ● Pour lire un document à l’aide de la fonction de synthèse vocale, appuyez sur [ ] →Conversion de texte par synthèse vocale. ● Pour personnaliser les paramètres d’affichage ou de gestion des documents, appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.Outils 123 ›Gérer des documents en ligne 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Polaris Office. 2 Appuyez sur Fichiers Web→Box.net. 3 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe pour accéder à votre compte, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. 4 Affichez et gérez vos documents sur le serveur selon vos besoins. Gestion de tâches Grâce au gestionnaire de tâches, vous pouvez visualiser les applications en cours d’exécution ainsi que les informations relatives à la mémoire. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gestion de tâches. 2 Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● Applications actives : afficher la liste des applications en cours d’exécution sur le téléphone. ● Téléchargé(es): afficher la quantité de mémoire totale utilisée par les applications installées sur l’appareil. ● RAM: vérifier et gérer la mémoire vive de votre téléphone. ● Stockage: afficher la quantité de mémoire disponible et utilisée sur votre téléphone et sur la carte mémoire. ● Aide: afficher des informations d’aide sur la prolongation de la durée de vie de la batterie.Outils 124 Commande vocale Votre téléphone propose la fonction de commande vocale intelligente qui convertit en actions vos commandes vocales. Vous pouvez composer un numéro, envoyer un message, rechercher des lieux ou des informations ou compléter d’autres tâches simplement en parlant à votre téléphone. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Commande vocale. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, lisez les conditions d'utilisation et les informations d’aide en suivant les écrans. 3 Appuyez sur Appuyer et Parler. 4 Prononcez une commande dans le microphone. Discussion Découvrez comment à utiliser la reconnaissance vocale. Vous pouvez composer un numéro, envoyer un message, écrire un mémo ou compléter d’autres tâches simplement en parlant à votre téléphone lorsque vous êtes en déplacement. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Discussion. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, lisez la clause de non-responsabilité et les informations d’aide en suivant les écrans. 3 Appuyez sur Appuyer et Parler. 4 Prononcez une commande dans le microphone.Paramètres 125 Paramètres Accéder au menu Paramètres 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres. 2 Sélectionnez une catégorie de paramètres, puis une option. Wi-Fi Activez ou désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. ►p.102 Bluetooth Activez ou désactivez la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ►p.99 Utilisation des données Suivez votre utilisation des données et personnalisez les paramètres relatifs à votre limite d’utilisation. ● Données mobiles : paramétrez cette option pour utiliser des connexions de données sur n’importe quel réseau mobile. ● Définir limite données mobiles : définissez une limite concernant l’utilisation de données mobiles. ● Cycle d'util. des données : personnalisez les paramètres du cycle de limite d’utilisation. Plus... Modifiez les paramètres relatifs au contrôle des connexions avec d’autres appareils ou réseaux.Paramètres 126 › Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de votre téléphone. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau de votre appareil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions d’appel, Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. › Kies via Wi-Fi Connectez votre téléphone à Samsung Kies via Wi-Fi. ›Utilitaires USB Connectez votre appareil à un ordinateur comme périphérique de stockage de masse. ►p.112 › VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. ►p.113 › Point d'accès et modem ● Modem USB: activez la fonction modem USB pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec des ordinateurs via USB. Lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur, votre téléphone sert de modem sans fil pour celui-ci. ►p.108 ● Point d'accès mobile: activez la fonction de point d’accès Wi-Fi mobile pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil sur un PC par l’intermédiaire de la fonction Wi-Fi. ►p.107 ● Configurer point d'accès : configurez les paramètres réseau pour le point d’accès Wi-Fi. ● Modem Bluetooth: activez la fonction modem Bluetooth pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec des ordinateurs via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ►p.108 ● Aide: affichez des informations relatives à l’utilisation des fonctions modem. › Wi-Fi Direct Activez la fonction Wi-Fi Direct pour raccorder deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. ►p.104Paramètres 127 › Réseaux mobiles ● Connexions de données : autorisez les connexions de données. ● Itinérance: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il se connecte à un autre réseau lorsque vous changez de zone de couverture ou que votre réseau d’origine n’est pas disponible. ● Nom des points d'accès : définissez des noms de point d’accès (APN). ● Mode réseau: sélectionnez un type de réseau. ● Opérateurs réseau: recherchez les réseaux disponibles et sélectionnez un réseau d’itinérance. Appels Personnalisez les paramètres des fonctions d’appel. ● Rejet de l'appel: rejetez automatiquement les appels en provenance des numéros de téléphone spécifiés. Vous pouvez ajouter des numéros de téléphone à la liste de rejet. ►p.46 ● Définir messages de rejet: ajoutez ou modifiez le message qui sera envoyé lorsque vous rejetez un appel. ● Sonnerie d'appel: - Vibration lors de réponse: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il vibre lorsque votre correspondant répond à un appel. - Tonalités état d'appel: activez ou désactivez les tonalités de connexion d’appel, les bips de durée d’appel ou de déconnexion. - Signal d’appel: choisissez la façon dont l’appareil vous préviendra en cas de survenue d’événements lors d’un appel. ● Début/Fin d'appel: - Touche de réponse: paramétrez le téléphone pour pouvoir répondre aux appels en appuyant sur la touche Accueil. - Réponse automatique: paramétrez le téléphone pour pouvoir répondre automatiquement après une période spécifiée (disponible uniquement lorsque le kit piéton est branché). - Touche Marche pour terminer les appels : paramétrez le téléphone pour pouvoir mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage.Paramètres 128 ● Capteur de proximité: paramétrez le téléphone pour activer le capteur de proximité en cours d’appel. ● Transfert d’appel: transférez les appels entrants vers un autre numéro. ● Paramètres supplémentaires : - Identité de l’appelant: présentez votre numéro de téléphone mobile à vos destinataires lorsque vous passez un appel. - Restriction d’appel: bloquez les appels entrants ou sortants. - Signal d’appel: activez le signal d’appel pour pouvoir recevoir un appel entrant lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne. - Rappel automatique: activez la fonction de recomposition automatique pour pouvoir recomposer automatiquement un appel qui n’a pas abouti ou qui a été interrompu. - Numérotation fixe: activez ou désactivez le mode de numérotation fixe pour limiter les appels aux numéros de la liste de numérotation fixe. Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM/USIM et redémarrez le téléphone. ● Image appel visio: sélectionnez l’image à présenter au correspondant. ● Vidéo lors d’un appel reçu: indiquez si votre image en direct ou une image prédéfinie doit être présentée à votre correspondant. ● Options d’échec d’appel: indiquez si le téléphone doit essayer de passer un appel vocal lorsqu’un appel visio échoue. ● Serv. messagerie vocale: sélectionnez votre opérateur ou un autre fournisseur pour recevoir vos messages vocaux. ● Messagerie vocale: saisissez le numéro d’accès au service de messagerie vocale. Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir ce numéro.Paramètres 129 Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de votre téléphone. ● Volume: réglez le niveau sonore des sonneries d’appel, des sons multimédia, des sons système de l’appareil et des notifications. ● Intensité des vibrations : réglez l’intensité des vibrations. ● Mode Discret: activez le profil Discret afin d’activer le vibreur ou de couper tous les sons de votre appareil, à l’exception des sons multimédia et des sonneries d’alarme. ● Sonnerie du téléphone: sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les appels entrants. ● Notifications par défaut: sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les événements, tels que les messages entrants et les appels manqués. ● Vibreur et sonnerie: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son et des vibrations lorsque vous recevez un appel. ● Sons : configurez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier de l’écran de numérotation. ● Sons tactiles : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. ● Son verrouillage écran: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. ● Vibre en cas d'appui écran: paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre quand vous appuyez sur la touche Menu ou Retour, ou quand vous maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur la touche Accueil ou Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage. Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. ● Fond d'écran d'accueil: sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil. ● Fond d'écran de verrouillage: sélectionnez une image à afficher lorsque l’écran est verrouillé.Paramètres 130 ● Horloge: paramétrez cette option pour afficher l’horloge sur l’écran verrouillé. ● Météo: paramétrez cette option pour afficher la météo sur l’écran verrouillé. ● Paramètres météo: personnalisez les paramètres des informations météo. ● Position horloge et météo: sélectionnez l’endroit où doivent se trouver l’horloge et la météo sur l’écran verrouillé. ● Luminosité: réglez la luminosité de l’écran. ● Mode d'écran: sélectionnez un mode d’affichage. ● Rotation auto. écran: indiquez si le contenu doit automatiquement pivoter en même temps que le téléphone. ● Mise en veille de l'écran: définissez le délai de désactivation automatique du rétroéclairage. ● Police: modifiez le type de police pour le texte affiché sur l’écran. Vous pouvez télécharger des polices à partir de Google Play Store en appuyant sur Obtenir des polices en ligne. ● Durée de l'éclairage des touches : réglez la durée du rétroéclairage des touches tactiles. ● Ajustement auto. écran: configurez l’appareil pour économiser l’énergie en ajustant la luminosité de l’écran. ● Calibrage horizontal: étalonnez l’accéléromètre afin d’ajuster l’axe horizontal de l’appareil pour une meilleure reconnaissance des mouvements. ● Calibrage gyroscope: étalonnez le gyroscope afin que votre appareil puisse s’adapter aux changements d’orientation. ● Lors de l’étalonnage, placez l’appareil sur une surface stable. Le processus d’étalonnage peut échouer si l’appareil se met à vibrer ou est déplacé. ● Étalonnez le gyroscope si lors d’un mouvement panoramique, un de vos jeux par exemple, basé sur la détection de mouvements présente des mouvements désordonnés.Paramètres 131 Economie d'énergie ● Eco. d'énergie système: activez le mode d’économie d’énergie pour limiter l’utilisation de certaines ressources du système. ● Eco. d'énergie personnalisée: configurez cette option pour activer le mode d’économie d’énergie en fonction de vos paramètres personnalisés. ● Personnaliser les paramètres : - Mode éco. énergie à: sélectionnez un niveau d’énergie déclenchant le mode d’économie d’énergie. - Désactiver le Wi-Fi: désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi lorsque le téléphone n’est pas connecté à un point d’accès Wi-Fi. - Désactiver le Bluetooth: désactivez la fonction Bluetooth lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. - Désactiver le GPS: désactivez la fonction GPS lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. - Désactiver la synchro.: désactivez la synchronisation lorsque le serveur n'est pas en cours de synchronisation avec un serveur Web. - Luminosité: activez le paramètre de luminosité pour le mode d’économie d’énergie. - Luminosité: paramétrez le niveau de luminosité pour le mode d’économie d’énergie. - Mise en veille de l'écran: définissez le délai de désactivation automatique du rétroéclairage. ● En savoir plus : découvrez comme réduire la consommation de la batterie. Stockage Affichez les informations de mémoire relatives à votre téléphone et à votre carte mémoire. Vous pouvez également formater le dispositif de stockage USB et d’une carte mémoire. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes ses données.Paramètres 132 Batterie Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. Applications Affichez et gérez les applications de votre appareil. Comptes et synchro. Modifiez les paramètres de la fonction de synchronisation automatique ou gérez les comptes de synchronisation. Services de localisation Modifiez les paramètres de la fonction GPS. ● Sevices de localisation Google: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il utilise les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou mobiles pour localiser votre position. ● Satellites GPS: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il utilise les satellites GPS pour localiser votre position. ● Utiliser fonction Aide à la localisation: définissez cette option pour utiliser les capteurs afin d’améliorer le positionnement à pied lorsque le signal GPS ne passe pas. Il peut y avoir des écarts entre les estimations du capteur et votre emplacement réel. ● Localisation & recherche Google: configurez l’appareil de manière à ce qu’il utilise votre position actuelle pour la recherche et d’autres services Google.Paramètres 133 Sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de votre appareil, ainsi que de la carte SIM ou USIM. ● Verrouillage de l'écran: définissez le mode de déverrouillage de l’écran. - Aucun: désactivez le verrouillage de l’écran. - Défilement: paramétrez cette option pour pouvoir déverrouiller l'écran en faisant simplement glisser votre doigt sur l'écran. - Déverrouillage visage: configurez un verrouillage par détection faciale. - Modèle : définissez un modèle de déverrouillage pour déverrouiller l’écran. - Code PIN : définissez un code PIN (numérique) pour déverrouiller l’écran. - Mot de passe: définissez un mot de passe (alphanumérique) pour déverrouiller l’écran. ● Infos propriétaire: paramétrez cette option afin d’afficher votre propre message pour l’écran verrouillé. ● Crypter le téléphone: configurez un mot de passe pour crypter l’appareil afin de protéger les données et informations enregistrées sur l’appareil. Une fois l’appareil crypté, vous devez saisir le mot de passe chaque fois que vous l’allumez. Il faut en premier lieu recharger la batterie, car le cryptage de votre appareil peut prendre plus d’une heure. ● Crypter la carte SD: - Crypter la carte SD: protégez vos informations personnelles en cryptant les données présentes sur votre carte mémoire. - Cryptage complet: sélectionnez cette option pour crypter tous les fichiers de votre carte mémoire. - Exclure les fichiers multimédia: sélectionnez cette option pour crypter tous les fichiers de votre carte mémoire, à l’exception des fichiers multimédia. Il est possible que vous ne puissiez pas accéder à la carte mémoire cryptée après réinitialisation des données d’origine. Commencez par décoder la carte mémoire avant de procéder à cette réinitialisation.Paramètres 134 ● Traçage du mobile: activez ou désactivez la fonction de traçage du mobile qui vous aide à localiser votre appareil s’il est perdu ou volé. ►p.33 ● Destinataires : ajoutez ou modifiez les destinataires du message d’alerte. ● Contrôle à distance: contrôlez pour contrôler l’appareil égaré via le Web. Cette fonction s'active automatiquement quand vous ouvrez une session sur des comptes Samsung et Google. ● Page Web de SamsungDive: accédez au site Web SamsungDive pour créer votre compte Samsung. ● Configurer blocage SIM: - Verrouiller carte SIM: activez ou désactivez la fonction de verrouillage PIN du téléphone pour qu’un mot de passe PIN soit demandé lorsque vous allumez votre appareil. - Modifier code PIN SIM: modifiez le code PIN utilisé pour accéder aux données de la carte SIM ou USIM. ● Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. ● Admin. de périphérique: affichez les administrateurs de périphérique installés sur votre téléphone. Vous pouvez activer les administrateurs de périphérique afin d’appliquer de nouvelles règles à votre téléphone. ● Sources inconnues : sélectionnez cette option pour télécharger des applications à partir de n’importe quelle source. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, vous pouvez uniquement télécharger des applications à partir de Google Play Store. ● Infos d'ident. sécurisées : sélectionnez les certificats et les identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation de diverses applications. ● Installer depuis stock. périph.: installez des certificats cryptés qui sont stockés sur un périphérique de stockage USB. ● Effacer infos identification: effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans le téléphone et réinitialisez le mot de passe.Paramètres 135 Langue et saisie Modifiez les paramètres de saisie de texte. › Langue Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage pour les menus et les applications. › Par défaut Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. › Clavier Samsung Pour modifier les paramètres de clavier Samsung, appuyez sur . ● Types de clavier Portrait: sélectionnez le mode de saisie par défaut, par exemple le clavier AZERTY, le clavier 3x4 ou l’écriture manuscrite. ● Langues de saisie: sélectionnez les langues de saisie. ● XT9: activez le mode XT9 pour que l’appareil propose des mots au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. ● Paramètres XT9 avancés : activez les fonctions avancées du mode XT9, par exemple l’achèvement automatique, la correction ou la substitution automatique, et définissez votre propre liste de mots. ● Modification du clavier: activez ou désactivez la fonction de modification du clavier pour le mode de saisie du texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner différents modes de saisie en faisant défiler le clavier vers la gauche ou vers la droite. ● Aperçu du caractère: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche un aperçu de chaque lettre que vous entrez. ● Mise en majuscules automatique: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il mette automatiquement en majuscule la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final : le point, le point d’interrogation et le point d’exclamation.Paramètres 136 ● Paramètres de saisie manuscrite: personnalisez la durée de la reconnaissance en mode manuscrit. ● Entrée voix: pour saisir du texte oralement avec le clavier Samsung, activez la fonction d’entrée de voix. ● Point automatique: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. ● Didacticiel: découvrez comment saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung. › Saisie Google Voice Activez la fonction de saisie vocale de Google pour saisir du texte oralement. Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez sur . ● Sélectionner les langues de saisie: sélectionnez les langues de saisie pour la reconnaissance vocale de Google. ● Bloquer les termes choquants : paramétrez cette option pour empêcher l’appareil de reconnaître des termes choquants lors des saisies vocales. › Swype Pour modifier les paramètres de clavier Swype, appuyez sur . ● Sélectionner mode de saisie: modifiez le type de clavier. ● Comment Swyper: découvrez comment saisir du texte avec le clavier Swype. ● Dictionnaire personnel: configurez votre propre dictionnaire. Les mots présents dans votre dictionnaire apparaîtront en tant que suggestions lors de votre saisie textuelle. ● Préférences : - Aide sonore: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il vous avertisse si aucun mot alternatif n’existe pour votre saisie si vous appuyez deux fois sur un mot. - Retour tactile: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. - Afficher les astuces : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche automatiquement des conseils relatifs à vos actions le cas échéant.Paramètres 137 - Espacement auto.: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. - Majuscules auto.: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il mette automatiquement en majuscule la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final : le point, le point d’interrogation et le point d’exclamation. - Afficher la trace comp.: définissez la durée d’affichage de la trajectoire de votre déplacement sur l’écran tactile. - Suggestion de mot: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il affiche des propositions de mots au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. - Vitesse/précision: configurez le ratio entre la vitesse et la précision des suggestions Swype. - Réinitialiser le dictionnaire Swype: supprimez les mots que vous avez ajoutés au dictionnaire. - Version: affichez les informations de version. ● Options de langue: sélectionnez les langues de saisie. › Reconnaissance vocale Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale. › Rech. vocale Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les options suivantes: ● Langue: sélectionnez la langue pour la reconnaissance vocale. ● SafeSearch: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il filtre les images ou les textes au contenu explicite dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. ● Bloquer les termes choquants : configurez le téléphone pour qu’il reconnaisse et bloque les termes choquants dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les options suivantes: ● Langue: sélectionnez la langue pour la reconnaissance vocale. ● Moteur de recherche sur Internet: sélectionnez un moteur de recherche Web.Paramètres 138 ● Numérotation automatique: paramétrez le téléphone pour composer automatiquement un numéro lorsque les résultats de la reconnaissance vocale sont fiables. ● Utiliser l'emplacement: activez l’utilisation des informations de localisation pour les résultats de recherche vocale. ● Masquer les mots offensants : configurez le téléphone pour qu’il reconnaisse et bloque les termes choquants dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. ● Ponctuation automatique: configurez l’appareil pour insérer automatiquement les signes de ponctuation. ● Ecouter via Bluetooth: activez les commandes vocales lors de l’utilisation d’un casque Bluetooth. ● Voice talk unique ID: affichez l’ID unique de votre appareil pour obtenir des services quand vous rencontrez des problèmes avec la fonction de reconnaissance vocale. ● A propos de: affichez les informations de version. ● Démarrage automatique de l'écoute: activez automatiquement la reconnaissance vocale lors du démarrage de la fonction de commande vocale. ● Aide de la Commande vocale: accédez aux informations d’aide sur l’utilisation de la commande vocale. ● Paramètres sociaux: modifiez les paramètres d’accès aux sites Web communautaires. ● Paramètres de Discussion: modifiez les paramètres d’utilisation de la reconnaissance vocale. ● Aide de Discussion: accédez aux informations d’aide sur l’utilisation de la reconnaissance vocale. › Sortie de synthèse vocale ● Moteur TTS favori: affichez et sélectionnez les moteurs de synthèse vocale de votre appareil. ● Vitesse d'élocution: sélectionnez la vitesse de la fonction de synthèse vocale.Paramètres 139 ● Ecouter un exemple: écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. Installez des données vocales pour l’utilisation de la fonction de synthèse vocale. ● Profil Voiture: activez le profil Voiture pour configurer le téléphone afin qu’il lise tout haut le contenu. ● Paramètres du Profil Voiture: spécifiez les applications à utiliser en mode Voiture. › Vitesse du curseur Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile connecté à votre appareil. Sauvegarder et réinitialiser Modifiez les paramètres pour gérer vos propres paramètres et données. ● Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez le téléphone pour sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le serveur Google. ● Compte de sauvegarde: ajoutez et affichez votre compte Google dédié à la sauvegarde de vos données. ● Restaurer automatiquement: paramétrez le téléphone pour restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque les applications sont réinstallées sur votre téléphone. ● Rétablir param. par défaut: réinitialisez les paramètres par défaut et supprimez toutes les données. Station d'accueil Mode de sortie audio: utilisez le haut-parleur de la station d’accueil raccordée lorsque votre appareil est connecté à un véhicule ou à une station d’accueil de bureau.Paramètres 140 Date & heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour contrôler la façon dont l’heure et la date s’affichent sur le téléphone: ● Date et heure automatiques : actualisez automatiquement l’heure de l’appareil lorsque vous définissez un fuseau horaire. ● Fuseau horaire auto: actualisez automatiquement l’heure du téléphone lors des changements de fuseau horaire. ● Définir la date: réglez manuellement la date du jour. ● Définir l'heure: réglez l’heure manuellement. ● Sélectionner le fuseau horaire: définissez votre fuseau horaire local. ● Format 24 heures : définissez l’affichage de l’heure sur le format 24heures. ● Format de date: sélectionnez un format de date. Accessibilité ● Services : activez une application d’accessibilité téléchargée, par exemple Talkback ou Kickback, qui émet un retour vocal, une mélodie ou une vibration. ● La Touche Marche met fin aux appels : paramétrez le téléphone pour mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage. ● Rotation auto. écran: indiquez si le contenu doit automatiquement pivoter en même temps que le téléphone. ● Durée de l'appui prolongé: configurez le délai de reconnaissance en cas de maintien d’un doigt sur l’écran. ● Installer les scripts Web: configurez les applications pour qu’elles installent des scripts Web en vue de faciliter l’accès à leur contenu Web. Paramètres 141 Mouvement Modifiez les paramètres servant à contrôler la reconnaissance de mouvements sur votre téléphone. ● Activer les mouvements : activez cette fonction pour utiliser la reconnaissance de mouvements. ● Incliner pour zoomer: effectuez des zooms avant ou arrière lors de la visualisation d’images dans Galerie ou la visualisation de pages Web, en maintenant vos doigts appuyés sur deux points de l'écran, puis en inclinant l’appareil vers l’arrière et l’avant. ● Agrandir pour modifier: déplacez une application vers une autre page en maintenant votre doigt appuyé sur une application, puis en inclinant l’appareil vers la gauche ou la droite. ● Appuyer deux fois : configurez pour activer les fonctions vocales en appuyant deux fois sur l’appareil. ● Retourner pour désact. son: paramétrez l’appareil pour que le son des appels entrants, des alarmes et de la musique soit coupé lorsque vous placez l’appareil face vers le bas. Options de développement Modifiez les paramètres de développement d’applications. ● Débogage USB: sélectionnez cette option pour brancher votre appareil à un PC à l’aide d’un câble USB. cette option est utilisée pour le développement d’applications. ● ID périphérique de développement: affichez l’ID de développement de votre appareil. ● Positions fictives : autorisez l’envoi de fausses informations de service et de localisation à un service de Gestionnaire de localisation à des fins de test. cette option est utilisée pour le développement d’applications. ● MDP sauvegarde bureau: configurez un mot de passe pour sécuriser vos données de sauvegarde.Paramètres 142 ● Mode Strict activé: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il fasse clignoter l’écran quand des applications effectuent des opérations de longue durée. ● Aff. emplacement pointeur: paramétrez cette option pour que les coordonnées et trajectoires du curseur s’affichent quand vous touchez l’écran. ● Afficher les touches : paramétrez cette option pour que le curseur s’affiche quand vous touchez l’écran. ● Afficher MàJ écran: paramétrez cette option pour que les zones de l’écran mises à jour clignotent. ● Utilisation processeur: paramétrez cette option pour obtenir une liste de tous les processus actifs. ● Forcer rendu GPU: paramétrez cette option pour utiliser l’accélération matérielle2D en vue d’optimiser les performances graphiques. ● Echelle animation fenêtre: sélectionnez la vitesse d’ouverture et de fermeture des fenêtres contextuelles. ● Echelle animation transition: sélectionnez la vitesse de basculement entre deux écrans. ● Ne pas garder activités : paramétrez cette option pour fermer une application en cours d’exécution quand vous lancez une nouvelle application. ● Limiter le nombre de processus en arrière-plan: paramétrez cette option pour restreindre le nombre de processus pouvant être exécutés en arrière-plan. ● Afficher toutes les ANR: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vous alerte quand des applications exécutées en arrière-plan ne répondent pas. A propos du téléphone Accédez à des informations concernant votre appareil et vérifiez son état.Dépannage 143 Dépannage Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations suivantes : Code Solution possible : Mot de passe Lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour l’appareil. Code PIN Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque la demande de code PIN est activée, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Cette fonction peut être désactivée en utilisant le menu Paramètres→Sécurité→ Configurer blocage SIM→Verrouiller carte SIM. Code PUK Si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, votre carte SIM/USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. Code PIN2 Lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant la saisie du code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de service ou de réseau ● Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous dans un autre endroit et réessayez. ● Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir des informations complémentaires.Dépannage 144 L’écran tactile réagit lentement ou de manière erronée Si votre appareil dispose d’un écran tactile et que cet écran réagit de manière erronée, tentez les manipulations suivantes: ● Retirez les éventuelles protections de l’écran tactile. Les films de protection peuvent empêcher l’appareil de reconnaître vos saisies et ne sont pas recommandés pour les écrans tactiles. ● Assurez-vous que vos mains sont propres et sèches lorsque vous appuyez sur l’écran tactile. ● Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. ● Assurez-vous que vous possédez la dernière version logicielle de votre appareil. ● Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, apportez votre téléphone dans votre centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil ne répond pas ou se bloque, vous devez éventuellement fermer des applications ou le réinitialiser afin qu’il retrouve un fonctionnement correct. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage enfoncée pendant 8à10secondes. L’appareil redémarre automatiquement. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre ce problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sauvegarder et réinitialiser→ Rétablir param. par défaut→Réinitialiser le téléphone→Tout supprimer. Les appels sont interrompus Si vous vous trouvez dans une zone à réception médiocre, il se peut que vous perdiez votre connexion réseau. Déplacez-vous dans un autre endroit et réessayez.Dépannage 145 Les appels sortants n’aboutissent pas ● Assurez-vous d’avoir appuyé sur la touche Appel. ● Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. ● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone. Les appels entrants n’aboutissent pas ● Vérifiez que votre appareil est bien allumé. ● Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié. ● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone. Vos interlocuteurs ne parviennent pas à vous entendre lors de l’appel ● Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. ● Assurez-vous que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. ● Si vous utilisez un kit mains-libres ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. La qualité d’écoute est mauvaise ● Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée de l’appareil. ● Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous dans un autre endroit et réessayez. Les appels passés à vos contacts n’aboutissent pas ● Vérifiez que le bon numéro a été enregistré dans la liste de contacts. ● Si nécessaire, saisissez et enregistrez le numéro à nouveau. ● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone. L’appareil émet des bips et l’icône de la batterie indique que la batterie est vide Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Rechargez la batterie ou remplacez-la pour continuer à utiliser l’appareil.Dépannage 146 La batterie ne se recharge pas correctement ou le téléphone s’éteint tout seul. ● Les fiches de la batterie sont peut-être sales. Nettoyez les fiches dorés à l’aide d’un chiffon doux et propre, puis essayez à nouveau de recharger la batterie. ● Si la batterie ne se recharge plus complètement, remplacez-la par une batterie neuve et éliminez l’ancienne conformément à la législation en vigueur dans votre pays. L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez des applications qui demandent plus d’énergie ou sur une période prolongée, votre appareil peut sembler chaud au toucher. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du téléphone. Des messages d’erreur apparaissent à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil mobile Samsung doit avoir suffisamment de mémoire disponible et sa batterie doit être suffisamment chargée. Si vous recevez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes: ● Rechargez la batterie ou remplacez-la par une autre entièrement chargée. ● Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un PC ou en les supprimant de votre appareil. ● Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes de l’appareil photo persistent après avoir effectué ces manipulations, contactez votre centre de service après-vente Samsung.Dépannage 147 Des messages d’erreur apparaissent à l’ouverture de la radio FM L’application Radio FM de votre appareil mobile Samsung utilise le casque comme antenne radio. Si un casque n’est pas branché, la radio FM sera dans l’incapacité de capter les stations. Pour utiliser la radio FM, commencez par vérifier que le casque est branché correctement. Ensuite, recherchez et enregistrez les fréquences des stations disponibles. Si les problèmes persistent après ces manipulations, tentez d’accéder à la station désirée avec un autre récepteur radio. Si vous captez la station avec un autre récepteur, votre appareil a peut-être besoin d’être réparé. Contactez votre centre de service après-vente Samsung. Des messages d’erreur apparaissent à l’ouverture de fichiers audio Certains fichiers audio risquent de ne pas fonctionner sur votre appareil mobile Samsung pour plusieurs raisons. Si vous recevez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de fichiers audio avec votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes: ● Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un PC ou en les supprimant de votre appareil. ● Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si c’est le cas, vous devez posséder une licence appropriée ou une clé pour lire le fichier. ● Vérifiez que votre appareil est compatible avec le type du fichier audio.Dépannage 148 Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth ● Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre appareil. ● Si nécessaire, vérifiez que la fonction Bluetooth est également activée sur l’autre appareil. ● Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se situent bien dans le rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 mètres maximum). Si le problème persiste après ces manipulations, contactez votre centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un PC ● Assurez-vous que le câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez est compatible avec votre appareil. ● Vérifiez que les pilotes nécessaires sont bien installés sur votre PC et mis à jour.Consignes de sécurité 149 Consignes de sécurité Afin d’éviter de blesser votre entourage ou vous-même, ou bien d’endommager votre appareil, veuillez lire toutes les informations suivantes avant d’utiliser votre appareil. Avertissement : évitez les décharges électriques, le feu et les explosions N’utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d’alimentation endommagé(e)s ou de prises électriques mal fixées Ne touchez pas le cordon d’alimentation lorsque vos mains sont mouillées et ne tirez pas sur le chargeur pour le débrancher Ne tordez pas ou n’endommagez pas le cordon d’alimentation N’utilisez et ne touchez pas votre appareil avec les mains mouillées lorsque celui-ci est en cours de chargement Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou la batterie Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou la batterie et ne les exposez pas aux chocs Ne rechargez pas la batterie en utilisant un chargeur non homologué par Samsung N’utilisez pas votre appareil pendant un orage L’appareil peut mal fonctionner et les risques de décharge électrique peuvent augmenter. Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) lorsque celle-ci coule ou est endommagée Contactez le centre de traitement agréé le plus proche de chez vous afin de vous séparer de vos batteries Li-Ion en toute sécurité.Consignes de sécurité 150 Manipulez et jetez les batteries et les chargeurs avec précaution • N’utilisez que des batteries et des chargeurs homologués par Samsung et spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. L’utilisation de batteries et de chargeurs incompatibles peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager votre appareil. • Ne jetez jamais une batterie ou un appareil au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries et des appareils usagé(e)s. • Ne posez jamais une batterie ou un appareil mobile à l’intérieur ou au-dessus d’appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou des radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, la batterie peut exploser. • N’écrasez ou ne perforez jamais la batterie. Évitez d’exposer la batterie à une pression externe élevée qui risquerait d’entraîner un court-circuit interne et une surchauffe. Protégez l’appareil, la batterie et le chargeur contre toute détérioration • Évitez d’exposer votre appareil et la batterie à des températures très basses ou très élevées. • Des températures extrêmes peuvent déformer l’appareil et réduire la capacité de chargement, ainsi que sa durée de vie et celle de la batterie. • Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et – de la batterie et de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente. • N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e). Attention : respectez tous les avertissements de sécurité et les réglementations en vigueur lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil dans un endroit où son utilisation est réglementée Éteignez votre appareil lorsque son utilisation est interdite Respectez toutes les réglementations interdisant l’utilisation des appareils mobiles dans certaines zones spécifiques.Consignes de sécurité 151 N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’autres appareils électroniques La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de radiofréquence. Il est possible que votre appareil cause des interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques. N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’un stimulateur cardiaque • Maintenez une distance minimale de 15cm entre votre appareil et un stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence. • Il est fortement conseillé, lors d’un appel, de positionner l’appareil sur le côté opposé à l’implant. • Si vous pensez que votre appareil vient perturber le fonctionnement d’un stimulateur cardiaque ou d’un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur ou de l’appareil médical. N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans un hôpital ou à proximité d’équipements médicaux en raison des interférences qu’il pourrait produire Si vous utilisez vous-même des équipements médicaux, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’éviter toute interférence de radiofréquence. Si vous utilisez un appareil auditif, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’obtenir plus d’informations sur les interférences Il est possible que certains appareils auditifs subissent des interférences causées par la radiofréquence de votre appareil. Afin de vous assurer d’une utilisation de votre appareil auditif en toute sécurité, contactez votre fabriquant. Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion • Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion. • Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique d’utilisation dans un environnement explosif. • N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans une station-service, dans les zones potentiellement explosives ou à proximité de produits combustibles ou chimiques. • Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que l’appareil, ses composants ou ses accessoires.Consignes de sécurité 152 Éteignez votre appareil lorsque vous voyagez en avion Les appareils mobiles peuvent engendrer des interférences avec les équipements aéronautiques. Conformez-vous aux réglementations en vigueur et éteignez votre appareil. Il est possible que les appareils électroniques se trouvant à bord d’un véhicule motorisé subissent des dysfonctionnements provoqués par la radiofréquence de votre propre appareil Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un véhicule Votre responsabilité principale est avant tout de conduire votre véhicule sans prendre de risques. N’utilisez jamais votre appareil au volant, si cela est interdit par la loi. Pour votre sécurité et celle des autres, faites preuve de bon sens et gardez à l’esprit les conseils suivants : • Utilisez un kit mains-libres. • Apprenez à connaître les fonctions pratiques de votre appareil, comme par exemple la numérotation rapide et la fonction de rappel automatique. Ces fonctions vous permettent de gagner du temps et de rester concentré lorsque vous passez ou recevez des appels sur votre appareil. • Gardez votre appareil à portée de main. Soyez en mesure d’atteindre votre appareil mobile sans quitter la route des yeux. Si vous recevez un appel entrant à un moment inopportun, laissez votre messagerie vocale répondre à votre place. • Informez votre interlocuteur que vous êtes au volant. Interrompez tout appel en cas d’embouteillages ou de conditions météorologiques dangereuses. La pluie, la neige, le verglas et une circulation dense sont des facteurs dangereux. • Ne prenez pas de notes ou ne recherchez pas de numéros de téléphone. Noter une liste de tâches à effectuer ou parcourir votre répertoire détourne votre attention de votre responsabilité principale qui consiste à conduire sans prendre de risques. • Composez des numéros de manière raisonnable et évaluez l’état de la circulation. Passez vos appels lorsque vous êtes immobilisé ou avant de vous insérer dans la circulation. Essayez de passer vos appels de préférence lorsque votre véhicule est stationné. Si vous devez absolument passer un appel, composez les chiffres un à un, regardez la route et dans vos rétroviseurs, puis reprenez la numérotation.Consignes de sécurité 153 • Ne poursuivez pas de conversations stressantes ou émotionnelles qui pourraient vous distraire. Informez vos interlocuteurs que vous êtes au volant et interrompez toute conversation susceptible d’altérer votre attention sur la route. • Utilisez votre appareil pour demander de l’aide. En cas d’incendie, d’accident de la route ou d’urgence médicale, composez le numéro d’urgence local. • Utilisez votre appareil pour aider d’autres personnes en situation d’urgence. Si vous êtes témoin d’un accident, d’une agression ou de toute autre situation d’urgence mettant des vies en jeu, contactez les services d’urgence locaux. • Appelez un service d’assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d’assistance, si cela s’avère nécessaire. Si vous croisez un véhicule endommagé ne présentant pas de danger immédiat, si vous constatez un feu rouge cassé, un accident de la route sans gravité où personne ne semble blessé ou encore un véhicule que vous savez volé, appelez un service d’assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d’assistance autre que les services d’urgence. Pour entretenir et bien utiliser votre appareil Conservez votre appareil au sec • L’humidité et tous types de liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les circuits électroniques de votre appareil. • En cas de contact avec un liquide, retirez la batterie sans allumer votre téléphone. Séchez votre téléphone avec un chiffon et confiez-le à un service de réparation. • Les liquides modifient la couleur de l’étiquette indiquant que l’intérieur de l’appareil a été endommagé. L’eau peut endommager votre appareil et entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. N’utilisez pas ou ne rangez pas votre appareil dans des endroits poussiéreux ou sales La poussière peut causer des dysfonctionnements de votre appareil. Ne posez pas votre appareil sur des surfaces inclinées Si votre appareil tombe, il peut être endommagé.Consignes de sécurité 154 Ne conservez pas votre appareil dans des endroits chauds ou froids. Utilisez votre appareil à des températures comprises entre -20°C et 50°C • Votre appareil peut exploser si vous le laissez dans un véhicule fermé, la température intérieure pouvant monter jusqu’à 80°C. • N’exposez pas votre appareil à la lumière directe du soleil de manière prolongée (comme par exemple sur le tableau de bord d’une voiture). • Conservez la batterie à des températures allant de 0°C à 40°C. Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité d’objets métalliques, comme par exemple des pièces, des clés ou des colliers • Votre appareil pourrait être déformé ou subir des dysfonctionnements. • Les bornes de la batterie peuvent causer des incendies si elles sont mises en contact avec des objets métalliques. Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité de champs magnétiques • Lorsqu’il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre appareil peut subir des dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut se décharger. • Les cartes à piste, comme par exemple les cartes de crédit, les cartes de téléphone et les cartes d’embarquement peuvent être endommagées par les champs magnétiques. • N’utilisez pas de housses ou d’accessoires équipés de fermetures aimantées et évitez toute exposition prolongée de votre appareil à des champs magnétiques. Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine chauffants ou de conteneurs à haute pression • La batterie peut couler. • Votre appareil peut surchauffer et causer un incendie. Ne laissez pas tomber votre appareil et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs • L’écran de votre appareil pourrait être endommagé. • Votre appareil peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir des dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou le déformez.Consignes de sécurité 155 N'utilisez pas le flash de l'appareil photo trop près des yeux de personnes ou d'animaux Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une perte temporaire de la vue. Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur • Ne laissez pas la batterie en charge pendant plus d’une semaine, car une surcharge risque de réduire sa durée de vie. • Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit être rechargée avant utilisation. • Lorsque le chargeur n’est pas utilisé, ne le laissez pas branché à une prise de courant. • Utilisez la batterie pour votre appareil uniquement. N’utilisez que des batteries, chargeurs, accessoires et fournitures homologué(e)s par Samsung • Utiliser des batteries ou des chargeurs génériques peut réduire la durée de vie de votre appareil ou provoquer des dysfonctionnements. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l’utilisateur si celui-ci utilise des accessoires ou des éléments non homologués par Samsung. Ne mordez et ne portez pas à votre bouche l’appareil ou la batterie • Mordre ou porter l’appareil ou la batterie à votre bouche pourrait endommager votre appareil ou provoquer une explosion. • Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent l’appareil de façon appropriée s’ils doivent l’utiliser. Pour parler dans l’appareil : • Tenez l’appareil droit, comme vous le feriez avec un téléphone traditionnel. • Parlez directement dans le microphone. • Évitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre téléphone. Toucher l'antenne peut réduire la qualité d'écoute ou provoquer une émission de radiofréquence plus élevée que nécessaire. • Lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone, tenez-le de manière détendue, appuyez légèrement sur les touches, utilisez les fonctions spéciales de saisie (telles que les modèles et la saisie intuitive) pour réduire le nombre de touches à manipuler et faites des pauses régulières.Consignes de sécurité 156 Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil en marchant ou en bougeant Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d’éviter de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes. Ne placez pas votre appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à votre ceinture Vous pourriez vous blesser ou endommager votre appareil si vous tombiez. Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vous-même votre appareil • Toute modification ou tout changement effectué(e) sur votre appareil peut entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Pour tout besoin de service, confiez votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung. • Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une explosion ou un incendie. Ne peignez jamais votre appareil et n’y apposez jamais d’autocollants La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles de l’appareil et perturber son fonctionnement. Si vous êtes allergique à la peinture ou aux pièces métalliques de l’appareil, vous pouvez souffrir de démangeaisons, d’eczéma ou de toute autre réaction cutanée. Si ces symptômes apparaissent, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin. Pour nettoyer votre appareil : • Essuyez votre appareil ou le chargeur avec un chiffon ou une gomme. • Nettoyez les bornes de la batterie avec un morceau de coton ou un chiffon. • N’utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents. N’utilisez pas l’appareil si son écran est fissuré ou cassé Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage. Confiez votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung afin de le faire réparer. Utilisez votre appareil uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions auxquelles il est destiné Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil dans un lieu publicConsignes de sécurité 157 Ne laissez pas les enfants utiliser votre appareil Votre appareil n’est pas un jouet. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec l’appareil, car ils pourraient se blesser ou blesser d’autre personnes, endommager l’appareil ou passer des appels susceptibles d’augmenter vos frais de communication. Installez l’appareil et ses accessoires avec précaution • Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre appareil mobile et de ses accessoires dans votre véhicule. • Évitez de placer votre appareil ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone d’ouverture des airbags. Si l’équipement mobile n’est pas installé correctement, le déclenchement de l’airbag risque de provoquer des blessures graves. Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé Le recours aux services d’un technicien non agréé risque d’entraîner des dégâts sur l’appareil et d’annuler la garantie du fabricant. Manipulez les cartes SIM et les cartes mémoire avec soin • Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou y lit des informations, car vous risqueriez de perdre des données et/ou d’endommager la carte ou l’appareil lui-même. • Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les interférences émises par d’autres appareils. • Ne touchez pas les contacts dorés de la carte avec vos doigts ou avec des objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux. Assurez l’accès aux services d’urgence Dans certaines zones ou dans certaines circonstances, il peut être impossible de joindre les numéros d’urgence avec votre appareil. Avant de vous rendre dans des régions isolées ou non couvertes, prévoyez un autre moyen pour contacter les services d’urgence. Veillez à sauvegarder les données importantes Samsung ne sera en aucun cas tenu responsable en cas de perte de données. Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur que vous avez enregistrés sans la permission des détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire, vous seriez en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le fabricant n’est en aucun cas responsable de l’utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par les droits d’auteur.Consignes de sécurité 158 Informations sur la certification DAS Votre téléphone a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d'exposition aux radiofréquences (RF) émises recommandées par le Conseil de l'Union européenne. Ces normes empêchent la vente de téléphones mobiles qui dépassent le niveau d'exposition maximal (également connu sous le nom de DAS ou Débit d'absorption spécifique) de 2 W/kg. Lors des tests, la valeur DAS maximum enregistrée pour ce modèle était de 0,338 W/kg. En condition normale d'utilisation, la valeur DAS réelle sera généralement beaucoup plus faible, car le téléphone n'émet que l'énergie RF nécessaire à la transmission du signal vers la station de base la plus proche. Le téléphone minimise ainsi votre exposition globale à l'énergie RF en émettant automatiquement à des niveaux plus faibles dès que cela est possible. Par ailleurs, il est également recommandé d'utiliser autant que possible le kit piéton. Cependant, on veillera dans ce cas à éloigner le téléphone du ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des enfants et des adolescents. Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des téléphones portables exige de prendre de quelconques précautions. Cependant, si certains s’inquiètent des risques potentiels liés à une durée d’utilisation excessive du téléphone, nous leur conseillons d’utiliser le kit piéton afin de tenir le téléphone portable éloigné de la tête et du corps. La Déclaration de conformité figurant au dos de ce mode d'emploi prouve que votre téléphone est conforme à la directive européenne relative aux équipements terminaux de télécommunications et aux équipements radio. Pour plus d'informations sur le DAS et les normes européennes correspondantes, veuillez consulter le site Web de Samsung mobile.Consignes de sécurité 159 Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. Élimination de la batterie de ce produit (Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en place) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si la batterie n’est pas correctement éliminée, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer la batterie des autres types de déchets et à la recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et batteries.Consignes de sécurité 160 Limitation de responsabilité Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers et sont protégés par les lois sur les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre usage personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée par le propriétaire des contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire de contenus ou du fournisseur de services concerné, il vous est interdit de modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer, de diffuser, de transmettre, de traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une quelconque manière et sur quelque support que ce soit, des contenus ou des services affichés par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil ou d’en créer des dérivés. LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS " EN L’ÉTAT ". DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE, SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS LES CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT OU IMPLICITEMENT, À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L’ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU L’EXHAUSTIVITÉ DES CONTENUS OU DES SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L’INTERMÉDIAIRE DE CET APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D’AVOCAT, DES FRAIS OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L’UTILISATION DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU PAR UN TIERS (OU DE TOUTE INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE), MÊME SI SAMSUNG A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE L’ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. DANS LA MESURE OÙ CERTAINS PAYS N’AUTORISENT PAS L’EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES. Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment, et Samsung ne garantit pas qu’un contenu ou un service restera disponible pendant une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis par des tiers au moyen de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission qui échappent au contrôle de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère général du présent avis, Samsung décline expressément toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension de tout contenu ou service fourni par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil. Samsung n’est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux services. Toute question ou demande de service portant sur les contenus ou les services doit être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés.Index 161 actualités et météo 95 alarme arrêter 115 créer 115 désactiver 115 AllShare 105 appareil allumer et éteindre 18 aspect 19 icônes d’information 21 paramètres 125 personnaliser 29 touches 20 volet des raccourcis 26 appareil photo capturer des photos 57 enregistrer des vidéos 64 personnaliser l’appareil photo 62 personnaliser le caméscope 67 appels afficher les appels manqués 45 conférence 44 kit piéton 43 numéros internationaux 43 rejeter 43 répondre 43 restreindre 47 signal 47 transférer 47 appels visio passer un appel 42 répondre 43 utiliser des options 45 appels vocaux passer un appel 42 répondre 43 utiliser des options 44 App Shop 96 batterie charger 12 installer 11 Bluetooth activer 99 envoyer des données 100 recevoir des données 101 rechercher d’autres appareils et s’y connecter 100 calculatrice 118 calendrier afficher des événements 83 créer des événements 83 carte mémoire formater 17 insérer 15 retirer 16 carte SIM/USIM installer 11 verrouiller 33 chronomètre 116 IndexIndex 162 organiser les applications 28 écran tactile utiliser 23 verrouiller 24 éditeur de photos 70 e-mail afficher 54 créer des comptes 52 envoyer 53 galerie afficher des photos 69 formats de fichier 68 lire des vidéos 70 gestionnaire de fichiers 121 gestionnaire de tâches 123 Google Mail 50 Google Maps 90 Google Talk 54 horloge mondiale 116 Internet voir navigateur Web Jeux 97 journal d’appels 48 Kies air 119 langue d’affichage 135 lecteur MP3 ajouter des fichiers 74 créer des listes de lecture 75 écouter de la musique 74 Cinéday 97 commande vocale 124 connexions Bluetooth 99 DLNA 105 PC 111 VPN 113 Wi-Fi 101 connexions PC Samsung Kies 111 stockage de masse 112 Windows Media Player 111 connexion VPN créer 113 se connecter 114 contacts copier 81 créer 79 importer ou exporter 82 numérotation rapide 80 rechercher 80 contenu du coffret 10 date et heure 29 dépannage 143 DLNA voir AllShare 105 écran d’accueil ajouter des éléments 25 ajouter des volets 26 écran de menu accéder 27 ajouter un dossier ou un volet 28Index 163 paramètres accessibilité 140 affichage 129 appel 127 applications 132 à propos du téléphone 142 batterie 132 Bluetooth 125 comptes et synchro. 132 date & heure 140 économie d’énergie 131 langue et saisie 135 mouvement 141 options de développement 141 plus 125 sauvegarde et réinitialisation 139 sécurité 133 services de localisation 132 son 129 station d’accueil 139 stockage 131 utilisation des données 125 Wi-Fi 125 photos afficher 69 capturer 57 capturer par scène 59 mode Action 61 mode Autoportrait 60 mode Beauté 62 mode Panorama 61 mode Sourire 60 Polaris Office 121 lecteur vidéo 67, 70 luminosité de l'écran 31 Maps 97 mémo texte afficher 85 créer 85 mémo vocal enregistrer 86 lire 86 messagerie instantanée 56 messagerie vocale 50 messages accéder à la messagerie vocale 50 créer des comptes e-mail 52 envoyer un e-mail 53 envoyer un MMS 49 envoyer un SMS 48 Météo 98 mini journal 120 MMS afficher 50 envoyer 49 mode de numérotation fixe 46 mode Discret 30 mode Hors-ligne 18 navigateur Web ajouter des favoris 89 surfer sur le Web 87 Orange et moi 98Index 164 transfert d’appel 47 verrouiller à l’aide du code PIN 33 vidéos enregistrer 64 lire 67, 70 Wi-Fi activer 102 rechercher des réseaux et s’y connecter 102 utiliser WPS 103 YouTube mettre des vidéos en ligne 94 visionner des vidéos 94 radio FM écouter 76 enregistrer des stations 77 recherche Google 93 rejet automatique 46 répertoire créer des contacts 79 créer des groupes 81 créer votre carte de visite 80 rechercher des contacts 80 restriction d’appel 47 saisir du texte 34 Samsung Kies 111 Sauvegarde 96 signal d’appel 47 SMS afficher 50 envoyer 48 Social Hub 56 Sonneries 98 synchronisation avec le lecteur Windows Média 111 avec un compte Web 40 tâches afficher 84 créer 84 téléchargements applications 38 fichiers 39 gestionnaire 118Déclaration de conformité (R&TTE) Nous, Samsung Electronics déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que le produit Appareil mobile : GT-I9100 en relation avec cette déclaration est en conformité avec les normes suivantes et/ ou d’autres documents normatifs. Sécurité EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11:2009 DAS EN 50360 : 2001 / AC 2006 EN 62209-1 : 2006 CEM EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007) Radio EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (03-2010) EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (03-2010) EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (03-2009) EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (03-2009) EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (12-2008) Cet appareil a été testé et s’est avéré conforme aux normes relatives à l’émission de fréquences radio. En outre, nous déclarons que cet appareil répond à la directive 1999/5/EC. La procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l’article 10, puis reprise à l’alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l’organisme suivant : BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Numéro d’identification : 0168 Documentation technique détenue par : Samsung Electronics QA Lab. disponible sur simple demande. (Représentant pour l’union européenne) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2011.05.23 Joong-Hoon Choi / Directeur de laboratoire (lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité) * Il ne s’agit pas de l’adresse du service après-vente de Samsung. Pour obtenir l’adresse ou le numéro de téléphone du service après-vente de Samsung, reportez-vous au certificat de garantie ou contactez le revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté ce produit.Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre appareil en fonction de votre version logicielle. French. 07/2012. Rev. 1.0 Pour installer Samsung Kies 1. Téléchargez la dernière version de Kies sur le site Web de Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies) et installez le logiciel sur votre ordinateur. 2. Branchez l’appareil à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC. 3. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre ordinateur pour lancer Samsung Kies. Pour obtenir davantage d’informations, consultez l’aide de Kies. Protégez votre oreille lorsque vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut endommager votre audition. • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident. • Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant d'entendre votre conversation ou la musique. www.samsung.com 使用说明书 GT-N71052 关于本说明书 本设备采用三星的高标准和专门技术,提供优质的移动通讯和娱乐体验。本使用说 明书专门设计用于详细介绍设备的功能和特性。 • 使用设备之前,请阅读本说明书,以确保安全和正确使用。 • 描述基于设备的默认设定。 • 图像和屏幕截图可能与实际产品的外观不同。 • 内容可能与最终产品不同,也可能与服务提供商或运营商提供的软件不 同。如有变更,恕不另行通知。如需获得最新版的说明书,请参阅三星网站 www.samsung.com。 • 可用功能和附加服务可能因设备、软件或服务提供商而异。 • 应用程序及其功能可能因国家、地区或硬件规格而异。对于由三星以外的提供 商应用程序造成的性能问题,三星概不负责。 • 对于编辑注册表设定或修改操作系统软件所造成的性能问题或不兼容性,三星 概不负责。尝试定制操作系统可能导致设备或应用程序无法正常工作。 • 本设备中提供的软件、声源、墙纸、图像及其他媒体以授权方式供有限使用。 针对商业或其他用途抽取和使用这些资料将违反版权法。对于非法使用媒体导 致的法律问题,用户应完全负责。 • 收发讯息、上传和下载、进行自动同步或使用定位服务可能会产生其他费用。 如欲避免产生额外费用,请选择合适的数据收费计划。有关详细信息,请联系 服务提供商。关于本说明书 3 • 随设备附带的默认应用程序随时可能更新,并可能在未经事先通知的情况下撤 消支持。如您对随设备附带的应用程序有疑问,请联系三星服务中心。对于用 户安装的应用程序,请联系服务提供商。 • 修改设备的操作系统或安装非官方来源的软件,可能会导致设备发生故障并损 坏或丢失数据。这些操作违反三星许可协议,并将使您的保修失效。 指示图标 警告:可能伤及自己或他人的情况 小心:可能损坏设备或其他设备的情况 注意:注释、使用提示或其他信息 版权 版权 © 2012 Samsung Electronics 本指南受国际版权法保护。 未经 Samsung Electronics 事先书面许可,不得以任何形式或方式,不论电子或是 机械方式复制、分发、转译或传播本指南中的任何内容,包括影印、录制或存储在 任何信息存储器和检索系统中。关于本说明书 4 商标 • SAMSUNG 和 SAMSUNG 徽标是 Samsung Electronics 的注册商标。 • Android 徽标、Google ™ 、Google Maps ™ 、Google Mail ™ 、YouTube ™ 、 Google Play ™ Store 和 Google Talk ™ 是 Google, Inc. 的商标。 • 蓝牙® 是 Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 在全球的注册商标。 • Wi-Fi ® 、Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™ 、Wi-Fi Direct ™ 、Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ 和 Wi-Fi 徽标是 Wi-FiAlliance 的注册商标。 • 其他所有商标和版权的所有权归各自所有者所有。 DivX® 、DivX Certified® 和相关徽标是 Rovi Corporation 或其子公司的商标,均为授权使用。 关于 DIVX 视像 DivX® 是由 Rovi Corporation 的子公司 DivX, LLC 创建的数字视频格式。本设备 已获得官方 DivX Certified® 认证,可播放 DivX 视像。请访问 www.divx.com 了解 详细信息,以及获取将文件转换为 DivX 视像的软件工具。 关于 DIVX 视像点播 此 DivX Certified® 设备必须先经过注册,然后才能播放购买的 DivX 视像点 播 (VOD) 电影。将 DivX VOD 置于设备的安装菜单以获得登录编号。请在 vod.divx.com 上了解更多关于完成注册的信息。 DivX Certified® 播放 DivX® 视像的分辨率高达 HD 720p,包括付费内容。5 目录 入门指南 8 设备部位图 9 按钮 10 S 笔 10 包装内容 11 安装 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池 14 为电池充电 16 插入存储卡 18 打开和关闭设备 19 握持设备 19 锁定和解锁设备 19 调整音量 20 切换至静音模式 基本功能 21 指示器图标 22 使用触摸屏 25 控制动作 32 扩展页面 32 启动多窗口 33 使用 S 笔 37 S 笔空中视图 38 手写笔防丢失提醒 38 快捷命令 39 通知 40 主屏幕 42 使用桌面工具 42 使用应用程序 43 应用程序屏幕 44 帮助 44 单手操作 45 输入文本 47 连接 Wi-Fi 网络 48 设置帐户 49 传输文件 50 设备安全防护 52 升级设备 通讯 53 手机 58 联系人 62 信息 63 电子邮件 65 谷歌邮箱 66 GoogleTalk 67 Google+ 67 碰头 68 ChatON目录 6 实用程序 96 S Note 99 S日历 101 Dropbox 102 云 103 时钟 105 计算器 105 录音机 107 S Voice 108 Google 108 语音搜索 109 我的文件 109 下载 旅行和本地资讯 110 地图 111 本地 112 导航 设定 113 关于设定 113 Wi-Fi 114 蓝牙 114 数据使用 114 更多设置 116 主屏模式 116 阻止模式 117 声音 Web 和网络 69 互联网 71 Chrome 72 蓝牙 73 AllShare Cast 73 AllShare Play 74 群组广播 75 NFC 76 S Beam 媒体 77 音乐播放器 78 照相机 85 相册 88 PaperArtist 89 视频播放器 90 YouTube 91 Flipboard 应用程序和媒体商店 92 Play 商店 93 SamsungApps 93 S Suggest 94 Game Hub 94 Music Hub 95 Readers Hub 95 影视圈 95 学习圈目录 7 117 显示 118 存储 119 省电模式 119 电池 119 应用程序管理器 119 定位服务 120 锁定屏幕 121 安全 122 单手操作 122 语言和输入 125 云 125 备份并重置 125 添加账户 125 动作 127 S Pen 127 配件 128 日期和时间 128 辅助功能 129 开发者选项 130 关于设备 故障排除8 入门指南 设备部位图 返回键 多功能插孔 通知指示灯 听筒 距离传/ 光传感器 功能表键 话筒 前置照相机 电源开关键 主页键 触摸屏 后置照相机 GPS 天线 主天线 耳机插口 扬声器麦克风 音量键 闪光 后盖 扬声器 S 笔入门指南 9 设备顶端的麦克风仅在使用扬声器或拍摄录像时启动。 • 请勿用手或其他物体挡住天线区域。否则可能会造成连接问题或耗尽电 池电量。 • 请勿使用屏幕保护装置。否则会导致感应器故障。 • 请勿让水接触触摸屏。触摸屏在潮湿环境中或接触到水时可能发生故障。 按钮 按钮 功能 电源开关键 • 紧按住以打开或关闭设备。 • 如果设备存在致命错误、停止工作或冻结,紧按住 8-10 秒以重置设备。 • 按下以锁定或解锁设备。触摸屏关闭时,设备进入锁 定模式。 功能表键 • 点击以打开当前屏幕的可用选项列表。 • 在主屏幕上点住以启动 Google 搜索。 主页键 • 按下以返回主屏幕。 • 紧按住以打开当前应用程序的列表。 • 按两下以启动 S Voice。 返回键 • 点击以返回上一个屏幕。 音量键 • 按下以调整设备音量。入门指南 10 S 笔 S Pen 触控笔笔尖 S Pen 触控笔按钮 名称 功能 S Pen 触控笔笔尖 • 执行 S 笔的基本操作。(第 22 页) S Pen 触控笔按钮 • 执行 S 笔的高级操作。(第 33 页) 包装内容 检查产品包装盒中是否包含以下用品: • 设备 • 电池 • 快速入门指南 只可使用经过三星认可的软件。盗版或非法软件可能会导致损坏或故障,这 些情况不涵盖在保修范围内。入门指南 11 • 设备随附的用品及任何可用配件可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而异。 • 随附的用品专为此设备设计,并不兼容于其他设备。 • 外观和规格如有变更,恕不另行通知。 • 可以向本地三星零售商购买其他配件。购买前请确保它们与设备兼容。 • 其他配件可能与您的设备不兼容。 • 只可使用经过三星认可的配件。使用未经认可的配件所造成的故障不属 保修服务范畴。 • 是否提供所有配件完全取决于制造公司。有关可用配件的更多信息,请 参阅三星网站。 安装 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池 安装移动电话服务提供商提供的 SIM 或 USIM 卡以及随附的电池。 本设备仅可使用 microSIM 卡。 1 取下后盖。 • 取下后盖时,请务必小心操作,以免伤及自己的指甲。 • 请勿过度弯曲或扭转后盖。否则会损坏后盖。入门指南 12 2 将 SIM 或 USIM 卡插入设备,使其金色触点面向下。 • 请勿取下覆盖天线的保护带,否则可能会损坏天线。 • 请勿将存储卡插入 SIM 卡插槽中。如果存储卡在 SIM 卡插槽中卡住,请 将设备送至三星服务中心取出存储卡。 • 小心不要丢失或让他人使用 SIM 或 USIM 卡。对于卡丢失或被盗所造成 的任何损害或不便,三星概不负责。 3 将 SIM 或 USIM 卡推进插槽,直到其锁定到位。 4 插入电池。 2 1入门指南 13 5 装回后盖。 取出 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池 1 取下后盖。 2 卸下电池。 3 推入 SIM 或 USIM 卡,直到其脱离设备,然后将其抽出。入门指南 14 为电池充电 首次使用前,先为电池充电。使用充电器为电池充电。也可通过 USB 数据线将设 备连接至电脑来为设备充电。 仅使用三星许可的充电器、电池和数据线。未经许可的充电器或数据线会导 致电池爆炸或损坏设备。 • 电池电量不足时,设备会发出警告音并显示电池电量不足讯息。 • 如果电池完全放电,连接充电器时,设备将无法立即开启。开启设备前, 让电量耗尽的电池先充电几分钟。 • 如果一次使用多个应用程序、使用网络应用程序或需要连接至其他设备的 应用程序,电池将会快速耗尽。为避免断开网络连接或数据传输时断电, 务必为电池完全充电后再使用这些应用程序。 使用充电器充电 将充电器的小端插头插入设备的多功能插孔,并将充电器的大端插头插入电源插 座。 充电器连接不当可能会严重损坏设备。对于因误操作造成的任何损坏,将不 予保修。入门指南 15 • 虽然在充电时可以使用设备,但这可能会延长电池完全充电的时间。 • 如果充电时电源电压不稳定,触摸屏可能无法正常工作。这时,请从设 备上拔下充电器。 • 设备在充电时会变热。这属于正常情况,不会影响设备的使用寿命或性 能。如果电池比平常更热,则充电器可能停止充电。 • 如果设备无法正常充电,请将设备和充电器送至三星服务中心。 完全充电后,断开设备与充电器的连接。先从设备上拔下充电器,然后将其从电源 插座拔下。 请勿在取下充电器前取出电池。否则可能损坏设备。 为了节能,不用时,请拔下充电器。充电器不带电源开关,因此不使用时, 必须要从电源插座上拔下充电器,以免浪费电。充电时,设备应该保持靠近 电源插座。 检查电池充电状态 若在设备关闭时为电池充电,以下图标将表明当前的电池充电状态: 正在充电 完全充电入门指南 16 减少电池消耗 本设备提供了若干选项,可助您节省电池电量。自定义以下选项并取消后台运行的 功能,可以延长每次充电后设备的使用时间: • 启动省电模式。 • 在不用设备时,按下电源开关键切换到休眠模式。 • 使用任务管理器关闭不必要的应用程序。 • 取消蓝牙功能。 • 取消 Wi-Fi 功能。 • 取消应用程序的自动同步功能。 • 减少背景灯时间。 • 降低显示屏的亮度。 插入存储卡 本设备可使用容量最高为 64 GB 的存储卡。取决于存储卡制造商和类别,有些存 储卡可能与您的设备并不兼容。 • 有些存储卡可能与设备并不完全兼容。使用不兼容的存储卡可能会损坏 设备或存储卡,或损坏存储在卡中的数据。 • 正面朝上插入存储卡。 • 设备仅支持 FAT 文件系统的存储卡。插入不同文件系统格式的卡时,设 备会要求重新格式化存储卡。 • 频繁写入和删除数据会缩短存储卡的使用寿命。 • 将存储卡插入设备时,存储卡的文件目录将出现在内部存储器下的 extSdCard 文件夹中。入门指南 17 1 取下后盖。 2 将金色触点面向下插入存储卡。 3 将存储卡推进插槽,直至锁定到位。 4 装回后盖。 取出存储卡 取出存储卡前,先解除固定以便安全取出。在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 设定 → 存储 → 卸载SD卡。 1 取下后盖。 2 推入存储卡,直到其脱离设备,然后将其抽出。 3 装回后盖。 请勿在设备传输或访问信息时取出存储卡。否则会导致数据丢失或损坏,或 损坏存储卡或设备。对于误用损坏的存储卡所造成的损失(包括数据丢失), 三星概不负责。入门指南 18 格式化存储卡 在电脑上格式化的存储卡可能与设备不兼容。在设备上格式化存储卡。 在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 设定 → 存储 → 格式化SD卡 → 格式化SD卡 → 全部 删除。 格式化存储卡前,记住要将所有重要数据备份到设备。因用户操作而导致的 数据丢失,制造商不提供保修服务。 打开和关闭设备 首次打开设备时,按照屏幕上的指示设定设备。 紧按住电源开关键几秒钟以打开和关闭设备。 • 在禁止使用无线装置的区域 (例如飞机和医院),请遵守所有张贴的警告和 授权人员的指示。 • 紧按住电源开关键,然后点击飞行模式以禁用无线功能。 如欲关闭设备,紧按住电源开关键,然后点击关机。入门指南 19 握持设备 请勿用手或其他物体挡住天线区域。否则可能会造成连接问题或耗尽电池电量。 锁定和解锁设备 不在使用时,锁定设备以避免不必要的操作。按下电源开关键关闭屏幕并使设备进 入锁定模式。如果设备在一段指定的时间内没有使用,将会被自动锁定。 如欲解锁设备,在触摸屏关闭时,按下电源开关键或主页键,在屏幕上任意点击一 下,然后向任意方向快速移动手指。 可以使用动作解锁设备。在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕 锁定 → 动作。如欲通过动作解锁设备,在屏幕上点住一个点,然后向前倾斜设 备。 调整音量 向上或向下按下音量键以调整铃声音量,或调整音乐或视频播放的音量。入门指南 20 切换至静音模式 使用以下方法之一: • 向下紧按住音量键,直至其切换至安静模式。 • 紧按住电源开关键,然后点击静音。 • 打开屏幕顶部的通知面板,然后点击声音。 设定设备在静音模式中对各种活动进行提示。紧按住电源开关键,然后点击振动。21 基本功能 指示器图标 屏幕顶部显示的图标提供有关设备状态的信息。下表中列出的图标为最常见的图 标。 图标 意义 无信号 信号强度 漫游中 (在正常服务区外) 已连接 GPRS 网络 已连接 EDGE 网络 已连接 UMTS 网络 已连接 HSDPA网络 已连接 LTE 网络 已连接 Wi-Fi 已启动蓝牙功能 已启动 GPS 正在通话 未接来电 已同步网络 已连接至电脑 无 SIM 卡或 USIM 卡 新简讯或多媒体简讯 已启动闹钟 已启动静音模式 已启动振动模式 已启动飞行模式基本功能 22 图标 意义 发生错误或需要注意 电池电量 使用触摸屏 仅使用手指或 S 笔来使用触摸屏。 • 禁止触摸屏接触其他电子设备。静电放电会导致触摸屏发生故障。 • 请勿让触摸屏接触到水。触摸屏在潮湿环境中或接触到水时可能发生故 障。 • 为免损坏触摸屏,请勿使用任何尖利物体点触屏幕,或在指尖点触屏幕 时用力过猛。 • 使触摸屏待机过长时间可能会产生残像 (屏幕老化) 或重像。不使用设备 时请关闭触摸屏。 手指姿势 点击 如欲打开应用程序、选择功能表项目、按下屏幕上的按钮或使用屏幕键盘输入字 符,用一只手指点击即可。基本功能 23 点住 点住某一项目 2 秒以上以访问可用选项。 拖动 如欲将图标、缩略图或预览移至新位置,将其点住并拖至目标位置即可。 双击 在网页、地图或图像上双击以将某一部分放大。再次双击返回。基本功能 24 快速移动 在主屏幕或应用程序屏幕上向左或向右快速移动以查看其他面板。向上或向下快速 移动以滚动查看网页或列表,例如联系人。 合拢 在网页、地图或图像上分开两指可将某一部分放大。合拢则缩小。基本功能 25 控制动作 可通过简单的动作轻松控制设备。 使用动作前,确保动作功能已启动。在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 设定 → 动作, 然后向右拖动动作开关。 剧烈晃动或碰撞设备可能导致意外输入。如欲了解如何正确控制动作,点击 应用程序 → 设定 → 动作 → 了解动作。(第 126 页) 旋转屏幕 许多应用程序既可纵向显示,又可横向显示。旋转设备会导致显示屏自动调整以适 合新屏幕的方向。 如欲避免显示屏自动旋转,打开通知面板,然后取消选择屏幕旋转。 • 有些应用程序不允许屏幕旋转。 • 有些应用程序会根据方向显示不同的屏幕。旋转至横向时,计算器会变 为科学计算器。基本功能 26 拿起 设备闲置一段时间或在屏幕关闭的情况下拿起设备时,如果有未接来电或新讯息, 设备将会振动。 靠近耳朵 查看通话、讯息或联系人详细信息时,拿起并将设备靠近耳机即可拨打电话。基本功能 27 平移以移动 点住某个项目,然后向左或向右移动设备即可将项目移至主屏幕或应用程序屏幕上 的另一面板。 平移以浏览 图像放大显示时,点住屏幕上某点,然后朝任意方向移动设备即可浏览图像。基本功能 28 双击 双击设备以移至联系人或电子邮件列表的顶部。 旋转 屏幕锁定时,点住屏幕,然后将设备旋转至横向即可启动照相机。如欲使用此动 作,在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 锁屏选项,然后向右拖动 照相机快速访问开关。基本功能 29 翻转 翻转设备即可关闭铃声或暂停媒体播放。 摇晃 • 摇晃设备以搜索蓝牙设备。 • 摇晃设备以更新电邮列表或来自 Yahoo News、Yahoo Finance 或 AccuWeather 的资讯。 更新将不适用于主屏幕上的桌面工具。基本功能 30 掠过 将手在屏幕上扫过可截取屏幕截图。图像储存在相册 → Screenshots 中。使用有 些应用程序时无法截取屏幕截图。 覆盖 用手掌覆盖屏幕可暂停媒体播放。基本功能 31 倾斜 点住屏幕上的两点,然后来回倾斜设备即可放大或缩小。 移动 触摸屏关闭时,将手移过距离/光传感器即可打开屏幕并查看未接来电和新讯息的 数量,以及电池电量级别等等。基本功能 32 扩展页面 使用此功能以基于您的操作使用指定的应用程序。在以下情况中,将会出现与操作 相关的页面: • 从插槽拔出 S 笔。 • 将耳机或底座连接至设备。 • 在漫游时。 启动多窗口 使用此功能以在屏幕上同时运行两个应用程序。 • 只有多窗口面板上的应用程序可以运行。 • 启动包含多媒体文件的应用程序 (例如音乐或视频)时,两个文件的声音均 会播放。 • 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无法使用。 如欲使用多窗口,在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 显示,然后勾选多窗口。 使用多窗口面板 如欲启动多窗口,点住 。多窗口面板出现在屏幕的左侧。选择一个应用程序, 然后将另一应用程序拖至新位置。 如欲取消多窗口,再次点住 。 点击面板手柄以隐藏或显示面板。面板打开时,点住手柄并将其向拖至屏幕的边缘 以移动面板。面板隐藏时,点住手柄并将其向左或向右拖动以移动手柄。基本功能 33 使用 S 笔 随附的 S 笔可用于轻松选择项目或执行功能。配合按钮使用 S 笔执行某些操作尤 其方便,例如捕捉屏幕。 从插槽拔出 S 笔以便使用。 从插槽拔出 S 笔时,设备将检测触控笔并执行以下操作: • 打开触摸屏 (若其关闭)。 • 启动 S Note (通话期间)。 • 打开 S 笔页面 (从主页屏幕)。 • S 笔的笔尖不可更换。如果笔尖反应变得迟缓,购买新的 S 笔。 • 如果 S 笔无法正常使用,将其送往三星服务中心。请参阅三星网站以了 解更多有关 S 笔的信息。 • 为获得最佳效果,请尽量使 S 笔与屏幕成直角,而不要以锐角使用。 • 功能表键和返回键无法通过 S 笔启动。基本功能 34 打开功能表 按下 S 笔按钮的同时,画出 可打开屏幕可用选项的列表。 撤消上一操作 按下 S 笔按钮的同时,画出 可撤消上一操作。基本功能 35 捕捉屏幕图像 按下 S 笔按钮的同时,触碰屏幕,直到听到“咔哒”一声。屏幕截图将储存在 相册 → Screenshots 文件夹中。 可以在屏幕上绘画、书写,或裁切屏幕截图。编辑的图像将储存在相册 → IMG_ edited 文件夹中。 使用有些应用程序时无法截取屏幕截图。 启动 S Note 按下 S 笔按钮的同时,双击屏幕即可启动 S Note。基本功能 36 选择文本 按下 S 笔按钮的同时,在文本上向左或向右拖动进行选择。如果在行之间拖动, 可能会选择不必要的文本。如欲仅选择想要的文本,在文本中间拖过或拖动文本选 择图标。 Samsung UserManual 启动快捷命令 按下 S 笔按钮的同时,在屏幕上向上拖动 S 笔即可启动快捷命令。 在快捷命令屏幕上,画出手势命令可启动指定的应用程序或功能。基本功能 37 选择和捕捉图像 按下 S 笔按钮的同时,在某一区域周围画出线条以选择该区域。选定的区域将储 存在相册 → Screenshots 文件夹中。从出现在屏幕底部的图标中选择欲用于选定 区域的应用。 S 笔空中视图 将 S 笔靠近屏幕时,屏幕上会出现指针。将指针移至文件、主题或选项以在弹出 窗口中预览内容或查看信息。您可以通过将指针移至屏幕的 (上/下/左/右) 边缘来 滚动查看面板或列表。基本功能 38 手写笔防丢失提醒 如果触摸屏关闭并且 S 笔从设备拔下,设备会显示弹出提示并在您行走时发出声 音。访问 S 笔设置以启动或取消此功能。 快捷命令 使用此功能以在屏幕上画出手势命令来拨打电话、发送讯息或搜索内容。按下 S 笔按钮的同时,在屏幕上向上拖动 S 笔即可启动快捷命令。 添加手势命令 点击 → 添加一个命令 → 选择应用程序或选择功能/设置。选择应用程序或功能 → 选项。画出新的手势命令,然后点击完成。 使用手势命令 画出手势命令以启动应用程序或功能。 如欲执行特定的任务,在手势命令后面画出姓名或电话号码等关键字。例如,画出 @ 时,电邮应用程序将会启动。在 @ 后面添加收件人姓名后,电邮撰写屏幕将会 打开,以便您向该收件人发送电邮。基本功能 39 通知 通知图标出现在屏幕顶部的状态栏上,报告未接来电、新讯息、日历事件、设备状 态等等。从状态栏向下拖动以打开通知面板。滚动列表以查看其他提示。如欲关闭 通知面板,向上拖动位于屏幕底部上的横条。 从通知面板中,可以查看设备的当前状态并使用以下选项: • Wi-Fi:启动或取消 Wi-Fi 功能。 • GPS:启动或取消 GPS 功能。 • 声音:启动或取消静音模式。可以在静音模式中将设备设定为振动或静音。 • 屏幕旋转:允许或避免界面在旋转设备时旋转。 • 蓝牙:启动或取消蓝牙功能。 • 移动数据:启动或取消数据连接。 • 阻止模式:启动或取消阻止模式。在阻止模式下,设备将阻止通知。如欲选择 将要阻止的通知,点击设定 → 阻止模式。 • 省电模式:启动或取消省电模式。 • AllShare Cast:启动或取消AllShare Cast 功能。 • 多窗口:设定为使用多窗口。 可用的选项可能随所在地区或服务提供商而异。基本功能 40 主屏幕 主屏幕是访问所有设备功能的起点。它显示指示器图标、桌面工具、应用程序的快 捷方式及其他。 主屏幕可能具有多个面板。如欲查看其他面板,向左或向右滚动。 更改主屏幕模式 主屏幕具有基本和简易模式。在简易模式下,可以通过向主屏幕添加快捷方式来轻 松访问常用联系人、应用程序和设定。 如欲切换至简易模式,在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 设定 → 主屏模式 → 简易模 式 → 应用。 重排项目 添加应用程序图标 在主屏幕上,点击应用程序,点住应用程序图标,然后将其拖入面板预览。 添加项目 通过添加桌面工具或文件夹自定义主屏幕。 在主屏幕上点住空白区域,然后选择以下类别之一: • 应用程序和小组件:向主屏幕添加小组件或应用程序。 • 文件夹:创建新文件夹。 移动项目 点住项目并将其拖至新位置。如欲将其移至另一面板,将其拖至屏幕一侧。基本功能 41 移除项目 点住项目并将其拖至出现在主屏幕顶部的回收站。回收站变红时,将其放开。 重排面板 添加新面板 点击 → 编辑页 → 。 移动面板 点击 → 编辑页,点住面板预览,然后将其拖至新位置。 移除面板 点击 → 编辑页,点住面板预览,然后将其拖至屏幕底部的回收站。 设置墙纸 将存储在设备中的图像或照片设置为主屏幕的墙纸。 在主屏幕上,点击 → 设置墙纸 → 主屏,然后选择以下选项之一: • 相册:查看设备照相机拍摄的照片或从互联网下载的图像。 • 动态墙纸:查看动态图像。 • 墙纸:查看墙纸图像。 然后选择图像并点击设置墙纸。或者选择图像,通过拖动边框来调整图像大小,然 后点击完成。基本功能 42 使用桌面工具 桌面工具是小型应用程序,可在主屏幕上提供便捷功能和信息。如欲使用桌面工 具,将其从桌面工具面板添加至主屏幕。 • 有些桌面工具连接至网络服务。使用基于网络的桌面工具可能会产生额 外的费用。 • 可用的桌面工具可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而异。 添加桌面工具至主屏幕 在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 小组件。在桌面工具面板上向左或向右滚动,然后 点住桌面工具以将其添加至主屏幕。 使用设置快捷方式桌面工具 在主屏幕上,点击应用程序 → 小组件,然后点住设置快捷方式以打开设置选项的列 表。选择设置选项以将其添加至主屏幕作为快捷方式。 使用应用程序 此设备可以运行许多不同类型的应用程序,范围包括媒体到互联网应用程序。 打开应用程序 在主屏幕或应用程序屏幕上,选择应用程序图标以将其打开。 从最近使用的应用程序中打开 紧按住主页键以打开最近使用的应用程序列表。 选择应用程序图标以打开。基本功能 43 关闭应用程序 关闭不在使用的应用程序以节省电池电量并保持设备性能。 紧按住主页键,点击 ,然后点击应用程序旁边的结束以将其关闭。如欲关闭所 有运行中的应用程序,点击全部结束。或者,也可以紧按住主页键,然后点击 。 应用程序屏幕 应用程序屏幕显示所有应用程序的图标,包括新安装的应用程序。 在主屏幕上,点击应用程序以打开应用程序屏幕。 如欲查看其他面板,向左或向右滚动。 重排应用程序 点击 → 编辑,点住应用程序,然后将其拖至新位置。如欲将其移至另一面板, 将其拖至屏幕一侧。 通过文件夹整理 将相关的应用程序一起归入文件夹以便于管理。 点击 → 编辑,点住应用程序,然后将其拖至新建文件夹。输入文件夹名称,然 后点击确定。通过拖放操作将应用程序放入新文件夹,然后点击保存以储存排列。 重排面板 在屏幕上合拢手指,点住面板预览,然后将其拖至新位置。基本功能 44 安装应用程序 使用应用程序商店,例如 Samsung Apps 下载和安装应用程序。 卸载应用程序 点击 → 卸载,然后选择应用程序以卸载。 设备附带的默认应用程序无法卸载。 共享应用程序 可通过电邮、蓝牙或其他方式与其他用户共享下载的应用程序。 点击 → 共享应用程序,选择应用程序,点击完成,然后选择共享方式。接下来 的步骤因选择的方式而异。 帮助 访问帮助信息以了解如何使用设备和应用程序,或配置重要设置。 点击应用程序屏幕上的帮助。选择项目以查看提示。 如果已隐藏帮助弹出窗口,如欲重置,点击显示帮助提示弹出窗口,然后勾选项 目。 单手操作 可以启动单手操作模式以便于使用。在此模式下,应用程序界面将变为易于使用单 手操作的状态。 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 单手操作。勾选用于此模式的应用程序或功能。基本功能 45 输入文本 使用三星键盘或语音输入功能输入文本。 有些语言不支持文本输入。如欲输入文本,必须将输入语言改为受支持的语 言。 更改键盘类型 点击任何字段,打开通知面板,点击选择输入法,然后选择要使用的键盘类型。 使用三星键盘 更改键盘布局 点住 ,点击 → 纵向键盘类型,然后点击 Qwerty键盘或 3x4 键盘。 在 3x4 键盘上,每个按键具有三到四个字符。如欲输入某个字符,反复点 击对应于该字符的按键。 断开至下一行。 删除前一个字符。 输入标点符号。 输入大写字母。 切换到手写模式。 输入空格。 输入大写字母 输入字符之前点击 。如欲全部输入大写字母,点击该按钮两次。基本功能 46 更改语言键盘 向左或向右滑动空格键以更改语言键盘。 手写框 点击 ,然后用手指或 S 笔书写字词。输入字符时会显示建议字词。选择建议字 词。 通过语音输入文本 启动语音输入功能,然后对着话筒说话。设备会显示您说的话。 如果设备未正确识别您说的话语,点击带下划线的文本,然后从下拉列表中选择替 代字词或短语。 如欲更改或添加语音识别的语言,点击屏幕底部的当前语言。 完成后,点击 。 复制和粘贴 在文本上点住,拖动 或 以选择更多或更少文本,然后点击 以复制,或 以剪切。选定的文本将复制到剪贴板。 如欲将其粘贴到文本输入字段,在欲输入文本的位置点住,然后点击粘贴。基本功能 47 连接 Wi-Fi 网络 将设备连接至 Wi-Fi 网络以使用互联网或与其他设备共享媒体文件。(第 113 页) 打开和关闭 Wi-Fi 打开通知面板,然后点击 Wi-Fi 以将其打开或关闭。 • 本设备使用非统一的频率,目的是在所有欧洲国家中使用。在欧盟,用户 在室内使用 WLAN 时不受任何限制,但不允许在室外环境使用 WLAN。 • 不在使用时请关闭 Wi-Fi 以节省电池电量。 加入 Wi-Fi 网络 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → Wi-Fi,然后向右拖动 Wi-Fi 开关。 从检测到的 Wi-Fi 网络列表中选择网络,输入密码 (如有必要),然后点击连接。需 要输入密码的网络会显示锁图标。设备连接至 Wi-Fi 网络后,只要该网络可用,设 备就会自动连接至网络。 添加 Wi-Fi 网络 如果所需的网络没有出现在网络列表中,点击网络列表底部的添加 Wi-Fi 网络。在 网络 SSID 中输入网络名称,选择安全类型并输入密码 (如果不是开放网络),然后 点击储存。 忘记 Wi-Fi 网络 任何曾经使用过的网络,包括当前网络均可能会被忘记,设备也会因此无法自动连 接至这些网络。在网络列表中选择网络,然后点击忘记。基本功能 48 设置帐户 谷歌应用程序 (例如 Play 商店) 需要使用谷歌帐户,Samsung Apps 也需要使用三 星帐户。创建谷歌和三星帐户以获得最佳的设备体验。 添加帐户 按照未登录的情况下打开谷歌应用程序时出现的指示设置谷歌帐户。 如欲登录或注册谷歌帐户,在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 添加账户 → Google。在这之后,点击新建注册,或点击现有,然后按照屏幕上的指示完成帐 户设置。设备上可使用多个谷歌帐户。 同理设置三星帐户。 移除帐户 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定,在账户下选择帐户名称,选择要移除的帐户,然后 点击移除账户。基本功能 49 传输文件 将音频、视频、图像或其他类型的文件从设备移至电脑,或反之。 部分应用程序支持以下文件格式。不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备的 软件版本。 • 音乐:mp3、m4a、mp4、3gp、3ga、wma、ogg、oga、aac 和 flac • 图像:bmp、gif、jpg 和 png • 录像:3gp、mp4、avi、wmv、flv 和 mkv • 文档:doc、docx、xls、xlsx、ppt、pptx、pdf、和 txt 连接 Samsung Kies Samsung Kies 是一个用来管理媒体库、联系人和日历并与三星设备进行同步的电 脑应用程序。从三星网站下载最新的 Samsung Kies。 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。 Samsung Kies 在电脑上自动启动。如果 Samsung Kies 未能启动,双击电脑 上的 Samsung Kies 图标。 2 在设备和电脑之间传输文件。 有关详细信息,请参阅 Samsung Kies 帮助。 连接 Windows Media Player 确保在电脑上安装了 Windows Media Player。 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。 2 打开 Windows Media Player 并同步音乐文件。基本功能 50 作为媒体设备连接 1 使用 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。 2 打开通知面板,然后点击已连接为媒体设备 → 媒体设备 ( MTP )。 如果电脑不支持媒体传输协议或未安装任何相应的驱动程序,点击摄像头 ( PTP )。 3 在设备和电脑之间传输文件。 设备安全防护 使用安全功能避免他人使用或访问储存在设备中的个人数据和信息。无论何时解 锁,设备均需要解锁码。 设置面部解锁 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 面部解锁。 使面部适合要拍摄的相框。然后设置备份解锁 PIN 码或图案解锁屏幕,以免面部 解锁失败。 设置面部和语音解锁 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 面部与语音。 使面部适合要拍摄的相框并设置语音命令。然后设置备份解锁 PIN 码或图案解锁 屏幕,以免面部和语音解锁失败。基本功能 51 设置图案 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 图案。 连接四个或四个以上点画出图案,然后再次画出图案进行验证。设置辅助解锁 PIN 码。 设置备份解锁 PIN 码以在您忘记图案时解锁屏幕。 设置 PIN 码 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → PIN 码。 输入至少四位数字,然后再次输入密码进行验证。 设置密码 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 密码。 输入至少四个字符 (包括数字和符号),然后再次输入密码进行验证。 解锁设备 按下电源开关键或主页键打开屏幕,然后输入解锁码。 如果忘记解锁码,请将设备送往三星服务中心进行重置。基本功能 52 升级设备 设备可升级至最新的软件。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无法使用。 升级 Samsung Kies 启动 Samsung Kies 并将设备连接至电脑。Samsung Kies 将自动识别设备并在对 话框中显示可用的更新 (如果有)。在对话框中单击“更新”按钮以开始升级。请参 阅 Samsung Kies 帮助以获得有关如何升级的详细信息。 • 设备升级时,请勿关闭电脑或断开 USB 数据线。 • 升级设备时,请勿将其他媒体设备连接至电脑。否则可能会干扰更新过 程。 空中升级 设备可通过空中固件升级 (FOTA) 服务直接升级至最新的软件。 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 关于设备 → 系统更新 → 更新。53 通讯 手机 使用此应用程序拨打或接听电话。 在应用程序屏幕上点击手机。 拨打电话 拨打电话 使用以下方法之一: • 键盘:使用键盘输入数字,然后点击 。 • 记录:从来电和拨出电话的历史记录和讯息中拨打电话。 • 我的收藏:从收藏联系人的列表中拨打电话。 • 联系人:从联系人列表中拨打电话。 快速拨号数字 对于快速拨号数字,点住对应的数字。 号码预测 在键盘上输入号码时,会自动出现预测号码。选择其中一个号码进行拨打。通讯 54 查找联系人 在联系人列表中输入姓名、电话号码或电邮地址查找联系人。输入字符时,预测的 联系人将会出现。选择要拨打的联系人。 拨打国际电话 点住 0,直到 + 号出现。输入国家代码、区号和电话号码,然后点击 。 通话期间 可供使用的操作包括: • :保持通话。或紧按住耳机按钮。点击 返回保持的通话,或紧按住耳机按 钮。 • 添加通话:拨打第二个电话。 • 键盘:打开键盘。 • 扬声器:启动扬声器。使用扬声器时,使设备远离耳朵。 • 静音:关闭话筒使对方听不到自己的声音。 • 耳机:如果蓝牙耳机连接至设备,则切换至蓝牙耳机。 • 切换:在两个通话之间切换。 • 合并:连接至两个通话时发起多方通话。重复此操作可以添加更多方。只有启 动了多方通话服务,此功能才可用。 • → 联系人:打开联系人列表。 • → 讯息:发送讯息。 • → S Note:建立便笺。 • → 噪音降低关:取消噪音减少功能消除背景噪音,以使对方听得更清楚。 • → My call sound:选择要在通话期间使用的均衡器选项。 • → 转接:接通第一个通话方与第二个通话方。这会使您的通话中断。 • → 管理电话会议:在多方通话期间与某一方展开私人会话或从多方通话中 断开某一方。通讯 55 添加联系人 如欲通过键盘向联系人添加电话号码,输入号码,然后点击添加到联系人。 查看通话记录 点击记录以查看来电和拨出电话的历史记录。 如欲过滤通话记录,点击 → 查看方式,然后选择选项。 指定拨号号码 可以将设备设置为仅限制拨出具有指定前缀的号码。那些前缀储存在 SIM 或 USIM 卡中。 点击 → 通话设定 → 其它设置 → 固定拨号号码 → 启动固定拨号,然后输入随 SIM 或 USIM 卡提供的 PIN2 码。点击固定拨号列表并添加号码。 呼叫限制 可以将设备设置为阻止拨打特定电话。例如,可以关闭国际通话。 点击 → 通话设定 → 其它设置 → 呼叫限制,选择通话类型,选择呼叫限制选 项,然后输入密码。 接听电话 应答电话 来电时,将 拖到圆周外面,或按下耳机按钮。 如果呼叫等待服务启动,则可拨打另一个电话。应答第二个通话时,第一个通话将 进入保持状态。通讯 56 拒绝通话 来电时,将 拖到圆周外面,或紧按住耳机按钮。 如欲在拒接来电时发送讯息,点击拒接来电并发送简讯。如欲创建拒绝讯息,点击 → 通话设定 → 设置拒绝信息。 自动拒接来自可疑号码的来电 点击 → 通话设定 → 呼叫拒绝,向右拖动自动拒绝模式开关,然后点击自动拒绝 列表。点击新建,输入号码,指定类别,然后点击储存。 未接来电 如果有未接来电,状态栏上将会出现 。打开通知面板以查看未接来电的列表。 呼叫等待 呼叫等待是由服务提供商提供的一项服务。用户可以使用此服务来暂挂当前通话并 切换至来电。此服务不适用于视像通话。 如欲使用此服务,点击 → 通话设定 → 其它设置 → 呼叫等待。 呼叫前转 可以将设备设置为将来电发送至指定号码。 点击 → 通话设定 → 呼叫转移,然后选择通话类型和条件。输入号码并点击 启动。 结束通话 点击结束通话结束通话。或按下耳机按钮。通讯 57 视像通话 拨打视像通话 输入号码或从联系人列表选择联系人,然后点击 拨打视像通话。 视像通话期间 可供使用的操作包括: • 照相机切换:在前置照相机镜头和后置照相机之间切换。 • 静音:关闭话筒使对方听不到自己的声音。 • → 隐藏自己:向对方隐藏自己的图像。 • → 发出图像:选择要向对方显示的图像。 • → 键盘:打开键盘。 • → 转换到耳机:如果蓝牙耳机连接至设备,则切换至蓝牙耳机。 • → 扩音器关:取消扬声器功能。 • → 动态表情:为图像应用表情图标。 • → 主题视图:为图像应用修饰图标。 • → 启用卡通视图:将查看模式更改为卡通视图。 点住对方的图像以访问以下选项: • 拍照:捕获对方的图像。 • 拍摄录像:拍摄对方图像的录像。 在许多国家/地区,未经对方事先许可录制通话属非法行为。 点住图像以访问以下选项: • 照相机切换:在前置照相机镜头和后置照相机之间切换。 • 发出图像:选择要向对方显示的图像。通讯 58 切换图像 将任一方的图像拖至对方的图像即可切换图像。 联系人 使用此应用程序管理联系人,包括电话号码、电子邮件地址及其他。 在应用程序屏幕上点击联系人。 管理联系人 创建联系人 点击 并输入联系人信息。 • :添加图像。 • / :添加或删除联系人字段。通讯 59 编辑联系人 选择要编辑的联系人,然后点击 。 删除联系人 点击 → 删除。 设置快速拨号数字 点击 → 快速拨号设置,选择快速拨号数字,然后为其选择一个联系人。如欲移 除快速拨号数字,将其点住,然后点击移除。 搜索联系人 使用以下搜索方法之一: • 向上或向下滚动联系人列表。 • 使用联系人列表右侧上的索引,沿着这些索引拖动手指快速滚动查看。 • 点击联系人列表顶部的搜索字段并输入搜索标准。 一旦选择联系人,即可执行以下操作之一: • :添加至收藏联系人。 • / :拨打语音或视像通话。 • :撰写讯息。 • :撰写电邮。 导入和导出联系人 与 Google 联系人同步 点击 → 与Google合并。 在联系人列表中,与 Google 联系人同步的联系人将会显示 。 如果在设备上添加或删除联系人,该联系人也会添加到或从 Google 联系人中删 除,反之亦然。通讯 60 与三星联系人同步 点击 → 与三星帐号合并。 在联系人列表中,与三星联系人同步的联系人将会显示 。 如果在设备上添加或删除联系人,该联系人也会添加到或从三星联系人中删除,反 之亦然。 导入联系人 点击 → 导入/导出 → 从SIM卡导入、从SD卡导入或从 USB 存储导入。 导出联系人 点击 → 导入/导出 → 导出到SIM卡、导出到SD卡或导出至 USB 存储。 共享联系人 点击 → 导入/导出 → 共享名片通过,选择联系人,点击完成,然后选择共享方 式。 收藏联系人 点击 ,然后执行以下操作之一: • 搜索:搜索联系人。 • 添加至收藏:将联系人添加到收藏夹。 • 从收藏中移除:从收藏夹移除联系人。 • 网格视图 / 列表视图:以网格或列表形式查看联系人。通讯 61 联系人分组 将联系人添加到群组 选择群组,然后点击 。选择要添加的联系人,然后点击完成。 管理分组 点击 ,然后执行以下操作之一: • 新建:创建新群组。 • 搜索:搜索联系人。 • 更改顺序:点住群组名称旁边的 ,将其向上或向下拖至另一位置,然后点击 完成。 • 删除群组:选择用户添加的群组,然后点击删除。无法删除默认群组。 发送讯息或电邮到群组成员 选择群组,点击 → 发送信息或发送邮件,选择组员,然后点击完成。 名片 创建名片并将其发送给他人。 点击设置我的名片,输入详细资料 (例如电话号码、电邮地址和通讯地址等), 然后点击储存。如果在设置设备时储存了用户资料,在我中选择名片,然后点击 进行编辑。 点击 → 共享名片通过,然后选择共享方式。通讯 62 信息 使用此应用程序发送文本讯息 (简讯) 或多媒体简讯 (彩信)。 在应用程序屏幕上点击信息。 • 取决于服务提供商的 LTE 网络,此功能可能无法使用。有关详细信息, 请联系服务提供商。 • 在本地服务区外发送或接收讯息可能会产生额外的费用。有关详细信 息,请联系服务提供商。 发送讯息 点击 ,添加收件人,输入讯息,然后点击 。 使用以下方法添加收件人: • 输入电话号码。 • 点击 ,选择联系人,然后点击完成。 使用以下方法创建多媒体简讯: • 点击 并附加图像、录像、联系人、便笺、事件及其他。 • 点击 → 插入笑脸符号插入图释。 • 点击 → 添加主题输入主题。 发送预发的讯息 撰写讯息时,点击 → 定时信息。设定时间和日期,然后点击确定。设备将在指 定时间和日期发送讯息。 • 如果设备在预定时间关闭、未连接至网络或网络不稳定,讯息将无法发 送。 • 此功能基于设备上设置的时间和日期。如果跨越了时区且网络未更新该信 息,时间和日期可能不正确。通讯 63 查看收到的讯息 收到的讯息会按联系人分组为讯息线程。 选择联系人以查看此人的讯息。 收听语音讯息 在键盘上点住 1,然后按照服务提供商的指示完成操作。 电子邮件 使用此应用程序发送或查看电邮讯息。 在应用程序屏幕上点击电子邮件。 设置电子邮件帐户 首次打开电子邮件时,设置电子邮件帐户。 输入电邮地址和密码。点击下一步设置私人电子邮件帐户 (例如谷歌邮箱) 或点击 手动设置以设置公司电子邮件帐户。在这之后,按照屏幕上的指示完成设置。 如欲设置其他电子邮件帐户,点击 → 设定 → 。 发送讯息 点击要使用的电子邮件帐户,然后点击屏幕顶部的 。输入收件人、主题和讯 息,然后点击 。 点击 从联系人列表添加收件人。 点击 → 添加抄送/暗送添加更多收件人。 点击 附加图像、录像、联系人、便笺、事件及其他。 点击 将图像、事件、联系人及资讯位置插入讯息。通讯 64 发送预发的讯息 撰写讯息时,点击 → 定时发送。勾选定时发送,设定时间和日期,然后点击 完成。设备将在指定时间和日期发送讯息。 • 如果设备在预定时间关闭、未连接至网络或网络不稳定,讯息将无法发 送。 • 此功能基于设备上设置的时间和日期。如果跨越了时区且网络未更新该信 息,时间和日期可能不正确。 阅读讯息 选择要使用的电子邮件帐户收取新讯息。如欲手动收取新讯息,点击 。 点击要读取的讯息。 打开附件。 回复讯息。 添加此电邮地址到联系人 列表。 删除讯息。 标记讯息为提醒。 转发讯息。 点击附件标签打开附件,然后点击附件旁边的 进行储存。通讯 65 谷歌邮箱 使用此应用程序以快速直接地访问 Google Mail 服务。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Gmail。 • 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 • 此应用程序的标签可能不同,具体取决于所在地区或服务提供商。 发送讯息 在任何邮箱中,点击 ,输入收件人、主题和讯息,然后点击 。 点击 → 附加图片附加图像。 点击 → 附加视频以附加录像。 点击 → 添加抄送/密送地址添加更多收件人。 点击 → 保存草稿储存讯息以便以后发送。 点击 → 舍弃重新开始。 阅读讯息 标记讯息为未读。 为此讯息添加标签。 预览附件。 保存此讯息以便长期储存。 标记讯息为提醒。 删除此讯息。 回复此讯息。 回复所有收件人或转发此讯 息给其他人。 添加此电邮地址到联系人 列表。通讯 66 标签 谷歌邮箱不使用实际的文件夹,而是使用标签。启动谷歌邮箱时,设备将显示带收 件箱标签的讯息。 点击 在其他标签中查看讯息。 如欲为讯息添加标签,选择该讯息,点击 ,然后选择要指定的标签。 GoogleTalk 使用此应用程序以通过 Google Talk 与他人聊天。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 GoogleTalk。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 公开配置 点击好友列表顶部的帐户 ID 以更改可用性状态、图像或状态讯息。 添加好友 点击 ,输入要添加好友的电邮地址,然后点击完成。 与好友聊天 从好友列表中选择好友,在屏幕底部的字段中输入讯息,然后点击 。 如欲添加好友至聊天室,点击 → 添加到聊天。 如欲结束聊天,点击 → 结束聊天。通讯 67 在聊天之间切换 向左或向右滚动。 删除聊天记录 聊天会自动储存。如欲删除聊天记录,点击 → 清除聊天记录。 Google+ 使用此应用程序以通过 Google 的社交网络服务与人们保持联络。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Google+。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 点击所有圈子以更改类别,然后向上或向下滚动以查看来自圈子的帖子。 碰头 使用此应用程序以通过 Google+ 即时讯息服务与他人聊天。 在应用程序屏幕上点击碰头。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 从好友列表中选择好友,在屏幕底部的字段中输入讯息,然后点击 。通讯 68 ChatON 使用此应用程序与任何具有手机号码的设备聊天。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 ChatON。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 输入三星帐户的电话号码或电邮地址创建好友列表,或从建议列表中选择好友。 选择好友开始聊天。 如欲将设备上的联系人与 ChatON 同步,点击设定 → 同步联系人。69 Web 和网络 互联网 使用此应用程序以浏览互联网。 在应用程序屏幕上点击互联网。 查看网页 点击地址字段,输入网址,然后点击转到。 点击 以在查看网页时共享、储存或打印当前网页。 打开新页面 点击 → 新窗口。 如欲转到另一网页,点击 ,向左或向右滚动,然后点击页面进行选择。 通过语音搜索网络 点击地址字段,点击 ,说出关键字,然后选择出现的建议关键字之一。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无法使用。 书签 如欲将当前网页添加到书签,点击 → 添加书签。 如欲打开已添加到书签的网页,点击 ,然后选择网页。Web 和网络 70 历史记录 点击 → 历史记录从最近访问的网页列表中打开网页。如欲清除历史记录,点击 → 清除历史记录。 点击 → 历史记录 → 访问最多以从访问次数最多的网页列表中打开网页。 已保存的页面 如欲查看已保存的网页,点击 → 已保存页面。 链接 在网页上点住链接以在新页面上打开、储存、共享或复制。 如欲查看储存的链接,点击 → 下载列表。 共享网页 如欲与他人共享网页地址,点击 → 共享页面。 如欲共享网页某一部分,点住所需的文本,然后点击 → 共享。 使用弹出式浏览器 使用此功能以在不关闭当前应用程序的情况下访问互联网。 查看包含网址的联系人或便笺等内容时,选择网址,然后点击网页浮窗以打开弹出 式浏览器。点击并将拖动浏览器以将其移至其他位置。 如欲以全屏查看浏览器,点击 。 如欲关闭浏览器,点击 。Web 和网络 71 Chrome 使用 Chrome 搜索信息并浏览网页。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Chrome。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 查看网页 点击地址字段,然后输入网址或搜索标准。 打开新页面 点击 → 新建标签页。 如欲转到其他网页,点击 → 网页。 通过语音搜索网络 点击地址字段,点击 ,说出关键字,然后选择出现的建议关键字之一。 与其他设备同步 当使用同一 Google 帐户登录时,可以同步打开的标签和书签,以在其他设备上通 过 Chrome 使用。 如欲在其他设备上查看打开的标签,点击 → 其他设备。选择要打开的网页。 如欲查看书签,点击 。Web 和网络 72 蓝牙 蓝牙可在近距离内的两个设备之间建立直接的无线连接。使用蓝牙与其他设备交换 数据或媒体文件。 • 对于通过蓝牙功能收发数据时的数据丢失、拦截或误用,三星概不负责。 • 分享和接收数据时,请务必确保相应设备采取了适当的安全措施,并且是 可信任的设备。如果设备之间存在障碍,有效距离可能会缩短。 • 某些设备,尤其是未经测试或未经 Bluetooth SIG 审批的设备,可能与本 设备不兼容。 • 不得将蓝牙功能用于非法目的 (例如出于商业目的剽窃商业机密或非法窃 听通讯)。 对于因非法使用蓝牙功能所造成的后果,三星概不负责。 如欲启动蓝牙,在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 蓝牙,然后向右拖动蓝牙开关。 与其他蓝牙设备配对 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 蓝牙 → 扫描,检测到的设备将会列出来。选择欲 配对的设备,然后在两台设备上接受自动生成的密码进行确认。 发送和接收数据 许多应用程序均支持通过蓝牙传输数据。例如相册。打开相册,选择图像,点击 → 蓝牙,然后选择配对的蓝牙设备之一。在这之后,在其他设备上接受蓝牙授权 请求以接收图像。传输的文件储存在 Bluetooth 文件夹。如果接收到联系人,该联 系人将会自动添加到联系人列表中。Web 和网络 73 AllShare Cast 使用此功能将设备连接至具有AllShare Cast 加密狗的大屏幕设备,然后共享内 容。 • 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无法使用。 • 有些文件在播放期间可能需要缓冲,取体取决于网络连接情况。 • 为了节能,请在不用时取消AllShare Cast 功能。 • 如果指定 Wi-Fi 频带,可能无法发现或连接AllShare Cast 加密狗。 • 如果在电视上播放视频或玩游戏,选择适当的电视模式以获得最佳的 AllShare Cast 体验。 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 更多设置 → AllShare Cast,然后向右拖动 AllShare Cast 开关。选择设备,打开或播放文件,然后使用设备上的按键控制显 示。 AllShare Play 使用此应用程序通过网络播放储存在各种设备上的内容。可播放并将任何设备上的 任何文件传送到另一设备或网络存储服务器。 如欲使用此应用程序,必须登入谷歌和三星帐户,并将两个或两个以上设备注册为 文件服务器。注册方法可能会因设备类型而异。如欲了解更多详情,点击 → 常见问题。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 AllShare Play。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 发送文件 选择设备或网络存储器,选择文件,然后点击 。Web 和网络 74 共享文件 选择设备或网络存储器,选择文件,点击 ,然后使用以下选项: • 群组广播:与连接至同一 Wi-Fi 网络的多个其他设备共享屏幕。 • 发送给附近的用户:与附近已启动AllShare Play 的设备共享文件。 • Facebook/Twitter/Flickr/Picasa:将文件上传至社交网络站点。 在远程设备上播放文件 选择设备或网络存储器,选择文件,点击 ,然后选择设备。 • 支持的文件格式可能会有所不同,具体取决于作为媒体播放器连接的设 备。 • 有些文件在播放时可能需要缓冲,取体取决于网络连接情况。 管理网络存储服务器上的内容 选择网络存储服务器,然后查看和管理文件。 群组广播 使用此应用程序以与连接至同一 Wi-Fi 网络的其他设备共享图像、文档和音乐。 在应用程序屏幕上点击群组广播。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 共享文件 1 点击分享图像、共享文档或共享音乐,选择要共享的文件,然后点击完成。 2 输入 PIN 码,然后点击完成。Web 和网络 75 NFC 设备允许您读取包含有关产品信息的近距离无线通讯 (NFC) 标签。在下载所需的 应用程序之后,也可使用此功能来付款或购买车票。 电池背面含内置 NFC 天线。小心处置电池盖,以免损坏 NFC 天线。 如果屏幕锁定,设备将无法读取 NFC 标签或接收数据。 如欲启动 NFC 功能,在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 更多设置 → NFC。向右拖 动 NFC 开关。 读取 NFC 标签信息 将设备靠近 NFC 标签。该标签的信息将会出现。 通过 NFC 功能购物 使用 NFC 功能进行购物之前,必须先注册手机支付服务。如欲注册或了解有关该 服务的详细信息,请联系您的服务提供商。 将设备的背面贴近 NFC 卡阅读器。 通过Android Beam 发送数据 使用Android Beam 功能以将网页和联系人等数据发送至已启用 NFC 的设备。 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 更多设置 → NFC。向右拖动 Android 传送开关。 选择一个项目,将设备的背面与其他设备的背面靠在一起,然后点击您设备的屏 幕。Web 和网络 76 S Beam 使用 S 传送 功能可以发送音乐、视频、图像和文档等数据。 请勿通过 S 传送 发送受版权保护的数据。该行为违反版权法。对于任何因 非法使用受版权保护的数据而导致的法律问题,三星概不负责。 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 更多设置 → S Beam。向右拖动 S Beam 开关。 选择一个文件,将设备的背面与其他设备的背面靠在一起,然后点击您设备的屏 幕。 如果两个设备尝试同时发送数据,文件传输将会失败。77 媒体 音乐播放器 使用此应用程序以收听音乐。 在应用程序屏幕上点击音乐播放器。 • 不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备的软件版本。 • 取决于所使用的编码方式,有些文件可能无法正确播放。 播放音乐 选择音乐类别,然后选择要播放的歌曲。 打开播放列表。 跳至下一首歌曲。点住向前 快进。 暂停和继续播放。 调整音量。 打开音乐广场。 更改重放模式。 重新当前播放的歌曲或跳至 上一首歌曲。点住向后 快退。 打开随机播放。 选择音效。媒体 78 将歌曲设置为铃声 如欲将当前播放的歌曲设置为铃声,点击 → 设定为 → 手机铃声。 创建播放列表 选择自己的歌曲。 点击播放列表,然后点击 → 新建播放列表。输入标题并点击确定。点击添加音 乐,选择要包括的歌曲,然后点击完成。 如欲将当前播放的歌曲添加到播放列表,点击 → 添加到播放列表。 按心情播放音乐 播放按心情分组的音乐。播放列表由设备自动创建。添加新歌曲时,点击音乐广场 → → 音乐库更新。 点击音乐广场,然后选择一种心情。 照相机 使用此应用程序以拍摄照片或录像。 使用相册查看通过设备照相机拍摄的照片和录像。(第 85 页) 在应用程序屏幕上点击照相机。 不在使用时,照相机会自动关闭。 照相机使用规范 • 未经他人允许,请勿拍摄其照片或录像。 • 请勿在法律禁止的地方拍摄照片或录像。 • 请勿在可能侵犯他人隐私的场合拍摄照片或录像。媒体 79 拍照 拍摄照片 点击预览屏幕上的图像,此时照相机应已对焦。对准拍摄对象后。对焦框将会变 绿。点击 拍摄照片。点住 拍摄一系列照片。 指出使用中的存储 设备。 在静像和录像模式 之间切换。 打开图片浏览器显 示照片。 在前置照相机和后 置照相机之间 切换。 更改闪光灯设定。 更改拍摄模式。 在各种可用的效果 之间选择。 更改照相机设定。 场景模式 预先定义的设置让您在拍摄照片时可以做到对准即拍。 点击 → 场景模式。 • 肖像:使用此设置拍摄人物。 • 风景:使用此设置拍摄视野较宽的场景。 • 运动:使用此设置拍摄快速移动的对象。 • 宴会/室内:使用此设置拍摄光线良好的室内场景。 • 海滩/雪景:使用此设置拍摄光线良好或阳光明媚的户外场景。媒体 80 • 日落:使用此设置可以使颜色更丰富、对比度更锐利。 • 黎明:使用此设置可以获得非常细微的颜色。 • 秋色:使用此设置拍摄背景偏红的风景。 • 文本:使用此设置拍摄书籍或海报。 • 烛火:使用此设置拍摄在黑暗的背景中透出亮光的图像。 拍摄模式 具有几种照片效果可供使用,例如卡通渲染。 点击 → 拍摄模式。 • 正常拍摄:拍摄单张照片。 • 优选拍摄:拍摄一系列照片,然后储存最佳的一张。 • 面部优选:使用此功能可同时拍摄多张群组照片并将其合并到一起以创建最佳 的图像。 点击 以拍摄多张照片。如欲获得最佳照片,在拍照时端稳相机并保持静 止。相册开启时,点击每个脸孔上的黄框,然后为该拍摄对象选择最佳个人姿 势。为各个人选择姿势后,点击储存以将图像合并成一张照片,然后储存。 • 人脸识别:设定设备识别人脸并帮助您拍摄他们的照片。 • 全景拍摄:拍摄一张由多张照片串在一起合成的照片。 • 共享拍摄:通过直接 Wi-Fi 将照片直接发送至另一设备。 • HDR:使用此选项以拍摄具有增强对比度的照片。原图和补偿后的照片均会储 存。 • 好友照片共享:将设备设定为识别照片中标记的人脸并将其发送给此人。取决 于脸部的角度、脸部大小、肤色、脸部表情、光照条件或主体配戴的饰品,面 部识别功能可能会失败。 • 美肌:拍摄人脸加亮的照片以获得更柔和的图像。 • 笑脸拍摄:照相机等待主体微笑再拍照。 • 低灯光:拍摄一系列照片并将它们合成为一张照片以改善图像质量。媒体 81 全景照片 全景照片是一种包含多张照片的宽幅横向图像。 点击 → 拍摄模式 → 全景拍摄。 点击 并向任意方向移动照相机。蓝框与取景器对齐时,照相机将自动以全景 序列拍摄另一张照片。如欲停止拍摄,再次点击 。 拍摄录像 拍摄录像 将静态-录像开关滑向录像图标,然后点击 拍摄录像。如欲暂停录制,点击 。如欲停止录制,点击 。 录制时可使用以下操作: • 如欲更改对焦,点击您要对焦的任意位置。如欲对焦屏幕中央,选择 。 • 如欲在录制时从录像截取一幅图像,选择 。防震功能启动时,此功能将无法 使用。 如果使用最大分辨率进行视频录制,可能无法使用缩放功能。媒体 82 录制模式 在前置照相机和后 置照相机之间 切换。 更改闪光灯设定。 更改录制模式。 在各种可用的效果 之间选择。 更改照相机设定。 指出使用中的存储 设备。 在静像和录像模式 之间切换。 打开视频播放器播 放视频。 点击 更改录制模式。 • 正常:使用此模式获得一般质量。 • 彩信限制:使用此模式降低质量以便通过讯息发送。 • 慢动作:使用此模式拍摄移动主体的录像。设备将以慢动作播放录像。 • 快动作:使用此模式拍摄移动主体的录像。设备将以快动作播放录像。 放大和缩小媒体 83 使用以下方法之一: • 使用音量键可放大或缩小。 • 在屏幕上两指张开进行放大,两指合拢进行缩小。 • 如果使用最大分辨率进行录制,可能无法使用缩放功能。 • 放大/缩小效果适用于在拍摄录像的情况下使用缩放功能时。 配置照相机的设置 点击 配置照相机的设置。并非所有以下选项都适用于照相机和摄像机模式。可 用的选项可能会因使用的模式而异。 • 编辑快捷方式:重新整理常用选项的快捷方式。 • 急速连拍:拍摄一系列移动主体的照片。 • 使用音量键作为:设定为使用音量键来控制快门或变焦功能。 • 自拍:拍摄自己的照片。 • 自拍:拍摄自己的录像。 • 闪光灯:启动或取消闪光灯。 • 拍摄模式:更改拍摄模式。 • 录制模式:更改录制模式。 • 效果:在各种可用的照片效果之间选择。 • 场景模式:更改场景模式。 • 曝光值:此值确定相机传感器接收的光线量。对于弱光条件,使用更高的曝 光。 • 聚焦模式:选择聚焦模式。自动对焦由照相机控制。微距适用于非常近的拍摄 对象。 • 定时器:使用此选项进行延时拍摄。 • 分辨率:选择分辨率。分辨率越高,质量越高。但占用内存更多。媒体 84 • 白平衡:选择适当的白平衡,以使图像具有逼真的颜色范围。此设置专为特定 的光照条件设计。这些设置类似于专业照相机中对应于白平衡曝光的热量范 围。 • 感光度:选择 ISO 值。此值用于控制照相机感光度。它以胶片相机的当量衡 量。对静止不动或亮度较高的对象使用较低的值。对快速移动或亮度较低的对 象使用较高的值。 • 测光:选择测光方法。此选项用于确定如何计算光照值。中心重点测光测量场 景中央的背景光线。点测量指定位置的光线值。矩阵取整个场景的平均值。 • 户外能见度:在明亮的户外环境使用此选项。 • 自动调整对比度:设定照相机使用自动调整对比度。自动调整对比度会定义对 比度级别,而无需手动输入。 • 构图线:显示取景器指南以便在选择主体时帮助取景。 • 自动共享拍摄:设定为将您的设备背面与另一个已启用 NFC 的设备触碰并点击 您设备的屏幕时自动启动直接 Wi-Fi 并切换至共享拍摄模式。 • 防抖动:启动或取消防震。防震有助于在照相机移动时进行对焦。 • GPS标签:将 GPS 位置标签附加至照片。 • 如欲改善 GPS 信号,请避免在信号受阻的条件下拍摄,如建筑物之间、 低洼之处或者天气条件恶劣时。 • 您的位置可能会在您将照片上传到互联网时显示在照片上。如欲避免这种 情况,取消 GPS 标签设置。 • 扩展文件名:设定照相机显示上下文标签。 • 使用语音拍照:设定照相机使用语音命令拍照。 • 另存为翻版:反转图像以创建原始场景的镜像。 • 图像质量:图像质量越高,所需的存储空间越多。媒体 85 • 视频质量:设定视频的质量级别。 • 存储器:选择存储位置。 • 重置:重置照相机设置。 快捷方式 重新整理快捷方式以便于访问照相机的各种选项。 点击 → 编辑快捷方式。 点住某一选项并将其拖至屏幕左侧的空位。其他图标可通过点击并拖放来在列表内 移动。 相册 使用此应用程序以查看图片和视频。 在应用程序屏幕上点击相册。 • 不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备上安装的软件。 • 有些文件可能无法正常播放,具体取决于文件编码的方式。 查看图像 启动相册显示可用的文件夹。当另一个应用程序 (例如电子邮件) 储存图像时, 设备将自动创建下载文件夹以包含该图像。类似地,捕获截屏时将自动创建 Screenshots 文件夹。选择文件夹以将其打开。 在文件夹中,图像将按创建日期显示。选择要以全屏查看的图像。 向左或向右滚动以查看下一个或上一个图像。媒体 86 放大和缩小 使用以下方法之一放大图像: • 在任何位置双击放大。 • 在任何位置分开两指进行放大。合拢进行缩小,或双击恢复。 使用动作功能查看图像 使用动作功能以执行特定动作的功能。 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 动作,向右拖动动作开关,然后勾选功能。 如欲使用动作功能,向左拖动动作开关。 如欲为各动作功能设定灵敏度,点击高级设置,选择功能,然后使用可调整的滑 块。 播放视频 视频文件在预览上显示 图标。选择要观看的视频并点击 ,此时视频播放器将 会启动。 编辑图像 查看图像时,点击 并使用以下功能: • 幻灯片:开始以幻灯片形式放映当前文件夹中的图像。 • 脸部标记:将图片中的脸孔注册为脸部标签。 • 标记小帮手:设定照相机显示上下文标签。 • 添加天气标签:添加天气标签。 • 图片备注 ( 正面 ):使用此选项以在图片下编写便笺。编辑后的图片将储存在 photonote 文件夹中。 • 图片备注 ( 背面 ):使用此选项以在图片背面编写便笺。点击 以编辑备注。 • 复制至剪贴板:复制至剪贴板。 • 向左旋转:逆时针旋转。 • 向右旋转:顺时针旋转。 • 裁剪:调整要裁剪的橙色边框的大小并储存此框内的图像。媒体 87 • 编辑:启动 Paper Artist 或图片编辑器编辑图片。 • 设定为:将图像设定为墙纸或联系人图像。 • 好友照片共享:将图像发送给面部标记在图像中的人。 • 打印:通过 USB 或 Wi-Fi 连接打印。设备仅兼容于部分三星打印机。 • 重命名:重命名文件。 • 详情:查看图像详细信息。 收藏图像 查看图像时,点击 将图像添加到收藏夹列表。 删除图像 使用以下方法之一: • 在文件夹中,点击 → 选择项目,勾选图像,然后点击 。 • 查看图像时,点击 。 共享图像 使用以下方法之一: • 在文件夹中,点击 → 选择项目,勾选图像,然后点击 将其发送给其他 人。 • 查看图像时,点击 将其发送给其他人或通过社交网络服务进行共享。 设定为墙纸 查看图像时,点击 → 设定为将图像设定为墙纸或将其指定给联系人。媒体 88 标记脸孔 查看图像时,点击 → 脸部标记 → 开。识别出的脸孔周围将会出现黄色边框。 点击脸孔,点击添加名称,然后选择或添加联系人。 脸部标记出现在图像上时,点击脸部标记并使用可用的选项,例如拨打电话或发送 讯息。 取决于脸部的角度、脸部大小、肤色、脸部表情、光照条件或主体配戴的饰 品,面部识别功能可能会失败。 使用 Tag Buddy 查看图像时,点击 → 标记小帮手以在打开图像时显示上下文标签 (天气、位 置、日期和人名)。 Paper Artist 使用此应用程序以使图像看起来像具有趣味效果或相框的插图。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Paper Artist。 使用艺术工具编辑图像。编辑的图像将储存在相册 → Paper Pictures 文件夹中。 选择现有图像。 共享图像。 给图像应用效果。 更改笔厚度。 拍摄照片。 更改喷枪粗细。 储存图像。 给图像应用像框。 更改橡皮擦粗细。媒体 89 视频播放器 使用此应用程序以播放视频文件。 在应用程序屏幕上点击视频播放器。 • 避免播放 DivX 点播视像时锁定设备屏幕。播放 DivX 点播视像时屏幕每 锁定一次,可用的租金计数即会失去一次。 • 不支持某些文件格式,具体取决于设备的软件。 • 有些文件可能无法正常播放,具体取决于文件编码的方式。 播放视频 选择要播放的视频。 更改屏幕比率。 拖动横条快进或 快退。 捕捉图像。 重新启动当前的录 像或跳至上一个录 像。点住向后 快退。 跳至下一个录像。 点住向前快进。 调整音量。 缩小视频画面的 大小。 暂停和继续播放。 删除视频 点击 → 删除,勾选视频,然后点击删除。 共享视频 点击 → 共享通过,勾选视频,点击完成,然后选择共享方式。媒体 90 使用弹出式视频播放器 使用此功能以在不关闭视频播放器的情况下使用其他应用程序。观看视频时,点击 以使用弹出式播放器。 两指在屏幕上张开可放大播放器,合拢则可缩小。如欲移动播放器,将播放器拖至 另一位置。 YouTube 使用此应用程序以从 YouTube 网站观看视频。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 YouTube。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 观看视频 点击 ,然后输入关键字。选择返回的搜索结果之一观看视频。 将设备旋转至横向以显示全屏。 暂停或继续 播放。 拖动横条快进或 快退。 更改显示质量。 添加视频到播放 列表。 搜索视频。 将屏幕旋转至纵 向模式。 发送 URL 给其 他人。媒体 91 共享视频 选择要观看的视频,点击 ,然后选择共享方式。 上传视频 选择帐户,点击 ,选择视频,输入视频信息,然后点击 。 Flipboard 使用此应用程序以访问个性化杂志。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Flipboard。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 如欲启动 Flipboard,在问候页面上快速向上移动,点击立即开始,选择新闻标 题,然后点击完成。 选择封面故事或标题,快速移动查看 Flipboard 页面,然后选择要阅读的文章。 阅读文章时,可使用以下图标: • :转到上一页。 • :与他人共享文章。 • :查看他人对文章的评论。92 应用程序和媒体商店 Play 商店 使用此应用程序购买并下载能够在设备上运行的应用程序和游戏。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Play 商店。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 安装应用程序 按类别浏览应用程序,或点击 通过关键字搜索。 选择应用程序以查看信息。如欲下载,点击安装。如果应用程序需要付费,点击价 格,然后按照屏幕上的指示完成购买过程。 • 任何已安装的应用程序有新版可用时,屏幕顶部均会出现更新图标,提示 您进行更新。打开通知面板并点击图标以更新应用程序。 • 如欲安装从其他来源下载的应用程序,在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 安全 → 未知来源。 卸载应用程序 卸载从 Play 商店购买的应用程序。 点击 → 我的应用,在已安装应用程序列表中选择要删除的应用程序,然后点击 卸载。应用程序和媒体商店 93 Samsung Apps 使用此应用程序购买并下载专门的三星应用程序。有关详细信息,请访问 www.samsungapps.com。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Samsung Apps。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 如果未注册三星帐户,按照屏幕上的指示创建三星帐户。如欲完成订用过程,阅读 条款和条件,然后点击接受同意这些内容。 安装应用程序 按类别浏览应用程序。点击 选择类别。 如欲搜索应用程序,在屏幕顶部点击 ,然后在搜索字段中输入关键字。 选择应用程序以查看信息。如欲下载,点击下载。 任何已安装的应用程序有新版可用时,屏幕顶部均会出现更新图标,提示您 进行更新。打开通知面板并点击图标以更新应用程序。 S Suggest 使用此应用程序浏览并下载三星推荐的最新应用程序。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 S Suggest。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。应用程序和媒体商店 94 Game Hub 使用此应用程序访问游戏。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Game Hub。 向左或向右滚动并选择要从 Samsung Apps 下载的游戏。 Music Hub 使用此应用程序收听设备或由 Music Hub 提供的网络服务器上的歌曲以及购买歌 曲。 如果订阅 Music Hub 付费服务,则可享受可定制的服务,例如推荐歌曲或艺人、 无限歌曲串流及个性化电台。如欲了解更多详情,请点击帮助或访问 Music Hub 网站。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Music Hub。 此应用程序或此应用程序的某些功能可能无法使用,具体取决于所在的地区 或服务提供商。 与 Music Hub 音乐库同步歌曲 点击 My Music → → Refresh。Music Hub 音乐库将更新为设备上的最新音 乐。 如果 Music Hub 音乐库上的歌曲不在数据库中,Music Hub 会自动将歌曲上传到 数据库。 播放音乐 点击 My Music,选择音乐类别,然后选择要播放的歌曲。 如欲搜索并收听类似的音乐,点击 → Find similar music。应用程序和媒体商店 95 购买歌曲 点击 Store,然后选择类型 → 类别。点击 → Buy song,然后按照屏幕上的指 示完成购买过程。 Readers Hub 使用此应用程序下载和阅读电子书文件。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Readers Hub。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 选择类别,查看电子书文件,然后下载。 影视圈 使用此应用程序访问和购买视频。 在应用程序屏幕上点击影视圈。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 选择类别,然后选择视频。 学习圈 使用此应用程序访问学习材料。 在应用程序屏幕上点击学习圈。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 选择类别,然后选择视频课程或教材。96 实用程序 S Note 使用此应用程序以使用图像和录音创建便笺。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 S Note。 可以使用 S 笔打开 S Note。按下 S 笔的同时双击屏幕。 选择便笺模板 点击 并选择以下模板之一: • 注释/创意备注/备忘录:从空页面创建简单的便笺。 • 会议备注:创建会议、谈话或课堂的记录。 • 杂志:插入多媒体文件创建多媒体便笺。 • 日记:创建照片日记。 • 方案:创建您自己的食谱。 • 旅行:创建游记。 • 生日:创建生日贺卡。实用程序 97 撰写便笺 为当前便笺追加其他页面。 撤销和重做上一操作。 插入多媒体文件。 建立录音并插入。 画出便笺时记录您的操作。 擦除手写便笺。 仅使用 S 笔画图。 使用效率工具。 在预设网页上搜索有关手写 关键字的信息。 输入便笺。 草拟或画出便笺。 切换到查看模式。 草拟便笺时,点击 更改画笔类型,细条粗线或画笔颜色。 擦除手写便笺时,点击 更改橡皮擦粗细或清除便笺。 查看更多颜色。 更改线条粗细。 更改笔颜色。 更改笔类型。 将当前设定另存为笔配置。 通过捡色器添加新颜色。 如欲更改工作表背景,点击 → 更改背景。 如欲添加标签,点击 → 添加标签。实用程序 98 插入多媒体文件或录音 点击 以插入多媒体文件。点击 插入录音。 插入多媒体文件。 建立录音并插入。 使用效率工具 双击 并选择以下工具之一: • 形状匹配:转换画出的形状。 • 公式匹配:将手写公式转换为组织好的公式。点击搜索获得有关公式的详细信 息。 • 手写转化为文本:转换为手写便笺。 浏览便笺 向上或向下滚动浏览便笺缩略图。 如欲与三星帐户同步便笺,点击 → 刷新。 如欲按日期、标题或其他排列便笺,点击 → 排序方式。 如欲更改查看模式,点击 → 列表视图。 如欲通过导入 PDF、图像文件或便笺创建便笺,点击 → 导入。 如欲将便笺与 Google Docs 或 Evernote 同步,点击 → 同步。 如欲创建文件夹,点击 → 新建文件夹。 如欲改变便笺的顺序,点击 → 更改顺序。 如欲复制便笺,点击 → 复制。实用程序 99 如欲将便笺移至其他文件夹,点击 → 移动。 如欲更改 S Note 设定,点击 → 设定。 如欲查看 S Note 教程,点击 → 指南。 查看便笺 点击便笺缩略图将其打开。 如欲移至其他便笺页面,向左或向右滚动。 如欲创建便笺,点击 → 创建笔记。 如欲将便笺发送给其他人,点击 → 共享通过。 如欲将便笺另存为图像文件或 PDF 文件,点击 → 导出。 如欲添加或删除便笺,点击 → 编辑页面。 如欲删除便笺,点击 → 删除。 如欲添加标签,点击 → 添加标签。 如欲将便笺另存为事件,点击 → 新建事件。 如欲将便笺的快捷方式添加到主屏幕,点击 → 设置为快捷键。 如欲将便笺设定为墙纸或将其指定给联系人,点击 → 设定为。 如欲通过 USB 或 Wi-Fi 连接打印便笺,点击 → 打印。设备仅兼容于部分三星 打印机。 S日历 使用此应用程序管理事件和任务。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 S日历。 创建事件或任务 点击 ,然后使用以下方法之一: • Quick add:从备忘录创建事件或任务。此功能仅适用于英文和韩文。 • 添加事件:输入具有可选重复设置的事件。 • 添加任务:输入具有可选优先级设置的任务。实用程序 100 如欲更快添加事件或任务,点击日期进行选择,然后再次点击。 输入标题并指定要使用或同步的日历。然后点击编辑事件详情或编辑任务详情添加 更多详情,例如事件重复的频率、预先提示的时间或发生的地方。 附加显示事件位置的地图。在位置字段中输入位置,点击字段旁边的 ,然后点 住出现的地图,标出精确的位置。 从 S Note 附加备忘录。点击注释,然后撰写新的备忘录或选择现有备忘录之一。 附加图像。点击图片,然后拍摄照片或选择现有图像之一。 与 Google 日历同步 在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → Google (位于账户 → 谷歌帐户 → 同步日历 → 立即同步下)。如欲手动同步以便更新,在应用程序屏幕上,点击 S日历 → → 同步。 如欲在 Google 日历上显示同步的事件或任务,点击 → 设定 → 日历,选择谷 歌帐户,然后点击完成。实用程序 101 更改日历类型 点击 ,然后从不同的日历类型之间选择一种,包括年、月、周及其他。可以使用 合拢手势来更改日历类型。例如,合拢手指可以从月日历变为年日历,而分开手指 可以使年日历变回月日历。 搜索事件 点击 → 搜索,然后输入要搜索的关键字。 如欲查看当天的事件,点击屏幕顶部的今天。 删除事件 选择日期或事件,然后点击 → 删除。 共享事件 选择事件,点击 → 共享通过,然后选择共享方式。 Dropbox 使用此应用程序以储存并通过 Dropbox 云存储与他人共享文件。将文件储存到 Dropbox 时,设备将自动与网络服务器及其他已安装 Dropbox 的电脑同步。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Dropbox。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 首次运行 Dropbox 时,点击 Start 将其启动。按照屏幕上的指示完成设定。 如欲将文件上传到 Dropbox,点击 → Photos or videos 或 Otherfiles。 如欲打开 Dropbox 中的文件,点击 ,然后选择文件。查看文件时,点击 Favorite 将其添加到收藏夹列表。 如欲打开收藏的文件,点击 。实用程序 102 云 使用此功能以同步文件或通过三星帐户或 Dropbox 备份设定和应用程序数据。 在应用程序屏幕上点击设定 → 云。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无法使用。 与三星帐户同步 点击您的三星帐户或同步设置以同步文件。 备份或恢复数据 点击设备备份通过三星帐户备份或恢复数据。 与 Dropbox 同步 如果未设置帐户,点击设置账户,然后输入 Dropbox 帐户。按照屏幕上的指示完 成设定。 登录并点击 Allow 之后,无论您何时更改文件,设备都会自动与 Dropbox 同步文 件。实用程序 103 时钟 使用此应用程序以设置闹钟、查看世界任何地方的时间、测量活动的持续时间、设 置计时器或用作台钟。 在应用程序屏幕上点击时钟。 打开或关闭此闹钟。 闹钟 设置闹钟 点击创建闹钟,设置闹钟闹响的时间,选择闹钟重复的日子,然后点击储存。 使用以下选项: • 点击更多 → 位置闹钟以设置位置。闹钟仅在您位于该位置时闹响。 • 点击更多 → 多睡一会设置预设时间后闹钟重复闹响的间隔及次数。 • 点击更多 → 智能闹钟设置闹钟在预设时间之前闹响的时间。实用程序 104 停止闹钟 将 拖到圆周外面以停止闹钟。将 拖到圆周外面以在指定时间长度后重复闹 钟。 删除闹钟 点住闹钟,然后点击删除。 世界时间 创建时钟 点击添加城市,然后输入城市名称或从城市列表选择城市。 如欲应用夏令时间,点住时钟,然后点击夏时制设置。 删除时钟 点击 → 删除,选择时钟,然后点击删除。 秒表 点击开始为活动计时。点击计时记录单圈用时。 点击重置清除单圈时间记录。 计时器 设定持续时间,然后点击开始。 计时器开始计时时,将 拖到大圆外面。 桌面时钟 点击 以全屏查看。实用程序 105 计算器 使用此应用程序进行简单或复杂计算。 在应用程序屏幕上点击计算器。 旋转设备进入横屏方向以显示科学计算器。如果屏幕旋转关闭,点击 → 科学计 算器。 如欲查看计算历史记录,点击 隐藏键盘。 如欲清除历史记录,点击 → 清除历史记录。 如欲更改历史记录的字符大小,点击 → 文本大小。 如欲设定计算器以便于单手使用,点击 → 单手操作开启。 录音机 使用此应用程序以录制或播放语音备忘录。 在应用程序屏幕上点击录音机。 录制语音备忘录 点击 开始录制。对着设备底部的麦克风说话。点击 暂停录制。点击 完成 录制。 开始录制。 录制运行时间 显示语音备忘录列表。实用程序 106 播放语音备忘录 选择要播放的语音备忘录。 • :调整播放速度。 • :修剪语音备忘录。 • :向上或向下拖动音量条调整音量。 • :停止播放。 • :暂停播放。 如欲将语音备忘录发送给其他人,点击 → 共享通过,选择语音备忘录,点击完 成,然后选择共享方式。 管理语音备忘录 在语音备忘录列表中,点击 并选择以下选项之一: • 共享通过:选择共享方式,然后选择要发送的语音备忘录。 • 删除:选择要删除的语音备忘录。 • 设定:更改录音机设定。 • 结束:关闭录音机。 储存带上下文标签的文件 在语音备忘录列表中,点击 → 设定 → 扩展文件名 → 开。实用程序 107 S Voice 使用此应用程序以通过语音命令设备拨号、发送讯息、撰写备忘录等等。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 S Voice。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 以下是几个口头命令的示例: • 打开音乐 • 启动计算器 • 呼叫露露手机 • 拨打露露工作电话 • 查看日程 增强语音识别的提示 • 话音清晰。 • 在安静的地方讲话。 • 请勿使用冒犯性言语或俚语。 • 不要以方言口音讲话。 取决于您的环境或讲话的方式,设备可能无法识别您的命令或可能执行不必要的命 令。实用程序 108 Google 使用此应用程序不但可以搜索互联网,而且可以搜索设备上的应用程序及其内容。 在应用程序屏幕上点击 Google。 搜索设备 点击搜索字段,然后输入关键字。或者,点击 ,说出关键字,然后选择出现的建 议关键字之一。 如果未从应用程序返回结果,则会出现网络浏览器,上面显示搜索结果。 搜索范围 如欲选择要搜索的应用程序,点击 → 设置 → 手机搜索,然后勾选要搜索的项 目。 Google Now 启动 Google 搜索以查看 Google Now 卡,上面显示您可能最需要的当前天气、公 共交通信息、下一次约会等信息。 首次打开 Google 搜索时加入 Google Now。如欲更改 Google Now 设定,点击 → 设置 → Google Now。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无法使用。 语音搜索 使用此应用程序以通过说话来搜索网页。 在应用程序屏幕上点击语音搜索。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 请开始说话出现在屏幕上时,说出关键字或短语。选择出现的建议关键字之一。实用程序 109 我的文件 使用此应用程序以访问储存在设备中的所有类型的文件,包括图像、录像、歌曲和 声音片段。 在应用程序屏幕上点击我的文件。 查看文件 选择文件夹以将其打开。如欲返回至父文件夹,点击 。如欲返回根目录,点击 。 在文件夹中,点击 ,然后使用以下选项之一: • 新建文件夹:创建文件夹。 • 搜索:搜寻文件。 • 查看方式:更改查看方式。 • 排序通过:排列文件或文件夹。 • 设定:更改文件管理器设定。 • 全选:选择所有文件以便一次性应用相同的选项。 添加文件夹快捷方式 将常用文件夹的快捷方式添加至根目录。点击 → 添加快捷方式,输入快捷方式 名称,选择文件夹,然后点击完成。 下载 使用此应用程序以查看通过应用程序下载的文件。 在应用程序屏幕上点击下载。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 如欲查看从互联网下载的文件,点击互联网下载,否则点击其它下载查看从其他应 用程序下载的文件,例如电子邮件。 选择文件以通过适当的应用程序将其打开。110 旅行和本地资讯 地图 使用此应用程序以标出设备的位置、搜索地点或规划路线。 在应用程序屏幕上点击地图。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 查看地图 向任意方向滚动以查看位置或查找路线。 如欲放大或缩小地图,将两只手指在屏幕上分开进行放大,合拢进行缩小。 如欲叠加多个图层,包括卫星图、交通信息等等,点击 。 搜索位置 点击 ,输入地址,然后点击 。选择位置以查看详细位置信息。如欲搜索附近 的位置,点击 。 一旦找到位置,点击 并使用以下功能之一: • 清空结果:清除地图。 • 允许在离线状态下使用:储存特定区域的地图以便离线查看。 • 路线:获取位置的路线。 • 图层:覆盖多个图层,包括卫星图、交通信息等等。 • 设置:更改地图设定。 • 帮助:查看有关使用地图的信息。 如欲查看当前位置,点击 。旅行和本地资讯 111 获取目的地的路线 1 点击 。 2 点击 ,然后选择以下方法之一输入开始和结束位置: • 我当前所在的位置:使用当前位置作为开始位置。 • 联系人:从联系人列表中选择。 • 地图上的点:在地图上点击确定位置。 • 我的地点:从收藏地点列表中选择。 3 选择旅行方式,例如驾车、乘坐公共交通工具或步行,然后点击获取路线。 4 选择出现的路线之一,然后点击地图视图查看详细信息。 本地 使用此应用程序以搜索附近的酒店、银行、公共汽车站等等。 在应用程序屏幕上点击本地。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 选择地点类别,然后从搜索结果列表中选择地点。 • 地图:在地图上确定该地点位置。 • 路线:搜索前往该地点的路线。 • 致电:呼叫该地点的电话号码。 如欲添加地点类别,在类别列表上点击 → 添加搜索捷径,然后在文本字段中输 入搜索关键字。旅行和本地资讯 112 导航 使用此应用程序以搜索前往目的地的路线。 在应用程序屏幕上点击导航。 • 导航地图、您的当前位置及其他导航数据可能因实际位置信息而有所不 同。应始终注意路况、交通情况及任何其他可能影响您驾驶的因素。驾驶 时请遵守所有安全警告和规章制度。 • 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此应用程序可能无法使用。 可使用以下方法之一指定目的地: • 说出目的地地址。 • 输入目的地地址。 • 从联系人列表选择目的地地址。 • 从带星号标记的地点列表选择目的地。 一旦找到路线,按照屏幕上的指示导航至目的地。113 设定 关于设定 使用此应用程序以配置设备,设定应用程序选项及添加帐户。 在应用程序屏幕上点击设定。 Wi-Fi 启动 Wi-Fi 功能以连接至 Wi-Fi 网络并访问互联网或其他网络设备。 如欲使用选项,点击 。 • 高级设定:自定义 Wi-Fi 设定。 • WPS推送按钮:通过 WPS 按钮连接至安全 Wi-Fi 网络。 • WPS PIN 条目:通过 WPS PIN 连接至安全 Wi-Fi 网络。 设定 Wi-Fi 休眠政策 在设定屏幕上,点击 Wi-Fi → → 高级设定 → 睡眠期间保持 Wi-Fi 开启。 进入省电模式时,设备将自动关闭 Wi-Fi 连接。当上述情况发生时,如果已 设定设备使用数据网络,则会自动进入数据网络。这可能会产生数据传输费 用。如欲避免产生数据使用费用,将此选项设定为总是。 设定网络通知 设备可以检测开放 Wi-Fi 网络并在有网络可用时在状态栏上显示图标。 在设定屏幕上,点击 Wi-Fi → → 高级设定,然后勾选网络通知以启动此功能。设定 114 蓝牙 启动蓝牙功能以在近距离内交换信息。 数据使用 记录数据使用量及自定义限制设定。 • 移动数据:设定为使用任何移动网络上的数据连接。 • 设置移动数据限制:设定使用移动数据的限制。 • 数据使用周期:输入按月重置日期以监控数据使用情况。 如欲使用更多选项,点击 。 • 数据漫游:设定为在漫游时使用数据连接。 • 限制背景数据:设定为在使用移动网络时关闭背景中的同步功能。 • 自动同步数据:设定设备自动同步联系人、日历、电邮、和社交网络图像数 据。 • 显示Wi-Fi使用量:设定为显示通过 Wi-Fi 的数据使用量。 • 移动热点:搜索和使用另一设备的移动网络。 更多设置 自定义设定以控制与其他设备或网络的连接。 飞行模式 此选项将关闭设备上的所有无线功能。仅能使用非网络服务。设定 115 移动网络 • 移动数据:用于允许使用网络服务的分组交换数据网络。 • 数据漫游:将设备用于在漫游时或本地网络不可用时连接到其他网络。 • 接入点名称:设定接入点名称 (APN)。 • 网络模式:选择网络类型。 • 网络运营商:搜索可用网络并选择漫游网络。 网络分享和便携式热点 • 便携式Wi-Fi热点:使用便携式 Wi-Fi 热点,通过 Wi-Fi 网络与电脑或其他设备 共享设备的移动网络连接。 • USB网络分享:使用 USB 网络分享,通过 USB 与电脑共享设备的移动网络连 接。连接到电脑后,设备被用作电脑的无线调制解调器。 • 蓝牙网络分享:使用蓝牙网络分享,通过蓝牙与电脑共享设备的移动网络连 接。 • 帮助:了解关于 USB、Wi-Fi 和蓝牙网络分享的更多信息。 VPN 设定和连接至虚拟专用网络 (VPN)。 NFC • NFC:启动 NFC 功能以读取或写入包含信息的 NFC 标签。 • Android 传送:打开Android Beam 功能以将网页和联系人等数据发送至已启 用 NFC 的设备。 S Beam 启动 S Beam 功能以将音乐、视频、图像和文档等数据发送至支持 NFC 和直接 Wi-Fi 的设备。设定 116 附近的设备 • 文件共享:启动媒体共享以允许其他 DLNA认证设备访问本设备上的媒体。 • 共享内容:设定为与其他设备共享您的内容。 • 设备名称:输入设备的媒体服务器名称。 • 已允许的设备列表:查看允许访问您设备的设备列表。 • 不允许的设备列表:查看阻止访问您设备的设备列表。 • 下载到:选择用于储存媒体文件的内存位置。 • 从其它设备上传:设定为接受从其他设备上传。 AllShare Cast 启动AllShare Cast 功能并与他人共享显示屏。 KIES 通过Wi-Fi 通过 Wi-Fi 网络将设备连接至 Samsung Kies。 主屏模式 选择主屏模式 (基本或简易)。 阻止模式 选择功能并将设备设定为隐藏或显示其通知图标一段指定时间。设定 117 声音 更改设备上的各种声音设定。 • 音量:调整所有通话铃声、音乐和视频、系统声音和通知的音量。 • 振动强度:调整振动通知的强度。 • 设备铃声:选择来电提示铃声。 • 设备振动:添加或选择振动模式。 • 默认通知:选择新讯息、未接来电和闹钟等事件的铃声。 • 铃响时振动:设定设备在来电时振动并播放铃声。 • 按键声音:设定设备在点击键盘上的按键时发出声音。 • 触摸声音:设定设备在选择触摸屏上的应用程序或选项时发出声音。 • 屏幕锁定声音:设定设备在锁定或解锁触摸屏时发出声音。 • 触觉反馈:设定设备在触摸按键时振动。 显示 更改显示设定。 • 墙纸: – 主屏:为主屏幕选择一张背景图片。 – 锁定屏幕:为锁定屏幕选择一张背景图片。 – 主屏幕与锁定屏幕:为主屏幕和锁定屏幕选择一张背景图片。 • LED 指示灯: – 充电:设定为在电池充电时打开通知指示灯。 – 电量低:设定为在电池电量低时打开通知指示灯。 – 通知:设定为在有未接来电、新讯息或通知时打开通知指示灯。 – 语音录制:设定为在录制语音备忘录时打开通知指示灯。设定 118 • 通知面板:自定义出现在通知面板上的项目。 • 多窗口:设定为使用多窗口。 • 扩展页面:设定设备基于您的操作打开上下文页面。 • 屏幕模式:选择显示模式。 – 动态:使用此模式以使显示色调更鲜艳。 – 标准:使用此模式呈现普通环境。 – 天然:使用此模式以使显示色调类似于电视。 – 电影:使用此模式以处理昏错的环境,例如在黑暗的房间内。 • 亮度:设定显示屏的亮度。 • 自动旋转屏幕:设定内容在转动设备时自动旋转。 • 屏幕自动关闭:设定关闭显示屏背景灯前设备等待的时间长度。 • 智能旋转:设定界面不按照脸孔的方向旋转。 • Smart stay:设定为避免在您看显示屏时关闭显示屏背景灯。 • 字体风格:更改用于显示文本的字体类型。 • 字体大小:更改字体大小。 • 点击按键灯持续时间:设定触摸按键背光亮起的持续时间。 • 显示电池电量百分比:设定为查看剩余的电池寿命。 • 自动调节屏幕色调:设定以通过调节显示屏的亮度来节约能源。 存储 查看设备和存储卡的存储信息或格式化存储卡。 格式化存储卡将永久删除卡中的所有数据。 由于操作系统和默认应用程序占用部分内存,因此实际的可用内存容量会少 于指定的容量。设定 119 省电模式 启动省电模式并更改省电模式的设定。 • CPU 节电:设定设备限制某些系统资源使用。 • 屏幕节电:设定设备降低显示屏的亮度。 • 背景颜色:设定设备降低电邮和互联网背景颜色的亮度。 • 关闭触觉反馈:设定设备关闭触摸按键时振动。 • 了解节电模式:了解如何减少电池消耗。 电池 查看设备所消耗的电池电量。 应用程序管理器 查看和管理设备上的应用程序。 定位服务 • 使用无线网络:设定为使用 Wi-Fi 和/或移动网络查找当前位置。 • 使用GPS卫星:设定为使用 GPS 卫星查找当前位置。 • 位置和 Google 搜索:设定为将当前位置用于 Google 搜索和其他 Google 服 务。设定 120 锁定屏幕 更改用于确保设备安全的设定。 • 屏幕锁定:启动屏幕锁定功能。 • 锁屏选项:更改锁定屏幕的设定。这些设定仅在设定滑锁选项时适用。 – 快捷键:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示和编辑应用程序快捷方式。 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商,此功能可能无法使用。 – 信息标签:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示新闻和股票资讯。 – 时钟:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示时钟。 – 双时钟:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示双时钟。 – 天气:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示天气资讯并更改天气显示的设定。 – 涟漪效果:设定为在锁定屏幕上显示涟漪效果。 – 墨水效果:更改颜色以获得水墨效果。 – 帮助文本:设定设备以在锁定屏幕上显示帮助文本。 – 照相机快速访问:设定设备在屏幕锁定时通过点住屏幕并旋转设备来启动照 相机。 – 在锁屏唤醒:设定设备在屏幕锁定时识别唤醒命令。 – 设置唤醒命令:设定唤醒命令以启动 S Voice 或执行指定功能。 • 在锁定屏幕上的提笔速记:设定为在按下 S 笔按钮的同时,双击锁定屏幕时启 动 S Note。 • 所有者信息:输入在锁定屏幕上显示的信息。设定 121 安全 更改设定以确保设备和 SIM 或 USIM 卡。 • 加密设备:设定密码以加密储存在设备上的数据。每次开机时都必须输入密 码。 启用此设定之前,应先为电池充电,因为加密数据可能需要超过一个小时。 • 加密外置 SD 卡: – 加密:设定为在将文件储存至存储卡时加密文件。 – 全卡加密:设定为加密存储卡上的所有文件。 – 不包括多媒体文件:设定为加密存储卡上除媒体文件外的所有文件。 如果在将设备重置为出厂默认值之前启用了此设定,设备将无法读取加密的 文件。重置设备前禁用此设定。 • 远程控制:设定为允许通过互联网远程控制遗失或被盗的设备。如欲使用此功 能,必须登录您的三星帐户。 – 账户注册:添加或查看您的三星帐户。 – 使用无线网络:设定为允许收集位置数据,并允许通过 Wi-Fi 和移动网络确 定遗失或被盗设备的位置。 • SIM卡更换警告:启动查找我的设备功能。 • 查找我的手机网页:访问 SamsungDive 网站 (www.samsungdive.com)。可以 在 SamsungDive 网站上跟踪和控制遗失或被盗的设备。 • 设置 SIM 卡锁: – 锁定SIM卡:启动或取消 PIN 码锁功能;该功能要求在使用设备前提供 PIN 码。 – 更改 SIM 卡的 PIN 码:更改用于访问 SIM 或 USIM 卡数据的 PIN 码。 • 使密码可见:默认情况下,设备隐藏密码以确保安全。设定设备以在输入密码 时进行显示。设定 122 • 设备管理器:查看设备上安装的设备管理员。可允许设备管理员为设备应用新 策略。 • 未知来源:选择以从任何来源安装应用程序。若未选择,则只能从 Play 商店下 载应用程序。 • 信任的证书:使用证书和凭证以确保安全使用各个应用程序。 • 从设备存储空间安装:安装储存在 USB 存储设备上的加密证书。 • 清除证书:删除设备中的凭证内容,并重设密码。 单手操作 启动单手操作模式以便于单手使用设备。 语言和输入 更改文本输入设定。 语言 选择所有功能表和应用程序的显示语言。 默认 选择默认的键盘类型进行文本输入。设定 123 Google 语音输入 如欲更改语音输入设定,点击 。 • 选择输入语言:选择用于输入文本的输入语言。 • 屏蔽不文明的字词:设定为阻止设备识别语音输入中的冒犯性用语。 • 下载离线语音识别包:下载和安装语言数据以供离线语音输入使用。 三星键盘 如欲更改三星键盘设定,点击 。 • 纵向键盘类型:更改键盘布局。 • 输入语言:选择文本输入的语言。 • 预测文本:启动预测文本模式以根据您的输入预测单词并显示单词建议。也可 自定义单词预测设定。 • 连续输入:设定为在键盘上滑动输入文本。 • 光标控制:启动或关闭智能键盘导航功能以通过滚动键盘移动光标。 • 笔检测:启动或关闭智能键盘导航功能以通过滚动键盘移动光标。 • 单手操作:将键盘设定为在屏幕的任一侧出现,以方便您用一只手输入文本。 • 手写:自定义手写模式的设定,例如识别时间、笔粗细或线条颜色。设定 124 • 高级设定: – 自动大写:设定设备将句号、问号或感叹号等标点符号后面的第一个字符自 动转为大写。 – 自动添加标点:设定设备在双击空格键时插入句号。 – 字符预览:设定设备为点击的每个字母显示大图。 – 按键振动:设定设备在触碰按键时振动。 – 按键声音:设定设备在触碰按键时发出声音。 • 指南:了解如何使用三星键盘输入文本。 • 重置设置:重置三星键盘设定。 语音搜索 • 语言:选择用于语音识别的语言。 • 语音输出:设定设备提供语音反馈以提示当前操作。 • 屏蔽不文明的字词:隐藏语音搜索结果中的冒犯性用语。 • 下载离线语音识别包:下载和安装语言数据以供离线语音输入使用。 文字转语音输出 • 首选 TTS 引擎:选择语音合成引擎。如欲更改语音合成引擎的设定,点击 。 • 语速:选择文字转语音功能的语速。 • 收听实例:收听作为示例的语音文字。 • 驾驶模式:启动驾驶模式以将设备设定为读出内容并指定要在驾驶模式中使用 的应用程序。设定 125 指针速度 调整连接至设备的鼠标或触控板的指针速度。 云 更改用于与三星帐户或 Dropbox 云存储同步数据或文件的设定。 备份并重置 更改用于管理设定和数据的设定。 • 备份我的数据:设定为将设定和应用程序数据备份至 Google 服务器。 • 备份账户:设定或编辑 Google 备份帐户。 • 自动恢复:设定为在设备上重新安装应用程序时恢复设定和应用程序数据。 • 恢复出厂设定:将设定重设为出厂默认值并删除所有数据。 添加账户 添加电邮或社交网络服务帐户。 动作 启动动作功能和更改动作识别的设定。 • 快速一览:设定用手在屏幕上方的感应器上移过以打开触摸屏并显示信息,例 如通知、未接来电、新讯息、时间和日期、设备状态等等。 • 体感拨号:设定为在查看通话、讯息或联系人详细信息时,通过拿起并将设备 靠近耳朵来拨打语音通话。设定 126 • 智能提示:设定设备在您拿起设备时提示有未接来电或新讯息。 • 双击转至顶部:设定为在双击设备时移至联系人列表或电子邮件的顶部。 • 倾斜以缩放:设定设备在查看相册中的图像或浏览网页时,用手指点住两个 点,然后来回倾斜设备进行放大或缩小。 • 摇动以移动图标:设定为在点住项目,然后将设备滑向左侧或右侧时将项目移 至另一页。 • 平移设备以浏览图片:设定为在图像放大时,朝任意方向移动设备以滚动查看 图像。 • 晃动以更新:设定设备通过晃动来搜索蓝牙设备。 • 翻转以静音/暂停:设定为通过将设备翻转来关闭来电、闹钟和音乐的声音。 • 高级设置: – 快速一览:选择要在用手移过距离/光传感器时显示在快速一览屏幕上的项 目。 – 陀螺仪校准:校准回转仪,使设备能够正确识别旋转。 • 校准时将设备置于稳定表面上。如果设备振动或移动,校准过程可能会 失败。 • 在使用倾斜或移动动作或启用了动作的游戏时感到漂移或意外移动,校 准回转仪。 – 灵敏度设置:调整各个动作的反应速度。 • 了解动作:查看控制动作的教程。 • 手掌滑动以捕捉:设定为用手在屏幕上向左或向右擦动时捕捉屏幕图像。 • 手掌触摸以静音/暂停:设定为在用手掌触摸屏幕时暂停媒体播放声音。 • 了解手部动作:查看控制手部动作的教程。设定 127 S Pen 更改使用 S 笔的设定。 • 惯用手:选择用于书写的手以增强 S 笔输入。 • 插入/拨出手写笔声音:设定设备在插入 S 笔或从插槽拔出笔时发出的声音。 • 开启提笔速记:设定为从插槽拔出 S 笔时启动快捷便笺。 • 省电模式:设定屏幕在插入或拔出 S 笔时不作出响应。 • 手写笔防丢失提醒:设定设备在触摸屏关闭且 S 笔未附加在设备上时,若设备 移动,则显示弹出式提示并发出声音。 • 浮窗预览:设定为在 S 笔悬停在屏幕上时显示 S 笔指针。 • 声音和触觉反馈:设定设备在手写笔悬停在文件、主题或选项上时发出声音并 振动。 • 快捷命令设置:配置快捷命令的设定。 • S Pen 帮助:访问有关使用 S 笔的帮助信息。 配件 更改配件设定。 • 底座声音:设定设备以在设备连接至或从台式底座移除时播放声音。 • 音频输出模式:设定为当设备连接至台式底座时,可使用底座扬声器。 • 桌面主屏幕显示:设定设备在设备连接至台式底座时显示台钟。 • 音频输出:选择要在设备连接至 HDMI 设备时使用的声音输出格式。有些设备 可能不支持环绕声设定。设定 128 日期和时间 访问并变更以下设定以控制设备如何显示时间和日期。 如果电池电量完全耗尽或已从设备中取下,时间和日期将会重置。 • 自动日期和时间:跨越时区时自动更新时间和日期。 • 设置日期:手动设置当前日期。 • 设置时间:手动设置当前时间。 • 自动时区:设定为在跨时区旅行时从网络接收时区信息。 • 选择时区:设定本地时区。 • 使用24小时制:以 24 小时制显示时间。 • 选择日期格式:选择日期格式。 辅助功能 辅助工具服务是一些专为身体某一部位有缺陷的人士设计的特殊功能。访问并提示 以下设定以改善设备的可访问性。 • 自动旋转屏幕:设定界面在您旋转设备时自动旋转。 • 屏幕自动关闭:设定关闭显示屏背景灯前设备等待的时间长度。 • 说出密码:设定设备大声读出通过 Talkback 输入的密码。 • 接听/结束通话: – 应答键:设定设备在按下主页键时接听来电。 – 电源键结束通话:设定设备在按下电源开关键时结束通话。 • 辅助功能快捷方式:向快速功能表上的辅助功能 (按住电源开关键时会出现) 添 加快捷方式。设定 129 • TalkBack:启动提供语音反馈的 Talkback。 • 字体大小:更改字体大小。 • 负色:反转显示颜色以提高可见度。 • 文字转语音输出: – 首选 TTS 引擎:选择语音合成引擎。如欲更改语音合成引擎的设定,点击 。 – 语速:选择文字转语音功能的语速。 – 收听实例:收听作为示例的语音文字。 – 驾驶模式:启动驾驶模式以将设备设定为读出内容并指定要在驾驶模式中使 用的应用程序。 • 改进网络辅助设置:设定应用程序并安装网络脚本以使其网络内容更易于访 问。 • 声音平衡:调整使用双耳机时的声音均衡。 • 单声道音频:使用一只耳塞收听音频时,启用单声道声音。 • 关闭所有声音:关闭所有设备声音。 • 闪烁通知:设定闪光灯以在有未接电话、新讯息或通知时闪烁。 • 按住延迟:设定点住屏幕的识别时间。 开发者选项 更改应用程序开发的设定。 • 桌面备份密码:设定密码以保护备份数据。 • 保持唤醒:设定屏幕在为电池充电时保持开启。 • 保护 SD 卡:设定为从存储卡读取数据时请求确认。 • USB调试:启动 USB 调试模式以通过 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。 • 允许模拟位置:允许将模拟位置和服务资讯发送至位置管理服务以进行测试。 • 选择待调式的应用程序:选择应用程序进行调试并避免暂停调试时发生错误。设定 130 • 等待调试程序:设定为阻止在调试程序就绪前加载选定的应用程序。 • 显示触摸位置:设定在您触摸屏幕时显示指针。 • 显示指针位置:设定在您触摸屏幕时显示指针的座标和轨迹。 • 显示布局边界:设定为显示边界。 • 显示 GPU 视图更新:设定为通过 GPU 更新屏幕区域时闪现更新区域。 • 显示屏幕更新:设定在屏幕区域有更新时闪现更新区域。 • 窗口动画比例:选择打开和关闭弹出窗口的速度。 • 过渡动画比例:选择屏幕切换的速度。 • 动画影像时间伸缩效果:选择弹出窗口显示的时间长度。 • 禁用硬件叠加:设定为隐藏硬件叠加。 • 强制 GPU 渲染:设定为使用 2D 硬件加速以增强图形性能。 • 严格模式:设定设备以在应用程序长时间运行时使屏幕闪光。 • 显示 CPU 使用情况:设定为列出所有活动进程。 • GPU 显示配置文件:设定为检查 GPU 渲染时间。 • 启用轨迹:设定为捕捉应用程序和系统性能的轨迹。 • 不保留活动:设定设备在启动新应用程序时结束运行中的应用程序。 • 限制后台进程:设定设备限制后台运行的进程数。 • 显示全部ANR:设定设备在有后台运行的应用程序没有响应时提醒您。 关于设备 访问设备信息,更新设备软件。131 故障排除 开启或使用设备时,设备提示您输入以下代码之一: • 密码:如果启动了设备锁定功能,则必须输入为设备设置的密码。 • PIN 码:首次使用设备或启用要求提供 PIN 码时,必须输入随 SIM 或 USIM 卡提供的 PIN 码。使用锁定 SIM 卡功能表可关闭该功能。 • PUK:如果 SIM 或 USIM 卡被锁,通常是因为 PIN 码多次输错所致。如欲解 锁,必须输入服务提供商提供的 PUK 码。 • PIN2:当访问要求输入 PIN2 码的功能表时,必须输入随 SIM 或 USIM 卡提供 的 PIN2 码。有关详细信息,请联系服务提供商。 设备显示网络或服务错误 • 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时,设备可能无法接收讯号。请移至其他地方 后再试。 • 如果未开通服务,某些选项无法使用。请联系服务提供商以了解更多详细信 息。 触摸屏反应缓慢或无法正常反应 如果设备具有触摸屏并且触摸屏无法正常反应,请尝试以下操作: • 取下触摸屏的任何保护性外盖。保护性外盖可能会阻止设备识别输入,我们不 推荐触摸屏设备使用保护性外盖。 • 点击触摸屏时请确保手掌干燥且干净。 • 重新启动设备以清除任何暂时性软件错误。 • 确保设备软件已升级到最新版本。 • 如果触摸屏受到刮擦或损坏,请将其送至当地的三星服务中心。故障排除 132 设备冻结或出现致命错误 如果设备死机或挂断,则可能需要关闭部分程序或重置设备才能恢复正常。如果设 备死机和没有响应,紧按住电源开关键 8-10 秒。设备自动重启。 如果还是无法解决问题,请将设备重置至出厂状态。在应用程序屏幕上,点击设定 → 备份并重置 → 恢复出厂设定 → 重置设备 → 全部删除。 通话掉线 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时,网络连接可能会断开。请移至其他地方后再 试。 拨出呼叫无法接通 • 确保已按下拨号键。 • 确保已进入正确的蜂窝网络。 • 确保未对拨打的电话号码设置呼叫限制。 呼入电话无法接通 • 确保设备已开机。 • 确保已进入正确的蜂窝网络。 • 确保未对该呼入电话号码设置呼叫限制。 通话时对方无法听到您的声音 • 确保未遮住内置话筒。 • 确保话筒靠近您的嘴部。 • 如果使用耳机,请确保耳机连接正确。故障排除 133 声音质量差 • 确保未挡住设备的内置天线。 • 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时,设备可能无法接收讯号。请移至其他地方 后再试。 从联系人拨打电话时,无法接通 • 确保存储在联系人列表中的号码正确。 • 如有必要,请重新输入并保存该号码。 • 确保未对该联系人电话号码设置呼叫限制。 设备发出提示音且电池图标呈空白显示 电池电量不足。为电池充电或更换电池后才能继续使用设备。 电池充电异常或设备关机 • 可能是电池电极脏污所致。请先用干净的软布擦拭两个金色的触点,然后再尝 试为电池充电。 • 如果电池的电量再也无法充足,请妥善处理旧电池并用新电池进行更换 (请参 考当地法令,了解有关妥善处理电池的说明)。 设备摸上去很热 当使用耗电量大的应用程序或在设备上长时间使用应用程序时,设备摸上去就会很 热。这属于正常情况,不会影响设备的使用寿命或性能。故障排除 134 启动照相机时出现错误讯息 三星设备必须拥有足够的可用存储空间和电池电量,才能支持照相机应用。如果启 动照相机时收到错误讯息,请尝试以下操作: • 为电池充电或换上充满电的电池。 • 将文件传送到电脑或删除设备中的文件,以释放存储空间。 • 重新启动设备。如果尝试这些操作后,依然无法正常使用照相机,请联系三星 服务中心。 打开音乐文件时出现错误讯息 三星设备可能会因为各种原因而无法播放某些音乐文件。如果在设备上打开音乐文 件时收到错误讯息,请尝试以下操作: • 将文件传送到电脑或删除设备中的文件,以释放存储空间。 • 确保音乐文件未受到数字权利管理 (DRM) 保护。如果文件受到 DRM 保护,请 确保拥有播放该文件所需的合适许可证或密钥。 • 确保设备支持该文件类型。故障排除 135 无法找到其他蓝牙设备 • 确保设备已启动蓝牙无线功能。 • 确保要连接的设备已启动蓝牙无线功能 (如有必要)。 • 确保设备和另一个蓝牙设备的距离在最大蓝牙范围 (10 米) 之内。 如果以上方法无法解决您的问题,请联系三星服务中心。 将设备连接到电脑时未建立连接 • 确保所用的 USB 数据线与设备兼容。 • 确保电脑上安装了合适的驱动程序,并且驱动程序已更新。 • 如果您是 Windows XP 用户,确保电脑上安装了 Windows XP Service Pack 3 或更高版本。 • 确保您的电脑上安装了 Samsung Kies 2.0 或 Windows Media Player 10 或更 高版本。 机壳外围的小缝隙 • 此缝隙为制造工艺所需,且部件可能会发生轻微颤动或震动。 • 随着时间的推移,部件间的摩擦可能会使此缝隙稍微扩大。Chinese. 06/2013. Rev. 1.0 取决于地区或服务提供商,有些内容可能会因设备而异。 www.samsung.com www.samsung.com User Manual GT-N71052 About this manual This device provides high quality mobile communication and entertainment using Samsung’s high standards and technological expertise. This user manual is specially designed to detail the device’s functions and features. • Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use. • Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings. • Images and screenshots may differ in appearance from the actual product. • Content may differ from the final product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of the manual, refer to the Samsung website, www.samsung.com. • Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. • Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by applications from any provider other than Samsung. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause the device or applications to work improperly. • Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal use of media. • You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services. To avoid additional charges, select an appropriate data tariff plan. For details, contact your service provider.About this manual 3 • Default applications that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an application provided with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed applications, contact service providers. • Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty. Instructional icons Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information Copyright Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics This guide is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics.About this manual 4 Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • The Android logo, Google ™, Google Maps ™, Google Mail ™, YouTube ™, Google Play™ Store, and Google Talk ™ are trademarks of Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Windows Media Player® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. • Wi-Fi ®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™, Wi-Fi Direct ™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. DivX®, DivX Certified®, and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under licence. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on- Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.5 Table of Contents Getting started 8 Device layout 9 Buttons 10 S Pen 10 Package contents 11 Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery 14 Charging the battery 16 Inserting a memory card 18 Turning the device on and off 19 Holding the device 19 Locking and unlocking the device 19 Adjusting the volume 20 Switching to silent mode Basics 21 Indicator icons 22 Using the touch screen 25 Control motions 32 Page Buddy 32 Activating Multi Window 33 Using the S Pen 37 S Pen Air View 38 S Pen Keeper 38 Quick Command 39 Notifications 40 Home screen 42 Using widgets 42 Using applications 43 Applications screen 44 Help 44 One-handed operation 45 Entering text 47 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network 48 Setting up accounts 49 Transferring files 50 Securing the device 52 Upgrading the device Communication 53 Phone 58 Contacts 62 Messaging 63 Email 65 Google Mail 66 Talk 67 Google+ 67 Messenger 68 ChatONTable of Contents 6 Utilities 97 S Note 100 S Planner 102 Dropbox 103 Cloud 104 Clock 106 Calculator 106 Voice Recorder 108 S Voice 109 Google 109 Voice Search 110 My Files 110 Downloads 111 Google Wallet Travel & local 112 Maps 113 Local 114 Latitude 114 Navigation 115 Google Earth Settings 116 About Settings 116 Wi-Fi 117 Bluetooth 117 Data usage 117 More settings 119 Home screen mode 119 Blocking mode 120 Sound 120 Display Web & network 69 Internet 71 Bluetooth 72 AllShare Cast 72 AllShare Play 74 NFC 75 S Beam Media 76 Music Player 77 Camera 84 Gallery 87 Paper Artist 88 Video Player 89 YouTube 90 Flipboard Application & media stores 91 Play Store 92 Samsung Apps 92 S Suggest 93 Game Hub 93 Music Hub 94 Play Books 94 Play Movies 95 Play Music 95 Play Magazines 95 Readers Hub 96 Video Hub 96 Learning HubTable of Contents 7 121 Storage 122 Power saving 122 Battery 122 Applications manager 122 Location services 123 Lock screen 124 Security 125 One-handed operation 125 Language and input 128 Cloud 128 Back up and reset 128 Add account 128 Motion 130 S Pen 130 Accessory 131 Date and time 131 Accessibility 132 Advanced settings 133 About device Troubleshooting8 Getting started Device layout Back button Multipurpose jack Notication light Earpiece Proximity/Light sensor Menu button Microphone Front camera Power button Home button Touch screen Rear camera GPS antenna Main antenna Headset jack Microphone for speakerphone Volume button Flash Back cover Speaker S PenGetting started 9 The microphone at the top of the device is active only when you use the speakerphone or take videos. • Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. • Do not use a screen protector. This causes sensor malfunctions. • Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. Buttons Button Function Power • Press and hold to turn the device on or off. • Press and hold for 8-10 seconds to reset the device if it has fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes. • Press to lock or unlock the device. The device goes into lock mode when the touch screen turns off. Menu • Tap to open a list of options available for the current screen. • Tap and hold on the Home screen to launch Google search. Home • Press to return to the Home screen. • Press and hold to open the list of recent applications. • Press twice to launch S Voice. Back • Tap to return to the previous screen. • Tap and hold to activate or deactivate Multi Window. Volume • Press to adjust the device volume.Getting started 10 S Pen S Pen tip S Pen button Name Function S Pen tip • Perform basic S Pen actions. (p. 22) S Pen button • Perform advanced S Pen actions. (p. 32) Package contents Check the product box for the following items: • Device • Battery • Quick start guide Use only Samsung-approved software. Pirated or illegal software may cause damage or malfunctions, which are not covered by the warranty.Getting started 11 • The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary depending on the region or service provider. • The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices. • Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. • You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make sure they are compatible with the device before purchase. • Other accessories may not be compatible with your device. • Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Malfunctions caused by using unapproved accessories are not covered by the warranty service. • Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer to the Samsung website. Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the included battery. Only microSIM cards work with the device. 1 Remove the back cover. • Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover. • Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover.Getting started 12 2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. • Do not remove the protective tape covering the antenna, as this can damage the antenna. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to remove the memory card. • Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards. 3 Push the SIM or USIM card into the slot until it locks in place. 4 Insert the battery. 2 1Getting started 13 5 Replace the back cover. Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Pull out the battery. 3 Push the SIM or USIM card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out.Getting started 14 Charging the battery Charge the battery before using it for the first time. Use the charger to charge the battery. A computer can be also used to charge the device by connecting them via the USB cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device. • When the battery power is low, the device emits a warning tone and displays a low battery power message. • If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before turning on the device. • If you use multiple applications at once, network applications, or applications that need a connection to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid disconnecting from the network or losing power during a data transfer, always use these applications after fully charging the battery. Charging with the charger Plug the small end of the charger into the multipurpose jack of the device, and plug the large end of the charger into an electric socket. Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.Getting started 15 • The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger may stop charging. • If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the device, and then unplug it from the electric socket. Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the device. To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in use to avoid wasting power. The device should remain close to the electric socket while charging. Checking the battery charge status When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current battery charge status: Charging Fully chargedGetting started 16 Reducing the battery consumption Your device provides options that help you save battery power. By customising these options and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges: • Activate power-saving mode. • When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button. • Close unnecessary applications with the task manager. • Deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • Deactivate auto-syncing of applications. • Decrease the backlight time. • Decrease the brightness of the display. Inserting a memory card Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your device. • Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data stored in it. • Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up. • The device supports only the FAT file system for memory cards. When inserting a card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards. • When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory appears in the extSdCard folder under the internal memory.Getting started 17 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards. 3 Push the memory card into the slot until it locks in place. 4 Replace the back cover. Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Storage→Unmount SD card. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Push the memory card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out. 3 Replace the back cover. Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or damage to the memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data.Getting started 18 Formatting the memory card A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the memory card on the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Storage→Format SD card→Format SD card→Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored on the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Turning the device on and off When turning on the device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn the device on and off. • Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. • Press and hold the Power button and tap Flight mode to disable the wireless features. To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off.Getting started 19 Holding the device Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity problems or drain the battery. Locking and unlocking the device When not in use, lock the device to prevent unwanted operation. Pressing the Power button turns off the screen and puts the device into lock mode. The device automatically gets locked if it is not used for a specified period. To unlock the device, press the Power button or the Home button when the touch screen is turned off, tap anywhere on the screen, and then flick your finger in any direction. You can use motion to unlock the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Motion. To unlock the device with motion, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then tilt the device forwards. Adjusting the volume Press the Volume button up or down to adjust the ringtone volume, or to adjust the sound volume when playing music or video.Getting started 20 Switching to silent mode Use one of the following methods: • Press and hold the Volume button down until it switches to silent mode. • Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Mute. • Open the notifications panel at the top of the screen, and then tap Sound. Set the device to alert you to various events in silent mode. Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Vibrate.21 Basics Indicator icons The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the device. The icons listed in the table below are most common. Icon Meaning No signal Signal strength Roaming (outside of normal service area) GPRS network connected EDGE network connected UMTS network connected HSDPA network connected LTE network connected Wi-Fi connected Bluetooth feature activated GPS activated Call in progress Missed call Synced with the web Connected to computer No SIM or USIM card New text or multimedia message Alarm activated Silent mode activated Vibration mode activated Flight mode activatedBasics 22 Icon Meaning Error occurred or caution required Battery power level Using the touch screen Use only fingers or the S Pen to use the touch screen. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • Do not allow the touch screen to contact water. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply excessive pressure to it with your fingertips. • Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages (screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the device. Finger gestures Tapping To open an application, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a character using the on-screen keyboard, tap it with a finger.Basics 23 Tapping and holding Tap and hold an item for more than 2 seconds to access available options. Dragging To move an icon, thumbnail, or preview to a new location, tap and hold it and drag it to the target position. Double-tapping Double-tap on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Double-tap again to return.Basics 24 Flicking Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Applications screen to see another panel. Flick up or down to scroll through a webpage or a list, such as contacts. Pinching Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out.Basics 25 Control motions Simple motions allow easy control of the device. Before using motions, make sure the motion feature is activated. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Motion, and then drag the Motion switch to the right. Rotating the screen Many applications allow display in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotating the device causes the display to automatically adjust to fit the new screen orientation. To prevent the display from rotating automatically, open the notifications panel and deselect Screen rotation. • Some applications do not allow screen rotation. • Some applications display a different screen depending on the orientation. The calculator turns into a scientific calculator when rotated to landscape.Basics 26 Picking up When you pick up the device after it has been idle for some time or when the screen has turned off, it vibrates if you have missed calls or new messages. Holding to ear While viewing call, message, or contact details, pick up and hold the device to your ear to make a call.Basics 27 Panning to move Tap and hold an item, and then move the device to the left or right to move the item to another panel on the Home screen or the Applications screen. Panning to browse When an image is zoomed in, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then move the device in any direction to browse the image.Basics 28 Double-tapping Double-tap the device to move to the top of a list of contacts or emails. Rotating While the screen is locked, tap and hold the screen, and then rotate the device to landscape orientation to launch the camera. To use this motion, on the Home screen, tap Apps→ Settings→Lock screen→Lock screen options, and then drag the Camera quick access switch to the right.Basics 29 Turning over Turn over the device to mute ringtone or pause media playback. Shaking • Shake the device to search for Bluetooth devices. • Shake the device to update the list of emails or information from Yahoo News, Yahoo Finance, or AccuWeather. Updates will not work for widgets on the Home screen.Basics 30 Sweeping Sweep your hand across the screen to capture a screenshot. The image is saved in Gallery→ Screenshots. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some applications. Covering Cover the screen with a palm to pause media playback.Basics 31 Tilting Tap and hold two points on the screen, and then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out. Moving When the touch screen is turned off, move your hand across the Proximity/Light sensor to turn on the screen and view the number of missed calls and new messages, the battery power level, and more.Basics 32 Page Buddy Use this feature to use specific applications based on your actions. Pages related to your actions appear in the following conditions: • When you pull out the S Pen from the slot. • When you connect a headset or dock to the device. • When you are roaming. Activating Multi Window Use this feature to run two applications on the screen at the same time. • Only applications on the Multi Window panel can run. • When launching applications that contain multimedia files, such as music or videos, sound from both files will be played. • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To activate Multi Window, tap and hold . The Multi Window panel appears at the left side of the screen. Select one application, and then drag another application to a new location. Drag the bar between the application panels up or down to adjust the size of the panels. Tap the panel handle to hide or show the panel. When a panel is open, tap and hold the handle and drag it to an edge of the screen to move the panel. When a panel is hidden, tap and hold the handle and drag it up or down or left or right to move the handle.Basics 33 Using the S Pen The included S Pen can be used to easily select items or perform functions. Actions using the S Pen with the button pressed provide additional conveniences, such as screen capture. Pull out the S Pen from the slot to use it. When you pull out the S Pen from the slot, the device detects it and performs the following: • Turns on the touch screen (if it is off). • Launches S Note (during a call). • Opens the S Pen page (from the Home screen). • The tip of the S Pen is not replaceable. If the tip gets dull, purchase a new S Pen. • If the S Pen is not working properly, take it to a Samsung Service Centre. Refer to the Samsung website for more information about the S Pen. • For best results, keep the S Pen mostly perpendicular to the touch screen and avoid using it at sharp angles. • The Menu button and the Back button cannot be activated by the S Pen.Basics 34 Opening a menu With the S Pen button pressed, draw to open a list of the screen’s available options. Undoing the last action With the S Pen button pressed, draw to undo the last action.Basics 35 Capturing screenshots With the S Pen button pressed, touch the screen until you hear a click. A screenshot is saved in the Gallery→Screenshots folder. It is possible to draw or write on or to crop a screenshot. The edited image is saved in the Gallery→IMG_edited folder. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some applications. Launching S Note With the S Pen button pressed, double-tap the screen to launch S Note.Basics 36 Selecting text With the S Pen button pressed, drag left or right on the text to select. If you drag between lines, you may select unwanted text. To select only the text you intend, drag across the middle of the text or drag the text selection icons. Samsung UserManual Launching Quick Command With the S Pen button pressed, drag the S Pen up the screen to launch Quick Command. On the Quick Command screen, draw a gesture command to launch the assigned application or feature. To view assigned gesture commands, press the S Pen button while hovering over the Quick Command screen.Basics 37 Selecting and capturing an image With the S Pen button pressed, draw a line around an area to select it. The selected area is saved in the Gallery→Screenshots folder. Select an application to use with the selected area from the icons that appear at the bottom of the screen. S Pen Air View When you hold the S Pen near the screen, a pointer appears on the screen. Move the pointer to files, subjects, or options to preview the contents or view information in pop-up windows. You can scroll through panels or lists by moving the pointer to an edge (top/bottom/left/ right) of the screen.Basics 38 S Pen Keeper When the touch screen is off and S Pen is removed from the device, the device displays a popup alert and emits a sound if you walk. Access the S Pen settings to activate or deactivate the feature. Quick Command Use this feature to make a call, send a message, or search for content by drawing gesture commands on the screen. With the S Pen button pressed, drag the S Pen up on the screen to launch Quick Command. Adding gesture commands Tap →Add a command→Select an application or Select functions. Select an application or a feature → an option. Draw a new gesture command, and then tap Done. Using gesture commands Draw a gesture command to launch applications or features. For more specific tasks, draw a keyword, such as a name or phone number, after a gesture command. For example, when drawing @, the Email application launches. When adding a recipient’s name after @, an email composing screen opens so that you can send an email to the recipient.Basics 39 Notifications Notification icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen to report missed calls, new messages, calendar events, device status, and more. Drag down from the status bar to open the notifications panel. Scroll the list to see additional alerts. To close the notifications panel, drag up the bar that is at the bottom of the screen. From the notifications panel, you can view your device’s current status and use the following options: • Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. • GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature. • Sound: Activate or deactivate silent mode. You can vibrate or mute your device in silent mode. • Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device. • Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth feature. • Mobile data: Activate or deactivate the data connection. • Blocking mode: Activate or deactivate blocking mode. In blocking mode, the device will block notifications. To select which notifications will be blocked, tap Settings→Blocking mode. • Power saving: Activate or deactivate power-saving mode. • AllShare Cast: Activate or deactivate the AllShare Cast feature. • Sync: Activate or deactivate auto sync of applications. The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider.Basics 40 Home screen The Home screen is the starting point to access all of the device’s features. It displays indicator icons, widgets, shortcuts to applications, and others. The Home screen can have multiple panels. To view other panels, scroll left or right. Changing the Home screen mode The Home screen has basic and easy modes. In easy mode, you can easily access your favourite contacts, applications, and settings by adding shortcuts to the Home screen. To switch to easy mode, on the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Home screen mode →Basic mode→Easy mode→Apply. Rearranging items Adding an application icon On the Home screen, tap Apps, tap and hold an application icon, and then drag it into a panel preview. Adding an item Customise the Home screen by adding widgets or folders. Tap and hold the empty area on the Home screen, and then select one of the following categories: • Apps and widgets: Add widgets or applications to the Home screen. • Folder: Create a new folder. Moving an item Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen.Basics 41 Removing an item Tap and hold an item, and drag it to the rubbish bin that appears at the top of the Home screen. When the rubbish bin turns red, release it. Rearranging panels Adding a new panel Tap →Edit page→ . Moving a panel Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location. Removing a panel Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the bottom of the screen. Setting wallpaper Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen. On the Home screen, tap →Set wallpaper→Home screen, and then select one of the following: • Gallery: See photos taken by the device’s camera or images downloaded from the Internet. • Live wallpapers: See animated images. • Wallpapers: See wallpaper images. Then, select an image and tap Set wallpaper. Or, select an image, resize it by dragging the frame, and then tap Done.Basics 42 Using widgets Widgets are small applications that provide convenient functions and information on your Home screen. To use them, add widgets from the widgets panel to the Home screen. • Some widgets connect to web services. Using a web-based widget may result in additional charges. • The widgets available may vary depending on the region or service provider. Adding widgets to the Home screen On the Home screen, tap Apps→Widgets. Scroll left or right on the widgets panel, and then tap and hold a widget to add it to the Home screen. Using the setting shortcut widget On the Home screen, tap Apps→Widgets, and then tap and hold Settings shortcut to open a list of setting options. Select a setting option to add it to the Home screen as a shortcut. Using applications This device can run many different types of applications, ranging from media to Internet applications. Opening an application On the Home screen or the Applications screen, select an application icon to open it. Opening from recently-used applications Press and hold the Home button to open the list of recently-used applications. Select an application icon to open.Basics 43 Closing an application Close applications not in use to save battery power and maintain device performance. Press and hold the Home button, tap , and then tap End next to an application to close it. To close all running applications, tap End all. Alternatively, press and hold the Home button, and then tap . Applications screen The Applications screen displays icons for all applications, including any new applications installed. On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Applications screen. To view other panels, scroll left or right. Rearranging applications Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the side of the screen. Organising with folders Put related applications together in a folder for convenience. Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to Create folder. Enter a folder name and then tap OK. Put applications into the new folder by dragging, and then tap Save to save the arrangement. Rearranging panels Pinch on the screen, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location.Basics 44 Installing applications Use application stores, such as Samsung Apps, to download and install applications. Uninstalling applications Tap →Uninstall, and then select an application to uninstall it. Default applications that come with the device cannot be uninstalled. Sharing applications Share downloaded applications with other users via email, Bluetooth, or other methods. Tap →Share app, select applications, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. The next steps vary depending on the method selected. Help Access help information to learn how to use the device and applications or configure important settings. Tap Help on the Applications screen. Select an item to view tips. To reset help pop-ups if you have hidden them, tap Show help tip pop-ups, and then select items by ticking. One-handed operation You can activate one-handed operation mode for your convenience. In this mode, application interfaces are modified for easy use with one hand. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→One-handed operation. Tick applications or features to use with the mode.Basics 45 Entering text Use the Samsung keyboard or the voice input feature to enter text. Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the input language to one of the supported languages. Changing the keyboard type Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select the type of keyboard to use. Using the Samsung keyboard Changing the keyboard layout Tap and hold , tap →Portrait keyboard types, and then tap Qwerty keyboard or 3x4 keyboard. On the 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap repeatedly the key corresponding to the character. Break to the next line. Delete a preceding character. Enter punctuation marks. Enter uppercase. Switch to handwriting mode. Enter a space. Entering uppercase Tap before entering a character. For all caps, tap it twice.Basics 46 Changing language keyboards Slide the space key left or right to change language keyboards. Handwriting Tap , and then write a word with a finger or the S Pen. Suggested words appear as characters are entered. Select a suggested word. Entering text by voice Activate the voice input feature and then speak into the microphone. The device displays what you speak. If the device does not recognise your words correctly, tap the underlined text and select an alternative word or phrase from the dropdown list. To change the language or add languages for the voice recognition, tap the current language at the bottom of the screen. When you are finished, tap . Copying and pasting Tap and hold over text, drag or to select more or less text, and then tap to copy or to cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard. To paste it into a text entry field, tap and hold at the point where it should be inserted, and then tap Paste.Basics 47 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other devices. (p. 116) Turning Wi-Fi on and off Open the notifications panel, and then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on or off. • Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors. • Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use. Joining Wi-Fi networks On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Wi-Fi, and then drag the Wi-Fi switch to the right. Select a network from the list of detected Wi-Fi networks, enter a password if necessary, and then tap Connect. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. After the device connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will automatically connect to it any time it is available. Adding Wi-Fi networks If the desired network does not appear in the networks list, tap Add Wi-Fi network at the bottom of the networks list. Enter the network name in Network SSID, select the security type and enter the password if it is not an open network, and then tap Save. Forgetting Wi-Fi networks Any network that has ever been used, including the current network, can be forgotten so the device will not automatically connect to it. Select the network in the networks list, and then tap Forget.Basics 48 Setting up accounts Google applications, such as Play Store, require a Google account, and Samsung Apps requires a Samsung account. Create Google and Samsung accounts to have the best experience with the device. Adding accounts Follow the instructions that appear when opening a Google application without signing in to set up a Google account. To sign in with or sign up for a Google account, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→ Add account→Google. After that, tap New to sign up, or tap Existing, and then follow onscreen instructions to complete the account setup. More than one Google account can be used on the device. Set up a Samsung account as well. Removing accounts On the Applications screen, tap Settings, select an account name under Accounts, select the account to remove, and then tap Remove account.Basics 49 Transferring files Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice versa. The following file formats are supported by some applications. Some file formats are not supported depending on the version of the device’s software. • Music: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac, and flac • Image: bmp, gif, jpg, and png • Video: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, and mkv • Document: doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, pdf, and txt Connecting with Samsung Kies Samsung Kies is a computer application that manages media libraries, contacts, and calendars, and syncs them with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from the Samsung website. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch, double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer. 2 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. Connecting with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on the computer. 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open Windows Media Player and sync music files.Basics 50 Connecting as a media device 1 Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable. 2 Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device→Media device (MTP). Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or not have any appropriate driver installed. 3 Transfer files between your device and the computer. Securing the device Prevent others from using or accessing personal data and information stored in the device by using the security features. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it. Setting a face unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face unlock. Fit your face in the frame to be captured. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face unlock fails. Setting a face and voice unlock On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face and voice. Fit your face in the frame to be captured and then set a voice command. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face and voice unlock fails.Basics 51 Setting a pattern On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Pattern. Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it. Set a backup unlock PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern. Setting a PIN On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→PIN. Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it. Setting a password On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Password. Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password again to verify it. Unlocking the device Turn on the screen by pressing the Power button or the Home button, and enter the unlock code. If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it.Basics 52 Upgrading the device The device can be upgraded to the latest software. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Upgrading with Samsung Kies Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for details on how to upgrade. • Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is upgrading. • While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer. Doing so may interfere with the update process. Upgrading over the air The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air (FOTA) service. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→About device→Software update→Update.53 Communication Phone Use this application to make or answer a call. Tap Phone on the Applications screen. Making calls Making a call Use one of the following methods: • Keypad: Enter the number using the keypad, and then tap . • Logs: Make a call from the history of incoming and outgoing calls and messages. • Favourites: Make a call from the list of favourite contacts. • Contacts: Make a call from the contacts list. Speed dial numbers For speed dial numbers, tap and hold the corresponding digit. Number prediction When entering numbers on the keypad, automatic predictions appear. Select one of these to make a call.Communication 54 Finding contacts Enter a name, phone number, or email address to find a contact in the contacts list. As characters are entered, predicted contacts appear. Select one to place a call to it. Making an international call Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone number, and then tap . During a call The following actions are available: • : Hold a call. Or press and hold the headset button. Tap to retrieve the held call, or press and hold the headset button. • Add call: Dial a second call. • Keypad: Open the keypad. • Speaker: Activate the speakerphone. Keep the device away from your ears when using the speakerphone. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • Headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device. • Swap: Switch between two calls. • Merge: Make a multiparty call when connected to two calls. Repeat this to add more parties. This feature is available only if the multiparty call service is active. • →Contacts: Open the contacts list. • →S Note: Create a note. • →Transfer: Connect the first party to the second party. This disconnects you from the conversation. • →Manage conference call: Have a private conversation with one party during a multiparty call or disconnect one party form the multiparty call. • →Message: Send a message.Communication 55 • →Noise reduction off: Deactivate the noise reduction feature that removes background noise so that the other party can hear you more clearly. • →My call sound: Select an equaliser option for use during a call. Adding contacts To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, enter the number and tap Add to contacts. Viewing call logs Tap Logs to view the history of incoming and outgoing calls. To filter a call log, tap →View by, and then select an option. Fixed dialling number The device can be set to restrict outgoing calls only to numbers with specified prefixes. Those prefixes are stored in the SIM or USIM card. Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Fixed Dialling Numbers→Enable FDN, and then enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. Tap FDN list and add numbers. Call barring The device can be set to prevent certain calls from being made. For example, international calling can be disabled. Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call barring, select a call type, select a call barring option, and then enter a password. Receiving calls Answering a call When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press the headset button. If the call waiting service is active, another call can be made. When the second call is answered, the first call is put on hold.Communication 56 Rejecting a call When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press and hold the headset button. To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, tap Reject call with message. To create the rejection message, tap →Call settings→Set reject messages. Automatically rejecting calls from unwanted numbers Tap →Call settings→Call rejection, drag the Auto reject mode switch to the right, and then tap Auto reject list. Tap Create, enter a number, assign a category, and then tap Save. Missed calls If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of missed calls. Call waiting Call waiting is a service provided by the service provider. A user can use this service to suspend a current call and switch to an incoming call. This service is not available for video calls. To make use of this service, tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call waiting. Call forwarding The device can be set to send incoming calls to a specified number. Tap →Call settings→Call forwarding, and then select a call type and condition. Enter a number and tap Enable. Ending a call Tap End call to end a call. Or press the headset button.Communication 57 Video calls Making a video call Enter the number or select a contact from the contacts list, and then tap to make a video call. During a video call The following actions are available: • Switch Camera: Switch between the front and rear camera. • Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you. • →Hide me: Hide your image from the other party. • →Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party. • →Keypad: Open the keypad. • →Switch to headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device. • →Speaker off: Deactivate the speakerphone feature. • →Animated emotions: Apply emotional icons to your image. • →Theme view: Apply decorative icons to your image. • →Enable cartoon view: Change the view mode to the cartoon view. Tap and hold the other party’s image to access the following options: • Capture image: Capture the other party’s image. • Record video: Take a video of the other party’s images. It is illegal in many countries to record a call without the other party’s prior permission. Tap and hold your image to access the following options: • Switch camera: Switch between the front and rear camera. • Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party.Communication 58 Swapping images Drag an image of either party onto the other party’s image to swap the images. Contacts Use this application to manage contacts, including phone numbers, email addresses, and others. Tap Contacts on the Applications screen. Managing contacts Creating a contact Tap and enter contact information. • : Add an image. • / : Add or delete a contact field.Communication 59 Editing a contact Select a contact to edit, and then tap . Deleting a contact Tap →Delete. Setting a speed dial number Tap →Speed dial setting, select a speed dial number, and then select a contact for it. To remove a speed dial number, tap and hold it, and then tap Remove. Searching for contacts Use one of the following search methods: • Scroll up or down the contacts list. • Use the index at the right side of the contacts list for quick scrolling, by dragging a finger along it. • Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria. Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions: • : Add to favourite contacts. • / : Make a voice or video call. • : Compose a message. • : Compose an email. Importing and exporting contacts Syncing with Google Contacts Tap →Merge with Google. Contacts synced with Google Contacts appear with in the contacts list. If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Google Contacts, and vice versa.Communication 60 Syncing with Samsung Contacts Tap →Merge with Samsung. Contacts synced with Samsung Contacts appear with in the contacts list. If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Samsung Contacts, and vice versa. Importing contacts Tap →Import/Export→Import from SIM card, Import from SD card, or Import from USB storage. Exporting contacts Tap →Import/Export→Export to SIM card, Export to SD card, or Export to USB storage. Sharing contacts Tap →Import/Export→Share namecard via, select contacts, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. Favourite contacts Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Search: Search for contacts. • Add to favourites: Add contacts to favourites. • Remove from favourites: Remove contacts from favourites. • Grid view / List view: View contacts in grid or list form.Communication 61 Contact groups Adding contacts to a group Select a group, and then tap . Select contacts to add, and then tap Done. Managing groups Tap , and then take one of the following actions: • Create: Make a new group. • Search: Search for contacts. • Change order: Tap and hold next to the group name, drag it up or down to another position, and then tap Done. • Delete groups: Select user-added groups, and then tap Delete. Default groups cannot be deleted. Sending a message or email to a group’s members Select a group, tap →Send message or Send email, select members, and then tap Done. Business card Create a business card and send it to others. Tap Set up my profile, enter details, such as phone number, email address, and postal address, and then tap Save. If user information has been saved when you set up the device, select the business card in ME, and then tap to edit. Tap →Share namecard via, and then select a sharing method.Communication 62 Messaging Use this application to send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS). Tap Messaging on the Applications screen. • This feature may be unavailable depending on your service provider’s LTE network. For details, contact your service provider. • You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while you are outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider. Sending messages Tap , add recipients, enter a message, and then tap . Use the following methods to add recipients: • Enter a phone number. • Tap , select contacts, and then tap Done. Use the following methods to make a multimedia message: • Tap and attach images, videos, contacts, notes, events, and others. • Tap →Insert smiley to insert emoticons. • Tap →Add subject to enter a subject. Sending scheduled messages While composing a message, tap →Scheduled message. Set a time and date, and then tap OK. The device will send the message at the specified time and date. • If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network, or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent. • This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update the information.Communication 63 Viewing incoming messages Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact. Select a contact to view the person’s message. Listening to a voice message Tap and hold 1 on the keypad, and then follow the instructions from your service provider. Email Use this application to send or view email messages. Tap Email on the Applications screen. Setting up email accounts Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time. Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account, such as Google Mail, or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To set up another email account, tap →Settings→ . Sending messages Tap the email account to use, and then tap at the top of the screen. Enter recipients, subject, and message, and then tap . Tap to add a recipient from the contacts list. Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients. Tap to attach images, videos, contacts, notes, events, and others. Tap to insert images, events, contacts, and information location into the message.Communication 64 Sending scheduled messages While composing a message, tap →Schedule sending. Tick Schedule sending, set a time and date, and then tap Done. The device will send the message at the specified time and date. • If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network, or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent. • This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update the information. Reading messages Select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new messages, tap . Tap a message to read. Open attachments. Reply to the message. Add this email address to the contacts list. Delete the message. Mark the message as a reminder. Forward the message. Tap the attachment tab to open attachments, and then tap next to an attachment to save it.Communication 65 Google Mail Use this application to quickly and directly access the Google Mail service. Tap Google Mail on the Applications screen. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • This application may be labelled differently depending on the region or service provider. Sending messages In any mailbox, tap , enter recipients, a subject, and a message, and then tap . Tap →Attach file to attach images. Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients. Tap →Save draft to save the message for later delivery. Tap →Discard to start over. Reading messages Download attachment. Mark the message as unread. Add a label to this message. Preview attachment. Keep this message for long-term storage. Mark the message as a reminder. Delete this message. Reply to this message. Reply to all recipients or forward this message to others. Add this email address to the contacts list.Communication 66 Labels Google Mail does not use actual folders, but uses labels instead. When Google Mail is launched, it displays messages labelled Inbox. Tap to view messages in other labels. To add a label to a message, select the message, tap , and then select the label to assign. Talk Use this application to chat with others via Google Talk. Tap Talk on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Public profile Tap the account ID at the top of the friends list to change the availability status, image, or status message. Adding friends Tap , enter the email address of the friend to add, and then tap DONE. Chatting with friends Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen, and then tap . To add a friend to chat, tap →Add to chat. To end the chat, tap →End chat.Communication 67 Switching between chats Scroll left or right. Deleting chat history Chats are automatically saved. To delete chat history, tap →Clear chat history. Google+ Use this application to stay connected with people via Google’s social network service. Tap Google+ on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Tap All circles to change the category, and then scroll up or down to view posts from your circles. Messenger Use this application to chat with others via Google+ instant messaging service. Tap Messenger on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen, and then tap .Communication 68 ChatON Use this application to chat with any device that has a mobile phone number. Tap ChatON on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Create the buddies list by entering phone numbers or email addresses of Samsung accounts, or selecting buddies from the list of suggestions. Select a buddy to start chatting. To sync contacts on the device with ChatON, tap Settings→Sync contacts.69 Web & network Internet Use this application to browse the Internet. Tap Internet on the Applications screen. Viewing webpages Tap the address field, enter the web address, and then tap Go. Tap to share, save, or print the current webpage while viewing a webpage. Opening a new page Tap →New window. To go to another webpage, tap , scroll left or right, and tap the page to select it. Searching the web by voice Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Bookmarks To bookmark the current webpage, tap →Add bookmark. To open a bookmarked webpage, tap , and then select one.Web & network 70 History Tap →History to open a webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the history, tap →Clear history. Tap →History→Most visited to open a webpage from the list of most visited webpages. Saved pages To view saved webpages, tap →Saved pages. Links Tap and hold a link on the webpage to open it in a new page, save, share, or copy. To view saved links, tap →Downloads. Sharing webpages To share a webpage address with others, tap →Share page. To share a part of a webpage, tap and hold the desired text, and then tap →Share. Using Popup Browser Use this feature to access the Internet without closing the current application. While viewing content, such as contacts or notes that include web addresses, select a web address, and then tap Popup Browser to open the pop-up browser. Tap and drag the browser to move it to another location. To view the browser in full screen, tap . To close the browser, tap .Web & network 71 Bluetooth Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth feature. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. • Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes). Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth feature. To activate Bluetooth, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth, and then drag the Bluetooth switch to the right. Pairing with other Bluetooth devices On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth→Scan, and detected devices are listed. Select the device you want to pair with, and then accept the auto-generated passkey on both devices to confirm. Sending and receiving data Many applications support data transfer via Bluetooth. An example is Gallery. Open Gallery, select an image, tap →Bluetooth, and then select one of the paired Bluetooth devices. After that, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device to receive the image. The transferred file is saved in the Bluetooth folder. If a contact is received, it is added to the contacts list automatically.Web & network 72 AllShare Cast Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle, and then share your contents. • This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. • Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network connection. • To save energy, deactivate the AllShare Cast feature when not in use. • If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency band, AllShare Cast dongles may not be discovered or connected. • If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best experience from AllShare Cast. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→AllShare Cast, and then drag the AllShare Cast switch to the right. Select a device, open or play a file, and then control the display with the keys on your device. AllShare Play Use this application to play contents saved on various devices over the Internet. You can play and send any file on any device to another device or web storage server. To use this application, you must sign in to your Google and Samsung accounts and register two or more devices as file servers. The registration methods may vary depending on the device type. To get more details, tap →FAQ. Tap AllShare Play on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Sending files Select a device or web storage, select a file, and then tap .Web & network 73 Sharing files Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then use the following options: • Send to Nearby Users: Share files with nearby devices that have AllShare Play activated. • Facebook/Twitter/Flickr/Picasa: Upload files to a social network site. Playing files on a remote device Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then select a device. • Supported file formats may differ depending on connected devices as a media player. • Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection. Managing contents on a web storage server Select a web storage server, and then view and manage your files.Web & network 74 NFC Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for transportation or events after downloading the required applications. The back cover contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the back cover carefully to avoid damaging the NFC antenna. If the screen is locked, your device will not read NFC tags or receive data. To activate the NFC feature, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→ NFC. Drag the NFC switch to the right. Reading information from an NFC tag Place the device near an NFC tag. The information from the tag will appear. Making a purchase with the NFC feature Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile payment service. To register or get details about the service, contact your service provider. Touch the back of your device to the NFC card reader. Sending data via Android Beam Use the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→NFC. Drag the Android Beam switch to the right. Select an item, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap your device’s screen.Web & network 75 S Beam Use the S Beam feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents. Do not send copyright-protected data via S Beam. Doing so may violate copyright laws. Samsung is not responsible for any liabilities caused by the illegal use of copyrighted data. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→S Beam. Drag the S Beam switch to the right. Select a file, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap your device’s screen. If both devices try to send data simultaneously, the file transfer may fail.76 Media Music Player Use this application to listen to music. Tap Music Player on the Applications screen. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software version. • Some files may not play properly depending on the encoding used. Playing music Select a music category, and then select a song to play. Open the playlist. Skip to the next song. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Pause and resume playback. Adjust the volume. Open Music square. Change the repeat mode. Restart the currently-playing song or skip to the previous song. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Turn on shue. Select a sound eect.Media 77 Setting a song as ringtone To use the currently-playing song as ringtone, tap →Set as→Phone ringtone. Creating playlists Make an own selection of songs. Tap Playlists, and then tap →Create playlist. Enter a title and tap OK. Tap Add music, select songs to include, and then tap Done. To add the currently-playing song to a playlist, tap →Add to playlist. Playing music by mood Play music grouped by mood. The playlist is automatically created by the device. When a new song is added, tap Music square→ →Library update. Tap Music square and select a cell of mood. Camera Use this application to take photos or videos. Use Gallery to view photos and videos taken with the device’s camera. (p. 84) Tap Camera on the Applications screen. The camera automatically shuts off when unused. Camera etiquette • Do not take photos or videos of other people without their permission. • Do not take photos or videos where legally prohibited. • Do not take photos or videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy.Media 78 Taking photos Taking a photo Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. When the subject is in focus, the focus frame turns green. Tap to take the photo. Tap and hold to take a series of photos. Indicates which storage is in use. Switch between still and video mode. Open the image viewer to display photos. Switch between the front and rear camera. Change the ash setting. Change the shooting mode. Select among various eects that are available. Change the camera settings. Scene mode Predefined settings make point-and-shoot photos easier to take. Tap →Scene mode. • Portrait: Use this setting for a human subject. • Landscape: Use this setting for a wider view. • Sports: Use this setting for fast-moving subjects. • Party/Indoor: Use this setting for well-lit indoor scenes. • Beach/Snow: Use this setting for well-lit or sunny outdoor scenes.Media 79 • Sunset: Use this setting for richer colours and sharper contrasts. • Dawn: Use this setting for very subtle colours. • Autumn colour: Use this setting for red-shifted background scenery. • Text: Use this setting for books or posters. • Candlelight: Use this setting for images of bright light against a dark background. Shooting mode Several photo effects are available, such as cartoon rendering. Tap →Shooting mode. • Single shot: Take a single photo. • Best photo: Take a series of photos, and then save the best one. • Best Face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same time and combine them to create the best possible image. Tap to take multiple photos. To get the best shot, hold the camera steady and remain still while taking photos. When Gallery opens, tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best individual pose for the subject. After choosing a pose for each individual, tap Save to merge the images into a single photo, and save it. • Face detection: Set the device to recognise people’s faces and help you take photos of them. • Panorama: Take a photo composed of many photos strung together. • Share shot: Send a photo directly to another device via Wi-Fi Direct. • HDR: Take three photos with different exposures and then combine them to improve the contrast ratio. • Buddy photo share: Set the device to recognise a person’s face that you have tagged in a photo and send it to that person. Face recognition may fail depending on the face angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing. • Beauty: Take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images. • Smile shot: Take a photo while the camera waits for a subject to smile. • Low light: Take a series of photos and combine them into one photo to improve the image quality.Media 80 Panoramic photos A panoramic photo is a wide landscape image consisting of multiple shots. Tap →Shooting mode→Panorama. Tap and move the camera in any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the viewfinder, the camera automatically takes another shot in a panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, tap again. Taking videos Taking a video Slide the still-video switch to the video icon, and then tap to take a video. To pause recording, tap . To stop recording, tap . While recording, use the following actions: • To change the focus, tap where you want to focus. To focus on the centre of the screen, tap . • To capture an image from the video while recording, tap . This feature will not work when the anti-shake feature is activated. The zoom function may not be available when recording at the highest resolution.Media 81 Recording mode Switch between the front and rear camera. Change the ash setting. Change recording mode. Select among various eects that are available. Change the camera settings. Indicates which storage is in use. Switch between still and video mode. Open the video player to play videos. Tap to change recording mode. • Normal: Use this mode for normal quality. • Limit for MMS: Use this mode to lower quality for sending via messaging. • Slow motion: Use this mode to take a video of a moving subject. The device will play the video in slow motion. • Fast motion: Use this mode to take a video of a moving subject. The device will play the video in fast motion. Zooming in and outMedia 82 Use one of the following methods: • Use the Volume button to zoom in or out. • Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. • The zoom function may not be available when shooting at the highest resolution. • The zoom in/out effect is available when using the zoom feature while shooting video. Configuring settings for Camera Tap to configure settings for Camera. Not all of the following options are available in both still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary depending on the mode used. • Edit shortcuts: Reorganise shortcuts to frequently-used options. • Burst shot: Take a series of photos of moving subjects. • Self portrait: Take a photo of yourself. • Self recording: Take a video of yourself. • Flash: Activate or deactivate the flash. • Shooting mode: Change the shooting mode. • Recording mode: Change recording mode. • Effects: Select among various photo effects that are available. • Scene mode: Change the scene mode. • Exposure value: This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For lowlight situations, use a higher exposure. • Focus mode: Select a focus mode. Auto focus is camera-controlled. Macro is for very close objects. • Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. • Resolution: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up more memory.Media 83 • White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras. • ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects. • Metering: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated. Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene. • Outdoor visibility: Use this for bright, outdoor conditions. • Auto contrast: Set the camera to use automatic contrast. Automatic contrast defines contrast levels without manual input. • Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects. • Auto share shot: Set to automatically activate Wi-Fi Direct and switch to share shot mode when you touch the back of your device to another NFC-enabled device, and then tap the screen of your device’s screen. • Anti-Shake: Activate or deactivate anti-shake. Anti-shake helps focus when the camera is moving. • GPS tag: Attach a GPS location tag to the photo. • To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather conditions. • Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting. • Contextual filename: Set the camera to display contextual tags. • Take photos using voice: Set the camera to take photos with voice commands. • Save as flipped: Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene. • Image quality: Higher quality images require more storage space.Media 84 • Video quality: Set the quality level for videos. • Storage: Select the memory location for storage. • Reset: Reset the camera settings. Shortcuts Reorganise shortcuts for easy access to the camera’s various options. Tap →Edit shortcuts. Tap and hold an option and drag it to a slot at the left of the screen. The other icons can be moved within the list by tapping and dragging them. Gallery Use this application to view images and videos. Tap Gallery on the Applications screen. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the software installed on the device. • Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. Viewing images Launching Gallery displays available folders. When another application, such as Email, saves an image, the download folder is automatically created to contain the image. Likewise, capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Select a folder to open it. In a folder, images are displayed by creation date. Select an image to view it in full screen. Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image.Media 85 Zooming in and out Use one of the following methods to zoom in an image: • Double-tap anywhere to zoom in. • Spread two fingers apart on any place to zoom in. Pinch to zoom out, or double-tap to return. Viewing images using the motion feature Use the motion feature to execute a function with particular motion. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Motion, drag the Motion switch to the right, and then select features by ticking. To stop using a motion feature, drag the Motion switch to the left. To set the sensitivity for each motion feature, tap Advanced settings, select a feature, and then use the adjustable slide bar. Playing videos Video files show the icon on the preview. Select a video to watch it and tap , and Video Player launches. Editing images When viewing an image, tap and use the following functions: • Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current folder. • Face tag: Register the faces in the image as face tags. • Tag buddy: Set the camera to display contextual tags. • Add photo note: Add a note to the image. Tap to edit the note. • Copy to clipboard: Copy to clipboard. • Rotate left: Rotate anticlockwise. • Rotate right: Rotate clockwise. • Crop: Resize the orange frame to crop and save the image in it. • Edit: Launch Paper Artist to edit the image. • Set as: Set the image as a wallpaper or a contact image. • Buddy photo share: Send the image to a person whose face is tagged in the image.Media 86 • Print: Print via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. The device is only compatible with some Samsung printers. • Rename: Rename the file. • Details: View image details. • Edit weather tag: Add a weather tag. Favourite images When viewing an image, tap to add the image to the favourites list. Deleting images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap . • When viewing an image, tap . Sharing images Use one of the following methods: • In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap to send them to others. • When viewing an image, tap to send it to others or share it via social network services. Setting as wallpaper When viewing an image, tap →Set as to set the image as wallpaper or to assign it to a contact.Media 87 Tagging faces When viewing an image, tap →Face tag→On. A yellow frame appears around the recognised face. Tap the face, tap Add name, and then select or add a contact. When the face tag appears on an image, tap the face tag and use available options, such as making calls or sending messages. Face recognition may fail depending on the face angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing. Using Tag Buddy When viewing an image, tap →Tag buddy to display a contextual tag (weather, location, date, and person’s name) when opening an image. Paper Artist Use this application to make images look like illustrations with fun effects or frames. Tap Paper Artist on the Applications screen. Use artistic tools to edit an image. The edited image is saved in the Gallery→Paper Pictures folder. Select an existing image. Share the image. Apply effects to the image. Change the pen thickness. Take a photo. Change the brush thickness. Save the image. Apply frames to the image. Change the eraser size.Media 88 Video Player Use this application to play video files. Tap Video Player on the Applications screen. • Avoid locking the device’s screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand. Each time you lock the screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand, one of your available rental counts is lost. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the device's software. • Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. Playing videos Select a video to play. Change screen ratio. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Capture an image. Restart the current video or skip to the previous video. Tap and hold to move backwards quickly. Skip to the next video. Tap and hold to move forwards quickly. Adjust the volume. Reduce the size of the video screen. Pause and resume playback. Deleting videos Tap →Delete, select videos by ticking, and then tap Delete. Sharing videos Tap →Share via, select videos by ticking, tap Done, and then select a sharing method.Media 89 Using Popup Video player Use this feature to use other applications without closing the video player. While watching videos, tap to use the pop-up player. Spread two fingers apart on the screen to enlarge the player or pinch to reduce it. To move the player, tap and hold the player, and then drag it to another location. YouTube Use this application to watch videos from the YouTube website. Tap YouTube on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Watching videos Tap , and then enter a keyword. Select one of the returned search results to watch a video. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display full screen. Pause or resume playback. Move forwards or backwards by dragging the bar. Change display quality. Add the video to the playlist. Search for videos. Rotate the screen to portrait orientation. Send the URL to others.Media 90 Sharing videos Select the video to view, tap , and then select a sharing method. Uploading videos Select your account, tap , select a video, enter information for the video, and then tap Upload. Flipboard Use this application to access your personalised magazines. Tap Flipboard on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To start your Flipboard, flick up on the greeting page, tap Get Started, select news topics, and then tap Done. Select a cover story or a topic, flick through the Flipboard pages, and then select an article to read. While reading an article, use the following icons: • : Go to the previous page. • : Share the article with others. • : View others’ comments about the article.91 Application & media stores Play Store Use this application to purchase and download applications and games that are able to run on the device. Tap Play Store on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Installing applications Browse applications by category, or tap to search with a keyword. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Install. If there is a charge for the application, tap the price, and follow on-screen instructions to complete the purchase process. • When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. • To install applications that you downloaded from other sources, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→Security→Unknown sources. Uninstalling applications Uninstall the applications purchased from Play Store. Tap →My Apps, select an application to delete in the list of installed applications, and then tap Uninstall.Application & media stores 92 Samsung Apps Use this application to purchase and download dedicated Samsung applications. For more information, visit www.samsungapps.com. Tap Samsung Apps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. If a Samsung account is not registered, follow the on-screen instructions to create a Samsung account. To complete the subscription process, read the terms and conditions, and then tap Accept to agree to them. Installing applications Browse applications by category. Tap to select a category. To search for an application, tap at the top of the screen, and then enter a keyword in the search field. Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Get. When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and tap the icon to update the application. S Suggest Use this application to browse and download the latest applications suggested by Samsung. Tap S Suggest on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Application & media stores 93 Game Hub Use this application to access games. Tap Game Hub on the Applications screen. Scroll left or right and select a game to download from Samsung Apps. Music Hub Use this application to listen to songs on the device or the web server provided by Music Hub, and purchase songs. If you subscribe to the Music Hub premium service, you can enjoy customisable services, such as recommended songs or artists, unlimited song streaming, and personal radio stations. To get more details, tap Help or visit the Music Hub website. Tap Music Hub on the Applications screen. This application or some features of this application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Syncing songs with the Music Hub library Tap My Music→ →Refresh. The Music Hub library is updated with the songs on the device. If a song on your Music Hub library is not in the database, Music Hub will automatically upload the song to the database. Playing music Tap My Music, select a music category, and then select a song to play. To search for and listen to similar songs, tap →Find similar music.Application & media stores 94 Purchasing songs Tap Store, and then select a genre → a category. Tap →Buy song, and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the purchase process. Play Books Use this application to read and download book files. Tap Play Books on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a book file by scrolling left or right. While reading a book file, tap to access additional options. To purchase book files, tap . Play Movies Use this application to watch, download, and rent movies or TV shows. Tap Play Movies on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a category at the top of the screen, and then select a movie, TV programme, or video to play or rent.Application & media stores 95 Play Music Use this application to stream music from the Google cloud service. Tap Play Music on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Play music by selecting a music category or share songs with others by uploading them to the Google cloud storage. Play Magazines Use this application to read and download magazines. Tap Play Magazines on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a category, and then select a magazine. Readers Hub Use this application to download and read book files. Tap Readers Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a category, find a book file, and then download it.Application & media stores 96 Video Hub Use this application to access and purchase videos. Tap Video Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a category, and then select a video. Learning Hub Use this application to access learning material. Tap Learning Hub on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a category, and then select a video lecture or book.97 Utilities S Note Use this application to create a note using images and voice recordings. Tap S Note on the Applications screen. The S Pen can be used to open S Note. Double-tap the screen with the S Pen button pressed. Selecting note templates Tap and select one of the following templates: • Note/Idea note/Memo: Create a simple note from an empty page. • Meeting note: Create a record of meetings, conferences, or lectures. • Magazine: Create a multimedia note by inserting multimedia files. • Diary: Create a photo diary. • Recipe: Create your own recipe. • Travel: Create a travel essay. • Birthday: Create a birthday card.Utilities 98 Composing notes Append another page to the current note. Undo and redo the last action. Insert a multimedia file. Make a voice recording to insert. Record your actions while drawing a note. Erase the handwritten note. Draw only with the S Pen. Use productivity tools. Search for information about the handwritten keyword on a preset webpage. Enter a note. Jot down or draw a note. Switch to view mode. When jotting down a note, tap to change the pen type, line thickness, or pen colour. When erasing the handwritten note, tap to change the eraser size or clear the note. View more colours. Change the line thickness. Change the pen colour. Change the pen type. Save the current setting as a pen profile. Add a new colour with the Color Picker. To change the sheet background, tap →Change background. To add tags, tap →Add tag.Utilities 99 Inserting multimedia files or a voice recording Tap to insert multimedia files. Tap to insert a voice recording. Insert a multimedia file. Make a voice recording to insert. Using productivity tools Double-tap and select one of the following tools: • Shape match: Convert a shape you have drawn. • Formula match: Convert a handwritten formula to a well-organised formula. Tap Search to get detailed information about the formula. • Handwriting-to-text: Convert a handwritten note. Browsing notes Browse note thumbnails by scrolling up or down. To sync notes with the Samsung account, tap →Refresh. To sort notes by date, title, or others, tap →Sort by. To change the view mode, tap →List view. To create a note by importing a PDF, image file, or note, tap →Import. To sync notes with Google Docs or Evernote, tap →Sync. To create a folder, tap →Create folder. To change the order of notes, tap →Change order. To copy notes, tap →Copy.Utilities 100 To move notes to another folder, tap →Move. To change the S Note settings, tap →Settings. To view the tutorial for S Note, tap →Tutorial. Viewing a note Tap the note thumbnail to open it. To move to other pages of the note, scroll left or right. To create a note, tap →Create note. To send the note to others, tap →Share via. To save the note as an image file or a PDF file, tap →Export. To add or delete the note, tap →Edit pages. To delete the note, tap →Delete. To add tags, tap →Add tag. To save the note as an event, tap →Create event. To add a shortcut to the note on the Home screen, tap →Set as shortcut. To set the note as wallpaper or to assign it to a contact, tap →Set as. To print the note via a USB or Wi-Fi connection, tap →Print. The device is only compatible with some Samsung printers. S Planner Use this application to manage events and tasks. Tap S Planner on the Applications screen. Creating events or tasks Tap , and then use one of the following methods: • Quick add: Create an event or task from a memo. This feature is available only for English and Korean. • Add event: Enter an event with an optional repeat setting. • Add task: Enter a task with an optional priority setting.Utilities 101 To add an event or task more briefly, tap a date to select it and tap it again. Enter a title and specify which calendar to use or sync with. Then tap Edit event details or Edit task details to add more details, such as how often the event repeats, when it has an advance alert, or where it takes place. Attach a map showing the location of the event. Enter the location in the Location field, tap next to the field, and then pinpoint the precise location by tapping and holding on the map that appears. Attach a memo from S Note. Tap Notes, and then compose a new memo or select one of the existing memos. Attach an image. Tap Images, and then take a photo or select one of the existing images. Syncing with Google Calendar On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Google under Accounts→ a Google account → Sync Calendar→Sync now. To manually sync for updating, on the Applications screen, tap S Planner→ →Sync. To display synced event or tasks on Google Calendar, tap →Settings→Calendars, select the Google account, and then tap Done.Utilities 102 Changing calendar type Tap , and then select one from among different types of calendars including year, month, week, and others. A pinch gesture can be used to change calendar type. For example, pinch to change from the monthly calendar to the yearly calendar, and spread apart to change yearly calendar back to monthly calendar. Searching for events Tap →Search, and then enter a keyword to search for. To view today’s events, tap Today at the top of the screen. Deleting events Select a date or event, and then tap →Delete. Sharing events Select an event, tap →Share via, and then select a sharing method. Dropbox Use this application to save and share files with others via the Dropbox cloud storage. When you save files to Dropbox, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other computers that have Dropbox installed. Tap Dropbox on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. When running Dropbox for the first time, tap Start to activate it. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. To upload files to Dropbox, tap →Photos or videos or Other files. To open a file in Dropbox, tap , and then select a file. While viewing the file, tap Favorite to add it to the favourites list. To open favourite files, tap .Utilities 103 Cloud Use this feature to sync files or back up settings and application data with your Samsung account or Dropbox. Tap Settings→Cloud on the Applications screen. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Syncing with the Samsung account Tap your Samsung account or Sync settings to sync files. Backing up or restoring data Tap Device backup to back up or restore data with your Samsung account. Syncing with Dropbox If an account is not set up, tap Set account, and then enter the Dropbox account. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup. Once you sign in, tap Allow and the device automatically syncs files with Dropbox whenever you make some changes.Utilities 104 Clock Use this application to set alarms, check the time in any location in the world, measure the duration of an event, set a timer, or use as the desk clock. Tap Clock on the Applications screen. Turn this alarm on or off. Alarm Setting alarms Tap Create alarm, set a time for the alarm to go off, select days for the alarm to repeat, and then tap Save. Use the following options: • Tap More→Location alarm to set a location. The alarm goes off only when you are in the location. • Tap More→Snooze to set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset time. • Tap More→Smart alarm to set a time for the alarm to go off before the preset time.Utilities 105 Stopping alarms Drag outside the circle to stop an alarm. Drag outside the circle to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time. Deleting alarms Tap and hold the alarm, and then tap Delete. World clock Creating clocks Tap Add city, and then enter a city name or select a city from the cities list. To apply summer time, tap and hold a clock, and then tap DST settings. Deleting clocks Tap →Delete, select clocks, and then tap Delete. Stopwatch Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times. Tap Reset to clear lap time records. Timer Set the duration, and then tap Start. Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off. Desk clock Tap to view in full screen.Utilities 106 Calculator Use this application for simple or complex calculations. Tap Calculator on the Applications screen. Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen rotation is disabled, tap →Scientific calculator. To see calculation history, tap to hide the keypad. To clear history, tap →Clear history. To change the character size for history, tap →Text size. To set the calculator for convenient use with one hand, tap →One-handed operation on. Voice Recorder Use this application to record or play voice memos. Tap Voice Recorder on the Applications screen. Recording voice memos Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone at the bottom of the device. Tap to pause recording. Tap to finish recording. Start recording. Recording elapsed time Display the list of voice memos.Utilities 107 Playing voice memos Select a voice memo to play. • : Adjust the volume by dragging the volume bar up or down. • : Trim the voice memo. • : Stop playback. • : Pause playback. To send a voice memo to others, tap →Share via, select a voice memo, and then select a sharing method. Managing voice memos In the list of voice memos, tap and select one of the following: • Share via: Select a sharing method, and then select voice memos to send. • Delete: Select voice memos to delete. • Settings: Change the voice recorder settings. • End: Close the voice recorder. Saving files with contextual tags In the list of voice memos, tap →Settings→Contextual filename→On.Utilities 108 S Voice Use this application to command by voice the device to dial a number, send a message, write a memo, and more. Tap S Voice on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Here are several examples of spoken commands: • Open music • Launch calculator • Call Lulu mobile • Dial Lulu work • Check schedule Tips for better voice recognition • Speak clearly. • Speak in quiet places. • Do not use offensive or slang words. • Avoid speaking in dialectal accents. The device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands depending on your surroundings or how you speak.Utilities 109 Google Use this application to search not only the Internet, but also applications and their contents on the device as well. Tap Google on the Applications screen. Searching the device Tap the search field, and then enter a keyword. Alternatively, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords that appear. If no results are returned from the applications, the web browser appears, displaying the search results. Search scope To select what applications to search, tap →Settings→Phone search, and then tick the items to search for. Google Now Launch Google search to view Google Now cards that show the current weather, public transit info, your next appointment, and more when you are most likely to need it. Join Google Now when opening Google search for the first time. To change Google Now settings, tap →Settings→Google Now. This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Voice Search Use this application to search webpages by speaking. Tap Voice Search on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Speak a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. Select one of the suggested keywords that appear.Utilities 110 My Files Use this application to access all kinds of files stored in the device, including images, videos, songs, and sound clips. Tap My Files on the Applications screen. Viewing files Select a folder to open it. To go back to the parent folder, tap . To return to the root directory, tap . In a folder, tap , and then use one of the following options: • Create folder: Create a folder. • Search: Search for files. • View by: Change the view mode. • Sort by: Sort files or folders. • Settings: Change the file manager settings. • Select all: Select all files to apply the same option to them at once. Adding shortcuts to folders Add a shortcut of frequently-used folders to the root directory. Tap →Add shortcut, enter a shortcut name, select a folder, and then tap Done. Downloads Use this application to see what files are downloaded through the applications. Tap Downloads on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To see the files downloaded from the Internet, tap Internet downloads, otherwise, tap Other downloads to see the files downloaded from other applications, such as Email. Select a file to open it with an appropriate application.Utilities 111 Google Wallet Use this application to add credit or debit card information for mobile payments or manage the payment history. Tap Google Wallet on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Access credit card information to edit it, register additional purchase methods, or manage the payment history. To make a payment, touch the back of your device to the NFC card reader.112 Travel & local Maps Use this application to pinpoint the location of the device, search for places, or get directions. Tap Maps on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Viewing maps Scroll in any direction to view a location or find your way. To zoom in or out the map, spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out. To overlay multiple layers including satellite images, traffic information, and more, tap . Searching for locations Tap , enter an address, and then tap . Select a location to view the detailed location information. To search for nearby locations, tap . Once the location is found, tap and use one of the following functions: • Clear Map: Clear the map. • Make available offline: Save the map of a specified area to view it offline. • Settings: Change the map settings. • Help: View information about using the map. To view current location, tap .Travel & local 113 Getting directions for a destination 1 Tap . 2 Tap , and then select a method to enter starting and ending locations: • My current location: Use current location for starting location. • Contacts: Select from the contacts list. • Point on map: Pinpoint by tapping on the map. • My Places: Select from the list of favourite places. 3 Select a travel method, such as driving, public transit, or walking, and then tap GET DIRECTIONS. 4 Select one of the routes that appear, and then tap MAP VIEW to view details. Local Use this application to search for nearby restaurants, banks, bus stops, and more. Tap Local on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Select a place category, and then select a place from the list of search results. • Map: Pinpoint the place on the map. • Directions: Search for a route to the place. • Call: Call the place’s phone number. To add a place category, tap →Add a search on the category list, enter a keyword to search into the text field.Travel & local 114 Latitude Use this application to share location information with friends. Tap Latitude on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. To add a friend with whom location information is shared, tap →Select from Contacts or Add via email address. Select one from contacts or enter an email address, and then tap Add friends to send an invitation. Once the invitation is accepted, either party can know where the other party is located. Navigation Use this application to search for a route to a destination. Tap Navigation on the Applications screen. • Navigation maps, your current location, and other navigational data may differ from actual location information. You should always pay attention to road conditions, traffic, and any other factors that may affect your driving. Follow all safety warnings and regulations while driving. • This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider. Specify the destination by using one of the following methods: • Speak the destination address. • Enter the destination address. • Select the destination address from the contacts list. • Select the destination from the list of starred places. Once a route is found, follow on-screen instructions to navigate to the destination.Travel & local 115 Google Earth Use this application to explore any location in the world using the satellite map view. Tap Google Earth on the Applications screen. This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.116 Settings About Settings Use this application to configure the device, set application options, and add accounts. Tap Settings on the Applications screen. Wi-Fi Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other network devices. To use options, tap . • Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings. • WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button. • WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN. Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced→Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep. When entering power-saving mode, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi connections. When this happens, the device automatically accesses data networks if it is set to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid data-usage bills, set this option to Always. Setting Network notification The device can detect open Wi-Fi networks and display an icon on the status bar to notify when available. On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced and tick Network notification to activate this feature.Settings 117 Bluetooth Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances. Data usage Keep track of your data usage amount, and customise the settings for the limitation. • Mobile data: Set to use data connections on any mobile network. • Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for the mobile data usage. • Data usage cycle: Enter monthly reset date to monitor your data usage. To use more options, tap . • Data roaming: Set to use data connections when you are roaming. • Restrict background data: Set to disable sync in the background while using a mobile network. • Auto sync data: Set the device to sync contact, calendar, email, bookmark, and social network image data automatically. • Show Wi-Fi usage: Set to show your data usage via Wi-Fi. • Mobile hotspots: Search for and use another device’s mobile network. More settings Customise settings to control connections with other devices or networks. Flight mode This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services.Settings 118 Mobile networks • Mobile data: Use to allow packet switching data networks for network services. • Data roaming: Use the device to connect to another network when you are roaming or your home network is not available. • Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs). • Network mode: Select a network type. • Network operators: Search for available networks and select a network for roaming. Tethering and portable hotspot • Portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Use the portable Wi-Fi hotspot to share the device’s mobile network connection with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network. • USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile network connection with a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless modem for the computer. • Bluetooth tethering: Use the Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile network connection with computers via Bluetooth. • Help: Learn more about USB, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth tethering. VPN Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). NFC • NFC: Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information. • Android Beam: Turn on the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled devices. S Beam Activate the S Beam feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents, to devices that support NFC and Wi-Fi Direct.Settings 119 Nearby devices • File sharing: Activate media sharing to allow other DLNA-certified devices to access media files on your device. • Shared contents: Set to share your content with other devices. • Device name: Enter a media server name for your device. • Allowed devices list: View the list of devices that can access your device. • Not-allowed devices list: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your device. • Download to: Select a memory location for saving media files. • Upload from other devices: Set to accept uploads from other devices. AllShare Cast Activate the AllShare Cast feature and share your display with others. Kies via Wi-Fi Connect the device to Samsung Kies via a Wi-Fi network. Home screen mode Select a Home screen mode (basic or easy). Blocking mode Select features and set the device to hide or show notification icons of them for specified periods.Settings 120 Sound Change settings for various sounds on the device. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and notifications. • Vibration intensity: Adjust the force of the vibration notification. • Device ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls. • Device vibration: Add or select a vibration pattern. • Default notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages, missed calls, and alarms. • Sound and vibration: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls. • Keytones: Set the device to sound when tapping the buttons on the keypad. • Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when selecting an application or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when locking or unlocking the touch screen. • Haptic feedback: Set the device to vibrate when touching keys. Display Change the settings for the display. • Wallpaper: – Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen. – Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen. – Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the locked screen. • LED indicator: – Charging: Set to turn on the notification light while you are charging the battery. – Low battery: Set to turn on the notification light when the battery is low. – Notifications: Set to turn on the notification light when you have missed calls, messages, or notifications. – Voice recording: Set to turn on the notification light when you record voice memos.Settings 121 • Page buddy: Set the device to open contextual pages based on your actions. • Screen mode: Select a display mode. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. • Auto-rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Smart rotation: Set the interface not to rotate according to the orientation of your face. • Smart stay: Set to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at the display. • Font style: Change the font type for display text. • Font size: Change the font size. • Touch key light duration: Set the duration for the touch button backlight. • Display battery percentage: Set to view the remaining battery life. • Auto adjust screen tone: Set to save power by adjusting the brightness of the display. Storage View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card. Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it. The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the memory.Settings 122 Power saving Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for power-saving mode. • CPU power saving: Set the device to limit some system resource usage. • Screen power saving: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the display. • Background colour: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the background colour of email and Internet. • Turn off haptic feedback: Set the device to turn off the vibration when touching keys. • Learn about power saving: Discover how to reduce battery consumption. Battery View the amount of battery power consumed by your device. Applications manager View and manage the applications on your device. Location services • Use wireless networks: Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks for finding the current location. • Use GPS satellites: Set to use the GPS satellite for finding the current location. • Location and Google search: Set to use your current location for Google search and other Google services.Settings 123 Lock screen Change settings for securing the device. • Screen lock: Activate the screen lock feature. • Lock screen options: Change the settings for the locked screen. These settings are applied only when you set the swipe lock option. – Shortcuts: Set to show and edit application shortcuts on the locked screen. – Information ticker: Set to show news or stock information on the locked screen. – Clock: Set to show the clock on the locked screen. – Dual clock: Set to show the dual clock on the locked screen. – Weather: Set to show weather information on the locked screen. – Ripple effect: Set to show the ripple effect on the locked screen. – Help text: Set to show the help text on the locked screen. – Camera quick access: Set the device to launch the camera by tapping and holding the screen and rotating the device while the screen is locked. – Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when the screen is locked. – Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a specified function. • Popup Note on lock screen: Set to launch S Note when you double-tap the locked screen with the S Pen button pressed. • Owner information: Enter your information that is shown on the locked screen.Settings 124 Security Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card. • Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the password each time you turn on the device. Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an hour to encrypt your data. • Encrypt external SD card: – Encrypt: Set to encrypt files when you save them to a memory card. – Full encryption: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card. – Exclude multimedia files: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card, except for media files. If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the device. • Remote controls: Set to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account. – Account registration: Add or view your Samsung account. – Use wireless networks: Set to allow location data collection and to determine the location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi and mobile networks. • SIM Change Alert: Activate the Find my mobile feature. • Find my mobile web page: Access the SamsungDive website (www.samsungdive.com). You can track and control your lost or stolen device on the SamsungDive website. • Set up SIM card lock: – Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before using the device. – Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data. • Make passwords visible: By default, the device hides passwords for security. Set the device to display passwords as they are entered.Settings 125 • Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow device administrators to apply new policies to the device. • Unknown sources: Choose to download applications from any source. If not chosen, download applications only from Play Store. • Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various applications. • Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage. • Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. One-handed operation Activate one-handed operation mode for your convenience when using the device with one hand. Language and input Change the settings for text input. Language Select a display language for all menus and applications. Default Select a default keyboard type for text input.Settings 126 Google voice typing To change the voice input settings, tap . • Choose input languages: Select input languages for text input. • Block offensive words: Set to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in voice inputs. • Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Samsung keyboard To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap . • Portrait keyboard types: Change the keyboard layout. • Input languages: Select languages for text input. • Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings. • Continuous input: Set to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard. • Pen detection: Set the device to open the handwriting panel when the field is tapped with the S Pen. • One-handed operation: Set the keyboard to appear on either side of the screen for convenience when entering text with one hand. • Handwriting: Customise settings for handwriting mode, such as recognition time, pen thickness, or pen colour.Settings 127 • Advanced: – Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. – Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. – Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped. – Key-tap vibration: Set the device to vibrate when a key is touched. – Key-tap sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched. • Tutorial: Learn how to enter text with the Samsung keyboard. • Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings. Voice search • Language: Select a language for the voice recognition. • Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current action. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results. • Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline voice input. Text-to-speech output • Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. • Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and specify applications to use in driving mode.Settings 128 Pointer speed Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device. Cloud Change settings for syncing data or files with your Samsung account or Dropbox cloud storage. Back up and reset Change the settings for managing settings and data. • Back up my data: Set to back up settings and application data to the Google server. • Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account. • Automatic restore: Set to restore settings and application data when the applications are reinstalled on the device. • Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data. Add account Add email or SNS accounts. Motion Activate the motion feature and change settings for motion recognition. • Quick glance: Set to turn on the touch screen and display information, such as notifications, missed calls, new messages, time and date, device status, and more by moving your hand across the sensor at the top of the screen. • Direct call: Set to make a voice call by picking up and holding the device near your ear while viewing call, message, or contact details.Settings 129 • Smart alert: Set the device to alert you if you have missed calls or new messages when you pick up the device. • Double tap to top: Set to move to the top of a list of contacts or email messages when you double-tap the device. • Tilt to zoom: Set to zoom in or out while viewing images in Gallery or browsing webpages, when you tap and hold two points with your fingers and then tilt the device back and forth. • Pan to move icon: Set to move an item to another page when tapping and holding the item and then panning the device to the left or right. • Pan to browse images: Set to scroll through an image by moving the device in any direction when the image is zoomed in. • Shake to update: Set the device to search for Bluetooth devices by shaking it. • Turn over to mute/pause: Set to mute incoming calls, alarms, and music by placing the device face down. • Advanced settings: – Quick glance: Select items to display on the quick glance screen when you move your hand across the Proximity/Light sensor. – Gyroscope calibration: Calibrate the gyroscope so your device can correctly recognise rotation. • Place the device on a stable surface during calibration. The calibration process may fail if the device vibrates or moves. • Calibrate the gyroscope when you experience drifting or unintended movements when using tilting or panning motions or motion-enabled games. – Sensitivity settings: Adjust the reaction speed for each motion. • Learn about motions: View the tutorial for controlling motions. • Palm swipe to capture: Set to capture an image of the screen when you sweep your hand to the left or right across the screen. • Palm touch to mute/pause: Set to pause media playback when you touch the screen with your palm. • Learn about hand motions: View the tutorial for controlling hand motions.Settings 130 S Pen Change the settings for using the S Pen. • Dominant hand: Select the hand used to write with to enhance S Pen inputs. • Pen attach/detach sound: Set the device to emit a sound when the S Pen is inserted or pulled out from the slot. • Open Popup Note: Set to launch a quick note when the S Pen is pulled out from the slot. • Battery saving: Set the screen not to respond when inserting or removing the S Pen. • S Pen Keeper: Set the device to display a pop-up alert and emit a sound if you walk when the touch screen is off and S Pen is removed from the device. • Air View: Set to show the S Pen pointer when the S Pen is hovering over the screen. • Sound and haptic feedback: Set the device to sound and vibrate when hovering over files, subjects, or options. • Quick Command settings: Configure the settings for Quick Command. • S Pen help: Access help information for using the S Pen. Accessory Change the accessory settings. • Dock sound: Set the device to play a sound when your device is connected to or removed from a desktop dock. • Audio output mode: Set to use the dock speaker when your device is connected to a desktop dock. • Desk home screen display: Set the device to show the desk clock when your device is connected to a desktop dock. • Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting.Settings 131 Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date is reset. • Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across time zones. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Automatic time zone: Set to receive time zone information from the network when you move across time zones. • Select time zone: Set the home time zone. • Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. Accessibility Accessibility services are special features for those with certain physical disabilities. Access and alert the following settings to improve accessibility to the device. • Auto-rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. • Speak passwords: Set the device to read aloud passwords you enter with Talkback. • Answering/Ending calls: – Answering key: Set the device to answer an incoming call when pressing the Home button. – The power key ends calls: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power button. • Accessibility shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility on the quick menu that appears when you press and hold the Power button.Settings 132 • TalkBack: Activate Talkback, which provides voice feedback. • Font size: Change the font size. • Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility. • Text-to-speech output: – Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for speech synthesis engines, tap . – Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. – Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. – Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and specify applications to use in driving mode. • Enhance web accessibility: Set applications to install web scripts to make their web content more accessible. • Sound balance: Adjust the sound balance when using a dual headset. • Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with one earbud. • Turn off all sounds: Mute all device sounds. • Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen. Advanced settings Change the settings for application development. • Desktop backup password: Set a password to secure your backup data. • Stay awake: Set the screen to remain on while you are charging the battery. • Protect SD card: Set to request a confirmation when reading data from a memory card. • USB debugging: Activate USB debugging mode to connect your device to a computer with a USB cable. • Allow mock locations: Allow mock locations and service information to be sent to a Location Manager service for testing. • Select debug app: Select applications to debug and prevent errors when you pause debugging.Settings 133 • Wait for debugger: Set to prevent the selected application from loading until the debugger is ready. • Show touches: Set to show the pointer when you touch the screen. • Show pointer location: Set to show the coordinates and traces of the pointer when you touch the screen. • Show layout boundaries: Set to show boundaries. • Show GPU view updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated with the GPU. • Show screen updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated. • Window animation scale: Select a speed for opening and closing pop-up windows. • Transition animation scale: Select a speed for switching between screens. • Animator duration scale: Select how long pop-up windows will be shown. • Disable hardware overlays: Set to hide hardware overlays. • Force GPU rendering: Set to use 2D hardware acceleration to improve graphic performance. • Strict mode: Set the device to flash the screen when applications perform long operations. • Show CPU usage: Set to list all active processes. • Profile GPU rendering: Set to check the time of GPU rendering time. • Enable traces: Set to capture traces of application and system performance. • Do not keep activities: Set to end a running application when you launch a new application. • Limit background processes: Set to limit the number of processes that can run in the background. • Show all ANRs: Set the device to alert you to unresponsive applications that are running in the background. About device Access device information and update device software.134 Troubleshooting When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: • Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. • PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. • PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. • PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for more details. The touch screen responds slowly or improperly If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the following: • Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices. • Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take it to your local Samsung Service Centre.Troubleshooting 135 Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close programs or reset the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button for 8-10 seconds. The device reboots automatically. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Back up and reset→Factory data reset→Reset device→Erase everything. Calls are being dropped When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose your connection to the network. Move to another area and try again. Outgoing calls are not connected • Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key. • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. Incoming calls are not connected • Ensure that your device is turned on. • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected.Troubleshooting 136 Audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. When dialling from contacts, the call is not connected • Ensure that the correct number is stored in the contact list. • Re-enter and save the number, if necessary. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the contact’s phone number. The device beeps and the battery icon is empty Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device. The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off • The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts with a clean, soft cloth and try charging the battery again. • If the battery no longer charges completely, dispose of the old battery properly and replace it with a new battery (refer to your local ordinances for proper disposal instructions). Your device is hot to the touch When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance.Troubleshooting 137 Error messages appear when launching the camera Your Samsung device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. Error messages appear when opening music files Some music files may not play on your Samsung device for a variety of reasons. If you receive error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. • Ensure that your device supports the file type.Troubleshooting 138 Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to, if necessary. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a computer • Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your computer. • If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your computer. • Ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your computer. A small gap appears around the outside of the device case • This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of parts may occur. • Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly.English (EU). 10/2012. Rev. 1.0 Some content may differ from your device depending on the region or service provider. www.samsung.com ML-1860 Series ML-1865 Series Imprimante laser monochrome Mode d’emploi imaginez les possibilités Merci d’avoir fait l’acquisition d’un produit Samsung. Copyright_ 2 Copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent mode d’emploi n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce mode d’emploi. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • PCL et PCL 6 sont des marques commerciales de la société Hewlett-Packard. • Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2 sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation. • PostScript 3 est une marque commerciale d’Adobe System, Inc. • UFST® et MicroType™ sont des marques déposées de Monotype Imaging, Inc. • TrueType, Mac et Mac OS sont des marques commerciales d’Apple Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays. • LaserWriter est une marque commerciale d’Apple Inc. • Les autres noms de produit et de marque sont des marques commerciales de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Reportez-vous au fichier « LICENSE.txt » du CD-ROM fourni pour consulter les informations de licence Open Source. REV. 1.04Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT 2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES 3 6 Informations en matière de sécurité 11 Informations légales 17 A propos de ce mode d’emploi 19 Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil INTRODUCTION 21 21 Description de l’appareil 21 Vue avant 22 Vue arrière 23 Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande 24 Présentation du voyant d’état 24 Présentation des touches utiles 25 Mise en marche de l’appareil PRISE EN MAIN 26 26 Configuration du matériel 26 Emplacement 26 Impression d’une page de configuration 26 Logiciel fourni 27 Configuration requise 27 Windows 27 Macintosh 27 Linux 28 Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB 28 Windows 29 Macintosh 29 Linux 30 Partage local de l’appareil 30 Windows 31 Macintosh CONFIGURATION DE BASE 32 32 Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut 32 A partir de votre ordinateur 32 Utiliser la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie SUPPORTS ET BACS 33 33 Sélection du support d’impression 33 Recommandations pour sélectionner le support d’impression 33 Formats de support pris en charge dans chaque mode 34 Modification du format du bac 34 Chargement de papier dans le bac 34 Bac 35 Alimentation manuelle du bac 35 Impression sur supports spéciaux 36 Enveloppes 36 Transparents 37 Étiquettes 37 Papiers cartonnés ou de format personnalisé 37 Papier à en-tête/papier pré-imprimé 37 Utilisation du support de sortie papierTable des matières Table des matières_ 4 IMPRESSION 38 38 Fonctions des pilotes d’impression 38 Pilote d’impression 38 Impression de base 39 Annulation d’une impression 39 Ouverture des préférences d’impression 39 Utilisation d’un réglage favori 40 Utilisation de l’aide 40 Utilisation des fonctions d’impression spéciales 40 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille 40 Impression d’affiches 40 Impression de brochures (manuelle) 41 Impression recto verso (manuelle) 41 Modification des proportions de votre document 41 Impression d’un document sur un format de papier donné 41 Impression de filigranes 42 Utilisation de surimpressions 43 Options de qualité d’impression 43 Modification des réglages d’impression par défaut 43 Définition de votre appareil comme appareil par défaut 44 Impression dans un fichier (PRN) 44 Impression Macintosh 44 Impression d’un document 44 Modification des paramètres de l’imprimante 45 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille 45 Impression Linux 45 Impression à partir d’applications 46 Impression de fichiers 46 Configuration des propriétés de l’imprimante OUTILS DE GESTION 47 47 Présentation des outils de gestion utiles 47 Utilisation de Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Windows uniquement) 47 Présentation de Samsung Easy Printer Manager 48 Utilisation de État de l’imprimante Samsung (Windows uniquement) 48 Vue d’ensemble de État de l’imprimante Samsung 49 Utilisation du programme Smart Panel (Macintosh et Linux uniquement) 49 Présentation de Smart Panel 49 Modification des paramètres du programme Smart Panel 50 Utilisation du configurateur de pilote unifié Linux 50 Ouverture d’Unified Driver Configurator 50 Fenêtre Printers configuration 51 Ports configuration MAINTENANCE 52 52 Impression d’un journal de l’appareil 52 Nettoyage d’un appareil 52 Nettoyage de l’extérieur 52 Nettoyage de l’intérieur 53 Stockage de la cartouche de toner 53 Instructions de manipulation 53 Utilisation de cartouches de toner d’une autre marque que Samsung et rechargées 53 Durée de vie estimée d’une cartouche 53 Conseils pour déplacer et ranger l’appareilTable des matières Table des matières_ 5 DÉPANNAGE 54 54 Redistribution du toner 54 Astuces pour éviter les bourrages papier 55 Résolution des bourrages papier 55 Dans le bac 55 À l’intérieur de l’appareil 56 Résolution d’autres problèmes 56 Problèmes d’alimentation 57 Problèmes d’alimentation papier 57 Problèmes d’impression 59 Problèmes de qualité d’impression 62 Problèmes Windows courants 62 Problèmes Linux courants 63 Problèmes Macintosh courants FOURNITURES 64 64 Comment commander 64 Consommables disponibles 64 Pièces de rechange disponibles 65 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES 66 66 Caractéristiques techniques du matériel 66 Caractéristiques techniques environnementales 67 Caractéristiques techniques électriques 68 Spécifications des supports d’impression CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE 69 GLOSSAIRE 71 INDEX 77Informations en matière de sécurité_ 6 Informations en matière de sécurité Ces avertissements et précautions sont inclus afin d’éviter des blessures pour vous et d’autres personnes, ainsi que pour éviter des dommages potentiels à votre appareil. Veillez à lire et à comprendre toutes ces instructions avant d’utiliser l’appareil. Faites preuve de bon sens lors de l’utilisation d’appareils électriques et chaque fois que vous utilisez votre appareil. Observez en outre toutes les mises en garde et instructions mentionnées sur le produit et dans la documentation qui l’accompagne. Une fois que vous avez lu cette section, conservez-la pour pouvoir vous y reporter par la suite. Important symboles de sécurité Cette section explique la signification des icônes et des signes de ce guide de l’utilisateur. Ces symboles de sécurité sont dans l’ordre, suivant le degré de danger. Explication des icônes et des signes utilisés dans le guide de l’utilisateur : Avertissement Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures graves ou la mort. Mise en garde Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. Ne pas essayer. Ne pas démonter. Ne pas toucher. Débranchez la prise d’alimentation de la prise murale. Assurez-vous que votre appareil est branché sur une prise de courant reliée à la terre. Contactez le service de maintenance pour obtenir de l’aide. Suivez les instructions à la lettre.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 7 Environnement d’exploitation Avertissement Ne pas utiliser si le câble d’alimentation électrique est endommagé ou si la prise électrique n’est pas reliée à la terre. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Ne pliez pas le câble d’alimentation électrique et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus. ► Le fait de marcher sur le câble d’alimentation électrique ou de l’écraser avec un objet lourd peut occasionner une décharge électrique ou un incendie. Ne rien poser sur l’appareil (eau, objets métalliques, objets lourds, bougies, cigarettes allumées, etc.). ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Ne retirez pas la fiche en tirant sur le câble ; ne manipulez pas la prise avec des mains mouillées. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil surchauffe, libère de la fumée, émet des bruits étranges, ou produit une odeur bizarre : coupez immédiatement l’interrupteur d’alimentation et débranchez l’appareil. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Mise en garde Pendant un orage ou pendant une période de non-fonctionnement, retirez la fiche d’alimentation de la prise de courant. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si la fiche n’entre pas facilement dans la prise, ne forcez pas pour l’insérer. ► Appelez un électricien pour changer la prise de courant, sous peine de décharge électrique possible. Faites attention, la zone de sortie papier est chaude. ► Vous pouvez vous brûler. Veillez à ce qu’aucun animal domestique ne ronge les cordons d’alimentation, de téléphone et d’interface PC. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie et/ou de blessure pour votre animal domestique. Si on a laissé tomber l’appareil, ou si le boîtier semble endommagé, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement après avoir suivi ces instructions, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil présente un changement visible et brusque du niveau de performance, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 8 Méthode d’utilisation Mise en garde Ne tirez pas avec force sur la feuille durant l’impression. ► Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil. Lors de l’impression de grandes quantités, la partie inférieure de la zone de sortie papier peut devenir chaude. Ne laissez pas des enfants y toucher. ► Vous pouvez vous brûler. Faites attention de ne pas mettre la main entre l’appareil et le bac d’alimentation papier. ► Vous pourriez vous blesser. Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, évitez d’utiliser des objets métalliques pointus. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. N’obstruez pas l’orifice de ventilation et n’y poussez pas d’objets. ► La température des composants risquerait d’augmenter et pourrait provoquer des dommages ou un incendie. Ne laissez pas le papier s’empiler sur le réceptacle de sortie. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. Faites attention lorsque vous remplacez du papier ou que vous retirez du papier coincé. ► Les bords d’une feuille neuve sont tranchants et peuvent provoquer des coupures douloureuses. Le dispositif d’interruption d’’alimentation de cet appareil est son câble d’alimentation électrique. ► Pour couper l’alimentation, retirez le câble d’alimentation électrique de la prise électrique. Informations en matière de sécurité_ 9 Installation/déplacement Avertissement Ne placez pas l’appareil dans un endroit poussiéreux, humide ou sujet à des fuites d’eau. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Mise en garde Avant de déplacer l’appareil, éteignez-le et débranchez tous les cordons. Puis levez l’appareil : •si le poids de l’appareil est inférieur à 20 kg, une seule personne suffit ; •si le poids de l’appareil est de 20 kg, deux personnes sont nécessaires ; •si le poids de l’appareil est supérieur à 40 kg, 4 personnes sont nécessaires. ► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser quelqu’un. Ne couvrez pas l’appareil et ne le placez pas dans un endroit confiné comme un placard. ► Si l’appareil n’est pas bien ventilé, il y a un risque d’incendie. Ne placez pas l’appareil sur une surface instable. ► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser quelqu’un. Branchez directement le câble d’alimentation électrique dans une prise de courant correctement reliée à la terre. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. L’appareil doit être connecté au niveau de puissance indiqué sur l’étiquette. ► En cas de doute et si vous voulez vérifier le niveau de puissance utilisé, contactez le service d’électricité. Ne branchez pas un trop grand nombre d’appareils électriques sur une même prise murale ou sur une même rallonge. ► Une prise surchargée réduit les performances et constitue une source potentielle d’incendie et de décharges électriques. Utilisez exclusivement du câble AWG N°26a a.AWG : American Wire Gauge ou un câble de téléphone plus grand, si nécessaire. ► Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil. Pour un fonctionnement sûr, utilisez le câble d’alimentation électrique fourni avec votre appareil. Si vous utilisez un câble de plus de 2 mètres avec un appareil 140 V, le calibre doit être 16 AWG ou plus grand. ► Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil peut être endommagé et il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 10 Entretien/contrôle Mise en garde Débranchez l’appareil de la prise secteur avant de nettoyer l’intérieur. Ne nettoyez pas l’appareil avec du benzène, du diluant pour peinture ou de l’alcool ; ne pulvérisez pas de l’eau directement dans l’appareil. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Gardez les produits de nettoyage hors de portée des enfants. ► Ils peuvent se blesser. Lorsque vous effectuez une tâche dans l’appareil pour remplacer des consommables ou nettoyer l’intérieur, ne le faites pas fonctionner. ► Vous pourriez vous blesser. Ne démontez pas, ne réparez pas et ne remontez pas l’appareil vous-même. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. Appelez un technicien agréé lorsque l’appareil doit être réparé. Gardez le câble d’alimentation et la surface de contact de la fiche exempts de poussière ou d’eau. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Pour nettoyer et faire fonctionner l’appareil, respectez à la lettre le guide d’utilisateur fourni avec l’appareil. ► Dans le cas contraire, vous pourriez endommager l’appareil. Ne retirez jamais les couvercles ou protections fixés avec des vis. ► L’appareil doit exclusivement être réparé par un technicien de maintenance Samsung. Utilisation des consommables Mise en garde Ne démontez pas la cartouche de toner. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Lorsque vous rangez les consommables comme les cartouches de toner, gardez-les hors de portées de enfants. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Ne brûlez aucun consommable comme une cartouche de toner ou une unité de chauffe. ► Cela pourrait provoquer une explosion ou déclencher un incendie incontrôlable. L’utilisation de consommables recyclés, comme le toner, peut endommager l’appareil. ► En cas de dommage lié à l’utilisation de consommables recyclés, des frais seront imputés. Lorsque vous changez la cartouche de toner ou que vous retirez un papier bloqué, faites attention de ne pas vous salir ou salir vos vêtements avec le toner. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Si du toner se dépose sur vos vêtements, n’utilisez pas d’eau chaude pour les laver. ► L’eau chaude fixe le toner sur le tissu. Utilisez de l’eau froide. Informations légales_ 11 Informations légales Cet appareil est conçu pour votre environnement de travail normal et certifié avec plusieurs déclarations légales. Avertissement relatif à la sécurité laser Cette imprimante est certifiée conforme aux spécifications DHHS 21 CFR, chapitre 1, sous-chapitre J pour les produits laser de classe I(1) aux États-Unis, et certifiée dans les autres pays comme un produit laser de classe I, conformément aux spécifications IEC 60825-1. Les produits laser de classe I ne sont pas considérés comme dangereux. Le système laser et l’imprimante sont conçus de manière à interdire tout accès aux rayonnements laser au-dessus d’un niveau de classe I pendant l’exploitation normale, les interventions de maintenance utilisateur, dans les conditions d’utilisation spécifiées. • Longueur d’onde: 800 nm • Divergence de faisceau - Parallèle: 11 degrés - Perpendiculaire: 35 degrés • Puissance maximale de l’énergie en sortie: 12 mW AVERTISSEMENT N’utilisez jamais l’imprimante après avoir retiré le capot protecteur du module laser/scanner. Le faisceau lumineux, bien qu’invisible, pourrait endommager vos yeux. Lors de l’utilisation de cet appareil, ayez toujours à l’esprit les recommandations de sécurité suivantes, afin de réduire les risques d’incendie, de décharge électrique et d’autres accidents corporels : Consignes de sécurité relatives à l’ozone En mode d’utilisation normal, cet appareil génère de l’ozone. Cette production ne présente aucun risque pour l’utilisateur. Toutefois, il est préférable d’utiliser l’appareil dans un local correctement aéré. Pour obtenir des informations complémentaires sur l’ozone, contactez votre revendeur Samsung local.Informations légales_ 12 Economie d’énergie Cette imprimante est dotée d’un dispositif perfectionné d’économie d’énergie réduisant la consommation électrique en période d’inactivité. Lorsque l’imprimante ne reçoit pas de données pendant un certain temps, la consommation électrique est réduite automatiquement. ENERGY STAR et la marque ENERGY STAR sont des marques déposées aux États-Unis. Pour plus d’informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR, reportez-vous au site http://www.energystar.gov. Recyclage Veuillez recycler ou jeter les emballages de ce produit dans le respect de l’environnement. Chine uniquement Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Le symbole sur le produit, les accessoires ou la documentation indique que le produit et ses accessoires électroniques (par ex. chargeur, écouteurs, câble USB) ne doivent pas être éliminés en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. Pour éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé des personnes due à une mise au rebut non contrôlée, séparez cet appareil des autres déchets et recyclez-le afin de promouvoir une réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Les particuliers doivent contacter le revendeur chez qui ils ont acheté le produit ou l’administration appropriée pour s’informer sur le lieu et le moyen de recycler cet appareil tout en préservant l’environnement. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Cet appareil ne doit pas être mélangé avec d’autres déchets commerciaux lors de sa mise au rebut.Informations légales_ 13 Émissions radioélectriques Réglementation FCC Cet appareil est conforme à l’alinéa 15 de la réglementation FCC. Son exploitation ou utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes : • Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles. • Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable. Ce matériel a été testé et satisfait aux limites s’appliquant aux appareils numériques de classe B, en vertu des dispositions de l’alinéa 15 de la réglementation FCC. Ces limites visent à assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interférences en zone résidentielle. Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut émettre de hautes fréquences radio et, s’il n’est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions, peut provoquer des perturbations dans les communications radio. Il est toutefois possible que son utilisation dans un environnement domestique génère de nombreuses interférences. Le cas échéant, l’utilisateur devra faire le nécessaire pour les éliminer et prendra toutes les dépenses afférentes à sa charge. Si cet appareil provoque des interférences sur la réception radio ou télévision lors de sa mise sous tension et hors tension, essayez de résoudre le problème en adoptant l’une des mesures suivantes : • Réorientez ou repositionnez l’antenne de réception. • Éloignez l’équipement du récepteur. • Branchez l’appareil sur une prise différente de celle du récepteur. • Consultez votre distributeur ou un technicien radio/télévision qualifié pour obtenir de l’aide. Tout changement ou modification effectué sans l’accord exprès du fabricant pourrait annuler la capacité de l’utilisateur à utiliser cet équipement. Réglementations canadiennes relatives aux interférences radio Cet appareil numérique ne dépasse pas les limites de Classe B pour les émissions de parasites radio par des appareils numériques, telles que définies dans la norme sur les équipements provoquant des interférences intitulée « Digital Apparatus », ICES-003 de l’Industry and Science Canada. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : « Appareils Numériques », ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada. Russie uniquement Yalnızca Türkiye Allemagne uniquementInformations légales_ 14 Remplacement de la prise (Royaume-Uni uniquement) Important Les fils électriques de cet appareil sont équipés d’une fiche électrique standard de 13 A (BS 1363) et d’un fusible de 13 A. Lorsque vous changez ou examinez le fusible, vous devez replacer le fusible de 13 A approprié. Vous devez ensuite replacer le capuchon du fusible. Si vous avez perdu le capuchon du fusible, n’utilisez pas la prise avant d’avoir replacé un autre capuchon. Prenez contact avec le détaillant qui vous a vendu l’appareil. La fiche électrique la plus utilisée au Royaume-Uni est la prise de 13 A. Cependant, certains bâtiments (particulièrement les plus anciens) ne disposent pas de prises de courant de 13 A. Vous devez alors vous procurer un adaptateur approprié. Ne retirez pas la fiche moulée d’origine. Si la fiche monocoque est endommagée, débarrassez-vous en immédiatement. Il n’est pas possible de la réparer et vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique si vous la branchiez dans une prise. Avertissement important Cet appareil doit être relié à la terre. Le code de couleurs suivant est appliqué aux fils des branchements électriques : • Vert et jaune : terre • Bleu : neutre • Brun : phase Si les fils de votre système électrique ne correspondent pas aux couleurs indiquées sur la fiche, procédez comme suit : Connectez le fil vert et jaune à la broche portant la lettre « E », le symbole de mise à la terre, la couleur verte ou les couleurs jaune et verte. Connectez le fil bleu à la broche signalée par la lettre « N » (neutre) ou par la couleur noire. Connectez le fil marron à la broche signalée par la lettre « L » ou par la couleur rouge. Un fusible de 13 A doit être présent dans la fiche, dans l’adaptateur ou sur le tableau électrique.Informations légales_ 15 Déclaration de conformité CE Approbations et certifications Le marquage CE apposé sur ce télécopieur signifie que Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. a déclaré l’appareil conforme aux directives 93/68/CEE de l’Union Européenne suivantes : Par la présente, Samsung Electronics déclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes des directives suivantes : ML-1860 Series/ML-1865 Series: Directive basse tension (2006/95/CE) et Directive EMC (2004/108/CE). Vous pouvez consulter cette déclaration de conformité sur www.samsung.com/printer. Accédez à Assistance > téléchargements et entrez le nom de votre imprimante (MFP) pour parcourir cette déclaration. 1er janvier 1995 : directive 2006/95/EC du Conseil de l’UE, harmonisation des lois des États membres relatives aux équipements basse tension. 1er janvier 1996 : directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/CEE) du Conseil de l’UE, harmonisation des lois des États membres relatives à la compatibilité électromagnétique. 9 mars 1999 : directive 1999/5/CE relative à la conformité des équipements radios et des terminaux de télécommunications. Vous pouvez vous procurer le texte complet de la déclaration, décrivant en détail ces différentes directives et les normes correspondantes, auprès de votre distributeur Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Certification CE Certification de conformité à la Directive 1999/5/CE relative aux équipements radio et terminaux de télécommunications (FAX). Cet équipement Samsung a été auto-certifié par Samsung pour la connexion en Europe d’un terminal simple au réseau téléphonique commuté (RTPC) en conformité avec la Directive 1999/5/CE. Il a été prévu pour fonctionner sur le réseau téléphonique public commuté français et sur les autocommutateurs privés compatibles des pays européens : En cas de problème, il convient de contacter en premier lieu le laboratoire européen QA de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Ce produit a été testé en fonction des normes TBR21. Pour faciliter l’utilisation et la mise en œuvre de tout équipement terminal compatible avec ces normes, l’Institut européen des normes de télécommunications (ETSI) a édité un document consultatif (EG 201 121) contenant des remarques et des obligations supplémentaires destinées à assurer la compatibilité totale des terminaux TBR21 avec les réseaux. Ce produit a été conçu en fonction et dans le respect total de toutes les informations applicables contenues dans ce document.Informations légales_ 16 Chine uniquementA propos de ce mode d’emploi_ 17 A propos de ce mode d’emploi Ce mode d’emploi offre une description succincte de l’appareil, ainsi que des explications détaillées sur chaque étape de son fonctionnement. Il constitue une aide précieuse pour les novices et les utilisateurs professionnels quant à l’installation et l’utilisation correctes de l’appareil. • Lisez les informations de sécurité avant d’utiliser l’appareil. • Si vous rencontrez un problème d’utilisation de l’appareil, reportez-vous au chapitre de dépannage. (Voir « Dépannage » à la page 54.) • Les termes utilisés dans ce mode d’emploi sont expliqués dans le chapitre du glossaire. (Voir « Glossaire » à la page 71.) • Les illustrations de ce mode d’emploi peuvent être différentes de votre appareil en fonction de ses options ou du modèle. • Les procédures de ce mode d’emploi sont principalement basées sur Windows XP. Convention Certains termes sont utilisés de manière interchangeable dans ce mode d’emploi, comme ci-dessous : • « Document » est synonyme d’« original ». • « Papier » est synonyme de « support » ou de « support d’impression ». • « Appareil » se rapporte à une imprimante ou une imprimante multifonctions. Vous trouverez les conventions utilisées dans ce guide récapitulées dans le tableau ci-dessous : Convention Description Exemple Gras Pour les textes apparaissant à l’écran ou les noms des boutons sur l’appareil. Annuler Remarque Donne des informations ou des détails supplémentaires sur les fonctions et les fonctionnalités de l’appareil. Le format de la date peut varier d’un pays à l’autre. Mise en garde Informe les utilisateurs des risques éventuels de dommages mécaniques ou de dysfonctionnements de l’imprimante. Ne touchez pas la surface du tambour situé dans la cartouche de toner ou l’unité d’imagerie. Note de bas de page Donne des informations complémentaires sur certains mots ou certaines expressions. a. pages par minute (« Référence ») Vous renvoie à des informations complémentaires détaillées. (Voir « Recherche d’autres informations » à la page 18.)A propos de ce mode d’emploi_ 18 Recherche d’autres informations Les ressources suivantes vous proposent, soit à l’écran, soit sous forme imprimée, des informations concernant la configuration et l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nom du document Description Guide d’installation rapide Ce guide fournit des informations sur la configuration de l’appareil. Ce guide est fourni avec l’imprimante dans l’emballage. Mode d’emploi Ce guide fournit des instructions pas à pas pour utiliser toutes les fonctions de l’appareil, pour l’entretien et le dépannage de votre appareil, ainsi que pour le remplacement des consommables. Aide du pilote de l’appareil Cette aide vous fournit des informations sur le pilote d’impression et des instructions concernant la configuration des propriétés pour l’impression. (Voir « Utilisation de l’aide » à la page 40.) Site Web de Samsung Si vous avez accès à Internet, vous pouvez obtenir l’aide, le support, les pilotes de l’appareil, les manuels ou les informations de commande nécessaires sur le site Web Samsung, www.samsung.com/printer. Logiciels téléchargeables Vous pouvez télécharger des logiciels utiles à partir du site Web de Samsung. • Samsung AnyWeb Print : permet aux utilisateurs individuels de facilement capturer à l’écran la fenêtre du site Web dans Windows Internet Explorer, Windows Firefox et Macintosh Safari. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint)Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil_ 19 Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil Votre nouvel appareil est doté de fonctionnalités améliorant la qualité des documents que vous imprimez. Fonctions spéciales Impression rapide et de haute qualité • Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu’à une résolution effective de 1 200 x 1 200 points par pouce. • Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu’à 18 ppm sur du papier au format A4 et 19 ppm sur du papier au format Lettre. Prise en charge de plusieurs types de support d’impression • Le bac de 150 feuilles prend en charge le papier ordinaire en divers formats, le papier à en-tête, les enveloppes, les étiquettes, des supports de format personnalisé, des cartes postales, et du papier lourd. Création de documents professionnels • Impression de filigranes. Vous pouvez personnaliser vos documents avec des mots tels que « Confidentiel ». (Voir « Impression de filigranes » à la page 41.) • Impression d’affiches. Le texte et les images de chaque page de votre document sont agrandis et imprimés sur plusieurs feuilles de papier qui peuvent être collées ensemble pour former une affiche. (Voir « Impression d’affiches » à la page 40.) • Vous pouvez utiliser des formulaires préimprimés et des papiers à en-tête avec du papier ordinaire. (Voir « Utilisation de surimpressions » à la page 42.) Gain de temps et d’argent • Pour économiser du papier, vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille. (Voir « Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille » à la page 40.) • Cet appareil économise l’électricité en réduisant considérablement la consommation électrique lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé. • Pour économiser du papier, vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de chaque feuille (manuel). (Voir « Impression recto verso (manuelle) » à la page 41.) Impression sous différents environnements • Vous pouvez imprimer avec Windows, ainsi qu’avec des systèmes Linux et Mac OS. • Votre appareil est doté d’une interface USB.Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil_ 20 Fonctionnalités par modèle Cet appareil est conçu pour répondre à tous vos besoins documentaires – allant de l’impression, jusqu’à des solutions réseau avancées destinées à votre activité commerciale. Les fonctionnalités par modèle incluent : FONCTIONS ML-1860 Series ML-1865 Series USB 2.0 rapide ● ● Impression recto verso (manuelle) ● ● (●: Inclus) Introduction_ 21 1.Introduction Ce chapitre vous présente brièvement l’appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Description de l’appareil • Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande • Présentation du voyant d’état • Présentation des touches utiles Description de l’appareil Vue avant Selon le modèle, cette illustration peut différer de votre appareil. 1 Panneau de commande 5 Guide de longueur du papier 2 Couvercle supérieur 6 Guides de largeur du papier 3 Cartouche de toner 7 Support de sortie papier 4 Bac 8 Réceptacle de sortie (face à imprimer vers le bas)Introduction_ 22 Vue arrière Selon le modèle, cette illustration peut différer de votre appareil. 1 Port USB 2 Réceptacle du câble d’alimentation électriqueIntroduction_ 23 Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande Selon le modèle, ce panneau de commande peut différer de celui de votre appareil. 1 Bourrage Permet d’afficher l’état du bourrage papier (voir « Présentation du voyant d’état » à la page 24). 2 En ligne/Erreur Permet d’afficher l’état de l’appareil (voir « Présentation du voyant d’état » à la page 24). 3 Impression écran Imprime l’écran affiché sur le moniteur. (Voir « Bouton (Impression écran) » à la page 24.) 4 Alimentation Ce bouton permet de mettre l’appareil sous et hors tension. (Voir « Bouton (Alimentation) » à la page 25.)Introduction_ 24 Présentation du voyant d’état La couleur du voyant indique l’état actuel de l’appareil. Voyant Statut Description Bourrage ( ) Orange Allumé Un bourrage papier s’est produit. (Voir « Résolution des bourrages papier » à la page 55.) En ligne /Erreur ( ) Désactivé • L’appareil est déconnecté. Vert Allumé • L’appareil est en mode économie d’énergie. • L’appareil est en ligne et peut recevoir des données. Clignotant • Un clignotement lent de la LED indique que l’appareil reçoit des données de l’ordinateur. • Un clignotement rapide indique que l’appareil imprime des données. Rouge Allumé • Le capot est ouvert. Fermez le capot. • Le bac est vide. Insérez du papier dans le bac. • L’appareil s’est arrêté à la suite d’une erreur grave. • Votre système rencontre certains problèmes. Si ce problème se produit, contactez un technicien de maintenance. • Une cartouche de toner a pratiquement atteint son autonomie estimée.a a.L’autonomie estimée de la cartouche signifie l’autonomie attendue ou estimée de la cartouche de toner, ce qui indique la capacité moyenne d’impression. Elle est définie conformément à la norme ISO/IEC 19752. Le nombre de pages peut varier en fonction de l’environnement d’exploitation, du délai entre chaque impression, ainsi que du type et du format des supports. Un peu de toner peut rester dans la cartouche, même lorsque le voyant rouge est allumé et que l’imprimante s’arrête d’imprimer. . Il est recommandé de remplacer la cartouche de toner. (Voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 65.) Clignotant • Un léger dysfonctionnement est survenu et l’appareil est en attente jusqu’à ce qu’il soit corrigé. Dès que le problème est résolu, l’appareil reprend l’impression. • Il reste une petite quantité de toner dans la cartouche. L’autonomie estimée de la cartouchea est presque atteinte. Préparez une nouvelle cartouche en vue de son remplacement. Vous pouvez améliorer provisoirement la qualité d’impression en secouant la cartouche afin de répartir le toner résiduel (voir « Redistribution du toner » à la page 54). • L’appareil imprime en mode d’alimentation manuelle ou en mode recto-verso manuel. • L’appareil annule une tâche d’impression. Samsung ne recommande pas l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung, telles que les cartouches rechargées ou réusinées. Samsung ne peut garantir la qualité des cartouches de toner non-Samsung. Tout entretien ou réparation requis suite à l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung ne sera pas couvert par la garantie de l’appareil. Toutes les erreurs d’impression apparaissent dans État de l’imprimante (Windows) ou Smart Panel (Linux, Mac OS X). Si le problème persiste, contactez un technicien de maintenance. Présentation des touches utiles Bouton (Impression écran) En appuyant sur , vous pouvez : Fonction Description Imprimer la fenêtre active Appuyez sur le bouton et le voyant vert commence à clignoter. Quand le voyant vert s’arrête de clignoter, relâchez le bouton. Imprimer l’ensemble de l’écran de moniteur Appuyez sur le bouton et le voyant vert commence à clignoter. Relâchez le bouton pendant le clignotement. Impression d’une page de configuration En mode prêt, maintenez ce bouton enfoncé pendant environ 10 secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant vert clignote lentement, puis relâchez ce bouton. (Voir « Impression d’une page de configuration » à la page 26.) Rapport Infos conso En mode prêt, maintenez ce bouton enfoncé pendant 15 secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant vert clignote rapidement, puis relâchez ce bouton. Impression manuelle Appuyez sur cette touche chaque fois que vous chargez une feuille de papier dans le bac si vous avez sélectionné le mode Chargeur manuel comme Alimentation dans le pilote d’impression. • Impr. Écran est utilisable uniquement avec les systèmes d’exploitation Windows et Macintosh. • Lorsque vous imprimez la fenêtre active/l’ensemble de l’écran en utilisant la touche d’impression écran, l’appareil peut utiliser une plus grande quantité de toner, en fonction des éléments imprimés. • Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette fonction que si le programme Samsung Easy Printer Manager ou Smart Panel de l’appareil est installé.Introduction_ 25 Bouton (Alimentation) En appuyant sur , vous pouvez : Fonction Description Mise sous tension/hors tension Appuyez sur ce bouton pour mettre l’appareil sous tension ou hors tension. Annulation d’une impression Pendant l’impression, appuyez une fois sur ce bouton. La tâche d’impression est supprimée de l’appareil et de l’ordinateur, l’appareil retourne ensuite au mode prêt. Cela peut prendre un certain temps, selon la taille de l’impression. Si vous appuyez plus de 2 secondes sur ce bouton, l’appareil s’éteint. Mise en marche de l’appareil 1. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton du panneau de commande. Si vous souhaitez mettre l’appareil hors tension, appuyez sur ce bouton pendant environ 2 secondes.Prise en main_ 26 2.Prise en main Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de l’appareil connecté à un réseau et du logiciel. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Configuration du matériel • Impression d’une page de configuration • Logiciel fourni • Configuration requise • Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB • Partage local de l’appareil Configuration du matériel Ce chapitre décrit les étapes de configuration du matériel, comme elles sont présentées dans le Guide d’installation rapide. En premier lieu, veillez à lire le Guide d’installation rapide et effectuez les étapes suivantes : Emplacement 1. Choisissez un emplacement approprié. Installez votre copieur sur un support horizontal et stable en laissant suffisamment d’espace pour la circulation de l’air. Prévoyez de l’espace supplémentaire pour ouvrir le(s) capot(s) et le(s) bac(s). Cet emplacement doit être bien aéré et à l’abri de toute exposition directe à la lumière du soleil, ou de toute source de chaleur, de froid et d’humidité. Évitez d’installer votre appareil près du bord de votre plan de travail. L’impression est adaptée pour des zones avec une altitude inférieure à 1 000 m. Installez votre copieur sur un support horizontal et stable et ne le laissez pas s’incliner à plus de 2 mm. Sinon, la qualité d’impression peut être affectée. 2. Déballez l’appareil, puis contrôlez les éléments inclus. 3. Retirez la bande adhésive permettant de maintenir l’appareil en place. 4. Installez la cartouche de toner. 5. Chargez du papier. (Voir « Chargement de papier dans le bac » à la page 34.) 6. Vérifiez que les câbles sont correctement connectés à l’appareil. 7. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. (Voir « Mise en marche de l’appareil » à la page 25.) Cet appareil ne fonctionnera pas en cas de coupure de courant. Impression d’une page de configuration Imprimez une page de configuration afin de vous assurer que l’appareil fonctionne correctement. Pour imprimer une page de configuration : En mode prêt, appuyez sur la touche pendant environ 10 secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant vert clignote de façon lente, puis relâchez-la. Logiciel fourni Une fois votre appareil paramétré puis connecté à votre ordinateur, vous devez installer le logiciel de l’imprimante. Si vous utilisez un système d’exploitation Windows ou Macintosh, installez le logiciel depuis le CD fourni. Si vous utilisez Linux, téléchargez le logiciel du site Web de Samsung (www.samsung.com/printer) et installez-le. Le logiciel de l’appareil est parfois mis à jour pour des raisons telles que la sortie d’un nouveau système d’exploitation, etc. En cas de besoin, téléchargez la dernière version sur le site Web Samsung (www.samsung.com/printer). Système d’exploit ation Contenu Windows • Pilote d’impression : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes les fonctions de votre appareil. • Easy Printer Manager : ce programme combine les paramètres du périphérique ainsi que les environnements d’impression, les paramètres/actions et le lancement. Cela vous permet d’utiliser facilement votre appareil Samsung. • État de l’imprimante : ce programme contrôle l’état de l’appareil et vous en informe.Prise en main_ 27 Configuration requise Avant de commencer, assurez-vous que votre système répond aux conditions ci-dessous : Windows Votre appareil prend en charge les systèmes d’exploitation Windows suivants. SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATI ON Configuration (recommandée) Processeur RAM Espace disque disponible Windows® 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 Mo (128 Mo) 600 Mo Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 Mo (256 Mo) 1,5 Go Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 Mo (512 Mo) 1,25 Go à 2 Go Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 Mo (2 048 Mo) 10 Go Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 Mo (1 024 Mo) 15 Go Windows® 7 Processeur Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32 bits ou 64 bits ou supérieur 1 Go (2 Go) 16 Go • Prise en charge DirectX® 9 avec 128 Mo de mémoire (pour activer le thème Aero). • Lecteur de DVD-R/W Windows Server® 2008 R2 Processeurs Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) ou 1,4 GHz (x64) (2 GHz ou plus rapide) 512 Mo (2 048 Mo) 10 Go • Pour tous les systèmes d’exploitation Windows, Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieur doit être installé sur l’ordinateur. • Windows Terminal Services est compatible avec cet appareil. Macintosh SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITA TION Configuration (recommandée) Processeur RAM Espace disque disponible Mac OS X 10.3 à 10.4 • Processeurs Intel® • PowerPC G4/G5 • 128 Mo pour un Mac équipé d’un processeur PowerPC (512 Mo) • 512 Mo pour un Mac équipé d’un processeur Intel (1 Go) 1 Go Mac OS X 10.5 • Processeurs Intel® • Processeur PowerPC G4/G5 à 867 MHz ou plus rapide 512 Mo (1 Go) 1 Go Mac OS X 10.6 • Processeurs Intel® 1 Go (2 Go) 1 Go Linux Élément Configuration requise Système d’exploitation RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 SuSE Linux 10.0, 10.1 OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1 Ubuntu 5.04, 5.10, 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 Debian 4.0, 5.0 Processeur Pentium IV 2,4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 Mo (1 024 Mo) Espace disque disponible 1 Go (2 Go) Macintosh • Pilote d’impression : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes les fonctions de votre appareil. • Smart Panel : ce programme vous permet de surveiller l’état de l’appareil. Linux • Unified Linux Driver : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes les fonctions de votre appareil. • Smart Panel : ce programme vous permet de surveiller l’état de l’appareil et vous avertit lorsqu’un dysfonctionnement survient en cours d’impression. Système d’exploit ation ContenuPrise en main_ 28 Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB Un appareil local est un appareil directement connecté à votre ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Utilisez uniquement un câble USB ne dépassant pas 3 m. Windows Vous pouvez installer le logiciel d’impression à l’aide de la méthode standard ou personnalisée. Les étapes suivantes sont recommandées pour la plupart des utilisateurs qui utilisent un appareil directement raccordé à l’ordinateur. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à l’ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. Si la fenêtre « Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel détecté » s’affiche pendant la procédure d’installation, cliquez sur Annuler pour fermer la fenêtre. 2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. • Le CD du logiciel s’exécute automatiquement et la fenêtre d’accueil s’affiche à l’écran. • Si la fenêtre d’installation ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur Démarrer puis sur Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre qui représente votre lecteur de CD. Cliquez sur OK. • Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, Windows 7 ou Windows 2008 Server R2, cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Accessoires > Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre représentant votre lecteur CD-ROM, puis cliquez sur OK. • Si la fenêtre Exécution automatique s’affiche sous Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2, cliquez sur Exécuter Setup.exe dans le champ Installer or exécuter un programme et cliquez sur Continuer ou Oui dans les fenêtres Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur. 3. Sélectionnez Installer maintenant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. L’Installation avancée possède l’option Installation personnalisée. L’Installation personnalisée vous permet de sélectionner la connexion de l’appareil et de choisir les composants individuels à installer. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent. 4. Lisez le Contrat de licence et sélectionnez J’accepte les dispositions du contrat de licence. Ensuite, cliquez sur Suivant. Le logiciel recherche l’appareil. Si l’appareil n’est pas connecté à l’ordinateur, la fenêtre suivante s’affiche à l’écran. • Une fois l’appareil connecté, cliquez sur Suivant. • Vérifiez si vous souhaitez installer les logiciels sans connecter l’imprimante au réseau ou localement. - Cochez cette option pour installer le logiciel sans qu’un appareil soit connecté. Dans ce cas, la fenêtre d’impression d’une page de test est omise. • Chercher à nouveau - Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher un appareil connecté. - Lorsque vous cliquez sur ce bouton, la fenêtre d’avertissement concernant le pare-feu s’affiche : Désactivez le pare-feu et cliquez sur Chercher à nouveau. Pour le système d’exploitation Windows, cliquez sur Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Pare-feu Windows et désactivez cette option. Cliquez ensuite sur Suivant dans la fenêtre Avertissement concernant le pare-feu. Désactivez tout pare-feu tiers. Reportez-vous au manuel fourni avec le programme correspondant.Prise en main_ 29 • Aide - Le bouton Aide donne des informations détaillées sur la manière de raccorder l’appareil. 5. Les appareils détectés s’afficheront à l’écran. Sélectionnez celui que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si le logiciel n’a trouvé qu’un seul appareil, la fenêtre de confirmation s’affiche. 6. Une fois l’installation terminée, une fenêtre vous demandant d’imprimer une page de test apparaît. Si vous souhaitez imprimer un page de test, cliquez sur Imprimer une page de test. Sinon, contentez-vous de cliquer sur Suivant et passez à l’étape 8. 7. Si la page s’imprime correctement, cliquez sur Oui. Sinon, cliquez sur Non pour relancer l’impression. 8. Si vous désirez enregistrer votre appareil sur le site de Samsung, cliquez sur Inscription en ligne. 9. Cliquez sur Terminer. Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez comme suit pour le désinstaller puis le réinstaller. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote d’impression > Désinstaller. c) Sélectionnez l’option nécessaire et suivez les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. d) Après avoir désinstallé le pilote d’impression, réinstallez-le (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page 23). Macintosh Le logiciel livré avec votre appareil contient le fichier PPD vous permettant d’utiliser le pilote CUPS ou le pilote Apple LaserWriter (disponible uniquement si vous utilisez un appareil prenant en charge les pilotes PostScript) pour imprimer à partir d’un Macintosh. 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. 3. Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. 4. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. 5. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. 6. Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. 7. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. 8. Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer. 9. Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les termes du contrat de licence. 10.Sélectionnez Installation standard et cliquez sur Programme d’installation => Installer (10.4). L’option Installation standard est recommandée pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. Lorsque vous choisissez Installation personnalisée, vous pouvez installer les composants de votre choix. 11.Lorsqu’un message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît, cliquez sur Continuer. 12.Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter. 13.Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Utilitaires > Configuration d’imprimante. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 14.Cliquez sur Ajouter dans la Liste des imprimantes. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur l’icône « + » ; une fenêtre d’affichage apparaît. 15.Sous Mac OS X 10.3, sélectionnez l’onglet USB. • Sous Mac OS X 10.4, cliquez sur Navigateur par défaut et recherchez la connexion USB. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur Par défaut et recherchez la connexion USB. 16.Sous Mac OS X 10.3, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Modèle de l’imprimante et votre nom d’appareil dans Nom de modèle. • Sous Mac OS X 10.4, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Imprimer via et votre nom d’appareil dans Modèle. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Sélectionner un gestionnaire à utiliser..., puis le nom de votre imprimante dans Imprimer via. Votre appareil apparaît dans la Liste des imprimantes et est défini comme imprimante par défaut. 17.Cliquez sur Ajouter. Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, désinstallez-le et réinstallez-le. Pour Mac OS, procédez comme suit pour désinstaller le pilote. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. c) Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. d) Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. e) Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. f) Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. g) La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. h) Sélectionnez Désinstaller et cliquez sur Désinstaller. i) Lorsqu’un message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît, cliquez sur Continuer. j) Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter. Linux Vous devez télécharger les packages de logiciels Linux du site Web de Samsung pour installer le logiciel de l’imprimante. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour installer le logiciel. Installation du Unified Linux Driver 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Login et entrez le mot de passe du système. Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote de l’appareil. Si vous ne disposez pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur système.Prise en main_ 30 3. Sur le site de Samsung, téléchargez le package Unified Linux Driver et sauvegardez-le sur votre ordinateur. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Unified Linux Driver et extrayez-le. 5. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > autorun. 6. Lorsque l’écran de bienvenue s’affiche, cliquez sur Next. 7. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Finish. Pour des raisons pratiques, le programme d’installation a ajouté l’icône de bureau du configurateur de pilote unifié et le groupe de pilotes unifiés au menu système. Si vous rencontrez la moindre difficulté, consultez l’aide à l’écran, accessible via le menu système ou via les applications Windows du package du pilote, telles que Unified Driver Configurator. Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, désinstallez-le et réinstallez-le. Pour Linux, procédez comme suit pour désinstaller le pilote. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, tapez « root » dans le champ Login et saisissez le mot de passe système. Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root) pour désinstaller le pilote d’impression. Si vous ne disposez pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur système. c) Cliquez sur l’icône située en bas du bureau. Lorsque l’écran Terminal apparaît, tapez : [root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/ [root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh d) Cliquez sur Uninstall. e) Cliquez sur Next. f) Cliquez sur Finish. Installation de Smart Panel 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Login et entrez le mot de passe du système. Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote de l’appareil. Si vous ne disposez pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur système. 3. Sur le site Web Samsung, téléchargez le package Smart Panel sur votre ordinateur. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Smart Panel et extrayez-le. 5. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh. Partage local de l’appareil Procédez comme suit pour configurer les ordinateurs pour partager l’appareil localement. Si l’ordinateur hôte est directement connecté à l’appareil par un câble USB et est également connecté à l’environnement du réseau local, l’ordinateur client connecté au réseau local peut utiliser l’appareil partagé pour imprimer via l’ordinateur hôte. 1 Ordinateur hôte Ordinateur qui est directement connecté à l’appareil par un câble USB. 2 Ordinateurs clients Ordinateurs qui utilisent l’appareil partagé via l’ordinateur hôte. Windows Configuration d’un ordinateur hôte 1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page 28). 2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 3. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows XP/2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. • Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Périphériques et imprimantes. • Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’icône de l’imprimante. 5. Sous Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, sélectionnez Propriétés. Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez, dans les menus contextuels, les Propriétés de l’imprimante. Si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Propriétés de l’imprimante, vous pouvez sélectionner les autres pilotes d’impression reliés à l’imprimante sélectionnée. 6. Sélectionnez l’onglet Partage. 7. Cochez Modifier les options de partage. 8. Cochez la casePartager cette imprimante. 9. Renseignez le champ Nom de partage. Cliquez sur OK. Configuration d’un ordinateur client 1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page 28). 2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 3. Sélectionnez Tous les programmes > Accessoires > Explorateur Windows.Prise en main_ 31 4. Saisissez l’adresse IP de l’ordinateur hôte et appuyez sur Entrée sur votre clavier. Si l’ordinateur hôte exige un Nom d’utilisateur et un Mot de passe, indiquez l’ID d’utilisateur et le mot de passe du compte de l’ordinateur hôte. 5. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’icône de l’imprimante que vous souhaitez partager et sélectionnez Se connecter. 6. Si un message de configuration terminée apparaît, cliquez sur OK. 7. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer et démarrez l’impression. Macintosh Les étapes suivantes concernent Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6. Reportez-vous à l’aide Mac pour les autres versions du système d’exploitation. Configuration d’un ordinateur hôte 1. Installation du pilote d’impression. (Voir « Macintosh » à la page 29.) 2. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 3. Sélectionnez l’imprimante à partager dans la Liste des imprimantes. 4. Sélectionnez Partager cette imprimante. Configuration d’un ordinateur client 1. Installation du pilote d’impression. (Voir « Macintosh » à la page 29.) 2. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 3. Cliquez sur l’icône « + ». Une fenêtre indiquant le nom de votre imprimante partagée apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez votre appareil et cliquez sur Ajouter. Configuration de base_ 32 3.Configuration de base Une fois l’installation terminée, vous devez définir les paramètres par défaut de l’appareil. Consultez la section suivante si vous souhaitez définir ou modifier des valeurs. Ce chapitre vous guide pas-à-pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de l’appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut • Utiliser la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut Vous pouvez sélectionner le bac et le papier à utiliser par défaut pour les tâches d’impression. A partir de votre ordinateur Windows 1. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 2. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows XP/2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. • Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Périphériques et imprimantes. • Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur votre appareil. 4. Sous Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, cliquez sur Options d’impression. Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez, dans les menus contextuels, les Options d’impression. Si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Options d’impression, vous pouvez sélectionner les autres pilotes d’impression reliés à l’imprimante sélectionnée. 5. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier. 6. Sélectionnez le bac souhaité et les options correspondantes, notamment le format et le type de papier. 7. Appuyez sur OK. Si vous souhaitez utiliser du papier de format spécial comme du papier à facture, sélectionnez Modifier... dans l’onglet Papier de Options d’impression. (Voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 39.) Macintosh Macintosh ne prend pas en charge cette fonction. Les utilisateurs de Macintosh doivent changer manuellement le réglage par défaut chaque fois qu’ils veulent utiliser d’autres réglages. 1. Ouvrez une application Macintosh, puis sélectionnez le fichier à imprimer. 2. Ouvrez le menu Fichier et cliquez sur Imprimer. 3. Sélectionnez le volet Alimentation. 4. Définissez le bac approprié duquel vous souhaitez imprimer. 5. Sélectionnez le volet Papier. 6. Réglez le type de papier pour faire correspondre le papier inséré dans le bac avec celui voulu pour l’impression. 7. Cliquez sur Imprimer pour imprimer. Linux 1. Ouvrez Terminal Program. 2. Lorsque l’écran Terminal apparaît, tapez : [root@localhost root]# lpr 3. Sélectionnez Printer et cliquez sur Properties… 4. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancés. 5. Sélectionnez le bac (source) et les options correspondantes, notamment le format et le type de papier. 6. Appuyez sur OK. Utiliser la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil pendant un moment, vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité pour économiser de l’énergie. 1. Installez le pilote (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page 28). 2. Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager. 3. Sélectionnez Paramètres du périphérique > Appareil > Economie d’énergie. 4. Sélectionnez l’heure de votre choix dans la liste déroulante. 5. Cliquez sur Enreg.Supports et bacs_ 33 4.Supports et bacs Ce chapitre vous explique comment charger les supports d’impression dans votre appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Sélection du support d’impression • Modification du format du bac • Chargement de papier dans le bac • Impression sur supports spéciaux • Utilisation du support de sortie papier Sélection du support d’impression Vous pouvez imprimer sur différents supports, par exemple du papier ordinaire, des enveloppes, des étiquettes ou encore des transparents. N’utilisez que des supports d’impression compatibles avec l’appareil et dans le bac approprié. Recommandations pour sélectionner le support d’impression L’utilisation d’un support d’impression non conforme aux spécifications décrites dans le présent mode d’emploi peut provoquer des problèmes, notamment : • Qualité d’impression médiocre. • Des bourrages papier répétés. • Une usure prématurée de l’appareil. • Détérioration permanente de l’unité de chauffe, non couverte par la garantie. Certaines caractéristiques, comme le grammage, la composition, le grain et la teneur en humidité, constituent des facteurs importants qui ont une incidence sur les performances de l’imprimante et sur la qualité d’impression. Lorsque vous choisissez un support d’impression, tenez compte des points suivants : • Le type, le format et le grammage des supports d’impression pour votre appareil sont dans les spécifications sur les supports d’impression. (Voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 68.) • Résultat recherché : choisissez un support d’impression adapté à votre travail. • Luminosité : plus le support d’impression est blanc, plus les couleurs paraissent éclatantes. • Satinage : le satinage du papier améliore la netteté de l’impression. • Il arrive que certains supports d’impression répondant aux critères décrits dans cette section ne fournissent cependant pas des résultats satisfaisants. Cela peut être dû aux caractéristiques du papier, à une manipulation inadéquate, à des niveaux de température et d’hygrométrie excessifs ou à d’autres facteurs sur lesquels aucun contrôle ne peut être exercé. • Avant de faire l’acquisition de supports d’impression en grande quantité, vérifiez qu’ils répondent aux spécifications indiquées dans le présent document ainsi qu’à ce que vous souhaitez obtenir en sortie. • L’utilisation d’un support d’impression non conforme aux spécifications peut provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’imprimante, allant jusqu’à nécessiter l’intervention d’un technicien. Ce type d’intervention n’est pas couvert par la garantie ni par les contrats de maintenance. La quantité de papier placée dans le bac peut varier selon le type de support utilisé. (Voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 68.) • L’utilisation d’un support d’impression inflammable peut provoquer un incendie. • Utilisez le support d’impression prévu. (Voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 68.) L’utilisation d’un support inflammable ou la présence de corps étrangers laissés dans l'imprimante peut entraîner une surchauffe de l'unité et, dans de rares cas, provoquer un incendie. Formats de support pris en charge dans chaque mode Mode Format Type Alimentation Impression recto Pour plus d’informations sur le format de papier, reportez-vous à la section « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 68. Pour plus d’informations sur le type de papier, reportez-vous à la section « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 68. Bac Impression recto verso (manuelle)a a.75 à 90 g/m2